Quark XPress software Guide
Publicité
Publicité
A G U I D E T O Q U A R K X P R E S S p
The choice for publishing software worldwide.
FOR WINDOWS
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
A G U I D E T O Q U A R K X P R E S S p
The choice for publishing software worldwide.
Acknowledgments
Quark, Inc., acknowledges with gratitude the contribution of its Research and Development Team, who developed QuarkXPress ™ and QuarkXPress
Passport ™ Edition. Quark also thanks its alpha and beta testing sites for their help in testing QuarkXPress and QuarkXPress Passport Edition.
Quark recognizes the contribution of all the team members and departments involved in producing QuarkXPress and QuarkXPress Passport
Edition including: Product Management, Editorial, Art, Document
Production, Quality Assurance, Technical Support, and Localization.
This manual was produced entirely with QuarkXPress and Quark
Publishing System ™ (QPS ™ ). It was output using a high-resolution imagesetter. Copies were printed via offset lithography.
This manual may not, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or converted to any electronic or machinereadable form without prior written consent of Quark, Inc.
ii A Guide to QuarkXPress
A G U I D E T O Q U A R K X P R E S S p
The choice for publishing software worldwide.
©1998 Quark Technology Partnership as to the content and arrangement of this material.
All rights reserved.
©1986–1999 Quark Technology Partnership as to the technology. All rights reserved.
Trademark Information
Quark, QuarkCopyDesk, QuarkDispatch, QuarkXPress, QuarkXTensions, Quark Publishing
System, QPS, and XTensions are trademarks of Quark, Inc., Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off. Cool
Blends, QuarkConnect, QuarkEd, QuarkImmedia, QuarkLibraries, QuarkXPress Passport, and the Quark logo are trademarks of the Quark companies.
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Windows is a trademark of
Microsoft Corporation.
PANTONE ® Computer Video simulations may not match PANTONE-identified solid color standards. Use current PANTONE Color Reference Manuals for accurate color. All trademarks noted herein are either the property of Quark, Inc., Pantone, Inc. or their respective companies. “PANTONE Open Color Environment ™ (POCE ™ )” © Pantone, Inc. 1994.
Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of “PANTONE Open Color Environment (POCE)” and
Software which are licensed to Quark, Inc. to distribute for use only in combination with
QuarkXPress and QuarkXPress Passport. “PANTONE Open Color Environment (POCE)” shall not be copied onto another diskette or into memory unless as part of the execution of
QuarkXPress or QuarkXPress Passport.
FOCOLTONE and FOCOLTONE Colour System are registered trademarks of FOCOLTONE.
The concept, structure, and form of FOCOLTONE material and intellectual property are protected by patent and copyright law. Any reproduction in any form, in whole or in part, for private use or for sale, is strictly forbidden. Contact FOCOLTONE, Ltd. for specific patent information.
TRUMATCH, TRUMATCH Swatching System, and TRUMATCH System are trademarks of
TRUMATCH, Inc.
Color Data is produced under license from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc.
Toyo Ink Mfg. Co., Ltd. is the copyright owner of TOYO INK COLOR FINDER ™ SYSTEM
AND SOFTWARE which is licensed to Quark, Inc. to distribute for use only in connection with QuarkXPress. TOYO INK COLOR FINDER ™ SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE shall not be copied onto another diskette or into memory unless as part of the execution of QuarkXPress.
TOYO INK COLOR FINDER ™ SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE © TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD.,
1991. COLOR FINDER is in the process of registration as the registered trademark of Toyo
Ink Mfg. Co., Ltd. COLOR FINDER ™ computer video simulation used in the product may not match the COLOR FINDER ™ book, and additionally some printer color used in the product may also not match. Please use the COLOR FINDER ™ book to obtain the accurate color.
Quark, Inc. does not warrant, guarantee, or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of any color system included in Quark products. Video simulations may not match published color standards. Refer to current materials of the specific color company
(i.e., PANTONE, Inc.; FOCOLTONE, Ltd.; TRUMATCH, Inc.; TOYO INK, Mfg. Co., Ltd.; or other companies involved in the process of color reproduction) for accurate color samples.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
iv A Guide to QuarkXPress
Table of Contents
Introduction
Publishing with QuarkXPress
About this Book
About the Other Books
QuarkXPress Basics
The Interface
1 Tools
The Tool Palette
Tool Overview
Item Tool and Content Tool
Rotation Tool
Zoom Tool
Standard-Shape Text Box Tools
Standard-Shape Picture Box Tools
Straight Line Tools
Straight Text-Path Tools
Bézier Tools
Freehand Tools
Linking/Unlinking Tools
Page Grabber Hand Tool
2 Palettes
Displaying and Arranging Palettes
Measurements Palette
Document Layout Palette
Style Sheets Palette
Colors Palette
Trap Information Palette
Lists Palette
1.20
1.22
1.24
1.26
1.28
1.30
1.12
1.14
1.16
1.18
1.3
1.5
1.7
xv xix xxii xxiii xxviii
2.3
2.4
2.14
2.17
2.19
2.21
2.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress v
3 Menus and Dialog Boxes
File Menu
Edit Menu
Style Menu for Text
Style Menu for Pictures
Style Menu for Lines
Item Menu
Page Menu
View Menu
Utilities Menu
4 Customizing QuarkXPress
Setting Defaults
Setting Preferences
Kerning Tables, Tracking Tables, and
Hyphenation Exceptions
Saving XPress Preferences
Using XTensions
Managing Print Styles and PPDs
Understanding Nonmatching Preferences
5 Layout Tools
Arranging Documents
Navigating Documents
Changing Document Views
Using the Pasteboard
Using Rulers and Guides
Specifying Greeking
4.3
4.5
4.8
4.10
4.13
4.16
4.18
3.3
3.33
3.119
3.141
3.150
3.153
3.205
3.217
3.225
5.3
5.4
5.7
5.8
5.10
5.14
vi A Guide to QuarkXPress
Table of Contents
6 Document Basics
Creating New Documents
Opening Documents
Saving Documents
Saving Documents Automatically
Saving Revisions of Documents
Saving Documents as Templates
7 Box Basics
Creating Boxes
Resizing Boxes
Reshaping Boxes
Moving Boxes
Framing Boxes
Coloring Boxes
Merging and Splitting Boxes
Filling and Converting Boxes
Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness
8 Line Basics
Creating Lines
Resizing Lines
Reshaping Lines
Moving Lines
Applying Line Styles
9 Manipulating Items
Selecting Items
Moving, Reshaping, and Resizing Items
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Items
Deleting Items
7.20
7.29
7.32
7.38
7.40
7.3
7.8
7.10
7.18
8.3
8.7
8.10
8.16
8.21
6.8
6.10
6.12
6.3
6.5
6.6
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.7
A Guide to QuarkXPress vii
Undoing and Redoing
Locking and Unlocking Items
Controlling the Stacking Order of Items
Grouping Items
Duplicating and Repeating Items
Spacing and Aligning Items
Rotating and Skewing Items
10 Document Layout
Creating Master Pages
Formatting and Applying Master Pages
Creating Multipage Spreads
Numbering Pages and Sectioning Documents
Inserting, Deleting, and Moving Pages
Working with Text Chains
Creating “Continued” References
Working with Columns
Changing Page Size and Facing-Pages Status
Copying Items and Pages Between Documents
11 Text Basics
Editing Text
Importing and Exporting Text
Finding and Changing Text
Finding and Changing Attributes
Changing Fonts in a Document
Checking Spelling
Using Auxiliary Dictionaries
10.3
10.9
10.12
10.15
10.17
10.21
10.26
10.28
10.30
10.32
9.8
9.9
9.10
9.12
9.14
9.17
9.20
11.3
11.6
11.9
11.12
11.16
11.19
11.22
viii A Guide to QuarkXPress
Table of Contents
12 Typography
Confirming Typographic Preferences
Applying Character Attributes
Specifying Kerning and Tracking
Applying Paragraph Attributes
Specifying Alignment and Indents
Specifying Leading and Paragraph Spacing
Setting Tabs
Controlling Widow and Orphan Lines
Controlling Hyphenation and Justification
Working with Style Sheets
Positioning Text in Text Boxes
13 Graphics in Typography
Converting Text to Boxes
Running Text Around Items
Creating Text Paths
Creating Initial Caps
Specifying Anchored Rules
Anchoring Boxes and Lines in Text
14 Pictures
Understanding Picture File Formats
Importing Pictures
Exporting Pictures
Manipulating Pictures
Applying Contrast to Pictures
Applying Custom Halftone Screens to Pictures
Creating and Editing Clipping Paths
Listing and Updating Pictures
14.3
14.9
14.13
14.16
14.23
14.27
14.29
14.38
13.3
13.5
13.16
13.21
13.24
13.27
12.3
12.5
12.13
12.18
12.19
12.22
12.25
12.28
12.30
12.39
12.48
A Guide to QuarkXPress ix
15 Color
Specifying Spot Versus Process Colors
Specifying Matching System Colors
Creating and Editing Colors
Applying Color, Shade, and Blends
16 Trapping
Understanding Trapping
Trapping Guidelines
Specifying Default Trapping
Specifying Color-Specific Trapping
Specifying Item-Specific Trapping
Trapping EPS Pictures to Background Colors
Creating and Using a Rich Black
17 Libraries
Creating New Libraries
Opening Libraries
Working with Libraries
Working with Labels
Saving Libraries
18 Books
Creating New Books
Opening and Saving Books
Working with Chapters
Controlling Page Numbers
Synchronizing Chapters
Printing Chapters
Creating Tables of Contents and Indexes x A Guide to QuarkXPress
15.3
15.4
15.6
15.19
16.3
16.5
16.6
16.12
16.17
16.22
16.24
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.8
17.10
18.3
18.4
18.6
18.11
18.13
18.16
18.18
Table of Contents
19 Lists
Preparing Style Sheets for Lists
Specifying Lists
Displaying Lists
Updating Lists
Working with Lists in Books
20 Indexes
Installing the Index XTensions Software
Using the Index Palette
Specifying the Index Marker Color
Creating Index Entries
Creating Cross-References
Editing and Deleting Index Entries
Building Indexes
Editing Final Indexes
Nested Index Quick Reference
Run-in Index Quick Reference
21 Output
New Printing Features in QuarkXPress
Specifying Printing: The Print Dialog Box Tabs
Specifying Print Dialog Box Settings
Creating and Using Print Styles
Printing Color Separations
Specifying Setup for Imagesetters
Updating Picture Paths
Printing Odd-Sized Documents
Preparing Documents for Service Bureaus
Understanding DPI vs. LPI
20.3
20.4
20.9
20.10
20.14
20.17
20.19
20.22
20.24
20.25
19.3
19.4
19.7
19.9
19.11
21.3
21.4
21.17
21.19
21.21
21.22
21.24
21.25
21.29
21.30
A Guide to QuarkXPress xi
22 Technical Notes
An Introduction to Troubleshooting
The Document Environment
The Application Environment
The Operating System Environment
The PostScript Environment
23 QuarkXPress Passport Edition
QuarkXPress Passport Terms
Managing Language Files
Specifying the Program Language
Assigning Languages to Paragraphs
Checking Spelling
Hyphenation Methods
Saving Documents with Multiple Languages
24 Appendices
Error Messages
XPress Tags
Crossplatform Issues
25 Glossary
26 Index
23.3
23.4
23.5
23.6
23.7
23.9
23.11
22.3
22.4
22.6
22.8
22.10
24.3
24.27
24.40
xii A Guide to QuarkXPress
Introduction
Publishing with QuarkXPress
About this Book
About the Other Books
QuarkXPress Basics
The Interface xxii xxiii xv xix xxviii
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Introduction
From the simplest brochure to highly complex corporate communications, QuarkXPress encourages you to push the boundaries of professional publishing.
With superior color capabilities, exceptional picture handling, and precise typographic controls,
QuarkXPress increases your publishing power.
Create exciting and effective pieces that deliver your message with impact. It’s no wonder QuarkXPress is the leading choice among professional designers and corporate publishers worldwide.
Publishing with QuarkXPress
Publishing with QuarkXPress
QuarkXPress is electronic publishing software. You can use it to create any kind of publication, from a black-and-white business card to a multicolor magazine. The best way to integrate QuarkXPress into your production process depends on many factors, including the kind of publications you create, how they are printed, the other hardware and software you use for publishing, and the size and needs of your production staff. You will find that, no matter how you use QuarkXPress, the program’s ability to perform virtually all layout and production tasks will make the publishing process easier and will let those who use it do their jobs faster and more creatively.
Planning the project
Before you can begin creating a publication, you should answer a number of basic questions. First, what kind of publication will you create? In the case of a magazine or newspaper publishing organization, that decision has already been made. An advertising agency working with a corporate client, however, may have to do some information gathering before deciding what kind of publication will best meet a client’s needs.
Once you know what you’ll be publishing, you can address other important issues. What size will your publication be, and what colors will be used to create it? How will your publication be produced, printed, and distributed? And, what effect do budget considerations have on the publication planning process? Production can begin only after these issues have been addressed.
A Guide to QuarkXPress xv
Introduction
Designing the layout
A designer must make dozens of decisions when planning and designing a publication. Page size, margin widths, number of columns, the use of typefaces and type styles, and the use of color are just a few of the design issues that must be considered. QuarkXPress can help designers work through the planning process and develop a preliminary design. During production, the flexible layout environment of QuarkXPress lets designers rework and refine the preliminary design until they are satisfied.
Editing text
Because QuarkXPress includes powerful word processing capabilities, you can write directly in QuarkXPress. Basic editing features like cut, copy, paste, and delete, plus more sophisticated features such as drag-and-drop text, find/change, and spell checking let writers enter and edit text without having to purchase and learn a separate word processing program. For long publications, QuarkXPress provides features for tracking multiple documents, generating a table of contents, and creating an index. It is also possible to generate text using a word processing program, and then import the text directly into a QuarkXPress layout.
Creating and importing graphics
While writers and editors work on text, graphic artists create the illustrations, photographs, and other graphic elements that will accompany text and enhance the layout.
Using the drawing tools in QuarkXPress, designers can create boxes and lines with straight edges and Bézier curves. The flexible drawing tools let designers create charts, line drawings, and other design elements directly in QuarkXPress. You can also flow text along any shaped path, and even convert characters to boxes.
xvi A Guide to QuarkXPress
Publishing with QuarkXPress
With QuarkXPress, you can import many types of pictures, including line art, and grayscale or color digital images in various file formats (TIFF,
EPS, etc.). QuarkXPress has the ability to read or create a custom clipping path for an image. This lets you precisely control how much of an imported picture appears on the page. Once imported, you can use
QuarkXPress to separate color layouts into color separation plates.
Fine-tuning the layout
The final stage of production begins when all the editorial and design elements are ready to be combined and laid out on the page. No matter how you generate your text and graphics, the page layout features in
QuarkXPress let you build documents quickly.
You can create templates for often-used document layouts so that you can quickly place text and pictures onto formatted pages. Using paragraph style sheets, you can style text into headlines, subheads, body copy, and captions, making even complicated text formatting a simple, one-step process. With character style sheets, you can apply multiple formats to individual words in one step.
Typographic polishing can include everything from precise adjustments, to leading, kerning, line spacing, word spacing, and character spacing to fine-tuning hyphenation and line breaks. Text adjustments can be made locally or implemented on a global scale by editing kerning and tracking tables and using an increasingly sophisticated group of typographic preferences.
Imported pictures can be framed, rotated, skewed, sized, and cropped.
You can also add background color and shade to some imported picture formats. Sophisticated text runaround controls let you create elegant text wraps around pictures and items.
A Guide to QuarkXPress xvii
Introduction
The electronic publishing advantage
By taking advantage of the speed and precision offered by computer technology, you can use QuarkXPress to produce top-quality publications in less time and for less money than those who still use traditional manual techniques. The program’s ability to handle all facets of document production — from preliminary design through prepress production — makes it the ideal tool for any publishing situation. But QuarkXPress is more than a tool. It provides a work environment that gives you the freedom to be more creative and more productive.
Printing
The printing process actually begins with preliminary, rough copies in the early stages of production. You can print roughs with an inkjet or laser printer; you can use a color printer to proof copies of color publications.
Because text and pictures are easily edited, you can make changes at any time during the production process.
When it is time to print the final version, a laser printer may be adequate for your needs. But, if you are working on a sophisticated publication, you may be working with a service bureau or in-house production department to produce imagesetter output — including separation plates for color printing. Although QuarkXPress lets you control many prepress factors such as trapping, color separation, and screening, many users have their output provider set these specifications to ensure their job looks great when it comes off the press.
XTensions
If QuarkXPress does not already meet all your publishing needs, you can add custom features with XTensions software. Many XTensions software packages exist to fulfill specific functions that were not built into the application itself. xviii A Guide to QuarkXPress
About this Book
About this Book
A Guide to QuarkXPress is not meant to be read cover to cover. The book is designed so that you can look things up quickly, find out what you need to know, and get on with your work. However, if you need more comprehensive information about electronic publishing, that is also provided.
Where we’re coming from
This book assumes you are familiar with your computer and know how to:
• Launch an application
• Open, save, and close files
• Use menus, dialog boxes, and palettes
• Use the mouse, keyboard commands, and modifier keys
If you need help performing any of these tasks, consult the documentation resources (user/reference guides) provided with your computer.
Where to look
This book is split into two distinct sections: Introducing QuarkXPress, which describes the interface, and Using QuarkXPress, which offers steps for specific tasks. Both sections include concept blocks, which provide helpful background information about various features without interrupting tasks.
Introducing QuarkXPress
If you stumble on an unfamiliar command, or want more information about how to use a tool, check the first section of this book: Introducing
QuarkXPress. A black bar on the upper right corner of each two-page spread makes the section easy to find.
A Guide to QuarkXPress xix
Introduction
The Introducing section explains the QuarkXPress interface, including menus and dialog boxes, tools, palettes, and preferences. Commands are documented in menu order, starting with the first command in the File menu and ending with the last command in the Help menu.
Using QuarkXPress
Whenever you think to yourself, “I wonder how to do this …,” check the second section of this book, Using QuarkXPress. The detailed Table of
Contents at the beginning of this book, the condensed Table of Contents at the beginning of each chapter, and the Index should help you quickly find the information you need.
Each chapter in the Using section includes a series of specific tasks such as “Creating New Documents” or “Importing Pictures.” Instructions for accomplishing tasks are presented in steps or bullets. Tips from expert
QuarkXPress users are frequently included in the sidebars of these pages.
Concept blocks
If you need background information about publishing tasks or issues, look at the concept blocks throughout this book. Concept blocks, on shaded pages, are placed at the beginning or end of chapters. The first word in the title of a concept block is usually “Understanding,” for example: “Understanding Picture File Formats.” You can read concept blocks any time — they’re designed to round out your knowledge of electronic publishing without relating to a specific task.
What you’re looking at
This book uses various conventions (styles) to help you find information quickly:
Bold type style
The names of QuarkXPress menu commands, dialog boxes, and other controls are set in bold type. For example: “The Colors palette lets you apply colors to text, pictures, lines, and box backgrounds.” xx A Guide to QuarkXPress
About this Book
References and arrows
Whenever a feature is mentioned, a reference shows how to access that feature. For example: “The Save as dialog box (File menu) lets you save a copy of a document.” Arrows are used to represent the menu path to a feature. For example: “Choose File
& Print to display the Print dialog box.”
Icons
The names of tools and graphic buttons are followed by the appropriate icons. For example: “Select the Item tool e in the Tool palette” or
“Click the centered button
} in the Measurements palette.”
Charts
The Introducing QuarkXPress section charts the range of values that any control can accept. Charts follow this format:
Range
2 to 720 pt
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
The “Range” is expressed in the default measurement system. You can enter values in fields according to the “Measurement system” column. For example, measurements may be expressed in pixels, points, or any measurement system supported by QuarkXPress. (The example above shows a feature that accepts any supported measurement system.) The “Smallest increment” is often the smallest unit of measurement you can enter.
Notes and tips
R Notes provide helpful information about particular features.
S Tips provide extra information about particular features and general techniques for electronic publishing.
Choosing File
& Print.
A Guide to QuarkXPress xxi
Introduction
About the Other Books
The QuarkXPress box also contains a tutorial, A Preview to QuarkXPress, and various other cards and booklets.
A Preview to QuarkXPress
If you are new to electronic publishing applications, this tutorial is for you. The introduction familiarizes you with the QuarkXPress interface, and the exercises highlight the primary features of this version.
What’s New in QuarkXPress 4.0
If you are a proficient QuarkXPress user, start with this booklet. It provides a brief overview of all the new features in this version of QuarkXPress to get you started with your new software as quickly as possible.
Other pieces in the box
Your QuarkXPress box also includes installation and user registration instructions, service plan information, a book about QuarkXPress color features, a list of keyboard commands, and documentation for any latebreaking features.
xxii A Guide to QuarkXPress
QuarkXPress Basics
QuarkXPress Basics
To use QuarkXPress effectively, you need to understand the basic concepts.
Read this section if you are new to QuarkXPress or if you need a quick refresher. QuarkXPress uses concepts from traditional publishing to make its tools and layout environment more familiar.
Document environment
A work area called the pasteboard surrounds each page or spread. You use the pasteboard to store items temporarily or to experiment with something before you put it on a page. You can have individual pages or multipage spreads, and you can add, move, and delete pages as you work. Pages can be manipulated using the Document Layout palette, the Page menu, and in Thumbnails view.
Basic tools
QuarkXPress pages contain items. Items are text boxes, text paths, picture boxes, and lines; they are created in QuarkXPress and manipulated primarily with the Item tool e. Contents are text and pictures; they are manipulated primarily with the Content tool
E.
In general, you will use Item menu commands and the left half of the
Measurements palette when working with items. Likewise, you will use the Style menu and the right half of the Measurements palette when working with contents.
The controls in the Measurements palette change according to the current selection — whether it is a text box, picture box, line, text, or picture.
A Guide to QuarkXPress xxiii
Introduction
The box concept
In QuarkXPress, most things go into a box. Text is contained in text boxes and pictures are contained in picture boxes. Text can also be placed on a path. You have control over the size, shape, layering, color, and other properties of each box or path — and you have similar control over the text or pictures contained in them.
Working with text
A text box or a text path contains text. To create a text box or path, use a
Text Box tool
T or a Text Path tool ˜. Then use the Get Text command
(File menu) to import text files from other sources, including many popular word processors, databases, and spreadsheets. Or, create or select a text box with the Content tool
E and begin typing.
The Style menu provides formatting options such as fonts, type styles, and colors when you are working with text. High-end typographic controls are provided through a combination of menu items, keyboard commands, and preferences. To simplify text formatting, you can create paragraph and character style sheets (Edit
& Style Sheets) and apply them using a menu command, the Style Sheets palette, or keyboard commands.
To flow text from one text box to the next (or from one text path to the next), you can create an automatic chain of text. You can also use the
Linking u and Unlinking U tools to manually create custom text chains. To create an automatic text chain, check Automatic Text Box in the New Document dialog box (File
& New & Document).
Placing pictures
Picture is a general term for any type of graphic file in a QuarkXPress document. Just as text boxes contain text, picture boxes contain pictures.
To create a picture box, use any of the picture box creation tools p, x,
O, å, 7, ƒ, or ∂. Then, use the Get Picture command (File menu) to xxiv A Guide to QuarkXPress
QuarkXPress Basics import a copy of a picture file. You can also paste a picture that has been copied to the Clipboard into your document.
When you are working with pictures, the Style menu provides formatting choices like contrast, line screen, and colors. Picture formatting options are selectively available depending on the imported picture’s graphic file format.
Shapes and lines
To create a colored shape, create any shape picture box and apply a color to the background of the box. Background colors are applied to boxes using the Colors palette (View menu) or the Box tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu). The Shape and Merge controls (Item menu) let you create boxes with multiple contours and combine different boxes.
Create custom line styles using the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit menu); then use line creation tools to draw any shape lines. When a line is selected, the Modify dialog box and the Style menu provide options for formatting lines such as style, width, and arrowheads.
Electronic paste-up
Items can be moved, resized, reshaped, and layered with other items. You can drag items into place by aligning them with rulers and guides, or you can enter precise X and Y coordinates in the Measurements palette.
Each type of item has its own Modify dialog box (Item menu) that controls the size, position, background color, position of the contents, and more. To flow text around pictures, lines, and other items, use the
Runaround tab in the Modify dialog box. Other Item menu commands let you group items so they can be moved together, change the stacking order (layering) of items, duplicate items, and space selected items evenly.
A Guide to QuarkXPress xxv
Introduction
When you choose Item
& Modify, a dialog box specific to the selected item is displayed. The various tabs in the Modify dialog box provide access to different sets of controls.
Master pages and templates
Items (pictures and text) that need to go on many pages in your document can be placed on master pages. Applying a master page to a document page places the recurring items automatically. For example, if you are working on a newsletter, you might want a master page for the cover and nameplate, one for the inside spreads, and one with mailing information for the back page. Master pages can be created, edited, and applied using the Document Layout palette. Once you’ve established the formatting of a publication, you can save a document as a reusable template.
xxvi A Guide to QuarkXPress
QuarkXPress Basics
Customizing QuarkXPress
QuarkXPress has many options for customizing how you work, how your text flows, how your tools work, and more. These are called Prefer-
ences (Edit menu), and you can control preferences for your copy of
QuarkXPress (Application Preferences) or for individual documents
(Document Preferences).
In addition to preferences, you can create custom style sheets, colors, dashes and stripes, frames, lists (style-sheet generated lists), and H&Js
(hyphenation and justification specifications) for use in a document or template. All these specifications are created through commands in the Edit menu.
On to output
The Print dialog box (File menu) offers plenty of output options. For convenience, you can combine all these settings and save them as Print
Styles (Edit menu). When you print, QuarkXPress requires all the font and picture files used in the document. The Collect for Output (File menu) feature automatically gathers the document and pictures into one folder, and it produces a report of the document’s fonts, colors, trapping, and other settings — ready for output.
Power through palettes and keyboard commands
As you use QuarkXPress, you will develop your own working style.
Maybe you will prefer to use the mouse and menu commands for everything. Or, you may find that you prefer the quick access to features provided by palettes and extensive keyboard commands. In many cases,
QuarkXPress offers multiple ways to perform a given task.
A Guide to QuarkXPress xxvii
Introduction
The Interface
QuarkXPress menus and dialog boxes adhere to Microsoft Windows conventions — with a few enhancements. This section provides a quick look at standard interface controls, and highlights features unique to QuarkXPress.
If you are new to Windows, we recommend that you consult the documentation resources provided with your computer for complete information about using Windows. If you are new to QuarkXPress, we recommend that you perform the tutorial contained in A Preview to QuarkXPress.
Figure 1: Like other QuarkXPress menus, the File menu contains groups of related commands separated by lines.
QuarkXPress menus
The menu bar displays the nine menus available in QuarkXPress: File,
Edit, Style, Item, Page, View, Utilities, Window, and Help. The menu bar can also display QuarkXTensions. Each menu contains groups of related commands separated by lines. Many menu entries are followed by keyboard shortcuts using the CTRL , ALT , and SHIFT keys. See Figure 1.
Although the mouse serves as the primary means of accessing the menus, they can also be accessed using the keyboard. This is accomplished by pressing the ALT key and the underlined character within the menu name. For example, to access the File menu, press ALT + F . The functions within the menu are then activated by pressing the underlined character within the function name. For example, once the File menu is displayed, simply press P to print.
xxviii A Guide to QuarkXPress
The Interface
Context-sensitive menus
QuarkXPress menus are context-sensitive (menu items change according to the active item, the current situation, or the tool selected).
• The commands listed under a menu may change. For example, the
Style menu commands change depending on whether text, a picture, or a line is active.
• An individual menu command may change. For example, the Undo command (Edit menu) changes to reflect your last action (such as
Undo Typing or Undo Item Deletion).
• The availability of menu entries may change. For example, when a picture is selected, Save Text (File menu) is dimmed and not available.
• The availability of entire menus may change. For example, the Style menu entries for text are available only when a text box is active and the Content tool
E is selected.
Check mark
A check mark j in a menu indicates one of the following:
• A function has been performed. For example, a check mark is displayed next to Flip Vertical (Style menu) when the contents of a box are flipped vertically. See Figure 2.
• A feature is turned on. For example, a check mark next to Snap to
Guides (View menu) means that items in your document will snap to the guides you’ve created.
• A format from a list has been applied. For example, a check mark is displayed in the Font submenu (Style menu) next to the font applied to selected text. When multiple formats have been applied to a selection, check marks are displayed next to formats common to the entire selection only.
Figure 2: The check mark next to Flip
Vertical in the Style menu for text indicates that the contents of the active text box are flipped vertically.
A Guide to QuarkXPress xxix
Introduction
Figure 3: The Modify dialog box (Item menu) includes tabs, areas, fields, dropdown lists, check boxes, and buttons.
Figure 4: The Box tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu) includes a bordered
Blend area.
QuarkXPress dialog boxes
Choosing a menu entry followed by an ellipsis (…) displays a dialog box.
Dialog boxes contain related commands that allow you to specify exactly what you want to happen. The context-sensitive controls in QuarkXPress dialog boxes consist primarily of tabs, areas, fields, drop-down lists, radio
(option) buttons, check boxes, and buttons. See Figure 3.
Tabs
Many dialog boxes provide multiple functions through tabs. By clicking a tab icon, you can display different sets of controls. Pressing
CTRL
+
TAB takes you to the next tab in a dialog box.
Area
Related commands within a dialog box or tab are grouped into an
“area,” which is named and surrounded by a border. For example, the
Box tab in the Modify dialog box (Item menu) has a Blend area, which lets you specify a custom blend for a box. See Figure 4.
List
Some dialog boxes include lists of elements for you to select or edit. For example, the Colors dialog box (Edit menu) displays a list of colors. You can navigate through lists using the up and down arrow keys. Depending on the type of list, you may be able to multiple-select items to edit.
For example, in the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box
(Edit
& Preferences & Document), you can select multiple tools and edit common attributes. To select a group of continuous elements, click the first element then press the
SHIFT key while clicking the last element in the range. To select a group of noncontinuous elements, press the
CTRL key while clicking them.
xxx A Guide to QuarkXPress
The Interface
Field
A field is a rectangular box for entering a specific value. For example, in the Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu), you can enter the number of columns for an active text box in the Columns field. Fields have the following characteristics:
• You can enter measurements in any of the supported measurement systems, using the following abbreviations: inches or inches decimal ("), picas (p), points (pt), millimeters (mm), centimeters (cm), ciceros (c), and agates (ag).
• You only need to specify units of measure with an abbreviation when you are not using the default measurement system. For example, if your measurement preferences are set to inches, and you want to specify an indent in points, you can enter “6 pt” in the field. The measurement will be converted to inches the next time you open the dialog box.
• The default measurement system is specified in the Horizontal Mea-
sure and Vertical Measure drop-down lists in the General tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
• You can tab to highlight the next field in a dialog box and
SHIFT
+
TAB to highlight the previous field.
• You can perform math in fields using these operators: + (addition),
– (subtraction), * (multiplication), or / (division). For example, to double the width of a box, you can multiply the width by 2 by entering *2 to the right of the current value. You can even perform multiple operations — such as dividing a value by 4, then adding 2. See Figure 5.
R QuarkXPress performs multiplication and division first, followed by subtraction and addition, from left to right; you cannot use parentheses when performing math in fields. You can add and subtract specific measurements, such as 2".
Figure 5: You can perform math in
QuarkXPress fields. The formula in the
Width field multiplies the width of the box by 2, then adds 1 point. The formula in the Height field divides the height of the box by 2, then subtracts .25 inch.
A Guide to QuarkXPress xxxi
Introduction
Figure 6: A drop-down list offers a list of options, and often includes a field that accepts custom values. For example, the
Width drop-down list in the Frame tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu) includes a list of frame widths and a field.
Drop-down list
A drop-down list is a small menu within a dialog box or palette.
A drop-down list contains a list of options and may also have an editable field in which you can enter a custom value (such as a percentage) or a word (like a font name) rather than choosing an option from the list. See Figure 6.
Check box
A check box lets you turn options on and off . Checking a box may activate other controls; checking or unchecking a box may expand a dialog box to display more controls.
Radio (Option) button
A radio button lets you select from mutually exclusive options. For example, in the XTensions tab (Edit
& Preferences & Application), you can choose when to display the XTensions Manager dialog box by clicking a radio button.
Button
A button, shaped like this bold outline
, performs an action. If a button has a
, you can press
ENTER when in any field of a dialog box to activate the button, rather than clicking the button with the mouse. If a button has a dotted outline around the text , you can also press the
SPACE bar to activate the button. A button may also include a drop-down list that lets you choose a type of action. For example, the New button in the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit menu) lets you create either a character style sheet or a paragraph style sheet.
Many dialog boxes in QuarkXPress include an Apply button so you can preview your changes before closing the dialog box. For example, the
Apply button in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
& Formats) lets you see how your changes affect selected paragraphs. Some Apply buttons have an “Auto-apply” feature, which allows you to view all your changes as you enter them without having to click the Apply button again. This feature is activated by pressing the
CTRL key the first time you select Apply.
xxxii A Guide to QuarkXPress
The Interface
Open, Save as dialog boxes
These dialog boxes are used to open, import, export, or save files; they include standard Windows controls for navigating through disks and folders so you can locate files, or choose where you want to save files. See
Figure 7. Dialog boxes in QuarkXPress with open, save as navigational dialog box elements include: New Library, New Book, Open, Save as,
Get Text, Save Text, Append, Save Page as EPS, Collect for Output, and Auxiliary Dictionary.
Warning dialog box
A warning is a dialog box that alerts you when there is a problem and often suggests a solution. For example, if you enter an invalid value in a field, a warning notifies you and often provides an acceptable range of values for the field. The “Error Messages” section of Chapter 24, “Appendices” lists and explains the warnings you may encounter in QuarkXPress.
Figure 7: The Save as dialog box (File menu) is an example of an open, save as dialog box. It includes the Save in dropdown list, the Up One Level, Create
New Folder, List, and Details buttons, the File name field, drop-down lists for the file type and version, and buttons for
Save and Cancel.
A Guide to QuarkXPress xxxiii
A G U I D E T O Q U A R K X P R E S S
Introducing QuarkXPress
Tools
The Tool Palette
Tool Overview
Item Tool and Content Tool
Rotation Tool
Zoom Tool
Standard-Shape Text Box Tools
Standard-Shape Picture Box Tools
Straight Line Tools
1
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.12
1.14
1.16
1.18
1.20
1.22
Straight Text-Path Tools
Bézier Tools
Freehand Tools
Linking/Unlinking Tools
Page Grabber Hand Tool
1.24
1.26
1.28
1.30
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Tools
1
QuarkXPress preserves the cliché “you need the right tools to get the job done.” The Tool palette provides easy access to powerful tools that allow you to accomplish the most basic — and the most sophisticated — publishing tasks.
Tools let you create and place boxes, lines, pictures, and text; rotate items; link text boxes so text flows from page to page; and enlarge and reduce the document view. You can customize the Tool palette by rearranging and hiding tools, and you can customize many individual tools using preferences.
The Tool Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
The Tool Palette
Use the tools in the Tool palette to create and edit many elements in
QuarkXPress, including text boxes, picture boxes, lines, text paths, text, and pictures. The selected tool determines which commands in
QuarkXPress are available.
Displaying the Tool palette
To display the Tool palette, choose View
& Show Tools. To change the orientation of the palette from vertical to horizontal, double-click the title bar of the palette. The Tool palette remains open until you close it. To close the Tool palette, choose View
& Hide Tools or click the Close box.
Selecting a tool
To select a tool, click it. Press
CTRL
+
ALT
+
TAB to select the tool below the current tool; press
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
TAB to select the tool above the current tool.
Tool palette basics
Using the Tool palette
• Click a tool to select it.
• The selected tool determines which QuarkXPress commands are available.
• Press the
CTRL key while selecting a pop-out tool to add the tool to the Tool palette. Press the
CTRL key while clicking an unnecessary tool to remove it from the Tool palette.
• Double-click an item creation tool or the Zoom tool
Z to set its preferences.
Tool preferences
You can specify default settings for magnification and item creation through the Tools tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document). You can also access the Tools tab by doubleclicking an item creation tool or the Zoom tool
Z. Tool preferences apply to the active document; if no documents are open, tool preferences become application defaults.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.3
Tools
Tool palette and text box pop-out tools
Customizing the Tool palette
QuarkXPress lets you customize the Tool palette by rearranging, hiding, and adding tools. Many tools are condensed under “pop-outs” indicated by an arrow next to the tool.
• To display the pop-out tools, click and hold a tool that displays an arrow next to it.
• To use a pop-out tool, click and drag to select the tool. This replaces the tool in the main Tool palette.
• To add a tool to the main Tool palette, press the
CTRL key while you click and drag to select a new tool from a pop-out.
• To hide a tool, press the
CTRL key while you click that tool. At least one tool from each pop-out must remain on the palette.
R When you quit QuarkXPress, your current tool arrangement is saved in the XPress Preferences file. The next time you launch
QuarkXPress, your Tool palette will be just as you left it.
Keyboard commands
Use the following keyboard commands with the Tool palette and tools:
Tool choice Command
Show Tools
Hide Tools
Show/Hide individual tool
Select tool below current tool
F8
F8
CTRL
CTRL
+click
+
ALT
+
TAB
Select tool above current tool
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
TAB
Show Tool tab (Document Preferences) Double-click any creation tool
Use Page Grabber Hand
H
Use Zoom In pointer
M
Use Zoom Out pointer m
ALT
CTRL
CTRL
+space bar
+
ALT
+space bar
1.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Tool Overview Introducing QuarkXPress
Tool Overview
The basic function of each tool in the Tool palette is described below.
Complete information about how each tool works is covered in the remainder of this chapter.
Default Tool palette e Item tool
Selects, moves, resizes, and reshapes items (boxes, lines, text paths, and groups), and reshapes clipping and runaround paths.
E Content tool
Imports and edits text and pictures, and imitates most Item tool functionality.
R Rotation tool
Rotates items visually rather than numerically.
Z Zoom tool
Enlarges or reduces the document view.
T Text Box tool
Creates a rectangular text box; provides access to other text box tools. p, x, ç, ∂ Picture Box tools
Create a rectangle, rounded-corner, oval, or Bézier picture box; the Rectangle Picture Box tool p provides access to other picture box tools.
L Line tool
Creates straight lines of any angle; provides access to other line tools.
Default Tool palette
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.5
Tools
Tool palette with all the tools showing.
(
CTRL
+drag while selecting a pop-out tool to add it to the palette.) o Orthogonal Line tool
Creates straight lines that are perfectly horizontal or vertical.
Ò Line Text-Path tool
Creates a straight line, of any angle, that contains text; provides access to other text-path tools.
u Linking tool
Establishes text chains to flow text among text boxes.
U Unlinking tool
Breaks links among text boxes.
H Page Grabber Hand (not displayed in the palette; press
ALT key to use)
Scrolls a page in any direction.
Pop-out tools
Å, ı, Ç, Î, ´, Ô Text Box tools
Create a rounded-corner, concave-corner, beveled-corner, oval, Bézier, or freehand Bézier text box.
å, ∫, ƒ Picture Box tools
Create a concave-corner, beveled-corner, or freehand Bézier picture box.
∞, § Line tools
Create a Bézier line or freehand Bézier line.
, Â, ˜ Text-Path tools
Create an orthogonal, Bézier, or freehand Bézier text path.
1.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Tool and Content Tool Introducing QuarkXPress
Item Tool e and Content Tool E
When the Item tool e is selected, you can cut, copy, and paste picture boxes, lines, text paths, and groups. When the Content tool
E is selected, you can cut, copy, paste, clear, and edit text or pictures. The Item tool and the Content tool also have several characteristics common to both tools.
Use the Item and Content tools interchangeably to select and manipulate boxes, lines, and text paths — or to import and apply styles to pictures.
Arrow pointer x
When you select the Item or Content tool, the Arrow pointer x displays.
To select an item, click it with the Arrow pointer; to select multiple items, press the
SHIFT key while you click them.
Mover pointer e
When the Item tool is over the interior of a box, a straight line, or a
Bézier line whose bounding box is displayed, the Mover pointer e displays. You can temporarily access the Mover pointer e when the Content tool is selected by pressing the CTRL key. To move active items, click and drag with the Mover pointer e. To move active items horizontally or vertically only, press SHIFT with the Item tool e selected or CTRL + SHIFT with the Content tool
E selected before you click and drag.
When you drag, an outline of the item is displayed. To see the item and its contents when you drag, press the mouse button until the item flashes, and then start dragging.
S Tips
“Items” in QuarkXPress are
• Picture boxes
• Text boxes
• Lines
• Text paths
• Groups
• Multiple-selected items
Using the Item and Content tools
• Click items to select them for modification.
• Click and drag to move items.
• Drag bounding box handles to resize items. (Not available if
Item
& Edit & Shape is checked.)
• Drag points, curve handles, or segments to reshape a Bézier shape.
(An option must be checked in the
Item
& Edit submenu.)
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.7
Tools
Resizing handles
Delayed item dragging in action
Resizing pointer
#
When the Item or Content tool is over a bounding box handle on an active item, the Resizing pointer
# displays. To enlarge or reduce an item, click and drag the Resizing pointer.
You can scale the contents of a box or text path, while you resize the item itself, by pressing modifier keys as you drag a handle:
Resize item and scale contents Command
Scale
CTRL
+drag
Scale and constrain to square bounding box
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+drag
Scale and maintain proportions
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+drag
Point pointer
˝
When the Item or Content tool is over a point on a selected Bézier shape, the Point pointer
˝ displays. To select a point, click with the
Point pointer displayed.
• Press the SHIFT key while clicking to select multiple points.
• Double-click a point to select all the points in the shape. Triple-click to select all the points in a multiple-path item.
• To reshape, click and drag the Point pointer. If the point is deselected, you can press the SHIFT key while selecting and dragging to move the point in 45° increments only.
• Press the ALT key to change the Point pointer into a Point Deletion pointer v, and click to delete the point.
Curve Handle pointers
Ï, Ó
When the Item or Content tool is over a curve handle on a selected Bézier shape, one of the two Curve Handle pointers
Ï, Ó displays. To reshape a
1.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Tool and Content Tool Introducing QuarkXPress curve, click and drag with the Curve Handle pointer displayed. Curve handle angles determine the starting angles for curves. The distance of the curve handles from the point determines the extremity of the curve.
• Press the
SHIFT key while dragging a curve handle to move it in 45° increments from the point.
• Press the
CTRL
+
SHIFT keys while dragging a curve handle to change a smooth point to a corner point or vice versa.
• Press the
ALT key to change the Curve Handle pointer into the Retract
Curve Handle pointer v, and click to retract the curve handle.
Line Segment pointer
ˆ
When the Item or Content tool is over a line segment on a selected
Bézier shape, the Line Segment pointer
ˆ displays. To select a line segment (and the two points attached to it), click with the Line Segment pointer displayed.
• To reshape a Bézier item, click and drag the Line Segment pointer.
• Press the
SHIFT key while dragging a line segment to constrain both its curve handles to 45° increments.
• Press the
ALT key to change the Line Segment pointer into an Add Point pointer
V, and click to add a point.
Marquee o
When the Item or Content tool is selected, you can access a standard
Marquee pointer o for selecting multiple items. Click the mouse button outside the boundaries of any items, then drag the Marquee over items to select them. To add an item to or remove an item from a Marquee selection, press the
SHIFT key while you click it.
Reshaping a Bézier item
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.9
Tools
S Tips
“Contents” in QuarkXPress are
• Pictures
• Text
Using the Content tool
E
• Click a text box or text path to import or edit text.
• Click a picture box to import or edit a picture.
• Choose File
& Get Picture or
File
& Get Text to import a picture file or text file.
• Highlight text to edit it.
Features specific to the Item tool e
When the Item tool is selected, this additional functionality is available:
• Cut, copy, or paste active items entirely. (This is also possible when any other tool is selected except the Content tool
E
.)
• Move active items using arrow keys.
• Delete active Bézier points using the Delete key.
• Activate a group by selecting only one of its items.
• Change the line attributes of an active text path. (This is also possible when any other tool is selected except the Content tool
E
.)
Features specific to the Content tool
E
When the Content tool is selected, this additional functionality is available:
Cut, copy, paste, or delete contents
When the Content tool is selected, you can cut, copy, paste, or delete highlighted text or a picture in an active picture box. The box itself is unaffected.
Import and edit text
Use the Content tool to edit and apply attributes to existing text or import new text into an active text box or text path.
I-beam pointer
I
When the Content tool is over a selected text box or text path, the Ibeam pointer
I displays. Click the I-beam pointer to place the Text Insertion bar i where you want to begin importing or editing text. You cannot place the Text Insertion bar i below existing paragraphs within a text box. To highlight text, click and drag the I-beam pointer
I. You can cut, copy, clear, drag-and-drop, or apply Style menu attributes to highlighted text.
1.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Tool and Content Tool Introducing QuarkXPress
Text Insertion bar i
When you click the I-beam pointer
I in text, a blinking Text Insertion bar i displays. This is the text insertion point. When you create a new text box, the Text Insertion bar i displays automatically at the top of the box.
You can enter text at this point by typing or choosing File
&
Get Text.
You can delete text preceding this point by pressing the BACKSPACE key; you can delete text following this point by pressing the DELETE key. To reposition the Text Insertion bar i, use the arrow keys on the keyboard or click with the I-beam pointer
I.
Picture Mover pointer
H
When the Content tool is over an active picture box containing a picture, the Picture Mover pointer
H displays. To move the picture, click and drag the Picture Mover pointer in any direction, or use the arrow keys.
You can edit the picture using the Style menu, the Measurements palette, keyboard commands, or the Picture tab of the Modify dialog box (Item
&
Modify).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.11
Tools
S Tips
You can rotate items visually or numerically
• Use the Rotation tool to establish a point to rotate an item around, then rotate the item visually.
• Use the rotation field r in the
Measurements palette to rotate a box around its center numerically.
Using the Rotation tool
R
• Select an item to rotate it.
• Click the Rotation pointer
: to establish a rotation point, then drag the Arrowhead pointer
; to rotate the item.
• The Rotation tool reverts to the
Item tool e or the Content tool
E automatically.
Rotation Tool
R
Use the Rotation tool to rotate items visually around a point you establish.
Arrow pointer x
If no items are selected when you select the Rotation tool, the Arrow pointer x displays. To select an item to rotate, click it with the Arrow pointer.
Rotation pointer
:
When the Rotation tool is over an active item, the Rotation pointer
: displays. To establish a point for an item to rotate around, click and hold the Rotation pointer. The rotation point can be within or outside the active item.
Arrowhead pointer
;
After you establish the Rotation point, the Arrowhead pointer
; displays.
To rotate the item, drag the Arrowhead pointer in a circular motion. A line extends from the center of the rotation point to the Arrowhead pointer indicating the item’s angle of rotation.
You can rotate an item from –360° to +360°. As you drag the Arrowhead pointer
;, the r field in the Measurements palette displays the angle change. Press the
SHIFT key to constrain rotation to 45° increments.
Rotating boxes
When you rotate an item, an outline of the item is displayed. To see the item and its contents when you rotate, press the mouse button until the item flashes before you begin rotating.
1.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Rotation Tool Introducing QuarkXPress
Rotating straight lines
Straight lines defined in Endpoints Mode (Item
& Modify & Line tab) can only be rotated with the Rotation tool.
Reverting to the previous tool
After you rotate an item, the Rotation tool automatically reverts to the last tool selected (the Item tool e or Content tool E
). To prevent this, press the ALT key while selecting the Rotation tool. This allows you to experiment with the rotation of one item without having to reselect the tool each time you rotate.
The rotation point
:
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.13
Tools
S Tips
Using the Zoom tool
Z
• Click the Zoom In pointer
M to enlarge the document view.
• Click and drag the Zoom In
M or
Zoom Out m pointer to select an area to view.
• Press the
ALT key to access the
Zoom Out pointer m; click to reduce the document view.
• Each time you click the Zoom tool, the view is enlarged or reduced according to the Increment specified in the Tool tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document).
Zoom Tool
Z
Use the Zoom tool to change the view percent of a document or to view a specific area.
Zoom In pointer
M
When you select the Zoom tool, the Zoom In pointer
M displays. To enlarge the document view according to a specified interval, click the
Zoom In pointer. To enlarge a specific area of a document to fit in the document window, marquee the area.
Zoom Out pointer m
When the Zoom In pointer is displayed, press the ALT key to access the
Zoom Out pointer m. To reduce the document view, click the Zoom Out pointer. To view a specific area of a document, marquee an area larger than the existing view area by clicking and dragging. The area is reduced as necessary to fit the document window.
Zoom tool preferences
The Zoom tool enlarges or reduces the document view according to the
Minimum, Maximum, and Increment settings in the Tool tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
To quickly access the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box, double-click the Zoom tool.
1.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Zoom Tool Introducing QuarkXPress
The values in the Minimum and Maximum fields indicate the smallest and largest document views you can obtain by clicking the Zoom tool
(within the range allowed by the Display DPI Value you specified in the
Display tab of the Application Preferences dialog box [Edit
& Prefer- ences
& Application]). The value in the Increment field indicates the percent change in view for each mouse click of the Zoom In pointer
M or Zoom Out pointer m. The default value is 25%.
Accessing the Zoom tool
When any other tool is selected, you can access the Zoom In pointer
M by pressing the
CTRL
+
SPACEBAR keys. You can access the Zoom Out pointer m while any tool is selected by pressing the
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SPACEBAR keys.
Click and drag the mouse with the Zoom tool selected to zoom in on the area of the marquee.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.15
Tools
S Tips
Key concepts
• Text is imported or entered into text boxes.
• New text boxes have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document) for the selected text box tool.
Using the standard-shape text box tools
• Click and drag diagonally to create a new text box.
• Press the
SHIFT key while creating a text box to make it square or circular.
• The text box tools revert to the
Item tool e or the Content tool
E automatically.
Standard-Shape Text Box Tools
T, Å, ı, Ç, Î
Use the standard-shape text box tools to create text boxes (containers for text) in the following predefined shapes:
• Rectangle Text Box tool
T for rectangular or square text boxes.
• Rounded-corner Text Box tool
Å for rectangular text boxes with curved corners.
• Concave-corner Text Box tool ı for rectangular text boxes with corners rounded inward.
• Beveled-corner Text Box tool
Ç for rectangular text boxes with beveled corners.
• Oval Text Box tool
Î for oval or circular text boxes.
Crosshair pointer c
When a standard-shape text box tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer c displays. To create a standard-shape text box, click and drag the Crosshair pointer diagonally. To create a square or circular text box, press the
SHIFT key while you click and drag. (You can change the shape of a selected text box using the Shape submenu of the Item menu.)
Size and placement
As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer c, the X, Y, W, and H fields in the Measurements palette display the coordinates, width, and height of the text box. If the Rulers are showing in the document window (View
&
Show Rulers), small lines on the ruler indicate the starting position of the
Crosshair pointer and the width and height of the text box.
1.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Standard-Shape Text Box Tools Introducing QuarkXPress
Text box tool preferences
New text boxes have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Docu-
ment). To quickly access the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box, double-click a text box tool.
Use the Modify button in the Tool tab to access a dialog box that allows you to specify attributes for new text boxes such as the background color, number of columns, frame, and runaround. You can also specify
Corner Radius (the amount of space taken up by the corners) for rounded-corner, concave-corner, and beveled-corner text boxes.
Reverting to the previous tool
After you create a text box, the text box tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool e or Content tool E). To prevent this, press the ALT key while selecting a text box tool. This allows you to draw several text boxes without selecting the tool again.
Click and drag the mouse in any direction to create a text box using a standardshape text box tool.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.17
Tools
S Tips
Key concepts
• Pictures are imported into picture boxes; you cannot have a picture in a document without a box.
• New picture boxes have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document) for the selected picture box tool.
Using the standard-shape picture box tools
• Click and drag diagonally to create a new picture box.
• Press the
SHIFT key while creating a picture box to make it square or circular.
• The picture box tools revert to the
Item tool e or the Content tool
E automatically.
Standard-Shape Picture Box Tools p, x, ç, å, ∫
Use the standard-shape picture box tools to create picture boxes (containers for pictures) in the following predefined shapes:
• Rectangle Picture Box tool p for rectangular or square picture boxes.
• Rounded-corner Picture Box tool x for rectangular picture boxes with curved corners.
• Concave-corner Picture Box tool
å for rectangular picture boxes with corners rounded inward.
• Beveled-corner Picture Box tool
∫ for rectangular picture boxes with beveled corners.
• Oval Picture Box tool
ç for oval or circular picture boxes.
Crosshair pointer c
When a standard-shape picture box tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer c displays. To create a standard-shape picture box, click and drag the Crosshair pointer diagonally. To create a square or circular picture box, press the
SHIFT key while you click and drag. (You can change the shape of a selected picture box using the Shape submenu of the
Item menu.)
Size and placement
As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer c, the X, Y, W, and H fields in the Measurements palette display the coordinates, width, and height of the picture box. If the Rulers are showing in the document window (View
& Show Rulers), small lines on the ruler indicate the starting position of the Crosshair pointer and the width and height of the picture box.
1.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Standard-Shape Picture Box Tools Introducing QuarkXPress
Picture box tool preferences
New picture boxes have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Docu-
ment). To quickly access the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box, double-click any picture box tool.
Use the Modify button in the Tool tab to access a dialog box that allows you to specify attributes for new picture boxes such as the background color, picture angle, frame, and runaround. You can also specify Corner
Radius (the amount of space taken up by the corners) for roundedcorner, concave-corner, and beveled-corner picture boxes.
Reverting to the previous tool
After you create a picture box, the picture box tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool e or Content tool E ). To prevent this, press the ALT key while selecting a picture box tool. This allows you to draw several picture boxes without selecting the tool again.
Click and drag the mouse in any direction to create a picture box using a standardshape picture box tool.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.19
Tools
S Tips
Key concepts
• Lines can be positioned, sized, and rotated in several modes: Endpoints, First Point, Midpoint, and
Last Point.
• New lines have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document) for the selected line tool.
Using the straight line tools
• Click and drag to create a line with either of the straight line tools.
• Use the Orthogonal Line tool o to create horizontal and vertical lines.
• Use the Line tool
L to create diagonal lines.
Straight Line Tools o
,
L
Use the straight line tools to create horizontal, vertical, and diagonal lines:
• Orthogonal Line tool o for horizontal and vertical lines.
• Line tool
L for diagonal lines.
Crosshair pointer c
When either straight line tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer c displays. To create a straight line, click and drag the Crosshair pointer. To constrain lines created with the Line tool
L to any 45˚ increment (0˚,
45˚, 90˚, etc.), press the
SHIFT key while you click and drag.
Size and position
As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer c, the fields in the Measure-
ments palette change to reflect the position, length, and/or angle of the line. If the Rulers are showing in the document window (View
& Show
Rulers), small lines on the ruler indicate the starting and ending position of the Crosshair pointer.
QuarkXPress reports the position of straight lines according to their End-
points, First Point, Midpoint, or Last Point. Fields in the Measurements palette change to report the appropriate values for the selected line mode.
The first point is the endpoint you draw from; the last point is the endpoint created when you release the mouse button.
Line tool preferences
New lines have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document). To quickly access the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box, double-click one of the line tools.
1.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Straight Line Tools Introducing QuarkXPress
Use the Modify button in the Tool tab to access a dialog box that allows you to specify attributes for new lines such as the style, width, color, shade, and runaround.
Reverting to the previous tool
After you create a line, the line tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool e or Content tool E ). To prevent this, press the
ALT key while selecting a line tool. This allows you to draw several lines without selecting the tool again.
Click and drag the mouse to create a straight line using the Line tool or the
Orthogonal Line tool.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.21
Tools
S Tips
Key concepts
• Text is imported or entered onto text paths.
• Text paths can be positioned, sized, and rotated in several modes: Endpoints, First Point,
Midpoint, and Last Point.
• New text paths have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document) for the selected textpath tool.
Using the straight text-path tools
• Click and drag to create a text path with either of the straight text-path tools.
• Use the Orthogonal Text-Path tool
to create horizontal and vertical text paths.
• Use the Line Text-Path tool
Ò to create diagonal text paths.
Straight Text-Path Tools
,
Ò
Use the straight text-path tools to create horizontal, vertical, and diagonal text paths (lines that support text):
• Orthogonal Text-Path tool
for horizontal and vertical text paths.
• Line Text-Path tool
Ò for diagonal text paths.
Crosshair pointer c
When either straight text-path tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer c displays. To create a straight text path, click and drag the Crosshair pointer. To constrain text paths created with the Line Text-Path tool to any 45˚ increment (0˚, 45˚, 90˚, etc.), press the
SHIFT key while you click and drag.
Size and position
As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer c, the fields in the Measure-
ments palette change to reflect the position, length, and/or angle of the text path. If the Rulers are showing in the document window (View
&
Show Rulers), small lines on the ruler indicate the starting and ending position of the Crosshair pointer.
QuarkXPress reports the position of straight text paths according to their
Endpoints, First Point, Midpoint, or Last Point. Fields in the Measure-
ments palette change to report the appropriate values for the selected line mode. The first point is the endpoint you draw from; the last point is the endpoint created when you release the mouse button.
1.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Straight Text-Path Tools Introducing QuarkXPress
Text-path tool preferences
New text paths have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Docu-
ment). To quickly access the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box, double-click one of the text-path tools.
Use the Modify button in the Tool tab to access a dialog box that allows you to specify attributes for new text paths such as the style, width, color, shade, and runaround for the line, or the alignment and orientation of text in relation to the line.
Reverting to the previous tool
After you create a text path, the text-path tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool e or Content tool E ). To prevent this, press the ALT key while selecting a text-path tool. This allows you to draw several text paths without selecting the tool again.
Click and drag the mouse to create a straight text path using the Line Text-
Path tool or the Orthogonal Text-Path tool.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.23
Tools
S Tips
Key concepts
• Bézier items can be text boxes, picture boxes, lines, or text paths depending on which Bézier tool you select.
• Bézier tools create shapes point by point. To create a Bézier item by simply dragging the mouse, you can use a freehand tool.
• New Bézier items have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document) for the selected tool.
Using the Bézier tools
• Click to create corner points; click and drag to create smooth points.
Successive clicking produces straight segments only.
• To reshape a Bézier item before it is completed, press the
CTRL key.
To reshape a Bézier item after it is completed, use the Item or Content tool and make sure Item
&
Edit
& Shape is checked.
Bézier Tools
´, ∂, ∞, Â
Use the Bézier tools to create text boxes, picture boxes, lines, and text paths of any desired shape, with point-by-point control.
Crosshair pointer c
When a Bézier tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer c displays. To create a Bézier item:
• Click to establish the first corner point in the shape, or click and drag to establish the first smooth point in the shape. If you click and drag, the curve handles of the smooth point are exposed.
• Release the mouse button and repeat the above step to establish a second point, a third point, and so on. Segments display between each two points. Click when you want a corner point; click and drag when you want a smooth point.
• When curve handles display, their angles determine the starting angles for curves. The distance of the curve handles from the point determines the extremity of a curve.
• To access the Item tool e to reshape the item before it is completed, press the
CTRL key. While the
CTRL key is pressed, the Crosshair pointer changes to the Arrow pointer x, or to one of the Bézier reshaping pointers (
˝, Ï, Ó, ˆ) when placed over a point, segment, or curve handle.
See “Item Tool e and Content Tool E” earlier in this section for descriptions of the Bézier reshaping pointers.
• Complete the new shape by double-clicking to create the last point or by selecting a new tool in the Tool palette. If you have one of the Bézier box tools selected (
´, ∂), you can also complete the shape by clicking the first point in the box. The Crosshair pointer changes to the Close Box pointer
V when the pointer is positioned over the first point in a box.
1.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Bézier Tools Introducing QuarkXPress
Placement
As you click and drag using any of the Bézier pointers, the X and Y fields in the Measurements palette display the pointer’s coordinates. If the
Rulers are showing in the document window (View
& Show Rulers), small lines on the ruler indicate the position of the pointer.
Bézier tool preferences
New Bézier items have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
To quickly access the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box, double-click a Bézier tool.
Use the Modify button in the Tool tab to access a dialog box that allows you to specify attributes for the new Bézier item.
Reverting to the previous tool
After you create a Bézier item, the Bézier tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool e or Content tool E ). To prevent this, press the
ALT key while selecting a Bézier tool. This allows you to draw several Bézier items without selecting the tool again.
Using a Bézier tool, click to create each corner point; click and drag to create smooth points that form seamless transitions between two curved segments.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.25
Tools
S Tips
Key concepts
• Freehand items can be text boxes, picture boxes, lines, or text paths depending on which freehand tool you select.
• Freehand tools create Bézier items automatically according to how you drag the mouse.
• New Bézier items have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document) for the selected tool.
Using the freehand tools
• Drag the mouse to describe the
Bézier shape you want
QuarkXPress to create.
• To reshape a Bézier item after it is completed, use the Item or Content tool and make sure Item
&
Edit
& Shape is checked.
Freehand Tools
Ô, ƒ, §, ˜
Use the freehand tools to quickly create Bézier text boxes, picture boxes, lines, and text paths of any shape you draw.
Crosshair pointer c
When a freehand tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer c displays. Click and drag the mouse to draw the shape you want to create.
Release the mouse button to complete the shape. If you are using one of the freehand box tools (
Ô, ƒ), the Close Box pointer V is displayed when you drag the Crosshair pointer over the starting point.
To edit the Bézier curves of a completed freehand shape, use the Item tool e or Content tool E, and make sure Item & Edit & Shape is checked.
Placement
As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer c, the X and Y fields in the
Measurements palette display the pointer’s coordinates. If the Rulers are showing in the document window (View
& Show Rulers), small lines on the ruler indicate the position of the Crosshair pointer.
Freehand tool preferences
New freehand Bézier items have the attributes specified in the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document). To quickly access the Tool tab of the Document Prefer-
ences dialog box, double-click a freehand tool.
Use the Modify button in the Tool tab to access a dialog box that allows you to specify attributes for new freehand items such as the background color, picture angle, frame, and runaround.
1.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Freehand Tools Introducing QuarkXPress
Reverting to the previous tool
After you create a freehand Bézier item, the freehand tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool e or the Content tool
E ). To prevent this, press the
ALT key while selecting a freehand tool. This allows you to draw several freehand Bézier items without selecting the tool again.
Using a freehand tool, drag the mouse to describe the Bézier shape you want
QuarkXPress to create.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.27
Tools
S Tips
Key concepts
• A text chain, or “story,” is created when you manually link several text boxes.
• The Automatic Text Box feature and master pages can be used to create an automatic text chain, without manually linking boxes.
Using the Linking tool u
• Click the first text box in a chain to display a marquee around it.
• Click on the second text box in a chain to establish a link.
Linking/Unlinking Tools u, U
Use the Linking tool to link text boxes so that text flows from box to box.
This text is referred to as a “chain” or “story.” Use the Unlinking tool to break the links between text boxes.
Arrow pointer x
When you first select the Linking tool, the Arrow pointer x displays. To select the first text box in a chain, click it with the Arrow pointer. The text box displays a marquee .
Linking tool
/
When the first text box in the chain is selected and displays a marquee, the Linking pointer
/ displays. To link the box to another box, click on a second box. Text flows through the boxes in the order in which you link them. When the Linking tool is selected, links for the selected text boxes are shown with arrows.
Reverting to the previous tool
After you link two boxes, the Linking tool automatically reverts to the last tool selected (the Item tool e or Content tool E ). To prevent this, press the
ALT key while selecting the Linking tool. This allows you to link multiple boxes without selecting the tool again.
Arrow pointer x
When you first select the Unlinking tool, the Arrow pointer x displays.
Click any text box within a text chain; the text box links are shown with arrows.
1.28
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Linking/Unlinking Tools Introducing QuarkXPress
Unlinking tool
?
When a text box within a text chain is selected, the Unlinking pointer
? displays. To break links between boxes, click the arrowhead
(next box) or the tailfeathers (previous box) on the linking arrows.
To remove a text box from a text chain, and reroute the links around it, press the SHIFT key while you click the box with the Unlinking tool.
Reverting to the previous tool
After you break the link between two boxes, the Unlinking tool automatically reverts to the last tool selected (the Item tool e or Content tool
E). To prevent this, press the
ALT key while selecting the Unlinking tool. This allows you to break the link between several boxes without selecting the tool again.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 1.29
Tools
S Tips
Using the Page Grabber Hand tool
H
• Press the
ALT key with any tool selected except the Zoom tool
Z for temporary access to the Page
Grabber Hand.
• Live Scroll is always active when you use the Page Grabber Hand.
Page Grabber Hand Tool
H
Use the Page Grabber Hand to scroll a page in any direction. The Page
Grabber Hand allows you to scroll with more precision than the scroll bars, and to scroll horizontally and vertically at the same time.
Access from any tool
You can access the Page Grabber Hand by pressing the
ALT key while any tool except the Zoom tool
Z is selected. Click and drag the mouse in any direction to move around within a page, spread, or document.
When you release the
ALT key, the previous tool is selected again.
Live Scroll
The Page Grabber Hand is always in Live Scroll mode, regardless of the
Live Scroll setting in the Interactive tab of the Application Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Application). This means the document view is updated as you scroll, rather than redrawing after you stop.
Speed Scroll
Scrolling with the Page Grabber Hand is affected by the Speed Scroll setting in the Interactive tab of the Application Preferences dialog box
(Edit
& Preferences & Application). Speed Scroll accelerates scrolling by temporarily greeking pictures and blends; when you stop scrolling, the page elements redraw completely.
1.30
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Palettes
Displaying and Arranging Palettes
2
2.3
Measurements Palette 2.4
Document Layout Palette 2.14
Style Sheets Palette 2.17
Colors Palette 2.19
Trap Information Palette 2.21
Lists Palette 2.26
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Palettes
In addition to the Tool palette described in
2
Chapter 1, “Tools,” several other palettes give you complete control over page design, character formatting, color, trapping, and long-document publishing features.
Options on some palettes change depending on the particular tool selected in the Tool palette. Each palette may be hidden or displayed, and placed anywhere on your monitor, allowing you to fully customize your workspace.
Displaying and Arranging Palettes Introducing QuarkXPress
Displaying and Arranging Palettes
The primary palettes in QuarkXPress include the Tool palette, the
Measurements palette, the Document Layout palette, the Style Sheets palette, the Colors palette, the Trap Information palette, and the Lists palette. Each of these palettes may be displayed using the View menu. For more information about the Books, Libraries, and Index palettes, see their respective chapters.
Opening palettes
To open or display a palette, choose View
& Show [name of palette].
Palettes always display in front of other windows, and remain open until you close them.
Closing palettes
You can hide palettes when you do not need them. To close an open palette, click the close box in the upper right corner of the palette, or choose View
& Hide [name of palette].
Moving palettes
Palettes are especially convenient because they can be placed anywhere on your screen, allowing you to customize your workspace. Click and drag the bar at the top of a palette to reposition it.
Resizing palettes
You can resize the Document Layout, Style Sheets, Colors, and Lists palettes by dragging any edge of the palette with the resize arrow.
Show and hide palettes using the commands in the View menu.
Click the close box to close a palette
Resize the Colors palette by dragging the edge of the box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.3
Palettes
Measurements Palette
The Measurements palette (View
& Show Measurements) lets you quickly edit several commonly used item specifications without choosing Item
&
Modify or using the Style menu. Options on the Measurements palette change to reflect the currently selected tool or item. The left side of the palette indicates an item’s position; the right side indicates an item’s content.
Overview
You can edit any of the values in the Measurements palette (F9).
Changes made to values on the left side of the palette are applied by pressing ENTER or exiting the palette; changes made to numerical values on the right side of the palette are applied by moving to a different field or exiting the palette. Clicking a button or choosing an item from a drop-down list on the right side of the Measurements palette applies the change immediately.
Measurements displayed in the Measurements palette are updated when you create, move, resize, or modify items, create or move guides, or reposition the ruler origin.
Click on the Measurements palette to enter it, or press CTRL + ALT + M to access the first field in the palette. Press the TAB key to highlight the next field, or press SHIFT + TAB to highlight the previous field. Click on the document, or press the ENTER key to apply changes made in the Mea-
surements palette. Press ESCAPE to exit the Measurements palette without applying changes.
The fields displayed in the measurements palette correspond to fields that can be accessed by choosing Item
& Modify. Character attributes and paragraph formats are described in “Style Menu for Text” in
Chapter 3, “Menus and Dialog Boxes.”
2.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Measurements Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
Measurements palette for text boxes
Item information
When a text box is selected in the document window, the left side of the
Measurements palette lets you view and edit the text box item information. See Chapter 10, “Document Layout” and Chapter 12, “Typography.”
• The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the text box.
• The W and H fields indicate the width and height of the text box.
• The r field indicates the text box’s angle of rotation.
• The Cols field indicates the number of columns in the text box.
Content information
When the Content tool
E is selected, the right side of the Measure-
ments palette lets you edit the contents of the text box.
• The
( button lets you flip the contents of the text box along a horizontal axis.
• The
) button lets you flip the contents of the text box along a vertical axis.
• The n field indicates paragraph leading. Enter a value in the field or click the arrows to adjust leading. See “Specifying Leading and Paragraph
Spacing” in Chapter 12, “Typography.”
• The
N field indicates kerning when the Text Insertion bar i is between two characters and indicates tracking when a block of text is highlighted. Enter a value in the field or click the arrows to adjust kerning and tracking. See “Specifying Kerning and Tracking” in
Chapter 12, “Typography.”
The X and Y fields indicate the location of the origin of the text box in relation to the upper left corner of the page.
The W and H fields indicate the width and height of the text box.
The Cols field indicates the number of columns contained in the text box.
The n and N fields indicate leading and kerning and tracking respectively.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.5
Palettes
The
{, }, [, $, and ] buttons indicate the alignment applied to selected paragraphs.
The
6 and 5 buttons indicate whether the anchored text box aligns with the ascent or baseline of the text.
The X and Y fields indicate the location of the origin of the picture box in relation to the upper left corner of the page.
• The
{, }, [, $, ] buttons indicate left, centered, right, justified, and forced justified alignment of selected paragraphs.
• The Font drop-down list < indicates the selected font. To change the font, choose a font from the drop-down list or enter the name of the font in the field. To see what the font looks like, press the
SHIFT key while accessing the Font drop-down list <. To automatically apply the selected font, press the
CTRL key while accessing the Font drop-down list <.
• The Size drop-down list < indicates the size of the selected font. To change the font size, choose a size from the drop-down list or enter a value in the field.
• The P, B, I, U, W, ?, O, S, K, H, +, _, and M buttons indicate plain, bold, italics, underline, word underline, strike thru, outline, shadow, all caps, small caps, superscript, subscript, and superior type styles, respectively. Multiple type styles may be applied to a single character or group of characters.
R The Measurements palette looks slightly different for anchored text boxes. When an anchored text box is active, the Measurements palette indicates whether the text box aligns with the ascent
6 or baseline
5 of the associated line of text. Click the ascent 6 or baseline
5 buttons to change the alignment of an anchored text box. The X, Y, and r fields are not available for anchored text boxes. When the Content tool
E is selected, the Measurements palette displays the same content controls for anchored text boxes as those for nonanchored text boxes.
Measurements palette for picture boxes
Item information
When a picture box is selected in the document window, the left side of the Measurements palette lets you edit the picture box item information.
See Chapter 14, “Pictures.”
2.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Measurements Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
• The X and Y fields indicate the location of the origin (upper left corner) of the picture box.
• The W and H fields indicate the width and height of the picture box.
• The r field indicates the picture box’s angle of rotation.
• The
= field indicates the radii of the corners of the picture box.
Content information
When the Content tool
E is selected, the right side of the Measure-
ments palette lets you edit the contents of the picture box.
• The
( button lets you flip the contents of the picture box along a horizontal axis.
• The
) button lets you flip the contents of the picture box along a vertical axis.
• The X% and Y% fields indicate the horizontal and vertical scaling of the contents of the picture box.
• The X+ and Y+ fields indicate the horizontal and vertical offsets of the contents of the picture box from the picture box’s origin (upper left corner).
• The r field indicates the angle of rotation of the contents of the picture box.
• The
S field indicates the skew (slant) of the contents of the picture box.
R The Measurements palette looks slightly different for anchored picture boxes. When an anchored picture box is active, the Mea-
surements palette indicates whether the picture box aligns with the ascent
6 or the baseline 5 of the associated line of text. Click the ascent
6 or baseline 5 buttons to change the alignment of the anchored picture box. The X, Y, r, and = fields are not available for anchored picture boxes. When the Content tool
E is selected, the Measurements palette displays the same content controls for anchored picture boxes as those for nonanchored text boxes.
The W and H fields indicate the width and height of the picture box.
The r and = fields indicate the picture box’s angle of rotation and the radii of its corners, respectively.
The
( and ) buttons let you flip the contents of the picture box horizontally or vertically.
The X% and Y% fields indicate the scaling of the picture box’s contents.
The X+ and Y+ fields indicate horizontal and vertical offsets of the picture box’s contents from the upper left corner of the picture box.
The
6 and 5 buttons indicate whether the anchored picture box aligns with the ascent or baseline of the text.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.7
Palettes
The X1, Y1 and X2, Y2 fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the left and right endpoints of the line.
Measurements palette for lines
Fields displayed in the Measurements palette for lines vary according to the line description method selected in the Mode drop-down list.
Line description methods available in the Mode drop-down list include Endpoints, First Point, Midpoint, and Last Point. See Chapter 8, “Line Basics.”
Endpoints
The Mode drop-down list indicates the method used to describe the line.
The r and L fields indicate the angle and length of the line, respectively.
The Width field indicates the width of the line.
The two drop-down lists on the right side of the palette indicate the style of the line and its arrowheads.
• The X1 and Y1 fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the first endpoint of the line.
• The X2 and Y2 fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the last endpoint of the line.
• The Mode drop-down list lets you choose whether to describe the selected line by Endpoints; by a First Point, length, and angle; by a
Last Point, length, and angle; or by a Midpoint, length, and angle.
• The Width field indicates the width of the line.
• The left drop-down list indicates the line’s style.
• The right drop-down list indicates the line’s arrowheads.
First Point
• The X1 and Y1 fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the left endpoint of the line.
• The r field indicates the line’s angle of rotation.
• The L field indicates the line’s length.
2.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Measurements Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
• The Mode drop-down list lets you choose whether to describe the selected line by Endpoints; by the First Point, length, and angle; by the Last Point, length, and angle; or by a Midpoint, length, and angle.
• The Width field indicates the width of the line.
• The left drop-down list indicates the line’s style.
• The right drop-down list indicates the line’s arrowheads.
Midpoint
The XC and YC fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the center point of the line.
The flip text button √ places text on the opposite side of the line, starting from the opposite endpoint. For example, if you create a circular text path with text flowing on the outside of the circle, Flip
Text positions text on the inside of the circle. Text alignment is not affected.
• The XC and YC fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the midpoint of the line.
• The r field indicates the line’s angle of rotation.
• The L field indicates the line’s length.
• The Mode drop-down list lets you choose whether to describe the selected line by Endpoints; by the First Point, length, and angle; by a
Last Point, length, and angle; or by a Midpoint, length, and angle.
• The Width field indicates the width of the line.
• The left drop-down list indicates the line’s style.
• The right drop-down list indicates the line’s arrowheads.
Last Point
• The X2 and Y2 fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the right endpoint of the line.
• The r field indicates the line’s angle of rotation.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.9
Palettes
The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the upper left corner of the bounding box containing the group of items.
The r field indicates the angle of the group of items.
• The L field indicates the line’s length.
• The Mode drop-down list lets you choose whether to describe the selected line by Endpoints; by the First Point, length, and angle; by the Last Point, length, and angle; or by a Midpoint, length, and angle.
• The Width field indicates the width of the line.
• The left drop-down list indicates the line’s style.
• The right drop-down list indicates the line’s arrowheads.
Measurements palette for groups and multiple-selected items
The point and line segment buttons for
Bézier items let you manipulate active points and line segments.
The XP and YP fields indicate the horizontal and vertical location of the active point.
When groups of items or multiple items are selected, the Measurements palette lets you edit the origin and angle of the group of items.
• The X and Y fields indicate the location of the origin (upper left corner) of the bounding box containing the group of items.
• The r field indicates the angle of rotation of the group of items. When an item is rotated with a group of items, it is rotated relative to the center of the bounding box enclosing the group, not to its own origin (upper left corner).
The r field and the length field for the u curve handle indicates the angle and length of the curve handle in relation to the active point.
Measurements palette for editing Bézier items
The r field and length field for the
Πcurve indicates the angle and length of the curve handle in relation to the active point.
When a point, line segment, or curve handle on a Bézier shape is selected, the Measurements palette lets you edit the origin, dimension, and angle of the item, as well as the type of point or line segment in the shape. You can also enter values to manipulate point position and curve handle angle and length. See “Reshaping Boxes” in Chapter 7, “Box Basics.”
2.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Measurements Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
• The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the Bézier item’s bounding box.
• The W and H fields indicate the width and height of the Bézier item.
• The r field indicates the angle of rotation of the Bézier item.
• The Symmetrical Point button † to lets you convert a point into a symmetrical point for a Bézier item.
• The Smooth Point button ¥ lets you convert a point into a smooth point for a Bézier item.
• The Corner Point button ® lets you convert a point into a corner point for a Bézier item.
• The Straight Segment button œ lets you convert a curved line segment to a straight line segment for a Bézier item.
• The Curved Segment button ∑ lets you convert a straight line segment to a curved line segment for a Bézier item.
• The XP and YP fields indicate the horizontal and vertical location of the active point.
• The Diamond Curve Handle Angle field r indicates the angle of the diamond-shaped curve handle in relation to the active point.
• The Diamond Curve Handle Distance field u indicates the distance of the diamond-shaped curve handle from the active point.
• The Square Curve Handle Angle field r indicates the angle of the square-shaped curve handle in relation to the active point.
• The Square Curve Handle Distance field Œ indicates the distance of the square-shaped curve handle from the active point.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.11
Palettes
Measurements palette for item creation
When a text box, picture box, or line is being created, the Measurements palette displays item information.
Text box creation
• The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the text box. These also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting one of the text box creation tools in the Tool palette but before clicking the mouse button.
• The W and H fields indicate the changing width and height of the text box.
Picture box creation
• The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the picture box. These also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting one of the picture box creation tools in the Tool palette but before clicking the mouse button.
• The W and H fields indicate the changing width and height of the picture box.
2.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Measurements Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
Line creation
• Depending on the line description method selected in the Mode drop-down list, the X1, Y1, X2, Y2, and XC, YC fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the left endpoint, right endpoint, or midpoint of the line.
Measurements palette for Ruler Origin relocation
The X and Y fields indicate the changing origin of the ruler when dragging the 0,0 origin crosshair out of the ruler origin box.
Measurements palette for Ruler Guide placement
The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal locations of vertical guides and the vertical positions of horizontal guides as they are dragged from the ruler.
The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the active ruler guide.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.13
Palettes
The
0, 3, , and buttons let you add single-sided and facing pages and duplicate and delete selected pages.
Document Layout Palette
The Document Layout (View
& Show Document Layout) palette lets you add, delete, move, and access document pages and master pages using page icons.
Page insert, duplicate, and delete area
The four icons at the top of the Document Layout palette (F4) let you insert single-sided and facing pages, and duplicate and delete selected pages.
• The
0 icon lets you insert blank single-sided document pages into a layout. To insert a single-sided page, drag the
0 icon into the document page area of the Document Layout palette, move the pointer over the document page icons to preview the placement of the page, and release the mouse button to place the page in the layout.
• The
3 icon lets you insert blank facing-page document pages into a layout. The
3 icon is available only if you have checked Facing Pages either in the New dialog box (File
& New) or in the Document Setup dialog box (File
& Document Setup). To insert a blank facing-page document page, drag the
3 icon into the document page area of the
Document Layout palette, move the pointer over the document page icons to preview the placement of the page, and release the mouse button to place the page in the layout.
• The
0 and
3 icons also let you create new master pages. To create a new master page, drag the
0 or 3 icon into the master page area of the
Document Layout palette and release the mouse button. Releasing the mouse button when an existing master page is highlighted replaces the master page with a blank page.
2.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Document Layout Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
• The icon lets you create new master pages based on existing master pages. To duplicate a master page, click the master page in the master page area to select it, then click the icon. The new master page is placed in the master page area immediately after the master page from which it is duplicated.
• The icon lets you delete selected master pages and document pages.
To delete a master page, highlight it in the master page area of the
Document Layout palette, then click the icon. To delete a document page, highlight it in the document page area of the Document
Layout palette, then click the icon. A warning asks you to confirm or abort the deletion. You can also press the
ALT key while clicking the delete icon to bypass the confirmation warning.
Master pages area
The master pages area of the Document Layout palette lets you insert, apply, and rename user-defined master pages.
• Master page icons
0 or ! let you insert master pages in a document.
To insert a master page, drag the master page’s icon
0 or ! into the document page area of the Document Layout palette, move the pointer over the document page icons to preview the placement of the page, and release the mouse button to place the page in the layout.
• Master page icons
0 or
! also let you apply master page elements to blank pages. To apply a master page to a blank page, drag the master page’s icon on top of the blank page and release the mouse button.
• The name fields next to the master page icons
0 or
! let you rename the master pages. Click the name field to highlight it, then enter a name of up to 64 characters for the master page. Each master page may have a prefix of up to three characters. When created, new master pages are automatically assigned prefixes of “A,” “B,” “C,” and so on. To change the prefix of a master page, highlight the name field next to the
The master pages area of the Document
Layout palette lets you insert, apply, and rename master pages.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.15
Palettes
The document page area lets you position and access pages in your layout. master page icon 0 or
!, enter the prefix, followed immediately by a hyphen, followed by the remainder of the name.
R You can expand the master page area with the split bar between the master page and document page areas. This lets you display an entire list of master pages. To expand the master page area, click the split bar and drag it down.
Document page area
The document page area of the Document Layout palette displays page layout, absolute page numbers, and the master pages on which individual pages are based.
• Document page icons
0, 1, 2 can be repositioned in the layout. To reposition a page, drag the page to a new position in the layout.
• Single-page document page icons
0 indicate single pages not based on master pages.
• Facing-page document page icons
1 indicate facing pages not based on master pages.
• Facing-page document page icons
1 containing master page prefixes indicate document pages based on master pages.
• Single-side page icons
0 that are based on a single-sided master page will also have a letter on them.
• The number beneath a page indicates the page’s actual page number, including prefixes, section starts, etc.
• The bar at the bottom of the Document Layout palette indicates the page number of a selected page. Clicking this bar displays the Section dialog box (Page
& Section).
• Double-clicking a document page icon displays the associated page in the document window.
2.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Sheets Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
Style Sheets Palette
The Style Sheets palette (View
& Show Style Sheets) lets you create, apply, edit, duplicate, and delete character and paragraph style sheets.
Style Sheets pop out menu
Four options display to the right of the style sheets when you click a style sheet name using the right mouse button (or press CTRL while using the left mouse button) in the Style Sheets palette (F11). This lets you edit, duplicate, delete, and create new paragraph and character style sheets. See “Working with Style Sheets” in Chapter 12,
“Typography.” To display the Edit Style Sheets dialog box (Edit
&
Style Sheets) from the Style Sheets palette, press CTRL while clicking a style sheet name. To remove any local formatting (indicated by a plus sign next to the style sheet name), press ALT while clicking the name.
Clicking the paragraph style sheet name or the
π icon lets you apply paragraph style sheets.
Clicking a style sheet name using the right mouse button in the Style Sheets palette lets you edit, duplicate, delete, or create character and paragraph style sheets.
Paragraph style sheet area
The paragraph style sheet area lets you select paragraph style sheets and apply them to text. Style sheets
π in the paragraph style sheet area are available when both the Content tool
E and a text box are selected.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.17
Palettes
Clicking the character style sheet name or the
Ø icon in the character style sheet area lets you apply character style sheets to selected text.
• Clicking the
π icon next to paragraph style sheet, or clicking the paragraph style sheet name, lets you apply the style sheet to selected paragraphs or at the text insertion point i.
• A highlighted paragraph style sheet name indicates that the style sheet is chosen. Click a paragraph style sheet’s name to choose it. Only one paragraph style sheet and its associated character style sheet may be chosen at a time.
• The keyboard equivalent (if any) specified for a paragraph style sheet is displayed to the right of the style sheet name.
Character style sheet area
The character style sheet area lets you select character style sheets and apply them to text. Style sheets in the character style sheet area are available when both the Content tool
E and a text box are selected.
• Clicking the
Ø icon next to a character style sheet, or clicking the style sheet name, lets you apply the style sheet to selected characters or at the text insertion bar i.
• A highlighted character style sheet name indicates that the style sheet is chosen. Click a character style sheet’s name to choose it. Only one character style sheet may be chosen at a time.
• The keyboard equivalent (if any) specified for a character style sheet is displayed to the right of the style sheet name.
R The split bar between the paragraph style sheet and character style sheet areas lets you expand the paragraph style sheet area so you can display your entire list of paragraph style sheets. To expand the character style sheet area, click the split bar and drag it up.
2.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Colors Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
Colors Palette
The Colors palette (View
& Show Colors) lets you add color to selected text, pictures, box backgrounds, lines, and frames.
Colors palette buttons
The buttons located at the top of the Colors palette (F12) let you choose whether to apply the color to frames, text, lines, or the background of picture boxes and text boxes.
• The J button lets you view and apply the colors to the frame for the selected text boxes or picture boxes.
• The
T button lets you view and apply the color to selected text or the text insertion bar i.
• The
L button lets you view and apply the color to a selected line.
• The Y button lets you view and apply the colors to the background for the selected text boxes, picture boxes, and groups.
• The p icon lets you apply color to certain picture formats.
• The Shade drop-down list indicates the saturation of a selected color.
To change the saturation of a selected color, choose a value from the drop-down list, or enter a value directly in the field. You can enter values from 0 to 100% in increments as fine as 0.1%.
Blends area
The blends area of the Colors palette lets you apply color blends to the backgrounds of text boxes and picture boxes. The Cool Blends TM
XTensions software must be running to see anything except solid and linear blend patterns.
Buttons at the top of the Colors palette let you apply colors to frames, text, lines, and backgrounds.
Buttons displayed when a line is selected let you apply color to a line.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.19
Palettes
The Type drop-down list, #1 and #2 buttons, and the Angle field let you apply blends to the backgrounds of text boxes and picture boxes.
Clicking the name of a color in the color list area applies the color to selected frames, text, lines, backgrounds, and certain picture formats based on the button selection at the top of the palette.
• The Type drop-down list indicates the type of blend applied to the backgrounds of selected text boxes or picture boxes. Options in the Type drop-down list include Solid, Linear Blend, Mid-Linear Blend, Rectan-
gular Blend, Diamond Blend, Circular Blend, and Full Circular Blend.
• The #1 and #2 buttons let you choose the beginning and ending colors of a blend when an option other than Solid is chosen from the Type drop-down list. Clicking the #1 button lets you specify the first color in the blend; clicking the #2 button lets you specify the second color. Blends are displayed in active text boxes only when the
Item tool e is selected.
• The Angle field indicates the angle at which a blend fills a box. You can enter a value from –360˚ to 360˚ in increments as fine as 0.001˚ .
R To edit the colors in the Colors palette, press
CTRL while clicking a color name. This will display the Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors).
Color selection area
The color selection area of the Colors palette lets you apply colors to frames, text, pictures, lines, and backgrounds of text boxes and picture boxes.
• Swatches display colors next to their names in a list.
• Swatches also let you apply colors to selected lines, frames, and the backgrounds of text boxes and picture boxes. To apply a color to a line, frame, or background, drag and drop the associated swatch over the item in the document page.
• A highlighted color name indicates the chosen color. If various colors are applied to multiple selected items, no color name is highlighted.
2.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Trap Information Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
Trap Information Palette
The Trap Information palette (View
& Show Trap Information) lets you specify trapping information for adjacent colors on an object-by-object basis. See “Specifying Item-Specific Trapping” in Chapter 16, “Trapping.”
Background and Text fields for trapping boxes and text
The Background and Text fields of the Trap Information palette ( CTRL +F12) display the element of a selected box. You can specify trapping for any QuarkXPress box, its contents (except for imported pictures), its frames, and its background. The following information features a text box containing text and a background color with no frame.
Background and Text drop-down lists
The Background and Text drop-down lists indicate the elements of the selected item. Options vary depending on the type of item selected.
• Default indicates the default for the Background and Text fields using the trapping values specified in the Trap Specifications dialog box
(Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap) for the item’s current object color against the item’s current background color.
• Overprint indicates that QuarkXPress will overprint an active item.
Overprint overrides the Overprint Limit value entered in the Trap-
ping tab and overprints regardless of the shade of the object and background colors involved.
• Knockout indicates that an active item will knockout its background.
• Auto Amount (+) will apply the positive value entered in the Auto
Amount field of the Trapping tab (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
This value is displayed to the right of the drop-down list as a positive number (a spread).
These values in the Trap Information palette (View
& Show Trap Informa-
tion) control how QuarkXPress traps the
Background for an active item.
These values control how QuarkXPress traps the Text for an active item.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.21
Palettes
These values control how QuarkXPress traps the Picture for an active item.
The Trap Information palette indicates trapping for the Inside, Middle, and
Outside of a frame created with a multiline style.
• Auto Amount (–) will apply the negative value entered in the Auto
Amount field of the Trapping tab. This value is displayed to the right of the drop-down list as a negative number (a choke).
• Custom will specify a custom choke or spread value for the active item, entered in the field to the right of the drop-down list.
Trapping for frames
A frame for a box always traps to the background color(s) specified for the box, to the color(s) used to color the frame, and to any background color(s) underneath the box. The trapping type from the drop-down lists specify trapping values for the Frame Inside, Frame Middle and Frame
Outside fields.
• Frame Inside indicates trapping applied between the innermost color of a frame and the box contents (background color or picture).
• Frame Middle indicates trapping applied to colors within a frame.
• Frame Outside indicates trapping applied between the outermost color of a frame and colors underneath it.
The trapping types contained in the drop-down lists are the same as those described in “Background and Text fields for trapping boxes and text” earlier in this section.
2.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Trap Information Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
Trapping for lines
A line always traps to the color(s) used to color it, and to any background colors underneath the line. Choose a trapping type from the drop-down list to specify trapping values for the Line, Line Middle, and Gap fields.
• The Line field indicates trapping applied to the Line color specified for a line in relation to an adjacent background color.
• Line Middle indicates trapping applied to colors within a line.
• The Gap field indicates trapping applied to the Gap color specified for a line in relation to an adjacent background color. The Gap field is only available with dashed lines or multilines with only one arrowhead.
The trapping types contained in the drop-down lists are the same as those described in “Background and Text fields for trapping boxes and text” earlier in this section.
The Trap Information palette indicates trapping for the Line, Line Middle, and
Gap of a line created with a multiline style
Default Trap information window
Information about a Default trap value can be viewed by clicking the question mark to the right of the value. The Default Trap information window is displayed, and fields will be highlighted or dimmed. See
“Specifying Default Trapping” in Chapter 16, “Trapping.”
• Object Color indicates the color applied to the element of the active box.
• Underneath Color indicates the color and color type of the object(s) underneath the selected item. Multiple will display if there are multiple background colors, and there is not a conflict between the choke and spread amount in the Trap Specifications dialog box (Edit
& Colors &
Edit Trap). Indeterminate will display if there is a conflict between the choke amount and the spread amount. Otherwise, the name of the color covering the entire background of the object is displayed.
The Default Trap information window displays information about active items with Default selected.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.23
Palettes
The Source of Trap Values area has one selection highlighted, which shows the location where the trap information is taken from. Text displayed in this area is dimmed if that trap source is not being used.
The Properties area displays highlighted text when that trap property is being used. Text displayed in this area is dimmed if that trap source is not being used.
Source of Trap Values area
Text displayed in this area is dimmed if that trap source is not being used.
• Edit Trap indicates the source of trap value is from settings in the Trap
Specifications dialog box (Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap). See “Specifying Color-Specific Trapping” in Chapter 16, “Trapping.”
• Trap Preferences indicates the source of the trap value is from settings in the Trapping tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document). See “Specifying Default Trapping” in Chapter 16, “Trapping.”
Properties area
Text displayed in this area is dimmed if that trap property is not being used.
• Proportional indicates that proportional trapping is applied. Propor-
tional trapping uses the specified trap value multiplied by the difference between the luminance of the object color and background color to calculate the trapping value.
• Process Trapping indicates the object color and background color have process trapping applied. Process trapping is not applied if the background underneath the object has more than one color.
• Rich Black indicates Rich Black is applied to the object color or background, and that Rich Black trapping will be used. See “Creating and
Using a Rich Black” in Chapter 16, “Trapping.”
• Small Object indicates that trapping for text less than 24 points, or for an object width (such as a stripe, a line, etc.) less than 10 points, will require special trapping if process trapping is on.
• Overprint Limit indicates that the object color was set to overprint the background, but the shade of the object was less than the overprint limit in the Overprint Limit field of the Trapping tab (Edit
& Prefer- ences
& Document).
2.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Trap Information Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
• Knockout Limit indicates that the color’s luminance is less than or equal to the knockout limits specified in the Knockout Limit field of the Trapping tab (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
• Smallest Trap Value indicates that multiple underneath colors have traps in the same direction (all chokes or all spreads). The smallest trap value of the underneath colors is used.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.25
Palettes
Blank Lists palette
Use the options in the Lists palette to create lists for your documentation.
Lists Palette
The Lists palette (View
& Show Lists) helps you create lists, such as table of contents lists, for any number of documents. The Lists palette displays text with style sheets applied, as defined in the Lists dialog box (Edit
& Lists).
Viewing and updating lists
The Lists palette ( CTRL +F11) helps you work with lists. You can view and update lists for a single document, a chapter of a book, or an entire book.
Viewing lists
Documents, chapters, or books must be open to view lists.
• The Show List For drop-down list lets you choose to display lists for a book or current document. Choosing Current Document lets you view the list for the open document; choosing an entry below the gray line lets you view lists for any open book.
• The List Name drop-down list displays the name of all lists for the current document or book.
• Find lets you locate items in the Lists palette. Enter the first few letters of a list entry and it finds the closest entry in the Lists palette. Doubleclick the entry to locate the item in the document.
• Build lets you copy the current list to an active text box. The Format
As style sheets for the list are applied automatically. The Build button is not available unless a text box is active.
2.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Lists Palette Introducing QuarkXPress
Updating lists for chapters and documents
The Lists palette is not automatically updated as you work. If you have made changes to the text, you will need to update the list to be sure it is current.
Update lets you scan the document for list items in the current document, build a list, and save it with the document. When the process is complete, the list is displayed in the Lists palette.
Updating lists for books
Update lets you update lists for the open book. QuarkXPress reads the saved list information from the publication file and displays it in the
Lists palette. However, you may not have the most recent versions of the lists for each chapter. Click Update to force QuarkXPress to rescan all chapters in a book and build a new list. Building an accurate list for the book is very important if you are working on a shared book. See
“Creating Tables of Contents and Indexes” in Chapter 18, “Books.”
R To display the most accurate list for a book, all chapters must be
“Available” in the Books palette before you Update. If QuarkXPress encounters a chapter that is unavailable, you will be warned that chapters are missing. Clicking OK continues the list-building process, but the unavailable chapter is skipped. The result is a list that does not include list items from the missing chapter.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 2.27
3
Menus and Dialog
Boxes
File Menu
Edit Menu
Style Menu for Text
Style Menu for Pictures
Style Menu for Lines
Item Menu
Page Menu
View Menu
Utilities Menu
3.150
3.153
3.205
3.217
3.225
3.3
3.33
3.119
3.141
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
3
Menus and Dialog
Boxes
Menus group an application’s primary functions and make them readily available, while dialog boxes offer easy access to a variety of controls.
Menus and dialog boxes let you “feel” your way through an application and learn it by intuition.
The QuarkXPress interface is structured so you can learn it quickly. By skimming through the menus, you will find that many commands are familiar or self-explanatory. And, with a little experimentation, you will see that menu and dialog box controls act the way you expect them to. Once you become familiar with QuarkXPress, you will discover that keyboard commands and palettes offer convenient access to features you first learn to access through menus.
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
File Menu
The QuarkXPress File menu lets you manipulate electronic files in a number of ways, from creating, opening, and saving files, to setting up a document for printing.
Sections
The File menu is divided into five sections:
• The first section lets you create and open documents, libraries, and books.
The New and Open commands are available unless too many files are open (25 documents and libraries combined, plus an additional 25 books).
• The second section lets you close and save document files and work with revisions of files. The Close and Save as commands are available when a file is open. The Save and Revert to Saved commands are available any time unsaved changes were made to a file.
• The third section lets you import text and pictures into documents, save text in a variety of formats, append sets of document attributes, save document pages as EPS files, and collect the picture files required for output into a folder with the document. The Append, Save Page as
EPS, and Collect for Output commands are available when a document is open. Get Text is available when a text box is active; Get Picture is available when a picture box is active.
• The fourth section lets you change a document’s size and control the way it prints. The Document Setup, Page Setup, and Print commands are available when a document is active.
• The fifth section lets you close the application. The Exit command is always available.
File menu
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.3
Menus and Dialog Boxes
New submenu
Document command
New Document dialog box and
Page area
New (submenu)
File menu
The New command displays a submenu that lets you create new documents, libraries, and books.
Document (command)
File
& New
The Document command ( CTRL + N ) displays the New Document dialog box, which lets you specify the setup of a new document.
New Document (dialog box)
File
& New & Document
The New Document dialog box lets you define a document’s first page and original master page. (All new documents contain a master page by default.) These specifications become program defaults and are displayed the next time you open the New Document dialog box.
Page (area)
File
& New & Document
The Page area lets you specify a standard or custom page size, and lets you specify an orientation for the document.
• To specify a standard page size, choose an option from the Size dropdown list. The appropriate dimensions are automatically displayed in the Width and Height fields.
• To specify a custom page size, enter values in the Width and Height fields. The minimum page size is 1" x 1"; the maximum is 48" x 48".
When you enter values in the fields, the option in the Size drop-down list changes to Custom.
• To change the Orientation of the document, click the portrait (vertical) or landscape (horizontal) button. The values in the Width and Height fields change to reflect the new orientation.
3.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Margin Guides (area)
File
& New & Document
The Margin Guides area lets you specify the position of margin guides on the default master page and its document pages. You can also specify whether a document contains facing pages or nonfacing pages.
• Enter values in the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right fields to specify the margins for the default master page. When Facing Pages is checked, the Left and Right margin fields change to Inside and Outside (the
Inside margin is nearest the binding; the Outside margin is on the opposite edge).
• Check Facing Pages to create a document with different left and right page formats (like this manual). If you check Facing Pages, the new document’s original master page, and any additional master pages you create, will be divided into left and right components to represent the facing-page spread.
R If you check Automatic Text Box, the values you enter in the
Margin Guides fields determine the size and location of the automatic text box.
Column Guides (area)
File
& New & Document
The Column Guides area lets you specify the position of column guides on the default master page.
• Enter a value between 1 and 30 in the Columns field to specify the number of columns.
• Enter a value from 3 to 288 points (4") in the Gutter Width field to specify the amount of white space between columns.
R If you check Automatic Text Box, the values you enter in the
Column Guides fields are used to divide the automatic text box.
Margin Guides area
Column Guides area
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.5
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Automatic Text Box check box
Library command
Automatic Text Box (check box)
File
& New & Document
Check Automatic Text Box to place an initial automatic text box on the first page of a new document. The values in the Margin Guides and Col-
umn Guides fields determine the size, placement, and columns in the automatic text box.
R An automatic text box is a text box defined on a master page through which text flows automatically to other pages when pages are inserted into a document. When you check Automatic Text
Box, this text box is automatically placed on the master page. The first page of the document, because it is based on the original master page, also includes the automatic text box.
Library (command)
File
& New
A library is a file that displays as a palette and lets you store and retrieve
QuarkXPress items. The Library command ( CTRL + ALT + N ) displays the
New Library dialog box, which lets you create a new library.
New Library (dialog box)
File
& New & Library
The New Library dialog box lets you specify a location for the library file and name the library. Enter a name in the File name field. QuarkXPress automatically selects the appropriate extension for Libraries (*.qxl) in the
Save as type drop-down list. Click Create to display the new library. See
Chapter 17, “Libraries,” for information about using libraries.
New Library dialog box
3.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Book (command)
File
& New
A book is a file that displays as a palette and helps you manage multipledocument publications. The Book command displays the New Book dialog box, which lets you create a new book.
New Book (dialog box)
File
& New & Book
The New Book dialog box lets you specify a location for the book file and name the book. Enter a name in the File name field. QuarkXPress automatically selects the appropriate extension for Books (*.qxb) in the
Save as type drop-down list. Click Create to display the new book. See
Chapter 18, “Books,” for information about using books.
Book command
Open (command)
File menu
The Open command (
CTRL
+
O
) displays the Open dialog box, which lets you open an existing QuarkXPress document, template, library, or book.
Open (dialog box)
File
& Open
The Open dialog box displays a list of QuarkXPress files (documents, templates, libraries, and books). Use the Look in drop-down list or type a folder name in the File name field and press ENTER to change folders. To expedite the finding of particular files, use the Files of type drop-down list to limit the types of files displayed. As soon as you click on a file, the version of
QuarkXPress the file was created in displays in the bottom left corner.
New Book dialog box
Open command
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.7
Open dialog box
Close command
Menus and Dialog Boxes
R If the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box displays when you open a document, see “Understanding Nonmatching Preferences” in Chapter 4, “Customizing QuarkXPress.”
Close (command)
File menu
The Close command lets you close the active document. If a document contains unsaved changes, a Save warning displays and lets you save changes. If a document was not saved previously, the Save as dialog box displays and lets you name the document and save changes.
Save (command)
File menu
The Save command (
CTRL
+
S
) lets you retain changes made to the active document. For documents that have been previously saved, Save retains changes you have made and replaces the document with a new version.
If you have not yet saved the active document, or if you are working on a template, choosing Save displays the Save as dialog box, which lets you specify a name and location for the document.
R If you are using Auto Backup, each time you choose Save, a new revision of the active document is stored in the Destination folder.
The Auto Backup controls are in the Save tab of the Application
Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Application).
Save command
3.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Save as (command)
File menu
The Save as command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
S
) displays the Save as dialog box, which lets you specify a name, location, and other attributes for the document file. You can use Save as to create another copy of the active document with a new name or to create a template.
Save as (dialog box)
File
& Save as
The Save as dialog box lets you name the document, specify a location for it, save the document as a template, and save the document for a different version of QuarkXPress.
• Enter a name for the document in the File name field.
• Choose Template from the Save as type drop-down list to save the formatting of the current document as a reusable basis for new documents.
Templates are protected from overwriting.
• Choose 3.3 from the Version drop-down list to create a document that can be opened by QuarkXPress 3.3, 3.31, or 3.32. Items based on features implemented in later versions of QuarkXPress are altered or removed.
Revert to Saved (command)
File menu
The Revert to Saved command lets you discard changes and restore the active document to the most recently saved version.
R If you are using Auto Save, pressing the
ALT key while you choose
Revert to Saved reverts the document to the last auto-saved version. The Auto Save controls are in the Save tab of the Applica-
tion Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Application).
Save as command
Save as dialog box
Revert to Saved command
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.9
Get Text command
Get Text dialog box
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Get Text (command)
File menu
The Get Text command (
CTRL
+
E
) displays the Get Text dialog box, which lets you import text files from a variety of sources. The Get Text command is available when the Content tool
E is selected and a text box is active. When a picture box is active, Get Picture replaces Get Text in the
File menu.
Get Text (dialog box)
File
& Get Text
The Get Text dialog box lets you import ASCII text, ASCII text saved with XPress Tags, and word processing files into the active text box.
Imported text is inserted at the insertion point, indicated by the Text
Insertion bar i , or it replaces highlighted text.
When text files in most file formats are being imported, the page number indicator in the lower left corner of the document window changes to indicate the percentage of the file that has been imported.
• Use the controls in the dialog box to locate the text file you want to import. The Get Text dialog box lists ASCII files and files from word processors for which an import/export filter is loaded.
• Highlight the text file in the list. When you highlight a file, the Name,
Format, File Size, and Date fields display the appropriate information.
• Check Convert Quotes to convert double hyphens to em dashes, and foot or inch marks to typesetter’s quotation marks, when the text is imported. Foot and inch marks are converted to the quotation marks format you have specified in the Quotes drop-down list (Edit
& Prefer- ences
& Application & Interactive tab).
• Check Include Style Sheets to import style sheets from a Microsoft
Word or WordPerfect file to the document’s list of style sheets. To con-
3.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress vert XPress Tags code contained in imported ASCII or Rich Text Format
(*.RTF) text to actual text formatting, also check Include Style Sheets.
R QuarkXPress includes import/export filters for many popular word processing programs like Microsoft Word and WordPerfect. To import a file created with one of these applications or a file that contains XPress Tag codes, use the XTensions Manager dialog box
(Utilities menu) to enable the necessary import/export filter.
Get Picture (command)
File menu
The Get Picture command (
CTRL
+
E
) displays the Get Picture dialog box, which lets you import picture files from a variety of sources. The Get
Picture command is available when the Content tool
E or Item tool e is selected and a picture box is active. When a text box is active, Get
Text replaces Get Picture in the File menu.
Get Picture command
Get Picture (dialog box)
File
& Get Picture
The Get Picture dialog box lets you import a BMP, EPS, GIF, JPEG, Mac
PICT, PCX, PhotoCD, Scitex CT, TIFF, or WMF file into the active picture box. To import JPEG or PhotoCD files, use the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to enable the JPEG Import filter or the PhotoCD
XTensions software (the filters are included with QuarkXPress).
If you import a picture into a box that contains a picture, the existing picture is replaced. When a TIFF file is being imported, the page number indicator in the lower left corner of the document window changes to indicate the percentage of the file that has been imported.
• Use the controls in the dialog box to locate the picture file you want to import.
Get Picture dialog box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.11
Get Picture dialog box
Save Text command
Menus and Dialog Boxes
• Check Preview to display the picture before it is imported.
R The Get Picture command places the entire picture in the active picture box, regardless of the size of either the picture or the box.
Save Text (command)
File menu
The Save Text command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
E
) displays the Save Text dialog box, which lets you export text in a variety of file formats. The Save
Text command is available when the Content tool
E is selected and a text box is active.
Save Text (dialog box)
File
& Save Text
The Save Text dialog box lets you export ASCII text, ASCII text saved with XPress Tags, and word processing files. The Save Text command saves only text; it does not save pictures, anchored text, or anchored picture boxes. When text is being saved, the page number indicator in the lower left corner of the document window changes to indicate the percentage of the text that has been saved.
• Use the controls in the dialog box to specify a location for the text file.
• Enter a name for the text file in the File name field.
• Click Entire Story to export the story containing the Text Insertion bar i ; click Selected Text to export only highlighted text.
• Choose an option from the Save as type drop-down list to specify a file format for the exported text. The drop-down list includes ASCII Text
(*.txt), Rich Text Format (*.rtf), and the names of any import/export filters you have loaded.
Save Text dialog box
3.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
R QuarkXPress includes import/export filters for many popular word processing programs like Microsoft Word and WordPerfect. To export a file created with one of these applications or a file that contains XPress Tag codes, use the XTensions Manager dialog box
(Utilities menu) to enable the necessary import/export filter.
Append (command)
File menu
Appending is the process of importing components from other documents into the existing document. For example, if you want to use several style sheets from one document in another document, you can append them.
The Append command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
A
) displays the Append dialog box, which lets you select a document from which to import style sheets, colors, H&Js, lists, and dashes and stripes. Once you choose a document to append from, the Append to dialog box is displayed.
Append command
Append to (dialog box)
File
& Append
The Append to dialog box lets you selectively import components from the selected source document. Click the Style Sheets, Colors, H&Js, Lists, or Dashes & Stripes tab to choose from a list of those components. The
Available column lists all the appropriate components in the source document. Select the components you want to import into the target document and double-click them, or click the arrow icon ➨ to move them to the Include column.
R You can multiple-select components to include. To select a range of components, click the first component and press the
SHIFT key while you click the last component in the range. To select noncontinuous components, press the
CTRL key while you click the components.
Append to dialog box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.13
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Append Conflict dialog box
Append Conflict (dialog box)
File
& Append & OK
The Append Conflict dialog box provides options for handling imported components (style sheets, colors, H&Js, lists, and dashes and stripes) that have the same name as existing components, but different specifications. The Existing and New lists display descriptions of the components to help you make decisions on how to handle the conflict.
• Click Rename to display a dialog box that lets you rename the component. Enter a new name for the new component and click OK.
• Click Auto-Rename to have QuarkXPress place an asterisk in front of the appended component’s name.
• Click Use New to have the appended component overwrite the existing component.
• Click Use Existing to cancel the append of the component with the same name; the existing component remains unchanged in the document.
If you want all components with conflicting names to be handled the same way, check Repeat For All Conflicts. For example, if you want to rename all conflicting components, check Repeat for All Conflicts, then click Rename.
3.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Save Page as EPS (command)
File menu
The Save Page as EPS command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
S
) displays the Save Page
as EPS dialog box, which lets you create an Encapsulated PostScript picture file of a page in the active document. The EPS file retains and reproduces all text, layout, and pictures of the original page. You can import the
EPS file into any program that supports the EPS format.
Save Page as EPS (dialog box)
File
& Save Page as EPS
The Save Page as EPS dialog box lets you specify the page to be saved; and the name, location, scale, and format of the EPS file. To accurately reproduce the pages, QuarkXPress needs access to the necessary Post-
Script printer fonts and high resolution picture files. You have the option to use a low resolution preview if you cannot locate a picture.
Save Page as EPS command
Page, Scale, Bleed (fields), Spread (check box)
File
& Save Page as EPS
The lower left corner of the Save Page as EPS dialog box lets you specify the page to generate the EPS file from and its size.
• Enter a number in the Page field to specify the page to save as an EPS file. You can also enter an absolute page number, which represents the page’s sequential order in the document. To specify an absolute page number, enter a plus sign (+) before the number. Check Spread to generate an EPS of that entire spread.
• Enter a percentage value in the Scale field to save a reduced version of the page.
• Enter a value in the Bleed field to “expand” the EPS file’s boundaries.
For example, you may have a picture box that is .25" larger than a page on all sides of the page. Normally, when Save Page as EPS is selected,
Save Page as EPS dialog box;
Page, Scale, and Bleed fields;
Spread check box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.15
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Format drop-down list
Preview and Data drop-down lists the picture box will be clipped to the exact size of the page. However, if
.25" is entered as the Bleed value before saving, the entire picture box will be captured in the resulting EPS.
Format (drop-down list)
File
& Save Page as EPS & Format
Choose a picture file format from the Format drop-down list.
• Color generates a color EPS file.
• B&W generates a black-and-white EPS file.
• DCS generates a preseparated process color EPS file.
• DCS 2.0 generates a preseparated EPS that includes process and spot colors.
Preview, Data (drop-down lists)
File
& Save Page as EPS
The Preview drop-down list and Data drop-down list let you specify how the file is created.
• Choose TIFF from the Preview drop-down list to create a screen preview of the EPS file, or choose None to exclude the preview.
• If your page contains bitmap (raster) image data, choose an option from the Data drop-down list to control how the data is included in the EPS.
Choose from Binary, ASCII, or Clean 8-bit. Though documents print more quickly in Binary format, ASCII is more portable because it is a standard format readable by a wider range of printers and print spoolers.
Clean 8-bit is similar to Binary, except it avoids certain patterns of binary data that are used to communicate with parallel port printers. This may be necessary when printing to an output device connected via a parallel port.
3.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
OPI (drop-down list)
File
& Save Page as EPS
The OPI (Open Prepress Interface) method substitutes the high-resolution versions of color and grayscale bitmap images in a page saved as an EPS file. Choose an option from the OPI drop-down list if the page contains bitmap image data in TIFF or EPS file format:
• Include Images includes all imported TIFF and EPS pictures in the saved EPS file.
• Omit TIFF replaces all TIFF pictures with OPI comments that can be read by an OPI server.
• Omit TIFF & EPS replaces all TIFF and EPS pictures with OPI comments that can be read by an OPI server.
OPI drop-down list
Collect for Output (command)
File menu
Collect for Output prepares a document for delivery to a service bureau by creating a report file that describes the document and copying the document and its associated picture files into one folder. The Collect for
Output command displays the Collect for Output dialog box, which lets you specify a location for the collect files and name the report file.
R If you choose Collect for Output for a new document that has not been saved, the Save as dialog box is displayed. Type a name in the
File name field and click Save. The Collect for Output dialog box is displayed.
Collect for Output command
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.17
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Collect for Output dialog box
Report file in Output Request Template
Collect for Output (dialog box)
File
& Collect for Output
The Collect for Output dialog box provides controls that let you select or create a folder for the document, its imported picture files, and the report file. Enter a name for the report in the File name field. QuarkXPress automatically selects the appropriate extension for XPress Tags (*.xtg) in the
Save as type drop-down list. To generate only a report (so you can confirm all the document settings before collecting the files), check Report Only.
R If the Missing/Modified pictures dialog box is displayed after you click Collect, and you want to include those picture files, update
Modified pictures and locate Missing pictures.
Report file and Output Request Template
File
& Collect for Output & Collect
The Collect for Output feature generates a report of useful information about the document. The report is a text file, formatted with XPress Tags, that is placed in the same folder as the collected document and picture files. The report file includes:
• Document name, date, total pages, width, height
• Version of QuarkXPress, file size
• Required XTensions
• Active XTensions
• Names of the fonts used
• Graphics used (size, box/picture angle, skew, pathname, type, fonts in
EPS, location in document)
• Resolution of pictures
• H&J specifications
3.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• Each color created and information to reproduce custom colors
• Trapping information
• Color plates required for each page
You can import the report file into the Output Request Template located in your QuarkXPress folder. The template includes space for adding information that service bureaus commonly need — your company name, phone number, etc. You can customize the template to suit your specific needs.
When you import the file, make sure the XPress Tags filter is loaded and check Include Style Sheets in the Get Text dialog box (File menu).
Document Setup command
Document Setup (command)
File menu
The Document Setup command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
P
) displays the Docu-
ment Setup dialog box, which lets you change the size, orientation, and facing-pages status of a document.
Document Setup (dialog box)
File
& Document Setup
The Document Setup dialog box lets you specify a new size for a document and change whether or not it has facing pages.
• To change a document’s page size, choose a different page size from the
Size drop-down list or enter values in the Width and/or Height fields.
To specify either portrait (vertical) or landscape (horizontal) orientation, click an Orientation button.
• To change a nonfacing-page document to a facing-page document, check
Facing Pages. To change a facing-page document to a nonfacing-page document, uncheck Facing Pages.
Document Setup dialog box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.19
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Page Setup command
Print command
Print dialog box with the Printer dropdown list and Properties button
R If Facing Pages is checked but unavailable in the Document Setup dialog box, the document contains facing-page master pages. See
“Margin Guides (area)” earlier in this section. To change from a facing-page to a single-page document, first change any facing-page master pages to single-page master pages by dragging the
4 icon on top of them in the Document Layout palette (all formatting on associated document pages will be lost). Then choose File
& Docu-
ment Setup and uncheck Facing Pages.
Page Setup (command)
File menu
The Page Setup command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
P
) displays the Setup tab of the Print dialog box. See the “Setup (dialog box tab)” section later in this chapter.
Print (command)
File menu
The Print command (
CTRL
+
P
) displays the Print dialog box, which lets you specify the output of a document. The Print dialog box is divided into two specific areas:
• The fields, drop-down lists, and buttons at the top and bottom of the dialog box that are the static components of the Print dialog box.
• The area in the middle of the Print dialog box consisting of five tabs:
Document, Setup, Output, Options, and Preview. Each tab contains a unique set of print-related options.
Printer (drop-down list)
File
The Printer drop-down list displays all the printers installed on your computer, either physically through the parallel or serial ports, or across a network. The Properties button opens a dialog box with controls specific to the selected print driver. For more information on how to install
3.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress printers or the options in the Properties dialog box, consult the documentation provided with Microsoft Windows.
Print Style (drop-down list)
File
Print styles are sets of predefined output settings that you create in the
Print Styles dialog box (Edit
& Print Styles). The Print Style dropdown list lets you choose an option from your list of print styles. The default setting, Document, means that you have no print style selected.
When you choose a print style, all the tabs reflect the settings of that style. If you modify any settings to override the print style, an asterisk * and space are added before the print style name.
Print Style drop-down list
Copies, Pages (fields)
File
The Copies field lets you specify the number of copies to print. The
Pages field lets you specify the document pages to print. The Pages field lets you enter:
• The word “All” to print all the pages in a document (the default). You can also choose All from the drop-down list.
• Discontinuous ranges separated by commas (for example, “1, 3, 7”).
• Continuous ranges separated by hyphens (for example, “1-7”).
• A combination of discontinuous and continuous ranges (for example,
“1, 3, 7-10”).
• The word “End” to print from the beginning of a range to the end of the document (for example, “7-end”).
R If you designated a prefix and page number style in the Section dialog box (Page
&
Section), you must use that prefix and style when you enter page numbers in fields. You can also enter an absolute page number, which represents the page’s sequential order
Copies and Pages fields
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.21
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Edit Range Separators dialog box
Capture Settings button
Document tab and Separations check box
Spreads and Collate check boxes in the document. To specify an absolute page number, enter a plus sign (+) before the number.
Range Separators (button), Edit Range Separators (dialog box)
File
Hyphens and commas are the default separators for indicating continuous and discontinuous ranges in the Pages field. If you specified commas or hyphens as part of page numbers in the Section dialog box (Page menu), you will need to change the default separators. For example, if your page numbers are “A-1, A-2,” then you will not be able to specify ranges in the Pages field using hyphens. To edit the separators, click the
Range Separators button and enter new characters in the Edit Range
Separators dialog box.
Capture Settings (button)
File
The Capture Settings button saves the current output specifications with the document and closes the Print dialog box. The output specifications appear the next time you choose File
& Print.
Document (dialog box tab)
File
& Print & Document tab
The Print dialog box Document tab (
CTRL
+
P
) lets you specify various document output settings.
• The Separations check box lets you print color separations. A plate will be printed for each spot color or process ink as specified in the Print column of the Output tab.
• The Spreads check box lets you print document pages in a spread
(pages that you arrange in a horizontal row in the Document Layout palette) contiguously when printing.
• The Collate check box lets you print more than one collated copy of a document. This setting sends a document to the printer as though you
3.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress were executing more than one Print command, so it will take longer to print than if you sent multiple copies of the document to the printer as uncollated.
• The Include Blank Pages check box lets you print pages in your document that are blank.
• The Thumbnails check box lets you print many pages of a document on one sheet of paper as thumbnails.
• The Back to Front check box lets you print a multipage document in reverse order. The last page in the document will print first.
• The Page Sequence drop-down list lets you specify the page sequence for your document. All is the default, and choosing it prints all of the related pages. When you choose Odd, only odd-numbered pages are printed.
When you choose Even, only even-numbered pages are printed.
• The Registration drop-down list lets you specify that crop marks and registration marks print on every page. You can choose Centered or
Off Center.
• To print a large document in tiles (sections), choose a tiling option from the Tiling drop-down list. When you specify tiling, QuarkXPress prints each document page in two or more overlapping tiles. The
Tiling drop-down list of the Document tab lets you choose Manual tiling or Automatic tiling. When you choose Manual, you control the way in which a page is tiled by positioning the ruler origin. When you select Automatic, QuarkXPress determines how many tiles are needed to print each document page, based on the document size, the printer’s media (paper) size, whether or not Absolute Overlap is checked, and the value you enter in the Overlap field (the default overlap is 3").
QuarkXPress prints tickmarks and location information on each tile to aid you in reassembling them. Do not check Absolute Overlap if you want your document centered on the final assembled tiles.
Include Blank Pages and Thumbnails check boxes
Back to Front check box
Page Sequence, Registration, and
Tiling drop-down lists
Bleed field
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.23
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Setup tab
Printer Description and Paper Size drop-down lists
Paper Width, Paper Height, Reduce
or Enlarge fields; Page Positioning drop-down list
• The Bleed field lets you specify a bleed amount for a document. The bleed value is the distance that an item extends beyond the edge of a page.
Setup (dialog box tab)
File
& Print & Setup tab
The Print dialog box Setup tab (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
P
) lets you specify printing information such as printer type, paper size, page orientation, and scale.
• The Printer Description drop-down list lets you specify the appropriate
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file for your PostScript printer.
When you do this, the Paper Size, Paper Width, and Paper Height fields will automatically be filled with default information supplied by the PPD.
If you choose a PPD for an imagesetter, the Paper Offset and Page Gap fields will also be available; check with your service bureau for information.
If you do not have the right PPD, choose a similar built-in, generic PPD.
R PPDs are created by printer manufacturers and are usually supplied with PostScript printers. Contact the appropriate printer manufacturer for more information.
• The Paper Size drop-down list lets you specify the media size used by your printer. To specify the width and height of custom media supported by your printer, choose Custom from the Paper Size drop-down list and enter values in the Paper Width and Paper Height fields.
• The Reduce or Enlarge field let you enter a percentage value to specify that your document print smaller or larger. The default is 100%.
• The Page Positioning drop-down list lets you specify the position of the document on the selected output media. The default Page Posi-
tioning is Left Edge, which positions the top left of the document page on the top left of the selected media. Right Edge positions the top right of the document page on the top right of the selected media.
3.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Center centers the page horizontally and vertically in the imageable area of the selected output media. Center Horizontal centers the page left-to-right in the imageable area. Center Vertical centers the page top-to-bottom in the imageable area.
• The Fit in Print Area check box lets you reduce or enlarge the size of a page in your document to fit the imageable area of the currently selected media.
• Click an Orientation button to specify whether to print in portrait
(vertical) or landscape (horizontal) mode. Portrait orientation is the default, however, if your document page is wider than the paper size selected, landscape orientation is selected automatically.
Fit in Print Area check box and
Orientation buttons
Output (dialog box tab), with color separations off
File
& Print & Output tab
The Print dialog box Output tab lets you specify color, resolution, and halftone screen and value settings. The following Output tab settings for printing are available with color separations off (color separations are specified by checking Separations in the Document tab):
• From the Print Colors drop-down list, choose Black & White, Grayscale, or Composite Color. Black & White prints black and white (no shades of gray) to a black and white printer. Grayscale prints colors as shades of gray to a black and white printer. Composite Color prints colors to a color printer. The options available in the Print Colors drop-down list are determined by the PPD selected in the Printer Description dropdown list (File
& Print & Setup tab).
• Choose Conventional or Printer from the Halftoning drop-down list.
Conventional uses QuarkXPress calculated halftone screen values.
Printer uses halftone screen values effective on the selected printer; in this case, QuarkXPress does not send halftoning information.
Output tab (color separations off)
Print Colors and Halftoning drop-down lists
Resolution field
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.25
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Frequency field
Output tab (color separations on)
Halftoning drop-down list and
Resolution field
• The default resolution for the printer is entered automatically in the
Resolution field. To specify a resolution other than the default, enter a dots per inch (dpi) value in the Resolution field, or make a selection from the Resolution drop-down list.
• The default line frequency for the printer is entered automatically in the Frequency field. To specify a line frequency other than the default, enter a lines per inch (lpi) value in the Frequency field, or make a selection from the Frequency drop-down list.
• The list at the bottom of the Output tab lists Process Black as the only color used to print your document. If a color PPD is selected, the appropriate color plates display in the list.
Output (dialog box tab), with color separations on
File
& Print & Output tab
The Print dialog box Output tab lets you specify color, resolution, and halftone screen and value settings. The following Output tab settings for printing are available with color separations on (color separations are specified by checking Separations in the Print dialog box Document tab):
• From the Plates drop-down list, choose Process & Spot or Convert to
Process. Process & Spot prints all process and spot color plates. Con-
vert to Process converts all colors in your document to process colors and prints process plates.
• Choose Conventional (the only option available when Separations is checked in the Document tab) from the Halftoning drop-down list.
Conventional uses QuarkXPress calculated halftone screen values.
• The default resolution for the printer is entered automatically in the
Resolution field. To specify a resolution other than the default, enter a dots per inch (dpi) value in the Resolution field, or make a selection from the Resolution drop-down list.
3.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• The default line frequency for the printer is entered automatically in the Frequency field. To specify a line frequency other than the default, enter a lines per inch (lpi) value in the Frequency field, or make a selection from the Frequency drop-down list.
• The list at the bottom of the Output tab lists the color Plates used in the document, as well as the default Halftone, Frequency, Angle, and
Function settings. You can change these specifications, for example, when default screen values for certain plates will result in moirés
(undesirable patterns that can result when two or more halftone screens are improperly superimposed when printing), or when you want alternate dot shapes in printed screens.
• Generally, the default settings in the Plates list give you correct printing results. However, there may be special instances where the default settings result in moirés, so you will need to use custom specifications.
For example, the default screen values for spot colors can be set to the value of Process Cyan, Process Magenta, Process Yellow, or Process
Black using the Halftone drop-down list in the Edit Colors dialog box
(Edit
& Colors & New). If you have a blend consisting of two spot colors, you may get moirés if both colors are assigned the same screen values.
• A check mark in the Print column indicates a plate will be printed: The default setting is checked. Uncheck any check mark in the Print column to cancel printing for an individual color separation plate, or select No in the Print drop-down list.
• The Plate column lists all spot colors and process inks used in the document when Separations is checked (File
& Print & Document tab).
• The Halftone drop-down list lets you assign a different process color screen angle, frequency, and function to a spot color, or specify Custom
Frequency field
Plates area
Print and Plates columns
Halftone drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.27
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Frequency drop-down list
Angle drop-down list
Function drop-down list halftoning. The default screen values for spot colors are specified in the
Halftone drop-down list in the Edit Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors &
New). Frequency, Angle, and Function for process colors can be edited in the appropriate corresponding columns in the list.
You can choose Default, C, M, Y, or K to use a preset screen angle, frequency and function; or Custom, to specify a screen angle, frequency and function to a spot color plate. Choosing C, M, Y, or K produces the current angle, frequency, and dot function for the corresponding process color, and it is not editable. When Custom is chosen, the Fre-
quency, Angle, and Function drop-down lists are available for entering custom specifications.
Color Default screen angle
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Black
Spot colors
105.000°
75.000°
90.000°
45.000°
45.000° (if Process Black is selected)
• The Frequency column lists the line screen frequency value. This is the lines per inch (lpi) that will be applied to each of the color plates. When there is a number in the Frequency column (for example, for Process colors, or when you have chosen Custom in the Halftone column), the
Frequency drop-down list becomes available.
Choose Other from the Frequency drop-down list to display the Other dialog box. Enter a lines per inch (lpi) value in the Frequency field; then click OK.
• The Angle column lists the screen angle for each color plate. Choose
Other from the Angle drop-down list to display the Other dialog box.
You can enter a screen angle value in the Angle field.
3.28
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• The Function column drop-down list lists the available dot shape types: Default, Dot, Line, Ellipse, Square, and Tri-Dot. Choose an alternate dot shape type, or keep the default setting.
Options (dialog box tab)
File
& Print & Options tab
The Print dialog box Options tab lets you specify settings useful for reporting PostScript errors, making PostScript dumps, printing negatives, and printing pictures. Settings in the bottom half of the dialog box let you control the way pictures are printed.
• To receive printed PostScript error reporting from QuarkXPress, check
Quark PostScript Error Handler. The Quark PostScript Error Handler utility provides, in addition to PostScript error handling, information about where on a page the PostScript error occurs. If a PostScript error occurs during the printing of a QuarkXPress item (text box, picture box, line, or item created with XTensions software), the utility will print the page containing the QuarkXPress items handled successfully up to the point of the error. The utility will then print an error report containing:
(1) The bounding box of the item in which the error occurred. This box is identified by a black border and a 50% black background. (2) A message at the top left of the page specifying the type of item causing the error. Lay the error report on top of the printed page to isolate the offending item. The bounding box on the error report indicates the location of the object causing the error
Quark PostScript Error Handler is designed for, and will only affect,
PostScript printing. Quark PostScript Error Handler will append its report to any other PostScript error reporting utilities you may be using.
Options tab
Quark PostScript Error Handler check box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.29
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Prepress File check box
Page Flip drop-down list
Negative Print check box
• To print to a PostScript file instead of to a printer, check Prepress File.
Prepress File produces a multipage output that does not include printer driver PostScript code or embedded fonts. Such prepress files are suitable for use with proprietary pre-press systems for operations like color correction, separations, or impositions.
• Make a selection from the Page Flip drop-down list. The Page Flip drop-down list lets you choose from four options: None; Horizontal — to reverse the printing of page images from left to right; Vertical — to print page images upside down; and Horizontal & Vertical — to print page images from left to right, upside down.
• To print negative page images, check Negative Print. When Negative
Print is checked, flipping a page horizontally or vertically will produce right-reading, emulsion down film output, a common standard for commercial printers in the United States.
• To specify how pictures are printed, choose Normal, Low Resolution, or Rough in the Output drop-down list. Normal is the default, and provides high resolution output of placed pictures using the data from the pictures’ source file. Low Resolution prints placed pictures at screen preview resolution. Rough suppresses printout of placed pictures.
• From the Data drop-down list, choose ASCII, Binary, or Clean 8-bit.
Though documents print more quickly in Binary format, ASCII is more portable because it is a standard format readable by a wider range of printers and print spoolers. Clean 8-bit is similar to Binary, except it avoids certain patterns of binary data that are used to communicate with parallel port printers. This may be necessary when printing to an output device connected via a parallel port.
Output drop-down list
3.30
A Guide to QuarkXPress
File Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• To control whether TIFF and EPS pictures are output or OPI (Open Prepress Interface) comments are substituted during output, choose an option from the OPI drop-down list.
Use the default setting, Include Images, when you are not using an OPI server. Include Images does not embed OPI comments for EPS pictures, and if a high resolution file cannot be found for printing, the screen preview is substituted.
Choose Omit TIFF when you are outputting to an OPI prepress system that replaces TIFF pictures only. (Most OPI systems use this method.)
Omit TIFF replaces TIFF pictures with OPI comments in the file. EPS pictures are included; OPI comments for the EPS pictures are not included.
Choose Omit TIFF & EPS when you are outputting to an OPI prepress system that replaces both TIFF and EPS pictures. Omit TIFF & EPS replaces both TIFF and EPS pictures with OPI comments in the file.
(Consult documentation provided by the OPI system manufacturer for more information.)
• Check Overprint EPS Black to force all black elements in imported EPS pictures to overprint (regardless of their overprint settings).
• If you want QuarkXPress to print TIFFs at the full printer resolution,
Check Full Resolution TIFF Output. When you print a TIFF with Full
Resolution TIFF Output selected, QuarkXPress will send the TIFF information to the printer based on the resolution (dpi) of the printing device. If Full Resolution TIFF Output is not selected, a non-line art
TIFF will be downsampled based on the frequency (lpi) setting for the session (line art TIFF are sent at full printer resolution).
OPI drop-down list
Overprint EPS Black and Full
Resolution TIFF Output check boxes
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.31
Preview tab
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Preview (dialog box tab)
File
& Print & Preview tab
The Print dialog box Preview tab lets you view the effect of the settings you made for a print job before it is output. The page icon on the right side of the Preview tab shows you the document page in relationship to its placement on the paper as it comes from the printer. Statistical information about the document page also displays.
Exit
File menu
The Exit command ( CTRL + Q ) lets you close all open files and quit the application. If an open document contains unsaved changes, a Save warning displays and lets you save changes.
Exit command
3.32
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Edit Menu
The QuarkXPress Edit menu gives you options for using the Clipboard, finding and replacing text, changing QuarkXPress default specifications, and creating formatting specifications for a document.
Sections
The Edit menu is divided into six sections:
• The first section lets you reverse or recreate certain actions. If the Undo or Redo command ( CTRL + Z ) is unavailable, the last action you performed cannot be undone.
• The second section lets you edit text, pictures, and items. If the Item tool e is selected, you can cut, copy, paste, or delete active items; or you can select all items on the current page.
If the Content tool
E is selected, you can cut, copy, paste, or delete highlighted text or an active picture; or you can select all the text in the active text chain.
• The third section lets you work with a Microsoft Windows function called Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) which lets you use other applications to draw, edit, and print pictures.
• The fourth section lets you display the Windows Clipboard. The Show
Clipboard command is always available.
• The fifth section lets you find and replace text, style sheets, and character attributes; customize QuarkXPress with preferences; and create and manipulate style sheets, colors, H&Js (hyphenation and justification specifications), lists (for automatic tables), and styles for lines and frames (called dashes and stripes). The commands are always available.
• The sixth section lets you create and manipulate print styles. The Print
Styles command is always available.
Edit menu
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.33
Undo/Redo command
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Undo/Redo (command)
Edit menu
The Undo command (
CTRL
+
Z
) identifies the last action performed and lets you reverse the action. For example, after you apply a style sheet to a paragraph, the menu command reads Undo Style Change. After you choose Undo, the menu command changes to Redo.
The Redo command identifies the last Undo command performed and lets you reimplement that action. For example, if you choose Undo Style
Change, the menu command changes to Redo Style Change. After you choose Redo, the menu command changes back to Undo.
R Undo is not available for every action you perform. A warning usually alerts you if an action cannot be undone.
Cut (command)
Edit menu
When the Item tool e is selected, the Cut command (
CTRL + X ) removes active items and their contents and places them on the Clipboard. When the Content tool
E is selected, the Cut command removes highlighted text or an active picture and places it on the Clipboard.
Copy (command)
Edit menu
When the Item tool e is selected, the Copy command (
CTRL
+
C
) places a copy of active items and their contents on the Clipboard. When the
Content tool
E is selected, the Copy command places a copy of highlighted text or an active picture on the Clipboard. The Copy command does not remove elements from the document.
Cut and Copy commands
3.34
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Paste (command)
Edit menu
The Paste command (
CTRL
+
V
) places the Clipboard’s contents into a document or into a document item as shown in the table below. The ability to paste depends on the selected tool, the contents of the Clipboard, and the active item in the document.
Tool Clipboard contents Active item Paste location e boxes/lines/text paths any
E text center of document window text box/path text insertion point i
E picture picture box
E boxes/lines/text paths none upper left corner of box center of document window
E box or no-content line text box/path anchored at text insertion point i
R If you paste text in a box containing highlighted text, the highlighted text is replaced. If you paste a picture in a box containing a picture, the picture is replaced.
Paste Special (command)
Edit menu
The Paste Special command lets you choose the format of an object that you paste, paste and embed, or paste and link into your document through the use of the Microsoft Windows OLE function. OLE (Object
Linking and Embedding) enables a server application to provide an object to a client application. Using a server application, such as an illustration program, you can copy a picture to the Clipboard as an object.
You are then able to paste, paste and embed, or paste and link the object into the client application, QuarkXPress. If you later want to edit the embedded or linked object, all you have to do is double-click on it with the Content tool
E and the object’s server application launches allowing you to edit it. Paste Special is available for pictures when the Con-
Paste and Paste Special commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.35
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Paste Special dialog box tent tool
E is selected, a picture box is active, and the Clipboard contains a picture copied from an OLE server application.
When an object is simply pasted, no information about the file from which the object came is included. In contrast, embedded and linked objects retain information about their source file, although they do so differently.
When an object is embedded in QuarkXPress, all pertinent data from the source file is included, so that the object is able to transfer itself back into the server application which created it. When an object is linked, all pertinent information is retained in the source file which QuarkXPress accesses when needed. The advantage of an embedded object is that it can be opened in the server application which created it without accessing the source file. The advantage of a linked object is that when a linked object’s source file is updated, the linked object in QuarkXPress is also automatically updated. See Paste/Paste Link (buttons) and As (list) later in this chapter for information about how to link and embed objects.
R Notes on Paste Special
The Paste Special command is part of OLE, not QuarkXPress, and therefore may work differently with other versions of Windows or OLE. Also, not all Windows applications support OLE. For information about a particular application, refer to the documentation for that application.
To find out what server applications are available on your computer, select a picture box with the Content tool
E and choose Insert Object from the Edit menu. The Object Type list displays the file types which can be created with the available server applications.
Paste Special (dialog box)
Edit
& Paste Special
The Paste Special dialog box gives you control over how the object stored on the Clipboard is pasted. Using the controls, you can simply
3.36
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress paste, paste and embed, or paste and link the object. You may also choose to display the object as an icon on-screen.
Source (field)
Edit
& Paste Special
The Source field displays different information depending on whether or not the object on the Clipboard came from a file which was first saved in the server application. If the file was saved before copying, then the location of the file where the object came from is displayed. If the file was not saved, then bitmap image displays.
Source field
Paste/Paste Link (buttons)
Edit
& Paste Special
The Paste and Paste Link buttons are mutually exclusive, meaning only one of them may be selected. If Paste is selected, then the object on the
Clipboard will be simply pasted, or pasted and embedded, depending on the option you choose in the As list. If Paste Link is selected, then the object is pasted with a link to its source file.
R When linking objects, always be sure to save the source file in the server application. If you link an object without saving the source file, QuarkXPress will not be able to access the appropriate information if you need to edit the object in the server application later on. For this same reason, do not delete the source file of a linked object. If you move a source file, use the Links dialog box
(Edit
&
Links
&
Change Source button) to update its location.
As (list)
Edit
& Paste Special
The As list displays all the available formats for pasting the object in the clipboard. What options display is dependent upon which button is selected.
Paste/Paste Link buttons
As list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.37
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Result area
• When the Paste button is selected, you are able to paste the object as an embedded object, a metafile, or a bitmap image. Depending upon the object, different variations of these options display in the As list.
For example, if you copied a chart from Microsoft Excel, then Microsoft
Excel Chart Object and Metafile would display in the As list. If you created an image with MS Paint, then Bitmap Image Object, Metafile, and
Device-Independent Bitmap would display. Choosing the first option
(whose name ends with Object) pastes and embeds, while choosing
Metafile, Bitmap, or Device-Independent Bitmap simply pastes.
• When Paste Link is selected, only one option relating to the server application displays in the As list. For example, if you copied a chart from Microsoft Excel, then only Microsoft Excel Chart would display.
Display As Icon check box and Change
Icon button
Result (area)
Edit
& Paste Special
As soon as you select an available format from the As list, the Result area displays summary information about how that picture will be pasted.
Display As Icon (check box)
Edit
& Paste Special
To display the picture as an icon on-screen, check the Display As Icon check box. This check box is only available when you embed or link the object. When checked, a preview of the icon displays along with the
Change Icon button.
R Displaying a picture as an icon does not influence printing, it is meant solely to speed up screen redraw by maximizing memory which large picture files would otherwise consume.
3.38
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Change Icon (button and dialog box)
Edit
& Paste Special
The Change Icon button opens the Change Icon dialog box. Use the Icon area to select between the current and default icons, or locate a new icon with the From File button and field. If you do not know the exact location of the icon file, use the Browse button to search. All the icons in the location you specify in the From File field display below the field. The text you insert in the Label field displays below the icon in the picture box to help you remember what picture the icon represents.
Change Icon dialog box
Delete (command)
Edit menu
The Delete command deletes active items and their contents, an active picture, or highlighted text from a document. The items and/or contents are not placed on the Clipboard. If you Delete a linked text box, the text in the original box either reflows through subsequent boxes or generates an overflow symbol at the end of the chain.
Select All (command)
Edit menu
When the Item tool e is selected, the Select All command (
CTRL
+
A
) selects all the items on the current spread and its pasteboard. When the
Content tool
E is selected, the Select All command selects all the text in the active box or text chain. The Select All command cannot be used to select all points in a Bézier item; instead, press
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
A while a
Bézier point is active, or double-click a Bézier point to select all Bézier points.
Links (command)
Edit menu
The Links command displays the Links dialog box, which lets you manipulate linked objects within the active document. This command is only available when a linked object is selected with either the Item tool e or the Content
E tool.
Delete, Select All, and Links commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.39
Links dialog box
Menus and Dialog Boxes
R The Links command is part of OLE, not QuarkXPress, and therefore may work differently with other versions of Windows or OLE.
Links (dialog box)
Edit
& Links
In the Links column of the dialog box, all of the linked objects within the active document are shown. If the column is not wide enough to display the entire location of the source file, the beginning part of the path will not be visible. View the Source field below the list to see the entire path of the source file. The Type column and field display the object type. The
Type field may also specify the server application used to create the object.
The Update column shows how the object is updated, either automatically or manually, depending on the option selected in the Update field.
To change how the object is updated, select a link in the list by clicking on it once, and then click the appropriate button in the Update field.
• Choosing Automatic allows QuarkXPress to update the object whenever a change is detected in the source file.
• Choosing Manual updates the object only when you use the Update
Now button described below.
To manipulate a linked object, highlight it in the list and use one of these buttons:
• The Update Now button updates the linked object. When clicked,
QuarkXPress locates the source file and alters the object according to how it was last saved in the source file. Use this button to update the objects which are set to Manual.
• The Open Source button launches the server application which was used to created the object and opens its source file.
3.40
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• The Change Source button displays the Change Source dialog box which lets you relocate a source file that was moved from its original location. It functions like any Windows Open/Save as dialog box.
• The Break Link button breaks the link between the object and its source file. When pressed, a warning displays asking you to confirm that you want to break the link.
R If you break a link, all that remains is the low-resolution picture of the object. Without the link, QuarkXPress will not be able to access the original file to obtain the necessary information to print at higher resolutions.
Change Source dialog box
Object (submenu)
Edit menu
The Object submenu is only available for selected picture boxes which have an embedded or linked object within them. The Object submenu changes according to the object within the selected picture box. For example, if you embed an image from MS Paint in the selected picture box, then the Object submenu changes to the Bitmap Image Object submenu. If you link the image, then the submenu displays Linked Bitmap Image Object. Regardless of the submenu title, two options are listed in the submenu: Edit and
Open. At present time, these two options are synonymous in QuarkXPress, as selecting either one will launch the server application and automatically open the object’s source file.
R From a technical OLE standpoint, the Edit command differs from the Open command. Selecting Edit should allow the client application to take on the editing functions of the server application so that the object may be edited solely within the client application. At the present time, QuarkXPress does not use this capability and therefore opens the server application to edit embedded or linked objects.
Break Link warning
Object submenu
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.41
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Insert Object command
Insert Object dialog box (with Create
New button selected)
Insert Object (command)
Edit menu
The Insert Object command displays the Insert Object dialog box, which lets you create a new object using a server application or retrieve an existing file. This command is available whenever a picture box is selected with either the Content tool
E or the Item e tool.
R The Insert Object command is part of OLE, not QuarkXPress, and therefore may work differently with other versions of Windows or OLE.
Insert Object (dialog box)
Edit
& Insert Object
The Insert Object dialog box differs according to which button, Create
New or Create from File, is selected.
• When Create New is selected, the Object Type list displays all the available server application object types. Select one and view the Result field for summary information about how the object will be inserted. Click the Display As Icon check box to view the object as an icon on-screen and use the Change Icon button to change the default icon. Click OK to launch that application and create an object to place in the picture box. When you do this, QuarkXPress applies the changes you make in the server application to the picture box. When you are done, select
Exit and Return to <QuarkXPress Document Name> from the File menu in the server application. If you plan to link the object later, make sure you save the file in the server application before you exit.
R When you use the Create New button, the object you are about to create cannot be linked and will therefore be automatically embedded. This is because a linked object must have a source file, and since no source file exists yet, linking is not possible. Therefore, if you create a new object and want to link it, first create and save the
3.42
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress object as described above, then re-insert the object in the picture box using the Create from File button.
• When Create from File is selected, the File field displays allowing you to enter the specific location of a file to insert. If you do not know the exact location and file name of the object you want to insert, click the
Browse button to search for the file. Check the Link check box to link the object, otherwise it will be automatically embedded. The Result field displays summary information about how the file will be inserted.
Click the Display As Icon check box to view the object as an icon onscreen and use the Change Icon button to change the default icon.
Show Clipboard, Hide Clipboard (command)
Edit menu
The Show Clipboard command displays the Windows Clipboard. The
Clipboard contains the last item, text, or picture you cut or copied from any application that supports the Windows Clipboard. An item cannot be edited within the Clipboard, and it is erased as soon as another item is copied there.
Find/Change (command)
Edit menu
The Find/Change command (
CTRL
+
F
) displays the Find/Change palette, which lets you search and replace text and/or text attributes (including style sheet, font, size, and type style) in the current story or document.
Find/Change does not work on document and master pages simultaneously. To Find/Change on master pages, first display a master page in the document window (Page
& Display).
Insert Object dialog box (with Create
from File button selected)
Show Clipboard and Find/Change commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.43
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Find/Change palette
Find What, Change To fields
Find/Change (palette)
Edit
& Find/Change
The Find/Change palette lets you specify search parameters, then selectively replace found material. The Find/Change palette stays open in front of other windows until you close it with the close box or press the
ESCAPE key.
Find What/Change To (fields)
Edit
& Find/Change
The text fields in the Find What and Change To areas let you enter search and replacement text. The text fields allow up to 80 characters, including special characters. You can search for variations of a word by entering a wild card character in the Find What text field. For example, searching for “walk\?” would find walks, walked, walking, walker, etc.
To search for Enter
Wild Card (Find only)
CTRL
+?
Tab
CTRL
+
TAB
New Paragraph
New Line
CTRL
CTRL
+
ENTER
+
SHIFT
+
ENTER
New Column
New Box
Previous Box Page #
Current Box Page #
Next Box Page #
Punctuation Space
Flex Space
Backslash
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
+4
CTRL
+. (period)
CTRL
CTRL
+2
+3
+
F
+\
Displays in the field as
\e
\b
\2
\3
\?
\t
\p
\n
\4
\.
\f
\\
R You can insert any Windows ANSI character in the Find What and
Change To fields. Consult the Windows documentation for a listing of the available characters. For convenience, QuarkXPress includes alternate key commands for some of the more popular characters:
• (
ALT
+
SHIFT
+8), † (
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
T
), ¶ (
ALT
+
SHIFT
+7), § (
ALT
+
SHIFT
+6),
™ (
ALT
+
SHIFT
+2), ® (
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
R
), and © (
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
C
).
3.44
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Document/Masters (check box)
Edit
& Find/Change
When Document is checked, QuarkXPress searches the entire document.
When Document is unchecked, QuarkXPress searches only the current story. When choosing Find/Change with a master page displayed, the
Document check box changes to Masters. When Masters is checked, all master pages will be searched; when Masters is unchecked, the selected text box is searched.
Document/Masters check box
Whole Word (check box)
Edit
& Find/Change
Checking Whole Word limits the Find What text to instances bounded by spaces, omitting text buried inside longer words. For example, when Whole
Word is checked, a search for “Quark” will only find “Quark.” When it is unchecked, a search for “Quark” will find the word inside “QuarkXPress.”
Whole Word check box
Ignore Case (check box)
Edit
& Find/Change
Checking Ignore Case lets you find all uppercase and lowercase variations of the Find What text. For example, when Ignore Case is checked, a search for “Quark” will find “quark” or “QUARK.” When finding and changing words with Ignore Case checked, QuarkXPress replaces capitalization patterns as follows:
Found text is all lowercase
ALL UPPERCASE
Capitalized (first character)
Other Capitalization Pattern
Changed text will be all lowercase
ALL UPPERCASE
Capitalized (first character)
Same Case as Text in Change To
Uncheck Ignore Case to find words with specific capitalization patterns and replace them with other capitalization patterns.
Ignore Case check box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.45
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Ignore Attributes check box
Find What area in Find/Change dialog box with Ignore Attributes unchecked
Ignore Attributes (check box)
Edit
& Find/Change
Check Ignore Attributes to let QuarkXPress Find/Change text regardless of its style sheet, font, size, or type style. If Ignore Attributes is unchecked, an expanded palette displays additional Find What and Change To options that let you customize your Find/Change.
Find What (expanded area)
Edit
& Find/Change & (Ignore Attributes unchecked)
The following options appear in the Find What area when Ignore Attrib-
utes is unchecked:
• Check Text to Find/Change specific text. When checked, you must enter the text you want to find or the search will not operate. If you want to search for only text attributes, uncheck the Text box. For details about entering special characters in the Text fields, see “Find What/Change To
(fields)” earlier in this section.
• Check Style Sheet to limit the search to text of a certain paragraph or character style sheet. When checked, the search ignores any text not linked with the style sheet chosen in the drop-down list. Style sheet links are not true “attributes” like Bold or Italic; so, text found by style sheet may vary in appearance if other attributes have been applied locally in the document. To limit this possibility, the other text attribute check boxes can be checked in addition to the Style Sheet check box, or by themselves.
• Check Font to limit the search to text of a certain font. When checked, you can enter or choose a font.
• Check Size to limit the search to text of a certain size. When checked, you can enter or choose a type size from the drop-down list.
3.46
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• Check Type Style to limit the search to text of certain type styles. To omit text of a particular type style from the search, make sure the appropriate type style button remains deselected (white). To force a type style to be included in the search, click it twice to select it. To allow (but not force) a type style to be included in the search, click it once to gray it.
Examples: Selecting Bold and graying Italic will find both Bold and
Bold-Italic but will not find Italic; selecting Bold by itself will find only
Bold. Selecting Bold and Italic will find only Bold-Italic. Graying both
Bold and Italic will find any combination of the two type styles.
Change To area in Find/Change dialog box with Ignore Attributes unchecked
Change To (expanded area)
Edit
& Find/Change & (Ignore Attributes unchecked)
The following options appear in the Change To area when Ignore Attrib-
utes is unchecked:
• Check Text to change found text to the text typed in the Text field.
When unchecked, text is left as it is. For details about entering special characters in the Text fields, see “Find What/Change To text (fields)” earlier in this section.
• Check Style Sheet to apply a paragraph or character style sheet to found text. If other text attribute options in the palette are checked that conflict with the attributes of the style sheet, the style sheet will still be applied, but the other checked attributes will have priority in determining the text’s actual appearance.
• Check Font and enter or choose a font from the drop-down list to change the font in found text. When unchecked, fonts are unchanged.
• Check Size and enter or choose a size to change the text size in found text. When unchecked, sizes are left as they are.
• Check Type Style to change type styles in found text. To remove a particular type style from found text, make sure the appropriate type style
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.47
Find Next button
Change buttons
Menus and Dialog Boxes button remains completely deselected (white). To apply a new type style to found text, click it twice to select it. To leave a type style in found text unchanged, click it once to gray it.
Find Next/Find First (button)
Edit
& Find/Change
The Find Next button lets you start and continue a search. The search starts at the text insertion point i. Find Next changes to the Find First option if you press the
ALT key. Find First lets you start the search from the beginning of the story or document, regardless of the text insertion point i.
Change, then Find; Change; Change All (buttons)
Edit
& Find/Change
The Change buttons let you selectively replace the found instances.
Clicking a Change button will replace the highlighted text with the text in the Change To field.
• Click Change, then Find to replace the found instance using the
Change To specifications, then find the next instance.
• Click Change to replace the found instance using the Change To specifications. Click Find Next to continue the search.
• Click Change All to replace all found instances with the Change To specifications without pausing to confirm the changes.
3.48
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
R To skip a found instance, ignore the Change buttons and click Find
Next. Select Plain to remove all type styles from found text; selecting
Plain deselects all other styles. Underline and Word Underline,
All Caps and Small Caps, also Superscript and Subscript are mutually exclusive type styles.
Preferences (submenu)
Edit menu
Preferences let you specify defaults and customize the way QuarkXPress works. The Preferences submenu lets you choose whether to modify
Application or Document preferences. Application preferences apply to
QuarkXPress; therefore they affect the way all documents are handled.
Document preferences affect only the active document. However, if you change document preferences with no documents open, the new preferences become defaults for all new documents.
Preferences submenu
Application (command)
Edit
& Preferences
The Application command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
Y
) displays the Application
Preferences dialog box, which lets you customize your copy of QuarkXPress.
Changes to Application Preferences affect all documents.
Application command
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.49
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Display tab and Guide Colors area
Color TIFFs drop-down list
Display (dialog box tab)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Display tab
The Application Preferences dialog box Display tab provides controls that let you specify how guides and other elements in the application will appear on-screen for all documents.
Guide Colors (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Display tab
The Guide Colors area lets you specify the color of margin guides, ruler guides, and baseline grid lines displayed on color monitors. These colors are also used when you are working with runaround and clipping paths:
The margin guides color is used to indicate the item, ruler guides color for runaround, and baseline grid color for clipping paths. To specify color for these elements, click the color field next to Margin, Ruler, or Grid. Use the color wheel and controls to select guide colors.
R You can also use these controls to specify the shade that guides display on grayscale monitors.
Color TIFFs (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Display tab
The Color TIFFs drop-down list lets you specify the color depth of screen previews created for color TIFFs when they are imported (using the Get
Picture command [
CTRL
+
E
] in the File menu). The default setting is 8-bit.
• 8-bit: Creates screen previews with 256 possible colors.
• 16-bit: Creates screen previews with thousands of possible colors.
• 32-bit: Creates screen previews with millions of possible colors.
R The Color TIFFs setting only affects the resolution of screen previews; the resolution of the final, printed picture is not affected.
3.50
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Gray TIFFs (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Display tab
The Gray TIFFs drop-down list lets you specify the resolution of screen previews created for grayscale TIFFs when they are imported (using the
Get Picture command [
CTRL
+
E
] in the File menu). The default is 16 levels.
• 16 levels: Creates screen previews with 16 levels of gray for faster screen redraw.
• 256 levels: Creates screen previews with 256 levels of gray from pictures scanned at this level.
R The Gray TIFFs setting affects the resolution of screen previews only; the resolution of the final, printed picture is not affected.
Display DPI Value (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Display tab
The Display DPI Value field lets you calibrate your monitor so that it displays the best representation of your document on-screen. Enter the number of dots per inch (dpi) your monitor displays in the field. You can check the accuracy of the display by measuring the horizontal ruler in a
QuarkXPress document with a pica pole or ruler. If one inch on the horizontal ruler is larger than one inch on the pica pole or ruler, enter a smaller number in the Display DPI Value field. If one inch on the horizontal ruler is smaller than one inch on the pica pole or ruler, enter a larger number in the Display DPI Value field.
R The maximum zoom is dependent on the value in the Display DPI
Value field. Any value greater than 85 dpi will decrease the maximum zoom. For example, at the default value of 96 dpi, the maximum zoom is only 711%.
Gray TIFFs drop-down list
Display DPI Value field
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.51
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Interactive tab
Scrolling and Quotes areas
Interactive (dialog box tab)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Interactive tab
The Application Preferences dialog box Interactive tab provides controls that let you customize how scrolling and other “on-the-fly” actions will behave.
Scrolling (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Interactive tab
The Scrolling area lets you specify how fast documents scroll and how documents update.
• Drag the Scrolling slider between Slow and Fast to specify the speed at which documents scroll when you press the scroll arrows on a document window.
• Check Speed Scroll to temporarily greek pictures and blends for faster scrolling. (Pictures that are already displayed when you start scrolling will not be greeked unless you scroll them out of the document window.) The default is checked.
• Check Live Scroll to update the document view as you drag the scroll boxes in document window scroll bars. The default is unchecked. To turn Live Scroll on and off while you are scrolling, press the ALT key as you drag a scroll box.
Quotes (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Interactive tab
The Quotes drop-down list and the Smart Quotes check box let you choose a style for converting and typing quotation marks.
• To specify the default characters to be used with Smart Quotes and with the Convert Quotes option in the Get Text dialog box (File
& Get Text), choose an option from the Quotes drop-down list. The default is “”.
3.52
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• Check Smart Quotes to force QuarkXPress to automatically replace feet and inches marks '," with the chosen quotation marks as you type. The default is checked.
R To type straight quotes to abbreviate feet (') or inches (") when Smart
Quotes is enabled, press
CTRL
+' for feet (') or
CTRL
+
ALT
+' for inches (").
Delayed Item Dragging (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Interactive tab
These three controls let you determine how QuarkXPress will display when you press the mouse button and delay before dragging an item.
• When Show Contents is enabled and you press-and-hold before dragging an item, QuarkXPress will display the contents (text or picture) of the item as you drag it.
• When Live Refresh is enabled and you press-and-hold before dragging an item, QuarkXPress will display the contents (text or picture) of the item as you drag it, and it will also refresh the screen for an accurately updated display that includes item layering and text flow.
• The Delay seconds field lets you specify the amount of time (in seconds) required to press-and-hold to enable Show Contents or Live
Refresh before dragging an item. The default is 0.5 seconds.
Range
0.1 to 5
Measurement system seconds
Smallest increment
0.001
Drag and Drop Text (check box)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Interactive tab
Checking Drag and Drop Text lets you cut, copy, and paste text in a story with the mouse rather than with menu or keyboard commands.
The default is unchecked.
Delayed Item Dragging area
Drag and Drop Text check box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.53
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Show Tool Tips check box and Paste-
board Width field
• To cut and paste, highlight the text; then drag it to a new location.
• To copy and paste, highlight the text, then press the
SHIFT key while you drag it to a new location.
Show Tool Tips (check box)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Interactive tab
Check Show Tool Tips to make QuarkXPress display the names of tools or palette icons when you place your pointer above them. The default is unchecked.
Pasteboard Width (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Interactive tab
The Pasteboard Width field lets you specify the width of the Pasteboard on either side of the page or spread. Pasteboard width is measured as a percentage of the document width. The width of the document plus the pasteboard cannot exceed 48". The default Pasteboard Width is 100%.
At least .5" of pasteboard will always surround document pages.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Save (dialog box tab)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Save tab
The Application Preferences dialog box Save tab provides controls that let you you customize how QuarkXPress saves and performs backups of your document.
3.54
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Auto Save (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Save tab
Checking Auto Save protects your work from system or power failure.
When checked, QuarkXPress will automatically record document changes to a temporary file in your document folder according to a specified time interval. Enter the interval (in minutes) in the Every minutes field. The default setting has Auto Save checked at an interval of Every 5 minutes.
QuarkXPress will not overwrite the original file until you manually save
(File
& Save). When you open the document after a system interruption,
QuarkXPress displays a warning indicating that the document will be restored to the last auto save version. If your last manual save is preferable to your last auto save, you can choose Revert to Saved after you open the document to restore the last manual save. The default is unchecked.
R The Revert to Saved command (File
& Revert to Saved) reverts to the last manually saved version of a document regardless of your Auto
Save settings. Pressing the
ALT key while you choose File
& Revert to
Saved reverts to the last auto-saved version of a document.
Save tab and Auto Save area
Auto Backup (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Save tab
Check Auto Backup and enter a value in the Keep revisions field to retain up to 100 revisions of a document. Each time you manually save
(File
& Save), QuarkXPress copies the previous manually-saved version to the Destination folder you specify. The default is unchecked.
• Click Document Folder to store revisions in the same folder with the document.
• Click Other Folder to choose a folder other than the document folder for storing revisions. Click Browse to display the Browse for Folder dialog box, then choose or create a folder and click OK to close the dialog box. The name of the selected Folder displays.
Auto Backup area
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.55
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Auto Library Save and Save
Document Position check boxes
XTensions tab and Show XTensions
Manager at Startup area
Consecutive numbers are added to the name of the original document for each backup. When the last revision is created (for example, 5 of 5), the oldest revision in the folder is deleted. To retrieve a backup from the destination folder, open it like any other QuarkXPress document.
Auto Library Save (check box)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Save tab
Checking Auto Library Save causes changes to be saved to a QuarkXPress library file whenever you add an entry to it. The default is unchecked.
Save Document Position (check box)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & Save tab
Check Save Document Position if you want QuarkXPress to automatically remember the size, position, and proportions of your document window.
The default is checked.
XTensions (dialog box tab)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & XTensions tab
The Application Preferences dialog box XTensions tab provides controls that let you customize the built-in XTensions Manager.
Show XTensions Manager at Startup (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Application & XTensions tab
This area lets you specify whether the XTensions Manager dialog box displays when you launch QuarkXPress, and if so, under what circumstances. The XTensions Manager is a utility that lets you enable or disable individual XTensions or sets of XTensions directly from QuarkXPress.
(XTensions are add-on software modules that customize the feature set of
QuarkXPress.)
• Choose Always if you want the XTensions Manager dialog box to display automatically every time you launch QuarkXPress.
3.56
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• Choose When and check XTensions folder changes if you want the
XTensions Manager dialog box to display during launch only after you have added or removed XTensions from your XTensions folder.
• Choose When and check Error loading XTensions occurs if you want the XTensions Manager dialog box to display during launch only when QuarkXPress encounters a problem loading XTensions.
Document (command)
Edit
& Preferences & Document
The Document command (
CTRL
+
Y
) displays the Document Preferences dialog box, which lets you customize the default settings of a QuarkXPress document. Changes made to Document Preferences affect only the open document, but all new documents will inherit the preferences specified while no document is open.
R Any changes you make in QuarkXPress while no document is open determine the default settings for every document you create from then on. This includes not only Document Preferences, but also changes to specifications like colors, style sheets, and H&Js.
Document command
General (dialog box tab)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Document Preferences dialog box General tab lets you specify miscellaneous defaults for page layout such as the measuring units used by document rulers and the snap distance for guides.
Horizontal Measure, Vertical Measure (drop-down lists)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Horizontal Measure and Vertical Measure drop-down lists let you specify the measurement system for the rulers displayed along the top and left of the document window. Horizontal corresponds to the top ruler; Vertical corresponds to the left ruler.
General tab
Horizontal and Vertical Measure drop-down lists
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.57
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Auto Page Insertion drop-down list
System Abbreviation
Inches in or "
Inches Decimal in or " with a decimal
Picas
Points p pt
Millimeters
Centimeters
Ciceros
Agates mm cm c ag
Measurement inches in eighths inches in tenths
1 /
6
" or 12 points
1 /
72
" or 1 points
0.04 inches
0.39 inches
0.179 inches
0.071 inches
• Several other aspects of the user interface are affected by these two dropdown lists, including the default X and Y coordinates in the Measure-
ments palette. However, no matter what the default, you can usually specify any measurement system in a field by following the numerical value with one of the abbreviations shown above.
• QuarkXPress automatically converts font size, frame width, and line width to points, regardless of the measurement system you choose.
Auto Page Insertion (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
Auto Page Insertion options let you determine whether pages are inserted automatically to contain text overflow from an automatic text box or a chain of text boxes (on a page associated with a master page that contains an automatic text box). The drop-down list also lets you determine where any pages will be inserted.
• Choose Off to disable Auto Page Insertion.
• The End of Story option is the default. It places new pages immediately after the page that contains the last text box in the chain that overflows.
Inserted pages use the master page format of the page containing the overflow.
3.58
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• The End of Section option places new pages at the end of the section in which the overflow occurs. Inserted pages use the master page format of the last page in the section.
• The End of Document option places new pages at the end of the document. Inserted pages use the master page format of the last page of the document.
R Text overflow causes pages to be automatically inserted only if
(1) Auto Page Insertion is enabled; (2) the master page that will be used has a default text chain (as indicated by the intact chain icon u in the upper left corner of the master page); or (3) the overflow is from the text box defined on the master page as the automatic text box or from a chain of at least two text boxes. If there is no automatic text chain on the applied master page (as indicated by the broken chain icon
U), QuarkXPress will not add pages during overflow, regardless of the Auto Page Insertion setting.
Framing drop-down list
Framing (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Framing drop-down list lets you specify whether frames are placed inside or outside text and picture boxes.
• When you place a frame Inside a text box, the distance between the text and the frame is determined by the box’s Text Inset value
(Item
& Modify). Additionally, when you place a frame Inside a picture box, the frame overlaps, or “crops,” the picture. Inside is the default.
• A frame placed Outside a box increases the box’s width and height.
The frame cannot extend beyond a constraining box or the pasteboard.
R If you change the Framing setting while working on a document, only subsequently created boxes use the new setting.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.59
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Guides drop-down list
Item Coordinates drop-down list
Auto Picture Import drop-down list
Guides (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Guides drop-down list lets you specify whether ruler guides and page guides are placed In Front of or Behind all items on a page. The default is Behind.
Item Coordinates (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Item Coordinates drop-down list lets you specify whether the increments of the horizontal ruler repeat from zero for each Page or are continuous across a Spread. This setting determines the coordinates of items displayed in fields. The default is Page.
Auto Picture Import (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Auto Picture Import drop-down list controls whether QuarkXPress automatically updates pictures that have been modified since you last opened a document. QuarkXPress can locate pictures for which there is a path between the picture file and the QuarkXPress document. The default is Off.
• To enable Auto Picture Import, choose On. When you open a document, QuarkXPress automatically reimports modified pictures into the document using the modified files. All of your content specifications
(scaling, positioning, etc.) are retained. To disable Auto Picture Import, choose Off.
• To receive a warning before QuarkXPress imports modified pictures, choose On (verify). The warning gives you the option of opening the document with or without updating the pictures. If you choose to update the pictures, QuarkXPress displays the Missing/Modified Pictures dialog box with missing and modified pictures listed. You can use this dialog
3.60
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress box to view these pictures in the document and to update the pictures selectively.
Master Page Items (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
A master item is an item on the document page that is automatically placed when you apply a master page. When you apply a new master page to a document page, unmodified master items (placed by the original master page) on the document page are deleted, but modified master items may or may not be deleted. The Master Page Items drop-down list lets you specify.
• Choose Keep Changes if you want modified master items on your document pages to remain when a new master page is applied. The items that are kept are no longer master items. Keep Changes is the default.
• Choose Delete Changes if you want modified master items on your document pages to be deleted when a new master page is applied.
New master pages are applied to document pages whenever you (1) drag and drop a master page icon from the master page area in the Document
Layout palette onto a document page icon in the Document Layout palette (View
& Show Document Layout); (2) delete a master page that is applied to document pages using the Document Layout palette; or (3) add, delete, or move an odd number of pages in a facing-page document.
R If you change the Master Page Items setting while working on a document, only subsequent applications of new master pages use the new setting.
Master Page Items drop-down list
Points/Inch field
Points/Inch (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Points/Inch field lets you override the default value of 72 points per inch. QuarkXPress uses the value here as the basis for all point and pica
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.61
Ciceros/cm field
Snap Distance field
Menus and Dialog Boxes measurements, as well as all point- and pica-to-inch conversions. The desktop publishing standard for points per inch is 72. However, the traditional typographic standard used on most metal typographic rulers is usually approximately 72.27 or 72.307.
Range
60 to 80 pts
Measurement system points
Smallest increment
.001
R If you change the number in the Points/Inch field, the physical size of your text and other QuarkXPress elements is not altered.
However, to stay consistent with the changed Points/Inch value without altering or reflowing your document, the Measurements palette displays a new numerical value for text size, etc.
Ciceros/cm (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Ciceros/cm field lets you specify a ciceros-to-centimeter conversion value different from the standard 2.1967.
Range
2 to 3 c
Measurement system ciceros
Smallest increment
.0001
Snap Distance (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Snap Distance field lets you change the 6-pixel default distance at which objects snap to page guides when Snap to Guides is selected
(View menu).
Range
1 to 216
Measurement system pixels
Smallest increment
1
3.62
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Greek Below (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
When you check Greek Below and enter a value in the field, QuarkXPress speeds screen redraw by displaying gray bars in place of text smaller than a certain view size. Greeking does not affect printing.
Text greeking is affected by the viewing percentage. For example, if the
Greek Below value is 7 point, all text below 7 points will be greeked in
Actual Size view (View menu). If you choose 200% view, text below
3.5 points will be greeked, and so on. The default setting is 7 points.
Range
2 to 720 pt
Measurement system points
Smallest increment
.001
Greek Pictures (check box)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Greek Pictures check box lets you specify that QuarkXPress display imported pictures as grayed images. Selecting a box that contains a greeked picture displays the picture normally. The default is unchecked.
Accurate Blends (check box)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Accurate Blends check box lets you control the display of two-color blends on 8-bit (256-color) monitor setups. To display blends without banding and with more accurate colors, check Accurate Blends. For faster display of blends, uncheck Accurate Blends. On monitors driven by 16-bit or 24-bit video boards, blends always display as if Accurate
Blends was checked. You create blends for box backgrounds via the Col-
ors palette (View menu). The default is checked.
Greek Below field
Greek Pictures check box
Accurate Blends check box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.63
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Auto Constrain check box
Paragraph tab
Auto Leading field
Auto Constrain (check box)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab
The Auto Constrain check box lets you specify that QuarkXPress automatically create hierarchical relationships among newly created items.
When you check Auto Constrain, every item you create or paste into the document is constrained by the borders of a box stacked behind it if those borders surround the borders of the new box. Every box you create automatically becomes capable of constraining another item. The default is unchecked.
• Constraining is a group attribute; checking Auto Constrain means that when you create new items, you are creating constrained groups.
• Use the Unconstrain and the Ungroup commands in the Item menu to unconstrain and ungroup automatically constrained and grouped items.
R You cannot resize or move constrained items beyond their constraining boxes, and most actions (such as moving or deleting) that you apply to constraining boxes affect their constrained items as well.
Paragraph (dialog box tab)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Paragraph tab
The Document Preferences dialog box Paragraph tab lets you specify how mathematically-based paragraph formats such as auto leading are calculated in QuarkXPress.
Auto Leading (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Paragraph tab
Auto leading is what QuarkXPress uses to automatically set line spacing.
It can be applied to a paragraph by entering “auto” or “0” in the Leading field in the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box
(Style
& Leading). Unlike absolute-leaded paragraphs (which apply identical line spacing above every line), auto-leaded paragraphs may include
3.64
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress differently leaded lines when fonts and font sizes are mixed in the same paragraph.
Auto leading starts with a base amount of leading, which QuarkXPress calculates by looking at the ascent and descent values built into the fonts used in an auto-leaded line and the line above it; however, the user-specified text size (Style
& Size) plays the largest part in determining this base amount. Finally, a value specified by the user in the Auto Leading field is added to the base amount to arrive at the total amount of leading.
• To specify percentage-based auto leading, enter a value from 0–100% in
1% increments. The default is 20%. This value determines the leading value between two lines of text as follows: The largest font size in the line above is multiplied by the percentage value. This outcome is added to the base amount of auto leading between the two lines. Although the design of certain fonts complicates the process, here is a simplified example: 10-point text styled consistently in an “untroublesome” font that is leaded with Auto Leading set to 20% is leaded to 12 points
(10 pts + [20% of 10] = 12 pts).
• To specify incremental auto leading, enter a value preceded by a + or – character from –63 points to +63 points using any measurement system. Entering “+5” will add 5 points of leading to the base amount of auto leading; entering “+5 mm” will add 5 millimeters.
R When you change the value in the Auto Leading field, text baselines in auto-leaded paragraphs are automatically re-spaced.
Leading Mode (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Paragraph tab
The Leading Mode drop-down list lets you specify the leading method used to space lines of text.
Leading Mode drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.65
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Maintain Leading check box
Baseline Grid area
• Choose Typesetting mode if you want leading to be measured upward from the baseline on one line of text to the baseline of the line above.
This is the method preferred by most typesetters and is the default.
• Choose Word Processing mode if you want leading to be measured downward from the top of the ascent on one line of text to the top of the ascent on the line below it.
Maintain Leading (check box)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Paragraph tab
The Maintain Leading check box lets you control the placement of a line of text that falls immediately below an obstruction in a column or box. If Maintain Leading is checked, the line’s baseline is placed according to its applied leading value. If Maintain Leading is unchecked, the ascent of the line will abut the bottom of the obstruction or any applied runaround value (Item
& Runaround). The default is checked.
Baseline Grid (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Paragraph tab
A baseline grid is a document-wide grid to which you can lock the baselines of text in paragraphs. When you lock text baselines in adjacent columns to the grid, the baselines align across columns. You can display the baseline grid via the Show Baseline Grid command (View menu).
• Enter a value in the Start field to determine how far from the top of the page the first line of the grid is placed. The default value is 0.5".
• Enter a value in the Increment field to determine the amount of space between the grid’s baselines. The default value is 12 points.
Increment range Measurement system
1 to 144 pt points
Smallest increment
.001
3.66
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
R To lock selected paragraphs to the grid, check Lock to Baseline
Grid in the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box
(Style
& Formats).
Hyphenation Method (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Paragraph tab
The Hyphenation Method drop-down list lets you specify the method
QuarkXPress uses to automatically hyphenate paragraphs when there is no corresponding entry found in your Hyphenation Exceptions dictionary.
The setting you choose affects only paragraphs for which Auto Hyphen-
ation (Edit
& H&Js) is enabled.
• Choose Standard to hyphenate using the algorithm built into versions of QuarkXPress prior to 3.1. Documents created in versions of
QuarkXPress prior to 3.1 default to Standard when they are opened in version 3.1 or later.
• Enhanced lets you hyphenate using the algorithm built into QuarkXPress as of version 3.1.
• Expanded uses the same algorithm as Enhanced but checks any built-in hyphenation dictionaries before resorting to the algorithm. This is the default method for documents created in this version of QuarkXPress.
R Documents created in previous versions of QuarkXPress maintain their hyphenation method (Standard or Enhanced) when opened in a newer version. If you choose Expanded for these documents, text reflow may occur.
Hyphenation Method drop-down list
Character tab
Character (dialog box tab)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Character tab
The Document Preferences dialog box Character tab lets you specify how mathematically-based typographical styles such as Superscript and
Subscript are calculated in QuarkXPress.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.67
Superscript area
Subscript area
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Superscript (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Character tab
The Superscript area lets you control the placement and scale (size) of superscript characters.
• The Offset value determines how high above the baseline QuarkXPress places a superscript character. Offset is measured as a percentage of font size. The default value is 33%.
• VScale determines the vertical size of the character and is a percentage of font size. HScale determines width and is a percentage of the normal font-designer-specified character width. The defaults are 100%.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Subscript (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Character tab
The Subscript area lets you control the placement and scale (size) of subscript characters.
• The Offset value determines how high above the baseline QuarkXPress places a subscript character. Offset is measured as a percentage of font size. The default value is 33%.
• VScale determines the vertical size of the character and is a percentage of font size. HScale determines width and is a percentage of the normal font-designer-specified character width. The defaults are 100%.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
3.68
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Small Caps (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Character tab
The Small Caps area lets you control the scale of small cap characters.
VScale determines the vertical size of the character and is measured as a percentage of font size. HScale determines width and is measured as a percentage of the normal font-designer-specified character width. The default value for both scales is 75%.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Superior (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Character tab
The Superior area lets you control the scale of superior characters. VScale determines the vertical size of the character and is measured as a percentage of font size. HScale determines width and is measured as a percentage of the normal font-designer-specified character width. The default value for both scales is 50%.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Auto Kern Above (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Character tab
Checking the Auto Kern Above check box lets you specify that
QuarkXPress use the kerning tables, built into most fonts, to control intercharacter spacing. The Auto Kern Above field lets you specify the point size above which automatic kerning should be used. Auto Kern Above also implements custom tracking information specified with Tracking
Edit (Utilities menu). The default is checked, with a 4-point threshold.
Small Caps area
Superior area
Auto Kern Above field
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.69
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Flex Space Width field
Standard em space check box
Accents for All Caps check box
Range
2 to 720 pt
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Flex Space Width (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Character tab
A flexible space is a user-modifiable variation of a standard en space, used when a typical space is not aesthetically pleasing. The Flex Space Width field lets you change the default 50% width of a flexible space. To create a breaking flexible space, enter
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+5; to create a nonbreaking flexible space, enter
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+5.
The Flex Space Width value is expressed as a percentage of the normal en space for a given font and font size.
Range
1 to 400%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Standard em space (check box)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Character tab
An em space is made of two en spaces; you insert an en space in text by entering
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+6. Checking Standard Em Space specifies an em space equivalent to the point size of the text (for example, 24-point text has a
24-point em space). If Standard Em Space is unchecked, QuarkXPress uses the width of the two zeros in the current font as the em space width. The default is unchecked.
Accents for All Caps (check box)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Character tab
The Accents for All Caps check box lets you specify whether to include accent marks on accented characters with the All Caps type style applied.
The default is checked.
3.70
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
R The Accents for All Caps feature applies to documents created in
QuarkXPress 3.2 or later. You can update an earlier document’s text flow to take advantage of improvements such as Accents for All Caps by pressing the
ALT key while you click Open in the Open dialog box.
Tool (dialog box tab)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Tool tab
The Document Preferences dialog box Tool tab lets you specify default characteristics for the Zoom tool
Z and for the items created by the various item creation tools.
R You can also access the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box by double-clicking an item creation tool or the Zoom tool
Z in the Tool palette.
Tool tab
Tools (list)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Tool tab
Choose the tool or tools whose default settings you want to change by clicking their icons in the Tools list. To choose more than one tool to modify at a time,
CTRL
+click the tools you want. You can also
SHIFT
+click to select a range of tools.
Tools list
Modify (button)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Tool tab
Click Modify to change the default attributes for items created by the selected item creation tool(s). For example, if you wanted all future text boxes to have a 3-point border width, you could specify that by selecting the text box creation tool and clicking Modify.
• All of the tools in the Tools list are item creation tools with the exception of the Zoom tool
Z. The Modify button is not available when the Zoom tool
Z is selected.
Modify button
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.71
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Default Prefs and Select Similar
Types buttons
Select Similar Shapes and Default
Tool Palette buttons
• Clicking Modify displays the Modify dialog box. This Modify dialog box is the same one available for selected items through the Item menu
(Item
& Modify), but some controls (such as those that determine position and size) are omitted. When you click Modify with more than one tool selected, the Modify dialog box may provide a more limited set of options common to all tools selected. See “Modify (dialog box)” in the
“Item Menu” section in this chapter.
Default Prefs (button)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Tool tab
If you have modified the preferences for a tool and want to change them back, select the tool(s) from the list and click Default Prefs.
Select Similar Types (button)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Tool tab
To quickly select multiple tools of similar type in the list (for example, all picture box tools when you have a picture box tool selected, or all line tools when you have a line tool selected), select a tool from the list, then click Select Similar Types. Click Modify to edit preferences common to all the selected tools.
Select Similar Shapes (button)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Tool tab
To quickly select two tools of similar shape in the list (for example, both rectangular box tools p T), select a tool from the list, then click Select
Similar Shapes. Click Modify to edit preferences common to both tools.
Default Tool Palette (button)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Tool tab
If you have made modifications to the QuarkXPress Tool palette and you want to restore the original palette, click Default Tool Palette. This but-
3.72
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress ton affects only the palette itself and not the preferences made using the
Modify button.
View Scale (area)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Tool tab
The View Scale area is available when the Zoom tool
Z is selected in the Tools list. The View Scale area lets you control the range and the increment of the view change when you click (or
ALT
+click to reduce) a document with the Zoom tool
Z.
• The Minimum field determines the smallest document view the Zoom tool
Z can display.
• The Maximum field determines the largest document view the Zoom tool
Z can display.
• The Increment field determines the percent of change in view for each time you click the Zoom tool
Z. The default is 25%.
Range
10 to 800%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
R The maximum zoom is dependent on the value in the Display DPI
Value field (Edit
&
Preferences
&
Application
&
Display tab). Any value greater than 85 dpi will decrease the maximum zoom. For example, at the default value of 96 dpi, the maximum zoom is only 711%.
Trapping (dialog box tab)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Trapping tab
The Document Preferences dialog box Trapping tab lets you specify defaults for the way QuarkXPress traps colors and objects when you color separate a document.
View Scale area
Trapping tab
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.73
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Trapping Method drop-down list
Trapping Method (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Trapping tab
The Trapping Method drop-down list lets you specify the method
QuarkXPress uses to determine the trapping relationship between object colors and background colors.
• Choose Absolute to trap using the values in the Auto Amount and Inde-
terminate fields according to the object and background colors involved.
If the object color is darker, the background chokes the object color by the
Auto Amount value. If the object color is lighter, the object is spread into the background by the Auto Amount value. Absolute is the default.
• Choose Proportional to trap using the value in the Auto Amount field multiplied by the difference between the luminosity (lightness or brightness) of the object color and background color. Proportional trapping compares the luminosity of the object color and background color to determine how different they are, and applies trapping accordingly.
• Choose Knockout All to turn trapping off.
Process Trapping (drop-down list)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Trapping tab
The Process Trapping drop-down list can be turned On or Off. The default is On.
• When Process Trapping is On, QuarkXPress traps each process separation plate individually when a page contains overlapping process colors. When you print color separations, QuarkXPress compares the darkness of each process component of an object color to the darkness of the corresponding process component of the background color, then traps accordingly.
For example, the shade of cyan in an object color is compared to the shade of cyan in the background color; similar comparisons are made for the other plates that will be output.
3.74
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• When abutting process colors have an Absolute trapping relationship, and
Process Trapping is On, QuarkXPress divides the Auto Amount trapping value in half, and applies the resulting value to the darker component of the color on each plate (as shown in the table). Dividing the value among plates creates a smoother trap while providing the same area of overlap.
C
M
Y
K
Color Obj.
Bkgd.
Absolute trap
70% 30%
30% 50%
70% 80%
20% 15%
Proportional trap
+
1
–
1
/
2 trap amount Auto Amount (70%–30%)/2
–
1
/
2 trap amount Auto Amount (30%–50%)/2
+
1
/
2 trap amount Auto Amount (70%–80%)/2
/
2 trap amount Auto Amount (20%–15%)/2
• When abutting process colors have a Proportional trapping relationship, QuarkXPress multiplies the Auto Amount value specified in the
Trapping tab by the difference in darkness between the object color and the background color. The resulting trapping value is then applied as explained above for colors with Absolute trapping relationships.
• When Process Trapping is Off, QuarkXPress traps all process components equally using the trapping value associated with the object color relative to the background color.
R For text up to 24 points and small items (dimensions up to 10 points),
QuarkXPress attempts to preserve the item’s shape during process trapping by not allowing automatic spreads or chokes when the item’s shape would be compromised. QuarkXPress does this by comparing the darkness of each process component of an item to the darkness of its entire background. A spread is applied only when the process components of an item are less than or equal to half the darkness of its background. A choke is applied only when the process components of a background are less than or equal to half the darkness of the item in front of it.
Process Trapping drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.75
Auto Amount field
Indeterminate field
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Auto Amount (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Trapping tab
The Auto Amount field lets you control the amount of trapping that
QuarkXPress applies to object and background colors that have an Auto
Amount (+/–) relationship specified in the Trap Specifications dialog box
(Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap) or Trap Information palette (View & Show
Trap Information). The default is .144 point.
Range
0 to 36 pt
Measurement system points
Smallest increment
.001
You can also choose Overprint from the field’s drop-down list. This causes object and background colors with Auto Amount (+/–) specified in the
Trap Specifications dialog box or Trap Information palette to overprint.
Indeterminate (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Trapping tab
The Indeterminate field lets you specify the amount of trapping
QuarkXPress applies to object colors that are in front of indeterminate backgrounds (multiple colors with conflicting trapping relationships or imported pictures). The default is .144 point.
Range
±36 pt
Measurement system points
Smallest increment
.001
You can also choose Overprint from the field’s drop-down list. This causes object colors to overprint Indeterminate Backgrounds.
3.76
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Knockout Limit (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Trapping tab
The Knockout Limit value (expressed as a percentage of luminosity of the object color compared to the background color) lets you control the point at which an object color knocks out a background color. The default is 0%.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Overprint Limit (field)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Trapping tab
The Overprint Limit value controls the following:
• Although the default color Black overprints by default, objects colored
Black with shade values below the Overprint Limit will not overprint.
• Any object that has a color that is set to Overprint (in the Trap Specifi-
cations dialog box) and that has a shade value below the Overprint
Limit will not overprint.
• If the value of the black component of a rich black is below the overprint limit, rich black trapping will not occur. See “Creating and Using a Rich
Black” in Chapter 16, “Trapping.”
For example, if you enter 95% in this field, a 90% shaded object that has a color set to Overprint a background color (in the Trap Specifications dialog box) will not overprint, but will instead trap according to the Auto
Amount value specified. The default Overprint Limit is 95%.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Knockout Limit and Overprint fields
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.77
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Ignore White check box
Style Sheets command
Ignore White (check box)
Edit
& Preferences & Document & Trapping tab
The Ignore White check box lets you specify that an object color in front of multiple background colors — including white — not take white into account when trapping. The default is checked.
• When Ignore White is unchecked, all items overprint a white background (overprint is treated as an infinite choke). If an object color is in front of both a white background and a background color against which the object color is specified to spread, the object color will trap to the indeterminate color.
• If an object color is in front of both a white background and two or more background colors to which the object color is specified to choke, the object color will choke (trap) using the smallest choke value.
Style Sheets (command)
Edit menu
Style sheets let you group paragraph formats, character attributes, rules, and tab settings so they can all be applied collectively with one action.
The Style Sheets command ( SHIFT +F11) displays the Style Sheets dialog box, which lets you create and manage paragraph and character style sheets. You apply style sheets to text using the Paragraph Style Sheet or
Character Style Sheet command in the Style menu, keyboard commands, or the Style Sheets palette (View
& Style Sheets).
R Style sheets created when no documents are open are included with all subsequently created documents; style sheets created when a document is active are specific to that document.
3.78
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Style Sheets (dialog box)
Edit
& Style Sheets
The Style Sheets dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, and delete paragraph and character style sheets. You can also append style sheets from another document.
There are two lists. The top list displays a list of style sheets according to the choice you make in the Show drop-down list. The bottom list provides a list of the major attributes contained by a style sheet highlighted in the top list. Paragraph style sheet names are preceded by a
π icon, and character style sheets are preceded by an
Ø icon.
Show (drop-down list)
Edit
& Style Sheets
The Show drop-down list determines which style sheets are displayed in the Style Sheets dialog box list.
• Choose All Style Sheets to display all the style sheets available to the document. When no document is open, only style sheets that are defaults for all documents are displayed.
• Choose Paragraph Style Sheets to display only paragraph style sheets.
Paragraph style sheets are style sheets that contain paragraph formatting and are applied to an entire paragraph. Each paragraph style sheet also contains one default character style sheet.
• Choose Character Style Sheets to display only character style sheets.
Character style sheets are style sheets that contain only character formatting and can be applied exclusively to highlighted text.
• Choose Style Sheets In Use to display only those style sheets that have been applied to text somewhere in the active document.
• Choose Style Sheets Not Used to display only those style sheets that are unused in the text of the active document.
Style Sheets dialog box
Show drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.79
New button
Menus and Dialog Boxes
R The Normal paragraph and character style sheets are always available to all documents. QuarkXPress automatically applies the Normal paragraph style and Normal character style sheet to all newly created text boxes. The Normal paragraph style sheet can only contain the
Normal character style sheet. Default paragraph formats and character attributes for newly created text boxes are determined by the specifications in the Normal paragraph and character style sheets.
You can edit these attributes at any time. To globally change the Normal paragraph and character style sheets so that changes apply to all new documents, edit both style sheets with no document open.
New (drop-down button)
Edit
& Style Sheets
The New drop-down button lets you create up to 1,000 default and/or document-specific style sheets. The drop-down button has two options:
Paragraph and Character.
• Choose
ππ Paragraph to create a style sheet that contains paragraph attributes. (Paragraph style sheets also contain a default character style sheet.) The Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box displays.
• Choose
Ø ter attributes. The Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box displays.
3.80
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Edit (button)
Edit
& Style Sheets
The Edit button displays the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box or the
Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box, depending on what type of style sheet you have highlighted in the list. When the dialog box displays, it shows the current Description for that style sheet. You can also doubleclick a style sheet in the list to open the dialog box.
Duplicate (button)
Edit
& Style Sheets
The Duplicate button creates an identical copy of the style sheet highlighted in the list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Paragraph
Style Sheet dialog box or the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box so that you can rename and edit the duplicated style sheet.
Edit, Duplicate, and Delete buttons
Delete (button)
Edit
& Style Sheets
The Delete button removes the selected style sheet(s) from the active document. If the style sheet was used in the document, a warning lets you choose a replacement style sheet. If you choose No Style in the warning dialog box, text to which the deleted style sheet was applied will retain the attributes of the deleted style sheet, but No Style will be checked in the
Style Sheet submenu (Style menu) when those paragraphs are selected. If you choose another replacement style sheet in the warning dialog box, text to which the deleted style sheet was applied will take on the attributes of the new style sheet, with local formatting retained. You cannot delete the Normal style sheets.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.81
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Append and Save buttons
Append (button)
Edit
& Style Sheets
The Append button lets you import style sheets from another document.
A dialog box lets you choose a QuarkXPress document from which to append style sheets.
Highlighting a document in the dialog box and clicking Open displays the
Append Style Sheets dialog box. This dialog box offers the same controls as the Style Sheets tab of the Append dialog box (File
& Append). See
“Append (dialog box)” in the “File Menu” section in this chapter.
Save (button)
Edit
& Style Sheets
The Save button saves changes made to any style sheets in the Style Sheets dialog box. When you click Save, QuarkXPress updates text in the document to match the new style sheet specifications and closes the dialog box.
Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box
Edit Paragraph Style Sheet (dialog box)
Edit
& Style Sheets & New & Paragraph
Clicking New
& Paragraph (or clicking Edit or Duplicate when a π paragraph style sheet is highlighted) displays the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box, which lets you create or edit a paragraph style sheet. Defaults for new style sheets are taken from the selected text.
• The Name field lets you specify a name for a new style sheet or rename an existing style sheet.
• Below the Name field are four tabs: General, Formats, Tabs, and Rules.
The Formats, Tabs, and Rules tabs let you specify the paragraph formats that will be automatically applied to text whenever you apply a paragraph style sheet. The controls in these three tabs are the same as those found in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
& Formats). See
“Formats (dialog box tab),” “Tabs (dialog box tab),” and “Rules (dialog
3.82
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress box tab)” in the “Style Menu” section in this chapter. The controls in the General tab are described here.
General (dialog box tab)
Edit
& Style Sheets & New & Paragraph & General tab
The Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box General tab lets you specify keyboard equivalents and other non-paragraph-related attributes for a style sheet.
Keyboard Equivalent (field)
Edit
& Style Sheets & New & Paragraph & General tab
The Keyboard Equivalent field lets you specify a keyboard command that will automatically apply the style sheet. Select the Keyboard Equivalent field, then press any combination of
CTRL or
CTRL
+
ALT and a numeric character on the keypad.
Keyboard Equivalent field
Based On (drop-down list)
Edit
& Style Sheets & New & Paragraph & General tab
The Based On drop-down list lets you base a new style sheet on an existing style sheet by choosing a style sheet name. The default is No Style.
R Modifications made to a style sheet upon which another style sheet is based affect both style sheets.
Next Style (drop-down list)
Edit
& Style Sheets & New & Paragraph & General tab
The Next Style drop-down list lets you specify a style sheet to follow the the current style sheet when you are entering text. For example, you could specify that a paragraph with a “subhead” style sheet be followed automatically by a paragraph with the “byline” style sheet, which in turn could be followed by a paragraph with the “body copy” style sheet. The style auto-
Based On drop-down list
Next Style drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.83
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Character Style Sheet area matically changes to the style specified in Next Style after return is pressed at the end of the paragraph. Next Style does not affect existing text.
• The drop-down list displays all style sheets in the Style Sheets dialog box for the active document. When no documents are open, it lists the default style sheets.
• Choose Self from the Next Style drop-down list to continue using the same style sheet in the next paragraph.
Character Style Sheet (area)
Edit
& Style Sheets & New & Paragraph & General tab
All paragraph style sheets also contain a character style sheet. The character style sheet is applied to all the characters in the paragraph whenever you apply a paragraph style sheet.
• The Style drop-down list contains a list of all the character style sheets available to the active document and lets you choose the character style used by the paragraph style sheet.
• Choose New to create a new character style sheet directly from the Edit
Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box. This displays the Edit Character Style
Sheet dialog box. After you make your edits, click OK to return to the
Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box. The new style sheet name will automatically display in the Style drop-down list.
• Choose Edit to edit the character style sheet chosen in the Style dropdown list. This displays the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box.
After you make your edits, click OK to return to the Edit Paragraph
Style Sheet dialog box.
3.84
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Edit Character Style Sheet (dialog box)
Edit
& Style Sheets & New & Character
Clicking New
& Character (or clicking Edit or Duplicate when a Ø character style sheet is highlighted) displays the Edit Character Style
Sheet dialog box, which lets you create or edit a character style sheet.
• The Name field lets you specify a name for a new style sheet or rename an existing style sheet.
• The Keyboard Equivalent field lets you specify a keyboard command that will automatically apply the style sheet. Select the Keyboard Equivalent field, then press any combination of
CTRL or
CTRL
+
ALT and a numeric character on the keypad.
• The Based On drop-down list lets you base a style sheet on an existing style sheet by choosing a style sheet name. Modifications made to a style sheet upon which another style sheet is based affect both style sheets. The default is No Style.
• The controls underneath the Based On drop-down list in the Edit
Character Style Sheet dialog box are the same as those found in the
Character Attributes dialog box (Style
& Character). See the “Style
Menu” section in this chapter.
Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box
Colors (command)
Edit menu
The Colors command ( SHIFT +F12) displays the Colors dialog box, which lets you create and manage colors. You can also change the way a color traps to other colors. You apply colors to text, items, and box attributes via the Colors palette (View
& Show Colors); you can also apply colors to text using style sheets and the Color submenu of the Style menu.
Colors command
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.85
Colors dialog box
Menus and Dialog Boxes
R Colors created when no documents are open are included with all subsequently created documents; colors created when a document is active are specific to that document.
Colors (dialog box)
Edit
& Colors
The Colors dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, delete, and specify trapping for the current colors. You can also append colors from another document.
There are two lists, the top displaying a list of colors according to the choice you make in the Show drop-down list, and the bottom displaying the composition of the highlighted color.
When no documents are open, the list displays all default colors. When a document is active, the list only displays colors for the active document.
The default color list includes:
• Red, Green, and Blue: You can edit these colors or delete them from the default color list.
• Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and White: You cannot edit or delete these colors.
• Registration: You can edit Registration, but you cannot delete it. Changing the Registration color changes only the screen representation.
R You should apply Registration color to lines when creating your own registration or crop marks. Text, pictures, or items to which Registration color has been applied will print on all separation plates.
3.86
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Show (drop-down list)
Edit
& Colors
The Show drop-down list determines which colors are displayed in the
Colors dialog box list.
• Choose All Colors to display all the colors available to the document.
When no document is open, colors that are defaults for all documents are displayed.
• Choose Spot Colors to display only spot colors (which appear on their own separation plate).
• Choose Process Colors to display only process colors.
• Choose Multi-Ink Colors to display only those colors that you have built from other process inks or spot colors using the Multi-Ink Color option in the Model drop-down list of the Edit Color dialog box.
(Click New, Edit, or Duplicate to display.)
• Choose Colors In Use to display only those colors that have been applied somewhere in the active document.
• Choose Colors Not Used to display only those colors that are unused in the the active document.
Show drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.87
Menus and Dialog Boxes
New, Edit, Duplicate and Delete buttons
Append button
New (button)
Edit
& Colors
The New button displays the Edit Color dialog box, which lets you add, create, or name a new color. You can create up to 1,000 default and/or document-specific colors.
Edit (button)
Edit
& Colors
The Edit button displays the Edit Color dialog box to modify the color highlighted in the Colors list. You can also double-click a color to display the Edit Color dialog box. You cannot edit or delete the following default colors: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and White.
Duplicate (button)
Edit
& Colors
The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the color highlighted in the
Colors list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Color dialog box so that you can rename and edit the copied color.
Delete (button)
Edit
& Colors
The Delete button removes the highlighted color(s) from the active document. If the color was used in the active document, a warning lets you choose a replacement color.
Append (button)
Edit
& Colors
The Append button lets you import colors from another QuarkXPress document. A dialog box lets you choose a QuarkXPress document from which to append colors.
3.88
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Highlighting a document in the dialog box and clicking Open displays the Append Colors dialog box. This dialog box offers the same controls as the Colors tab of the Append dialog box (File
& Append). See
“Append (dialog box)” in the “File Menu” section in this chapter.
Edit Trap (button)
Edit
& Colors
The Edit Trap button lets you specify the way a color is printed, relative to other colors. Clicking Edit Trap displays the Trap Specifications dialog box for the color highlighted in the list. See “Trap Specifications
(dialog box)” after “Edit Color (dialog box)” in this section.
Save (button)
Edit
& Colors
The Save button saves changes made to any colors in the Colors dialog box. When you click Save, QuarkXPress updates colors in the document to match the new color specifications and closes the dialog box.
Edit Color (dialog box)
Edit
& Colors & New
Clicking New, Edit, or Duplicate in the Colors dialog box displays the
Edit Color dialog box, which lets you create or edit a color.
Name (field)
Edit
& Colors & New
The Name field lets you specify a name for a new color or rename an existing color.
Edit Trap button
Save button
Edit Color dialog box and Name field
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.89
Model drop-down list
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Model (drop-down list)
Edit
& Colors & New
The Model drop-down list lets you choose from various color models for creating and editing colors at any time. For example, you can modify a color created in the RGB model using either the HSB or CMYK model.
You can also edit a spot color such as a PANTONE, TOYO, or DIC color using one of the other color definition models, but a spot color edited in this manner will no longer match the originally selected version.
• HSB is the color model used most by artists because it resembles the manner in which they mix colors. Hue refers to the color or pigment;
saturation refers to the amount of the color pigment; and brightness refers to the amount of black.
• RGB, an “additive” color system, is most often used with slide recorders or color video monitors. Red, green, and blue light are added together to represent colors on a video screen.
• LAB, or CIELAB, is a color space designed to be independent of differing interpretations imposed by monitor or printer manufacturers. The
LAB model in QuarkXPress uses the “D50 illuminant” to be consistent with most usage. The LAB model uses three coordinates: L, A, and B.
The L coordinate determines luminance. A complex relationship between the A and B coordinates determines the color itself.
• CMYK, a “subtractive” color system, is the color model used by professional printers. Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks combine to
“subtract” white and reproduce most colors.
• Multi-Ink is a special model in QuarkXPress that lets you create a multiink color based on screen percentages of existing process inks and/or spot colors. Before using this feature, consult with your printer or service bureau to make sure that the percentages you choose will not cause ink-coverage problems.
3.90
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
R The remaining color models listed below, especially PANTONE, are widely used because each color is standardized and cataloged. These color models will not display in the Model drop-down list unless the corresponding Color Library files remain installed in your
Color folder.
• PANTONE consists of the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM colors in solid colors for printing on coated stock.
• TOYO and DIC are spot color matching systems popular in Japan.
• The TRUMATCH and FOCOLTONE matching systems let you specify colors that can be built on-press using the four process colors — cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
• PANTONE Process uses the three process colors of the PANTONE
MATCHING SYSTEM with varying levels of black to produce more than 3,000 colors.
• PANTONE ProSim simulates PANTONE colors with four-color separations for printing on coated paper stock.
• PANTONE Uncoated consists of the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM colors in solid colors for printing on uncoated paper stock.
• Hexachrome Uncoated and Hexachrome Coated are new “HiFi” color matching systems from Pantone, Inc. that consist of colors printed with six process plates instead of the usual four. Orange and green are added to the CMYK plates to create more impact and increase the range of reproducible colors. You should only choose Hexachrome colors in your document after you have talked to your printer and planned on printing a Hexachrome job.
Model drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.91
Color wheel options
Multi-Ink options
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Color wheel options (color selector)
Edit
& Colors & New
If you choose HSB, RGB, LAB, or CMYK from the Model drop-down list, the color wheel, brightness slider, and numerical sliders are displayed.
• You can use the color wheel to specify a color. Click or drag the pointer inside the wheel; a small square indicates the location of the active color.
The New field displays this color. The numerical values for the components of the current color are displayed in the fields below the wheel. You can use the numeric fields to make modifications to colors picked using the color wheel.
• The brightness slider to the right of the color wheel lets you quickly change the amount of black present in the colors accessible through the color wheel. Move the slider downward to add more black.
• To define colors numerically without using the color wheel (or after clicking the general area of the color you want), use the sliders or enter values for each color component in the fields below the wheel.
R Black-and-white or grayscale monitors use levels of gray with letters (such as R, G, B) to represent the corresponding color areas of the wheel.
Multi-Ink options (color selector)
Edit
& Colors & New
If you choose Multi-Ink from the Model drop-down list, a list appears on the right side of the dialog box displaying all spot colors currently available, plus the process inks.
• The Process Inks drop-down list lets you choose to include either the
CMYK process inks or Hexachrome process inks in the list. You should choose Hexachrome only after you have talked to your printer and planned on printing a six-color Hexachrome job.
3.92
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• The Shade drop-down list lets you apply any screen percentage from 0–100% to the color you highlight in the list.
• Specify shades for any number of process inks or spot colors in the list to build your own custom multi-ink color.
R Before using the Multi-Ink feature, consult with your printer or service bureau to make sure that the percentages you choose will not cause ink-coverage problems.
Swatchbook options (color selector)
Edit
& Colors & New
If you choose TOYO, DIC, TRUMATCH, FOCOLTONE, HEXACHROME, or one of the PANTONE color models from the Model drop-down list, the appropriate color selector is displayed.
• To specify a color from one of these matching systems, use the scroll bar to move through the color selector, or enter the catalog number in the field below the color selector.
• When you enter a color’s number in the field, the color that corresponds to that number is displayed in the color selector and in the New field.
• The name of a specified color is automatically displayed in the Name field in the upper left corner of the dialog box. The “CV” that follows the PANTONE No. field indicates that the selected color is a computer video simulation of the actual PANTONE color.
Swatchbook options
Spot Color check box
Spot Color (check box)
Edit
& Colors & New
When you have a spot color specified from one of the swatchbook color selectors, you can uncheck Spot Color to separate the color into cyan, magenta, yellow, and black plates. When Spot Color is checked, the color will print as a spot color only, to its own separate printing plate.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.93
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Halftone drop-down list
New/Original area
Trap Specifications dialog box
R Because the gamut of CMYK process color is limited, any spot color that you try to reproduce using process plates will look different from the actual spot ink that you see in a printed swatch book.
Halftone (drop-down list)
Edit
& Colors & New
The Halftone drop-down list lets you quickly specify the screen values used when you print a color separation plate that contains a screen for a spot color. A spot color means a color for which Spot Color is checked.
When Spot Color is checked, the Halftone drop-down list is available.
Choose Process Cyan to specify a screen angle of 105˚, Process Magenta for 75˚, Process Yellow for 90˚, and Process Black for 45˚. These values may be overridden by values built into an imagesetter or printer description file. You can also override them using the Angle drop-down list in the Out-
put tab of the Print dialog box (File
& Print).
New/Original (area)
Edit
& Colors & New
The New/Original area displays colors as you create and edit them. The
New field displays a new color or an edited version of the chosen color.
The Original field is used for comparison; it displays the original color when you are editing an existing color.
Trap Specifications (dialog box)
Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap
Clicking Edit Trap in the Colors dialog box displays the Trap Specifica-
tions dialog box for the chosen color. The Trap Specifications dialog box lets you specify trapping values for any object color relative to any background color. By specifying Overprint, Knockout, Auto Amount (+) for spreads, Auto Amount (–) for chokes, or Custom trap values, you can
3.94
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress control the trapping relationships for every color except White and
Registration.
R Color-specific trapping values you specify here directly affect color relationships and override all default trapping preferences.
A spread occurs when items with a lighter color enlarge slightly so that they trap (overlap) a darker background color. A choke occurs when items with a darker color are trapped by a slight reduction in the size of the
“knocked out” area in a lighter background color.
Background Color (column)
Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap
The Background Color column displays all the colors defined for the document, with the exception of White, Registration, and the object color.
When the object color is placed against a background of more than one color with which the object color has conflicting trapping relationships, or against a color QuarkXPress is unable to identify, the program traps according to the value specified for the Indeterminate background color.
Background Color column
Trap drop-down list
Trap (drop-down list)
Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap
The Trap drop-down list determines the trapping relationship when the highlighted Background Color occurs behind the object color named in the dialog box title. The Trap column displays the current setting. Entries different from the default values are marked with an asterisk (*).
• The Default option works like the Auto Amount (+/–) settings, but when Default is chosen, a QuarkXPress algorithm determines which colors choke, which colors spread, and which colors overprint or knock out. The amount of a choke or spread is based on the Auto Amount value specified in the Trapping tab of the Document Preferences dia-
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.95
Menus and Dialog Boxes log box (Edit
& Preferences & Document). However, when Default is chosen, black always overprints, and white always knocks out.
• The Overprint option specifies that the object color named in the dialog box title will overprint the highlighted background color in all instances where the shade value of the object color is greater than the percentage entered in the Overprint Limit field of the Trapping tab of the Docu-
ment Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
R Even with Overprint specified, overprinting will occur only when an object color has a shade value greater than the Overprint Limit value specified in the Trapping tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
• The Knockout option specifies that the object color named in the dialog box title knocks out the highlighted background color using no trapping.
• The Auto Amount (+) option assigns the default spread value (the value specified in the Auto Amount field of the Trapping tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box) to the object color named in the dialog box title.
• The Auto Amount (–) option assigns the default choke value (the negative of the value specified in the Auto Amount field of the Trapping tab of the Document Preferences dialog box) to the object color named in the dialog box title.
• The Custom option displays a dialog box that lets you specify a custom trapping value for the object and background color. Enter a value and click OK. A negative value causes the background color to choke. A positive value causes the object color to spread. A value of zero will knock out the object from the highlighted background color with no trapping.
Range
±36 pt
Measurement system points
Smallest increment
.001
3.96
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
R If you specify a negative Custom value between the object color named in the dialog box title and the Indeterminate background color, text to which the object color is applied is not choked, but is instead knocked out of the background without any trapping.
¤ Dependent/Independent (drop-down list)
Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap
The ¤ Dependent/Independent drop-down list determines whether the
Trap and Reverse drop-down list settings will directly affect each other. The
Reverse column indicates how trapping will occur when the highlighted
Background Color takes on the role of object color, and vice versa.
• Choose Dependent Traps if you want QuarkXPress to calculate a reverse trap value automatically.
• Choose ⁄ Independent Traps to specify a custom reverse trap value.
Dependent/Independent drop-down list
Reverse (drop-down list)
Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap
The Reverse drop-down list determines how trapping will occur when the highlighted Background Color takes on the role of object color, and the color identified in the name of the dialog box takes on the role of background color. The Reverse value is calculated automatically when Dependent Traps is chosen. If you change the Reverse value when Dependent Traps is chosen, the corresponding opposite trap will be calculated automatically.
The Reverse column displays the current setting. Entries different from the default values are marked with an asterisk (*). The options available in the Reverse drop-down list are the same as in the Trap drop-down list.
Reverse drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.97
Menus and Dialog Boxes
H&Js command
H&Js dialog box and list
H&Js (command)
Edit menu
H&J specifications are sets of automatic hyphenation rules and justification settings that you can apply to paragraphs. The H&Js command
(
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+F11) displays the H&Js dialog box, which lets you create and manage H&J specifications. You apply H&J specifications to selected paragraphs via the H&J drop-down list in the Formats tab of the Paragraph
Attributes dialog box (Style
& Formats). H&J specifications are also included in paragraph style sheets.
R H&Js created when no documents are open are included with all subsequently created documents; H&Js created when a document is active are specific to that document.
H&Js (dialog box)
Edit
& H&Js
The H&Js dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, and delete the current
H&Js. You can also append H&Js from another document. There are two lists in the dialog box, the top displaying the available H&Js, and the bottom displaying the specifications for the highlighted H&J.
H&Js (list)
Edit
& H&Js
When no documents are open, the H&J list displays all default H&Js.
When a document is active, the H&J list displays H&Js set up for the active document.
All documents contain the Standard H&J. By default, Standard is the H&J specified for the Normal paragraph style sheet. The default Standard H&J is defined as follows:
• Auto Hyphenation: checked
3.98
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• Smallest Word: 6
• Minimum Before: 3
• Minimum After: 2
• Break Capitalized Words: unchecked
• Hyphens in a Row: unlimited
• Hyphenation Zone: 0"
• Space: 85% Minimum, 110% Optimum, 250% Maximum
• Char: 0% Minimum, 0% Optimum, 4% Maximum
• Flush Zone: 0"
• Single Word Justify: checked
New (button)
Edit
& H&Js
The New button displays the Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box, which lets you create a new H&J. You can create up to 1,000 default and/or document-specific H&Js. The Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box lets you name and define an H&J.
New, Edit, Duplicate, and Delete buttons
Edit (button)
Edit
& H&Js
The Edit button displays the Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box for the H&J highlighted in the H&J list. The Edit Hyphenation &
Justification dialog box lets you modify an H&J’s name and definition.
You can also double-click an H&J to display the Edit Hyphenation &
Justification dialog box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.99
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Append and Save buttons
Duplicate (button)
Edit
& H&Js
The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the H&J highlighted in the
H&J list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Hyphenation &
Justification dialog box so that you can rename and edit the copied H&J.
Delete (button)
Edit
& H&Js
The Delete button removes the highlighted H&J(s) from the active document. If the H&J was used in the active document, a warning dialog box lets you choose a replacement H&J.
Append (button)
Edit
& H&Js
The Append button lets you import H&Js from another QuarkXPress document. A dialog box lets you choose a QuarkXPress document from which to append H&Js.
Highlighting a document in the dialog box and clicking Open displays the Append H&Js dialog box. This dialog box offers the same controls as the H&Js tab of the Append dialog box (File
& Append). See “Append
(dialog box)” in the “File Menu” section in this chapter.
Save (button)
Edit
& H&Js
The Save button saves changes made to any H&Js in the H&Js dialog box. When you click Save, QuarkXPress updates the document’s text to match the new H&J specifications and closes the dialog box.
3.100
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Edit Hyphenation & Justification (dialog box)
Edit
& H&Js & New
Clicking New, Edit, or Duplicate in the H&Js dialog box displays the
Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box, which lets you create or edit an H&J.
Name (field)
Edit
& H&Js & New
The Name field lets you specify a name for a new H&J or rename an existing H&J.
Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box and Name field
Auto Hyphenation (area)
Edit
& H&Js & New
The Auto Hyphenation area lets you determine the way QuarkXPress performs automatic hyphenation.
• Auto Hyphenation check box: Enables automatic hyphenation for paragraphs to which this H&J is applied. The default is checked.
• Smallest Word field: Specifies the minimum number of characters a word must contain to be hyphenated. Enter a value from 3 to 20. The default is 6.
• Minimum Before field: Specifies the smallest number of characters that must precede an automatic hyphen. Enter a value from 1 to 6. The default is 3.
• Minimum After field: Specifies the smallest number of characters that must follow an automatic hyphen. Enter a value from 2 to 8. The default is 2.
• Break Capitalized Words check box: Enables hyphenation for words that start with an uppercase character (for example, proper nouns and the first words of sentences). The default is unchecked.
Auto Hyphenation area
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.101
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Hyphens in a Row field
Hyphenation Zone field
R The Auto Hyphenation controls do not affect manual hyphenation
(the use of manually inserted hyphens and discretionary hyphens to control word breaks and text flow within documents).
Hyphens in a row (field)
Edit
& H&Js & New
The Hyphens in a Row field lets you specify the maximum number of consecutive lines that can end in manually or automatically hyphenated words. You can enter any value from 0 to 7. Enter “0” or choose unlim-
ited from the field’s drop-down list if you do not want to limit the number of consecutive lines that end with a hyphen. The default is unlimited.
Hyphenation Zone (field)
Edit
& H&Js & New
The Hyphenation Zone field lets you specify the area within which hyphenation (automatic or manual) can occur. To do so, enter a value in the field. The Hyphenation Zone is measured from the right indent to the end of a line of text.
• When you specify a Hyphenation Zone greater than 0", QuarkXPress hyphenates a word only when: (1) the previous word ends before the
Hyphenation Zone, and (2) an acceptable hyphenation point falls within the Hyphenation Zone. Hyphenation Zone values apply only to nonjustified text.
• A Hyphenation Zone value of 0" means that there is no Hyphenation
Zone. In this case, QuarkXPress either hyphenates a word according to the other hyphenation criteria or wraps it to the next line if it will not fit completely on the line. This is the default.
3.102
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Justification Method (area)
Edit
& H&Js & New
Justified lines of text extend from indent to indent within a column or box.
Lines are justified by adding or removing space between words and characters. The values entered in the Space and Char fields determine how word space and characters are adjusted to justify a line. The Optimum spacing values apply to nonjustified (left-, right-, and center-aligned) text as well as to justified text.
Space (fields)
Edit
& H&Js & New
The Space fields let you specify the amount of space QuarkXPress can add or remove between words in lines of justified text.
• The values in the Minimum, Optimum, and Maximum fields represent a percentage of the normal interword space for the font and size in use.
• When justifying lines of text, QuarkXPress first tries to space words according to the Optimum value. If the program is unable to justify text using the Optimum value, it varies word spacing within the range specified in the Minimum and Maximum fields.
• QuarkXPress never spaces words closer than the Minimum value. However, the program may exceed the Maximum value if there is no other way to justify a line.
• For nonjustified text, QuarkXPress always spaces characters according to the Optimum value.
Justification Method area and
Space fields
Space fields
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.103
Character fields
Flush Zone field
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Character (fields)
Edit
& H&Js & New
The Character (Char) fields let you specify the amount of space
QuarkXPress can add or remove between the characters in lines of justified text.
• The values in the Minimum, Optimum, and Maximum fields represent a percentage of an en space for the font size in use.
• When justifying lines of text, QuarkXPress first tries to space characters according to the Optimum value. If the program is unable to justify text using the Optimum value, it varies character spacing within the range specified in the Minimum and Maximum fields.
• QuarkXPress never spaces characters closer than the Minimum value.
However, the program may exceed the Maximum value if there is no other way to justify the line.
• For nonjustified text, QuarkXPress always spaces words according to the
Optimum value.
R By default, QuarkXPress defines an en space as the width of a zero in the current font. However, if you check Standard Em Space in the Character tab of the Document Preferences dialog box
(Edit
& Preferences & Document), QuarkXPress uses half the width of the current font size for the en space (for example, 24point text will have a 12-point en space).
Flush Zone (field)
Edit
& H&Js & New
The Flush Zone field lets you control whether the last line of text in a justified paragraph automatically extends to the right indent. When the last line of a justified paragraph ends within the Flush Zone, as measured from the right indent, space is added between characters and words so
3.104
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress that the text extends from the left to the right indent. If the last line of a paragraph does not fall within the specified Flush Zone (the text ends to the left of the Flush Zone), the last line is not justified.
Single Word Justify (check box)
Edit
& H&Js & New
Single Word Justify specifies that a single word alone on a line in a justified paragraph extends from the left indent to the right indent. When
Single Word Justify is unchecked, single words are not justified.
Lists (command)
Edit menu
The Lists command displays the Lists dialog box, which lets you create and manage custom lists. A list is a group of one or more paragraph style sheets chosen by the user for the purpose of duplicating all the text of this style at another location. For example, a book publisher could specify a “chapter name” style sheet and a “section name” style sheet as a new list, then use that list via the Lists palette (View
& Show Lists) to automatically build a table of contents.
Single Word Justify check box
Lists command
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.105
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Lists dialog box, Lists list, and New button
Edit, Duplicate, and Delete buttons
Lists (dialog box)
Edit
& Lists
The Lists dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, and delete lists. You can also append Lists from another document. There are two lists in the dialog box, the top displaying the available lists, and the bottom displaying the specifications for the highlighted list.
Lists (list)
Edit
& Lists
When no documents are open, the Lists list displays all default lists.
When a document is active, the Lists list displays lists available to the active document.
New (button)
Edit
& Lists
The New button displays the Edit List dialog box, which lets you create a new list. You can create up to 1,000 default and/or document-specific lists. The Edit List dialog box lets you name and define a list.
Edit (button)
Edit
& Lists
The Edit button displays the Edit List dialog box for the list highlighted in the Lists list. The Edit List dialog box lets you modify a list’s name and definition. You can also double-click a list to display the Edit List dialog box.
Duplicate (button)
Edit
& Lists
The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the list highlighted in the
Lists list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit List dialog box so that you can rename and edit the copied list.
3.106
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Delete (button)
Edit
& Lists
The Delete button removes the selected list(s) from the active document.
Append (button)
Edit
& Lists
The Append button lets you import lists from another QuarkXPress document. A dialog box lets you choose a QuarkXPress document from which to append lists.
Highlighting a document in the dialog box and clicking Open displays the Append Lists dialog box. This dialog box offers the same controls as the Lists tab of the Append dialog box (File
& Append). See “Append
(dialog box)” in the “File Menu” section in this chapter.
Append button
Save (button)
Edit
& Lists
The Save button saves changes made to any lists in the Lists dialog box.
When you click Save, QuarkXPress saves the new list specifications and closes the dialog box.
Save button
Edit List (dialog box)
Edit
& Lists & New
Clicking New, Edit, or Duplicate in the Lists dialog box displays the
Edit List dialog box, which lets you create or edit a list.
Name (field)
Edit
& Lists & New
The Name field lets you specify a name for a new list or rename an existing list.
Edit List dialog box and Name field
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.107
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Available Styles and Styles in List lists
Level drop-down list
Numbering drop-down list
Available Styles (list)
Edit
& Lists & New
The Available Styles list displays all the paragraph style sheets available to the active document. To add a paragraph style sheet to the list, double-click its name in the list or highlight it and click the Add ‡ arrow. To remove a paragraph style sheet from the list, highlight its name in the Styles in List list and click the Remove ° arrow.
Styles in List (list)
Edit
& Lists & New
The Styles in List list displays all the paragraph style sheets included in the list. The Level, Numbering, and Format As drop-down lists let you further customize your list.
Level (drop-down list)
Edit
& Lists & New
Choose a level from one to eight from the Level drop-down list to determine how text with the highlighted style sheet will be indented in the
Lists palette (View
& Show Lists). Every level after the first is indented in the Lists palette so that you can visualize your desired hierarchy. Use lower numbers to rank your most important style sheets; use higher numbers to rank style sheets of lesser importance.
Numbering (drop-down list)
Edit
& Lists & New
Choose an option from the Numbering drop-down list to specify a page numbering style for text in the highlighted style sheet. The numbering style you choose determines where page numbers will appear in relation to the pieces of text that are copied into your finished table or list.
• Choose Text only for a piece of text to appear without a page number.
3.108
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• Choose Text...Page # for a piece of text to appear followed by a page number.
• Choose Page #...Text for a piece of text to appear preceded by a page number.
Format As (drop-down list)
Edit
& Lists & New
The Format As drop-down list lets you choose a style sheet to define how text will be styled in the final list. For example, you may want 24 point bold text styled using your “chapter name” style sheet to be reformatted according to your 14 point italic “TOC chapter entry” style sheet when you build a table of contents list.
Alphabetical (check box)
Edit
& Lists & New
Check the Alphabetical check box if you want your list to be generated in alphabetical rather than in reading order. This is a useful feature for alphabetizing list items separated by paragraph returns.
Format As drop-down list
Alphabetical check box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.109
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Dashes & Stripes command
Dashes & Stripes dialog box and
Show drop-down list
Dashes & Stripes (command)
Edit menu
The Dashes & Stripes command displays the Dashes & Stripes dialog box, which lets you create and manage custom line styles that can be applied to lines, text paths, and box frames. Dashes are broken line styles, and stripes are banded line styles.
R Dashes and stripes created when no documents are open are included with all subsequently created documents; dashes and stripes created when a document is active are specific to that document.
Dashes & Stripes (dialog box)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes
The Dashes & Stripes dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, and delete dashes and stripes. You can also append dashes and stripes from another
QuarkXPress document. There are two lists in the dialog box, the top displaying the dashes and stripes available from the specified category in the Show drop-down list, and the bottom displaying the attributes of the highlighted dash or stripe.
Show (drop-down list)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes
The Show drop-down list determines which dashes and stripes are displayed in the Dashes & Stripes dialog box list.
• Choose All Dashes & Stripes to display all the dashes and stripes available to the document. When no document is open, only dashes and stripes that are defaults for all documents are displayed.
• Choose Dashes to display only those line styles that are formed using the dashed “broken line” method.
3.110
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• Choose Stripes to display only those line styles that are formed using the “banded” method.
• Choose Dashes & Stripes In Use to display only those dashes and stripes that have been applied somewhere in the active document.
• Choose Dashes & Stripes Not Used to display only those dashes and stripes that are unused in the active document.
New (drop-down button)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes
The New drop-down button lets you create up to 1,000 default and/or document-specific dashes and stripes. The drop-down button has two options: Dash and Stripe.
• Choose Dash to create a “broken line” style. The Edit Dash dialog box displays.
• Choose Stripe to create a “banded line” style. The Edit Stripe dialog box displays.
Edit (button)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes
The Edit button displays the Edit Dash dialog box or the Edit Stripe dialog box, depending on the line style highlighted in the list. You can also double-click a line style in the list to open the dialog box.
New and Edit buttons
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.111
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Duplicate and Delete buttons
Append and Save buttons
Duplicate (button)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes
The Duplicate button creates an identical copy of the line style highlighted in the list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Dash dialog box or the Edit Stripe dialog box so that you can rename and edit the duplicated line style.
Delete (button)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes
The Delete button removes the highlighted line style(s) from the active document. If the line style was used in the document, a warning message lets you choose a replacement line style.
Append (button)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes
The Append button lets you import dashes and stripes from another document. A dialog box lets you choose a QuarkXPress document from which to append dashes and stripes.
Highlighting a document in the dialog box and clicking Open displays the Append Dashes & Stripes dialog box. This dialog box offers the same controls as the Dashes & Stripes tab of the Append dialog box
(File
& Append). See “Append (dialog box)” in the “File Menu” section in this chapter.
Save (button)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes
The Save button saves changes made to any dashes and stripes in the
Dashes & Stripes dialog box. When you click Save, QuarkXPress updates items in the document to match the new line style specifications and closes the dialog box.
3.112
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Edit Dash (dialog box)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash
Clicking New
& Dash, or clicking Edit or Duplicate in the Dashes &
Stripes dialog box with a dashed line style highlighted displays the Edit
Dash dialog box, which lets you create or edit a dash.
Name (field)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash
The Name field lets you specify a name for a new dash or rename an existing dash.
Preview (area)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash
The Preview area shows what your dash will look like. The Preview area lets you drag a slider to view the dash at different widths.
Dash Attributes (area)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash
The Dash Attributes area lets you determine how your dashed line style appears when applied to a line, text path, or box frame.
Edit Dash dialog box and Name field
Ruler (area)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash
The ruler area lets you put breaks in your line. Every time you click in the ruler area, an arrow 3 is displayed. The arrow 3 indicates where a dash should start or stop. If you create several arrows, spaced apart at different distances, you will create a dashed line style with dashes of varying sizes.
To make a dash section larger or smaller, drag an arrow 3. To delete a dash, drag its arrows 3 or dash sections off the ruler.
Ruler area
Preview area
Dash Attributes area
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.113
Segments area
Menus and Dialog Boxes
• The Repeats Every field and drop-down list determines whether the length of the dash’s repeating pattern will be proportional to the width of the line or frame it is used with, or whether it is absolute. Enter a number in the Repeats Every field when times width is chosen in the drop-down list to create a proportional line style. Enter a number in the
Repeats Every field when Points is chosen in the drop-down list to create an absolute line style that uses points as the measuring system. The repeating pattern consists of everything displayed along the ruler area.
• Choose an option from the Miter submenu to determine how corners
(including the corner points in Bézier items with this dash style applied) will look. You can choose from sharp-corner, round-corner, and beveled-corner.
• Choose an option from the Endcap submenu to determine how the ends of individual dashes look. You can choose from butt cap, round cap, or projecting square cap.
• Check Stretch to Corners to make the dash pattern stretch evenly along a frame so that the corner areas look symmetrical.
Segments (area)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash
The Segments area lets you position breaks 3 in the ruler area numerically instead of using the mouse, and it also displays the current position of a selected break point 3.
• Enter a value in the Position field to precisely position a new dash break point 3 in the ruler area.
• Click Add to enter the break point 3 in the ruler area.
3.114
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Edit Stripe (dialog box)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Stripe
Clicking New
& Stripe or clicking Edit or Duplicate in the Dashes &
Stripes dialog box with a striped line style highlighted displays the Edit
Stripe dialog box, which lets you create or edit a stripe.
Name (field)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Stripe
The Name field lets you specify a name for a new stripe or rename an existing stripe.
Edit Stripe dialog box and Name field
Ruler (area)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Stripe
The ruler area lets you put bands or “stripes” in your line style. Every time you click in the ruler area, an arrow
. is displayed. The arrow . indicates where a stripe should start or stop. If you create several arrows, spaced apart at different distances, you will create a banded line style with stripes of varying sizes. To make a stripe larger or smaller, drag an arrow
.. To delete a stripe, drag its arrows
. or stripe sections off the ruler.
Preview (area)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Stripe
The Preview area shows what your stripe will look like. The Preview lets you drag a slider to view the stripe at different widths.
Ruler and Preview areas
Miter (drop-down list)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Stripe
Choose an option from the Miter drop-down list to determine how corners (including the corner points in Bézier items with this stripe style applied) will look. You can choose from sharp-corner, round-corner, and beveled-corner.
Miter drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.115
Segments area
Print Styles command
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Segments (area)
Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Stripe
The Segments area lets you position breaks
. in the ruler area numerically instead of using the mouse, and it also displays the current position of a selected break point
..
• Enter a percentage value in the Position field to precisely position a new stripe break point
. in the ruler area.
• Click Add to enter the break point
. in the ruler area.
Print Styles (command)
Edit menu
The Print Styles command displays the Print Styles dialog box, which lets you create and manage custom print styles. A print style is a group of print settings that you can implement quickly by choosing the name of the print style in the Print Style drop-down list in the Print dialog box
(File
& Print). This eliminates having to recreate complex print settings that you use frequently.
Print Styles (dialog box)
Edit
& Print Styles
The Print Styles dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, and delete print styles. You can also import and export print styles. There are two lists, the top displaying the available print styles, and the bottom displaying the attributes of the highlighted print style.
Print Styles (list)
Edit
& Print Styles
The Print Styles list displays all print styles. Print styles are always created as defaults for the application — never for the document.
Print Styles dialog box
3.116
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Edit Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
New (button)
Edit
& Print Styles
The New button displays the Edit Print Style dialog box, which lets you create a new print style. You can create up to 1,000 print styles. The Edit
Print Style dialog box lets you name and define a print style.
Edit (button)
Edit
& Print Styles
The Edit button displays the Edit Print Style dialog box for the print style highlighted in the Print Styles list. The Edit Print Style dialog box lets you modify a print style’s name and definition. You can also double-click a print style to display the Edit Print Style dialog box.
New, Edit, Duplicate, and Delete buttons
Duplicate (button)
Edit
& Print Styles
The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the print style highlighted in the Print Styles list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Print
Style dialog box so that you can rename and edit the copied print style.
Delete (button)
Edit
& Print Styles
The Delete button removes the selected print style(s) from the active document. You cannot delete the Default print style.
Import (button)
Edit
& Print Styles
The Import button lets you import a print styles file that you have created using the Export button. A dialog box lets you select a print styles file to import. Highlighting a file in the dialog box and clicking Open immediately imports the print styles.
Import button
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.117
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Export button
Save button
Edit Print Style dialog box
Export (button)
Edit
& Print Styles
The Export button lets you export the highlighted print styles to a file that can be used by another QuarkXPress user. An exported print style file can be imported using the Import button.
To export, highlight print styles in the Print Styles list and click Export. A dialog box displays, prompting you to specify the name and the location for the new print styles file. Click Save to complete the export.
Save (button)
Edit
& Print Styles
The Save button saves changes made to any print styles in the Print Styles dialog box and closes the dialog box.
Edit Print Style (dialog box)
Edit
& Print Styles & New
Clicking New, Edit, or Duplicate in the Print Styles dialog box displays the Edit Print Style dialog box, which lets you create or edit print styles.
• The Name field lets you specify a name for a new print style or rename an existing print style.
• Below the Name field are four tabs: Document, Setup, Output, and
Options. These tabs let you specify the printing settings that will be automatically applied whenever you choose the print style in the Print Style drop-down list in the Print dialog box (File
&
Print). The controls in these four tabs are the same as those found in the Print dialog box (File menu). See “Print (dialog box)” in the “File Menu” section in this chapter.
3.118
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text Introducing QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text
QuarkXPress has three variations on the Style menu: one for text, one for pictures, and one for lines. The Style menu changes according to the active item
(text box/text path, picture box, or line) and selected tool. When a text box or a text path is active and the Content tool
E is selected, the Style menu for text is available.
Sections
The Style menu for text is divided into three sections:
• The first section lists commands that can change individual characters.
They apply to highlighted text or the text insertion point. These include
Font, Size, Type Style, Color, Shade, Horizontal/Vertical Scale, Kern/
Track, and Baseline Shift. All these controls are also accessible through the Character command. Character attributes that are grouped into style sheets (Edit
& Style Sheets) can be applied through the Character
Style Sheet submenu. Text to Box is included in the first section but is used to transform selected text rather than apply attributes to it.
• The second section lists paragraph formats, which apply to highlighted paragraphs or a paragraph containing the Text Insertion bar i: Align-
ment, Leading, Formats, Tabs, and Rules.
All the above commands in the second section are also consolidated under the Formats command. Paragraph attributes that are grouped into style sheets (Edit
& Style Sheets) can be applied through the
Paragraph Style Sheet submenu.
• The third section lists commands that alter all the text in a selected text box or text path: Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical.
Style menu for text
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.119
Font submenu
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Font (submenu)
Style menu
A font is a complete set of characters in one typeface, such as Times New
Roman. The Font submenu lets you choose from a list of fonts installed and available on your system.
Size (submenu)
Style menu
The Size submenu lets you choose from a list of common point sizes for text. The Other option displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you enter a font size for text in the highlighted Size field.
Although you can enter a size in any supported measurement system, the font size will be displayed in points the next time you open the dialog box.
Range
2 to 720 pt
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
If an automatic drop cap is highlighted, the font size is displayed as a percentage.
Range
10% to 400%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Size submenu
3.120
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text Introducing QuarkXPress
Type Style (submenu)
Style menu
The Type Style submenu lets you choose from a list of type styles built into QuarkXPress:
• Plain: Automatically deselects all other type styles.
• Bold: Accesses the bold version of the current font (if installed) or simulates bolding.
• Italic: Accesses the italic version of the current font (if installed) or simulates italic.
• Underline: Underlines all characters and spaces; does not underline tabs.
• Word Underline: Underlines all characters except spaces (space, en space, half-en space, and punctuation space) and tabs.
• Strike Thru: Draws a 1-point line through characters; does not strike thru tabs. The line is placed above the baseline at one third of the ascent height of the largest character on each line. Some fonts define a custom strike-thru position, which overrides the QuarkXPress default position.
• Outline: Outlines characters.
• Shadow: Creates a drop shadow behind each character that is proportional to the size of the type.
• All Caps: Changes all lowercase letters to uppercase letters.
• Small Caps: Changes all lowercase letters to smaller versions of uppercase letters. The default scale of small caps characters, 75% of normal uppercase letters, can be modified in the Character tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
• Superscript: Offsets characters above the baseline by the amount specified in the Character tab of the Document Preferences dialog box. The default offset is 33%. The default scale of superscript characters, 100% of
Type Style submenu
Type Style commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.121
Color submenu
Shade submenu
Menus and Dialog Boxes the current font size, can be modified in the Character tab of the Docu-
ment Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
• Subscript: Offsets characters below the baseline by the amount specified in the Character tab of the Document Preferences dialog box. The default offset is 33%. The default scale of subscript characters, 100% of the current font size, can be modified in the Character tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
• Superior: Raises characters so their ascents align with the cap height of the current font. The default scale of superior characters, 50% of the current font size, can be modified in the Character tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
R You can apply type styles to text in almost any combination. However, Underline and Word Underline, All Caps and Small Caps, and Superscript and Subscript are mutually exclusive styles.
Color (submenu)
Style menu
The Color submenu lets you choose from a list of colors defined in the
Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files.
Shade (submenu)
Style menu
The Shade submenu lets you choose a tint value in 10% increments. The
Other option displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the highlighted Shade field.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
3.122
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text Introducing QuarkXPress
Horizontal/Vertical Scale (command)
Style menu
Scaling compresses or expands characters. The Horizontal/Vertical Scale command displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you choose Horizontal or Vertical scaling from the Scale drop-down list and enter a value in the highlighted Scale field. You can apply either Hori-
zontal or Vertical scaling, but not both.
Range
25 to 400%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Kern (command)
Style menu
Kerning adjusts the amount of space between two characters. The Kern command displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the highlighted Kern Amount field. Positive values increase space between characters; negative values decrease it.
R The Kern command is available when the Text Insertion bar i is between two characters. When a range of text is highlighted, Track replaces Kern in the Style menu.
Range
±500
Measurement system
.005 ( 1 /
200
) em space
Smallest increment
.001
Track (command)
Style menu
Tracking adjusts the amount of space to the right of each character in a highlighted range. The Track command displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the highlighted Track Amount field. Positive values increase space between characters; negative values decrease it.
Horizontal/Vertical Scale command
Kern/Track command
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.123
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Baseline Shift command
Range
±500
Measurement system
.005 ( 1 /
200
) em space
Smallest increment
.001
R The Track command is available when a range of text is highlighted.
When no text is highlighted, Kern replaces Track in the Style menu.
Baseline Shift (command)
Style menu
Baseline shifting moves selected characters above or below their baselines without affecting leading. The Baseline Shift command displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the highlighted Baseline Shift field. Positive values shift text up; negative values shift text down.
Range
±3 times font size
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Character (command)
Style menu
The Character command displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you specify multiple character attributes.
Character Attributes (dialog box)
Style
& Character
Each control in the Character Attributes dialog box has the same effect as its corresponding Style menu command. To use the options:
• Font: Choose a font from the drop-down list or enter the first few characters of the name in the field until the name is recognized.
• Size: Choose a size from the drop-down list or enter a value in the field.
Character command
3.124
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text Introducing QuarkXPress
• Color: Choose a color from the drop-down list.
• Shade: Choose a shade from the drop-down list or enter a percentage value in the field.
• Scale: Choose Horizontal or Vertical from the drop-down list and enter a percentage value in the field.
• Kern Amount: Enter a value in the field. (Kern Amount is available when the Text Insertion bar i is between two characters.)
• Track Amount: Enter a value in the field. (Track Amount is available when characters are highlighted.)
• Baseline Shift: Enter a value in the field.
• Type Style: Check Plain or combinations of the other styles. A gray check box indicates that a style has been applied to at least one character, but not all characters, in highlighted text.
R Underline and Word Underline, All Caps and Small Caps, and
Superscript and Subscript are mutually exclusive type styles.
Character Style Sheet (submenu)
Style menu
Character style sheets let you apply a set of pre-specified character attributes in one step. The Character Style Sheet submenu lets you choose from a list of character style sheets defined for the document. The list includes:
• No Style: A feature that removes the character style sheet from highlighted text while retaining character attributes. When you apply a new character style sheet after applying No Style, all current character attributes are stripped from the text.
Character Attributes dialog box
Character Style Sheet submenu
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.125
Text to Box command
Alignment submenu
Menus and Dialog Boxes
• Normal: The default character style sheet that is included in all new paragraph style sheets. You can edit the Normal character style sheet with the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit
& Style Sheets).
• Custom style sheets: All the character style sheets defined in the Style
Sheets dialog box (Edit
& Style Sheets).
Text to Box (command)
Style menu
The Text to Box command creates a Bézier picture box shaped just like the characters highlighted. Text to Box works with PostScript Type 1 fonts installed through Adobe Type Manager or with TrueType fonts. You can import a picture into the new box or even turn the new box into a text box to have “text within text.”
If you want the box to keep flowing with the surrounding text, press the
ALT key while you choose Style
& Text to Box. This replaces the highlighted characters with an anchored version of your new Bézier box. For details about reshaping Bézier boxes, see “Reshaping Boxes” in Chapter 7,
“Box Basics.”
Alignment (submenu)
Style menu
The Alignment submenu lets you choose an alignment for paragraphs:
• Left: Aligns paragraphs with the left indent.
• Centered: Centers each line between the left and right indents.
• Right: Aligns paragraphs with the right indent.
• Justified: Aligns paragraphs with the left and right indents; the last line may be shorter.
• Forced: Aligns all lines in a paragraph, including the last line, with the left and right indents.
3.126
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text Introducing QuarkXPress
R Paragraphs are aligned within the boundaries established by the
First Line, Left Indent, and Right Indent specified in the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
& Formats). If the paragraph Alignment is set to Centered, the First Line indent is added to any line indent caused by the centered alignment.
Leading (command)
Style menu
QuarkXPress defines leading as the vertical space occupied by a line of text plus any white space between lines.
Leading is measured from baseline to baseline, unless you set the Leading
Mode to Word Processing in the Paragraph tab of the Document Prefer-
ences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document). In Word Processing mode, leading is measured from the tops of ascenders on one line of text to the tops of ascenders on the line above.
The Leading command displays the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attrib-
utes dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the highlighted Leading field using one of three types of leading: absolute leading, incremental auto leading, or percentage-based auto leading.
• Absolute leading places the amount of space you specify in the Leading field between lines regardless of the fonts and sizes used.
Range Measurement system
.001 to 1,080 pt various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Leading command
Leading field
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.127
Leading field
Formats command
Menus and Dialog Boxes
• Incremental auto leading combines a base amount of auto leading with an absolute value specified in the Leading field. Specify an absolute value by entering a plus (+) or minus (–) sign before the value.
Range Measurement system
± .001 to 1,080 pt various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
• Entering the word “auto” or a “0” in the Leading field tells QuarkXPress to use the value in the Auto Leading field of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document & Paragraph tab) to decide whether percentage-based or incremental auto leading occurs.
The default — percentage-based — takes the base amount of auto leading and adds to it a fixed percentage of the largest font size on the upper line to determine the total amount of leading between an autoleaded line and the line above it. The default value for percentage-based auto leading is 20%.
R Auto leading is sometimes called relative leading because it spaces each line separately according to the design and size of the fonts used.
If fonts or font sizes are mixed and matched, an auto-leaded paragraph may have a different amount of space between each line. Auto leading starts with a base amount of leading, which QuarkXPress determines by looking at the user-specified font size, then calculating the ascent and descent values built into the fonts used in each line.
Formats (command)
Style menu
The Formats command displays the Formats tab of the Paragraph
Attributes dialog box, which lets you specify a variety of formats that affect entire paragraphs.
3.128
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text Introducing QuarkXPress
Formats (dialog box tab)
Style
& Formats
The Paragraph Attributes dialog box Formats tab lets you specify indents, line spacing, paragraph spacing, drop caps, and other characteristics for a paragraph or range of paragraphs. Not all of these controls apply to text paths.
Left Indent, First Line, Right Indent (fields)
Style
& Formats
The indent fields let you indent paragraphs from the left and right edges of a text box, column, or text path, and create hanging indents.
• Left Indent: Specifies the distance from the left edge of a column, text box, or text path to the left edge of a paragraph.
• First Line: Specifies the distance from the Left Indent to the beginning of the first line of a paragraph. Enter a positive value to indent the first line to the right of the Left Indent. To indent the first line to the left of the Left Indent (a hanging indent), enter a negative value in this field after entering a positive value in the Left Indent field. If you are specifying formats for a text path, the field works the same way; however, you cannot have more than one line of text on a text path.
• Right Indent: Specifies the distance from the right edge of a column, text box, or text path to the right edge of a paragraph.
Range column width
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
R The Text Inset value in the Text tab of the Modify dialog box
(Item
& Modify) is added to the Left Indent and Right Indent values for the edges of a box. Text Inset does not affect the inner columns of a text box.
Formats tab
Left Indent, First Line, and Right
Indent fields
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.129
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Leading drop-down list
Space Before and Space After fields
Alignment drop-down list
• Indents can also be specified visually using the tab ruler that displays at the top of the active column whenever the Paragraph Attributes dialog box is open. Drag the icons at the top of the ruler to adjust the Left
Indent
K, First Line Indent k, or Right Indent J. (If the active item cannot display the tab ruler, the tab ruler is displayed in the Tabs tab of the
Paragraph Attributes dialog box.)
Leading (drop-down list)
Style
& Formats
The Leading drop-down list lets you specify the amount of space between lines of text. See “Leading (command).”
Space Before, Space After (fields)
Style
& Formats
The Space Before and Space After fields let you specify how much space precedes and follows a paragraph. The space between two paragraphs is the sum of the Space After the first paragraph and the Space Before the second paragraph.
Range
0 to 15"
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
R Space Before is not applied when a paragraph falls at the top of a column. Space After is not applied when a paragraph falls at the bottom of a column. Neither are applied on text paths.
Alignment (drop-down list)
Style
& Formats
The Alignment drop-down list works exactly like the Alignment submenu
(Style menu). It lets you choose an alignment for paragraphs:
• Left: Aligns paragraphs with the left indent.
3.130
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text Introducing QuarkXPress
• Centered: Centers each line between the left and right indents.
• Right: Aligns paragraphs with the right indent.
• Justified: Aligns paragraphs with the left and right indents; the last line may be shorter.
• Forced: Aligns all lines in a paragraph, including the last line, with the left and right indents.
R Paragraphs are aligned within the bounds established by the First
Line, Left Indent, and Right Indent specified in the Paragraph
Formats dialog box (Style menu). If the paragraph Alignment is set to Centered, The First Line indent is added to any line indent caused by the centered alignment.
H&J drop-down list
H&J (drop-down list)
Style
& Formats
H&Js are specifications that control the hyphenation and spacing of text.
The H&J drop-down list lets you choose from a list of H&J specifications defined in the Edit H&Js dialog box (Edit
& H&Js).
Drop Caps (area)
Style
& Formats
The Drop Caps check box lets you specify an automatic initial cap for a paragraph. Checking Drop Caps lets you use the Character Count and
Line Count fields.
• Character Count: Specifies the number of drop cap characters
(from 1 to 8).
• Line Count: Specifies the number of lines the character(s) drop
(from 2 to 16).
Drop Caps area
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.131
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Keep Lines Together area
Keep with Next ¶ check box
Lock to Baseline Grid check box
Keep Lines Together (area)
Style
& Formats
The Keep Lines Together check box lets you specify how paragraphs break at the bottom of columns to automatically prevent widows and orphans.
(In QuarkXPress, a widow is defined as the last line of a paragraph that falls at the top of a column; an orphan is defined as the first line of a paragraph that falls at the bottom of a column.) Checking Keep Lines Together lets you use the All Lines in ¶ and Start/End options.
• All Lines in ¶: Specifies that a paragraph will not break at the bottom of a column. If all the lines in a paragraph do not fit in one column, the entire paragraph is carried to the next column.
• Start and End: Specifies the minimum number of lines to remain at the bottom of a column (Start) and the minimum number to be carried over to the next column (End). If there are not enough lines in the paragraph to meet the Start and End criteria, the entire paragraph is carried to the next column.
Keep with Next ¶ (check box)
Style
& Formats
The Keep with Next ¶ check box lets you force a paragraph to flow with the following paragraph (for example, to ensure that a subhead stays connected with the first related paragraph or to string several paragraphs together).
Lock to Baseline Grid (check box)
Style
& Formats
Using a baseline grid forces paragraphs to align horizontally across columns and text boxes. The Lock to Baseline Grid check box lets you lock selected paragraphs to the grid.
3.132
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text Introducing QuarkXPress
R The grid is defined in the Baseline Grid area in the Paragraph tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document) and displayed via the Show Baseline Grid command
(View menu). To see the baseline grid in an active text box, Guides must be set to In Front in the General tab of the Document Pref-
erences dialog box.
Tabs (command)
Style menu
QuarkXPress lets you specify an unlimited number of tab stops per column. In addition to any custom tab stops, there are invisible default tab stops that occur every half-inch, starting from the farthest-right custom tab stop. If there are no custom tab stops, the invisible default tab stops start one half-inch into the paragraph and continue across. The Tabs command displays the Tabs tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box.
Tabs command
Tab ruler (area)
Style
& Tabs
The tab ruler, displayed at the top of the active column whenever the For-
mats or Tabs tabs of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box is displayed, lets you specify indents and create and move tab stops visually. If the active item cannot display the tab ruler, the tab ruler is displayed in the Tabs tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box.
Tab stops are displayed with icons that represent the type of tab stop alignment: Left 1, Center 3, Right 2, Decimal 5, Comma p, or Align On s. You can use the ruler to:
• Specify indents: Drag the icons at the top of the ruler to adjust the Left
Indent
K, First Line Indent k, or Right Indent J .
• Create tab stops: Click on the ruler to create tab stops; the current alignment button and Fill Characters settings in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box apply to the tab stop.
Tab ruler
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.133
Tabs tab
Alignment buttons
Menus and Dialog Boxes
• Edit tab stops: Click a tab stop to select it. Drag the selected tab stop to move it. You can also change the alignment button and Fill Characters settings in the dialog box while the tab stop is selected.
• Delete tab stops: Click a tab to select it; then drag it off the ruler.
ALT
+click the ruler to delete all tab stops.
Tabs (dialog box tab)
Style
& Tabs
The Tabs tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box lets you specify the alignment, position, and fill character for tab stops.
Alignment (buttons)
Style
& Tabs
The alignment buttons let you choose an alignment for a tab stop.
• Left 1: Aligns tabbed text flush left along a tab stop.
• Center 3: Centers tabbed text along a tab stop.
• Right 2: Aligns tabbed text flush right along a tab stop. To align characters flush along the right indent of a column, regardless of other tab stops, place the text insertion point immediately to the left of the characters and press
SHIFT
+
TAB
.
• Decimal 5: Positions tabbed text by aligning decimal points (periods) along a tab stop.
• Comma p: Aligns commas in tabbed text along a tab stop.
• Align On s: Aligns occurrences of a user-specified character in tabbed text along a tab stop. The Align On option lets you enter this character in the Align On field. You can enter any printing character.
3.134
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text Introducing QuarkXPress
R If you choose Decimal, Comma, or Align On, and the text (usually a number) doesn’t contain a period, comma, or specified alignment character, the text aligns on the character following the text (such as a tab, space, or carriage return).
Position (field)
Style
& abs
The Position field lets you specify tab stops numerically. Tab stops are measured from the Text Inset value on the left edge of a box or column.
New tab stops are immediately displayed on the Tab Ruler and are shown selected.
Range column width
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
If you click Set, the tab stop is deselected, allowing you to enter values for the next tab stop. Click Apply to see the effects of a new tab stop on any existing tab characters in the active paragraph(s).
Fill Characters (field)
Style
& Tabs
A fill character, such as a dot leader in a table of contents, “fills” the space between a tab character and the next tab stop. The Fill Characters field lets you specify any printing character to be repeated, or any two characters to alternate (one of the characters can be a space). Fill characters are aligned flush right with the tab stop position.
Position field
Fill Characters field
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.135
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Align On field
Set and Clear All buttons
Rules command
Align On (field)
Style
& Tabs
Available when the Align On button is chosen, the Align on field lets you enter any printing character to align tabbed text along.
Set (button)
Style
& Tabs
If a tab stop is shown selected in the tab ruler displayed above the active column, you can click Set to deselect it. This allows you to move on and enter values for the next tab stop.
Clear All (button)
Style
& Tabs
The Clear All button deletes all custom tab stops from the active paragraph(s). The invisible default tab stops that QuarkXPress places at halfinch increments are reset to their original positions.
Rules (command)
Style menu
The Rules feature lets you attach horizontal lines above and/or below a paragraph so that the lines always flow with the text. The Rules command displays the Rules tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box.
Rules (dialog box tab)
Style menu
The Rules tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box lets you specify length, position, style, width, color, and shade for paragraph rules.
Rule Above, Rule Below (areas)
Style
& Rules
The Rule Above and Rule Below areas let you specify whether you want horizontal lines above and/or below a paragraph. Checking Rule Above
3.136
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text Introducing QuarkXPress and/or Rule Below gives you access to controls for specifying the placement and style of the rules.
Length (drop-down list)
Style
& Rules & Rule Above, Rule Below checked
The Length drop-down list lets you specify whether rules fit within the paragraph indents or match the length of the text.
• Indents: Specifies a rule that extends from the paragraph’s Left Indent to its Right Indent. Indents are specified in the Formats tab of the
Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
&
Formats).
• Text: Specifies a Rule Above that matches the length of the first line of text in the paragraph and a Rule Below that matches the length of the last line of text in the paragraph.
R The From Left and From Right values in the Rules tab of the
Paragraph Attributes dialog box apply whether you choose
Indents or Text.
Rules tab
Length drop-down list
From Left, From Right (fields)
Style
& Rules & Rule Above, Rule Below checked
The From Left and From Right fields let you specify the placement of a rule in relation to the specified Length: either Indents or Text.
• From Left: Specifies the distance between the left end of a rule and either the left indent of the paragraph (Length set to Indents) or the left end of a line of text (Length set to Text).
• From Right: Specifies the distance between the right end of a rule and either the right indent of the paragraph (Length set to Indents) or the right end of a line of text (Length set to Text).
From Left and From Right fields
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.137
Offset field
Menus and Dialog Boxes
• Larger positive values make a rule shorter. Smaller positive values make a rule longer. (You can enter negative values if an indent is applied to the paragraph.)
Range column width
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Offset (field)
Style
& Rules & ule Above, Rule Below checked
The Offset field lets you specify the amount of vertical space between a paragraph and a rule. You can enter an absolute value or a percentage.
• Absolute values are measured from the baseline of the first line of a paragraph to the bottom of a Rule Above, and from the baseline of the last line of a paragraph to the top of a Rule Below. Positive values move the rule farther away from the text. Negative values move the rule closer to the text. Using a negative absolute offset value for a Rule Above, you can overlap a dark-colored rule with white text to create reverse type.
Range
0 to 15" or
– 1 ⁄
2 rule width
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
• Specifying a percentage in the Offset field makes the rule act like an auto-leaded line of text, which automatically avoids overlap. The total distance between paragraphs defines the 100% value. For example, a
30% Offset for a Rule Above adds 30% of the total interparagraph space below the center of the rule. The default rule Offset is 0%.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
3.138
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Text Introducing QuarkXPress
Style (drop-down list)
Style
& Rules & Rule Above, Rule Below checked
The Style drop-down list lets you choose from a list of default line styles and line styles you create (Edit
& Dashes & Stripes).
Width (field)
Style
& Rules & Rule Above, Rule Below checked
The Width field and drop-down list lets you choose from a list of line widths or enter a line width in the field. If you choose the Hairline option, QuarkXPress prints the rule at .125 point to a 300 dpi PostScript printer. Entering a 0 in any line width field specifies a Hairline.
Range
0 to 864 pt
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Color (drop-down list)
Style
& Rules & Rule Above, Rule Below checked
The Color drop-down list lets you choose from a list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files.
Shade (field)
Style
& Rules & Rule Above, Rule Below checked
The Shade field and drop-down list let you choose a shade value in 10% increments or enter a value in the field.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Style drop-down list
Width field
Color and Shade controls
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.139
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Paragraph Style Sheet submenu
Flip commands
Paragraph Style Sheet (submenu)
Style menu
Paragraph style sheets let you apply a set of pre-specified paragraph attributes in one step. The Paragraph Style Sheet submenu lets you choose from a list of paragraph style sheets defined for the document in the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit
& Style Sheets). The list includes:
• No Style: A feature that removes the paragraph style sheet and character style sheet links from a paragraph while retaining the applied paragraph and character attributes. When you apply a new paragraph style sheet after applying No Style, all current character attributes and paragraph formats are stripped from the text.
• Normal: The default paragraph style sheet for all text boxes and text paths. You can edit the Normal paragraph style sheet via the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit
& Style Sheets).
• Custom style sheets: All the paragraph style sheets defined in the Style
Sheets dialog box (Edit
& Style Sheets).
Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical, Flip Text (commands)
Style menu
• The Flip Horizontal command flips all the text in an active text box from right to left, creating a mirror image of the original.
• The Flip Vertical command flips all the text in an active text box from bottom to top, creating a mirror image of the original.
• The Flip Text command replaces the Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical commands when a text path is active. Flip Text places text on the opposite side of the line, starting from the opposite endpoint. For example, if you create a circular text path with text flowing on the outside of the circle, Flip Text positions text on the inside of the circle. Text alignment is not affected.
3.140
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Pictures Introducing QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Pictures
QuarkXPress has three variations on the Style menu: one for text, one for pictures, and one for lines. The Style menu changes according to the active item (text box/text path, picture box, or line) and selected tool. When a picture box is active and the Content tool
E or the Item tool e is selected, the Style menu for pictures is available. The commands in the Style menu for pictures affect the way pictures display and print; they do not affect the actual picture files.
Style menu for pictures
Sections
The Style menu for pictures is divided into three sections:
• The first section lists basic content attributes, which apply to the picture:
Color, Shade, and Negative.
• The second section lets you control the contrast and halftone specifications of your picture.
• The third section lists commands for flipping the contents of an active picture box: Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.141
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Modifiable picture file formats
The availability of the commands in the Style Menu for Pictures varies depending on the file format of the active picture.
Picture type Color Shade Negative Contrast Halftone
EPS/DCS
GIF
JPEG (*.JPG)
Grayscale no
* yes
Color
Mac PICT (*.PCT)
*
1-bit bitmap yes
Grayscale bitmap yes
Color bitmap
Object-oriented
OS/2 bitmap (*.BMP)
1-bit
Grayscale
Color
PhotoCD
Scitex CT
* no yes yes
* no
Grayscale
Color
*
*
TIFF (*.TIF)
1-bit
Grayscale yes yes
Color
*
Windows bitmap (*.BMP)/PCX
1-bit
Grayscale yes yes
Color
WMF
* no
*
* no
* yes
* yes yes
* no yes yes
* no yes yes
* yes yes
* no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes no yes yes no no yes yes yes no yes yes no no no yes no yes yes no no yes yes no no yes yes no no no no yes yes no
* Adjustable through the Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box
(Style
& Contrast).
3.142
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Pictures Introducing QuarkXPress
Color (submenu)
Style menu
The Color submenu lets you choose from a list of colors defined in the
Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files.
Shade (submenu)
Style menu
The Shade submenu lets you choose a value in 10% increments. The Other option displays the Picture tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you enter the maximum shade percentage into the highlighted Shade field.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Color submenu
Negative (command)
Style menu
The Negative command creates a true negative of a picture’s contrast. If you have made changes to the contrast curve using the Picture Contrast
Specifications dialog box (Style
& Contrast), these changes are calculated before Negative is calculated.
Shade submenu
Contrast (command)
Style menu
The Contrast command displays the Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box, which shows the picture’s contrast curve and the tools you can use to modify the curve.
Negative and Contrast commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.143
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box
Contrast curve area
Picture Contrast Specifications (dialog box)
Style
& Contrast
The Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box lets you modify a picture’s contrast curve. The Model and Color options in the dialog box are not available for grayscale pictures.
Contrast curve (area)
Style
& Contrast
The Contrast Curve graphs a picture’s contrast as input versus output.
Adjusting a picture’s contrast changes the relationship between input
(original) contrast and output (modified) contrast.
• Input (the horizontal axis) is the contrast value of the original picture. In a grayscale picture, the left side of the Input axis represents highlights
(lighter shades) while the right side represents shadows in the input.
• Output (the vertical axis) is the modified contrast value. In a grayscale picture, the lower portion of the Output axis represents lighter shades while the upper portion represents darker shades.
A combination of the two axes results in an intuitive graphical curve. For example, a 10% boost to the darkness of a grayscale picture’s highlights appears as a peak at the lower-left part of the curve.
R When the curve is a 45° line from 0 to 1, input contrast equals output contrast. This is the normal contrast curve, indicating that the picture’s contrast has not been modified in QuarkXPress.
3.144
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Pictures Introducing QuarkXPress
Contrast tools (area)
Style
& Contrast
The contrast tools let you modify the curve in various ways:
• Use the Hand tool
H to drag the entire curve on the contrast graph.
When you move the curve against one of the graph’s edges, it becomes flattened. You can constrain a curve’s movements to horizontal or vertical by pressing the
SHIFT key while dragging the curve.
• Use the Pencil tool d to draw a new curve or to modify an existing curve freehand.
• Use the Line tool
L to make linear adjustments to a curve. You can constrain modifications to a contrast curve to 0°, 45°, or 90° by pressing the
SHIFT key while using the Line tool.
• Use the Posterizer tool $ to place handles between the 10% increments marked on the horizontal axis. You can increase or decrease the inputto-output relationship in tonal range increments of 10% by dragging the handles up and down.
• Use the Spike tool % to place handles on the 10% increments marked on the horizontal axis. You can drag the handles up and down to create spikes.
• Use the Normal Contrast tool ^ to reset the curve to the unmodified contrast position.
• Use the High Contrast tool & to apply a high contrast curve to the graph automatically.
• Use the Posterized tool * to apply a posterized curve to the graph automatically.
• Use the Inversion tool ( to flip a curve upside down. Clicking the
Inversion tool produces a negative of the curve currently shown on the
Contrast tools
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.145
Negative check box
Model drop-down list
Color area
Menus and Dialog Boxes graph. (The Inversion tool does not necessarily create a true negative of the original.)
Negative (check box)
Style
& Contrast
The Negative check box creates a true negative of the dialog box’s final picture output. When you check Negative, you will not see any change in your contrast curve, but you will see the picture preview update on-screen when you click OK or Apply. If you have made changes to the contrast curve, these changes are calculated before Negative is calculated. Checking this box has the same effect as choosing Negative from the Style menu.
Model (drop-down list)
Style
& Contrast
If the active picture box contains a color picture, the Model and Color areas are available. The Model area lets you select a color model to use when modifying the contrast of a color picture: HSB, RGB, CMY, or
CMYK. See “Understanding Color Models” in Chapter 15, “Color.”
Color (area)
Style
& Contrast
If the active picture box contains a color picture, the Model and Color areas are available. The Color area displays a check box for each component of the selected Model. For example if RGB is selected, Red, Green, and Blue will be available as check boxes in the Color area.
The graph displays a curve for each of the selected components. When contrast for all components is set to normal, the components’ curves are stacked on top of each other. The front (visible) curve represents the first component listed in the Color area. Checking only one color component lets you modify the curve for that component independently of the others.
3.146
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Pictures Introducing QuarkXPress
A color spectrum or shade strip is displayed along the graph’s axes when only one color component is checked. These strips serve as a visual cue to the distribution of ranges on the graph. The look of these strips will change according to the Model and color component selected.
Halftone (command)
Style menu
The Halftone command displays the Picture Halftone dialog box, which lets you define custom screening values for an active picture.
Halftone command
Picture Halftone (dialog box)
Style
& Halftone
The Picture Halftone dialog box lets you control the lines per inch, angle, and dot pattern for a halftone screen.
A halftone is a reproduction of a continuous tone photograph traditionally created by photographing the picture through a crossline or contact screen that contains grid pattern gradations. Gradations of tone are simulated using dots or other shapes of varying sizes. The dialog box controls let you specify a screen’s angle, pattern, and lines per inch.
Picture Halftone dialog box
Frequency field
Frequency (field)
Style
& Halftone
Enter a value for the lines per inch, or frequency, of the printed halftone, or choose one of the common line frequencies from the drop-down list
(Default, 60, 85, 100, 133, and 150). If Default is chosen in the Frequency field, QuarkXPress uses the value specified in the Output tab of the Print dialog box (File
& Print).
Range
15 to 400 lpi
Measurement system lines per inch (lpi)
Smallest increment
.001
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.147
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Angle field
Function drop-down list
Angle (field)
Style
& Halftone
Enter a value for the angle of the screen or choose one of the common angles from the drop-down list (Default, 0, 15, 45, 75, 90 and 105). If
Default is chosen, QuarkXPress uses the value specified in the Output tab of the Print dialog box (File
& Print).
Range
–360° to 360°
Measurement system degrees
Smallest increment
.001
Function (drop-down list)
Style
& Halftone
Choose one of six patterns for the custom halftone screen: Default, Dot,
Line, Ellipse, Square, or Ordered Dither. Select the Ordered Dither pattern when you are printing to a laser printer and when multiple copies will be produced by photocopying rather than printing. If Default is chosen, QuarkXPress uses the setting specified in the Output tab of the Print dialog box (File
& Print).
R Because of the limits imposed by the digital halftoning process,
PostScript is unable to reproduce certain screen angles and frequencies. PostScript will print halftones at the angle and frequency that are closest to the values you specify in the Screen and Angle fields.
3.148
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Pictures Introducing QuarkXPress
Flip Horizontal (command)
Style menu
The Flip Horizontal command flips the picture in the active box from left to right, creating a mirror image of the original.
Flip Vertical (command)
Style menu
The Flip Vertical command flips the picture in the active box from bottom to top, creating a mirror image of the original.
Flip commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.149
Style menu for lines
Line Style submenu
Arrowheads submenu
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Style Menu for Lines
QuarkXPress has three variations on the Style menu: one for text, one for pictures, and one for lines. The Style menu changes according to the active item (text box/text path, picture box, or line). When a line or text path is active and the Item tool e is selected, the Style menu for lines is available.
(If a line contains text — that is, if it is a text path — and the Content tool
E is selected, then the Style menu for text is available.)
Menu entries
The Style menu for lines includes five menu entries that let you modify various aspects of lines: Line Style, Arrowheads, Width, Color, and
Shade. All five menu entries have submenus that provide a variety of options.
Line Style (submenu)
Style menu
The Line Style submenu lets you choose from a list of 11 predefined line styles and any custom line styles you create (Edit
& Dashes & Stripes).
Arrowheads (submenu)
Style menu
The Arrowheads submenu lets you choose from a list of 6 predefined endcap styles (combinations of arrowheads and tail feathers).
3.150
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Style Menu for Lines Introducing QuarkXPress
Width (submenu)
Style menu
The Width submenu lets you choose from a list of default line widths.
The Other option displays the Line tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the highlighted Line Width field. You can enter
Line Width values using any supported measurement system, but values are displayed in points when the dialog box is reopened.
R QuarkXPress prints a Hairline .125 point wide on a 300 dpi Post-
Script printer.
Range Measurement system Smallest increment
0 to 864 pt various (", pt, cm, etc.) .001
Color (submenu)
Style menu
The Color submenu lets you choose from a list of colors defined in the
Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files.
Width submenu
Color submenu
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.151
Shade submenu
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Shade (submenu)
Style menu
The Shade submenu lets you choose a tint value in 10% increments. The
Other option displays the Line tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you enter a percentage value in the highlighted Shade field.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
3.152
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Item Menu
The QuarkXPress Item menu gives you options for modifying, positioning, and reshaping boxes, lines, and text paths. You can also customize the method used by these items to contain pictures or text.
Sections
The Item menu is divided into six sections:
• The first section lists commands that open the Modify dialog box, which contains a comprehensive set of controls. These include color, shade, position, size, frame, runaround, clipping path, etc.
• The second section lists fundamental item commands such as Dupli-
cate and Delete. The Step and Repeat command in this section lets you perform advanced duplication.
• The third section lists options that change the way items move, interact, or combine with other items. For example, you can group items so that they do not move apart. Using the Merge options, you can even synthesize a new item based on existing item shapes. Some of these commands are unavailable when only one item is selected.
• The fourth section lists commands that change the stacking order of items or distribute space evenly between items.
• The fifth section lists options that change the shape of an item, clipping path, or runaround path. You can choose among predefined shapes or choose a Bézier option that allows the item to be edited interactively using Bézier points. You can also choose whether your item contains text, a picture, or nothing.
• The sixth section consists of the Point/Segment Type drop-down list, which lets you change the way a selected Bézier segment or point behaves within a Bézier item.
Item menu
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.153
Modify command
Modify dialog box tabs
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Modify (command)
Item menu
The Modify command (
CTRL
+
M
) displays the Modify dialog box, which lets you make comprehensive specifications for text boxes, picture boxes, lines, and text paths.
Modify (dialog box)
Item
& Modify
The Modify dialog box includes tab options that vary according to the kind of item selected:
Selected item
Picture box
Text box
Contentless box
Text path
Line
Tab options available
Box/Picture/Frame/Clipping/Runaround
Box/Text/Frame/Runaround
Box/Frame/Runaround
Line/Text Path/Runaround
Line/Runaround
R The same Modify dialog box tab options are available for anchored items, except for the Runaround tab.
A limited set of options is also available for multiple-selected or grouped items in the Modify dialog box. The Group tab has the same basic control set as the Box tab or the Line tab, depending on what is selected:
Multiple-selected items or groups
Picture boxes
Text boxes
Text and picture boxes
Text paths
Lines or lines and text paths
Other combination
Tab options available
Group (Box)/Picture/Frame
Group (Box)/Text/Frame
Group (Box)/Frame
Group (Line)/Text Path
Group (Line)
Group (Box)
3.154
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
R The Modify command (
CTRL
+
M
) is unavailable when a group
(Item
& Group) is multiple-selected along with an item that is not part of that group.
The Modify dialog box tabs are described in this section in the following order: Box, Line, Text Path, Text, and Picture. The Frame, Clipping, and Runaround tabs are described immediately afterwards, according to their respective commands in the Item menu.
Box (dialog box tab)
Item
& Modify & Box tab
The Modify dialog box Box tab is available whenever a box or a combination of items including a box is selected. The controls in the Box tab let you specify location, size, rotation, skew, and corner radius. You can also specify a background color or background blend for active items.
Some options are unavailable for multiple-selected items.
Box tab
Origin Across, Origin Down (fields)
Item
& Modify & Box tab
The Origin Across and Origin Down fields let you specify the location of the item or group in relation to the upper left corner of the page.
• Origin Across specifies the measurement from the zero point on the horizontal ruler to the left edge of the item’s rectangular bounding box.
• Origin Down specifies the measurement from the zero point on the vertical ruler to the top edge of the item’s rectangular bounding box.
Range
Pasteboard width, height
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Origin Across and Origin Down fields
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.155
Align with Text area
Menus and Dialog Boxes
R The origin fields accept positive or negative values, unless the value entered will place the box off the Pasteboard. Origin values entered for a group or multiple selection affect the bounding box surrounding the entire group. The origin fields are replaced by the Align with Text area when an anchored item is active.
Align with Text (area)
Item
& Modify & Box tab
The Align with Text area replaces the Origin Across and Origin Down fields when the active item is an anchored box or line. (To anchor a box or a line to flow with text, copy it to the clipboard while the Item tool e is selected, and paste it into a text box or text path while the Content tool
E is selected.) The Align with Text options let you control how an anchored box or line is placed in relation to its surrounding text.
• Ascent aligns the top of the anchored item with the ascent of the character immediately to the right of the anchored item.
• Baseline places the bottom of the anchored item on the text baseline.
• The Offset field is available when Baseline is chosen. The Offset value is similar to a Baseline Shift applied through the Style menu: A negative value lowers the anchored item in relation to its baseline, and a positive value places the anchored item higher.
R The Offset field is more suited than Baseline Shift for positioning anchored items for two reasons: (1) The Offset field preserves the positioning of anchored items when local text attributes are overridden by a style sheet, and (2) When characters are transformed into anchored boxes with the
ALT
+Text to Box command (Style menu), a value is automatically entered into the Offset field to mimic the baseline position originally desired by the font designer.
3.156
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Width, Height (fields)
Item
& Modify & Box tab
The Width and Height fields let you specify the size of the active box.
The contents of the box are not altered by these fields. If the active box or group is nonrectangular, the Width and Height values refer to the size of the rectangular bounding box that surrounds it.
Range
.001 pt to
Pasteboard edge
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
R The size of the largest box you can specify is limited only by the width and height of the Pasteboard. Changing the size of a box does not change its origin.
Angle (field)
Item
& Modify & Box tab
The Angle field lets you rotate any item or group of items. The rotation takes place around the center of the overall selection. The Angle field accomplishes the same task as the Rotate tool
R.
Range
±360°
Measurement system degrees
Smallest increment
.001
Skew (field)
Item
& Modify & Box tab
Skew tilts the bounding box of an item to create a slanted visual effect.
Range
±75°
Measurement system degrees
Smallest increment
.001
Width and Height fields
Angle and Skew fields
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.157
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Corner Radius field
Suppress Printout check box
Box area
Corner Radius (field)
Item
& Modify & Box tab
Corner Radius affects the size of the corner area for a Rounded-corner,
Beveled-corner, or Concave-corner box. Rectangle boxes are treated as
Rounded-corner boxes with a Corner Radius of zero. The field is not available for elliptical boxes, Bézier boxes, or groups.
Range
0 to 2"
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
R Two inches, or its equivalent measurement in any of the various measurement systems, is the maximum Corner Radius.
Suppress Printout (check box)
Item
& Modify & Box tab
Checking Suppress Printout in the Box tab prevents an item and its contents from printing with the rest of the page.
Box (area)
Item
& Modify & Box tab
The Box area lets you specify background colors and screen tints for active items using the Color drop-down list and Shade field.
• The Color drop-down list lets you choose a color for the background of active items from your list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box
(Edit
& Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files. Choose None to make the background transparent. If multiple items with differing colors are selected when you open the dialog box, the Color drop-down list defaults to Mixed Colors.
3.158
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• The Shade field lets you enter a screen tint percentage for the specified
Color. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s drop-down list.
Shade is not available when None or White is chosen in the Color drop-down list.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
R If varying item types are multiple-selected when you open the
Modify dialog box, the Box area controls will affect line color as well as box background color.
Blend area
Blend (area)
Item
& Modify & Box tab
The Blend area of the Box tab lets you specify a blend (a two-color gradient) for the background of the active box or boxes. You can specify
Style, Angle, Color, and Shade for the blend.
• The Style drop-down list lets you specify the “shape” of your blend. If the Cool Blends TM XTensions software is disabled, you have a choice of two options: Linear and Solid. The default is Solid, which means the blend feature is turned off. Linear ( ) produces a standard blend that moves in a straight line from one color to the other. A larger range of choices is available when the Cool Blends XTension is enabled, including: Mid-Linear ( ), Rectangular ( ), Diamond ( ), Circular ( ), and
Full Circular ( ). The size of the blend is determined by the size of the item to which it is applied.
• The Angle field lets you specify the rotation of the blend, in degrees.
You can also choose an angle from the field’s drop-down list.
Range
±360°
Measurement system degrees
Smallest increment
.
1
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.159
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Line tab for straight lines
Style drop-down list
• The Color drop-down list in the Blend area lets you choose the second color in the blend. (The first color is determined by the Color and
Shade settings in the Box area.)
• The Shade field lets you enter the maximum screen tint for the second color in the blend. You can also choose a Shade from the field’s drop-down list.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
R A blend applied to multiple-selected boxes will create multiple blends just as if each box had been modified individually.
Line (dialog box tab)
Item
& Modify & Line tab
The Modify dialog box Line tab is available whenever lines, text paths, or a combination of these are selected. The controls in the Line tab let you specify style, width, position, arrowheads, color, and shade for active lines. Some options are unavailable for groups, multiple-selected lines, and text paths.
Style (drop-down list)
Item
& Modify & Line tab
The Style drop-down list lets you choose an option (such as Solid or
Dotted) from your list of default and custom line styles. You can customize these line styles using the Dashes & Stripes dialog box
(Edit
& Dashes & Stripes).
3.160
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Line Width (field)
Item
& Modify & Line tab
The Line Width field and drop-down list let you choose a standard thickness for the active lines — from Hairline to 12 pt — or enter a custom value. If you choose the Hairline option, QuarkXPress prints the rule at .125 point to a 300 dpi PostScript printer. Entering a 0 in any line width field specifies a Hairline.
Range
0 to 864 pt
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Arrowheads (drop-down list)
Item
& Modify & Line tab
The Arrowheads drop-down list lets you choose whether your line has an arrowhead attached to it. Five graphically listed arrowhead options let you determine the direction the arrow points, whether a tail feather is included, or whether an arrow is attached to both ends.
Line Width field
Mode (drop-down list)
Item
& Modify & Line tab
The Mode drop-down list is available when you have a single, straight text path or line selected. Mode is not available for lines drawn using
Bézier points. The Mode drop-down list lets you choose from one of four strategies for positioning, rotating, or resizing a straight line. These include Endpoints, First Point, Midpoint, and Last Point.
R “First point” refers to the endpoint you originally drew from; “last point” refers to the endpoint created when you lifted your mouse to complete the line. If your line is one you converted to a straight line from a Bézier line using the Item
& Shape submenu, “first point” refers to the endpoint that was closest to the left side of your page when you converted the shape.
Arrowheads drop-down list
Mode drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.161
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Positioning fields for Endpoints mode
Bounding box fields for Bézier lines
• When Endpoints is chosen, the First Across, First Down, Last Across, and Last Down fields are available in the Line tab. The First Across and
First Down fields specify the distance from the page’s left edge and top edge to the first point of your line. The page coordinates for the second point in your line are specified in the Last Across and Last Down fields.
Angle and length cannot be directly specified in this mode.
• When First Point is chosen, the First Across, First Down, Angle, and
Length fields are available in the Line tab. This lets you rotate the line around the first endpoint and directly specify line length.
• When Midpoint is chosen, the Midpoint Across, Midpoint Down,
Angle, and Length fields are available in the Line tab. This lets you rotate the line around the midpoint and directly specify line length.
• When Last Point is chosen, the Last Across, Last Down, Angle, and
Length fields are available in the Line tab. This lets you rotate the line around the second endpoint and directly specify line length.
Origin Across, Origin Down, Width, Height, Angle, Skew (fields)
Item
& Modify & Line tab
The Line tab Origin Across, Origin Down, Width, Height, Angle, and
Skew fields are available when a Bézier line or Bézier text path is selected.
These fields work just like those (with the same name) that appear in the
Box tab of the Modify dialog box when a box is selected. Measurements and coordinates in these fields refer to the rectangular bounding box of the Bézier line. See “Box (dialog box tab)” earlier in this section.
R If you resize a Bézier line or Bézier text path using the Width or
Height fields, the Line Width or “weight” is unaffected.
3.162
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Suppress Printout (check box)
Item
& Modify & Line tab
Checking Suppress Printout in the Line tab prevents the line from printing with the rest of the page. If the item is a text path, both the path and its text will be suppressed from printing.
Align with Text (area)
Item
& Modify & Line tab
The Align with Text area is available in the Line tab when the active line is anchored to flow with text. These controls work just like those
(with the same name) that appear in the Box tab of the Modify dialog box when an anchored box is selected. See “Box (dialog box tab)” earlier in this section.
R Text paths cannot be anchored to flow with text.
Line (area)
Item
& Modify & Line tab
The Line area lets you specify colors and screen tints for active lines using the Color drop-down list and Shade field.
• The Color drop-down list lets you choose a color for active lines from your list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors).
The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files. Choose None to make the line transparent. If multiple lines with differing colors are selected when you open the dialog box, the Color drop-down list defaults to Mixed Colors.
Suppress Printout check box
Line area
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.163
Gap area
Text Path tab
Menus and Dialog Boxes
• The Shade field lets you enter a screen tint percentage for the specified
Color. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s drop-down list.
Shade is not available when None or White is chosen in the Color drop-down list.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Gap (area)
Item
& Modify & Line tab
The Gap area lets you specify Color and Shade for the breaks or gaps in lines when a style other than Solid is chosen in the Style drop-down list.
• The Color drop-down list lets you choose a color for the gap of active lines from your list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors).
The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files. Choose None to make the gap transparent. If multiple lines of differing gap colors are selected when you open the dialog box, the Color drop-down list defaults to Mixed Colors.
• The Shade field lets you enter a screen tint percentage for the specified
Color. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s drop-down list.
Shade is not available when None or White is chosen in the Color drop-down list.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Text Path (dialog box tab)
Item
& Modify & Text Path tab
The Modify dialog box Text Path tab is available whenever one or more text paths are selected. The controls in the Text Path tab let you change the way text rides along a path.
3.164
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Text Orientation (area)
Item
& Modify & Text Path tab
The four buttons in the Text Orientation area let you choose how
QuarkXPress rotates or skews characters to make them ride a path.
• The upper-left button is the default. Characters are rotated, but not skewed, to sit at the angle determined by the path.
• The upper-right button produces a 3-D ribbon-like effect. Characters are rotated, skewed, and sometimes flipped to produce the effect.
• The lower-left button produces a warped appearance. Characters are skewed but not rotated.
• The lower-right button produces a stair-step appearance. Characters are neither rotated nor skewed.
Text Alignment (area)
Item
& Modify & Text Path tab
The two drop-down lists in the Text Alignment area let you choose whether text sits above, below, or directly in front of the line. You can also choose which portion of the font is used for alignment.
• The Align Text drop-down list lets you choose which part of a font is used to position characters on the line. You can align text according to the Ascent of the font, its Center, its Baseline, or its Descent.
• The Align with Line drop-down list lets you choose which part of the line is aligned with the choice in the Align Text drop-down list. You can choose Top, Center, or Bottom. For example, if Baseline is chosen in the Align Text drop-down list, and Center is chosen in the Align
with Line drop-down list, the baseline of each character will sit along the line’s center.
Text Orientation area
Align Text drop-down list
Align with Line drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.165
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Flip Text check box
Text tab
Columns and Gutter Width fields
Flip Text (check box)
Item
& Modify & Text Path tab
The Flip Text check box in the Text Path tab places text on the opposite side of the line, starting from the opposite endpoint. For example, if you create a circular text path with text flowing on the outside of the circle,
Flip Text positions text on the inside of the circle. Text Alignment is not affected.
Text (dialog box tab)
Item
& Modify & Text tab
The Modify dialog box Text tab is available whenever one or more text boxes are selected. The controls in the Text tab let you specify the number of columns, the text inset, the vertical alignment, and other text box settings.
Columns (field)
Item
& Modify & Text tab
The Columns field lets you specify the number of columns contained in a text box. You can specify up to 30 columns in a text box.
Range
1 to 30
Measurement system integers
Smallest increment
1
Gutter Width (field)
Item
& Modify & Text tab
The Gutter Width field lets you specify the width of blank space between columns in a text box.
Range
3 to 288 pt
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
3.166
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Text Inset (field)
Item
& Modify & Text tab
The Text Inset field lets you specify the width of the blank space that extends from the inside edge of an active text box to the outside edge of the text. The maximum allowable text inset varies with the size of the text box. The default is 1 point. Inset is applied to all four inner edges of a text box and does not affect gutter width.
Text Angle (field)
Item
& Modify & Text tab
The Text Angle field rotates all the text and the columns within an active text box according to the angle you specify. The box borders are not rotated.
Range
±360°
Measurement system degrees
Smallest increment
.001
Text Skew (field)
Item
& Modify & Text tab
The Text Skew field tilts all the characters in an active text box to create a slanted visual effect. The box itself is not affected.
Range
±75°
Measurement system degrees
Smallest increment
.001
Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical (check boxes)
Item
& Modify & Text tab
The Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical check boxes let you create a mirror image of all the text in an active text box. The direction in which text is typed is also flipped. These check boxes work just like the Flip
Horizontal and Flip Vertical commands in the Style menu.
Text Inset, Text Angle, and Text Skew fields
Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical check boxes
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.167
Menus and Dialog Boxes
First Baseline area
Minimum drop-down list
Vertical Alignment area
First Baseline (area)
Item
& Modify & Text tab
The Minimum and Offset controls in the First Baseline area let you position the first baseline of text in an active text box. The Minimum drop-down list gives you three options to specify the minimum distance between the first line of text and the top of each column.
• Cap Height places the height of a capital letter in the first line’s largest font against the Text Inset.
• Cap + Accent places the extra space needed for accent marks (above uppercase letters) in the first line’s largest font against the Text Inset.
• Ascent places the ascent value (specified by the font designer) of the first line’s largest font against the Text Inset. The result may resemble one of the previous two settings or may place the line somewhere in between, depending on the font design. Ascent is the default.
The Offset field lets you control the space between the first baseline and the top edge of a text box using an absolute value that you specify.
Regardless of the value, the first baseline will never be placed closer to the Text Inset than the Minimum. The default is zero.
Range
First baseline to top of box
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Vertical Alignment (area)
Item
& Modify & Text tab
The Vertical Alignment area controls positioning of all the text relative to the First Baseline and the bottom Text Inset. The Type drop-down list lets you select how the text is vertically aligned.
3.168
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• Top places the first line of text on the First Baseline, and distributes all the text underneath by the leading value. This is the default.
• Centered centers the text top-to-bottom between the First Baseline’s ascent and the bottom of the text box, distributing lines according to the leading value.
• Bottom aligns the bottom of the descenders of the last line of text with the bottom text inset, distributing the lines above according to the leading value.
• Justified places the first line of text on the First Baseline, the last line near the bottom text inset, and evenly distributing all lines in between, overriding the leading value.
R The Inter
ππ Max field is only available when Justified is selected in the Type drop-down list and is used to specify the maximum amount of space QuarkXPress can insert between vertically justified paragraphs. If the paragraphs are spaced as far apart as the Inter
ππ Max field allows and text still does not extend from the top of the box to the bottom, QuarkXPress will override the leading values and insert an equal amount of additional space between lines.
Run Text Around All Sides (check box)
Item
& Modify & Text tab
Run Text Around All Sides lets you surround objects with text on all sides using only one column (when readability is not crucial). Check
Run Text Around All Sides to cause lines of text that have been interrupted by an overlapping item or items to continue from the left side of items over to the right side without starting a new line.
Type drop-down list
Run Text Around All Sides check box
Picture (dialog box tab)
Item
& Modify & Picture tab
The Modify dialog box Picture tab is available whenever one or more picture boxes are selected. The controls in the Picture tab let you specify how a picture is positioned within its box, and how it is angled, scaled, and colored.
Picture tab
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.169
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Offset Across and Offset Down fields
Offset Across, Offset Down (fields)
Item
& Modify & Picture tab
The Offset Across and Offset Down fields in the Picture tab let you specify the position of a picture relative to its box. You can enter negative or positive values for either field. The default for both is zero.
• Offset Across specifies the distance between the left edge of the rectangular bounding box and the left edge of the picture.
• Offset Down specifies the distance between the top edge of the rectangular bounding box and the top edge of the picture.
Range Measurement system
– picture size to various (", pt, cm, etc.)
+ box size
Smallest increment
.001
Scale Across and Scale Down fields
Picture Angle and Picture Skew fields
Scale Across, Scale Down (fields)
Item
& Modify & Picture tab
The Scale Across and Scale Down fields let you specify proportionate or disproportionate sizing for a picture within a picture box. Scale Across scales pictures horizontally; Scale Down scales a picture vertically. If you want to maintain existing proportions, enter equivalent values.
Range
0 to 1,000%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Picture Angle, Picture Skew (fields)
Item
& Modify & Picture tab
The Picture Angle and Picture Skew fields let you rotate and skew a picture independent of the active picture box that contains it.
3.170
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• Picture Angle specifies the rotation of a picture around its center.
Range
±360°
Measurement system degrees
Smallest increment
.001
• Picture Skew tilts a picture’s sides to create a slanted visual effect.
Range
±75°
Measurement system degrees
Smallest increment
.001
Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical check boxes
Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical (check boxes)
Item
& Modify & Picture tab
The Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical check boxes let you create a mirror image of the picture in an active picture box. These check boxes work just like the Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical commands in the Style menu.
Suppress Picture Printout check box
Suppress Picture Printout (check box)
Item
& Modify & Picture tab
Checking Suppress Picture Printout in the Picture tab prevents the picture in an active picture box from printing with the rest of the page. Any visible attributes of the box itself (frame, background color, or blend) will print normally.
Picture area
Picture (area)
The Picture area lets you specify a color and shade for most grayscale or black-and-white pictures using the Color drop-down list and Shade field.
For a list of picture file formats compatible with this feature, see “Modifiable Picture File Formats” in the “Style Menu for Pictures” section.
• The Color drop-down list lets you choose a color to be used in place of black in the grayscale or black-and-white picture within an active picture box. You can choose from the list of colors defined in the Colors
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.171
Frame command
Menus and Dialog Boxes dialog box (Edit
& Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files.
• The Shade field in the Picture tab lets you enter the maximum screen tint percentage for the selected Color of the grayscale or black-and-white picture. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s drop-down list.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Frame (command)
Item menu
The Frame command (
CTRL
+
B
) is available for active boxes. The command displays the Frame tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you choose from a variety of line styles and bitmap frame designs to apply to box borders.
Frame (dialog box tab)
Item
& Frame
The Modify dialog box Frame tab lets you specify width, style, color, and shade for your frame. The dialog box includes a Preview area that shows a rectangular representation of the specified frame.
R A frame applied to a box always resides inside the box borders. However, you can use the Framing drop-down list in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document) to specify whether QuarkXPress automatically outsets these borders when a frame is applied (choose Outside) or whether
QuarkXPress keeps the current box size, forcing the frame to overlap or reflow the contents (choose Inside).
Frame tab
3.172
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Width (field)
Item
& Frame
The Width field and drop-down list lets you choose a standard thickness for the frame of active boxes — from 0 to 12 pt — or enter a custom value. The default is zero, which applies no frame.
Range
Determined by box size
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Style (drop-down list)
Item
& Frame
The Style drop-down list lets you choose a frame style (such as Solid or
Dotted) from the list of default and custom line styles. You can customize these line styles using the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit menu). If the active box is a standard rectangle shape with no corner radius, you can also choose among several bitmap frames.
Frame (area)
Item
& Frame
The Frame area lets you specify colors and screen tints for frames using the Color drop-down list and Shade field.
• The Color drop-down list lets you choose a frame color from the list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors).
• The Shade field lets you enter a screen tint percentage for the specified
Color. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s drop-down list.
Shade is not available when White is chosen in the Color drop-down list.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Width field and drop-down list
Style drop-down list for rectangular box
Frame area
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.173
Gap area
Clipping command
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Gap (area)
Item
& Frame
The Gap area lets you specify Color and Shade for the breaks, gaps, or holes in frames when a style other than Solid is chosen in the Style drop-down list.
• The Color drop-down list lets you choose a color for the gap area of the frame from the list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box
(Edit
& Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files. Choose None to make the gap transparent.
• The Shade field lets you enter a screen tint percentage for the specified
Color. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s drop-down list.
Shade is not available when None or White is chosen in the Color drop-down list.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Clipping (command)
Item menu
The Clipping command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
T
) is available whenever a picture box containing a picture is selected. The command displays the Clipping tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you create or modify a QuarkXPress clipping path.
A clipping path tells QuarkXPress which areas of a picture should be visible and which areas should be rendered transparent. This is especially useful when you are attempting to isolate the picture’s subject from the surrounding background contained in the original picture file.
3.174
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Clipping (dialog box tab)
Item
& Clipping
The Modify dialog box Clipping tab lets you create or make simple modifications to a QuarkXPress clipping path. You can base this clipping path on a path or alpha channel embedded in the original picture, or on the white areas of the image. Changes made to a picture’s position, scale, angle, rotation, or skew will cause its associated clipping path to update automatically. You can further edit clipping paths by checking Clipping
Path in the Item
& Edit submenu and manually reshaping.
R A Guide to QuarkXPress uses the term clipping path to refer to a
QuarkXPress clipping path, which is based on the high-resolution image but created and stored with the QuarkXPress document. Clipping paths created in painting or illustration programs are referred to as embedded paths. You may choose to keep a
QuarkXPress clipping path identical to an embedded path, but changes made in QuarkXPress are stored exclusively in the document as a specification for an individual picture box. Each picture box in a QuarkXPress document may contain different clipping specifications for the same imported picture.
Clipping tab
Preview (area)
Item
& Clipping
The Preview area displays a small-scale representation of how the picture in the active box will look in the actual document. On color monitors, the picture box border is colored blue by default, and the clipping path is colored green. On grayscale monitors, the picture box border is shaded darker than the clipping path. Colors can be changed via the Margin and
Ruler buttons in the Display tab of the Application Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Application).
Preview area
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.175
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Rescan and Crop to Box buttons
Information area
Rescan (button)
Item
& Clipping
Clicking Rescan rebuilds the clipping path and its Preview using whatever specifications are currently entered in the drop-down lists, fields, or check boxes of the Clipping tab. If a high-resolution picture file can be found, QuarkXPress accesses it when you click Rescan.
R Clicking Rescan undoes Crop to Box.
Crop to Box (button)
Item
& Clipping
The Crop to Box button cuts portions of a clipping path that fall outside the current box borders. Picture areas outside the clipping path are rendered transparent.
Information (area)
Item
& Clipping
The Information area displays the number of alpha channels and embedded paths in your picture file. The number of Bézier points used in the current QuarkXPress clipping path is also displayed.
Type (drop-down list)
Item
& Clipping
The Type drop-down list lets you choose the original source used to create a QuarkXPress clipping path. You can choose Item, Picture Bounds,
Embedded Path, Alpha Channel, or Non-White Areas.
• When Item is chosen, there is no clipping path. The picture box borders alone dictate which parts of a picture are visible.
• Picture Bounds creates a new clipping path based on the rectangular
“canvas area” of the imported picture file. This includes any white
3.176
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress background saved with your original picture file. When Picture
Bounds is chosen, the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields are available for changing the size of the clipping path. These fields are replaced by other controls if you select a different clipping path Type.
• Embedded Path creates a new clipping path based on a pictureembedded path drawn in Adobe Photoshop. When Embedded Path is chosen, the Path, Outset, and Tolerance controls become available for customizing the QuarkXPress clipping path.
• Alpha Channel creates a new clipping path based on an alpha channel built into a TIFF image by a photo-editing application. (An alpha channel is an invisible grayscale picture used to edit the real picture to which it is attached.) Because alpha channels are used most often to mask or
“black out” portions of the real picture, it is the highlight and middletone areas of the alpha channel that fall inside the QuarkXPress clipping path; the black or near-black areas fall outside. When Alpha Channel is chosen, the Alpha, Outset, and Tolerance controls are available for customizing the QuarkXPress clipping path. The Threshold field in the
Tolerance area determines the amount an alpha channel area may deviate from black before it falls inside the initial clipping path. A Tolerance of 10% specifies that darkness values of 91% to 100% in the alpha channel will fall outside the initial path, while anything lighter (0–90%) will fall inside. (The values in the picture itself may be entirely different, because an alpha channel possesses its own identity.)
• Non-White Areas creates a new clipping path based on the picture subject itself. When Non-White Areas is chosen, the Outset and Tolerance controls are available for customizing the QuarkXPress clipping path.
The Threshold field in the Tolerance area determines the amount a picture area may deviate from white before it is included inside the initial clipping path. The default Tolerance of 10% specifies that darkness values of 0 to 10% will initially fall outside the path, while anything darker
(11%–100%) will be included in the initial clipping path. When you
Type drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.177
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields
(Picture Bounds type)
Path drop-down list (Embedded Path type) choose Non-White Areas for a color picture, areas are clipped according to how they would appear if converted to grayscale.
R If you make edits to a clipping path using point-by-point Bézier editing, the Type drop-down list displays “User-Edited Path” the next time you open the Modify dialog box. This mode lets you adjust the outset, etc., of your edited path without destroying its basic shape. If you select a new Type when “User-Edited Path” is displayed, you must click Cancel to restore the user-edited path. If you select a new Type and click OK, Bézier edits are lost.
Top, Left, Bottom, Right (fields)
Item
& Clipping
Available when Picture Bounds is chosen, the Top, Left, Bottom, and
Right fields let you specify the distance between the rectangular picture edges and a rectangular clipping path’s edges. Negative values place the clipping path edges within the picture bounds.
Range
±288 pt
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Path, Alpha (drop-down lists)
Item
& Clipping
When Embedded Path is chosen in the Type drop-down list, the Path drop-down list lets you choose which path to use from the picture file.
When Alpha Channel is chosen in the Type drop-down list, the Path drop-down list is replaced by the Alpha drop-down list. The Alpha dropdown list lets you choose which alpha channel to use.
3.178
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Outset (field)
Item
& Clipping
When you have a non-rectangular clipping path, the Outset field specifies the exact distance in points that you want the current clipping path to grow or shrink. A positive value makes the clipping path grow to include more of the picture; a negative value makes the clipping path shrink to include less.
Range
±288 pt
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Tolerance (area)
Item
& Clipping
When Embedded Path, Alpha Channel, or Non-White Areas is chosen in the Type drop-down list, the Tolerance area is available. The Noise,
Smoothness, and Threshold values in the Tolerance area let you “clean up” your picture-based clipping path.
• The Noise field specifies the smallest allowable closed path. Any closed path or artifact smaller than the noise value will be deleted. For example, if you are generating a clipping path for a picture of the moon and stars and you find that each star has a tiny path drawn around it, you could choose to specify a Noise value large enough to exclude these small paths but small enough to include the path around the moon.
Range
±288 pt
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
• The Smoothness field allows you to specify clipping path accuracy. A lower value creates a more complex path with a greater number of points because it moves the path closer to each exact pixel. A higher number creates a path that is less likely to produce a limitcheck error on
Outset field
Tolerance area
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.179
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Threshold field
Invert, Outside Edges Only, and
Restrict to Box check boxes output, but with less accuracy. This is similar to the Flatness setting in many image editing applications.
R If your clipping path has too many points to output the document,
QuarkXPress attempts to decrease the path complexity by automatically raising the Smoothness setting during printing.
• The Threshold field is available when Alpha Channel or Non-White
Areas is chosen in the Type drop-down list. When Alpha Channel is chosen, the Threshold value determines the amount that an alpha channel area may deviate from black before it falls inside the initial clipping path. Values in the actual picture are not considered when Alpha Chan-
nel is chosen. When Non-White Areas is chosen, the Threshold value determines the amount that an actual picture area may deviate from white before it gets included within the path. Areas in color pictures are clipped according to how they would appear if converted to grayscale.
The initial results of the Threshold setting are further affected by the other settings in the Clipping tab.
Range
0 to 100%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Invert (check box)
Item
& Clipping
When Embedded Path, Alpha Channel, or Non-White Areas is chosen in the Type drop-down list, the Invert check box is available. Invert swaps the interior of your clipped path with the exterior.
Outside Edges Only (check box)
Item
& Clipping
The Outside Edges Only check box determines whether QuarkXPress will allow “paths within paths.” For example, if checked, QuarkXPress might create two paths for an apple and a donut (one path for each) but
3.180
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress it will not clip out the hole within the donut. Only the outside paths are kept. In order for paths to be drawn within the larger paths, uncheck
Outside Edges Only.
Restrict to Box (check box)
Item
& Clipping
In prior versions of QuarkXPress, any portion of your image residing outside the picture box was not displayed. The Restrict To Box check box in the Clipping tab removes this constraint. If Restrict To Box is unchecked in the Clipping tab, unclipped portions of the image that fall outside the picture box will be visible in the document.
Runaround (command)
Item menu
The Runaround command (
CTRL
+
T
) is available whenever a non-anchored item is selected. The command displays the Runaround tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you create or modify a QuarkXPress runaround path for a picture, or change the runaround outset for any other item.
Runaround is a term used to describe how text in a text box flows around items that are placed in front of it. An edit to an item’s runaround changes the way text in a text box behaves when the edited item is placed in front of text. Runaround specifications can be created for an item, or for the picture in a picture box. A picture-based runaround path tells QuarkXPress which picture areas repel text positioned behind it, and which picture areas allow text to flow behind unimpeded.
Runaround (dialog box tab), picture box selected
Item
& Runaround
When a picture box is selected, the Modify dialog box Runaround tab works like the Clipping tab, but with a few exceptions:
Runaround command
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.181
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Runaround tab for picture boxes
• Paths created in the Runaround tab are called runaround paths. These paths force text in text boxes stacked behind the picture box to abut and flow around the “included” areas of the path. The areas outside the runaround path allow the text to flow unimpeded in back. A runaround path does not determine which areas of a picture are visible.
• On color monitors, the runaround path is displayed in the Preview area by default as a magenta path. Hypothetical text is shown as a series of horizontal gray bars.
• The None option is available in the Type drop-down list when the
Runaround tab is used. Although selecting Item in the Type dropdown list of the Clipping tab turns clipping off, you must choose
None in the Type drop-down list to turn runaround off. Selecting Item in the Runaround tab causes the active picture box to repel text according to a runaround outset measured from the picture box borders. This outset is specified using the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields when a rectangular box is active, and by the Outset field when a nonrectangular box is active. Item runaround does not produce an editable Bézier runaround path.
• The Same As Clipping option is available in the Type drop-down list when the Runaround tab is displayed. Choose this option if you want text to run around the QuarkXPress clipping path you have specified in the Clipping tab. Although you may specify a unique Outset and
Smoothness when Same As Clipping is chosen, any Bézier edits to the runaround area must be made to the clipping path.
• To edit an applied runaround path using Béziers, Runaround must be checked instead of Clipping Path in the Item
& Edit submenu — except when Same As Clipping is chosen in the Type drop-down list.
• The Restrict To Box check box does not affect picture visibility as it does in the Clipping tab. When Restrict To Box is checked in the
Runaround tab, text ignores any portion of the runaround path that
3.182
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress falls outside the picture box borders. This achieves the same result as clicking Crop to Box in the Runaround tab, but the runaround path itself is not redrawn.
• The default in the Type drop-down list of the Runaround tab is Item with a 1-point outset all around.
See “Clipping (dialog box tab)” earlier in this section for detailed descriptions of the controls in the Runaround tab for picture boxes.
Runaround (dialog box tab), text box or contentless box selected
Item
& Runaround
When the active item is a text box (or a box to which Item
& Content
& None has been applied), the Runaround tab lets you choose None or
Item in the Type drop-down list. If you choose None, text from other text boxes stacked behind will be allowed to flow unimpeded behind the active text box. If you choose Item, you can specify a runaround outset as measured from the text box borders. This outset is specified using the
Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields when a rectangular box is active, and by the Outset field when a non-rectangular box is active. These fields accept positive or negative values. Negative values place the runaround area within the text box borders. Item runaround does not produce an editable Bézier runaround path.
Range
±288 pt
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Runaround (dialog box tab), line or text path selected
Item
& Runaround
When a line or text path is selected, the Runaround tab lets you choose
None, Item, or Manual in the Type drop-down list. If you choose None as the runaround type, text from other text boxes stacked behind will flow
Runaround tab for text boxes and contentless boxes
Runaround tab for lines and text paths
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.183
Duplicate command
Menus and Dialog Boxes unimpeded behind the active item. Item runaround does not produce an editable Bézier runaround path. Choose Manual to create a new, editable runaround path for the active line or text path. The runaround path can be edited by choosing Item
& Edit & Runaround while the item is active.
If you choose Item or Manual, you can specify a runaround Outset as measured from the active line. This field accepts positive values only.
Range
0 to 288 pt
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Duplicate (command)
Item menu
The Duplicate command (
CTRL
+
D
) automatically places a copy of active items in front of all other items. The placement of the copy is determined by the offset values specified in the Step and Repeat dialog box (Item
&
Step and Repeat). The default horizontal and vertical offset value is .25".
When you duplicate boxes, their contents are duplicated as well. Duplicating a linked text box duplicates the active box, the text contained by the active box, plus any succeeding text in the text chain. An overflow symbol t is displayed in the duplicated text box to represent the additional text.
R Duplicate cannot place a copy outside an original item’s constraining box or the pasteboard.
3.184
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Step and Repeat (command)
Item menu
The Step and Repeat command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
D
) displays the Step and
Repeat dialog box, which lets you create multiple copies of active items and specify where QuarkXPress places the copies.
When you step and repeat boxes, their contents are duplicated as well.
Duplicating a linked text box duplicates the active box, the text contained by the active box, plus any succeeding text in the text chain. An overflow symbol t is displayed in the duplicated text box to represent the additional text.
R Step and Repeat cannot place a copy outside an original item’s constraining box or the Pasteboard.
Step and Repeat (dialog box)
Item menu
The Step and Repeat dialog box lets you enter values in the Repeat
Count, Vertical Offset, and Horizontal Offset fields to place duplicates of active items.
• The Repeat Count field lets you specify the number of duplicates you want made of the original item.
Range
1 to 99
Measurement system integers
Smallest increment
1
• The Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields let you specify where copies are placed relative to the original. A positive horizontal value places copies to the right of the original; a negative horizontal value places copies to the left of the original. A positive vertical value places copies below the original; a negative vertical value places copies above the original. The values entered in the Step and Repeat dialog box
Step and Repeat command
Step and Repeat dialog box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.185
Delete command
Menus and Dialog Boxes become the default Step and Repeat offsets, as well as the offsets used by Duplicate, until you close the program.
Range
±24"
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
Delete (command)
Item menu
The Delete command (
CTRL
+
K
) removes active items. When a box is active,
Delete removes contents along with the box.
When you delete a text box that is part of a linked chain, the other links are maintained around the deleted box, and the text is reflowed through the other text boxes of the chain.
R To delete one or more active points in a Bézier item without deleting the entire item, make sure the Item tool e is selected, and use the
BACKSPACE key instead of the Delete command.
Group (command)
Item menu
The Group command (
CTRL
+
G
) combines two or more active items so that they can be selected and moved as a single item. An active group is contained within a bounding box, indicated by a dotted line when the group is active. A group is made active by clicking one of its items with the Item tool e or multiple-selecting more than one of its items with the Content tool
E. The bounding box is not displayed if all items in a group are within a rectangular text or picture box.
You can perform many of the same basic operations on a group that you can on a single item; for example, Cut, Copy, Duplicate, Lock, etc. You cannot resize a group. A group can contain other groups.
3.186
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
R When the Content tool
E is selected, you can move and resize individual items within a group. You move items by pressing the
CTRL key while dragging the mouse.
Ungroup (command)
Item menu
The Ungroup command ( CTRL + U ) dissociates grouped items. Ungroup is available when a group is active. A group is made active by clicking one of its items with the Item tool e or by multiple-selecting more than one of its items with the Content tool
E.
When an active group contains other groups, choosing Ungroup ungroups only the most recently established group.
Constrain/Unconstrain (command)
Item menu
The Constrain command changes an active group to a constrained group.
Items in a constrained group are contained within a constraining box. Items within a constraining box are referred to as constrained items; these items cannot be moved or resized beyond their constraining box. Constrain is available when the back item of an active group has box borders that encompass all the other items in the group.
You can perform most of the same operations on a constrained group that you can on a group. When the Content tool
E is selected, you can move and resize individual items within a constrained group. You can move individual items by pressing the
CTRL key while dragging the mouse. You cannot reduce the size of a constraining box to where it can no longer contain its constrained items. You cannot move or resize constrained items beyond their constraining box.
Group, Ungroup, and Constrain commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.187
Lock command
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Unconstrain is available and replaces Constrain when a constrained group is active. Choosing Unconstrain removes the constraining relationship among grouped items.
Lock/Unlock (command)
Item menu
The Lock command (F6) prevents you from moving, resizing, reshaping, or rotating items with the mouse. Lock is available when unlocked items are active. You can still move and modify locked items using the Modify dialog box (Item
& Modify) or the Measurements palette.
When you move a pointer over an active, locked item’s resize handles,
Bézier points, Bézier segments, or picture contents, the pointer changes to the Padlock pointer y. The Padlock pointer is also displayed when you move the Mover pointer e or the Rotation pointer : over any active locked item. Unlock is available and replaces Lock when locked items are active.
Merge (submenu)
Item menu
The Merge submenu is available when more than one item is selected.
The commands in the Merge submenu allow you to create complex geometric Bézier shapes more efficiently than drawing them. Except for Join
Endpoints, all the commands produce a single Bézier box with one set of contents. This box replaces the items originally selected. The shape of the new box is synthesized in various ways from the original item shapes.
The original items selected may include lines mixed with boxes. Some of the Merge commands require overlap among selected objects. The only contents or attributes preserved (text, pictures, background colors, etc.) are those of the back item in the stack.
3.188
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• Intersection locates any areas that overlap the item in back, retains these areas, and cuts out the rest.
• Union combines all the item shapes into one shape, retaining all overlapped areas and non-overlapped areas. Items need not overlap for this command to be effective. Non-overlapping shapes remain separated in space after being merged but behave collectively as one item.
• Difference removes all the item shapes except for the item shape at the back of the stack. If this shape is overlapped, the overlapped area is cut out. Difference is useful for punching holes in an existing item shape, or for deleting or cropping parts of a Bézier illustration.
• Reverse Difference retains a union of all the item shapes except for the item shape at the back of the stack, which is cut out. If the item in back is overlapped, the overlapping area is cut out from the item shapes in front.
• Exclusive Or retains all the item shapes but cuts out any areas that overlap. If you edit the points surrounding the cut-out area, you will notice that there are two corner points at every location where two lines originally crossed.
• Combine is similar to Exclusive Or, with one difference: If you edit the points around the cut-out area, you will notice that no points were added where two lines cross.
• Join Endpoints is unique among Merge commands because it creates a
Bézier line instead of a Bézier box. Join Endpoints is available only when exactly two lines or text paths are active. An endpoint from one active line must overlap an endpoint from the other active line. (Endpoints can also be joined if the distance between them is equal to or less than the
Snap Distance specified in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box.) Midpoints cannot be joined. Join Endpoints creates a single
Bézier corner point to replace the two overlapping endpoints. A single
Bézier line or text path results.
Merge submenu
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.189
Split submenu
Menus and Dialog Boxes
R Join Endpoints works best when the two endpoints are perfectly overlapped. This is easily accomplished by snapping both points to a horizontal and vertical guide pair. If the overlapping points are not perfectly equal in position, QuarkXPress interpolates between their positions.
Split (submenu)
Item menu
The Split submenu is available only when the active item is a single box that contains more than one closed path or consists of a closed path that crosses over itself like a “figure eight.” The commands in the Split submenu let you break apart paths (in a multiple-shape box) into two or more boxes. Both of the commands in the Split submenu produce multiple Bézier boxes. The new boxes replace the box that was originally selected. The contents or attributes of the original box (text, pictures, background colors, etc.) are reproduced for all the resulting boxes.
• Outside Paths splits a box that consists of two or more closed paths separated in space, but does not split closed paths contained within these paths. For example, if you choose Outside Paths when a box shaped like a donut near an apple is active, two boxes result — one for the donut and one for the apple. No box is created for the hole in the donut. Outside Paths also works on paths that cross over themselves. A
“figure eight” for example, is split into two boxes.
• All Paths splits all closed paths in the active item, including paths contained within other paths. All Paths splits a box shaped like two donuts into four boxes — two boxes representing the outsides of the donuts, and two boxes representing the holes in the donuts. All Paths also works on paths that cross over themselves. A “figure eight,” for example, is split into two boxes.
3.190
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Send Backward (command)
Item menu
Send Backward places the active items one level back in the stacking
order. The active item is moved behind the item that was positioned behind it. Send Backward is available when active items are not at the bottom of the stack.
The stacking order of items affects the following:
• Stacking is initially determined by the order in which items are created.
The most recently created item is placed in front of previous items.
• Boxes with background shades applied to them always obscure text, pictures, and items that are behind them. To make a box’s background transparent so that items behind it are visible, apply a box background color of None (Item
& Modify & Box tab). The picture or text contents of a box with a background of None may be opaque, but the box background itself will be transparent.
• Items stacked in front of a box containing text will cause text to reflow if the the overlapping items have a runaround type other than None.
• A constraining box must remain behind boxes it constrains. If you choose
Send to Back for a constrained item, it will be placed immediately in front of its constraining box and behind all other constrained items.
R To activate an item that is completely hidden by another item, press
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT and click at the location of the hidden item.
When there are many layers of items, repeated mouse clicks at the point where items overlap will successively activate items from the top of the stack down to the bottom.
Send to Back (command)
Item menu
The Send to Back command reorders the stacking of items by placing active items at the back of the stack. Send to Back is available when
Send Backward and Send to Back commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.191
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Bring Forward and Bring to Front commands active items are not at the back of the stack. For more information on stacking order, see “Send Backward (command)” earlier in this section.
Bring Forward (command)
Item menu
Bring Forward brings the active item one level forward in the stacking order.
The active item is moved in front of the item that was positioned on top of it. Bring Forward is available when active items are not at the top of the stack. It is not available when a constraining box is selected independently of its group. For more information on stacking order, see “Send Backward
(command)” earlier in this section.
Bring to Front (command)
Item menu
The Bring to Front command reorders the stacking of items by placing active items at the top of the stack. Bring to Front is available when active items are not at the top of the stack. It is not available when a constraining box is selected independently of its group. For more information on stacking order, see “Send Backward (command)” earlier in this section.
Space/Align (command)
Item menu
The Space/Align command (
CTRL
+,) displays the Space/Align dialog box, which lets you control the amount of horizontal and/or vertical space between multiple-selected items. Space/Align is available when two or more items are active.
Space/Align command
3.192
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Space/Align (dialog box)
Item
& Space/Align
The Space/Align dialog box consists of the Horizontal and Vertical areas. To enable the controls in either area, check Horizontal or Vertical.
You can specify horizontal spacing and alignment alone, vertical spacing and alignment alone, or a combination of the two.
Space/Align dialog box
Horizontal (area)
Item
& Space/Align
The Horizontal check box lets you control horizontal spacing and alignment among the active items. Checking Horizontal enables the Space,
Distribute Evenly, and Between controls in the Horizontal area.
The horizontal space between active items can be controlled three ways:
You can specify an absolute amount of space between items; you can specify a percentage of the space currently between items; or you can distribute space evenly between items. You specify from which parts of items
(centers or edges) QuarkXPress measures the space by choosing an option from the Between drop-down list.
Horizontal area
Space (button)
Item
& Space/Align & Horizontal checked
When you specify Space and enter a value in the Space field in the
Horizontal area, QuarkXPress spaces items relative to the left active item, which does not move. The left item is defined as the item whose left bounding box edge (or line portion including line width and text on a path) extends closest to the left side of the pasteboard. If two or more items have the same left edge position, QuarkXPress spaces active items with respect to the item closest to the top of the Pasteboard.
Space button and field
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.193
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Distribute Evenly button
Between drop-down list
• To specify an absolute amount of horizontal space between active items, enter a value from 0 to 10" in the Space field.
Range
0 to 10"
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
• To position active items according to a percentage of their current horizontal spacing relative to one another, enter a value from 0 to 1,000%.
For example, for active items horizontally spaced 2" apart from center to center, a value of 50% reduces space between centers to 1".
Range
0 to 1,000%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Distribute Evenly (button)
Item
& Space/Align & Horizontal checked
To place an equal amount of horizontal space between active items, specify Distribute Evenly. Distribute Evenly is available when three or more items are active. When you specify Distribute Evenly, the left and right items do not move. Only items between move. Values entered in the
Space field are ignored when you specify Distribute Evenly.
Between (drop-down list)
Item
& Space/Align & Horizontal checked
The Between drop-down list displays four methods for horizontally aligning active items: Items, Left Edges, Centers, and Right Edges. The method you choose from the Between drop-down list determines how
QuarkXPress implements the value or percentage you enter in the Space field, or how horizontal space is distributed evenly.
When horizontally spacing/aligning a rectangular box, QuarkXPress measures from the sides of the box. When spacing/aligning a group or
3.194
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress an item that is not rectangular, such as an oval or a Bézier box,
QuarkXPress measures from the group’s or the item’s bounding box.
When spacing/aligning a line, QuarkXPress considers all parts of the line, including its width and text on a path.
• Choosing Items places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the right edge of one active item and the left edge of the item to the right of it, and so on.
• Choosing Left Edges places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the left edges of active items.
• Choosing Centers places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the centers of active items.
• Choosing Right Edges places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the right edges of active items.
Vertical (area)
Item
& Space/Align
The Vertical check box lets you control vertical spacing and alignment among the active items. Checking Vertical enables the Space, Distribute
Evenly, and Between controls in the Vertical area.
The vertical space between active items can be controlled in three ways:
You can specify an absolute amount of space between items; you can specify a percentage of the space currently between items; or you can distribute space evenly between items. You specify from which parts of items (centers or edges) QuarkXPress measures the space by choosing an option from the Between drop-down list.
Vertical area
Space button and field
Space (button)
Item
& Space/Align & Vertical checked
When you specify Space and enter a value in the Space field in the
Vertical area, QuarkXPress spaces items relative to the upper active
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.195
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Distribute Evenly button
Between drop-down list item, which does not move. The upper item is defined as the item whose top bounding box edge (or line portion including line width and text on a path) extends closest to the top of the Pasteboard. If two or more items have the same top edge position, then QuarkXPress spaces active items with respect to the left item.
• To specify an absolute amount of vertical space between active items, enter a value from 0 to 10" in the Space field.
Range
0 to 10"
Measurement system various (", pt, cm, etc.)
Smallest increment
.001
• To position active items according to a percentage of their current vertical spacing relative to one another, enter a value from 0 to 1,000% in the Space field. For example, for active items vertically spaced 2" from center to center, a value of 50% reduces space between centers to 1".
Range
0 to 1,000%
Measurement system percent
Smallest increment
.1
Distribute Evenly (button)
Item
& Space/Align & Vertical checked
To place an equal amount of vertical space between active items, specify
Distribute Evenly. Distribute Evenly is available when three or more items are active. When you specify Distribute Evenly, the upper and lower items do not move. Values you enter in the Space field are ignored when you specify Distribute Evenly.
Between (drop-down list)
Item
& Space/Align & Vertical checked
The Between drop-down list displays four methods for vertically aligning active items: Items, Top Edges, Centers, and Bottom Edges. The
3.196
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress method you choose from the Between drop-down list determines how
QuarkXPress implements the value or percentage you enter in the Space field, or how space is distributed evenly.
When vertically spacing/aligning a rectangular box, QuarkXPress measures from the top and bottom of the box. When spacing/aligning a group or an item that is not rectangular, such as an oval or a Bézier box,
QuarkXPress measures from the bounding box. When spacing/aligning a line, QuarkXPress considers all parts of the line, including its width and text on a path.
• Choosing Items places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the bottom edge of one active item and the top edge of the item beneath it, and so on.
• Choosing Top Edges places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the top edges of active items.
• Choosing Centers places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the centers of active items.
• Choosing Bottom Edges places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the bottom edges of active items.
Shape submenu
Shape (submenu)
Item menu
The Shape submenu lets you change the “shape type” of an active item.
For example, you can change a circle into a square or vice versa. You can also change the type of item: Lines can be changed into boxes or boxes into lines. Two of the options in the Shape submenu (
® and †) are arbitrary shapes that allow free-form Bézier editing. The Shape submenu is not available for multiple-selected items.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.197
Shape submenu
Menus and Dialog Boxes
• # Changes the active item into a rectangular box that is not editable using Béziers.
• ! Changes the active item into a rounded-corner box that is not editable using Béziers.
• ı Changes the active item into a concave-corner box that is not editable using Béziers.
•
Ç Changes the active item into an beveled-corner box that is not editable using Béziers.
• @ Changes the active item into an elliptical box that is not editable using Béziers.
•
® Does not change the shape visibly, but does allow interactive Bézier editing whenever Item
& Edit & Shape is checked. If you choose the
Bézier box
® option when a line is active, QuarkXPress traces around the actual line width (along with any arrowhead and dash pattern applied to the line) to convert the line into an elongated Bézier box.
However, if the line is a Bézier line, it may be preferable to make this transformation by simply joining or connecting the endpoints of the line without tracing around its width. To join or connect the endpoints of a Bézier line to form a Bézier box, press the
ALT key while choosing the Bézier box
® option. If the endpoints sit on top (or almost on top) of each other, they are joined into one point. Otherwise, a new line segment is added that connects the two endpoints.
•
œ Changes the active item into a straight line (of any angle) that is not editable using Béziers.
•
ß Changes the active item into a straight line that is only horizontal or vertical, and not editable using Béziers.
•
† Changes the active item shape into a Bézier line based on the original box or line shape, and allows interactive Bézier editing whenever
Item
& Edit & Shape is checked. If the original shape is a multiplepath box, only one of the paths in the box will be retained when you convert to a line.
3.198
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
R A Bézier line
† in QuarkXPress is a single “open” path. If you want an item to include “closed” paths or multiple paths, you must work with Bézier box
® items.
Content (submenu)
Item menu
The Content submenu lets you change the “content type” of an active item. For example, you can change a text box into a picture box or an ordinary line into a text path, or vice versa. An item can contain only one type of content, so changes made using the Content submenu delete the current contents of the active item. The Content submenu is not available for multiple-selected items.
• Choose Picture if you want the active box to contain a picture. Picture is not available when the active item is a line or text path.
• Choose Text if you want the active box or line to contain text.
• Choose None if you want the active box to contain neither picture nor text. However, this type of box can contain color, shade, a blend, etc.
Content submenu
Edit (submenu)
Item menu
The Edit submenu is available when the active item is a Bézier item or an item that contains an editable clipping path or runaround path. The options in the Edit submenu let you choose which aspect of the active item you have access to. The Edit submenu is not available for multipleselected items.
• When none of the items in the Edit submenu are checked, only the bounding box of the active item is accessible. You can resize or move it, but you cannot reshape it.
Edit submenu
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.199
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Edit submenu
Point/Segment Type submenu
• When Shape is checked (F10), the bounding box of the item is inaccessible. Instead, you have access to the individual Bézier points that define the item’s shape. Shape is available only for active Bézier items. To change a non-Bézier box into a Bézier box, choose Item
& Shape
& ®. To change a non-Bézier line or text path into a Bézier line or text path, choose Item
& Shape & †.
R When Shape is checked, you can still move a Bézier line without reshaping it. To do so, first select all the points in the active line by pressing
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
A or by double-clicking any of the Bézier points in the line. With all the points selected, drag any point to move the entire line. Make sure that the Point pointer
˝ is displayed before you drag, or you may accidentally reshape the line by moving a segment or curve handle. The line snaps to guides according to the point used to drag it.
• Runaround is available when a picture-based runaround path — or a manual runaround path for a text path — has been created for the active item using the Runaround tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu). When Runaround is checked (
CTRL
+F10), the runaround path displays (the default color is magenta), and can be edited using Béziers.
• Clipping Path is available when a picture-based clipping path has been created for an active picture box using the Clipping tab of the Modify dialog box. When Clipping Path is checked (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+F10), the clipping path displays (the default color is green), and can be edited using Béziers.
Point/Segment Type (submenu)
Item menu
The Point/Segment Type submenu lets you convert active Bézier points and segments. The top half of the Point/Segment Type submenu lists point types (Corner Point, Smooth Point, and Symmetrical Point).
The bottom half of the submenu lists segment types (Straight Segment
3.200
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress and Curved Segment). To gain access to Bézier points and segments, one of the options in the Item
& Edit submenu must be checked.
A Bézier point is made active by clicking it. You can multiple-select
Bézier points by Shift-clicking each one. You can select all Bézier points in an active item by pressing
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
A or by triple-clicking any of the
Bézier points in the item. (Double-clicking a point suffices if the item contains only one path.) When multiple points are selected, the Point commands in the Point/Segment Type submenu act on all selected points, and the Segment commands in the submenu affect all segments between adjacent selected points.
Whenever two adjacent points are active, the segment between them is active. You can select an individual segment and its two associated points by clicking the segment or by clicking both points on either end of it. When all points in an item are active (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
A
), all segments are active as well.
Point conversion commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.201
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Point conversion commands
Corner Point (command)
Item
& Point/Segment Type
The Corner Point command (
CTRL
+F1) changes active Bézier points into corner points. A corner point is a Bézier point that connects two straight lines, a straight line and a curved line, or two noncontinuous curved lines. In the case of curved lines, the corner point’s curve handles can be manipulated independently of one another, usually to form a sharp transition between the two segments.
Smooth Point (command)
Item
& Point/Segment Type
The Smooth Point command ( CTRL +F2) changes active points into smooth points. A smooth point is a Bézier point that connects two curved lines to form a continuous curve. The curve handles always rest on a straight line through the point but can be distanced independently, which lets you create an asymmetrical curve.
Symmetrical Point (command)
Item
& Point/Segment Type
The Symmetrical Point command (
CTRL
+F3) changes active points into symmetrical points. A symmetrical point is a Bézier point that connects two curved lines to form a continuous curve. The result is similar to a smooth point, but the curve handles always rest on a straight line through the point and are always equidistant from the point.
3.202
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Item Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Straight Segment (command)
Item
& Point/Segment Type
The Straight Segment command (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+F1) changes active segments into straight segments. A straight segment is a Bézier segment that cannot be curved. A point attached to a straight segment displays no curve handle for the straight segment. When you drag a straight segment, its associated points move with it. Straight segments are created by default when you click (without dragging) to create points in a new Bézier item.
Curved Segment (command)
Item
& Point/Segment Type
The Curved Segment command ( CTRL + SHIFT +F2) changes active segments into curved segments. A curved segment may look straight if its associated curve handles are positioned in a certain way, but it is distinct from a straight segment in the way it behaves.
Points attached to a curved segment display a curve handle for the curved segment. When you drag a curved segment, its associated points remain in place while the segment itself bends, bringing the curve handles along with it. Depending on the type of points attached to the segment (Corner, Smooth, or Symmetrical), the adjoining segments may also bend. Curved segments are created by default when you drag the mouse to create points in a new Bézier item.
Segment conversion commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.203
Menus and Dialog Boxes
R A curved segment in QuarkXPress bends in a different manner depending on which part of it you drag. This lets you shape the segment like a piece of wire, by pushing or pulling on the parts that require adjustment. You do not need to drag curve handles directly.
3.204
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Page Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Page Menu
The QuarkXPress Page menu gives you options for adding, deleting, arranging, and sectioning pages in a document and for navigating through a document.
Sections
The Page menu is divided into four sections:
• The first section lets you insert, delete, and move pages within an open document. Insert is available when a document contains fewer than
2,000 pages. Delete and Move are available when a document contains two or more pages.
• The second section lets you modify the placement of page guides on master pages and change the numbering system for a document or a range of pages in a document. Master Guides is available when a master page is displayed in the document window. Section is available when a page is displayed.
• The third section lets you navigate through a document. The availability of specific commands depends on the number of pages in the document and the page that is currently displayed.
• The fourth section lets you view master pages or document pages. The
Display command is available when a document is active.
Page menu
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.205
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Insert (command)
Page menu
The Insert command displays the Insert Pages dialog box, which lets you add pages to a document.
R You can also access the Insert Pages dialog box while inserting a page using the Document Layout palette (View menu). The dialog box will display if you press the
ALT key while dragging a master page icon into position in the document page area of the palette.
Insert command
Insert Pages dialog box and Insert
page(s) field
Before page, after page, and at end of
document buttons
Insert Pages (dialog box)
Page
& Insert
The Insert Pages dialog box lets you specify how many pages to add, where to add them, which master page to base them on, and whether the text boxes should be linked to current document pages. When you insert pages, QuarkXPress automatically updates page numbers up to the start of the next section if you used the automatic page number characters ( CTRL +2, CTRL +3, or CTRL +4).
• Insert page(s) field: Enter a value between 1 and 100 to specify the number of pages to add. A document can contain up to 2,000 pages.
• Before page, after page, and at end of document buttons: Click a button to specify where to add the new pages. If you click before page or
after page, enter the number of the page that the new pages will precede or follow. The current page number is displayed by default.
R If you designated a prefix and page number style in the Section dialog box (Page
&
Section), you must use that prefix and style when you enter page numbers in fields. You can also enter an absolute page number, which represents the page’s sequential order in the document. To specify an absolute page number, enter a plus sign (+) before the number. See “Numbering Pages and Sectioning
Documents” in Chapter 10, “Document Layout.”
3.206
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Page Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Link to Current Text Chain (check box)
Page
& Insert
The Link to Current Text Chain check box lets you link automatic text boxes on inserted pages to the active text chain in the document. No matter where you add the pages, the text boxes on the new pages are linked to the end of the active text chain.
• The Link to Current Text Chain check box is available if the master page chosen from the Master Page drop-down list contains an automatic text box (as indicated by the Intact Chain icon u in the upper left corner of the master page) and an automatic text box is active on a document page.
• The Link to Current Text Chain check box is unavailable when there is not an automatic text box active on a document page, or when the
Broken Chain icon
U is displayed in the upper left corner of the chosen master page.
Master Page (drop-down list)
Page
& Insert
The Master Page drop-down list lets you choose which master page to base the inserted pages on. The drop-down list lists all the master pages established for the active document, including Blank Single page and
Blank Facing Page master pages. Blank Facing Page is unavailable for nonfacing-page documents.
Link to Current Text Chain check box
Master Page drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.207
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Delete command
Delete Pages dialog box
Delete (command)
Page menu
The Delete command displays the Delete Pages dialog box, which lets you remove a page or a range of pages from the active document.
Delete Pages (dialog box)
Page
& Delete
The Delete Pages dialog box lets you specify a page or range of pages to delete. When you delete pages, QuarkXPress automatically updates page numbers up to the start of the next section. You can specify page numbers in three ways:
• Document page number based on automatic page number characters:
Enter a document page number the same way it displays on the document page. For example, if the page is numbered “2.1,” you must enter “2.1.”
• Absolute page number representing the page’s sequential order in the document: Enter a plus sign before the page number. For example, the third page in a document is always page “+3” even if the document page number is “iii.”
• To the end of a document: Enter a page number as described above for the beginning of the range and then type “end” in the thru field. All the pages from the beginning of the range to the end of the document will be deleted.
When you delete pages, you can expect these results:
• When there are links between text boxes on deleted pages and text boxes on remaining pages, QuarkXPress does not delete text; the last page containing a text box will display an overflow symbol p. If an entire text chain is contained within the deleted pages, the text is deleted.
• Pictures and other items that are not anchored to text are deleted.
3.208
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Page Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• If Auto Page Insertion is enabled (Edit
& Preferences & Document &
General tab) and the text boxes on remaining pages cannot contain the text from the deleted pages, QuarkXPress automatically re-inserts the number of pages necessary to display all the text.
• Automatically inserted pages are based on the master page of the page preceding them. For example, if you specify auto page insertion At End
of Document, newly inserted pages are based on the master page of the last page in the document. QuarkXPress inserts pages automatically only if the master page chosen contains the automatic text chain (as indicated by the Intact Chain icon u in the upper left corner of the master page).
• If you do not want the program to insert pages automatically, disable
Auto Page Insertion.
Move (command)
Page menu
The Move command displays the Move Pages dialog box, which lets you rearrange pages within your document.
Move command
Move Pages dialog box and Move
Page(s) fields
Move Pages (dialog box)
Page
& Move
The Move Pages dialog box lets you rearrange pages in a document. When you move pages, QuarkXPress automatically updates page numbers if you used the automatic page number characters (
CTRL
+2,
CTRL
+3, or
CTRL
+4).
However, QuarkXPress does not change links between text boxes.
• Move page(s) fields: Enter page number(s) for the page(s) to be moved.
• Before page, after page, and to end of document buttons: Click a button to specify a new location for the moved pages.
Before page, after page, and to end of
document buttons
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.209
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Master Guides command
Master Guides dialog box
R If you designated a prefix and page number style in the Section dialog box (Page
&
Section), you must use that prefix and style when you enter page numbers in fields. You can also enter an absolute page number, which represents the page’s sequential order in the document. To specify an absolute page number, enter a plus sign (+) before the number. See “Numbering Pages and Sectioning
Documents” in Chapter 10, “Document Layout.”
Master Guides (command)
Page menu
The Master Guides command is available when a master page is displayed in the document window. The Master Guides command displays the Master Guides dialog box, which lets you change the position of page guides from the positions originally established in the New Docu-
ment dialog box (File
& New & Document). Page guides are nonprinting lines you can use to position boxes and other items in QuarkXPress documents. The page guides also control the size, placement, and number of columns of automatic text boxes on master pages.
Master Guides (dialog box)
Page
& Master Guides
The Master Guides dialog box lets you change the positions of page guides for columns and margins on the master page that is displayed.
Any changes you make to page guides in the Master Guides dialog box, including changes that affect any automatic text boxes, are applied to all document pages based on the master page that is displayed.
3.210
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Page Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Column Guides (area)
Page
& Master Guides
The Column Guides area lets you change the number of column guides and the amount of space between them for the automatic text box on the master page that is displayed.
• Columns field: Enter a value between 1 and 30 to specify the number of columns on the page.
• Gutter Width field: Enter a value from 0.042" to 4" to specify the amount of space between columns.
• The Gutter Width and the number of Columns specified must fit within the area defined by the values in the Margin Guides fields.
R When you modify the column guides, QuarkXPress divides any automatic text boxes into the specified number of columns and adjusts the gutter width as necessary (if you have not moved or resized the box).
Margin Guides (area)
Page
& Master Guides
The Margin Guides area lets you enter new values for the margin guides for the master page displayed in the document window, and for document pages based on that master page. You can enter values in any supported measurement system in the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right fields.
If a facing-page master page is displayed in the document window, the
Left and Right margin fields are replaced by Inside and Outside.
Column Guides area
Margin Guides area
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.211
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Section command
Section dialog box
Section Start check box
Section (command)
Page menu
A section is a group of sequentially numbered pages within a document.
The Section command displays the Section dialog box, which lets you divide a document into individually numbered sections.
The page number shown in the lower left corner of the document window reflects any sectioning and page number format modifications. An asterisk (*) displayed on a document page icon in the Document Layout palette (View menu) indicates the start of a new section.
R You can also access the Section dialog box from the Document
Layout palette (View menu). The dialog box will display if you select a page icon and click the page number indicator in the lower left corner of the palette.
Section (dialog box)
Page
& Section
The Section dialog box lets you designate the current page as the start of a section and specify a prefix for the page numbers, the first page number of the section, and the format of the page numbers.
Section Start (check box)
Page
& Section
Checking Section Start lets you define the current page as the first page of a section. The “current page” is defined as the page whose number is displayed in the lower left corner of the document window. Make sure this number is correct before you start a new section.
R If you access the Section dialog box by clicking the page number indicator in the lower left corner of the Document Layout palette, the
“current page” is designated with italicized characters in the palette.
3.212
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Page Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Book Chapter Start (check box)
Page
& Section
The Book Chapter Start check box applies to documents that are chapters in an open book (File
& New & Book). A Book Chapter Start tells a chapter to start its page numbering after the last page of the previous chapter. To override a book chapter start and create a section, check
Section Start. The Book Chapter Start check box is only available when a chapter is open independently of its book.
Page Numbering (area)
Page
& Section
The Page Numbering area lets you specify the numbering and style for pages in a section. Any automatic page numbers placed using the automatic page number characters ( CTRL +2, CTRL +3, or CTRL +4) will reflect the specified section numbering format. See “Numbering Pages and Sectioning Documents” in Chapter 10, “Document Layout.”
• Prefix field: Enter up to four characters to precede page numbers in a section. For example, you might precede the page number of an appendix with the prefix “app-.”
• Number field: Enter the number you want to assign to the first page of a new section. You must enter Arabic numerals (1, 2, 3, etc.) in the
Number field, regardless of the Format of the section page numbers.
For example, if you are using lowercase Roman numerals for the front matter in a book and want the section to start with v, enter 5 in the
Number field.
• Format drop-down list: Choose a style for page numbers in a section.
Options include numeric 1, 2, 3, 4, uppercase Roman I, II, III, IV, lowercase Roman i, ii, iii, iv, uppercase alphabetic A, B, C, D, and lowercase alphabetic a, b, c, d.
Book Chapter Start check box
Page Numbering area
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.213
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Previous, Next, First, and Last commands
R If you designated a prefix and page number style in the Section dialog box (Page
&
Section), you must use that prefix and style when you enter page numbers in fields. You can also enter an absolute page number, which represents the page’s sequential order in the document. To specify an absolute page number, enter a plus sign (+) before the number. See “Numbering Pages and Sectioning
Documents” in Chapter 10, “Document Layout.”
Previous, Next, First, Last (commands)
Page menu
The Previous, Next, First, and Last commands let you “turn the pages” of your document to display the specified page. Previous and Next are relative to the page currently displayed. First and Last display the absolute first and last pages of the document.
Go to (command)
Page menu
The Go to command displays the Go to Page dialog box, which lets you jump to any page in a document.
Go to command
3.214
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Page Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Go to Page (dialog box)
Page
& Go to
The Go to Page dialog box lets you enter the number of the page you want to display. If two pages in a document have the same section and/or page number, including prefix, QuarkXPress displays the first occurrence of that page number. You can also jump to another page using the Go-to-Page menu in the lower left corner of the document window (click the arrow
, near the page field in the lower left corner of the document window).
R If you designated a prefix and page number style in the Section dialog box (Page
&
Section), you must use that prefix and style when you enter page numbers in fields. You can also enter an absolute page number, which represents the page’s sequential order in the document. To specify an absolute page number, enter a plus sign (+) before the number. See “Numbering Pages and Sectioning
Documents” in Chapter 10, “Document Layout.” To jump to the last page in a document, enter the word “end.”
Go to Page dialog box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.215
Display submenu
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Display (submenu)
Page menu
The Display submenu lets you choose a master page to display in the document window. A master page serves as the basis for documentpage formatting. You create master pages using the Document Layout palette (View menu). The submenu lists all the master pages for the document, and an entry that lets you return to the page previously displayed in the Document.
3.216
A Guide to QuarkXPress
View Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
View Menu
The QuarkXPress View menu gives you options for viewing documents, working with rulers and guides, and opening and closing palettes.
Sections
The View menu is divided into three sections:
• The first section lets you change the size at which you view the document on-screen. The commands in this section are available when a document is open.
• The second section lets you use various layout tools such as rulers and guides. With the exception of Snap to Guides and Preview, when you select a command in this section, it changes from Show to Hide or vice versa. The commands in this section are available when a document is open.
• The third section lets you open and close palettes. When you choose a command from this section, it changes from Show to Hide or vice versa. The commands in this section are always available.
View menu
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.217
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Fit in Window command
50%, 75%, Actual Size, 200%, and
Thumbnails commands
Fit in Window (command)
View menu
The Fit in Window command automatically scales the view to fit (and center) an entire page in the document window. To fit the largest spread and its pasteboard in the document window, press the
ALT key while you choose View
& Fit in Window.
50%, 75%, Actual Size, 200% (commands)
View menu
The 50%, 75%, Actual Size, and 200% commands scale the document view to the chosen size. To specify a custom view size, enter a value between 10% and 800% in the View Percent field in the lower left corner of the document window. You can also access the View Percent field by pressing CTRL + ALT + V .
R Notes
When an item is active, changing the view percentage centers the active item in the document window if (1) the item is on a page and any part of that page is displayed in the document window or (2) the active item is on the pasteboard and any part of the spread containing the active item is displayed in the document window.
If the Display DPI Value field (Edit
& Preferences & Application) is set greater than 72 dpi, the maximum zoom percentage decreases. For example, if your display value is set to 96 dpi, then the maximum zoom is only 711%.
Thumbnails (command)
View menu
The Thumbnails command displays small representations of document pages that you can rearrange and copy between documents. See “Copying
Items and Pages between Documents” in Chapter 10, “Document Layout.”
To change a document to Thumbnails view, you can also enter a “t” in the View Percent field in the lower left corner of the document window.
3.218
A Guide to QuarkXPress
View Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Show Guides, Hide Guides (command)
View menu
The Show Guides command displays nonprinting lines used to position items on pages. Guides include margin guides, the outlines of boxes, the
“X” pattern in empty picture boxes, and ruler guides. The Hide Guides command hides guides so you can see how your finished document looks. By default, Guides are showing.
R Guides display In Front of or Behind items on document pages depending on the Guides setting in the General tab of the Docu-
ment Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
Show Baseline Grid, Hide Baseline Grid (command)
View menu
A baseline grid is a horizontal grid that can be used to ensure that lines of text align horizontally across columns and text boxes. The Show Base-
line Grid command displays the nonprinting grid. The Hide Baseline
Grid command hides the grid so you can more easily view text. By default, the Baseline Grid is hidden.
R Specify the spacing for a baseline grid in the Paragraph tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Docu-
ment). To make selected paragraphs conform to a baseline grid, check Lock to Baseline Grid in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
& Formats).
Snap to Guides (command)
View menu
The Snap to Guides command lets you quickly align items with guides.
When Snap to Guides is checked and you drag an item near a guide, the item aligns automatically with the guide. If you’re creating a new item, the tool’s pointer will snap to the nearest guide. By default, Snap to
Guides is checked.
Show/Hide Guides and Show/Hide
Baseline Grid commands
Snap to Guides command
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.219
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Show/Hide Rulers command
Show/Hide Invisibles command
R Specify the distance at which an item aligns automatically with a guide in the Snap Distance field in the General tab of the Docu-
ment Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
Show Rulers, Hide Rulers (command)
View menu
The Show Rulers command displays rulers, which are used to position items and guides, along the top and left edges of the document window.
See “Using Rulers and Guides” in Chapter 5, “Layout Tools.” The Hide
Rulers command hides the rulers so you can see more of the document window. By default, Rulers are showing.
R In the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document), use the Horizontal Measure and Verti-
cal Measure drop-down lists to specify the measurement system displayed on the rulers and use the Item Coordinates drop-down list to specify whether the horizontal ruler spans a Page or Spread.
Show Invisibles, Hide Invisibles (command)
View menu
The Show Invisibles command displays editable, nonprinting characters such as spaces, tabs, and paragraph returns in text. The Hide Invisibles command hides the characters so you can more easily view text. By default, Invisibles are hidden. Invisible characters are displayed as follows:
Invisible character
Word space
New paragraph
New line
New column
New box
Tab
Indent here
Keyboard key Displays as
SPACE BAR
ENTER
SHIFT + ENTER
ENTER (keypad) 3
SHIFT + ENTER (keypad) b
TAB
.
CTRL +\ i
.
¶ l
3.220
A Guide to QuarkXPress
View Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Preview, Exit Preview (command)
View menu
The Preview command resizes the document window to fill the application window; maximizes the document view; and hides guides, grids, rulers, invisibles, and palettes. The scroll bars, View Percent field, and
Page Number field remain visible so you can move around the preview.
The Exit Preview command returns the document to its previous state.
Show Tools, Hide Tools (command)
View menu
The Show Tools command displays the Tool palette, which provides tools for creating and modifying items. See Chapter 1, “Tools.” The Hide
Tools command closes the Tool palette.
Show Measurements, Hide Measurements (command)
View menu
The Show Measurements command displays the Measurements palette, which lets you edit many item and content specifications. The controls available in the Measurements palette vary according to the active items. See “Measurements Palette” in Chapter 2, “Palettes.” The Hide
Measurements command closes the Measurements palette.
Preview/Exit Preview command
Show/Hide Tools and Show/Hide
Measurements commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.221
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Show/Hide Document Layout and
Show/Hide Style Sheets commands
Show Document Layout, Hide Document Layout (command)
View menu
The Show Document Layout command displays the Document Layout palette, which lets you manipulate document and master pages. See
“Document Layout Palette” in Chapter 2, “Palettes.” The Hide Docu-
ment Layout command closes the Document Layout palette.
Show Style Sheets, Hide Style Sheets (command)
View menu
The Show Style Sheets command displays the Style Sheets palette, which lets you apply character-based and paragraph-based style sheets.
See “Style Sheets Palette” in Chapter 2, “Palettes.” The Hide Style Sheets command closes the Style Sheets palette.
3.222
A Guide to QuarkXPress
View Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Show Colors, Hide Colors (command)
View menu
The Show Colors command displays the Colors palette, which lets you apply colors to text, pictures in specific file formats, and items. See “Colors Palette” in Chapter 2, “Palettes.” The Hide Colors command closes the Colors palette.
Show Trap Information, Hide Trap Information (command)
View menu
The Show Trap Information command displays the Trap Information palette, which lets you specify trapping relationships for adjacent colors on an object by object basis. See “Trap Information Palette” in Chapter
2, “Palettes.” The Hide Trap Information command closes the Trap
Information palette.
Show/Hide Colors and Show/Hide
Trap Information commands
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.223
Show/Hide Lists command
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Show Lists, Hide Lists (command)
View menu
The Show Lists command displays the Lists palette, which lets you generate and update style-sheet based lists for documents and books. See
“Lists Palette” in Chapter 2, “Palettes.” The Hide Lists command closes the List palette.
3.224
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu
The QuarkXPress Utilities menu lets you check spelling and hyphenation, confirm the fonts and pictures used in a document, control which
XTensions and PPDs are used, and customize automatic kerning and tracking controls. The Utilities menu also displays entries for many XTensions.
Sections
The Utilities menu is divided into five sections:
• The first section lets you check spelling or create and edit custom spelling dictionaries. Check Spelling is available when a document is open and the Contentz tool
E is selected. Auxiliary Dictionary is always available; Edit Auxiliary is available when an auxiliary dictionary is open.
• The second section lets you obtain suggested hyphenation for words and create a list of hyphenation exceptions. Suggested Hyphenation is available when the Content tool
E is selected and a text box is active.
Hyphenation Exceptions is always available.
• The third section lets you list and replace all the fonts used in a document, and list and update all pictures used in a document. Usage is available when a document is open.
• The fourth section lets you create and choose sets of XTensions and
PPDs to use with QuarkXPress. XTensions Manager and PPD Manager are always available.
• The last section lets you edit tracking and kerning information for fonts. The Tracking Edit and Kerning Table Edit commands are available when the Kern/Track Editor XTensions software is loaded.
Utilities menu
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.225
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Check Spelling submenu
Word command
Check Word dialog box
Check Spelling (submenu)
Utilities menu
The Check Spelling submenu lets you choose whether to check a word, a story, a document, or master pages. (When a master page is displayed, the Document command changes to Masters.) The text is compared to the XPress Dictionary and any open auxiliary dictionary.
R For Check Spelling to work, the XPress Dictionary file must be in your QuarkXPress folder when you launch QuarkXPress.
Word (command)
Utilities
& Check Spelling
The Word command ( CTRL + W ) displays the Check Word dialog box, which lets you check the spelling of a selected word. To select a word, highlight it, place the Text Insertion bar i in it, or place the Text Insertion bar i immediately next to it. If more than one word is highlighted, the Word command checks the first word in the highlighted range.
Check Word (dialog box)
Utilities
& Check Spelling & Word
The Check Word dialog box displays the word you are checking (the
Suspect Word) and lets you choose from a list of alternative spellings or enter a different spelling.
• A list displays words similar to the suspect word. If the suspect word matches a word in the XPress Dictionary or any open auxiliary dictionary, the matching word is highlighted in the list. If the suspect word is not similar to any word in the open dictionaries, QuarkXPress displays the message, “No similar words found.”
• The Add button (
ALT
+
A
) lets you add the suspect word to the open auxiliary dictionary. Add is available when an auxiliary dictionary is open for the active document.
3.226
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• To replace the suspect word with a word from the list, select it and click
Replace (or double-click a word in the list). To specify a different spelling, enter a replacement in the Replace with field.
Check Story (command)
Utilities
& Check Spelling
The Story command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
W
) displays the Word Count dialog box, which initiates the spell check of the text chain containing highlighted text or the Text Insertion bar i.
Word Count (dialog box)
Utilities
& Check Spelling & Story
The Word Count dialog box displays information about the words in the active story. If any suspect words are found, clicking OK displays the
Check Story dialog box. (If no suspect words are found, clicking OK in the Word Count dialog box returns you to the document.)
• Total displays a count of all words in the story.
• Unique displays the total number of different words in the story.
• Suspect displays the number of unique words that QuarkXPress cannot find in either the XPress Dictionary or the open auxiliary dictionary.
Check Story (dialog box)
Utilities
& Check Spelling & Story
If there are suspect words in the story, clicking OK in the Word Count dialog box displays the Check Story dialog box. The Check Story dialog box displays suspect words, lets you look up alternative spellings, and lets you specify replacement spellings.
• The Suspect Word field displays each unique word that QuarkXPress cannot find in either the XPress Dictionary or the open auxiliary
Story command
Word Count dialog box
Check Story dialog box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.227
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Check Story dialog box dictionary. QuarkXPress displays suspect words in the order they occur in the story; the first instance of a suspect word is highlighted in the document window. Clicking the Suspect Word places it in the Replace
with field so you can edit it.
• The Instances field displays the number of times each suspect word occurs in the story. QuarkXPress treats all instances of a suspect word the same way. If you replace a suspect word, all instances are replaced.
If you skip a suspect word, all instances are left alone.
• The Lookup button (
ALT
+
L
) lets you display a list of words similar to the current suspect word. If the suspect word is not similar to any word in the open dictionaries, QuarkXPress displays the message, “No similar words found.”
• The Skip button (
ALT
+
S
) lets you leave all instances of the suspect word unchanged.
• The Add button (
ALT
+
A
) lets you add the suspect word to the open auxiliary dictionary. Pressing
ALT
+
SHIFT while you click Close adds all suspect words found to the open auxiliary dictionary. Add is available when an auxiliary dictionary is open for the active document.
• The Close button lets you stop the spell check in progress and return to the document.
• The Replace button lets you substitute a different spelling for all instances of the suspect word. To specify a different spelling, click a word in the list or enter a new word in the Replace with field. When you specify a replacement word, QuarkXPress replaces capitalization patterns in found words as follows:
Instance of Suspect Word is all lowercase
ALL UPPERCASE
Capitalized (first character)
Other Capitalization Pattern
Replacement word will be all lowercase
ALL UPPERCASE
Capitalized (first character)
Same Case as Text in Replace with
3.228
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Document/Masters (commands)
Utilities
& Check Spelling & Document/Masters
The Document command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
W
) lets you check the spelling of all the text in a document. When a master page is displayed, the Docu-
ment command changes to Masters. The Masters command lets you check the spelling of all the text on all the master pages. When you check the spelling of document pages, master pages are not included and vice versa.
The Document/Masters command displays the Word Count dialog box.
If there are suspect words in the document or on the master pages, clicking OK in the Word Count dialog box displays the Check Document or
Check Masters dialog box. The controls in the Check Document and
Check Masters dialog box work the same as the Check Story dialog box.
Document/Masters command
Auxiliary Dictionary (command)
Utilities menu
An auxiliary dictionary is a custom spelling dictionary that you create to contain words specific to your work. The open auxiliary dictionary is used together with the XPress Dictionary when you use any of the Check
Spelling commands.
When no documents are open, the Auxiliary Dictionary command displays the Default Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box, which lets you create or open an auxiliary dictionary for all subsequently created documents.
When a document is open, the Auxiliary Dictionary command displays the Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box, which lets you create, open, or close an auxiliary dictionary for the active document.
Check Document dialog box
Auxiliary Dictionary command
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.229
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box
Auxiliary Dictionary (dialog box)
Utilities
& Auxiliary Dictionary
The Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box lets you create or open an auxiliary dictionary for the active document or for all new documents (when no documents are open).
• The Current Auxiliary Dictionary field displays the name of the currently chosen auxiliary dictionary. Opening or creating a new auxiliary dictionary changes the Current Auxiliary Dictionary.
• The Open button lets you open an existing auxiliary dictionary that is highlighted in the list. Only one auxiliary dictionary can be open for use with a document at a time.
• The New button lets you create a new auxiliary dictionary. Enter a name for the auxiliary dictionary in the File name field, choose a location, and click New.
New auxiliary dictionaries are empty. To add words to an auxiliary dictionary, use the Edit Auxiliary command (Utilities menu) or use the
Add feature in the Check Story/Document/Masters dialog boxes
(Utilities
& Check Spelling).
• The Close button lets you close the Current Auxiliary Dictionary so it is no longer associated with the active document or with all new documents.
R Auxiliary dictionaries are saved as separate files on your hard drive.
The path to the auxiliary dictionary is saved with the document. If you move an open auxiliary dictionary to another folder or disk,
QuarkXPress will be unable to find it. To check the spelling of a document associated with a missing auxiliary dictionary, choose
Utilities
& Auxiliary Dictionary, then locate and open the auxiliary dictionary. If you cannot locate the auxiliary dictionary, click Close.
3.230
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Edit Auxiliary (command)
Utilities menu
The Edit Auxiliary command displays the Edit Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box, which lets you modify the contents of the open auxiliary dictionary.
Edit Auxiliary Dictionary (dialog box)
Utilities
& Edit Auxiliary
The Edit Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box lets you add words to or delete words from the auxiliary dictionary.
• The list displays all the words in the auxiliary dictionary.
• The blank field lets you enter words to add to the auxiliary dictionary; you cannot enter spaces or punctuation.
• The Add button lets you add the word in the field to the auxiliary dictionary. You must enter every variation of a word (for example, the singular and plural forms) separately.
• The Delete button lets you delete the highlighted word from the auxiliary dictionary.
• To edit the spelling of a word, delete it and add the correct spelling.
• The Save button saves changes made to the auxiliary dictionary.
R You can also add words to an auxiliary dictionary by clicking Add in the Check Word, Check Story, or Check Document/Masters dialog boxes (Utilities
& Check Spelling).
Edit Auxiliary command
Edit Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.231
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Suggested Hyphenation command
Suggested Hyphenation dialog box
Suggested Hyphenation (command)
Utilities menu
If you need to add hyphens to words to change line breaks, QuarkXPress can provide “suggested hyphenation” to help you break words properly.
The Suggested Hyphenation command (
CTRL
+
H
) displays the Suggested
Hyphenation dialog box, which lets you view syllable breaks for the selected word. To select a word, highlight it, place the Text Insertion bar i in it, or place the Text Insertion bar i immediately next to the word. If more than one word is highlighted, the Suggested Hyphen-
ation command displays syllable breaks for the first word in the highlighted range.
Suggested Hyphenation (dialog box)
Utilities menu
The Suggested Hyphenation dialog box displays syllable breaks for the selected word based on the following:
• First, QuarkXPress checks the paragraph’s H&J specification to see if the word should be hyphenated at all. For example, if the H&J Minimum
Before value is 3, the word “bicycle” would not be broken after “bi” in the Suggested Hyphenation dialog box.
• Second, QuarkXPress checks your list of hyphenation exceptions. If the word is in your list, then that hyphenation is displayed.
• Next, QuarkXPress checks its internal dictionary containing preferred hyphenation for thousands of words. If the word is in this dictionary, then that hyphenation is displayed. The internal dictionary is checked only when Expanded is chosen from the Hyphenation Method dropdown list in the Paragraph tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
• If the word is not in your hyphenation exceptions list or in the internal dictionary, QuarkXPress uses an algorithm to hyphenate words. If the algorithm results in undesirable hyphenations, add those words to your list of hyphenation exceptions (Utilities
& Hyphenation Exceptions).
3.232
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
R The Suggested Hyphenation feature does not alter the selected word. If you decide to add hyphens to a word, try adding discretionary hyphens (
CTRL
+
HYPHEN
), which are used only when line endings force a word to break.
Hyphenation Exceptions (command)
Utilities menu
If you want certain words to hyphenate only in certain ways, you can enter the words and your preferred syllable breaks in a list of “hyphenation exceptions.” The Hyphenation Exceptions command displays the
Hyphenation Exceptions dialog box, which lets you enter preferred hyphenation for specific words. QuarkXPress checks your list of hyphenation exceptions when paragraphs are hyphenated automatically and when it displays the Suggested Hyphenation dialog box (Utilities menu).
R For information about how hyphenation exceptions are stored in the XPress Preferences file, see “Saving XPress Preferences” in Chapter 4, “Customizing QuarkXPress.”
Hyphenation Exceptions command
Hyphenation Exceptions dialog box
Hyphenation Exceptions (dialog box)
Utilities
& Hyphenation Exceptions
The Hyphenation Exceptions dialog box lets you enter words and specify their hyphenation, change the hyphenation of words, and delete words from the list.
• The list displays all the words in the hyphenation exceptions.
• The field lets you enter words with hyphens at specific points. You cannot enter spaces or other punctuation.
For example, enter “pro-cess-ing” to allow hyphenation between the three syllables, enter “pro-cessing” to allow hyphenation only after
“pro,” and enter “processing” to prevent automatic hyphenation.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.233
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Hyphenation Exceptions dialog box
Usage command
Usage dialog box, Fonts tab
• The Add button lets you add the word in the field to the hyphenation exceptions. You must enter every variation of a word (for example, the singular and plural forms) separately.
• When you select a word in the list, the Add button changes to
Replace, which lets you enter different hyphenation for the word.
• The Delete button lets you remove the selected word from the list of hyphenation exceptions.
Usage (command)
Utilities menu
The Usage command displays the Usage dialog box, which includes a
Fonts tab and a Pictures tab. The controls in the Usage dialog box let you find and verify the fonts and pictures used in a document.
Fonts (dialog box tab)
Utilities
& Usage & Fonts tab
The Fonts tab of the Usage dialog box lists all the fonts used in a document and lets you replace a font with another font. When you replace the fonts used on document pages, master pages are not included and vice versa.
• The Name column lists the menu names of all the fonts used on document pages or master pages (whichever is displayed in the document window).
• Before you replace a font you can view the font in the document. The
Show First button displays the first use of the selected font. If the document has subsequent uses of the font, Show First changes to Show
Next. Pressing the
ALT key changes Show Next back to Show First.
• The Replace button displays the Replace Font dialog box, which lets you choose a font to replace all uses of the selected font. (You can also double-click a font name to display the Replace Font dialog box.) The
3.234
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Replacement Font drop-down list lets you select from all the fonts available to your system. To ensure that a font is not used in a document, check the fonts on both the document pages and the master pages.
• Checking More Information displays additional information from the font’s header file, including the font’s file name and type (Type 1,
TrueType, etc.).
Pictures (dialog box tab)
Utilities
& Usage & Pictures tab
The Pictures tab of the Usage dialog box lists all the pictures on document pages, master pages, and the pasteboard. You can determine the status of pictures, view them, locate their disk files for printing, and control whether they print or not.
Usage dialog box, Fonts tab
Print (column)
Utilities
& Usage & Pictures tab
QuarkXPress lets you prevent an active picture from printing by checking
Suppress Picture Printout in the Picture tab of the Modify dialog box
(Item menu). You can also prevent a picture and its frame from printing by checking Suppress Printout in the Box tab of the Modify dialog box
(Item menu). The Print column and drop-down list in the Pictures tab of the Usage dialog box let you change which pictures will print.
• A check mark indicates that the picture and its frame will print normally
(neither Suppress Picture Printout or Suppress Printout is checked).
• No check mark indicates that the picture, or the frame and picture, will not print (either Suppress Picture Printout or Suppress Printout is checked).
• To suppress a picture that is set to print, click in the Print column to remove the check mark. This will check Suppress Picture Printout for the picture (preventing the picture from printing). You can also click the Print drop-down list and choose No.
Usage dialog box, Pictures tab
Print column
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.235
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Print column
Name, Page, Type columns
• To print a picture that is suppressed, click in the Print column to add a check mark. This will uncheck Suppress Picture Printout and print the picture and its frame normally. You can also click the Print drop-down list and choose Yes.
R You can multiple-select pictures and change their print status all at once. To select a range of pictures, click the first picture and press the
SHIFT key while you click the last picture in the range. To select noncontinuous pictures, press the
CTRL key while you click the pictures.
Name, Page, Type (columns)
Utilities
& Usage & Pictures tab
The Name, Page, and Type columns help identify picture files.
• The Name column displays the name of the picture file and the path from the picture file to the document (when the picture was first imported or its last updated location).
• The Page column displays the page number the picture is on. “PB” indicates that the picture lies entirely on the pasteboard next to the listed page.
• The Type column displays the file format of the picture.
R Pictures copied from other applications via the clipboard will have
“static object” listed under the name column without an associated path. Pictures created by the Insert Object command (Edit menu) will simply be named “embedded object” and will also have no path.
Status (column)
Utilities
& Usage & Pictures tab
To print high-resolution pictures, QuarkXPress needs access to the actual picture files. The Status column indicates whether QuarkXPress can find the picture file and whether the picture file has been modified since it was imported. The options in the Status column include:
3.236
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• OK: The picture file has not been moved or edited.
• Modified: The picture file has been edited in another application since it was imported into QuarkXPress, but it has not been moved.
• Missing: The picture file has been renamed or moved.
• Wrong Type: The file type has changed, but the picture file has not been updated. Or, a necessary picture import filter is not loaded (for example, the JPEG Import filter).
• In Use: The picture file is open in another application.
• No Access: The current user does not have privileges to open the file.
• Can’t Open: The computer has too many files open.
R When you print a document that has picture files listed as modified or missing, QuarkXPress prompts you to update them. If you do not update a missing picture file, QuarkXPress prints the low resolution picture preview rather than the original picture file. If you do not update a modified picture file, QuarkXPress still prints the original picture file, but it may not match the preview displayed in the document.
Status column
Show button
Show (button)
Utilities
& Usage & Pictures tab
The Show button displays the highlighted picture to help you determine whether to update it.
Update (button)
Utilities
& Usage & Pictures tab
The Update button lets you update modified pictures and locate missing pictures. If a selected picture is modified, the Update button reimports the picture with a new picture preview. If a selected picture is missing,
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.237
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Update button
More Information check box
XTensions Manager command the Update button displays the Find dialog box, which lets you locate and open the missing picture file.
R When you update a picture, and other missing picture files are found in the same location, a warning gives you the option to update those pictures as well.
More Information (check box)
Utilities
& Usage & Pictures tab
Checking More Information displays the picture’s full path, file size, modification date, dimensions, resolution, and colors.
XTensions Manager (command)
Utilities menu
The XTensions Manager command displays the XTensions Manager dialog box, which lets you control which XTensions are loaded when you launch
QuarkXPress. XTensions that are enabled are stored in your XTensions folder within your QuarkXPress folder. When you disable an XTension, the
XTensions Manager moves it to the XTensions (Disabled) folder.
You can display the XTensions Manager dialog box by pressing the
SPACE
BAR while QuarkXPress is launching. You can also set a preference to show the XTensions Manager dialog box at startup in the XTensions tab of the
Application Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Application).
XTensions Manager (dialog box)
Utilities
& XTensions Manager
The XTensions Manager dialog box lists all the XTensions available to
QuarkXPress; lets you save, import, and export sets of specific XTensions; and lets you specify which XTensions should load.
3.238
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Set (drop-down list)
Utilities
& XTensions Manager
A set is a group of specific XTensions that will load together. For example, you might make sets of third-party XTensions that are required only for specific documents or for certain clients. The Set drop-down list lets you choose a set of XTensions to load:
• All XTensions Enabled loads all your XTensions.
• All XTensions Disabled does not load any XTensions.
• 4.0 Optimized Tensions loads all XTensions that are written specifically for QuarkXPress 4.0.
• The drop-down list also lets you choose from the XTensions sets you created using the Save As button.
Save As, Delete, Import, Export (buttons)
Utilities
& XTensions Manager
The Save As, Delete, Import, and Export buttons let you create and manipulate your XTensions sets.
• The Save As button lets you create a new set from the XTensions that are currently checked in the Enable column. The Save As button displays the Save Set dialog box, which lets you name and save the new
XTensions set. XTensions sets are saved in the XPress Preferences file.
• The Delete button deletes the set displayed in the Set drop-down list.
• The Import button displays the Import XTensions Set dialog box, which lets you import a set from another user.
• The Export button displays the Export XTensions Set dialog box, which lets you export the set displayed in the Set drop-down list.
XTensions Manager dialog box
Set drop-down list
Save As, Delete, Import, Export buttons
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.239
Enable drop-down list
Name, Status columns
Menus and Dialog Boxes
R When you create an XTensions set, you create a file that describes which XTensions should load. The XTensions set does not include actual XTensions.
Enable (column)
Utilities
& XTensions Manager
The Enable column and drop-down list let you change which XTensions will load. Changes take effect the next time you launch QuarkXPress.
• A check mark indicates that the XTensions software will load. No check mark indicates that the XTensions software will not load.
• To change the status of specific XTensions software, click in the Enable column to add or remove a check mark. You can also click the Enable drop-down list and choose Yes or No.
R You can multiple-select XTensions and change their status all at once. To select a range of XTensions, click the first one and press the
SHIFT key while you click the last one in the range. To select noncontinuous XTensions, press the
CTRL key while you click them.
Name, Status (columns)
Utilities
& XTensions Manager
The Name column lists all the XTensions in your XTensions folder or your XTensions (Disabled) folder within your QuarkXPress folder. The
Status column lists whether the XTensions software is Active (currently loaded) or Not Active (disabled). If QuarkXPress could not load the
XTension, the Status is Error.
PPD Manager (command)
Utilities menu
PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs) are supplied by printer manufacturers to provide access to additional features of PostScript printers.
3.240
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
PPDs are accessed through the Printer Description drop-down list in the
Setup tab of the Print dialog box (File menu). Depending on how many
PPDs are available to your system, the list in the Printer Description drop-down list can be fairly long. The PPD Manager command displays the PPD Manager dialog box, which lets you control which PPDs are displayed in the Printer Description drop-down list.
PPD Manager (dialog box)
Utilities
& PPD Manager
The PPD Manager dialog box lists all the PPDs available to QuarkXPress and lets you specify which PPDs are listed in the Printer Description drop-down list in the Setup tab of the Print dialog box (File menu).
PPD Manager command
Include (column)
Utilities
& PPD Manager
The Include column and drop-down list indicate whether a PPD will be listed in the Printer Description drop-down list and let you change the selected PPD’s status.
• A check mark indicates that the PPD will display in the Printer
Description drop-down list. No check mark indicates that the PPD will not display in the Printer Description drop-down list.
• To change the status of a PPD, click in the Include column to add or remove a check mark. You can also click the Include drop-down list and choose Yes or No.
PPD Manager dialog box
Include drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.241
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Name column
System PPD Folder area and Browse button
R You can multiple-select PPDs and change their status all at once. To select a range of PPDs, click the first one and press the
SHIFT key while you click the last one in the range. To select noncontinuous
PPDs, press the
CTRL key while you click them.
Name (column)
Utilities
& PPD Manager
The Name column lists all the PPDs in the selected System PPD Folder.
If you have a PPD folder within your QuarkXPress folder, the Name column displays the PPDs in that folder as well.
System PPD Folder (area), Select (button)
Utilities
& PPD Manager
The System PPD Folder area lets you specify the System Folder that contains the PPDs you want to access. By default, QuarkXPress accesses c:\windows\system. However, you can change this to any other folder available to your computer. The Browse button displays the System PPD
Folder dialog box, which lets you locate another folder.
Update (button)
Utilities
& PPD Manager
If you add a PPD to your system, the Update button lets you update the list of PPDs in the Name column without relaunching QuarkXPress.
Update button
3.242
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Tracking Edit (command)
Utilities menu
When the Kern/Track Editor XTensions software is loaded, you can create custom tracking tables for spacing characters in specific fonts. The custom tracking tables are applied to text when Auto Kern Above is checked and text is above the point size specified in the field (Edit
& Preferences &
Document
& Character tab).
Any manual tracking applied to text (Style
& Track) is added to the tracking specifications made via the Kern/Track Editor. The Tracking
Edit command displays the Tracking Edit dialog box, which lets you choose a font and edit its tracking table.
R For information about how custom tracking tables are stored in the
XPress Preferences file, see “Saving XPress Preferences” in Chapter 4,
“Customizing QuarkXPress.”
Tracking Edit command
Tracking Edit (dialog box)
Utilities
& Tracking Edit
The Tracking Edit dialog box displays all the fonts installed and available on your system. Most typefaces are made up of four style variations, or fonts: plain, bold, italic, and bold-italic. Each font has its own tracking table; you must edit each table separately to modify an entire typeface. To customize a font’s tracking table, choose it.
• Edit: Opens the Tracking Values dialog box for the chosen font. You can also double-click a font to open the Tracking Values dialog box.
• Save: Saves all the changes made in the Tracking Values dialog box.
Tracking Edit dialog box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.243
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Edit Tracking dialog box
Edit Tracking (dialog box)
Utilities
& Tracking Edit & Edit button
The Edit Tracking dialog box lets you specify custom tracking values from – 100 ⁄
200 to 100 ⁄
200 em space for font sizes from 2 to 250 points. The controls in the dialog box work as follows:
• A horizontal line at a Tracking Value of zero means that tracking values have not been modified for the chosen font.
• To modify the tracking curve, click anywhere on the curve to create a handle. You can place up to four handles on the curve. To remove a handle, press the
CTRL key while you click the handle.
• As you drag a handle, tracking and size information for that point on the curve is displayed in the upper right corner of the dialog box.
• Tracking values for font sizes that fall between handles are determined by the intersection of the font size and the tracking curve. Font sizes larger than 250 points are tracked at the same value as 250 points.
• Reset: Erases changes made in previous editing sessions and sets tracking values to zero for all font sizes.
R If you generally track a font when you use it, you may want to edit its tracking table. For example, if you always use 24 point Futura Extra
Bold tracked to –10 for headlines, you can place a point on the tracking table at the intersection of 24 point and the tracking value of -10.
You need to edit the tracking table for each version of a font (Futura,
Futura Book, Future Extra Bold, Futura Extra Bold Oblique, etc.)
3.244
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
Kerning Table Edit (command)
Utilities menu
A kerning table is a set of character pairs with an associated kerning value for each pair. When creating a font, a designer specifies a kerning value (a measurement that determines how close character pairs are placed to each other) for each of the pairs in the kerning table. Most
PostScript fonts have a built-in kerning table.
QuarkXPress uses the information contained in a font’s kerning table when it performs automatic kerning. Automatic kerning is specified using the Auto Kern Above controls in the Character tab of the Docu-
ment Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document). Any manual kerning applied to text (Style
& Kern) is added to the kerning specifications made via the Kern/Track Editor.
When the Kern/Track Editor XTensions software is loaded, you can create custom kerning tables for fonts. The Kerning Table Edit command displays the Kerning Table Edit dialog box, which lets you choose a font so you can edit its kerning table.
R For information about how custom kerning tables are stored in the
XPress Preferences file, see “Saving XPress Preferences” in Chapter 4,
“Customizing QuarkXPress.”
Kerning Table Edit (dialog box)
Utilities
& Kerning Table Edit
The Kerning Table Edit dialog box displays all the fonts installed and available on your system. Most typefaces comprise four style variations, or fonts: plain, bold, italic, and bold-italic. Each font has its own kerning table; you must edit each table separately to modify an entire typeface. You can also use Kerning Table Edit to create kerning tables for fonts that contain no kerning information. To customize a font’s kerning table, choose it.
Kerning Table Edit command
Kerning Table Edit dialog box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.245
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Kerning Table Edit dialog box
Edit Kerning Table dialog box
• Edit: Opens the Edit Kerning Table dialog box for the selected font.
You can also double-click a font to open the dialog box.
• Save: Saves all the changes made in the Edit Kerning Table dialog box.
Edit Kerning Table (dialog box)
Utilities
& Kerning Table Edit & Edit button
The Edit Kerning Table dialog box displays the current kerning pairs for the chosen font and lets you add, modify, and delete kerning pairs. You can specify custom kerning values from – 100 ⁄
200 to 100 ⁄
200 em space for any kerning pair. Kerning values are measured in increments of 1 ⁄
200 em space, so entering a kerning value of –20 for a character pair reduces the normal, unkerned character space by 1 ⁄
10
( 20 ⁄
200
) em space.
The controls in the dialog box work as follows:
• Kerning Pairs: Choose from the list of existing kerning pairs to edit one.
• Preview: The Preview area displays the highlighted kerning pair with its current values. You should make final decisions about kerning by looking at high-resolution output rather than the Preview or text on a page.
• Pair: Enter a new kerning pair in the field. If you select a pair in the
Kerning Values list, it is automatically displayed in the Pair field.
• Value: Enter a value in the field or click the arrows to specify the kerning for a new pair or to edit the kerning for an existing pair. The Pre-
view area updates to display the kerning pair with the new value.
• The Add/Replace button lets you create a kerning pair from the information in the Pair and Value fields. The new/edited kerning pair is listed in the Kerning Pairs list.
• The Delete button lets you remove a kerning pair from the Kerning
Pairs list. After you click Delete, the deleted pair is removed from the list but is displayed in the Pair and Value fields.
3.246
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Utilities Menu Introducing QuarkXPress
• The Reset button lets you revert an edited kerning table to the values originally built into the font, even if you have saved edits to the table during a previous editing session. Reset is available when you have made changes to a font’s kerning values.
• You can export kerning tables as ASCII text files, then import those kerning tables for use with another font. You can also import kerning tables created or edited in a text editor. The Import button displays a dialog box, which lets you locate a kerning table to use with the current font. The Export button generates an ASCII text file from the current kerning table and lets you name and save that kerning table.
Edit Kerning Table dialog box
A Guide to QuarkXPress 3.247
A G U I D E T O Q U A R K X P R E S S
Using QuarkXPress
Customizing
QuarkXPress
4
Setting Defaults
Setting Preferences
Creating Kerning Tables, Tracking Tables, and Hyphenation Exceptions
Saving XPress Preferences
Using XTensions
Managing Print Styles and PPDs
Understanding Nonmatching Preferences
4.8
4.10
4.13
4.16
4.18
4.3
4.5
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Customizing
QuarkXPress
4
Because everyone’s work environment has different demands, and every individual has personal preferences, QuarkXPress provides a variety of options for customizing the way it works. If you invest the time to set up QuarkXPress to suit your needs, you will be more comfortable working with the application and save hours of time producing your documents.
You can set program defaults and preferences, modify the XPress Preferences file, and add features with
XTensions.
Setting Defaults
Setting Defaults
QuarkXPress uses a variety of default settings as the basis for all new documents. These default settings include style sheets, colors, H&Js, lists, dashes and stripes, and the default auxiliary dictionary. You can modify the default settings by changing them when no documents are open. If you change any of these default settings when a document is open, the change is saved only with the document. To modify the application default settings:
1 Make sure no documents are open; then choose an option from the
Edit menu to modify the default settings: Style Sheets, Colors, H&Js,
Lists, or Dashes & Stripes. For specific information about the controls in any of the dialog boxes mentioned, see the “Edit Menu” and the
“Utilities Menu” sections in Chapter 3, “Menus and Dialog Boxes.”
• Style Sheets: Edit the
π Normal paragraph style sheet and the Ø Normal character style sheet (the default style sheets for all new text boxes). Create new style sheets to include with all new documents.
• Colors: Create colors to include with all new documents and delete colors that will not be used (for example, you may want to delete
Red, Green, and Blue). You cannot edit or delete Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow, or Black. You can edit, but not delete, Registration. You can edit the default trapping for colors as well.
• H&Js: Edit the Standard H&J specification to specify default automatic hyphenation rules and word and character spacing values.
The Normal style sheet uses the Standard H&J specification by default. Create new H&Js to include with all new documents.
• Lists: Lists are generated from text that uses the paragraph style sheets you specify. Create new lists to include with all new documents.
S Tips
Settings retained by QuarkXPress
Each time you create a new document, all the settings in the New
Document dialog box (File
&
New
& Document) become the new default settings. Any palettes that are open when you quit
QuarkXPress, including library palettes, will be open the next time you launch QuarkXPress.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 4.3
Customizing QuarkXPress
S Tips
Saving defaults and preferences
To provide maximum flexibility,
QuarkXPress saves various defaults and preferences in different ways.
Default settings such as style sheets are saved in the XPress Preferences file. See “Saving XPress Preferences” in this chapter.
• Dashes & Stripes: Edit the default line and frame patterns and create new patterns to include with all new documents. You cannot edit or delete the Solid line.
2 To choose a default auxiliary dictionary for all new documents, choose Utilities
& Auxiliary Dictionary. Use the dialog box to locate an auxiliary dictionary and click Open. Or, click New to create a default auxiliary dictionary.
3 When you are finished modifying default settings, create a new document. All your modifications are reflected in the new document. You can still modify these settings in individual documents.
4.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Setting Preferences
Setting Preferences
QuarkXPress uses a variety of default preferences as the basis for all new documents. For example, you can specify the measurement system displayed on horizontal and vertical rulers. You can modify the default preferences by changing them when no documents are open. Default preferences can be modified in the Application Preferences and Document Preferences dialog boxes (Edit
& Preferences).
Modifying Application Preferences
The controls in the Application Preferences dialog box affect the way
QuarkXPress works with all documents — for example, how it displays and saves documents. These settings are saved with the application and are never saved with documents. To modify Application Preferences:
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Application to display the Applica-
tion Preferences dialog box.
2 Click the tabs at the top of the dialog box to display different types of preferences. For specific information about the controls in any of the tabs, see the “Edit Menu” section in Chapter 3, “Menus and
Dialog Boxes.”
• The Display tab provides options for how guides, documents, picture previews, etc., display on-screen.
• The Interactive tab lets you control scrolling and several text handling options.
• The Save tab provides features for automatically saving documents, saving revisions of documents, saving libraries, and saving the document position.
S Tips
Saving defaults and preferences
To provide maximum flexibility,
QuarkXPress saves various defaults and preferences in different ways.
Application Preferences and default Document Preferences are saved in the XPress Preferences file.
See “Saving XPress Preferences” in this chapter.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 4.5
Customizing QuarkXPress
• The XTensions tab lets you control whether the XTensions
Manager dialog box displays when you launch QuarkXPress.
3 Click OK to close the Application Preferences dialog box and save your changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Modifying Document Preferences
The controls in the Document Preferences dialog box affect the way certain QuarkXPress features work with documents — for example, whether pages are inserted automatically when text overflows and how colors trap. If you modify settings in the Document Preferences dialog box when no documents are open, the settings become application defaults and affect all new documents. However, if you modify
Document Preferences when a document is open, the settings are applied to and saved only with the active document. To modify default Document Preferences:
1 Make sure no documents are open.
2 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Document to display the Document
Preferences dialog box.
3 Click the tabs at the top of the dialog box to display different sets of preferences. For specific information about the controls in any of the tabs, see the “Edit Menu” section in Chapter 3, “Menus and
Dialog Boxes.”
• The General tab lets you specify page layout defaults, including the measurement system, whether and where pages are automatically inserted when text overflows, the position of frames and guides, and the way master page items, pictures, and greeking work.
• The Paragraph tab lets you specify the defaults for paragraphbased typography features like leading, baseline grid, and hyphenation method.
4.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Setting Preferences
• The Character tab lets you specify the defaults for characterbased typography features like ligatures, automatic kerning, and the size and position of superscript, subscript, small caps, and superior characters.
• The Tool tab lets you specify the default settings for the Zoom tool
Z and each item creation tool. For example, you can specify the minimum and maximum view for the Zoom tool, and you can specify the default background color for boxes and the default style for lines. You can also reset the tools to the original default settings.
• The Trapping tab lets you specify the values QuarkXPress uses when trapping automatically. By specifying trapping relationships between colors, you can avoid the white areas that can occur when printing plates are misaligned or when paper shifts or stretches on a commercial printing press.
4 When you are finished modifying default preferences, create a new document. All your modifications are reflected in the new document. You can modify Document Preferences for individual documents by choosing Edit
& Preferences & Document when a document is open.
S Tips
Modifying preferences for tools
You can double-click any tool in the
Tool palette to display the Tool tab of the Document Preferences dialog box. You can select multiple tools and edit their preferences simultaneously. Press the
SHIFT key while you click to select a continuous range of tools in the Document Preferences dialog box; press the
CTRL key while you click to select a noncontinuous range. You can modify any attributes common to all the selected tools.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 4.7
Customizing QuarkXPress
Creating Kerning Tables, Tracking Tables, and Hyphenation
Exceptions
You can modify default settings for kerning table information, tracking table information, and hyphenation exceptions. If you change any of these default settings when a document is open, the change is saved only with the document or with the document and in the XPress Preferences file. See
“Saving XPress Preferences” and “Understanding Nonmatching Preferences” in this chapter. To modify kerning tables, tracking tables, and hyphenation exceptions:
1 If you are planning to edit kerning tables or tracking tables, make sure the Kern/Track Editor XTensions software is running. (See “Using
XTensions” in this chapter.)
2 Make sure no documents are open.
3 Edit any of the following defaults:
• To edit the default kerning tables, choose Utilities
& Kerning
Table Edit. Use the Kerning Table Edit dialog box to modify kerning pairs for individual fonts.
• To edit the default tracking tables, choose Utilities
& Tracking
Edit. Use the Tracking Edit dialog box to modify the tracking tables for individual fonts.
• To create or modify the default list of hyphenation exceptions, choose Utilities
& Hyphenation Exceptions.
4.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Kerning Tables, Tracking Tables, and Hyphenation Exceptions
4 When you are finished modifying defaults, create a new document.
All your modifications are reflected in the new document.
R For specific information about the controls in the Kerning Table
Edit dialog box, the Tracking Edit dialog box, or the Hyphen-
ation Exceptions dialog box, see the “Utilities Menu” section in
Chapter 3, “Menus and Dialog Boxes.”
S Tips
Backing up XPress Preferences
Creating kerning and tracking tables can be time-consuming. You could lose your kerning and tracking tables if the XPress Preferences file becomes corrupt. Make backup copies of your
XPress Preferences file routinely so you never lose your settings.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 4.9
Customizing QuarkXPress
Saving XPress Preferences
QuarkXPress is a powerful program that offers many options for controlling document display and text flow. Naturally, different people set these options different ways. Because of this, the XPress Preferences file lets each user or organization easily store and use favorite settings. The XPress Preferences file, located in the QuarkXPress application folder, includes default sets of style sheets, colors, H&Js, lists, dashes and stripes, and print styles; default auxiliary dictionary path information; Application Preferences settings; Docu-
ment Preferences settings; kerning tables; tracking tables; hyphenation exceptions; XTensions Manager settings; and PPD Manager settings. These different types of settings, defaults, and preferences are saved in the XPress
Preferences file in different ways.
Changes to XPress Preferences
Changes to XPress Preferences are handled in the following ways:
• If you make changes to Application Preferences (Edit
& Preferences &
Application) with or without documents open, the changes are saved in the XPress Preferences file and affect all documents immediately.
• If you make changes to XTensions Manager (Utilities menu) settings with or without documents open, the changes are saved in the XPress
Preferences file and affect all documents after you relaunch QuarkXPress.
• If you make changes to PPD Manager (Utilities menu) settings with or without documents open, the changes are saved in the XPress Prefer-
ences file and affect all documents immediately.
4.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Saving XPress Preferences
• If you make changes to Document Preferences (Edit
& Preferences &
Document) with a document open, the changes are saved only with the active document.
• If you choose a different auxiliary dictionary with a document open, the change is saved only with the active document.
• If you make changes to the kerning table information, tracking table information, and hyphenation exceptions in a new document, these changes are saved with the active document and in the XPress Prefer-
ences file.
• If the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box displays when opening a document and you click Use XPress Preferences, changes you make to the kerning table information, tracking table information, and hyphenation exceptions will be stored both in that document and in the
XPress Preferences file.
S Tips
Previewing new preferences
If you click Use XPress Preferences in the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box, look over the document and see what has happened to it. If the reflow or changes are undesirable, choose File
& Revert to Saved. The
Nonmatching Preferences dialog box will be displayed again and you can click Keep Document Settings.
Nonmatching Preferences dialog box
QuarkXPress displays the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box when you open a document that was last saved with kerning table information, tracking table information, or hyphenation exceptions that are different from the settings contained in the current XPress Preferences file. You have the option to use the settings in the document or those in XPress Preferences.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 4.11
Customizing QuarkXPress
The Nonmatching Preferences dialog box is displayed when you open a document with kerning table information, tracking table information, or hyphenation exceptions that are different from the settings in the current XPress Preferences file.
Clicking Use XPress Preferences
If you click Use XPress Preferences, the preference information that had been saved with the document is ignored and text may reflow because of different automatic kerning or tracking information, or different hyphenation exceptions. Changes you make to these settings while the document is active are stored both in the document and in XPress Preferences.
The advantage of Use XPress Preferences is that the document will be based on the same kerning table information, tracking table information, and hyphenation exceptions information as your other documents.
Clicking Keep Document Settings
If you click Keep Document Settings, text will not reflow. Automatic kerning, tracking, or hyphenation exception changes made while the document is active will be stored only with the document. Keep Docu-
ment Settings is useful if you want to open and print a document without running the risk of text reflow.
4.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Using XTensions
Using XTensions
XTensions are software modules that enhance the features of QuarkXPress.
Examples of XTensions included with QuarkXPress are the filters used to import and export text in the formats of many word processing applications,
Cool Blends, and the Kern/Track Editor. In addition to the XTensions that come with QuarkXPress, third-party software developers have created many
XTensions to meet specialized publishing needs.
Specifying which XTensions to use
The XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) lets you control which XTensions are loaded with QuarkXPress. XTensions consume
RAM (memory), so you should run only the ones you need. To specify which XTensions to use:
1 Choose Utilities
& XTensions Manager. The dialog box lists all the
XTensions in the XTensions folder and the XTensions (Disabled) folder within your QuarkXPress folder.
S Tips
XTensions running by default
When you install QuarkXPress, all included XTensions are enabled by default. To conserve RAM, you should carefully review the XTensions that are running and disable any that you will not be using. For example, you may be able to disable some of the word processing filters.
Managing XTensions at launch
Pressing the
SPACE bar while launching QuarkXPress displays the
XTensions Manager dialog box so you can specify which XTensions will load. The XTensions tab of the
Application Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Application) lets you control the default display of the XTensions
Manager dialog box at launch.
Use the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to specify which XTensions should load and to create sets of XTensions.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 4.13
Customizing QuarkXPress
S Tips
Saving groups of XTensions
If you have various clients or documents that require different
XTensions, you can create a different
XTensions set for each.
2 To specify which XTensions load, you can choose a default set, temporarily change the status of individual XTensions, or create a new set.
• To choose a default set, use the Set drop-down list. Choose All
XTensions Enabled to let QuarkXPress load all your XTensions.
Choose 4.0 Optimized to let QuarkXPress load only XTensions that were created specifically for QuarkXPress 4.0 and later.
• To change the status of individual XTensions, click in the Enable column or choose Yes or No from the Enable drop-down list. To edit the status of multiple XTensions: Press the
SHIFT key while you click to select a continuous range of XTensions; press the
CTRL key while you click to select a noncontinuous range.
• To create a new set of XTensions based on those currently enabled, click the Save As button and enter a name in the Enter name for
current set field. The new set will display in the Set drop-down list for future use.
3 Click OK; relaunch QuarkXPress to have the changes take effect.
Import/Export filters
QuarkXPress provides import/export filters that let you transfer files between QuarkXPress and many popular word processing applications.
You can also save and import ASCII files, including those with XPress
Tags information. Supported text file formats include: AmiPro, MS-Word,
MS-Works, WordPerfect, and XPress Tags. QuarkXPress also includes import filters for JPEG and PhotoCD picture files.
Import/export filters are actually XTensions and are controlled by the
XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu). To import text or pictures in any of these formats, or to export text in any of these formats, the appropriate import/export filters must be loaded.
4.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Using XTensions
QuarkXTensions
QuarkXPress includes several QuarkXTensions that add core features to the application, including: Cool Blends, Indexing, and the Kern/Track Editor.
Third-party XTensions
Hundreds of third-party software developers are currently producing a wide range of XTensions that let QuarkXPress meet specialized publishing needs. Custom XTensions are also available for advertising agencies, graphic designers, newspaper publishers, magazine publishers, database publishers, and output providers.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 4.15
Customizing QuarkXPress
S Tips
Saving print settings
If you click either the Print or Cap-
ture Settings button in the Print dialog box, the current print settings are saved with the document when you save (File
& Save) the document.
Managing Print Styles and PPDs
QuarkXPress lets you customize printing features by saving output settings as print styles and controlling which PostScript Printer Description files
(PPDs) load with QuarkXPress. The print styles and PPD information are stored in the XPress Preferences file.
Creating and editing print styles
Print styles are predefined output setups you can choose from the Print
Style drop-down list in the Print dialog box (File
& Print). Print styles are not document-specific; they are global preferences that can be saved, exported, imported, and used with any QuarkXPress document. To create or edit a print style:
1 Choose Edit
& Print Styles.
Use the Print Styles dialog box (Edit menu) to create and edit print styles for use with all your documents. Use the Export button to share print styles with other users.
2 Edit the Default print style to reflect the print settings you use the most. Create new print styles to include with all new documents.
3 Click Save.
4.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Managing Print Styles and PPDs
Specifying which PPDs to use
PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs) let you choose device-specific features for a particular PostScript printer, like an alternate paper size and optimized screen values. Printer manufacturers provide PPDs for their printers. If you do not have a PPD for your device, you can use one of the three default PPDs: Generic B&W, Generic Color, and Generic Imagesetter.
PPDs are accessed through the Printer Description drop-down list in the
Page Setup dialog box (File menu). You can control which PPDs display in the Printer Description drop-down list using the PPD Manager dialog box (Utilities menu). To specify which PPDs are available:
1 Choose Utilities
& PPD Manager.
S Tips
The effect of PPDs on launch time
Each time you launch QuarkXPress, the application looks at all the PPDs available to see if any have been added, deleted, or changed. If you have many PPDs, QuarkXPress may take longer to launch.
To speed launch time, remove PPDs that you do not need. Look in the
Windows system folder and the PPD folder (if you have one) within your
QuarkXPress folder. Place any unnecessary PPDs in a different folder.
Use the PPD Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to specify which PPDs are available.
2 Click the Browse button in the System PPD Folder area to specify the folder that contains the PPDs you want to access. By default,
QuarkXPress accesses the PPDs in the folder c:\windows\system.
3 To specify which PPDs are accessible, click in the Include column or choose Yes or No from the Include drop-down list. To edit the status of multiple PPDs: Press the SHIFT key while you click to select a continuous range of PPDs; press the CTRL key while you click to select a noncontinuous range.
4 Click OK; changes take effect immediately.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 4.17
Customizing QuarkXPress
S Tips
Previewing new preferences
If you click Use XPress Preferences in the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box, look over the document and see what has happened to it. If the reflow or changes are undesirable, choose File
& Revert to Saved. The
Nonmatching Preferences dialog box will be displayed again and you can click Keep Document Settings.
Understanding Nonmatching Preferences
When you open a document in QuarkXPress, you will sometimes see the
Nonmatching Preferences dialog box displayed. If you are unfamiliar with this dialog box, it can be threatening. Understanding the two choices in the dialog box (Use XPress Preferences and Keep Document Settings) will help you decide which option to choose.
The Nonmatching Preferences dialog box
Let’s say you’ve just brought a document over to a friend’s computer so you can print it to their laser printer. But when your friend opens your document, a warning is displayed: “Some settings saved with this document are different from those in the ‘XPress Preferences’ file.” Below this are two buttons: Use XPress Preferences and Keep Document Settings.
What do you do?
When you see the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box, it means your document’s preferences are different from the preferences stored in the XPress Preferences file that is currently installed. Since all the preferences in question are stored with the document, you can avoid any reflow problems by clicking Keep Document Settings — but are you sure this is what you want to do? Before you can answer that question, you need to know a little more about what’s in the XPress
Preferences file and how it works.
4.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Understanding Nonmatching Preferences
What’s in the XPress Preferences file?
Let’s take a look at what the XPress Preferences file contains. (We have divided the list into three groups according to how they are saved.)
Group A
• Kerning tables (Utilities
& Kerning Table Edit)
• Tracking tables (Utilities
& Tracking Edit)
• Hyphenation Exceptions (Utilities
& Hyphenation Exceptions)
Group B
• Default style sheets, colors, dashes and frames, lists, and H&Js
(Edit menu)
• Settings in the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document)
• Path information for the default auxiliary dictionary (Utilities
&
Auxiliary Dictionary)
Group C
• Print styles (Edit
& Print Styles)
• Settings in the XTensions Manager and PPD Manager dialog boxes
(Utilities menu)
• Settings in the Application Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Application)
A Guide to QuarkXPress 4.19
Customizing QuarkXPress
Group A: Choose your buttons with care
If the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box displays when you open a document, it means that one or more of the document’s group A settings are different from those in the current XPress Preferences file. This means that your document could look different depending whether or not you choose to use the document’s settings. For example, frames could fail to display, or a sentence that should end on page three could end on page four instead because of differences in kerning or tracking.
So which button do you click? If you want the document to look exactly the same on your friend’s computer as it did on your computer, click the
Keep Document Settings button. (This is always the appropriate choice for opening documents at a service bureau.)
However, if you click the Keep Document Settings button, the Non-
matching Preferences warning will continue to display every time your friend opens this document on his or her machine. If another user is going to be keeping the file from now on, this could get to be a bit annoying. If you click Use XPress Preferences and resave the document, the Nonmatching Preferences warning will no longer appear when the document is opened on the other user’s computer because you will have replaced the document’s preferences with those in the current XPress Pref-
erences file. However, you should only click Use XPress Preferences if:
• The document’s kerning, tracking, and hyphenation need to be consistent with other documents produced on this computer, or;
• The document’s kerning, tracking, hyphenation are relatively unimportant.
If you click Use XPress Preferences, before you save the document make sure to look through it to see how it’s changed. Look for the overflow symbol
t
in text boxes, undesirable line breaks, and any other changes.
4.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Understanding Nonmatching Preferences
Group B: No warning, no problem
If your settings for group B (style sheets, colors, H&Js, etc.) are different from those in another user’s XPress Preferences file, the Nonmatching
Preferences dialog box will not be displayed. The document’s settings will be used automatically, and any changes you make to those settings will apply to that document only.
Group C: Don’t worry about it
Like group B, differences among group C settings (print styles, PPD information, etc.) will not cause the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box to display. The information does not affect individual documents and is not saved with documents.
Where are preference changes saved?
• Any changes you make to the settings in group A or B while no documents are open are stored in the XPress Preferences file, and are used for all subsequently created documents.
• Any changes you make to the settings in group B while a document is open are saved with that document only.
• Any changes you make to settings in group C are always stored in the
XPress Preferences file, whether or not a document is open.
• If the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box displays when you open a document, and you click Use XPress Preferences, subsequent changes you make to settings in group A are saved to both the document and the XPress Preferences file. (The document’s original group A settings are discarded when you click Use XPress Preferences.)
• If the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box displays when you open a document, and you click Keep Document Settings, subsequent changes you make to settings in group A are saved only with the document.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 4.21
Layout Tools
5
Arranging Documents 5.3
Navigating Documents 5.4
Changing Document Views 5.7
Using the Pasteboard 5.8
Using Rulers and Guides 5.10
Specifying Greeking 5.14
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Layout Tools
5
QuarkXPress lets you position boxes, lines, and groups by clicking and dragging the mouse. This method of laying out a page is intuitive because it resembles the traditional methods of placing page elements. However, this technique is only as accurate as your monitor’s resolution and your dexterity with the mouse.
To make the click and drag method of page layout more precise, QuarkXPress provides a number of on-screen layout tools. QuarkXPress also provides a variety of controls that help you arrange documents on-screen and navigate through documents.
Arranging Documents
Arranging Documents
The Window menu lets you control the way open documents are displayed on-screen. You can cascade documents, tile documents horizontally or vertically, and arrange the icons of minimized documents. The lower portion of the Window menu provides access to all open windows, and allows you to close them all at once.
S Tips
Switching Between Documents
When multiple documents are open, press the
CTRL
+
TAB keys to circulate through all open documents. To switch to the previous document, press
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
TAB
.
Tiling or cascading documents
To reduce the size of each open window and distribute them evenly on your screen horizontally, choose Window
& Tile Horizontally. To place each window vertically, choose Window
& Tile Vertically. To restore each document to a cascading view, choose Window
& Cascade.
R Use the three icons in the upper right corner of the document window to control the way a document displays on screen. The minimize icon reduces a document to an icon placed at the bottom of the document window. The maximize icon fills the document to the size of the application window. When a window is maximized or minimized, the restore icon restores the document to its previous size. The close icon closes the document.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 5.3
Layout Tools
S Tips
Using the Page Grabber Hand
H
When any tool is selected, you can press the
ALT key to access the Page
Grabber Hand
H. The Page Grabber
Hand
H lets you scroll a page in any direction by dragging the mouse.
Navigating Documents
QuarkXPress provides several ways to navigate through a document: Page menu commands, the Page Number field, Document Layout palette icons,
Go-to-Page icons, and scroll bars. After experimenting with the various options, you will find a method that works best for you.
Using Page menu commands
The Page menu commands let you “turn” the pages of a document, jump to specific pages, and display master pages.
• To turn the pages of a document, choose Previous, First, Next, or Last from the Page menu.
• To display a specific document page, choose Page
& Go to (
CTRL + J ).
Enter the number of the page you want to display in the Go to Page field and click OK.
R If your document is divided into sections, precede the page number you enter with the prefix characters you specified for the section in the Prefix field of the Section dialog box (Page
& Section). You can also specify absolute page numbers in the Go to Page dialog box. An absolute page number indicates the page’s actual position in a document, regardless of any sectioning or special numbering.
To specify an absolute page number, precede the number you enter in the Go to Page dialog box with a plus (+) sign.
• To display a master page, choose Page
& Display. From the Display submenu, choose the master page you want to display. To display a document page when a master page is currently displayed, choose
Document from the Display submenu.
5.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Navigating Documents
Using the Page Number field
The Page Number field in the lower left corner of the document window is editable. To display a specific page, highlight the number and enter a new number.
Highlight the Page Number field in the lower left corner of the document window and enter a new page number.
Using the Document Layout palette
The Document Layout palette lets you display document pages and master pages by clicking icons. To display the Document Layout palette, choose View
& Show Document Layout (F4). To display a master page, double-click its icon (in the middle of the palette). To display a document page, double-click its icon (in the lower portion of the palette).
S Tips
Keyboard shortcuts
Most keyboards provide keys for quick document navigation:
• To display the top of the first page of a document, press
CTRL
+
PAGE UP
• To scroll up one screen, press
PAGE UP
• To scroll up to the top of the previous page, press
SHIFT
+
PAGE UP
• To scroll down one screen, press
PAGE DOWN
• To scroll down to the top of the next page, press
SHIFT
+
PAGE DOWN
• To scroll down to the top of the last page, press
CTRL
+
PAGE DOWN
.
Double-click icons in the Document Layout palette (View menu) to display a document page or a master page.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 5.5
Layout Tools
S Tips
Live scrolling
You can set a preference to “live scroll” when you drag a scroll box.
During a live scroll, the document window is updated automatically and displays the document as you drag the scroll box. To use live scroll all the time, check Live Scroll in the
Interactive tab of the Application
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Application).
Using go-to-page icons
In addition to the Document Layout palette, QuarkXPress provides a pop-up menu of page icons in the lower left corner of the document window. Click the arrow
, next to the Page Number field to display the go-to-page pop-up menu. Drag to select master pages (on the left) and document pages (on the right).
Click the arrow
, in the lower left corner of the document window to display icons for document pages and master pages.
Scrolling through a document
You can navigate through a document using the scroll boxes and the scroll arrows on the right edge and bottom of the document window.
• To use a scroll box, click and drag it to display a different page. As you drag the scroll box, the Page Number field in the lower left corner of the document window updates.
• To use the scroll arrows, click an arrow to scroll incrementally in that direction (up, down, right, or left). Click an arrow while you press the mouse button to scroll the page in continuous increments in the direction of the arrow.
5.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Changing Document Views
Changing Document Views
QuarkXPress lets you reduce or enlarge the document view from 10% to
800% of its actual size in .1% increments. You can switch between predefined page views using menu commands and keyboard commands, you can enter a custom view percentage, and you can enlarge specific areas using the Zoom tool
Z.
Choosing a predefined page view
To specify a predefined page view, choose an option from the View menu: Fit in Window ( CTRL +0), 50%, 75%, Actual Size ( CTRL +1), 200%, and Thumbnails ( SHIFT +F6).
Entering a custom view percentage
To specify a document view other than one listed in the View menu, highlight the View Percent field (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
V
) in the lower left corner of the document window. Enter a value and press
ENTER
.
Using the Zoom tool
Z
To enlarge the document view in preset intervals, select the Zoom tool
Z and click on the document. To reduce the document view in preset intervals, press the ALT key while you click the Zoom tool
Z. To specify the portion of the document you want to zoom in on or out from, use the
Zoom tool
Z to drag a marquee around the area you want to view.
R You can customize the zoom increment and the maximum and minimum reduction and enlargement values obtainable with the
Zoom tool
Z by specifying values in the Tool tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
S Tips
Dragging thumbnails
When Thumbnails (View menu) is selected, you can reposition pages by dragging them to a different location in the document. You can also drag pages to another open document that is also displaying pages in
Thumbnails view.
Shortcut to the Zoom tool
Z
You can temporarily select the Zoom tool
Z by pressing
CTRL
+
SPACE bar.
Press
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SPACE bar to zoom out.
Maximum zoom
The maximum zoom percentage is dependent upon the Display DPI
Value (Edit
& Preferences &
Application
& Display tab). If the value is set above 85 dpi, the maximum zoom percentage decreases. For example, a value of 96 dpi restricts the maximum zoom to 711%.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 5.7
Layout Tools
S Tips
Storing items on the pasteboard
You may find it convenient to store items on the pasteboard until you are ready to place them on a document page. If you are storing a variety of items, consider using a library.
Using the Pasteboard
The pasteboard is the nonprinting area that surrounds individual pages and spreads. The pasteboard can function both as a work area and as a temporary storage area. You can create items and groups on the pasteboard, then drag them from the pasteboard onto a document page. You can also use the pasteboard to “bleed” an item off a page.
Using the pasteboard as a work area
You construct and modify items and groups on the pasteboard just as you would a document page. You can drag items from a pasteboard to any other document page or pasteboard. The pasteboard works as follows:
• To create items on the pasteboard, scroll left or right so that a page’s pasteboard area is displayed. Create, position, and group items on the pasteboard just as you would on a document page.
• To move an item from the pasteboard to a document page or another pasteboard, select the Item tool e, click the item, and drag it into position.
• You can move an item so that it is partially off the left or right edge of the pasteboard. When you do so, the portion that you move off the edge is not visible. It is not possible to move an item completely off the pasteboard.
• When you drag out a horizontal ruler guide and release the g pointer over the pasteboard, the guide is displayed across the pasteboard and all the pages in a spread. If you release the g pointer when it is positioned over a document page, the guide is displayed only on that page.
5.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Using the Pasteboard
Using the pasteboard for bleeds
Bleed is the term used to describe items that are printed to the edge of a finished page. With QuarkXPress, you can create a bleed item by extending it from a document page onto the pasteboard. Once a page with bleed elements is reproduced on press, a commercial printer can trim the document to its finished page size.
R You can specify the size of the pasteboard by entering a percentage value in the Pasteboard Width field in the Interactive tab of the
Application Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Application). By default, the area of the pasteboard to the left and to the right of a page or spread is equal to the document’s page width, and there is 1 ⁄
2
" of pasteboard above and below pages and spreads. When the width of the widest horizontal spread in a document approaches 48", the width of the pasteboard areas to the right and to the left of the spread is reduced to stay within the 48" document width limit.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 5.9
Layout Tools
S Tips
Snapping items to guides
The Snap to Guides feature helps you quickly align items with ruler guides and page guides. When Snap
to Guides is checked (View menu), an item or Item Creation pointer c snaps to a guide when you drag it within the snap distance. The Snap
Distance is specified in pixels in the
General tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document).
Using Rulers and Guides
The rulers and guides in QuarkXPress give you precise control for document layout. You can control the measurement system displayed on rulers and you can customize the color of guides. QuarkXPress provides margin guides and column guides for aligning text and it lets you create all the ruler guides you need for aligning items. To ensure that items are placed properly, you can “snap” items to guides.
Displaying rulers and guides
Use the View menu commands to display rulers and guides. To display rulers, choose View
& Show Rulers (
CTRL + R ). To display guides, choose
View
& Show Guides (F7).
R Notes on preferences for guides
By default, margin guides and column guides are displayed as blue lines on color monitors and as dotted gray lines on black-and-white monitors.
Ruler guides are displayed as green lines on color monitors and as dotted gray lines on black-and-white monitors. You can specify different colors for margin and ruler guides and the baseline grid in the Display tab of the
Application Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Application).
You can display page guides either Behind or In Front of all items, depending on the setting you choose from the Guides drop-down list in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Pref- erences
& Document).
5.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Using Rulers and Guides
Specifying the measurement system for rulers
To specify ruler measurement units, choose options from the
Horizontal Measure and Vertical Measure drop-down menus in the
General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Prefer- ences
& Document).
The Vertical Measure and Horizontal Measure you select are used by
QuarkXPress in all fields that indicate position values. For example, if you choose Inches from the Vertical Measure drop-down menu and
Picas from the Horizontal Measure drop-down menu, the value in the
Origin Down field in the item specifications dialog boxes is displayed in inches; the value in the Origin Across field is displayed in picas.
Specifying Column Guides and Margin Guides
QuarkXPress automatically places column guides and margin guides in all new documents. You specify their position in the Column Guides and Margin Guides fields in the New Document dialog box (File
&
New
& Document). When a master page is displayed in the document window, you can use the Master Guides dialog box (Page
& Master
Guides) to change the placement of column guides and margin guides.
If you check Automatic Text Box in the New Document dialog box
(File
& New & Document), the values you specify in the Margin
Guides area define the size and placement of the automatic text box.
The values you specify in the Column Guides area define the columns for the automatic text box. If you do not check Automatic Text Box when you open a new document, column guides are displayed, but the values are not applied to any text box.
Specifying the ruler origin
The ruler origin is the location where the top ruler and the left ruler intersect; it is the 0 point on both the left and top rulers. To move the ruler origin, click where the rulers intersect in the ruler origin area in the
S Tips
Changing margin and column guides
Margin guides and column guides information is stored as part of a master page. To reposition margin guides and page guides in an existing document, display the master page that contains the guides you want to reposition, then choose Master
Guides (Page menu); the Master
Guides dialog box is displayed. Edit the values in the Margin Guides and Column Guides area of the
Master Guides dialog box to reposition margin and column guides on the master page and on all document pages based on that master page.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 5.11
Layout Tools
S Tips
Creating guides for larger views
To specify that a guide display only at or above the current view percentage, press the
SHIFT key while you create the guide. For example, if you press the
SHIFT key and create a guide while the document is in 400% view, that guide will display only at views between 400% and 800%. upper left corner of the document window and drag the intersection point to the location you want. The ruler origin will be positioned where you release the mouse button. To reset the ruler origin, click the ruler origin area.
R If Page is selected in the Item Coordinates drop-down menu in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document), you can position the ruler origin on a document page. If Spread is selected, you can position the ruler origin anywhere on a spread.
Specifying Item Coordinates for the ruler
The Item Coordinates drop-down menu in the General tab of the Docu-
ment Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document) lets you specify whether the top ruler is continuous across multiple pages in a spread or repeats from 0 for each page. Choose Spread to display a single, continuous ruler across the top of pages in a spread. Choose Page to repeat the horizontal ruler from 0 for each page in the spread.
Positioning ruler guides
Ruler guides are guides that you create by dragging them off the horizontal and vertical rulers (View
& Show Rulers). You can create ruler guides on master pages and on individual document pages.
• To pull out horizontal ruler guides, click on the top ruler; when the g pointer is displayed, drag the ruler guide into position on the page. To pull out a vertical ruler guide, click on the left ruler and drag the ruler guide onto the page when the
G pointer is displayed. If the Measure-
ments palette is displayed when you drag a ruler guide, the guide’s position is indicated in the X field (for vertical ruler guides) or the Y field (for horizontal ruler guides).
5.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Using Rulers and Guides
• If, as you drag out a horizontal ruler guide, you release the mouse button when the ruler guide is positioned over the pasteboard, the ruler guide will extend across the pasteboard and all the pages in the spread. If you release the mouse button when the horizontal ruler guide is positioned over a document page, the ruler guide is displayed only on that page.
• To reposition a ruler guide, click it, then drag it to a different location when either the g or the G pointer is displayed. You must have the
Item tool e selected to click and drag a guide when the pointer is over an item and you have chosen In Front from the Guides drop-down list in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document). To click a guide when the pointer is over an item and the Content tool
E is selected, press the
CTRL key while you click the ruler guide and drag.
• To remove a ruler guide, click on it, then drag it off the page. To remove ruler guides from a spread’s pasteboard, scroll the document so that a portion of the pasteboard is displayed; press the
ALT key while you click an area of the ruler that is adjacent to the pasteboard. To remove ruler guides from a document page, scroll the document so that a portion of the page is displayed; press the
ALT key while you click an area of the ruler that is adjacent to the document page. Click the horizontal ruler to delete horizontal ruler guides; click the vertical ruler to delete vertical ruler guides.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 5.13
Layout Tools
S Tips
Temporary greeking while scrolling
The QuarkXPress Speed Scroll feature greeks pictures and displays two-color blends in a single color while you are scrolling. It redraws them when you stop scrolling. To improve speed while scrolling, check Speed Scroll in the Inter-
active tab of the Application
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Application).
Specifying Greeking
In QuarkXPress, “greeking” is the process of replacing text and pictures with gray bars and boxes to improve screen redraw speed. Greeking can also help you concentrate on layout without being distracted by specific words and images.
Greeking text
When text is greeked, lines of text are replaced with gray bars. To specify greeking, choose Edit
& Preferences & Document (
CTRL
+
Y
) and click the
General tab. Check Greek Below and enter a value from 2 to 720 points in the field (characters below that point size will be greeked). Text greeking does not affect the way characters print.
Greeking pictures
When pictures are greeked, imported pictures are replaced with a gray pattern. To specify greeking, choose Edit
& Preferences & Document
(
CTRL
+
Y
) and click the General tab. Check Greek Pictures. Greeking does not affect the way pictures print. When Greek Pictures is checked, you can view a picture by activating its picture box.
Greeked pictures display as gray boxes; greeked text displays as gray bars.
5.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Document Basics
6
Creating New Documents 6.3
Opening Documents 6.5
Saving Documents 6.6
Saving Documents Automatically 6.8
Saving Revisions of Documents 6.10
Saving Documents as Templates 6.12
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Document Basics
6
QuarkXPress lets you create new documents from scratch, build documents based on preconfigured templates, and work with previously saved documents. Documents can be saved on a local hard drive, to a connected server, or to a removable media storage device for transportation.
Creating New Documents
Creating New Documents
You can create a new document any time, as long as you have fewer than
25 files open. When you create a new document, you can specify its page size and margin positions, and you can choose whether the document will consist of single pages or of spreads with left- and right-facing pages. You also have the option of creating columns and text boxes automatically on your document pages. To create a new document:
1 Choose File
& New & Document (
CTRL
+
N
).
S Tip
Tabbing through fields
When specifying values in a dialog box, use the
TAB key to move from the active field to the next field, or press
SHIFT
+
TAB to move to the previous field.
Choose File
& New & Document to define page information and create a new document.
2 To specify a standard page size, choose an option from the Size dropdown list. To create a custom-sized page, enter dimensions in the
Width and Height fields.
3 Choose either Portrait or Landscape orientation by clicking the appropriate button.
4 To specify the position of the margin guides (nonprinting lines used to position items on a page), enter values in the fields in the Margin
Guides area.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.3
Document Basics
S Tip
Default master page
A master page is a nonprinting page used to automatically format other document pages. Every QuarkXPress document contains a master page by default. The default master page formatting is based on settings in the
New Document dialog box.
5 Check Facing Pages to specify that the document contains both leftfacing and right-facing pages.
6 To specify the number of columns on document pages and the spacing between them, enter values in the Columns and Gutter Width fields.
7 Check Automatic Text Box to place an automatic text box on the first page of the document and on the default master page. Click OK.
R Notes on new documents
The size of the automatic text box is determined by the values entered in the Margin Guides area. If more than one column has been specified in the Columns field, the automatic text box will be divided into linked columns automatically.
If you do not check Automatic Text Box, QuarkXPress still draws guides on document pages that reflect the values in the Margin Guides and
Columns areas.
QuarkXPress remembers the values you enter in the New Document dialog box, and uses them as defaults the next time you create a new document.
6.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Opening Documents
Opening Documents
QuarkXPress lets you open any combination of 25 documents, templates, or libraries at one time. You can open documents, templates, and libraries created in version 3.1 or later of QuarkXPress. To open a file:
1 Choose File
& Open (
CTRL
+
O
).
Use the Open dialog box (File menu) to locate and open QuarkXPress documents.
2 Use the controls in the dialog box to locate the document you want to open, highlight the document in the list, and then click Open.
R Notes on opening documents
If the Missing Fonts warning is displayed when you open a document, you can click Continue and QuarkXPress will temporarily replace the fonts with a system font, or click List Fonts to display a list of the missing fonts, and have the opportunity to permanently replace them.
If the Nonmatching Preferences dialog box is displayed when you open a document, click Keep Document Settings to use the settings saved with the documents. Click Use XPress Preferences to update the document to the XPress Preferences on your machine; there is a chance of reflow with the new settings. See “Understanding Nonmatching Preferences” in Chapter 4, “Customizing QuarkXPress.”
S Tips
Reflowing documents from previous versions of QuarkXPress
When you open a document from a previous version of QuarkXPress, the program uses the text flow from the older version to prevent text reflow.
At the risk of reflowing the text and changing the design, you can update text flow to the current version by pressing the
ALT key when you click
Open in the Open dialog box. This way, you can update the document to take advantage of improvements in text flow in later versions of
QuarkXPress.
Listing only document files
You can limit the files shown in the list of the Open dialog box by changing the Files of type field from the default All QuarkXPress
Files to just Document (*.qxd).
This will expedite finding documents when a folder contains many different file types.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.5
Document Basics
S Tip
Templates
If you are planning to create other documents with the same specifications (master pages, style sheets, etc.) as the current document, you might want to save a stripped down version of the document as a template. To do this, choose Templates
(*.qxt) in the Save as type field of the Save as dialog box. See “Saving
Documents as Templates” later in this chapter.
Experimenting
To experiment with new ideas for the design or text in a document, first save the document. Try out your new ideas; then, if you do not like them, choose File
& Revert to
Saved. If you find you like the ideas, but you want to retain your original document too, choose File
& Save
as and save the document with a different name.
Saving Documents
The Save command records changes to your documents each time you choose File
& Save (
CTRL
+
S
). When you choose Revert to Saved (File menu), QuarkXPress discards the changes made since the last time you saved. The Save as command lets you name and save a new document or create a copy of an existing document. To use Save as:
1 Choose File
& Save as (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
S
).
Use the Save as dialog box to save new documents and to save active documents under a new name without replacing the original document file.
2 Use the controls in the dialog box to specify a location for the new document file.
3 Enter a name for the document in the File name field. QuarkXPress automatically chooses Documents (*.qxd) in the Save as type field.
6.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Saving Documents
Use the File name field to enter a name for the new document file.
4 Choose a QuarkXPress file format version from the Version dropdown list, then click Save.
R QuarkXPress can open documents saved in version 3.1 or later. Earlier versions of QuarkXPress are unable to open documents saved in the current version of QuarkXPress. Items based on features exclusive to the current version will be stripped from documents saved in older formats.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.7
Document Basics
S Tip
Revert to Saved and Auto Save
Revert to Saved reverts to the last manually saved version of a document regardless of your Auto Save setting. If you want to revert to the last auto-saved version of a document, press the
ALT key while you choose File
& Revert to Saved.
Saving Documents Automatically
The Auto Save feature protects your work from power and system failures.
When Auto Save is on, QuarkXPress automatically records changes made to all documents and saves them to your document folder. Auto Saves are performed at user-defined intervals (during idle time if possible). QuarkXPress does not overwrite the original files until you choose File
& Save.
Using Auto Save
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Application (
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + Y ); then click the Save tab.
2 Check Auto Save.
Use the Auto Save feature to protect your work from power and system failures.
3 Enter an interval in the minutes field. Click OK. Auto saves will be performed (during idle time if possible) at the specified interval.
6.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Saving Documents Automatically
R Auto Save only works with saved documents. If you have an unnamed document that was never saved, it is not backed up by
Auto Save.
Recovering an Auto Saved document
To recover an auto saved document after a system or power failure, choose File
& Open and locate the document. Two files will be displayed in the dialog box: the original document with the *.qxd extension and the auto-saved version, which will have the *.asv extension.
Open the original document; it will be combined with the auto-saved version as it is opened. When you open the document, a warning will display. Click OK to continue.
The Auto Save warning lets you know that you are opening an auto saved version of a document.
The auto-saved document retains changes made until the last auto save occurred. Depending on your auto save interval, you may have lost a few minutes of work. At this point, you can save the document with its auto saved changes (File
& Save), or you can reject the auto-saved changes and return to the last manually saved version of the document (File
&
Revert to Saved).
S Tip
Using Auto Save and Auto Backup together
It is a good idea to use either Auto
Save or Auto Backup. However, if you are using Auto Save and Auto
Backup together, it might be a little overkill. Rather than saving all the time, let Auto Save protect your work. When you want a revision of a document, then save manually by choosing File
& Save or
CTRL
+
S
.
For example, you might want to open a document in the morning, work on it for several hours, then save it. You might work on the document again in the afternoon, then save it and close it. You have created two auto backup versions of the document that day reflecting two different work sessions.
So your Destination folder contains three copies of the document: the original and two revisions. Choosing to do this with many documents can take up a lot of hard drive space.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.9
Document Basics
S Tip
Auto Backup Destination folder
Revisions created by Auto Backup have a revision number appended to the document name. Because revisions are stored by default in the same folder as the document, and the auto backup files have similar names, locating the original document can be confusing.
To prevent this confusion, choose a different Destination folder when you enable Auto Backup. You might want to create a new folder, called
“Backups,” to store all your auto backup files.
Saving Revisions of Documents
The Auto Backup feature lets you save up to 100 revisions of QuarkXPress documents. When Auto Backup is on, each time you choose File
& Save, the previous version of the active document is sent to a user-defined Desti-
nation folder or the default document folder. A number between 1 and
100 is added to the name of the original file for each new backup; the most recent backup has the highest number. When the number of backup files exceeds the number of revisions you specify, the oldest revision is deleted. Revisions may be retrieved from the specified Destination folder or the default document folder.
Using Auto Backup
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Application (
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + Y ); then click the Save tab.
2 Check Auto Backup.
Use the Auto Backup feature to save up to 100 revisions of documents.
6.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Saving Revisions of Documents
3 Enter the number of document revisions you want to retain in the
Keep revisions field.
4 Click the Document Folder button to save revisions to the folder that contains the original files, or click the Other Folder button and then Browse to display the Browse for Folder dialog box.
5 If you clicked Browse, use the controls in the dialog box to select a folder in which to store revisions.
6 Click OK to designate the highlighted folder as the backup folder and return to the Application Preferences dialog box; then click OK.
R Each backup revision of a document you keep is a full copy of the document in a specific state. Specifying a large number of revisions may consume hard disk space rapidly.
Recovering an Auto Backup document
To recover an auto backup document, locate and open the file in the
Destination folder using File
& Open. To avoid confusion with the original file, rename the file as soon as you open it.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.11
Document Basics
S Tips
Creating a document based on a template
To create a document based on a template, choose File
& Open and choose the template. Then save your file as a regular document.
Saving Documents as Templates
A template is a preformatted document that is protected from overwriting.
You should create templates for any publications that will use the same format repeatedly. Templates should include all essential style sheets, colors, H&Js, master pages, etc. that will be used in documents. However, you should delete all nonessential items, including text and graphics.
Saving a document as a template
You can save any open document as a template using the Save as command (File menu).
1 Choose File
& Save as (
CTRL + ALT + S ).
Save a document as a template by choosing File
& Save as; then choose Templates (*.qxt) from the Save as type drop-down list.
2 Enter a name for the template in the File name field.
3 Choose Templates (*.qxt) from the Save as type drop-down list, and then Save.
6.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Saving Documents as Templates
Modifying templates
You can modify a template by saving it again with the Save as command
(File menu).
1 Open an existing template.
2 Choose File
& Save as (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
S
).
3 Choose Templates (*.qxt) from the Save as type drop-down list.
Save changes to templates by saving the changes as the same name, and then click Yes to replace the file.
4 Enter the same name as the existing template in the File name field.
5 Choose the same location in which to save the template.
6 Click Save. A warning is displayed; click Yes to replace the existing file.
S Tips
Opening templates
When you open a template,
QuarkXPress always creates a new copy of the document. The default name is “Document” with a number appended to it according to how many new documents you have opened (for example, “Document 1”).
You do not have to worry about overwriting the original template.
Even if you open a template over a network, a new copy is temporarily saved to your hard drive.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.13
Box Basics
Creating Boxes
Resizing Boxes
Reshaping Boxes
Moving Boxes
Framing Boxes
Coloring Boxes
Merging and Splitting Boxes
Filling and Converting Boxes
Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness
7
7.3
7.8
7.10
7.18
7.20
7.29
7.32
7.38
7.40
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Box Basics
7
Page layout designers are like architects — both must masterfully construct a grid for their blueprints. Just as architects must have their paper and tools before they can work, page layout designers also need their medium: QuarkXPress. And in the
Tool palette, they’ll find the fundamentals of design construction — the box tools.
Boxes are items that can contain either text or pictures. They are crucial to navigating page layout territory because their boundaries give text and pictures a specific shape, size, and placement on a page. Once a box is on a page, you can perform a variety of traditional manipulations, as well as advanced operations using the Bézier box creation and reshaping capabilities, and the Merge and Split features.
These options, along with the traditional box tools, let you create the perfect blueprint, the perfect parameters for your text and pictures.
Creating Boxes
Creating Boxes
QuarkXPress uses two different types of boxes: text boxes and picture boxes. You can enter and import text into active text boxes, and import or paste pictures into active picture boxes.
Create either type of box to contain color, shades, blends, and frames.
Accessing the text box pop-out tools available in the Tool palette.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.3
Box Basics
S Tips
Creating square boxes
To constrain a rectangle box to a square, select either of the Rectangle Box tools
T p and press the
SHIFT key while you drag.
Creating circle boxes
To constrain an oval box to a circle, select either of the Oval Box tools
Î O and press the
SHIFT key while you drag.
Keeping a box tool selected
If you want to create multiple boxes using the same tool, press
ALT when selecting a box tool to keep it selected.
Creating boxes
Select a box tool from the Tool palette, move the Crosshair pointer c to any position on the page; then click and drag, or click and create points, to draw the box. You create boxes using the following tools:
• The Rectangle Box tools
T p create rectangular and square boxes.
• The Rounded-corner Box tools
Å x create rectangular boxes with rounded-corners.
• The Concave-corner Box tools ı å create rectangular boxes with concave-corners.
• The Beveled-corner Box tools
Ç ∫ create rectangular boxes with beveled-corners.
• The Oval Box tools
Î O create oval and circular boxes.
Creating rectangle, rounded-corner, concave-corner, beveled-corner, and oval text boxes.
• The Bézier Box tools
´ ∂ create boxes with both curved and straight line segments.
• The Freehand Box tools
Ô ƒ create freehand boxes with curved line segments.
Creating Bézier and freehand text boxes.
7.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Boxes
Creating Bézier boxes
In previous versions of QuarkXPress, you could draw irregularly-shaped boxes with straight line segments using the Polygon Picture Box tool
P. In this version of QuarkXPress, we have taken the polygon tool to a higher level by adding curved line segment capability. The polygon tool is now called the Bézier box tool and is available for either text
´ or picture ∂ boxes. The Bézier box tools let you draw multisided Bézier boxes that can have both straight and curved line segments. The Freehand Box tools
Ô
ƒ let you draw sketch-like shapes. The design potential is limitless.
Create unusual boxes with both straight and curved line segments using a Bézier box tool (left). Use a freehand box tool to create boxes that have a fluid, drawing pad look (right).
• The Bézier Box tools
´ ∂ create boxes with both curved and straight line segments. To draw a Bézier box:
1 Select one of the Bézier box tools from the Tool palette. Move the
Crosshair pointer c to any position on the page and click to establish the first point.
Click to establish the first point of a Bézier box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.5
Box Basics
S
Point
Tips
A point connects line segments and defines where line segments start and end. Points attached to curved line segments have curve handles to reshape the curves.
Curve handles
Curve handles extend from either side of a point and control a curve’s shape.
2 To make a straight line segment, click wherever you want the next point positioned. Do not click and drag the mouse.
Create a straight line segment by clicking once to establish the first point; then click at another position to establish the second point.
3 To make a curved line segment, click and drag wherever you want the next point positioned. A point with two curve handles will display.
You control the curve’s size and shape as you drag a curve handle.
Create a curved line segment by clicking or clicking and dragging to establish the first point; then click and drag at another position to establish the next point, and a curved line segment.
4 Continue creating points by clicking or clicking and dragging.
5 Close the box using one of three methods: You can double-click any time after creating the second point, move the Crosshair pointer c on top of the first point to display the Close Box pointer
V and click, or select a tool from the Tool palette.
7.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Boxes
Close a Bézier box by positioning the Crosshair pointer c on top of the first point. Click when the Close Box pointer
V displays.
R To constrain a point (in relation to the previously created point) to
45° angles, press
SHIFT while clicking. To constrain a curve handle to
45° angles, press
SHIFT anytime while dragging a curve handle.
• The Freehand Box tools
Ô ƒ create freehand boxes with curved line segments. To draw a freehand Bézier box:
Select one of the freehand box tools from the Tool palette. Move the
Crosshair pointer c to any position on the page; then click and drag in a continuous motion until you have drawn a freehand shape. Either close the shape manually by connecting the Bézier line to its starting point, or release the mouse and QuarkXPress will automatically close the shape.
Create a freehand Bézier box by clicking and dragging in a continuous motion. This Bézier box, shown during creation (left), after completion (center), and with an imported picture (right), was created with the Freehand Picture Box tool
ƒ.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.7
Box Basics
S Tips
Resizing handles
Bounding boxes have eight resizing handles.
Scaling box contents as you resize
To scale box contents as you resize, press
CTRL while dragging a resizing handle. The contents will also stretch, condense, enlarge, or shrink, depending on how you resize the box.
Resizing boxes proportionally
To resize boxes proportionally, press
SHIFT while dragging a resizing handle. Press
CTRL
+
SHIFT to resize a box and scale the contents proportionally.
Resizing Boxes
You can resize any box by modifying the size of its bounding box. A bounding box is a non-printing, rectangular box that encloses every box when Item
& Edit & Shape is unchecked. Bounding boxes are most apparent when they enclose a non-rectangular box shape. You can use the
Resizing pointer f to manually resize boxes, or you can enter precise values in the width and height fields of either the Modify dialog box (Item menu), or the Measurements palette. You can resize active boxes using any of the three following methods:
• Tool palette: Select the Item tool e or the Content tool E and move the Arrow pointer x over an active box’s resizing handle to display the
Resizing pointer f; click and drag the handle to a new location to reduce or enlarge the box.
Resize a circular picture box by enlarging its bounding box.
7.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Resizing Boxes
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Box tab.
Enter values in the Width and Height fields to precisely change the size of a box; then click OK.
S Tips
Accessing the Modify dialog box
When the Item tool e is selected, double-click a box to quickly display the Modify dialog box.
Accessing the Measurements palette
You can quickly display the
Measurements palette by pressing
CTRL
+
ALT
+
M
, or by pressing F9.
Using the Width and Height fields in the Box tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu), you can enter numerical values to precisely resize a box.
• Measurements palette: Enter values in the W and H fields to change the width and height, then press
ENTER
.
Resize a box using the Measurements palette by entering width and height values in the
W and H fields.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.9
Box Basics
S Tips
Converting boxes
If you convert a text box containing text into a line, it will become a text path. If you convert a picture box containing a picture into a line, you will lose the contents.
Reshaping Boxes
You can reshape any box by using the shape options in the Shape submenu
(Item menu). You can reshape any rectangular, rounded-corner, concavecorner, or beveled-corner box by manipulating the corner radius. And, you can reshape Bézier boxes by repositioning points, curve handles, and line segments. QuarkXPress points, curve handles, and line segments are described in detail later in this section.
Reshaping boxes using the Shape submenu
The Shape submenu (Item menu) contains six box shapes and three line shapes that you can apply to boxes. To change the shape of an active box, choose Item
& Shape to display the submenu; then choose a shape from the submenu. The active box is reshaped automatically.
Change the shape of an active box by choosing from options in the Shape submenu (Item menu).
7.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Reshaping Boxes
Reshaping boxes using the Corner Radius field
The Corner Radius
= field lets you specify the roundness of corners on any rectangular, rounded-corner, concave-corner, or beveled-corner box.
You can alter the corner radius of an active box using:
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Box tab.
Enter a value in the Corner Radius field to specify the radius of the arcs that form the corners on a box.
Manipulate boxes using the Corner Radius field (Item
& Modify & Box tab). The left text box has a Corner Radius of 0", the center text box has a Corner Radius of .25", and the right text box has a Corner Radius of 2".
• Measurements palette: (picture boxes only) To specify a corner radius for a picture box, enter a value in the
= field, then press
ENTER
.
Specify the roundness of a corner for any rectangular, rounded-corner, concave-corner, or beveledcorner picture box using the
= field in the Measurements palette.
R You cannot specify a corner radius for oval, freehand, or
Bézier boxes.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.11
Corner points
Smooth point
Symmetrical point
Curve handles
Line segments
Box Basics
Reshaping Bézier boxes
QuarkXPress lets you reshape Bézier boxes by manipulating points, curve handles, and line segments. The definitions on this page introduce key
Bézier concepts, and are followed by instructions on reshaping.
Definitions
Point: A point connects line segments and defines where line segments start and end. Points connecting curved line segments have curve handles that control the shape of the curves. QuarkXPress offers three types of points: corner, smooth, and symmetrical.
Corner point: A corner point connects two straight lines, a straight line and a curved line, or two noncontinuous curved lines. With curved lines, the corner point’s curve handles can be manipulated independently, usually to form a sharp transition between the two segments.
Smooth point: A smooth point connects two curved lines to form a continuous curve. The curve handles always rest on a straight line through the point but can be distanced independently.
Symmetrical point: A symmetrical point connects two curved lines to form a continuous curve. The result is similar to a smooth point, but the curve handles always rest on a straight line through the point and are always equidistant from the point.
Curve handles: Curve handles extend from either side of a point and control a curve’s shape.
Line segments: Line segments are straight or curved line sections positioned between two points.
7.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Reshaping Boxes
When Shape (Item
& Edit) is checked and the Arrow pointer x is positioned over an active Bézier box, various pointers display indicating whether you can select a point
˝, the curve handles Ï Ó, or a line segment
ˆ. Click and drag using the pointers to reshape the Bézier box.
You can also manipulate Bézier boxes using the pointers together with options in the Item menu and Measurements palette, by using keyboard commands and modifier keys, or by adding and deleting points.
Reshape Bézier boxes by manipulating points, curve handles, and line segments. This Bézier box, created with the Bézier Picture Box tool
∂, displays a point between its two curve handles. The curve handles are visible only when a point is active.
R A bounding box may display immediately after drawing a Bézier box, depending on whether the Shape option is checked. Checking
Shape (Item
& Edit) gives you access to the points, curve handles, and line segments within the bounding box. If shape is unchecked, you can quickly access a Bézier box’s shape by pressing F10.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.13
Box Basics
S Tips
Making sharp corners from rounded curves quickly
To make a sharp corner from a round curve, select a point on the curve and
ALT
-click one of the curve handles. To access the retracted handle and return the round curve, move the Arrow pointer x over the point until one of the Curve Handle pointers Ï Ó becomes visible and then drag.
• Reshaping Bézier boxes with pointers:
The Point pointer
˝ lets you manipulate corner, smooth, and symmetrical points. To reposition a point, click and drag.
The Curve Handle pointers
Ï Ó let you manipulate both curve handles. Click a point when the
Point pointer
˝ displays. If the point has extended curve handles, the curve handles will display.
To manipulate the shape of a curve, click and drag a curve handle.
The Line Segment pointer
ˆ lets you manipulate both straight and curved line segments. To manipulate the shape and position of a line segment, click and drag.
Retract a curve handle to create a transition in line segments.
Reshape a Bézier box while you are drawing it
You can reshape a Bézier box while you are drawing it by pressing
CTRL while repositioning the points, curve handles, or line segments; and then resuming box creation.
Use a Curve Handle pointer
Ó to reshape a curve.
7.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Reshaping Boxes
• Reshaping Bézier boxes with the Item menu:
Points: Select a point; choose Item
& Point/Segment Type to display the submenu; then check either Corner Point, Smooth Point, or Symmetri-
cal Point, depending on how you want to manipulate the active point.
Line segments: Select a line segment; choose Item
& Point/Segment
Type to display the submenu; then check either Straight Segment or
Curved Segment to make the line segment straight or curved.
Use the Point/Segment Type submenu (Item menu) to choose either a Corner, Smooth, or
Symmetrical point.
S Tips
Line segments affect curve handles
The type of point or line segment will automatically determine the type of curve handles available for manipulation. You cannot directly manipulate the curve handles through the Item menu, but you can indirectly affect them depending on what type of point and line segment is currently selected.
For example, if you initially created two corner points (and thus a straight line segment), you cannot access curve handles. However, if you select the line segment and choose Curved
Segment from the Point/Segment
Type submenu (Item menu) or click the curved line segment ∑ in the
Measurements palette, the act of converting the line segment will make the curve handles accessible.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.15
Box Basics
Use the Point/Segment Type submenu (Item menu) to convert a straight line segment into a curved line segment (as shown), or vice versa.
R Changing a straight line segment to a curved line segment will make the curve handles accessible.
• Reshaping Bézier boxes with the Measurements palette:
Points: Select a point with the Point pointer
˝; then click either †, ¥, or ® to convert the point to a symmetrical, smooth, or corner point.
Enter values in the XP and YP fields to reposition an active point.
Curve handles: Select a point with the Point pointer
˝; if the point displays curve handles, enter values in the r fields to reposition the angle of either curve handle, or enter values in the and fields to resize either curve handle (enter zero to retract the curve handle).
Line segments: Select a line segment with the Line Segment pointer
ˆ; then click either œ or ∑ to convert the line segment to a straight or curved line segment.
Use the Measurements palette to convert point and line segment type.
7.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Reshaping Boxes
• Reshaping Bézier boxes with keyboard commands:
Change in point or line segment Command
Corner point
Smooth point
Symmetrical point
Straight line segment
Curved line segment
CTRL +F1
CTRL +F2
CTRL +F3
CTRL + SHIFT +F1
CTRL + SHIFT +F2
• Reshaping Bézier boxes with modifier keys:
Change in point or curve handles Command
Add point
Delete point
Smooth to corner point (vice versa)
Snap point to 45° guides
Snap curve handles to 45° guides
Retract one curve handle
Retract curve handles
Expose curve handles
ALT
+click on line segment
ALT
+click on point
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+drag on curve handle
SHIFT
+drag on point
SHIFT
+drag on curve handle
ALT
+click on curve handle
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+click on point
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+drag on point
Adding and deleting points
To add a point, move the pointer over a line segment. When the Line
Segment pointer
ˆ displays,
ALT
+click to create a new point.
To delete a point, move the pointer over the point you want to delete.
When the Point pointer
˝ displays,
ALT
+click to delete it.
S Tips
Editing points and curve handles on a non-Bézier box
To edit points on an active non-Bézier box, first use the Shape submenu
(Item
& Shape & ®) to convert the non-Bézier box to a Bézier box.
The non-Bézier box will retain its original shape, but it will be converted into an editable Bézier box.
If you activate a Bézier box with an irregular shape and choose another shape from the Shape submenu, the new box or line will approximate the size of the Bézier shape’s bounding box.
Add and delete points to alter picture boxes, like the ones shown above. The car on the left is the original. Several points were deleted and repositioned to make the car into a pickup truck (center). Several points were added and repositioned to make the car into a covered truck (right).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.17
Box Basics
S Tips
Moving boxes while viewing contents
If you click and then pause slightly before you drag a box with the Item tool e, you can view the box contents (and not just its outline) while dragging. This can be helpful when you need to reposition an item according to its contents. The delay time is determined in the Interactive tab of the Application Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Application).
Rotating and skewing boxes
To rotate a box, use the Rotation tool
R, the item rotation field r in the
Measurements palette, or the Box
Angle field in the Modify dialog box
(Item menu). To skew a box, enter a value in the Box Skew field of the
Modify dialog box (Item menu). See
“Rotating and Skewing Items” in
Chapter 9, “Manipulating Items.”
Moving Boxes
You can move boxes within the same page, across page boundaries, or onto the pasteboard. You can also drag boxes to other open QuarkXPress documents or libraries. It’s advisable to move small boxes with Item
&
Edit
& Shape unchecked so their shape is not accidentally altered. You can use the Measurements palette to view box position coordinates as you move boxes.
Moving boxes
You can move active boxes by dragging them with the Item tool e, or you can enter precise values in the Modify dialog box (Item
& Modify & Box tab) or the Measurements palette. You can move active boxes using:
• Tool palette: With the Item tool e selected, drag a box to a new location.
Move boxes using the Item tool e.
7.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Moving Boxes
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Box tab.
To move a box horizontally, enter a value in the Origin Across field. To move a box vertically, enter a value in the Origin Down field. Click OK.
Enter values in the Origin Across and Origin Down fields (Item
& Modify & Box tab) to move a box.
• Measurements palette: To move a box horizontally, enter a value in the X field. To move a box vertically, enter a value in the Y field, and press
ENTER
.
Move boxes by entering values in the Measurements palette X and Y coordinate fields.
• Keyboard commands:
Automatic moving features Command
Nudge boxes in 1-point increments
Nudge boxes in .1-point increments arrow keys
ALT +arrow keys
R If the Content tool
E is selected when using the arrow keys, the box contents will move, instead of the box.
S Tips
Moving boxes to other open documents
To move a box to another open
QuarkXPress document, either select the box with the Item tool e and drag it into another document, or copy and paste it.
Origins
Origin Across is the position of the upper left corner of the bounding box relative to the zero point on the horizontal ruler. Origin Down is the position of the upper left corner of the bounding box relative to the zero point on the vertical ruler.
Snapping Bézier boxes by their points
You can snap a Bézier box to a guide according to a particular point you drag, without reshaping the item.
First, double-click a point to activate all the points (and curve handles) on the Bézier box; then drag any point to the guide. (If the box contains multiple, untouching shapes, triple-click to select all of the points.)
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.19
Box Basics
S Tips
Printing mathematically defined and bitmap frames
Mathematically defined frames print clearly at any size and on all types of printers. Bitmap frames may resize or print poorly, depending on the size of the bitmap. If a bitmap frame is selected in the frame Style list
(Item
& Frame), an optimal width for that frame appears in bold type in the Width drop-down list. You can enter any width for bitmap frames, but they might look better when printed at the outlined size. You can only apply bitmap frames to rectangular boxes.
Framing options
The Style list (Item
& Frame) displays frames provided with
QuarkXPress and frames created using the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit menu).
Framing Boxes
QuarkXPress frames are decorative borders that can be placed around text or picture boxes of any shape. Choose from predefined styles, or create new mathematically defined frames using the Edit
& Dashes & Stripes feature.
Framing boxes
You can apply a frame to an active box using the Frame tab (Item menu). To apply a frame to an active box:
1 Choose Item
& Frame (
CTRL + B ).
Choose Item
& Frame; or choose Item & Modify (
CTRL + M ), then click the Frame tab.
2 Enter a value in the Width field or choose a width from the dropdown list.
3 Choose a frame style from the Style drop-down list.
4 In the Frame area, choose a color from the Color drop-down list; choose a shade from the Shade drop-down list or enter a new value.
7.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Framing Boxes
5 If you have chosen a frame style with multiple stripes or dashes, you can choose a Gap color from the Color drop-down list; choose a Gap shade from the Shade drop-down list or enter a new value, then click OK.
S Tips
Coloring frames using the Colors palette
Choose View
& Show Colors or press F12. To color a frame, click the frame icon J and choose one of the colors listed. To shade a frame, click the arrow < next to the current shade value and choose a percent from the list, or enter a new value in the shade field.
Selecting a color and shade from the Gap area (Item
& Frame) will color and shade the space between a frame’s multiple stripes or dashes.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.21
Box Basics
S Tips
Creating custom line styles
Any dash or stripe pattern you create can be applied to lines.
Editing frames
You can edit any dash or stripe style in the Dashes & Stripes dialog box
(Edit menu) by choosing it from the list and choosing Edit. The Edit dialog box is the same dialog box that you see when you create a custom dash or stripe.
Creating custom frame styles
You can create custom frame styles and apply them to text and picture boxes of any shape. When you create a frame style with a document open, it is added to the document’s style list. When you create a frame style when no documents are open, it is added to the application’s style list. You can access and apply your frame style via the Frame tab (Item menu). You can create two types of styles: dashes (dotted/broken-line patterns) and stripes (lined patterns).
Creating custom dashed frame styles
1 Choose Edit
& Dashes & Stripes.
2 Click the New button to display the drop-down list, then choose Dash.
Choose Edit
& Dashes & Stripes to access the New drop-down list. Select Dash to create a dash pattern.
7.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Framing Boxes
3 Enter a dash name in the Name field.
Name a new dash by entering a name in the Name field (Edit
& Dashes & Stripes &
New
& Dash).
4 Click anywhere in the ruler area. Every time you click, an arrow 3 is created. The arrow indicates where a dash will start or stop. If you create several arrows, and space them apart at different distances, you will create a dashed style that has dashes of varying sizes. To make a dash longer or shorter, drag an arrow. To delete a dash, drag its arrows off the ruler, or drag the dash segment up or down.
Click and place arrows to create dashes. Three arrows were placed to create this custom dash style (Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.23
Box Basics
S Tips
Repeats Every drop-down list
You can choose between a proportional and absolute dash pattern using the Repeats Every drop-down list (Edit
& Dashes & Stripes &
New
& Dash). Proportional segments (times width) change depending on the width of the frame, while absolute segments (Points) remain the same width regardless of the width of the frame.
5 View the Preview area to see what your custom dash will look like.
Drag the slider to see the dash at different widths.
Drag the slider in the Preview area to view the pattern at different sizes (Edit
& Dashes &
Stripes
& New & Dash).
6 Use the Dash Attributes area to:
• Determine whether the dash pattern is proportional to the width of the frame, or whether it is absolute no matter what the width of the frame. Enter a number in the Repeats Every field when times width is chosen in the drop-down list to create a proportional dash pattern.
Enter a number in the Repeats Every field when Points is chosen in the drop-down list to create an absolute dash pattern that uses points as the measuring system.
Notice the difference between proportional (left) and absolute (right) in the Preview area
(Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash). Use the slider in the Preview area to see the difference between the proportional and absolute patterns.
7.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Framing Boxes
• Choose an option from the Miter drop-down list to determine how corners look. You can choose from sharp-corner, rounded-corner, or beveled-corner.
Choose from sharp-corner, rounded-corner, or beveled-corner in the Miter drop-down list
(Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash) to determine how corners appear.
• Choose an option from the Endcap drop-down list to determine dash shape. You can choose from butt cap, round cap, or projecting square cap.
S Tips
Options from the Miter drop-down list mostly affect lines
When you choose an option from the
Miter drop-down list, and then apply the dash or stripe pattern to a line, the mitering will affect corner areas on multiple-segment lines. If you apply the dash or stripe pattern to a frame, the mitering will only affect the inside edges of the frame on a
Bézier box. Otherwise, Miter has no effect on frames.
To apply a lean, blocky shape to your dash, choose butt cap from the Endcap drop-down list
(Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash).
To apply a full, rounded shape to your dash, choose round cap from the Endcap drop-down list (Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash).
To apply a full, blocky shape to your dash, choose projecting square cap from the Endcap drop-down list (Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.25
Box Basics
• Check Stretch to Corners to make the dash pattern stretch evenly along a frame so that the corner areas look symmetrical.
When Stretch to Corners is unchecked, the dash pattern is uneven at the corner areas
(left). Checking Stretch to Corners (Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Dash) makes the dash pattern align evenly at all corner areas (right).
7 Enter a value in the Position field to precisely position a new arrow.
You can also view the Position field for feedback in arrow placement.
Click Add to add an arrow.
8 Click OK to close the Edit Dash dialog box; then click Save to save your custom dash.
9 Apply your new dash via the Style drop-down list in the Frame tab of the Modify dialog box (Item
& Frame).
Apply custom dashes using the Style drop-down list in the Modify dialog box (Item
& Frame).
7.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Framing Boxes
Creating custom striped frame styles
1 Choose Edit
& Dashes & Stripes.
2 Click the New button to display the drop-down list; then choose Stripe.
Choose Edit
& Dashes & Stripes to access the New drop-down list. Select Stripe to create a pattern with a continuous stripe or series of continuous stripes.
3 Enter a stripe name in the Name field.
4 Click anywhere in the ruler area. Every time you click, an arrow 8 is created. The arrow indicates where a stripe will start or stop. If you create several arrows, and space them apart at different distances, you will create a multistriped style that has stripes of varying sizes. To make a stripe larger or smaller, drag an arrow. To delete a stripe, drag its arrows off the ruler or drag the stripe segment to the left or right.
Click and place arrows to create stripes. Four arrows were placed to create this custom stripe pattern (Edit
& Dashes & Stripes & New & Stripe).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.27
Box Basics
5 View the Preview area to see what your custom stripe will look like.
Drag the slider to view the stripe at different widths.
Drag the slider in the Preview area to view the pattern at different sizes.
6 Choose an option from the Miter drop-down list to determine how corners look. You can choose from sharp-corner, rounded-corner, or beveled-corner.
7 Enter a value in the Position field to precisely position a new arrow.
You can also view the Position field for feedback in arrow placement.
Click Add to add an arrow.
8 Click OK to close the Edit Stripe dialog box; then click Save to save your custom stripe.
9 Apply your new stripe via the Style drop-down list in the Frame tab of the Modify dialog box (Item
& Frame).
R Rulers are displayed differently depending on whether a dash or a stripe is being edited. If you’ve chosen to edit a dash, the ruler is displayed along the top. If you’ve chosen to edit a stripe, the ruler is displayed along the side.
7.28
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Coloring Boxes
Coloring Boxes
Once you have created a text or picture box, you can add a background color, shade, or blends. You can apply colors, shades, and blends to an active box using:
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Box tab.
Choose a color from the Color drop-down list. Choose a percentage from the Shade drop-down list or enter a value in the field.
S Tips
Applying color to multiple boxes
You can apply colors, shades, and blends to grouped or multipleselected boxes by activating the boxes and choosing a color using either the Box tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the Colors palette (View menu).
Choose an option from the Color drop-down list (Item
& Modify) to color a box.
To determine a blend pattern, choose a style other than Solid from the
Style drop-down list. Choose an angle from the Angle drop-down list or enter a value in the field to specify the angle at which the two colors blend. Choose a color from the Color drop-down list to determine the second blend color. Choose a percentage from the Shade drop-down list or enter a value in the field; then click OK.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.29
S Tips
Using the Cool Blends XTensions software
The Cool Blends XTensions software, included with QuarkXPress, provides additional blend styles: Mid-Linear
Blend, Rectangular Blend, Dia-
mond Blend, Circular Blend, and
Full Circular Blend. Use the
XTensions Manager dialog box
(Utilities menu) to load Cool Blends.
Accurate Blends check box
The Accurate Blends check box
(Edit
& Preferences & Docu- ment
& General tab) lets you control the display of two-color blends on monitors displaying 256 colors.
To display blends without banding and with the most accurate colors possible, check Accurate Blends.
For faster blend display, uncheck
Accurate Blends.
Choose a Style, Angle, Color, and Shade from the Blend area (Item
& Modify & Box tab) to specify a blend for a box background.
Use the Style drop-down list in the Blend area (Item
& Modify) to choose from Linear Blend,
Mid-Linear Blend, and Rectangular Blend styles.
Use the Style drop-down list in the Blend area (Item
& Modify) to choose from Diamond
Blend, Circular Blend, and Full Circular Blend styles.
7.30
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Coloring Boxes
• Colors palette: Choose View
& Show Colors and click the background icon Y. Click one of the colors listed, then choose a shade by clicking the arrow < next to the current shade value and choosing a percentage from the drop-down list, or by entering a new value in the shade field.
To choose a blend style, click the #1 button and choose the first color.
Click the #2 button and choose the second color. Specify a blend angle by entering a value in the angle field. Choose a shade by clicking the arrow < next to the current shade value and choosing a percentage from the drop-down list, or by entering a value in the shade field. Then press
ENTER or click on the document.
S Tips
Drag and drop colors
You can drag and drop colors from the Colors palette by clicking one of the color swatches in the color list and dragging the color swatch over a box. As soon as the color swatch is positioned over a box, the box will fill with the new color. Drop the swatch to apply the color.
Accessing the Colors palette
You can quickly access the Colors palette by pressing F12.
Click the #2 button to choose a second blend color from the Colors palette (View menu).
R Box backgrounds behave differently depending on the contents and the type of background. If a text box is selected with the Content tool
E, only the #1 color is displayed. If a picture box contains a grayscale TIFF, the background color will also color the picture’s background. If a picture box contains a blend, the color will only blend the box’s background — not the picture’s background.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.31
Box Basics
S Tips
Selecting multiple items
Two or more items — boxes, lines, or text paths — need to be selected to apply the Merge commands in the Item menu.
Merging and Splitting Boxes
Options in the Merge and Split submenus (Item menu) let you create complex geometric Bézier boxes with many design capabilities. A box created from one of the Merge commands combines multiple-selected boxes into one box shape with a single set of contents. Merge works when two or more boxes (or items) are overlapping each other, and in some cases, with non-overlapping boxes (or items). Boxes created using the Split commands either split a merged box into separate boxes, split a complex box that contains paths within paths into separate boxes, or split a box that contains a border that crosses over itself (such as a figure eight).
You can merge boxes (left) using the Union command (center) (Item
& Merge & Union). You can then import a picture into the merged box (right).
7.32
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Merging and Splitting Boxes
Merging boxes
Multiple-select the boxes you want to merge with the Item tool e or the
Content tool
E. Choose Item & Merge to display the submenu.
Choose options from the submenu to combine the selected boxes in various ways. All these commands also apply to other multiple-selected items such as lines and text paths (but text paths will lose their content).
You can merge items using:
S Tips
Merged item contents
When two or more kinds of boxes or items overlap and any of the Merge commands are applied, the style and contents of the back item are kept. The contents of all other items are lost.
Undoing a Merge command
If you want to undo a merge combination, choose Edit
& Undo (
CTRL
+
Z
).
Use the Merge submenu (Item menu) to choose from six options that let you manipulate multipleselected boxes.
• Intersection keeps any areas where items overlap the back item, and removes the rest.
Applying Intersection (Item
& Merge & Intersection) to stacked items keeps overlapping shapes, and deletes non-overlapping shapes (right).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.33
Box Basics
S Tips
Using Merge with grouped items
Grouped items can be merged using the commands in the Merge submenu (Item menu).
• Union combines all of the items into one box, keeping all overlapped areas as well as non-overlapped areas.
Applying Union (Item
& Merge & Union) merges all overlapping items into one box (right).
• Difference deletes the front items. Any overlapping areas will be cut out.
Applying Difference (Item
& Merge & Difference) to overlapping items keeps the back item, and deletes the front items.
7.34
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Merging and Splitting Boxes
• Reverse Difference deletes the back item. Any overlapping areas will be cut out.
Applying Reverse Difference (Item
& Merge & Reverse Difference) to overlapping items keeps the front items, and deletes the back item. Any overlapping areas are cut out.
• Exclusive Or leaves all of the shapes intact but cuts out any areas where there is overlap. If you want to edit the points surrounding the cut-out area, you will notice that there are now two points at every location where two lines originally crossed.
Use Exclusive Or (Item
& Merge & Exclusive Or) to access and manipulate points at any overlapping intersections.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.35
Box Basics
S Tips
Filling split boxes with different contents
Using the Outside Paths command, you can create individual boxes from merged, non-overlapping items (for example a box created from the Text
to Box command). You can alter the content, specify various fills, import different pictures, etc. into the newly created, individual boxes.
Undoing a Split command
If you want to undo a split operation, choose Edit
& Undo (
CTRL
+
Z
).
• Combine is similar to Exclusive Or, with one difference: If you want to manipulate the points surrounding the cut-out area, you will notice that no points are added where two lines intersect.
Applying Combine (Item
& Merge & Combine) to overlapping items keeps all of the shapes intact, but any overlapping areas are cut out (right).
Splitting boxes
You can use the Split commands to split merged boxes that contain nonoverlapping shapes, to split boxes that contain shapes within shapes, or to split boxes that contain a border that crosses over itself (such as a figure eight). Select the box you want to split with the Item tool e or the
Content tool
E and choose Item & Split to display the submenu. You can split boxes using:
• Outside Paths works with a merged box that contains several, nonoverlapping shapes. Outside Paths keeps all of the outside path information and divides non-overlapping outside paths into separate boxes.
7.36
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Merging and Splitting Boxes
Applying Outside Paths (Item
& Split) to a merged box that contains non-overlapping shapes
(left) will create individual items (center). Each item can then be manipulated independently (right).
• All Paths creates separate boxes out of every shape within a complex box.
Applying All Paths (Item
& Split) to a complex item (left) will create boxes everywhere (center). Each box can then be manipulated separately (right).
• Outside Paths/All Paths can be used when you have a box that contains a border that crosses over itself (such as a figure eight).
Applying Outside Paths or All Paths (Item
& Split) to an item that overlaps itself (left) results in a separation of the overlapping junctions (right).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.37
Box Basics
S Tips
Selecting boxes with various tools
Selecting a box with the Content tool
E lets you manipulate its contents. Selecting a box with the Item tool e or the Content tool E lets you resize the box.
Specifying columns for text boxes
See “Working with Columns” in
Chapter 10, “Document Layout.”
Copying pictures with drag-and-drop
Instead of using the Get Picture command to fill a box, try dragging the icon of a picture file from the Windows desktop or the Windows
Explorer on to a picture box in
QuarkXPress. You can also drag pictures from other applications which support this drag-and-drop feature.
Only picture file formats supported by
QuarkXPress or other OLE-aware applications on your system can be copied.
Filling and Converting Boxes
You can enter and import text into text boxes, and import or paste pictures into picture boxes. You can also convert any existing box into another type of box so that it can hold new contents. For example, you can change a text box into a picture box, and vice versa. A box can also be changed to have a content of None, which is useful if you want your box to only contain color or a frame.
Filling boxes
• Text: To enter text, select a text box with the Content tool
E. The Text
Insertion bar i will appear and you can begin typing. To import text, use the Get Text command (File menu). See “Importing and Exporting
Text” in Chapter 11, “Text Basics.”
• Picture: To import a picture, select a picture box with the Content tool
E or the Item tool e and use the Get Picture command (File menu).
See “Importing Pictures” in Chapter 14, “Pictures.”
Filling a text box with text (left), and a picture box with an imported picture (right).
7.38
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Filling and Converting Boxes
Converting box contents
To convert an active box, choose Picture, Text, or None from the Content submenu (Item menu).
S Tips
Creating boxes with a content of None
When you choose None from the
Content submenu (Item menu), the box can be framed, or it can be filled with a background color, shade, or blend, but you cannot add text or a picture to it.
Choose an option from the Item
& Content submenu to convert the content of a selected box.
R When you convert box type, an alert displays if any contents will be lost.
Converting a text box to a text path and vice versa
To convert an active text box to a text path, choose a line shape from the Item
& Shape submenu. The first line shape automatically converts the text box into a diagonal text path, the second line shape creates an orthogonal text path, and the third line shape wraps the text around the outside of the original text box.
Converting a text box to a text path.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.39
Box Basics
Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness
To draw a Bézier box as quickly as possible, it’s easiest to use one of the
Freehand Box tools
ƒ Ô. Unfortunately, freehand tools won’t help someone who’s hoping to draw or trace something as smooth and symmetrical as the waves shown in Figure 1. So how is it done?
Figure 1: Drawing a smooth, symmetrical design like this can teach you a lot.
Working with boxes
If you’ve used other illustration programs, you may be accustomed to drawing with open paths. An open path in QuarkXPress is called a line.
If an open path contains text, QuarkXPress refers to it as a text path.
A closed path in QuarkXPress is called a box. (Runaround paths and clipping paths are also closed, but they don’t concern us here.) Although
QuarkXPress allows you to create Bézier art using lines or boxes, you may find that working with Bézier boxes provides a greater advantage to the QuarkXPress artist. If you work with boxes, more options exist for color and for special operations like merging and splitting. Plus, boxes are generally more intuitive and easier to grab and move. Besides, when you’re done drawing, you can always change an active Bézier box into a
Bézier line by choosing Item
†.
Minimal points for maximum smoothness
If you can’t smoothly create your design by combining ovals and rectangles using the Merge commands (Item menu), what else can you do? To begin, you’ll have to start drawing point-by-point using one of the Bézier
7.40
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness
Box tools
∂ ´. The following are a few tips that will make this process more efficient:
1 Away from the computer, sketch the shape you want to create with a pencil and paper.
2 In your sketch, pencil in a point wherever there’s a corner. Corners are sharp transitions. For example, the tips of the waves shown in
Figure 1 are corners, as are the points shown below in Figure 2.
Figure 2: All corners should include points.
3 Look for straight lines in your drawing. Sketch a point at both ends of every straight line.
Figure 3: A straight line should include a point at each end.
4 Find places where the curve “shifts direction,” no matter how subtly, and sketch a point at the middle of the “S” shape. Although it’s possible to make a Bézier “S” shape without a point in the middle of the
“S,” you have more control if you include the point.
Figure 4: Find places where the curve “shifts direction” the way an “S” shifts direction in midstroke. Then, sketch a point where that shift occurs — even if that shift is subtle.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.41
Box Basics
S Tips
Shift-dragging curve handles
Pressing the
SHIFT key while dragging a curve handle has a similar effect to
SHIFT
-dragging a point. The curve handle (and possibly its partner, depending on the type of point) is constrained to invisible guides that radiate from the point at 45-degree increments. This can be useful when creating symmetrical designs.
5 If you were to line up all the remaining segments on the ground as a series of arches, would any of these arches appear so “bulbous” that one side of the arch would seem to bend inwards toward the other side at the base? Such arches, like those in Row B of Figure 5, require an additional point for sufficient control. Sketch points as needed.
A
B
Figure 5: For smoothness, the arches in Row A of this illustration should consist of one segment only. The legs of the arches in Row B bend inward at the base; they require an additional point for sufficient control.
6 Repeat step 4 if necessary, then use one of the Bézier Box tools
∂ ´ to begin plotting your sketched points using QuarkXPress. Approximate the position of each point as you go. Click to create corner points; click-and-drag the mouse slightly to create smooth points. Do so while pressing the SHIFT key to create a point that lies at 45-degree increments from the previous point.
Although entering points in a freestyle manner will produce poorly curved segments at first, you can easily go back and bend the segments after the shape is completed. Complete the finished box by double-clicking to create the last point.
7 Make sure Item
& Edit & Shape is checked.
8 Drag different parts of each segment to bend them — just as you would a piece of wire. (Straight segments need to be changed to curved segments before you can bend them. Click the ∑ button in the
7.42
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness
Measurements palette to change active straight segments to curved.) For added control, use the curve handles to bend the segments.
The finished shape — almost
Using the eight steps just described, you should have no problem drawing a shape as smooth as the one repeated in the wave design. Boxes drawn using this procedure may require a little adjustment, but after you get the basic idea, you’ll be able to draw equally smooth shapes without preplanning or pencil sketching. You can then learn to incorporate the
CTRL key and the different
CTRL key combinations listed in “Reshaping
Boxes” earlier in “Box Basics” to manipulate points as you go along — eliminating much of the work required for adjustment.
Figure 6 shows what the repeating shape in the wave design looks like with all its points selected. Five corner points and two smooth points were used to draw the shape.
Figure 6: The repeating shape used to create the design in Figure 1 is shown with all points selected. The left and right sides of the base are designed as complementary so that a seamless transition is created when the shape is tiled.
Preparing a shape to be tiled
Now that you have some smoothness in your drawing, how do you incorporate symmetry? Basically, symmetry is a simple matter of relying on the Duplicate command, the Merge commands, some flipping, and frequent snapping to guides. But if the repeating shape in your design
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.43
Box Basics must flow seamlessly into its duplicate, you’ll have to make sure this shape can be “tiled” before you do anything else.
The wave shape in Figure 6 was prepared for tiling by snapping the bottom four corner points to a pair of horizontal guides.
In addition, two of the curve handles were made complimentary so that a smooth curve would occur at the point where the tiled shapes are to meet. As you can see in Figure 6, the curve handle on the lower left is angled exactly 180 degrees opposite the curve handle on the lower right.
Curve handles with an angle difference of 180 degrees combine to create a smooth curve when the shape is tiled.
Duplicating
After applying color and other attributes to your shape, duplicate it in the desired quantity using the Duplicate command (
CTRL
+
D
) or the Step
and Repeat command (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
D
). This provides a collection of similar shapes that can be combined to create a single, symmetrical box.
Flipping
If you want a duplicated shape to mirror the original, you can flip it by performing the following steps:
1 Make sure Item
& Edit & Shape is unchecked for the active item, so that its rectangular bounding box displays.
2 Highlight the W field (if you want a horizontal flip) or the H field (if you want a vertical flip) in the Measurements palette and copy the value to the Clipboard (
CTRL
+
C
).
3 Drag the left-middle or right-middle resize handle (if you want a horizontal flip), or drag the top-middle or bottom-middle resize handle
(if you want a vertical flip) until the item is reduced to the surface area of a straight line, and keep dragging. Lift the mouse button after the bounding box has been dragged “through itself.”
7.44
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness
3 Highlight the appropriate measurement field (W or H) in the Measure-
ments palette and paste (
CTRL
+
V
) the value you just copied. The Bézier box is flipped. If you also want the box’s contents flipped, you can use the Flip commands (Style menu) to do so at the end of the process.
Figure 7: A Bézier box can be flipped by dragging its bounding box through itself.
Aligning and merging
If you want all the duplicated boxes to behave as one continuous box with one set of contents and no white space in between, you must align and merge them.
If you’ve already performed an accurate step and repeat with no flipping, you may be able to multiple-select the boxes and perform a Union command (Item
& Merge & Union) immediately. If not, you can use the
Space/Align command to align your boxes.
S Tips
Quickly deleting parts of a Bézier box
If you want to delete part of a Bézier box, try using the Difference command in the Merge submenu (Item menu). If two partially overlapped boxes are selected, Difference removes the front box and cuts out the overlapping area from the back box. For example, if you want a halfcircle, draw a rectangle over the top of an existing circle so that it overlaps the circle halfway; then select both boxes and choose Item
&
Merge
& Difference. A half-circle results.
Figure 8: These two shapes were “tiled” using the Space/Align command.
Or, if your boxes are too oddly shaped for the Space/Align command to be effective, you can use the following procedure to align boxes at a specific Bézier point:
1 Make sure Snap to Guides is checked in the View menu, and drag out a horizontal and vertical guide from the rulers of the document window to create a crossed guide pair.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.45
Box Basics
2 Determine which Bézier point will serve as the juncture for aligning the boxes.
3 Press
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
A or triple-click a point in the active box to activate all its points. (Double-clicking a point will suffice if the box contains only one path.)
4 Determine which point will serve as the juncture, and drag it to the crossed guide pair. All the points are selected, so the entire box now moves without reshaping. This style of box movement lets you snap a box to guides according to any point you drag.
Figure 9: Dragging a point with all points selected lets you snap to guides according to any point you drag.
5 Repeat Step 4 for the duplicated item(s).
6 Marquee or SHIFT -click to select any boxes that you want to merge into one box. Then, choose Item
& Merge & Union to merge all of them into one continuous Bézier box. Repeating this procedure several times allows you to create smooth, symmetrical boxes.
Radial symmetry
You can create radial symmetry (like the kind shown in Figure 10) using all the same procedures described so far.
7.46
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Understanding Symmetry and Smoothness
The only additional technique you’ll need to know when creating radial symmetry is field math. Field math is the application’s ability to accept math operators (such as +, –, /, and *) into the fields of dialog boxes and palettes.
Figure 10: This design was created by using field math (+22.5˚) in the box angle field r for each box as it was duplicated from the previous one. The boxes were then snapped to a crossed guide pair using the technique shown in Figure 9.
When the design in Figure 10 was created, “+22.5” was entered after the existing value in the box angle r field in the Measurements palette as each box was duplicated from the previous one. The 22.5 value was determined by dividing 360 by the total amount of duplicate shapes
(360 ÷ 16 = 22.5).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 7.47
Line Basics
Creating Lines
Resizing Lines
Reshaping Lines
Moving Lines
Applying Line Styles
8
8.3
8.7
8.10
8.16
8.21
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Line Basics
8
Lines. Curved and straight. They are decidedly simple elements, but they appear everywhere. Look around your world — from an office window, from an airplane, from a train — lines abound in nature and in human-made objects. They are fundamental concepts of design.
In page layout, lines are used as graphic enhancers, attention grabbers, eye leaders, mood creators, and boundary providers. Imagine a poster with swirly, eye-catching spirals of varying sizes, or an advertisement containing a single elegant contour. Lines add the spice to page layout.
This chapter is about creating and manipulating lines. Once a line is on a page, you can perform a variety of traditional manipulations, as well as advanced operations using the Bézier line creation and reshaping capabilities.
Creating Lines
Creating Lines
QuarkXPress provides four line creation tools that let you draw straight, curved, and combination lines. You can create single-segment straight lines, or you can use a Bézier line tool to create single or multiple-segment straight or curved lines.
Viewing the four line tools, including the pop-out tools, available in the Tool palette.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.3
Line Basics
S Tips
Constraining lines to 0°, 45°, or 90° angles
You can constrain a line created with the Line tool
L to 0°, 45°, or 90° by pressing the
SHIFT key while you draw the line.
Keeping a line tool selected
If you want to create multiple lines using the same tool, press
ALT when selecting a line tool to keep it selected.
Creating lines
Select a line tool from the Tool palette, move the Crosshair pointer c to any position on the page; then click and drag, or click and create points, to draw a line. You create lines using the following tools:
• The Line tool
L creates straight lines at any angle.
• The Orthogonal Line tool o creates straight horizontal or vertical lines.
• The Bézier Line tool
∞ creates lines with curved and straight line segments.
• The Freehand Line tool
§ creates freehand lines with curved line segments.
Create straight lines using the Line tool
L and the Orthogonal Line tool o; create curved lines using the Bézier Line tool
∞ and the Freehand Line tool §.
Creating Bézier lines
The Bézier Line tool
∞ lets you draw Bézier lines that can have multiple straight and curved line segments. The Bézier Freehand Line tool
§ lets you draw sketch-like shapes that contain multiple curved line segments.
Using the Bézier Line tool
∞
1 Select the Bézier Line tool
∞ from the Tool palette. Move the
Crosshair pointer c to any position on the page; click to establish the first point.
Click to establish the first point of a Bézier line.
8.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Lines
2 To make a straight line segment, click wherever you want the next point positioned. Do not click and drag the mouse.
Create a straight line segment by clicking once to establish the first point; then click at another position to establish the second point.
3 To make a curved line segment, click and drag wherever you want the next point positioned. A point with two curve handles will display.
You control the curve’s size and shape as you drag a curve handle.
S
Point
Tips
A point connects line segments and defines where line segments start and end. Points attached to curved segments have curve handles.
Curve handles
Curve handles extend from either side of a point and control a curve’s shape.
Create a curved line segment by clicking or clicking and dragging to establish the first point; then click and drag at another position to establish the next point, and a curved line segment.
4 Continue creating points by clicking or clicking and dragging.
5 You can end the line using one of two methods: You can doubleclick any time after creating the first point, or select a tool from the Tool palette.
Viewing a completed Bézier line consisting of both curved and straight line segments.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.5
Line Basics
R To constrain a point (in relation to the previously created point) to
45° angles, press
SHIFT before clicking. To constrain a curve handle to 45° angles, press
SHIFT anytime while dragging a curve handle.
Using the Freehand Line tool
§
Select the Freehand Line tool from the Tool palette. Move the Crosshair pointer c to any position on the page; then click and drag in a continuous motion until you have drawn a freehand line. Release the mouse when you are finished drawing the line.
Create freehand lines by clicking and dragging in a continuous motion.
8.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Resizing Lines
Resizing Lines
You can change the length of straight lines created with either the Line
L or Orthogonal o Line tools, and you can scale lines created with either the Bézier
∞ or Freehand § Line tools by resizing their bounding boxes.
Resizing straight lines created with the Line
L o Line tools
You can resize active straight lines using:
• Tool palette: Select the Item tool e or the Content tool E and move the Arrow pointer x over a resizing handle to display the Resizing pointer f; click and drag the handle to a new location to reduce or enlarge the line.
S Tips
Constraining a line to its original angle
If you’ve created a line with the Line tool
L, you can lengthen or shorten it and constrain it to its original angle by pressing
ALT
+
SHIFT while dragging a resizing handle.
Constraining lines to 0°, 45°, or 90° angles
You can constrain a line created with the Line tool
L to 0°, 45°, or 90° by pressing the
SHIFT key while you resize.
Resize straight lines by dragging a resizing handle.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.7
Line Basics
S Tips
Accessing the Modify dialog box
When the Item tool e is selected, double-click a line to quickly display the Modify dialog box.
Accessing the Measurements palette
You can quickly display the
Measurements palette by pressing
CTRL
+
ALT
+
M
, or by pressing F9.
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
). Click the Mode dropdown list to display the four mode options (see “Line modes for straight lines” later in this chapter). Choose either First Point, Mid-
point, or Last Point to display a Length field. Enter values in the
Length field to precisely change the length of a line, then click OK.
Use the Length field (Item
& Modify & Line tab) to precisely resize lines.
• Measurements palette: Choose First Point, Midpoint, or Last Point from the drop-down list to display the L field. Enter a value in the length field to precisely change the length of a line, then press
ENTER
.
Resize a line using the the L field in the Measurements palette.
R If the Endpoints Mode is active in either the Modify dialog box or the Measurements palette, choose another Mode to display the
Length field.
Resizing Bézier lines
You can scale any Bézier line by modifying the size of its bounding box.
A bounding box is a non-printing, rectangular box that encloses every
8.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Resizing Lines curved line when Item
& Edit & Shape is unchecked. You can resize active Bézier lines in bounding boxes using:
• Tool palette: Select the Item tool e or the Content tool E and move the Arrow pointer x over a resizing handle to display the Resizing pointer f; click and drag the resizing handle to a new location to reduce or enlarge the line.
S Tips
Resizing handles
You can scale a Bézier line by enlarging its bounding box.
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
). Enter values in the
Width and Height fields to precisely change the size of a Bézier line’s bounding box. Click OK.
Bounding boxes have eight resizing handles. Four of the handles on this particular bounding box look like small white squares because they are positioned on the black line.
Resizing Freehand and Bézier lines proportionally
To resize Freehand and Bézier lines proportionally, press
ALT
+
SHIFT while dragging a bounding box’s resizing handle.
Using the Width and Height fields (Item
& Modify & Line tab), you can enter numerical values to precisely resize a Bézier line’s bounding box.
• Measurements palette: Enter values in the W and H fields to precisely change the width and height of a Bézier line’s bounding box, then press
ENTER
.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.9
Line Basics
S Tips
Converting a line into a Bézier box
When you convert a line into a Bézier box by choosing Item
& Shape &
®, QuarkXPress traces the actual line width, along with any arrowhead, tailfeather, dash or multiple-line pattern, to produce the Bézier box.
However, there is another way to convert a line into a box — by simply joining the line’s endpoints. Press
ALT and then choose Item
& Shape &
®. If the endpoints are on top of each other, they will be joined into one point.
If they are not on top of each other, a new line segment will be added that connects the two endpoints.
Converting a straight line into a
Bézier line
To convert a straight line into a
Bézier line, use the Shape submenu
(Item
& Shape & †). The line will retain its original shape, but it will be converted into an editable
Bézier line.
Reshaping Lines
You can reshape any line using the shapes offered in the Shape submenu
(Item menu). You can reshape Bézier lines by repositioning points, curve handles, and line segments.
Bézier attributes are described in detail on the next page.
Reshaping lines using the Shape submenu
The Shape submenu (Item menu) contains three line shapes and six box shapes that you can apply to lines.
To change the shape of an active line, choose Item
& Shape to display the submenu. Choose a shape from the submenu and the line will reshape automatically.
Change the shape of an active line by choosing from options in the Shape submenu (Item menu).
8.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Reshaping Lines
Reshaping Bézier lines
QuarkXPress lets you reshape Bézier lines by manipulating points, curve handles, and line segments. The definitions on this page introduce key
Bézier concepts, and are followed by instructions on reshaping.
Definitions
Point: A point connects line segments and defines where line segments start and end. Points attached to curved segments have curve handles.
QuarkXPress offers three types of points: corner, smooth, and symmetrical.
Corner point: A corner point connects two straight lines, a straight line and a curved line, or two noncontinuous curved lines. With curved lines, the corner point’s curve handles can be manipulated independently, usually to form a sharp transition between the two segments.
Smooth point: A smooth point connects two curved lines to form a continuous curve. The curve handles always rest on a straight line through the point but can be distanced independently.
Symmetrical point: A symmetrical point connects two curved lines to form a continuous curve. The result is similar to a smooth point, but the curve handles always rest on a straight line through the point and are always equidistant from the point.
Curve handles: Curve handles extend from either side of a point and control a curve’s shape.
Line segments: Line segments are straight or curved line sections positioned between two points.
Corner points
Smooth point
Symmetrical point
Curve handles
Line segments
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.11
Line Basics
S Tips
Accessing a Bézier line
A bounding box may display immediately after drawing a Bézier line, depending on whether the Shape option is checked. Checking Shape
(Item
& Edit) gives you access to the points, curve handles, and line segments within the bounding box. If shape is unchecked, you can quickly access a Bézier line’s shape by pressing F10.
Connecting line segments
You can connect line segments by positioning two endpoints from two different line segments on top of each other. Choose Item
&
Merge
& Join Endpoints.
Reshaping Bézier lines with pointers
When Shape (Item
& Edit) is checked and the Arrow pointer x is positioned over an active Bézier line, various pointers display indicating whether you can select a point
˝, the curve handles Ï Ó, or a line segment
ˆ. Click and drag using the pointers to reshape a Bézier line.
The Point pointer
˝ lets you manipulate corner, smooth, and symmetrical points. To reposition a point, click and drag.
The Curve Handle pointers
Ï Ó let you manipulate both curve handles. Click a point when the
Point pointer
˝ appears. If the point has accessible curve handles, the curve handles will display. To manipulate the shape of a curve, click and drag a curve handle.
The Line Segment pointer
ˆ lets you manipulate both straight and curved line segments. To manipulate the shape and position of a line segment, click and drag.
Use the Point pointer
˝ to reshape an active line.
8.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Reshaping Lines
Reshaping Bézier lines with commands
You can also manipulate Bézier lines using the pointers together with options in the Item menu and the Measurements palette, by using keyboard commands and modifier keys, or by adding and deleting points.
• Reshaping Bézier lines with the Item menu:
Points: Select a point; choose Item
& Point/Segment Type to display the submenu; then check either Corner Point, Smooth Point, or Sym-
metrical Point, depending on how you want to manipulate the active point.
Line segments: Select a line segment; choose Item
& Point/Segment
Type to display the submenu; then check either Straight Segment or
Curved Segment to make the line segment straight or curved.
S Tips
Reshape a Bézier line while you are drawing it
You can reshape a Bézier line while you are drawing it by pressing
CTRL while repositioning the points, curve handles, or line segments. Then resume line creation.
Use the Point/Segment Type submenu (Item menu) to choose either a Corner, Smooth, or
Symmetrical Point.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.13
Line Basics
S Tips
Segment type and curve handles
The type of point or line segment automatically determines the type of curve handles available for manipulation. You cannot directly manipulate the curve handles through the
Item menu, but you can indirectly affect them depending on what type of point and line segment is currently chosen.
For example, if you initially created two corner points (and thus a straight line segment), you cannot access the curve handles. However, if you select the line segment and choose Curved Segment from the
Point/Segment Type submenu
(Item menu) or click the curved line segment ∑ in the Measurements palette, the act of converting the line segment will make the curve handles accessible.
Use the Point/Segment Type submenu (Item menu) to convert a straight line segment into a curved line segment (as shown), or vice versa.
• Reshaping Bézier lines with the Measurements palette:
Points: Select a point with the Point pointer
˝; then click either †, ¥, or ® to convert the point to a symmetrical, smooth, or corner point.
Enter values in the XP and YP fields to reposition an active point.
Curve handles: Select a point with the Point pointer
˝; if the point displays curve handles, enter values in the r fields to reposition the angle of either curve handle, or enter values in the „ and Œ fields to resize either curve handle (enter zero to retract the curve handle).
Line segments: Select a line segment with the Line Segment pointer
ˆ; then click either œ or ∑ to convert the line segment to straight or curved.
Use the Measurements palette to convert point type.
• Reshaping Bézier lines with keyboard commands:
Change in point/line segment Command
Corner point
Smooth point
Symmetrical point
Straight line segment
Curved line segment
CTRL
+F1
CTRL
+F2
CTRL
+F3
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+F1
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+F2
8.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Reshaping Lines
• Reshaping Bézier lines with modifier keys:
Change in point/curve handles Command
Add point
Delete point
Smooth to corner point (vice versa)
Snap point to 45° guides
Snap curve handles to 45° guides
Retract one curve handle
Retract curve handles
Expose curve handles
ALT +click on line segment
ALT +click on point
CTRL + SHIFT +drag on curve handle
SHIFT +drag on point
SHIFT +drag on curve handle
ALT +click on curve handle
CTRL + SHIFT +click on point
CTRL + SHIFT +drag on point
Adding and deleting points
To add a point, move the pointer over a line segment. When the Line
Segment pointer
ˆ displays,
ALT
+click to create a new point.
To delete a point, move the pointer over the point you want to delete.
When the Point pointer
˝ displays,
ALT
+click to delete it.
Use the Point Deletion pointer v to remove points and reshape lines.
S
Making sharp corners from curves quickly
Tips
To make a sharp corner from a curve, select a point on the curve and
ALT
+click one of the curve handles.
Retract a curve handle to create a transition in line segments.
Merging lines with other items
You can merge lines with other items by multiple-selecting the items and combining them using the Merge commands in the Item menu. See
“Merging and Splitting Boxes” in
Chapter 7, “Box Basics.”
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.15
Line Basics
S Tips
Moving lines to other documents
To move a line to another open
QuarkXPress document, either select the line with the Item tool e and drag it into another document, or copy and paste it.
Moving Lines
You can move lines within the same page, across page boundaries, or onto the pasteboard. You can also drag lines to other open QuarkXPress documents or libraries. The method for moving lines differs depending on whether you are moving a straight line or a Bézier line.
Moving straight lines created with the Line
L o Line tools
You can move active straight lines by dragging them with the Item tool e, or you can enter precise values in the Modify dialog box (Item
& Modify) or the Measurements palette. You can move active lines using:
• Tool palette: Select the Item tool e or the Content tool E and drag a line to a new location.
Move straight lines using the Item tool e.
8.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Moving Lines
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
). Choose a Mode from the drop-down list, then enter values in the X and Y fields (modes are described below). Depending on the Mode selected, the fields will vary.
Click OK.
• Measurements palette: Choose a Mode from the drop-down list, then enter values in the X and Y fields. Depending on the Mode selected, the fields will vary. Press
ENTER
.
Reposition active lines by entering values in the X and Y coordinate fields in the Measurements palette. The fields vary depending on the Mode selected.
• Keyboard commands:
Automatic moving features
Nudge lines in 1-point increments
Nudge lines in .1-point increments
Command arrow keys
ALT +arrow keys
Line modes for straight lines
Before moving straight lines by entering values into fields, it is important to understand how QuarkXPress describes line modes. There are four types of line modes: Endpoints, First Point, Midpoint, and Last Point.
Depending on the Mode you choose in either the Line tab (Item
&
Modify) or the Measurements palette, line length and position will be described differently.
S Tips
Anchoring lines in text
You can anchor lines in text, just as you can anchor boxes. See “Anchoring Boxes and Lines in Text” in Chapter 13, “Graphics in Typography.”
Rules above and below text
To make a straight line that flows above or below specified text, see
“Specifying Anchored Rules” in Chapter 13, “Graphics in Typography.”
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.17
Line Basics
S Tips
Angle coordinates and line length
When a straight line is in First
Point, Midpoint, or Last Point mode, you know the precise coordinates of that point, plus the angle and length of the line.
First point and last point
“First point” refers to the endpoint you originally drew from; “last point” refers to the endpoint created when you lifted your mouse to complete the line.
• Endpoints: The X1 field indicates the horizontal position of the first endpoint; the Y1 field indicates the vertical position of the first endpoint. The X2 field indicates the horizontal position of the last endpoint; the Y2 field indicates the vertical position of the last endpoint.
• First Point: The X1 field indicates the horizontal position of the first endpoint; the Y1 field indicates the vertical position of the first endpoint.
• Midpoint: The XC field indicates the horizontal position of the midpoint of the line; the YC field indicates the vertical position of the midpoint of the line.
• Last Point: The X2 field indicates the horizontal position of the last endpoint; the Y2 field indicates the vertical position of the last endpoint.
8.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Moving Lines
Moving Bézier lines
It is generally advisable to move a Bézier line when it is displaying its bounding box (so you don’t accidentally reshape the line). Choose
Item
& Edit; then uncheck Shape to display the bounding box. You can move an active Bézier line using:
• Tool palette: With the Item tool e selected, drag the line to a new location.
Use the Item tool e to move curved lines in bounding boxes.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.19
Line Basics
S Tips
Bézier line origin
Origin Across is the position of the upper left corner of the bounding box relative to the zero point on the horizontal ruler. Origin Down is the position of the upper left corner of the bounding box relative to the zero point on the vertical ruler.
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
). To reposition a line horizontally, enter a value in the Origin Across field. To reposition a line vertically, enter a value in the Origin Down field. Click OK.
Enter values in the Origin Across and Origin Down fields (Item
& Modify & Line tab) to move a line.
• Measurements palette: To reposition a line horizontally, enter a value in the X field. To reposition a line vertically, enter a value in the Y field; then press
ENTER
.
Move lines by entering values in the X and Y coordinate fields in the Measurements palette.
Automatic moving features
Nudge lines in 1-point increments
Nudge lines in .1-point increments
Commands arrows
ALT
+arrows
8.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Line Styles
Applying Line Styles
You can apply styles to lines by choosing from a variety of line styles, arrowheads, widths, colors, and shades. These options are available in the Style menu, the Modify dialog box (Item menu), and the Measurements palette.
Choosing a line style
QuarkXPress offers eleven preset line style options. You can apply line styles to active lines using:
• Style menu: Choose Style
& Line Style to display the Line Style submenu. Choose an option from the submenu.
Choose an option from the Style
& Line Style submenu to apply a style to a selected line.
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
). Choose an option from the Style drop-down list, and click OK.
• Measurements palette: Click the style drop-down list and choose a line style from the list.
Choosing an arrowhead
QuarkXPress lets you choose from a selection of six line end styles including arrowheads, tail feathers, or lines with neither. You can apply an arrowhead to an active line using:
S Tips
Creating custom lines
Using the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit menu), you can create an assortment of custom line styles. The line styles you create can be applied to existing lines via the Line Style submenu (Style menu), the Line tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu), or the style drop-down list in the
Measurements palette.
See “Framing
Boxes” in Chapter 7, “Box Basics.”
Editing lines
You can edit any existing or custom dash or stripe style — except the
Solid style — in the Dashes &
Stripes dialog box (Edit menu).
Select the style by choosing it from the list and then clicking Edit. The
Edit dialog box is the same dialog box that you use when you create a custom dash or stripe.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.21
Line Basics
S Tips
Specifying line tool preferences
You can preset the preferences for lines you draw by either double-clicking a line tool in the Tool palette or using the controls in the Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document
& Tool tab). You can preset Style, Arrowheads, Width,
Color, Shade, and Runaround status of lines you create; you can also opt to
Suppress Printout of lines.
• Style menu: Choose Style
& Arrowheads to display the Arrowheads submenu. Choose an option from the submenu.
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
). Choose an option from the Arrowheads drop-down list, and click OK.
• Measurements palette: Click the arrowheads drop-down list and choose an arrowhead style from the list..
Select an option from the arrowheads drop-down list in the Measurements palette, and its attributes will automatically affect the active line.
8.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Line Styles
Choosing a width
You can specify the thickness of an active line using:
• Style menu: Choose Style
& Width to display the Width submenu.
Choose a width from the submenu, or choose Other to display the
Line Width field in the Modify dialog box. Enter a value in the Line
Width field, and click OK.
S Tips
Printing hairlines
The printed width of a hairline rule is
.125 point to a 300 dpi PostScript printer.
Choose Style
& Width to display the Width submenu.
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
). Choose an option from the Line Width drop-down list, or enter a value in the field. Click OK.
• Measurements palette: Either click the W arrow < to choose a width from the drop-down list, or enter a value in the W field; then press
ENTER
.
Choose a width from the W drop-down list in the Measurements palette, and it will automatically affect the active line.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.23
Line Basics
S Tips
Increasing/decreasing line width
When you increase or decrease the width of an active line using the preset keyboard equivalent commands
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+> and
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+<, the width changes to the next larger or smaller increment in the following range: 0 (hairline), 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and
12 points.
• Keyboard commands:
Change in width
Increase 1 point
Decrease 1 point
Increase preset increments
Decrease preset increments
Command
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +>
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +<
CTRL + SHIFT +>
CTRL + SHIFT +<
R Line widths displayed in the Width submenu are measured in points.
Choosing a color, shade, and a gap color and shade
QuarkXPress lists all the colors defined for a document — default colors, colors created in the Colors dialog box (Edit menu), and spot colors imported with EPS picture files. You can apply a color and shade to an active line using:
• Style menu: Choose Style
& Color to display the Color submenu.
Choose a color from the submenu.
Choose Style
& Shade to display the Shade submenu. Choose a percentage from the submenu, or choose Other to display the Shade field in the
Modify dialog box. Enter a value in the Shade field, and click OK.
Choose Style
& Shade to display the Shade submenu.
8.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Line Styles
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
). Choose a color from the
Color drop-down list, choose a shade from the Shade drop-down list, or enter a value in the Shade field. If you have chosen a line style with multiple dashes or stripes, you can choose a Gap color from the Color drop-down list; choose a Gap shade from the Shade drop-down list, or enter a value in the Shade field. Click OK.
Choose a color for a dash or stripe line style to make the Gap area available. Choose a color and shade in the Gap area to fill in a line’s gaps (Item
& Modify & Line tab).
• Colors palette: Choose View
& Show Colors (F12) to display the
Colors palette, then click one of the colors listed. Click the arrow < next to the current shade value to display a list of percent values; choose a percentage from the list. You can also highlight the current shade value in the field, enter a new value, and press ENTER .
Choose View
& Show Colors to display the Colors palette.
R You can add colors to the color list via the Colors command
(Edit menu).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 8.25
9
Manipulating Items
Selecting Items 9.3
Moving, Reshaping, and Resizing Items 9.4
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Items 9.5
Deleting Items 9.7
Undoing and Redoing 9.8
Locking and Unlocking Items 9.9
Controlling the Stacking Order of Items 9.10
Grouping Items 9.12
Duplicating and Repeating Items 9.14
Spacing and Aligning Items 9.17
Rotating and Skewing Items 9.20
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
9
Manipulating Items
Items are the graphic building blocks of page layout. Items include boxes, lines, text paths, and any combination of grouped or multiple-selected items.
This chapter covers the fundamentals of item manipulation. All items can be acted upon similarly: They can be cut and then pasted in new locations, locked so they cannot move, duplicated once or many times, stacked to create unusual visual effects, etc.
For details on how to manipulate specific aspects of boxes, lines, or text paths, please refer to their individual chapters.
Selecting Items
Selecting Items
There are three kinds of items in QuarkXPress: boxes, lines, and text paths.
Items can be combined into groups, and they can be multiple-selected. To manipulate items in QuarkXPress, they must be selected. Once selected, active items display solid outlines and handles for reshaping.
Selecting items
Select either the Item tool e or the Content tool E and move the
Arrow pointer x over an item. Click once to select a single item, SHIFT click individual items to select more than one item at a time, or marquee an area to encompass any items you want selected.
Deselecting items
To deselect an active item, click outside it. When the Item tool e is selected, you can press the
TAB key to deselect any active items.
S Tips
Selecting items with the Item tool e versus the Content tool
E
In general, select items with the Item tool e to manipulate item edges, and select items with the Content tool
E to manipulate item contents. You can
SHIFT
-click or marquee an area to select multiple items using the Content tool
E or the Item tool e. For the most part, you will want to have the Item tool e selected when you are manipulating items.
Using Select All
When the Item tool e is selected and you choose Edit
& Select All
(
CTRL
+
A
), all the items on the current page or spread (and the pasteboard area next to the current page or spread) are selected.
Use the Item tool e or the Content tool E to select an individual item, such as a box (left), or to marquee-select multiple items (right). Active items display solid outlines and handles for reshaping.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 9.3
Manipulating Items
S Tips
Moving, reshaping, and resizing items
For more detailed information on moving, reshaping, and resizing boxes, see Chapter 7, “Box Basics.”
For more detailed information on moving, reshaping and resizing lines and text paths, see Chapter 8, “Line
Basics.”
Bézier items
For more information on Bézier items, see the creating and reshaping sections in Chapter 7, “Box Basics,” and
Chapter 8, “Line Basics.”
Moving, Reshaping, and Resizing Items
You can move, reshape, and resize items using the fields in the Modify dialog box (Item
& Modify), the fields in the Measurements palette, and manually using the Item tool e.
Moving items
You can move items by entering values in the Origin Across and Origin
Down fields in the Modify dialog box (Item menu), by entering values in the X and Y fields in the Measurements palette, and by manually moving items using the Item tool e. If you are manually moving a
Bézier item, you may want to first uncheck Shape (Item
& Edit) to display its bounding box. Moving a Bézier item using its bounding box avoids accidental reshaping.
Reshaping items
You can reshape items by choosing options from the Shape submenu
(Item menu), and in the case of Bézier items, by manipulating points, curve handles, and straight and curved line segments. To reshape Bézier items, make sure Shape is checked (Item
& Edit).
Resizing items
You can resize items by entering values in the Width and Height fields in the Modify dialog box (Item menu), by entering values in the W and
H fields in the Measurements palette, and by manually resizing width and height using the Item tool e. If you are manually resizing a Bézier item, you may want to first display its bounding box by unchecking
Shape (Item
& Edit). Resizing a Bézier item using its bounding box avoids accidental reshaping.
9.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Items
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Items
When the Item tool e is selected, the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands
(Edit menu) are available for active boxes, lines, and text paths.
Cutting items
Choose Edit
& Cut (
CTRL + X ) to remove active items from the document.
When items are cut with the Item tool e selected, both the item and its contents are temporarily saved to the Clipboard.
Copying items
Choose Edit
& Copy (
CTRL
+
C
) to save a copy of active items to the Clipboard. When items are copied, both the item and its contents are temporarily saved to the Clipboard.
S Tips
Showing the Clipboard
Choose Edit
& Show Clipboard to view the clipboard and its contents.
The Clipboard window displays text, pictures, and items that you Cut or
Copy. The Paste command places the current contents of the Clipboard in the document.
Anchoring boxes within text
To anchor a box within text, use the
Item tool e to select the box you want to anchor and choose Edit
&
Copy (
CTRL
+
C
) or Edit
&
Cut
(
CTRL
+
X
). Then, with the Content tool
E selected, position the Text Insertion bar i within the text where you want to anchor the box and choose
Edit
&
Paste (
CTRL
+
V
). This causes the box to act like a character and flow with the text.
Use the Edit menu to Cut, Copy, and Paste items.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 9.5
Manipulating Items
R If you Cut or Copy a text box that is part of a linked chain, the linked text will be included on the Clipboard along with the text box.
Pasting items
Choose Edit
& Paste (
CTRL
+
V
) to place a copy of the items contained on the Clipboard in the center of the document window.
Check Auto Constrain in the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document
& General tab), to paste items in the center of an active box.
R If Auto Constrain is checked (Edit
& Preferences & Document &
General tab) and a box is active, Paste places pasted items in the center of the active box. For example, if a text box is active and you paste a picture box, the picture box will be pasted within the text box and confined to the text area. This causes text to flow around the picture box according to the runaround specifications (Item
&
Runaround). A warning is displayed if you attempt to paste items into a box that is too small.
9.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Deleting Items
Deleting Items
You can remove items from your document completely by using the
Delete command. With the Item tool e selected, you can remove active items using:
• Edit menu: Choose Edit
& Delete to remove active items (along with their contents) from the document.
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Delete (
CTRL
+
K
) to remove active items
(along with their contents) from the document.
• Keyboard command: Press
DELETE to remove active items (along with their contents) from the document.
R Deleted items are not copied to the Clipboard. When the Content tool
E is selected, the
DELETE key or the Delete command in the
Edit menu removes the content of an active picture box or the highlighted text of an active text box or text path.
S Tips
Deleting a text box in a text chain
If you delete a text box that is part of a linked text chain, text in the box is not deleted. The text either reflows into subsequent boxes or generates an overflow symbol at the end of the chain, depending upon the status of
Auto Page Insertion (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document &
General tab).
Deleting points on a Bézier item
When the Item tool e is selected, and points on a Bézier item are active, you can use the
DELETE key to delete just those points rather than the whole item.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 9.7
Manipulating Items
S Tips
Resetting values in dialog boxes
You can use the keyboard command for Undo (
CTRL
+
Z
) to reset the value in the active field of a dialog box to the value originally displayed when you opened it. In most dialog boxes, pressing
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
Z will reset all the fields to the value originally displayed.
Undoing and Redoing
Undo (Edit menu) reverses the last action performed on an item. For example, if you accidentally cut a picture box, the Undo command will bring the picture box back into the document from the Clipboard. Redo (Edit menu) lets you reimplement something you had undone. You can Undo or Redo an action with either the Item tool e or the Content tool E selected.
Undoing actions
Choose Edit
& Undo (
CTRL + Z ) to reverse the last action performed. The menu entry identifies the specific action that can be undone. For example, Undo Item Deletion is available after you have used the Cut command. Can’t Undo displays in gray when Undo is unavailable.
Redoing actions
Choose Edit
& Redo (
CTRL
+
Z
) after you Undo an action, to reimplement the action.
Use the Edit menu to Undo or Redo a previously performed action.
9.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Locking and Unlocking Items
Locking and Unlocking Items
You can lock boxes, lines, and text paths so that they cannot move from their position on the page or pasteboard. And just as easily, you can unlock them.
This feature is helpful when you do not want an item to be moved or resized.
Locking items
Choose Item
& Lock to lock active items so they cannot be moved or resized with the Item tool e. You can still reposition and resize locked items by entering new values in the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the Measurements palette.
Unlocking items
Choose Item
& Unlock if you no longer want active items to be locked.
R The Padlock pointer y displays when the Item tool e is positioned over an active, locked item.
S Tips
Modifying locked box contents, text path contents, and lines
You can move and scale pictures within a locked picture box by entering values in the Modify dialog box
(Item menu) or the Measurements palette. You can edit text inside a locked text box or on a locked text path using the Content tool
E
. You can also modify the style, size, and endcaps of a locked line or text path using the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the Measurements palette.
Lock active items by choosing Item
& Lock. When a locked item is selected with the Item tool e, the Padlock pointer y displays (right), indicating that the item cannot be manually repositioned or resized. Locked items can only be manipulated by entering values in the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or in the Measurements palette.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 9.9
Manipulating Items
S Tips
Activating hidden items
To activate an item that is hidden behind other items, press
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT with the Item tool e or
Content tool
E selected and click repeatedly at the point where multiple items overlap. Pressing
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT while clicking will successively activate items from the front of the stacking order to the back.
Controlling the Stacking Order of Items
When two or more items overlap, each is either positioned in front of or behind the other item. The term “stacking order” refers to the front-toback relationship among the various items on a page. Stacking order can affect text flow and determine the way in which items are displayed and printed relative to each other. Each item you create occupies its own level in the stacking order. Every new item you create becomes the front item.
In some instances, you may want to change the position of an item in the stacking order to create special design effects. You can use the Send Back-
ward, Send to Back, Bring Forward, and Bring to Front commands
(Item menu) to create drop shadows, masks, custom text flow, irregular shapes, and geometric patterns.
Use stacking order to create visual illusions. The two white square boxes placed in front of the black circle create a cut-out appearance when guides are turned off (View
& Hide Guides). You can also use the Difference command (Item
& Merge) to create the same effect (and a single box) by deleting the top items (the white squares), and cutting their shape out of the black circle.
9.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Controlling the Stacking Order of Items
Stacking items
The Item menu includes four commands that let you control item stacking order.
• Choose Item
& Send Backward to move an item one level backward in the stacking order.
• Choose Item
& Send to Back to move an item to the back of the stacking order.
• Choose Item
& Bring Forward to move an item one level forward in the stacking order.
• Choose Item
& Bring to Front to move an item to the front of the stacking order.
S Tips
Text runaround
An item that is in front of a text box will cause the text to run around it, unless its Runaround is set to
None (Item menu). See “Running
Text Around Items” in Chapter 13,
“Graphics in Typography.”
Groups
When you move a group using any of the stacking order commands, each item in the group keeps its front-toback relationship with every other item in the group.
Sending the front, white box one level back by using the Item
& Send Backward command
(left), results in a unique geometric pattern (right).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 9.11
Manipulating Items
S Tips
Grouping groups
You can group groups, and multipleselect a group (or groups) along with individual boxes, lines, and text paths to create a larger group.
Moving items within a group
To move an item within a group, press
CTRL and select the item with the Item tool e or Content tool E.
Grouping Items
QuarkXPress lets you combine multiple items on a page or spread into a single group. Grouping items is useful when you want to select or move a group of items simultaneously. You can move, cut, copy, duplicate, and perform a number of other functions to a group. For example, you can group all the items that make up a publication masthead; once grouped, you can modify or move the entire group as you would a single box, line, or text path. After you create a group, you can still edit, resize, and reposition individual items while maintaining the group relationship. You can also place a copy of a group into an open QuarkXPress library for use in other documents.
Grouping items
Grouping of items is available when two or more items (lines, boxes, text paths, or other groups) are active. With the Item tool e or Content tool E selected, either SHIFT -click or marquee to select multiple items. Choose Item
& Group (
CTRL + G ) to place multiple-selected items into a single group.
Group items using the Group command (Item menu). A dashed border displays around a group.
9.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Grouping Items
Ungrouping items
Choose Item
& Ungroup (
CTRL
+
U
) to break the group relationship and let individual items be active and independent.
Constraining grouped items
Constraining grouped items is available when an active group includes a box that completely contains and is behind all other group items. With the Item tool e selected, choose Item & Constrain to prevent items in the group from being resized or moved beyond the edges of the constraining box.
Constrain grouped items by grouping a series of items, including a large box in the back, and then choosing Item
& Constrain. The smaller items cannot be resized or moved beyond the constraining box boundaries.
Unconstraining grouped items
Choose Item
& Unconstrain to remove the constraining relationship from the group and let individual items become free from the constraining box. Unconstraining a group does not ungroup it.
R If you prefer to work with constrained groups, check Auto Con-
strain (Edit
& Preferences & Document & General tab). Auto
Constrain automatically makes all the boxes you draw constraining boxes, and all items within them constrained items. If you check Auto Constrain when no documents are open, it will become the default setting for all subsequently created documents.
S Tips
Modifying groups
With the Item tool e selected, you can move, cut, copy, paste, duplicate, rotate, and color a group.
Modifying items within a group
With the Content tool
E selected, you can manipulate individual items as you would any ungrouped item.
Modify dialog box
If an active group contains the same kind of items (for example, all picture boxes), the Modify dialog box will include a tab (or tabs) that refers specifically to those items. If an active group contains a variety items, the Modify dialog box displays only a Group tab.
Using Constrain
When manipulating items within a constrained group, you can work very quickly (with little attention to precision), because items will always align to the edges of the constraining box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 9.13
Manipulating Items
S Tips
Linked text boxes
You can duplicate and repeat linked text boxes.
Stacking order
Copies of the items created via the
Duplicate command are placed in front of the original. When you use
Step and Repeat, each successive copy is placed in front of the preceding copy.
Constrained items
When you duplicate and repeat items within a constraining box, the horizontal and/or vertical offset values may specify placement of a copy outside of the constraining box. QuarkXPress will display a warning informing you that the duplicate cannot be made using the offsets specified.
Duplicating and Repeating Items
QuarkXPress lets you make single or multiple copies of boxes, lines, and text paths. Create a single copy of a selected item using the Duplicate command (Item menu). Create multiple copies of an item and specify the distance between them using the Step and Repeat command (Item menu). Step and Repeat is useful for laying out charts and other design elements that contain a number of evenly spaced copies of an item. The
Step and Repeat dialog box contains a Horizontal Offset field and a Ver-
tical Offset field. The values you enter in these fields are default values displayed in the dialog box the next time you choose Step and Repeat, and are also applied when you choose the Duplicate command.
Duplicating items
With the Item tool e or Content tool E selected, choose Item &
Duplicate ( CTRL + D ) to create a copy of the item (and any contents).
Duplicates will be positioned according to the current Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset values in the Step and Repeat dialog box (Item menu).
R The preset default offset value for the Duplicate command is .25" for both Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset. You can change the default Duplicate offsets by specifying new values in the Hori-
zontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields in the Step and Repeat dialog box (Item menu).
9.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Duplicating and Repeating Items
Choose Item
& Duplicate to place an exact copy of an active item (and any contents) on the current spread. The copy is offset from the original according to the values in the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields in the Step and Repeat dialog box (Item menu).
Duplicating items multiple times
Use Step and Repeat to duplicate an active item multiple times, and in any position you specify. Select the item you want to duplicate with the
Item tool e or Content tool E and:
1 Choose Item
& Step and Repeat (
CTRL + ALT + D ).
2 Enter a value in the Repeat Count field to specify the number of copies you want.
S Tips
Step and Repeat offsets
Step and Repeat offsets are measured from the origin of the preceding box. For example, if you step and repeat copies of a text box, the position of the first copy is measured from the origin of the original text box (that is, the upper left corner of a nonrotated text box); the position of the second copy is measured from the origin of the preceding copy; the position of the third copy is measured from the origin of the second copy, etc.
Use the Step and Repeat dialog box (Item
& Step and Repeat) to specify a number of copies. After duplicating an item multiple times, the last duplicate becomes the active item.
3 Enter a value in the Horizontal Offset field to specify the duplicate’s distance to the left or right of the active item. A negative value places copies to the left of the original; a positive value places copies to the right of it.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 9.15
Manipulating Items
S Tips
Bounding box
When duplicating irregularly shaped items, QuarkXPress uses the bounding box guides to determine where to position the copies.
4 Enter a value in the Vertical Offset field to specify the duplicate’s distance above or below the active item. A negative value places copies above the original; a positive value places copies below it. Click OK.
Use the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields (Item
& Step and Repeat) to determine the position of each copy relative to the preceding copy.
R You cannot enter values in the Step and Repeat dialog box that would place an item outside the current page’s pasteboard. You must either reduce the number of duplicates in the Repeat Count field, or modify the Horizontal Offset or Vertical Offset values.
9.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Spacing and Aligning Items
Spacing and Aligning Items
You can control the position of multiple-selected items relative to one another using the Space/Align Items dialog box (Item
& Space/Align).
Items can be aligned, spaced apart, and evenly distributed in a horizontal direction, vertical direction, or a combination of both. To space and align items, select two or more items with the Item tool e or Content tool E and:
1 Choose Item
& Space/Align (
CTRL
+,).
2 Check Horizontal and/or Vertical to specify spacing attributes. Enter values in the Space fields to specify the amount of horizontal and/or vertical space you want between active items. Values can be entered as precise distances, or as percentages.
S Tips
How QuarkXPress spaces items
QuarkXPress spaces items relative to the upper active item, which does not move. The upper item is determined by the location of the item’s top edges.
If two or more items have the same top edges, then QuarkXPress spaces active items from the left item.
Bounding box
When spacing and aligning irregularly shaped items, QuarkXPress uses the bounding box guides to determine where to position the items.
Use the Space/Align Items dialog box (Item
& Space/Align) to provide options for spacing multiple items horizontally and vertically.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 9.17
Manipulating Items
S Tips
Spacing and aligning overlapping items
When items overlap and Items is selected from the Between dropdown list (Item
& Space/Align), you can enter a percentage value in the Space field to move the items in a negative direction. For example, if you have two items overlapping one another by an inch, and then specify
50% in the Space field, the items will move – 1 ⁄
2 inch.
3 Check Horizontal and click Distribute Evenly to distribute the hori-
zontal space evenly between the left item and the right item. Check
Vertical and click Distribute Evenly to distribute the vertical space evenly between the top item and the bottom item.
R The Distribute Evenly buttons are available only when three or more items are active.
Check Horizontal and click Distribute Evenly to distribute the horizontal space evenly between the left item and the right item (Item
& Space/Align).
4 Choose an option from the Between drop-down list to specify the way items are spaced and aligned in relation to each other.
• Horizontal: Choose Items to distribute space between items, choose
Left Edges to space and align items by their left edges, choose
Centers to space and align items by their horizontal centers, or choose Right Edges to space and align items by their right edges.
• Vertical: Choose Items to distribute space between items, choose
Top Edges to space and align items by their top edges, choose
Centers to space and align items by their vertical centers, or choose
Bottom Edges to space and align items by their bottom edges.
9.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Spacing and Aligning Items
Choose Centers from the Between drop-down list to space and align items by their centers
(Item
& Space/Align). Enter a value of zero in both the Horizontal and Vertical Space fields to give an effect like the one shown above (right).
5 Click Apply to preview your changes; then click OK.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 9.19
Manipulating Items
S Tips
Viewing box and text path contents as you rotate
To view the contents of a box or text path as you rotate, select the Rotation tool
R, click the box or text path, then pause momentarily before you drag. If you drag immediately, you will only see the box or text path outline.
Multiple-selected items
Multiple-selected items behave like a group when you rotate them.
Rotating and Skewing Items
Rotating an item sets it at a different angle, while skewing an item applies a slanted look to it. You can rotate all items by using either the Rotation tool
R or by entering precise values in either the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the Measurements palette. You can skew items in bounding boxes (which includes all boxes and any Bézier items).
Rotating items
When you use the Rotation tool
R, you can manually establish a point of rotation. When you rotate an item by entering a value in either the
Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the Measurements palette, the item’s center point is the anchored rotation point. You can rotate an active item using:
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL + M ). Enter a value in the
Angle field, and click OK.
• Measurements palette: Enter a value in the r field, and press
ENTER .
• Tool palette: Select the Rotation tool
R and move the Rotation pointer
9 over the item. Click to establish a rotation point; then drag in a circular motion to rotate the item. The Arrowhead pointer
; and the item’s position will display as you drag.
Manually rotate items using the Rotation tool
R. The Rotation pointer 9 specifies the point around which the item rotates.
9.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Rotating and Skewing Items
R Notes on rotation
To rotate a straight line, choose either First Point, Midpoint, or Last
Point from the Mode drop-down list (Modify dialog box or Measure-
ments palette) to display the Angle field. To rotate a Bézier line, display its bounding box by unchecking Shape (Item
& Edit). See Chapter 8,
“Line Basics,” for more information on line modes.
You cannot rotate a box which results in part of the box lying outside the pasteboard area.
Skewing items
To skew or slant active items within bounding boxes, choose Item
&
Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Box tab. Enter a value in the Skew field.
Positive values slant items to the right; negative values slant them to the left. Click OK.
Enter a value in the Skew field of the Modify dialog box (Item
& Modify & Box tab) to skew active items within bounding boxes.
R You cannot skew straight lines, multiple-selected items, or groups.
You can only skew items in bounding boxes (which includes all boxes and any Bézier items).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 9.21
10
Document Layout
Creating Master Pages 10.3
Formatting and Applying Master Pages 10.9
Creating Multipage Spreads 10.12
Numbering Pages and Sectioning Documents 10.15
Inserting, Deleting, and Moving Pages 10.17
Working with Text Chains 10.21
Creating “Continued” References 10.26
Working with Columns 10.28
Changing Page Size and Facing-Pages Status 10.30
Copying Items and Pages Between Documents 10.32
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
10
Document Layout
Understanding document layout is crucial to producing documents efficiently. Start by understanding key components of document layout, including master page construction and modification, templates, spreads, page numbering, columns, and other automated features that help you create an effective layout.
With the document layout controls in QuarkXPress, it is easy to ensure that your document has a professional and desirable look every time.
Creating Master Pages
Creating Master Pages
With QuarkXPress, you can create and apply master pages for documents and templates. A master page is a nonprinting page used to format document pages automatically. When you insert a document page, it contains all the items on the master page upon which it is based. Master pages typically contain items such as headers, footers, page numbers, and other design elements that are common to a number of document pages. You can modify and delete master page items on document pages.
S Tips
Saving master pages with a template
If you are creating master pages that will be used in more than one publication, save the document containing the master pages as a template. Templates may also include the colors, style sheets, H&Js, etc., that will be used with the publication.
Creating the default master page
When you create a new document, QuarkXPress automatically creates a master page for it. The original format of the master page and document is determined by the settings you enter in the New Document dialog box (File
& New & Document). To create the default master page and a new document:
1 Choose File
& New & Document (
CTRL + N ).
Specify the format of the default master page and the first page of the document in the New
Document dialog box (File
& New & Document).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.3
Document Layout
2 To specify the page size for the document and all its master pages, click a page size, or enter values in the Width and Height fields.
3 To specify either portrait or landscape orientation, click the appropriate button. Portrait orientation is the default.
4 To specify nonprinting guides for positioning items, enter values in the Margin Guides fields.
5 To divide a document along a spine, check Facing Pages. When Fac-
ing Pages is checked, the Left and Right fields for Margin Guides change to Inside and Outside.
6 To create dividers for columns within the Margin Guides boundaries, enter values in the Columns and Gutter Width (space between columns) fields.
7 To create an automatic text chain (which is positioned and divided according to the values in the Margin Guides and Column Guides areas), check Automatic Text Box so that text flows automatically from page to page.
8 Click OK.
The Document Layout palette (View
& Show Document Layout) displays a nonfacing page layout vertically (left), and a vertical spine between pages in a facing-page document (right). To create a facing-page document, check Facing Pages in the New Document dialog box.
10.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Master Pages
Creating new master pages
The Document Layout palette (View
& Show Document Layout) lets you create a virtually unlimited number of master pages. The icons along the top of the palette let you create, duplicate, and delete master and document pages in the lower two sections. To create a new master page:
1 Click either the blank single-page
0 or blank facing-page ! icon along the top row of the Document Layout palette.
The blank facing-page icon
! is available only if you checked Facing
Pages in the New Document dialog box (File
& New & Document).
2 Drag the pointer into the master page area (the center section of the palette) until it changes to the
+ pointer and release.
Drag blank page icons from the top row of the Document Layout palette (View
& Show
Document Layout) into the master page area in the center to create new master pages.
3 To create a copy of an existing master page, select the master page you want to copy and click the duplicate button .
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.5
Document Layout
S Tips
Naming master pages
A master page name in the Docu-
ment Layout palette can display up to three characters before the hyphen.
If you name a master page without a hyphen, QuarkXPress automatically inserts one for you. The full name can contain up to 64 characters.
Naming master pages
When you create a new master page, QuarkXPress automatically gives it a name (for example, A-Master A or B-Master B). To change the name of a master page, click its name in the Document Layout palette and enter a new name.
A master page name is divided into two parts, separated by a hyphen.
The first part is restricted to the three characters that also appear within the document page icons in the Document Layout palette. The second part lets you give a master page an identifiable name. For example, you might name one “A-Cover Page.”
Deleting a master page
To delete a master page, click its icon in the Document Layout palette; then click the delete button . If the master page is in use, a warning will display. You cannot undo a master page deletion unless you revert to the most recently saved version of the document.
When you delete a master page, QuarkXPress automatically deletes unmodified master items on document pages that were based on the deleted master page. If the master page contains an automatic text box, and you have not modified the text box on the document pages, you will lose all your text.
Master page items that are modified (resized, moved, etc.) are retained or deleted according to the setting in the Master Page Items drop-down list in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Pref- erences
& Document). When you choose Keep Changes, modified master page items on document pages are not deleted. When you choose Delete
Changes, both modified and unmodified master page items are deleted.
10.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Master Pages
Displaying master pages
You can view a master page from the Document Layout palette, the
Page menu, the go-to-page pop-up menu on the document window, or by using keyboard commands.
• Document Layout palette: Choose View
& Show Document Layout
(F4). Double click the icon of the master page you want to view. When you double-click a master page icon, that page is displayed. To return to a document page, double-click its icon in the Document Layout palette.
If a master page icon is not visible in the Document Layout palette, scroll through the master page area or drag the palette divider that separates the master page and document page areas.
S Tips
Viewing facing-page master pages
If you have facing pages selected, and the document view is Fit in
Window, you might only see the left or right side of the master pages.
Press the
CTRL key while you choose
View
& Fit in Window to view the whole spread.
You should also be aware that a facing-page master page really consists of two pages; a left page and a right page.
Click on the bar separating the Master and Document pages, and drag the palette divider down to create more room in the master page area of the Document Layout palette
(View
& Show Document Layout).
• Page menu: Choose Page
& Display. From the Display submenu, choose the master page you want to view. To return to the document page, choose Page
& Display & Document.
• Extended keyboard: Press SHIFT +F4 to switch viewing between the document and master pages. When viewing master pages, press CTRL + SHIFT +
F4 to display the next master page.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.7
Document Layout
• Go-to-page pop-up menu: Click the page arrow in the lower left corner of the document window to display the go-to-page pop-up menu. Click to choose master pages (on the left) and document pages (on the right).
Click the page arrow in the lower left corner of the document window to display page icons for a document; choose a master page to view from the pop-up menu.
Arranging master pages
You can rearrange master pages to place more commonly used master pages at the top of the Document Layout palette. To rearrange the order in which master page icons are displayed:
1 Click the master page icon and drag it up or down within the master page area of the Document Layout palette.
2 Release the mouse button when the down pointer
+ is displayed in the position you want the master page.
Drag master pages up and down to rearrange them in the Document Layout palette
(View
& Show Document Layout).
10.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Formatting and Applying Master Pages
Formatting and Applying Master Pages
You design master pages the same way you design document pages. Once all the contents of a master page are established, you can add pages to a document based on those master pages. You can also change the format of a document page by changing the master page that is applied to it.
Formatting a master page
A master item is any item included on a master page. Adding master items to a master page is performed the same way as adding items to a document page. To add master items to a master page:
1 Display a master page (Page
& Display).
2 Create master items (or retrieve the items from a library) that you want to appear on document pages. Text can be added to any box, except the automatic text box on a master page.
3 Return to a document page. The master item formatting will be applied to all the document pages based on that master page.
Inserting new document pages based on existing master pages
To insert a new document page based on an existing master page using the Document Layout palette:
1 Click and drag a master page icon from the master page area into the document page area.
2 Release the mouse button when the appropriate page icon pointer
(
4, 1, or 2) is displayed in the position for the new page.
S Tips
Commonly included master items
Master items that are commonly included in master pages are headers, footers, sidebars, page numbers, and EPS pictures (corporate logos, artwork, etc.) that appear throughout the document.
Locking items
Lock master items (Item
& Lock) to prevent them from being moved on document pages.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.9
Document Layout
S Tips
Changing from facing to nonfacing pages (and vice versa)
You can use the Document Setup dialog box (File menu) to change a nonfacing page document to a facing page document (and vice versa).
To change from a nonfacing-page document to a facing-page document, choose File
& Document
Setup and check Facing Pages.
Then use the
3 icon in the Docu-
ment Layout palette to create facing-page master pages.
To change from a facing-page to a single-page document, first change any facing-page master pages to single-page master pages by dragging the
4 icon on top of them (all formatting on associated document pages will be lost). Then choose
File
& Document Setup and uncheck Facing Pages.
Applying a different master page to a document page
To apply a different master page to an existing document page, drag a master page icon on top of a document page icon until the icon becomes shaded. If you highlight multiple document page icons, press the
ALT key while clicking a master page icon.
• To select one page, click it.
• To select a range of continuous pages, click to highlight the first page, then press the
SHIFT key while clicking the last page in the range.
• To select a range of noncontinuous pages, press the
CTRL key while clicking each page.
Keeping or deleting changes to master items on document pages
When you apply a new or modified master page to a document page, you can control how the document pages are updated using the Master
Page Items drop-down list in the General tab of the Document Prefer-
ences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
• To keep master item changes: Choose Keep Changes from the
Master Page Items drop-down list. When you choose this, master page items modified on document pages are not deleted. However, the new master page items, including text and picture boxes, may overlay the modified items on the document page. For example, if you modified the size of a corporate logo on a document page, and reapplied the master page that page was based on, you would end up with two logos on that page.
• To delete changes: Choose Delete Changes from the Master Page
Items drop-down list. When you choose this, both modified and unmodified master page items are deleted and replaced by the new master page items.
10.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Formatting and Applying Master Pages
Modifying Master Guides
To modify the margin guides and/or column guides for a master page:
1 Display a master page in the document window by choosing one from the Display submenu (Page
& Display).
2 Choose Page
& Master Guides.
S Tips
Creating ruler guides on master pages
Master pages have master guides by default. You can also create ruler guides on master pages to assist with positioning page elements consistently. See “Using Rulers and
Guides” in Chapter 5, “Layout Tools.”
Adjust Margin Guides or Column Guides using the Master Guides dialog box (Page
&
Master Guides) when a master page is displayed.
3 To modify the column guides, enter new values in the Columns and
Gutter Width fields.
4 To reposition margin guides, enter new values in the Top, Bottom,
Left, and Right fields in the Margin Guides area.
5 Click OK to close the Master Guides dialog box.
6 Choose Page
& Display & Document to return to the document.
R When Facing Pages is checked in the New Document dialog box, the Left and Right fields in the Margin Guides area change to
Inside and Outside. The inside margin is along the document’s spine; the outside margin is along the outside edges of the left- and right-facing pages. If the automatic text box touches the margin guides, the automatic text box will be resized when you change the
Master Guides.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.11
Document Layout
S Tips
Using pointers
While dragging page icons in the
Document Layout palette, icons will display when the addition of the pages will affect the position of existing pages: Force Down
+, Force
Left
-, and Force Right _.
When page position won’t be affected, three page icons can display. If the document is not a facingpage document the
4 will display. In a facing-page document, the left page icon
1, and the right page icon
2 will display depending on which side of the spine the pages are placed.
Creating Multipage Spreads
The traditional graphic arts or publishing term spread refers to facing pages in a publication such as a book or magazine. Spreads are usually designed so that the layouts of facing pages complement each other. In QuarkXPress, the term spread refers to any two or more continuous pages arranged horizontally in a document. When you insert pages in a facing-page document,
QuarkXPress automatically arranges them in complementary left-facing and right-facing page spreads. Publications like brochures commonly have layouts based on multiple pages arranged side-by-side.
Creating multipage spreads in nonfacing-page documents
To create a multipage, nonfacing-page spread:
1 Choose View
& Show Document Layout (F4). Using the Document
Layout palette, you can arrange pages side-by-side in horizontal rows. You can also arrange single pages one above the other in the palette, or you can create a document that contains both single pages and multipage spreads.
2 Click the blank single-page icon or a master page icon and drag the pointer where you want to insert a page. The single-sided pointer
4 is displayed if the new page will not affect the position of existing pages.
If existing pages are affected, the pointer changes to one of two icons
(
_, or +) indicating where the existing pages will be forced to move.
10.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Multipage Spreads
Create multipage, facing-page documents by dragging blank page or master page icons into the lower portion of the Document Layout palette (View
& Show Document Layout). The
Force Right pointer
_ shows that the new page will be placed between pages 6 and 7.
3 Release the mouse when the page is positioned correctly.
Creating multipage spreads in facing-page documents
When you create a new document and check Facing Pages in the New
Document dialog box (File
& New & Document), QuarkXPress arranges automatically inserted pages on alternate sides of the spine. The
Document Layout palette displays a center vertical line between facing pages that indicates the document’s spine.
To create a facing-page spread with two or more pages on the same side of the spine for layouts such as foldout sections:
1 Choose View
& Show Document Layout (F4).
2 To create a facing-page spread, click a blank page or master page icon in the top area of the Document Layout palette.
3 Drag the pointer to where you want to insert a page. The pointer changes to one of six icons (
1, 2, 4, -, _, or +) depending on the page’s placement.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.13
Document Layout
S Tips
Creating spreads in Thumbnails view
You can also arrange existing document pages into multipage spreads in
Thumbnails view. Choose View
&
Thumbnails, or press
CTRL
+
ALT
+
V
, to access the View Percent field and enter a “t.” Drag the thumbnails to create multipage spreads.
Spread size
The number of pages you can insert in a spread is limited to the 48" document width. The Document
Layout palette will prevent you from exceeding the limit.
If the
-, _, or + pointer is displayed when you insert a page, other pages will be shuffled (repositioned, reformatted, and renumbered) to maintain the proper left/right facing-page layout.
Create multipage facing-page spreads by dragging blank page or master page icons into the lower portion of the Document Layout palette (View
& Show Document Layout).
4 Release the mouse button when the page is positioned correctly.
R If you have created a spread, QuarkXPress will attempt to copy the spread when pages are inserted. For example, if pages 3-5 are positioned as a spread and you insert six pages after page 5,
QuarkXPress will position the new pages as two, three-page spreads of pages 6–8 and 9–11.
Shuffling pages
When you insert, delete, or move pages in a facing-page document and the Force Left
-, Force Right _, or Force Down + pointer is displayed,
QuarkXPress will reposition and reformat pages, if necessary, to maintain the proper left/right layout. For example, inserting a single page can move the pages thereafter from left-facing to right-facing, and vice versa, throughout the document. This is called shuffling.
Shuffling begins from the point where pages are inserted, deleted, or moved, and continues through the document until one of three conditions occurs: (1) two or more pages are on the same side of the spine; (2) a single page is in a facing-page spread; or (3) a section start is encountered.
10.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Numbering Pages and Sectioning Documents
Numbering Pages and Sectioning Documents
QuarkXPress helps you perform page-numbering tasks automatically. You can also create individually numbered sections within a document, and you can specify the way pages in each section are numbered.
Using automatic page numbering
With QuarkXPress, page numbers can be automatically inserted on document pages by typing a control character on a master page. To insert an automatic page number:
1 Display a master page in the document window by choosing one from the Display submenu (Page
& Display); then create a text box where you want a page number to appear. Remember, the auto text box on a master page cannot contain text.
2 Press CTRL +3. This creates a page number place holder <#>. Page numbers will automatically be inserted in this place on document pages based on that master page.
3 Highlight the place holder <#> and specify a font size, type style, color, etc.
S Tips
Automatic page numbering
If you use automatic page numbering in a facing-page layout, QuarkXPress will correctly number your left and right pages as even and odd pages, respectively.
Shortcut to the Section dialog box
Select a page in the Document Lay-
out palette; then click the page number area in the bottom left corner to display the Section dialog box.
Creating a document section
A document section is a group of sequentially numbered pages. For example, an appendix could be a section in a document. To specify a document page as the beginning of a section:
1 Make sure the desired document page is displayed. The page number area in the lower left corner of the document window indicates the current page.
In the Document Layout palette, the number of the current page appears in italics format.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.15
Document Layout
2 Choose Page
& Section.
3 Check Section Start; the controls in the Page Numbering area become active. The current page becomes the first page of the new section.
4 To specify the characters used as a prefix for automatic page numbers, enter up to four characters in the Prefix field. For example, you might precede the page numbering in a document’s Appendix with App-.
5 To specify the beginning number for the section, enter a number in the Number field.
6 To specify the format used for automatic page numbers in the section, select one of the options from the Format drop-down list: Arabic numerals 1, 2, 3, 4; uppercase Roman numerals I, II, III, IV; lowercase Roman numerals i, ii, iii, iv; uppercase alphabetic A, B, C,
D; or lowercase alphabetic a, b, c, d characters.
Specify the beginning of a document section and the numbering format in the Section dialog box (Page
& Section).
7 Click OK to create the section and format automatic page numbers as specified.
10.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Inserting, Deleting, and Moving Pages
Inserting, Deleting, and Moving Pages
QuarkXPress lets you insert, delete, and move document pages by using commands in the Page menu or by dragging page icons in the Document
Layout palette. You can also move pages in Thumbnails view.
Inserting document pages
To insert new document pages:
1 Choose Page
& Insert.
Specify the format and placement of inserted pages using the Insert Pages dialog box
(Page
& Insert).
2 To specify the number of pages to add, enter a value in the Insert
page(s) field.
3 To specify where to place inserted pages, click before page or after page and enter a page number in the field. Or, click at end of document.
4 Click Link to Current Text Chain. Link to Current Text Chain is available only when a text box on the page that precedes the inserted page is active, and you select a master page with an automatic text box.
5 Choose a master page from the Master Page drop-down list to apply its formatting to the inserted pages. See “Inserting pages for text overflow” in “Working with Text Chains” later in this chapter.
6 Click OK to insert the pages.
S Tips
Master pages and master items
If you add, modify, or delete a master page item on a master page, the changes you make are automatically applied to document pages based on that master page. However, if you edit items on document pages that were placed by a master page, those items will not be updated. For example, you might place a header on a master page, then edit the header text on each document page.
If you then change the header text on the master page, the change will not be reflected on associated document pages.
Inserting pages
The maximum number of pages you can insert at one time is 100.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.17
Document Layout
S Tips
Deleting linked pages
When QuarkXPress deletes pages that contain text boxes with links to pages that are not being deleted, it will reflow the text from the deleted boxes through the remaining linked boxes.
Remaining pages renumbered
When you delete pages, remaining pages are automatically renumbered within each section.
Deleting a “blank” page
If a blank page will not delete, it probably is linked to the previous page.
Delete all spaces or paragraph returns that appear on the blank page and try to delete the blank page again.
Deleting document pages
To delete document pages:
1 Choose Page
& Delete.
Delete a page or a range of pages using the Delete Pages dialog box (Page
& Delete).
2 To delete a single page, enter the page number in the first field.
To delete a range of pages, enter the first page number in the Delete
page(s) field. Enter the number of the last page in the range in the
thru field.
3 Click OK to delete the pages.
R If Auto Page Insertion is enabled in the General tab of the Docu-
ment Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document) when you delete pages, QuarkXPress automatically replaces the deleted pages as needed to contain overflow text. The layout of the inserted pages is based on the master page applied to the preceding page in the document.
Specify how pages are automatically inserted using the Auto Page Insertion drop-down list in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document).
10.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Inserting, Deleting, and Moving Pages
Moving document pages
When you move pages, QuarkXPress renumbers them. For example, if you move page 3 to a position before pages 1 and 2, the original page 3 becomes the new page 1, while the original pages 1 and 2 become pages
2 and 3, respectively. QuarkXPress does not change links between text boxes, so a story that previously began on page 1 now begins on page 2.
Moving pages using a dialog box
To move document pages using the Move Pages dialog box:
1 Choose Page
& Move.
Move a page or a range of pages using the Move Pages dialog box (Page
& Move).
2 To move a single document page, enter the document page number in the Move page(s) field.
To move a range of pages, enter the first number in the Move page(s) field. Enter the number of the last page in the range in the thru field.
3 To specify where to place moved pages, click before page or after page and enter a page number in the field, or click to end of document.
4 Click OK.
Moving document pages in Thumbnails view
To move document pages by dragging reduced thumbnail representations of those pages:
1 Choose View
& Thumbnails (
SHIFT
+F6); the document window shows a thumbnail view of document pages.
S Tips
Specifying page numbers
In fields that require you to enter page numbers (for example the
Insert Pages, Delete Pages, and
Move Pages dialog boxes), you must enter the complete page number, including any prefix, or an absolute page number.
An absolute page number reflects a page’s actual position relative to the first page of a document, regardless of the way in which the document is sectioned. To specify an absolute page number in a dialog box, precede the number you enter with a plus (+) sign. For example, to display the first page in a document, enter “+1.”
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.19
Document Layout
S Tips
Shortcut to Thumbnails view
You can change to Thumbnails view by pressing
CTRL
+
ALT
+
V to access the
View Percent field, entering “thumb” or “t,” and pressing
ENTER
.
Editing pages in Thumbnails views
Although you cannot edit pages in
Thumbnails view, you can edit pages in views as low as 10%.
2 Click page icons to select them. To move a range of pages, press the
SHIFT key while clicking the first and last thumbnail page you want to move. To move noncontinuous pages, press the
CTRL key while clicking to select individual pages.
3 Drag the thumbnails to new locations. When you drag a thumbnail page to a different location, the pointer indicates where the page will be inserted and the way in which adjoining pages will be affected.
• A page icon pointer (
4, 1, or 2) indicates that inserting the page at that location will not affect existing document pages. The Force
Left pointer
- indicates that the existing pages in the spread will be forced to the left. The Force Right pointer
_ indicates that existing pages in the spread will be forced to the right.
• To move a thumbnail page between two spreads, drag the thumbnail and release the mouse button when the Force Down
+ pointer is displayed. Spreads that follow the inserted pages are forced down.
4 When you are finished moving pages, return the document to a percentage view.
Move a page or range of pages in Thumbnails view (View
& Thumbnails).
10.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Text Chains
Working with Text Chains
You can control the flow of text through a document by linking text boxes. When you link two or more text boxes, you create a text chain. In
QuarkXPress, text contained in a single text chain is called a story. When you add or edit the text in one of the boxes in the chain, the story reflows through the rest of the chain.
You can establish two types of text chains in a document: a single automatic text chain, as well as any number of manual text chains. Manual text chains are often used in magazines, newspapers, or newsletters, where a story jumps among pages. Text in an automatic text chain flows through automatic text boxes, which you can specify when you create a new document or edit a master page. Automatic text chains are useful for documents that contain a single, long story — such as a book.
S Tips
Working with stories
You can use the Spell Check and
Find/Change features with a specific story or with an entire document.
Multiple-selecting linked boxes
To cut, copy, or paste all the boxes containing a story, select all the boxes at once. To multiple-select text boxes, press the
SHIFT key while clicking on the boxes with the Item tool e.
Creating automatic text boxes for a new document
When you create a new document and check Automatic Text Box,
QuarkXPress creates an automatic text box for the master page and first document page. Automatic text boxes ensure that you can begin typing immediately in a new document and that text will automatically flow into subsequent document pages. The presence of an automatic text box is indicated by an Intact Chain Icon u in the upper left corner of a master page. To establish automatic text flow when creating a document:
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.21
Document Layout
S Tips
Manually linking text boxes
To manually link a text box to the last text box in an automatic chain, select the Linking tool u and click within the last text box in the automatic text chain; it becomes marqueed.
Click within the box you want to add to the automatic text chain.
1 Choose File
& New & Document (
CTRL
+
N
).
2 Check Automatic Text Box. The size and position of this box is determined by the values in the Margin Guides field.
3 Enter Margin Guide values to specify the size and position of the automatic text box.
4 Enter values in the Column Guides area to specify the number of text Columns and their Gutter Width. These settings will be applied to the document’s first page, as well as the master page and the pages based on it.
5 Click OK.
Creating automatic text boxes on master pages
Automatic text boxes ensure that text will automatically flow into subsequent document pages. If the document doesn’t have an automatic text box, you can create one without having to create a new document. To create an automatic text box on a master page that doesn’t have one:
1 Display a master page in the document window by choosing one from the Display submenu (Page
& Display).
2 Create a text box that will be the automatic text box.
3 Select the Linking tool u.
4 Click the Broken Chain Icon
U in the upper left corner of the master page; a marquee (moving dotted line) is displayed around the icon.
10.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Text Chains
Creating an automatic text box on a master page.
5 Click the text box; a Linking Arrow indicates that automatic text flow has been established and the text box becomes marqueed.
Inserting pages for text overflow
The Auto Page Insertion drop-down list in the General tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document) lets you determine whether pages are automatically inserted, and where they will be placed when you enter or import more text than a text box can display.
Text overflow causes pages to be automatically inserted only if: (1) Auto
Page Insertion is enabled; (2) the master page has an automatic text chain (as indicated by the Intact Chain Icon u in the upper left corner of the master page); (3) the overflow is from the text box defined on the master page as the automatic text chain box or from a chain of at least two text boxes. To enable Auto Page Insertion:
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Document (
CTRL + Y ).
2 Choose an option from the Auto Page Insertion drop-down list.
• Choose End of Story to automatically place inserted pages right after the linked text box that overflows.
• Choose End of Section to automatically place inserted pages after the last page of the section.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.23
Document Layout
S Tips
Format for inserted pages
When QuarkXPress automatically inserts pages, the layout of the inserted pages is based on the master page applied to the preceding page in the document.
• Choose End of Document to automatically place inserted pages after the last page of the document.
• Choose Off to disable Auto Page Insertion.
3 Click OK.
Linking pages to automatic text chains
When you insert pages in a document, you choose whether they will link with the current text chain. To do so:
1 Display the page to add pages after. The page number area in the lower left corner of the document window indicates the current page.
2 Select its automatic text box.
3 Choose Page
& Insert.
Check Link to Current Text Chain in the Insert Pages dialog box (Page
& Insert) to flow text into new document pages.
4 Check Link to Current Text Chain. Link to Current Text Chain is available only when a text box on the page that precedes the inserted page is active, and you choose a master page with an automatic text box.
5 Choose a master page with an automatic text box from the Master
Page drop-down list.
6 Click OK.
10.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Text Chains
Establishing manual text chains
To link text boxes and create a manual text chain:
1 Select the Linking tool u to add one text box to a chain.
2 Click the text box you want to begin the text chain; it becomes marqueed.
Link boxes together using the Linking u tool. The Linking Arrow indicates the box on top is linked to the text box below.
3 Click the text box you want to be second in the chain. After you do this, the second text box is linked and the Linking tool automatically deselects.
Breaking text box links
To break links between text boxes:
1 Select the Unlinking tool
U.
2 Click a text box that is part of a text chain to display the arrow(s) that indicate links.
3 Click the Unlinking pointer
U on an arrow’s head or tailfeathers.
R To remove a text box from a text chain of three or more text boxes, and reroute the links around it, select the Unlinking tool
U and press the SHIFT key while clicking the box.
S Tips
Text overflow
If text overflows from a manual text chain of two or more boxes, and Auto
Page Insertion is enabled (Edit
&
Preferences
& General &
Document tab), QuarkXPress inserts pages to contain the overflow text.
Linking multiple boxes
If you press the
ALT key when you select the Linking tool u, you can add more than one text box to a chain without having to reselect the Linking tool u after each link. When you have finished adding boxes to a text chain, deselect the Linking tool u by selecting another tool.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.25
Document Layout
S Tips
Editing the text in a story
When “continued on” and “continued from” references are contained in separate text boxes (grouped within other linked text boxes), editing the text in a story won’t cause the “continued” references to reflow.
Creating “Continued” References
In newspapers and magazines, you often see “continued on” and “continued from” references where a story jumps from one page to another. These are called jump lines. QuarkXPress can automatically place the correct page number with the “continued on” and “continued from” text in jump lines. When creating a “continued” reference, you need at least two text boxes for each section of the story. One box will contain the story, and the other box will contain the reference text. The reference text can be formatted in any fashion, and can have any wording.
1 Select or create two or more linked text boxes.
2 Create smaller text boxes to contain “continued on page” and “continued from page” references. Enter the wording you prefer and apply styles to the text.
3 Select the Item tool e; place these boxes within the original text boxes where the references should go. For example, place the “continued on page” at the bottom of the first text box and “continued from page” at the top of the next text box.
Create “continued on page” and “continued from page” references that update automatically using a combination of grouped text boxes and keyboard commands.
10.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating “Continued” References
4 Multiple-select the text box containing the beginning of the story and the text box containing the “continued on page” reference. To do this, select the Item tool e or the Content tool E and press the
SHIFT key while clicking the boxes.
5 Choose Item
& Group (
CTRL
+
G
). This groups both boxes so they remain together when moved to a different location in the document.
6 Repeat steps four and five to group the text box containing the remainder of the story and the text box containing the “continued from page” reference.
7 After the “continued on page” reference, enter the Next Box Page
Number character by pressing
CTRL
+4. The Next Box Page Number character displays the page number for the next linked box.
8 After the “continued from page” reference, enter the Previous Box
Page Number character by pressing
CTRL
+2. The Previous Box Page
Number character displays the page number for the previous linked box.
9 Move the grouped text boxes to separate pages; the page numbers in the “continued” references will automatically update.
R If a text box that contains the Previous Box Page Number character or the Next Box Page Number character does not contain the necessary links to other text boxes, <None> is displayed instead of the page number. However, if a Previous Box Page Number or Next Box
Page Number character is not linked to another text box, but overlaps a text box that is linked to other boxes, page number references are determined by that box’s links.
S Tips
Multiple “continued” references
If a story jumps to different pages more than once, you can create a chain of “continued” references. For example, if your story starts on page 1, is continued to page 17, and ends on page 18, you’ll need two
“continued on” and “continued from” references. To create the additional
“continued” references, follow the same steps used to create the initial references.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.27
Document Layout
S Tips
Guides vs. columns
In the Column Guides area of the
New Document dialog box (File menu) you specify the number of columns on your page. If you check
Automatic Text Box, the box will be divided into the specified columns. If you do not check Auto-
matic Text Box, the page will only show the column guides. The default color for the column guides is blue.
Working with Columns
Columns are vertical divisions of a text box in QuarkXPress. You can place columns in a new or existing document. You can also adjust the size of columns and the width between them (the gutter width). Columns are used to divide text boxes for easier reading, as in a magazine or newspaper article.
Creating columns for new documents
When you create a new document and specify the number of columns, that specification applies to both the default master page and the document pages based on that master page. To specify the number of columns on the default master page and the first page of a new document:
1 Choose File
& New & Document (
CTRL + N ).
2 Enter a value in the Columns field.
3 Enter a value in the Gutter Width field to specify the space between columns.
4 Check Automatic Text Box to create an automatic text box with the specified number of columns on the document page.
5 Click OK.
Editing columns in existing documents
You can make global changes to Column Guides in existing documents by editing the Master Guides for any master page. If you change the columns for an automatic text box that contains text, the text is reflowed automatically. See “Modifying Master Guides” in the “Formatting and
Applying Master Pages” section earlier in this chapter.
10.28
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Columns
Dividing a text box into columns
You can change the number of columns in any text box at any time.
1 Select the text box to modify.
2 Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Text tab.
Modify the columns in a text box using the Text tab in the Modify dialog box (Item
&
Modify
& Text tab).
3 Enter a new value in the Columns field.
4 To modify the amount of space between columns, enter a value in the Gutter Width field.
5 Click OK. Any text in the box will reflow automatically into the new columns.
S Tips
Next Column and Next Box characters
To force text to flow into the next column, enter the Next Column character 3 by pressing the
ENTER key on the keypad. To force text to flow into the next text box, skipping any columns in between, enter the Next
Box b character by pressing
SHIFT
+
ENTER on the keypad.
Dividing a master page text box into columns
You can also divide any selected text box on a master page into columns using the Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu) or the Cols field on the Measurements palette.
Changing the number of columns in a text box causes the text to reflow automatically.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.29
Document Layout
S Tips
Starting with a new template
If you resize the pages in a long document, it may be time consuming to reposition all the page items manually. You may want to start with a new template and paste the existing text and pictures into it.
Changing Page Size and Facing-Pages Status
When you create a document, you define the document’s size, the position of its margin guides and column guides, whether it is a facing-page document, and whether the program places an automatic text box on the first page and on the original master page. These are document attributes. You can use the Document Setup dialog box (File menu) to change a document’s page size and whether it has facing pages. But after you change these document attributes, you may need to reposition items.
Using Document Setup
To change document attributes:
1 Choose File
& Document Setup (
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + P ). (The Document
Setup command is not available when a master page is displayed in the document window.)
Adjust a document’s page size and whether it has facing pages using the Document Setup dialog box (File menu).
10.30
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Changing Page Size and Facing-Pages Status
2 To change a document’s page size, click a different predefined page size from the Page Size area, or enter values in the Width and/or
Height fields.
3 To specify either portrait or landscape orientation, click the appropriate button. Portrait orientation is the default.
4 To change a nonfacing-page document to a facing-page document, check Facing Pages. To change a facing-page document to a nonfacing-page document, uncheck Facing Pages.
5 Click OK.
R If Facing Pages is checked but unavailable in the Document Setup dialog box, the document contains facing-page master pages. To change from a facing-page to a single-page document, first change any facing-page master pages to single-page master pages by dragging the
4 icon on top of them in the Document Layout palette
(all formatting on associated document pages will be lost). Then choose File
& Document Setup and uncheck Facing Pages.
Repositioning page items
When you change a document’s page size, items retain their position relative to the upper left corner of the page. If you decrease the page size to the point where an item no longer fits entirely within a document page, the item will extend onto the pasteboard. You may need to reposition some page items after resizing a document. You cannot reduce a document’s page size to the point that items won’t fit on the pasteboard.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.31
Document Layout
S Tips
Storing items in libraries
Copying items between documents is useful when you occasionally need to reuse an item. However, if you need to use an item often, it may be more convenient to store it in a library. See Chapter 17, “Libraries.”
Copying Items and Pages Between Documents
In QuarkXPress, you can copy items and entire pages between documents by dragging them. This is useful if you have similar information in two different documents. To copy items between documents, you simply position two document windows on-screen and drag items from one to the other. To copy pages between documents, you must be in Thumbnails view. The document you are dragging pages from is referred to as the
“source document”; the document you are dragging pages to is referred to as the “target document.”
Copying items between documents
You can drag any selected items between documents — as long as they fit within the target document’s page size and pasteboard.
1 Arrange the documents on-screen so part of each document is showing. The documents can be displayed in any view except Thumbnails.
2 Display the pages containing the items and the pages the items will be moved to.
3 Select the items to be moved from the source document. Select the
Item tool e and click an item. Or, select the Item tool e or the
Content tool
E and press the
SHIFT key while clicking multiple items.
4 Drag the items from the source document to the target document.
Position the items in the target document. The items should now appear in both documents.
10.32
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Copying Items and Pages Between Documents
Dragging thumbnails
To drag pages between documents, both documents must be open.
The target document must have the same page size, or a larger page size, than the source document. If the pages you want to drag are facing-pages, the target document must be a facing-page document. If the source document is a nonfacing-page document, the target document should be a nonfacing-page document. To drag thumbnails between documents:
1 Choose Window
& Tile Horizontally or Tile Vertically so that both document windows are visible.
2 Activate each document window and display as Thumbnails
(View
& Thumbnails).
3 Select any tool and click the pages you want to move in the source document. To move a range of pages, click the first page then press the
SHIFT key while you click the last page you want to move. To move noncontinuous pages, press the
CTRL key while clicking to select individual pages.
4 Drag the thumbnails to the target document. When you drag a thumbnail page to a different location, the pointer indicates where the page will be inserted and the way in which adjoining pages will be affected.
• A page icon pointer (
4, 1, or 2) indicates that inserting the page at that location will not affect existing document pages. The Force
Left pointer
- indicates that the existing pages in the spread will be forced to the left. The Force Right pointer
_ indicates that existing pages in the spread will be forced to the right.
• To move a thumbnail page between two spreads, drag the thumbnail and release the mouse button when the Force Down
+ pointer is displayed. Spreads that follow the inserted pages are forced down.
S Tips
Dragging in Thumbnails view
Dragging thumbnails is also helpful for recovering pages of damaged documents.
Dragging linked text boxes
If you drag a page that has linked text boxes, all the text of the story will be added to the new document.
The Overflow symbol p will display to show that this has occurred.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 10.33
Document Layout
S Tips
Editing in Thumbnails view
In Thumbnails view, you can rearrange pages and drag pages between documents, but you can’t edit items on document pages. If you need to edit thumbnail-sized pages, change the view percent to a small size such as 10 or 20 percent.
5 When you’re finished moving pages, return the document to a percentage view. You cannot edit pages in Thumbnails view.
6 If you dragged thumbnails to recover pages in a damaged document, delete the blank page that was the original page 1 of the target document (Page
& Delete). This page is no longer needed.
R When you drag-copy pages between documents in Thumbnails view, subsequent pages in the target document are repositioned and renumbered accordingly.
The effect on document defaults and preferences
When you drag items and pages between documents, certain defaults and preferences are affected as follows:
• Any style sheets, colors, dashes & stripes, lists, or H&Js used in any items in the source document are added to the target document.
If any of the source document’s specifications have the same name as a specification in the target document, the target document specification is used. (For example, if a color has the same name but is defined differently, the item will change color from the source document to the target document.)
• If the XPress Preferences used in the source document are different from those used in the target document, text may reflow.
• When you drag pages between documents, any master pages used on pages in the source document are added to the target document. If any of the source document’s master pages have the same name as a master page in the target document, the new master pages are automatically renamed.
10.34
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Text Basics
11
Editing Text 11.3
Importing and Exporting Text 11.6
Finding and Changing Text 11.9
Finding and Changing Attributes 11.12
Changing Fonts in a Document 11.16
Checking Spelling 11.19
Using Auxiliary Dictionaries 11.22
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Text Basics
11
QuarkXPress provides complete word processing capabilities that let you create and edit text for your publications without having to use a stand-alone word processing program. You can also import text from most popular word processors.
In addition to the standard text formatting and editing features, QuarkXPress includes such features as search-and-replace, spell checking, custom spelling dictionaries, and a font usage utility for making document-wide changes to text.
Editing Text
Editing Text
With the word processing capabilities built into QuarkXPress, you can create text for your publications without using another program. Or, if you prefer to generate text using a word processing program, you can import the text into a QuarkXPress document. Regardless of which way you create text, you can use QuarkXPress to edit all the text in your publications quickly and efficiently.
Using tools
In QuarkXPress, you enter and import text into active text boxes. Characters are entered at the text insertion point i, indicated by the blinking
Text Insertion bar i. If a range of text is highlighted, characters you enter or import replace the selected range. You can use the Text Insertion bar i three different ways:
• To enter text into a text box, select the Content tool
E. Click the text box to activate it. The blinking Text Insertion bar i indicates where text you enter or import is placed.
• To move the text insertion point i, click the mouse when the I-beam pointer
I is at the desired location. You can establish a new text insertion point i only within text or at the beginning or end of a paragraph.
• To highlight text using the mouse, click the I-beam pointer
I at the desired location, then drag to highlight the text you want. Release the mouse button.
S Tips
The Text Insertion bar i
Editing text requires moving the Text
Insertion bar i within a text box. You can either move the I-beam pointer
I and click to place the Text Insertion bar i where you want it, or you can use keyboard commands.
Using the Content tool
E
When the Content tool
E is selected, the Arrow pointer x changes to the I-beam pointer
I when positioned over an active text box.
Highlighting text
To cut, copy, replace, or delete text, you must first highlight it. You can highlight text with the mouse (see the Tips section on the following page) or by using keyboard commands (see the table on page 5). To delete a highlighted range of text, press the
BACKSPACE key.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 11.3
Text Basics
S Tips
Using the Clipboard
When you Cut or Copy text, it is stored on the Clipboard until you replace it by cutting or copying another text range or item, or until you shut down your computer.
Highlighting text with the mouse
You can highlight text using multiple mouse clicks. A double-click highlights the word with the I-beam pointer
I; a triple-click highlights the line with the I-beam pointer; four clicks highlights the entire paragraph with the I-beam pointer
I; five clicks highlights the entire story.
Copying, cutting and pasting
Copying or cutting text, and pasting it, is useful when moving text around in a document. To copy, cut, or paste:
1 Select the Content tool
E. Highlight the text you want, then choose
Edit
& Copy (
CTRL
+
C
) or Cut (
CTRL
+
X
). The text will be placed on the
Clipboard.
2 To paste text from the Clipboard into your document, select the Content tool. Place the Text Insertion bar i where you want the pasted text to begin. Choose Edit
& Paste (
CTRL
+
V
).
Editing with Drag and Drop Text
Drag and Drop Text lets you highlight text and move it with the mouse. You can drag and drop text only within a text chain, not between unlinked text boxes. To Drag and Drop Text:
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Application; then click the Interac-
tive tab. Check the Drag and Drop Text check box. Click OK.
2 Highlight the text you want to move or copy.
3 To move highlighted text, click within the highlighted range, drag the pointer to a new location, and release the mouse to drop the text into place.
4 To copy and move highlighted text, press the SHIFT key while clicking within the highlighted range, drag the pointer to a new location, and release the mouse to drop the copied text.
11.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Editing Text
Function
Select All the text in a story
Copy
Paste
Cut
Previous character
Next character
Previous line
Next line
Previous word
Next word
Top of paragraph
Top of next paragraph
Beginning of line
End of line
Beginning of story
End of story
Select previous word
Select next word
Select to top of paragraph
Select to top of next paragraph
Select to beginning of line
Select to end of line
Select to beginning of story
Select to end of story
Keyboard command
CTRL + A
CTRL + C
CTRL + V
CTRL + X
7
8
9
0
CTRL +7
CTRL +8
CTRL +9
CTRL +0
CTRL + ALT +7 or the HOME key
CTRL + ALT +8 or the END key
CTRL + ALT +9 or CTRL + HOME
CTRL + ALT +0 or CTRL + END
CTRL + SHIFT +7
CTRL + SHIFT +8
CTRL + SHIFT +9
CTRL + SHIFT +0
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +7
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +8
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +9
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +0
S Tips
Dragging multiple words
Double-click, then drag to highlight additional words one at a time; triple-click then drag to highlight additional lines one at a time, etc.
Deleting text
Press the
BACKSPACE key to delete the character before the text insertion point i. Press the
DELETE key to delete the character following the text insertion point i.
When you import text using Get
Text, the imported text is placed starting at the text insertion point i or replaces a highlighted range.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 11.5
Text Basics
Importing and Exporting Text
QuarkXPress lets you import and export text in a variety of file formats:
ASCII text, ASCII text with XPress Tags formatting codes, and formats for many popular word processing programs. QuarkXPress includes import/export filters for the XPress Tags format and for the leading thirdparty word processors, such as Microsoft Word and WordPerfect. See
“XPress Tags” in Chapter 24, “Appendices.” To use the import/export filters, place them in the same folder as your other XTensions, and enable them with the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu). See
“Using XTensions” in Chapter 4, “Customizing QuarkXPress.”
Importing text
You can import text in many different formats. If you are importing text from a word processor or in XPress Tags format, make sure the appropriate import/export filter is running. To import text:
1 Select the Content tool
E.
2 Click the Text Insertion bar i in a text box at the point where you want text to be inserted. If you want imported text to replace a range of text, highlight the range to be replaced.
3 Choose File
& Get Text (
CTRL
+
E
).
Use the Get Text dialog box (File menu) to import text files.
11.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Importing and Exporting Text
4 Use the controls in the Get Text dialog box to locate the text file you want to import. The dialog box lists ASCII files and files from word processors for which an import/export filter is running.
5 Select the text file in the list. When you select a file, the Format and
File size fields indicate its format and size.
6 Check Convert Quotes to convert double hyphens to em dashes, and foot or inch marks to typesetter’s quotation marks, when the text is imported. Foot and inch marks are converted to the quotation marks format you have specified in the Quotes drop-down list
(Edit
& Preferences & Application & Interactive tab).
7 Check Include Style Sheets to import style sheets from a Microsoft
Word or WordPerfect file to the document’s list of style sheets. To convert XPress Tags code contained in imported ASCII text to actual text formatting, also check Include Style Sheets.
8 Click Open.
R If all the imported text does not fit in the text box, the overflow symbol t is displayed, or pages are inserted automatically to contain the text. Pages are inserted if you import text into an automatic text box and Auto Page Insertion is enabled (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document & General tab).
Exporting text
You can save text created with QuarkXPress in file formats that can be opened by word processing programs and other applications. Make sure you have the appropriate export filter running. To export text:
1 To save all the text contained in a text box or a chain of linked boxes, activate the text box (or any of the text boxes in a chain). To save only some of the text in a story, highlight the range of text you want to save.
S Tips
Using XPress Tags
ASCII text does not contain formatting information. However, the
XPress Tags coding system in
QuarkXPress makes it possible to include character and paragraph attribute information in ASCII text.
You can use any word processing program that can output ASCII text files to generate text with XPress
Tags code. Then, when you import the ASCII text, QuarkXPress translates the embedded XPress Tags code and displays formatted text.
See “XPress Tags” in Chapter 24,
“Appendices.”
Formatting imported ASCII text
You can quickly format imported
ASCII text by specifying character and paragraph attributes at the text insertion point i before you import the text file.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 11.7
Text Basics
S Tips
Entering straight quotes
If you are using straight quotes to represent English foot and inch marks, you may need to replace the curly typesetter’s quotation marks with straight quotation marks. Enter
CTRL
+
ALT
+
"
for an inch mark and
CTRL
+' for a foot mark.
Using filters
Use the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to load word processing filters. See “Using
XTensions” in Chapter 4, “Customizing QuarkXPress.”
2 Choose File
& Save Text (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
E
). If you chose Save Text when a range of text was highlighted, Selected Text is active. If you did not highlight text, Entire Story is active.
Choose File
& Save Text to save selected text or an entire story for exporting, and choose a format for the saved text in the Format drop-down list.
3 Choose a file format from the Format drop-down list. The menu only lists ASCII Text and other file formats for which an import/export filter is running.
4 Enter a name for the export file in the File name field.
5 Use the dialog box controls to specify a location for the export file.
Click Save.
R Quark, Inc. has made every attempt to see that QuarkXPress works with the aforementioned products; however, because of periodic updating by other manufacturers, we cannot warrant compatibility.
Please read the QuarkXPress Software License and Warranty Agreement.
11.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Finding and Changing Text
Finding and Changing Text
QuarkXPress lets you find and change text and character attributes within a single story, on every document page, or on every master page using the
Find/Change (
CTRL
+
F
) palette.
Using Find/Change
You can use Find/Change (Edit menu) to search for characters, words, or phrases, and to replace the text with other characters, words, or phrases. For example, if you notice that a name is consistently misspelled throughout a lengthy document, you can use Find/Change to locate and correct all instances of the misspelled name in a single operation.
1 To find and change text only in an active text box or text chain, place the Text Insertion bar i at the start of the story (or at the location in the story where you want the search to begin).
To find and change text throughout an entire document, display a document page with no text boxes active.
To find and change text on every master page, display a master page with no text boxes active.
2 Choose Edit
& Find/Change (
CTRL + F ) to specify search criteria and to begin a search.
3 Enter the text you want to search for in the Find What field. You can enter up to 80 characters in this field.
Choose Edit
& Find/Change (
CTRL + F ) to search and replace text and characters.
S Tips
Searching a document or story
If Document is checked in the
Find/Change palette, QuarkXPress begins a document search on the first page of a document and continues to the last page. The program searches text boxes on a page according to their stacking order from front to back.
If Document is unchecked in the
Find/Change palette and a text box is active, QuarkXPress begins a story search at the text insertion point i.
To search the entire story, use the keyboard command
CTRL
+
ALT
+9 to move the text insertion point i to the beginning of the story before finding and changing text. (Or press the
ALT key to change the Find Next button to Find First.)
Using Find First
If you press the
ALT key, the Find Next button changes to Find First. If you then click Find First, QuarkXPress finds the first instance of the Find
What text in the story or document.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 11.9
Text Basics
S Tips
Switching between the Find/Change palette and active documents
Find/Change is a palette rather than a dialog box, allowing you to edit documents while it remains open. Simply click on the active document to make changes and temporarily deactivate the Find/Change palette (which will appear gray). To reactivate Find/Change, simply click anywhere on the palette.
Changing found items
Unless you click Change All, you can manually edit items found with
Find/Change at any time. When working in the Find/Change palette, simply click the document to make it active. After you make the edit, click
Find Next to continue the search from the text insertion point i.
4 Enter the text to replace found text in the Change To field. You can enter up to 80 characters in this field. Leave the Change To field blank to delete occurrences of the Find What text.
5 Check Document to find and change text throughout an entire document; uncheck Document to find and change text only in an active text box or text chain.
Check Masters when a master page is displayed to search for and replace text on all master pages.
6 Check Whole Word when you want the Find What text you enter to match only when it occurs as an individual word. When Whole
Word is not checked, QuarkXPress searches for all occurrences of the
Find What text, even if the characters are part of other words.
7 Check Ignore Case to search for all uppercase and lowercase variations of the Find What text. Uncheck Ignore Case to only find exact uppercase and lowercase matches.
8 Check Ignore Attributes to ignore text attributes. To find and change text attributes, uncheck Ignore Attributes. See “Finding and Changing Attributes” later in this chapter.
9 Click Find Next to begin finding text matching the criteria you enter; the first occurrence of the Find What text following the text insertion point i is highlighted.
10 Click Change, then Find to replace the highlighted occurrence with the text in the Change To field and then find the next occurrence of the Find What text.
• Click Change to replace the highlighted occurrence with the text in the Change To field. Click Find Next again to find the next occurrence of the Find What text.
11.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Finding and Changing Text
• Click Change All to replace the highlighted occurrence and all subsequent occurrences of the Find What text with the text in the
Change To field. It will display the number of instances changed.
Click OK.
Using Find/Change for nonprinting characters
You can use Find/Change to search for and replace many invisible, nonprinting characters, such as Tab and Enter characters, by pressing the
CTRL key while pressing those keys. Nonprinting characters are displayed in the Find What and Change To fields as follows:
To search for Enter Displays in the field
Wild Card (Find only)
CTRL
+?
Tab
CTRL
+
TAB
New Paragraph
New Line
CTRL
CTRL
+
ENTER
+
SHIFT
+
ENTER
New Column
New Box
Previous Box Page #
Current Box Page #
Next Box Page #
Punctuation Space
Flex Space
Backslash
Wildcard
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
+
ENTER
(keypad)
+2
+3
+4
+. (period)
+
SHIFT
+
F
+\
+
SHIFT
+?
\?
\t
\p
\n
\c
+
SHIFT
+
ENTER
(keypad) \b
\2
\3
\4
\.
\f
\\
\?
S Tips
Using a wild card character
To search for a word when unsure of its spelling, you can specify a wild card character in the Find What field by entering
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+?. The character displays as \? in the Find
What field. For example, the Find
What entry Analy\?e would find both Analyze and Analyse.
You cannot enter the wild card character in the Change To field.
Searching master pages
QuarkXPress does not search master pages during a document search. To find and change text or character attributes on master pages, you must first display a master page (Page
&
Display), and check Masters in the
Find/Change palette.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 11.11
Text Basics
S Tips
Changing attributes
Unchecking Ignore Attributes allows multiple options. For example, you could use Find/Change to convert occurrences of the word “bike” in 18-point Arial to ”Bicycle” in
24-point Times New Roman bold.
To do so, use the fields in the expanded Find/Change palette to define what QuarkXPress should search for and with what text and/or character attributes you want to replace the Find What text.
Finding and Changing Attributes
QuarkXPress lets you find and change text and character attributes (font, font size, and type style) within a single story, on every document page, or on every master page.
Finding and changing attributes
When you uncheck Ignore Attributes, the Find/Change palette (Edit
&
Find/Change) expands to give you additional search-and-replace criteria. With the expanded palette, you can use Find/Change to change text, font, font size, and type style, all at the same time. Or you can change any combination of text and/or character attributes.
1 To search for and replace text and/or character attributes only in an active text box or text chain, activate the text box and place the Text
Insertion bar i at the top of the story (or at the location in the story where you want the search to begin).
To search for and replace text and/or character attributes throughout an entire document, make sure that a document page is displayed and that no text boxes are active.
To search for and replace text and/or character attributes on every master page, make sure that a master page is displayed in the document window and that no text boxes are active.
2 Choose Edit
& Find/Change (
CTRL + F ) to specify search criteria and to begin a search. For information about Find What, Change To,
Document, Masters, Whole Word, and Ignore Case controls in the
Find/Change palette, see the preceding section “Finding and
Changing Text.”
3 Uncheck Ignore Attributes to display the Find/Change character attribute criteria; the palette expands to display the Text, Style Sheet,
Font, Size, and Type Style fields.
11.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Finding and Changing Attributes
Use Find/Change to change character attributes in a document.
4 Check Text to specify that QuarkXPress use text as a Find What criterion. Enter the text (up to 80 characters) you want to search for in the Text field. If you do not check Text, the program does not consider text in the search, and the Text field is dimmed.
• Check Style Sheet, Font, and Size to specify that QuarkXPress use these attributes as Find What criteria. Choose the specific paragraph or character style sheet, font, and size. If you do not check a selection, the program does not consider it in the search, and the selection is dimmed.
• Check Type Style to specify that QuarkXPress use type style as a
Find What criterion. Specify the attributes you want to include in the search. If you do not check Type Style, the program does not consider type style in the search, and the Type Style area is dimmed.
S Tips
Searching a document
If Document is checked in the
Find/Change palette, QuarkXPress begins a document search on the first page of a document and continues to the last page. The program searches text boxes on a page according to their stacking order from front to back.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 11.13
Text Basics
S Tips
Font drop-down list contents
The Font drop-down list in the Find
What area lists only those fonts used in the document. The Font drop-down list in the Change To area lists all fonts available to your
System.
Mutually exclusive type styles
The following type styles work in pairs: Underline and Word Under-
line, Small Caps and All Caps, and
Superscript and Subscript. Checking one unchecks the other. For example, the same text cannot be both superscript and subscript.
Specifying Plain type style
Clicking the Plain button in either the Find What or Change To sides of the Find/Change palette unchecks all other type styles.
The Type Style buttons in the Find What area have three states: unchecked, grayed, and checked. Leave unchecked if that attribute must be absent to cause a match; click once on a button to make it gray if it does not matter if the attribute is present; click twice on a button if that attribute must be present to cause a match.
5 Check Text in the Change To area to replace Find What text with different text. Enter the replacement text (up to 80 characters) in the
Text field. If you do not check Text, the program does not replace
Find What text with new text, and the Text field is dimmed.
To delete all instances of the text, check Text but do not enter anything in the field.
Use the Change To field to change found attributes.
• Check Style Sheet, Font, and Size in the Change To area to replace these attributes with new attributes. Choose a specific paragraph or character style sheet, font, and size from the drop-down lists. If you do not check a selection, the program does not replace the Find
What selection with a new selection, and the selection is dimmed.
• Check Type Style in the Change To area to replace the Find What type style with a different type style. Click the attributes you want to include as replacement type styles. If you do not check Type
Style, the program does not replace the Find What type style with a new one, and the Type Style area is dimmed.
11.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Finding and Changing Attributes
The Change To Type Style buttons have three states: unchecked, grayed, and checked. Leave a box unchecked if you want to strip that attribute from Find What text; click once on a button to make it gray if you want to leave a style unchanged in Find What text; and click twice on a button if you want to apply that style to Find
What text.
6 QuarkXPress replaces occurrences of text and/or attributes that meet
Find What criteria with the text and/or attributes you specify as
Change To criteria when you click Change, then Find, Change, or
Change All during a search.
7 Click Find Next to begin searching for and replacing text and/or character attributes using the criteria you enter. The first occurrence of the Find What text following the insertion point is highlighted.
8 Click Change, then Find to replace the highlighted occurrence with the text/attributes in the Change To field and then find the next occurrence of the Find What text/attributes.
• Click Change to replace the highlighted occurrence with the text/attributes in the Change To field. Click Find Next again to find the next occurrence of the Find What text/attributes.
• Click Change All to replace the highlighted occurrence and all subsequent occurrences of the Find What text/attributes with the
Change To text/attributes. It will display the number of instances replaced. Click OK.
S Tips
Interrupting a search
You can manually edit occurrences found with Find/Change at any time. Click the document to activate it and edit the text as necessary.
After you make a change, reactivate
Find/Change again and click Find
Next to continue the search from the text insertion point i.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 11.15
Text Basics
S Tips
Printing fonts
With the Fonts tab of the Usage dialog box, you can list the fonts used in a document so that you can make sure the necessary PostScript fonts are available to print the document correctly.
Changing Fonts in a Document
Because documents often contain many fonts, and knowing which fonts are specified is important when you print, QuarkXPress includes features that let you list and change all the fonts used in a document. The Collect
for Output (File menu) report lists the font usage information which is useful when you take your document to a service provider for printing.
The Fonts tab in the Usage dialog box (Utilities menu) lists all the screen
fonts and style variations present on document pages or master pages. It also lets you find and change all occurrences of a font. When you use this feature, the document scrolls to show you the highlighted selection; you can apply another font to the highlighted text, for all occurrences of the font.
Changing fonts
To display the fonts used in a document and selectively make documentwide font changes:
1 Choose Utilities
& Usage; and click the Fonts tab.
To display the fonts used on a master page and selectively make font changes, choose Utilities
& Usage & Fonts tab when viewing a master page.
11.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Changing Fonts in a Document
Use the Fonts tab of the Usage dialog box (Utilities menu) to replace fonts.
2 Choose a font from the list to find it within the document or master pages. All fonts, including the font specified at the insertion point of an empty text box, are listed in the Fonts tab.
To select multiple fonts, press the
CTRL key while you click the font names. To select a continuous range of fonts, click the first font name and press the
SHIFT key while you click the last font name in the range.
3 Check More Information to display the font characteristics of the highlighted font. This information includes the font’s PostScript name, file name, type, and version.
4 Click Show First to display the first instance of the font in the document or master page. Click Show Next to display continuing instances of the font.
5 Click Replace to replace the specified font with another font. Choose a font from the Replacement Font drop-down list. Click OK.
S Tips
Finding fonts
If a font is listed in the Font list in the Fonts tab of the Usage dialog box as < Name of Font > preceded by a negative number, the system you are using does not have that font installed. When this occurs, you can install the necessary font and reopen the document, or you can use the
Usage feature to locate occurrences of the font and apply a different font.
Fonts in pictures
QuarkXPress requires PostScript printer fonts to print high resolution output of text contained in Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) pictures. However, Usage does not list fonts contained in imported EPS pictures; if you are not sure what fonts are used in an EPS picture, open the picture in its original application to check font usage.
Choose a replacement font from the Replace Font dialog box to change fonts within a document.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 11.17
Text Basics
S Tips
Missing fonts
If you open a document that contains characters for which your system does not have a font with the same menu name or PostScript name, a warning is displayed. QuarkXPress uses the default system font to display the characters of the missing font. You can replace the missing font at the time of the warning.
6 A warning displays: If you want to replace all instances of the font with the replacement font, click OK. The font will be replaced throughout the document or master pages, depending on which is specified.
7 Repeat steps 2–6 to replace other fonts within the document or master page. Click Done when you finish making modifications.
R If a font is listed as <unknown> in the Fonts list in the Fonts tab of the Usage dialog box (Utilities
& Usage & Font tab), QuarkXPress is unable to identify that font.
11.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Checking Spelling
Checking Spelling
QuarkXPress lets you check the spelling of a single word, of an active story, of an entire document, or of the text on master pages.
Checking spelling
To check spelling, a copy of the dictionary file XPress.dct (included with your QuarkXPress program) must be available in the same folder as the
QuarkXPress program. When you open an auxiliary dictionary for use with a document, QuarkXPress uses the words it contains in addition to the words in the dictionary file XPress.dct when it checks spelling. See
“Using Auxiliary Dictionaries” later in this chapter for information about creating and using auxiliary dictionaries.
With QuarkXPress, you can check the spelling of a word, a story, or a document.
1 To check the spelling of a:
• Word: Highlight the word or place the Text Insertion bar i within or immediately next to the word. Choose Utilities
& Check
Spelling
& Word (
CTRL + W ). Choose the correct word and click
Replace. When you are finished, click Close.
• Story: Activate a text box. Choose Utilities
& Check Spelling &
Story ( CTRL + ALT + W ).
• Document: Choose Utilities
& Check Spelling & Document
( CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + W ).
S Tips
Spell checking a master page
You can spell check master pages by displaying a master page and using the commands Utilities
& Check
Spelling
& Masters.
Checking a word
If a range of text is highlighted when you select Check Word, the spelling of the first word of the highlighted range is checked.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 11.19
Text Basics
S Tips
Explaining Word Count
The Word Count dialog box displays three fields: Total, Unique, and
Suspect. Total is the total number of words checked; Unique is the number of different words identified;
Suspect is the number of words not included in the dictionary file
XPress.dct or in an open auxiliary dictionary.
Choose Word to display the Check Word dialog box (left) ; choose Story or Document to first display the Word Count dialog box (Utilities
& Check Spelling).
2 Click OK in the Word Count dialog box to to view the suspect words and selectively replace them with words from a dictionary or words that you enter from the Check Story or Check Document dialog boxes.
Look up, skip, add, or replace words in the Check Story or Check Document dialog box.
3 Click Lookup to check the dictionary file XPress.dct and an open auxiliary dictionary for words similar to the current suspect word.
The Suspect Word field displays the suspect words one at a time, in the order in which they were found. QuarkXPress displays similar words in the list.
4 Click Skip to proceed to the next suspect word without changing the spelling of the current one.
5 Click Add to add the current suspect word to the open auxiliary dictionary. The Add button is active when an auxiliary dictionary is open for use with the document.
11.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Checking Spelling
6 Click the correctly spelled word in the list to replace the suspect word with the one displayed, then click Replace.
7 Enter the correctly spelled word in the Replace with field to replace the suspect word with one not displayed in the list, then click
Replace. QuarkXPress replaces the current suspect word with the word you enter, then displays the next suspect word in the Suspect
Word field. When all the suspect words have been displayed,
QuarkXPress closes the dialog box.
Start spell check Keyboard command
Check Word
Check Story
Check Document
CTRL + W
CTRL + ALT + W
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + W
Check Spelling dialog box button
Lookup
Skip
Add
Keyboard command
ALT
+
L
ALT
+
S
ALT
+
A
8 Click Close to stop the spell checking process and keep changes already made.
S Tips
Unknown words
If QuarkXPress is unable to locate any similar words in either the dictionary file XPress.dct or an open auxiliary dictionary when you click
Lookup, the message “No similar words found” is displayed. Words in other languages and proper names often bring up this message.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 11.21
Text Basics
S Tips
Using auxiliary dictionaries
You can create as many auxiliary dictionaries as you want, but you can use only one at a time with a given document. Any number of documents can use a single auxiliary dictionary.
Default auxiliary dictionary
If you open an auxiliary dictionary when no document is open, the dictionary you open becomes the default auxiliary dictionary for all subsequently created documents.
Multiple dictionaries
Only one auxiliary dictionary at a time can be open for use with a document. However, the same dictionary can be used with any number of documents.
Using Auxiliary Dictionaries
Some documents contain specialized words that are not in the dictionary file XPress.dct. However, you can create your own auxiliary dictionaries that contain specialized words. Auxiliary dictionaries augment the dictionary file XPress.dct and make spell checking faster because fewer suspect words are identified. When you open an auxiliary dictionary for use with an active document, QuarkXPress uses the words in the auxiliary dictionary in addition to the 120,000 words contained in the dictionary file
XPress.dct. You can make copies of auxiliary dictionaries and exchange them with other QuarkXPress users.
Creating, opening, and closing auxiliary dictionaries
To create, open, or close an auxiliary dictionary:
1 Choose Utilities
& Auxiliary Dictionary;
• New: Enter a name for the dictionary you create in the File name field. Use the dialog box controls to select the volume and folder in which you want to save the auxiliary dictionary. Click New.
• Open: Use the controls in the dialog box to locate the dictionary you want to open. Select the dictionary and click Open.
• Close: Click Close to close an auxiliary dictionary. When no dictionary is open for use, the Current Default Auxiliary Dictionary field displays <None> and Close is not available.
11.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Using Auxiliary Dictionaries
Create auxiliary dictionaries for unique words (Utilities
& Auxiliary Dictionary & New).
Adding words to auxiliary dictionaries
Edit Auxiliary is available when an auxiliary dictionary is open for use with the active document or when a default auxiliary dictionary is open.
To add words to an open auxiliary dictionary:
1 Choose Utilities
& Edit Auxiliary.
2 Enter the new words you want in the field below the list; click Add after each word you enter to add it to the dictionary.
3 Click Save when you have finished adding words.
R To add words to an open auxiliary dictionary while you are checking the spelling of a document (Utilities
& Check Spelling), click
Add in the Check Word, Check Story, or Check Document dialog box. Pressing ALT + SHIFT while you click Close adds all suspect words found to the open auxiliary dictionary. Add is available when an auxiliary dictionary is open for use with the active document.
S Tips
Associating dictionaries
If an auxiliary dictionary is open for use with a document, it remains associated with that document (even if you save the document to another disk) until you click Close in the Auxiliary
Dictionary dialog box or until you open a different auxiliary dictionary.
Missing auxiliary dictionaries
Auxiliary dictionaries are saved as separate files on your hard drive. The path to the auxiliary dictionary is saved with the document. If you move an open auxiliary dictionary to another folder or disk, QuarkXPress will be unable to find it. To check the spelling of a document associated with a missing auxiliary dictionary, choose Utili- ties
& Auxiliary Dictionary, then locate and open the auxiliary dictionary. If you cannot locate the auxiliary dictionary, click Close.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 11.23
Typography
12
Confirming Typographic Preferences 12.3
Applying Character Attributes 12.5
Specifying Kerning and Tracking 12.13
Applying Paragraph Attributes 12.18
Specifying Alignment and Indents 12.19
Specifying Leading and Paragraph Spacing 12.22
Setting Tabs 12.25
Controlling Widow and Orphan Lines 12.28
Controlling Hyphenation and Justification 12.30
Working with Style Sheets 12.39
Positioning Text in Text Boxes 12.48
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Typography
12
Typography is an art form. To a typographer, the appearance of type is as important as the meaning of text. Carefully considering typefaces, type styles, leading, and spacing helps produce publications that appeal to the eye as well as the mind.
QuarkXPress gives you all the typographic options you need to create publications that communicate effectively, attractively, and memorably.
Confirming Typographic Preferences
Confirming Typographic Preferences
Typographic preferences affect the way the text flows in a document. If you change these preferences later in the publishing process, you may face text reflow. So plan ahead. When you create a new document, confirm that the typographic preferences meet your needs before you start working with text. Some of these preferences include customizable type styles, leading control, and baseline grid settings. The preferences that affect typography are in the Character and Paragraph tabs of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
For detailed information about the controls in these tabs, see the “Edit Menu” in Chapter 3, “Menus and Dialog Boxes.” To confirm typographic preferences:
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Document; then click the Paragraph tab (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
Y
). Confirm the settings; then click the Character tab.
S Tips
Setting default preferences
If you use the same preferences frequently, specify typographic preferences in the Paragraph and
Character tabs of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document) when no documents are open. The new setting will apply to all new documents.
Confirm the information in the Paragraph and Character tabs of the Document Prefer-
ences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document) before you start formatting text.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.3
Typography
2 Check and change any of the settings to suit your document, and catch your reader’s attention. In particular, check the different tabs to confirm that these document preferences meet your needs.
• Leading (Paragraph tab): If you are using auto leading, be sure to confirm the value in the Auto Leading field. Unless you are trying to match the line spacing of a document that originated in a word processing application, choose Typesetting for the Leading mode.
To keep line spacing consistent when lines of text touch the bottom of obstructing items, like a picture box, check Maintain Leading.
• Baseline Grid (Paragraph tab): If you are planning to lock paragraphs to a baseline grid to ensure that lines align from column to column, check the settings in the Baseline Grid area. The value in the Start field specifies the distance from the top of a page to the first line in the grid. The value in the Increment field determines the space between lines in the grid.
• Superscript, Subscript, Small Caps, and Superior (Character tab): You can customize these type styles on a document-wide basis. Note that Superscript and Subscript characters may cause uneven line spacing in paragraphs that use auto leading.
3 After confirming all the preferences, click OK.
12.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Character Attributes
Applying Character Attributes
QuarkXPress gives you precise control over type, letting you apply styles to text on a character-by-character basis. Each character can have almost any combination of the styles available, including font, size, type style, and color.
Styles for text, referred to as character attributes, are applied to highlighted text — or at the text insertion point i, to affect text entered thereafter.
Choosing a font
QuarkXPress has access to all the fonts currently installed and available on your system. You can apply a font choice to highlighted text or to the text insertion point i using any of the following options:
Style menu
Choose Style
& Font and choose a font from the submenu.
Measurements palette
Click the arrow < next to the current font name and choose a font from the list. You can also highlight the current font name in the field, enter the first few characters of the font name until it is recognized, and press ENTER .
S Tips
Style sheets
You can group character and paragraph attributes as a style sheet.
Using style sheets helps streamline production and maintain consistent formatting. See “Working with Style
Sheets” later in this chapter.
Symbols and Dingbats
You can enter one Symbol or Zapf
Dingbats character using keyboard commands rather than switching fonts. For one Symbol character, press
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
Q
, then the character. For one Zapf Dingbats character, press
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
Z
, then the character.
Choose a font for selected text from the right side of the Measurements palette.
Keyboard commands
You can change fonts quickly while you are typing by pressing CTRL + ALT +
SHIFT + M to jump directly to the font field in the Measurements palette.
Enter the first few characters of the font name until it is recognized, press ENTER , then continue typing. To choose the next font in the dropdown list, press CTRL +F9. For the previous font, press CTRL + SHIFT +F9.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.5
Typography
S Tips
Resizing text visually
You can resize all the text in a box by pressing modifier keys while dragging a text box handle.
• Press the
CTRL key to resize the box, point size, auto leading, and text scaling in proportion to the box dimensions.
• Press the
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT keys to resize the box, point size, auto leading, and text scaling in proportion to the original box dimensions.
You cannot use modifier keys to resize text when resizing a linked text box.
Choosing a size
QuarkXPress lets you use font sizes from 2 to 720 points. You can apply a font size to highlighted text or at the text insertion point i using any of the following options:
Style menu
Choose Style
& Size and choose a point size from the submenu. Or, choose Other (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+\) and enter a value in the Size field. Click OK.
Measurements palette
Click the arrow < next to the current font size to display a list of point sizes; choose a size from the list. You can also highlight the current font size in the field, enter a new point size, and press
ENTER
.
Choose a size for selected text from the right side of the Measurements palette.
Keyboard commands
QuarkXPress increases or decreases font sizes according to the following preset range: 7, 9, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 96, 120, 144, 168, and 192 points.
Change in font size
Increase 1 pt
Decrease 1 pt
Increase in preset range
Decrease in preset range
Command
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+>
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+<
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+>
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+<
Choosing type styles
Type styles can be applied in almost any combination, such as this
Bold Italic Underline. You can apply type styles to highlighted text or at the text insertion point i using any of the following options:
12.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Character Attributes
Style menu
Choose Style
& Type Style and choose a type style from the submenu.
To apply additional styles, reselect the Type Style submenu and make additional choices.
Character Attributes dialog box
Choose Style
& Character (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
D
) and click check boxes in the
Type Style area to specify styles.
Measurements palette and keyboard commands
Click one or more type style icons on the Measurements palette or press the appropriate keyboard commands.
Type Style
Plain
Bold
Italic
Underline
Word Underline
Strike Thru
Outline
Shadow
All Caps
Small Caps
Superscript
Subscript
Superior
Icon
W
?
O
S
P
B
I
U
K
H
+
_
M
Command
CTRL + SHIFT + P
CTRL + SHIFT + B
CTRL + SHIFT + I
CTRL + SHIFT + U
CTRL + SHIFT + W
CTRL + SHIFT +/
CTRL + SHIFT + O
CTRL + SHIFT + S
CTRL + SHIFT + K
CTRL + SHIFT + H
CTRL + SHIFT +0
CTRL + SHIFT +9
CTRL + SHIFT + V
R Some type styles are mutually exclusive and cannot be combined:
Underline and Word Underline, Small Caps and All Caps, and
Superscript and Subscript.
Choosing a color and shade
QuarkXPress lists all the colors defined for a document — default colors, colors created in the Colors dialog box (Edit menu), and spot col-
S Tips
Removing styles from selected text
To remove a type style from highlighted text, choose the Type Style submenu option again, click the
Measurements palette icon again, or press the keyboard command again. To remove all styles from selected text, choose Plain. You can also uncheck style options in the
Type Style area in the Character
Attributes dialog box (Style
&
Character).
Customizing type styles
You can customize the Superscript,
Subscript, Small Caps, and Supe-
rior type styles for a document via the Character tab in the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document). For example, you can make Small Caps characters taller or specify that Sub-
script characters drop lower.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.7
Typography
S Tips
Reverse type
To create reverse type, use light text in a text box with a dark background.
You can also position reverse type within an anchored rule. See “Specifying Anchored Rules” in Chapter 13,
“Graphics in Typography.” ors imported with EPS picture files. You can apply a color and shade to highlighted text or at the text insertion point i using any of the following options:
Style menu
Choose Style
& Color and choose a color from the submenu. Choose
Style
& Shade and choose a percentage value from the submenu. Or, choose Style
& Shade & Other and enter a value in the Shade field of the Character Attributes dialog box. Click OK.
Colors palette
Choose View
& Show Colors (F12). Click the text icon T, then click one of the colors listed. Click the Shade drop-down arrow < next to the current shade percentage to display a list of values; choose a percentage from the list. You can also highlight the current shade value in the field, enter a new value, and press
ENTER
.
The text icon
T and the shade percentage drop-down list at the top of the Colors palette let you choose a color and shade for selected text.
12.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Character Attributes
Applying horizontal or vertical scale
QuarkXPress lets you condense or expand characters so they are narrower or wider, and taller or shorter than specified in the original font.
You can apply horizontal/vertical scaling to highlighted text or at the text insertion point i using any of the following options:
Style menu
Choose Style
& Horizontal/Vertical Scale. Choose Horizontal or Verti-
cal from the Scale drop-down list and enter a value in the field. Click OK.
Keyboard commands
The keyboard commands work for both horizontal or vertical scale.
If a range of text is highlighted that has both horizontal and vertical scale applied, the keyboard commands will increase or decrease the text accordingly.
Change in scale
Expand 5%
Condense 5%
Expand 1%
Condense 1%
Command
CTRL +]
CTRL +[
CTRL + ALT +]
CTRL + ALT +[
S Tips
The effect of scaling on font design
Overscaling characters can have an undesirable effect on the font design. You may want to print samples of scaled text to ensure that none of the strokes are too thick or too thin.
Mgh
Mgh Mgh
This example shows 30-point type scaled 150% vertically (at left), normal (middle), and 150% horizontally (at right).
R You cannot apply horizontal and vertical scaling values simultaneously. When you apply a vertical scale to horizontally scaled text, the text reverts to a horizontal scale of 100%. When you apply a horizontal scale to vertically scaled text, the text reverts to a vertical scale of 100%.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.9
Typography
Changing text baselines
QuarkXPress lets you place characters above or below their baseline without affecting paragraph spacing. A positive value raises the text; a negative value lowers the text. You can apply baseline shift to highlighted text or at the text insertion point i using any of the following options:
Style menu
Choose Style
& Baseline Shift and enter a value in the Baseline Shift field. Click OK.
Keyboard commands
Keyboard commands let you shift characters up or down one point.
Shift characters
Up 1 pt
Down 1 pt
Command
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +0
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +9
Q ua Prreessss
This example shows 24-point type, the Q has a baseline shift value of –5, the X a value of 5.
R When you change the size of characters that have a baseline shift applied, the baseline shift value is automatically increased or decreased proportionally.
12.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Character Attributes
Applying multiple character attributes
You can view and edit all character attributes at one time using the
Character Attributes dialog box. This dialog box combines many Style menu commands and indicates the style of highlighted text or new text entered at the text insertion point i. To quickly specify multiple character attributes:
1 Choose Style
& Character (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
D
).
Apply multiple character attributes in one step with the Character Attributes dialog box
(Style menu).
2 Choose a font from the Font drop-down list. You can also highlight the current font name in the field and enter the first few characters of the new font name until it is recognized.
3 Choose a point size from the Size drop-down list. You can also highlight the current font size in the field and enter a new point size.
4 Choose a color from the Color drop-down list.
5 Choose a color percentage from the Shade drop-down list. You can also highlight the current shade and enter a new percentage value.
6 Choose Horizontal or Vertical from the Scale drop-down list and enter a percentage value in the field.
7 Enter a value in the Track Amount field.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.11
Typography
S Tips
Blank fields with character attributes
If you enter a value in a blank field in the Character Attributes dialog box, that value will be applied to all the highlighted text. If you check or uncheck a gray check box, that style setting will be applied to or removed from all highlighted text.
If no text is highlighted, the Track Amount field is replaced by the
Kern Amount field. However, only the current character pair, between which the Text Insertion bar i is placed, can be kerned. The
Kern Amount field is unavailable if the Text Insertion bar i is at the beginning of a paragraph. See “Specifying Kerning and Tracking” later in this chapter.
8 Enter a value in the Baseline Shift field.
9 Use the check boxes in the Type Style area to apply and remove type styles. To remove all type styles, check Plain.
10 When you are finished specifying character attributes, click OK.
R Blank fields and gray check boxes in the Character Attributes dialog box indicate that multiple styles are applied to highlighted text.
For example, if the Font field is blank, then more than one font is applied to the highlighted text.
12.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Kerning and Tracking
Specifying Kerning and Tracking
Kerning is the adjustment of space between character pairs. Because of their shapes, certain character pairs look better when kerned. QuarkXPress can perform kerning automatically, and you can also use manual kerning controls to specify additional kerning between characters. Tracking lets you adjust the space between highlighted characters and words for copyfitting and special typographic effects.
S Tips
Accurate kerning
For detailed kerning work, increase your view scale to 400% or 800%.
Then, check the kerning at Actual
Size within the context of the entire layout. Be sure to confirm the kerning on printed output as well.
Kerning text
Kerning lets you adjust the amount of space between two characters. Kerning values are expressed as 1 ⁄
200 of an em space. The em space used for kerning increments is determined by the Standard Em Space setting in the
Character tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Prefer- ences
& Document). Check Standard Em Space for an em space that is equivalent to the point size of the text (for example, 24-point text has a
24-point em space). Uncheck Standard Em Space to use the QuarkXPress defined em space, which is the width of two zeros in a given font. A standard em space is generally smaller than a QuarkXPress em space.
Va Va Va
This example shows the effect of –20 (– 20 ⁄
200 em) kerning between the V and the a on the left, no kerning in the middle, and +20 ( 20 ⁄
200 em) kerning on the right.
Because kerning is expressed as a fraction of an em space relative to the font and size of the characters, rather than as an absolute value, kerning
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.13
Typography
S Tips
Manual and automatic kerning
When Auto Kern Above is checked in the Character tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document), auto kerning is applied in addition to manual kerning if the point size is larger than the value specified. Manual kerning is always applied whether the check box is or is not checked.
adjustments that you apply to a character pair will remain proportional if you later change the font size of the kerned characters.
A positive kerning value increases the amount of space between characters; a negative value decreases it. When text is highlighted, Kern is replaced by Track in the Style menu. Kern is not available when the
Text Insertion bar i immediately precedes the first character in a paragraph. Place the Text Insertion bar i between the two characters you want to kern, then use any of the following options to apply kerning.
Style menu
Choose Style
& Kern and enter a value in the Kern Amount field. Click OK.
Measurements palette
Select the kerning field, enter a new value, and press
ENTER
. Or, click the kerning icons
N to increase or decrease kerning in
1 ⁄
20
-em increments.
Press the
ALT key and click the icons to kern in 1 ⁄
200
-em increments.
Click the kerning icons
N on the Measurements palette to adjust kerning when the Text Insertion bar i is between two characters.
Keyboard commands
Keyboard commands let you increase and decrease kerning values in
1 ⁄
20
-em and 1 ⁄
200
-em increments.
Change in kerning
Increase 1 ⁄
20
-em
Decrease 1 ⁄
20
-em
Increase 1 ⁄
200
-em
Decrease 1 ⁄
200
-em
Command
CTRL + SHIFT +}
CTRL + SHIFT +{
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +}
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +{
12.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Kerning and Tracking
Kerning automatically
You can specify that QuarkXPress automatically kern text above a specific point size using the kerning tables built into most fonts and any kerning tables you have edited with the Kern/Track Editor. To specify automatic kerning for the active document:
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Document (
CTRL
+
Y
); then click the
Character tab.
S Tips
Automatic kerning
Why use the Auto Kern Above feature? Because it does a lot of detailed kerning work for you. And, it does it according to the font designer’s specifications. In general, use automatic kerning and set Auto
Kern Above to 2 or 4 points so all text is automatically kerned.
Specify automatic kerning using the Auto Kern Above check box and field in the Character tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
2 Check Auto Kern Above.
3 To specify the point size above which text will be automatically kerned, enter a value in the field.
4 Click OK.
Editing kerning tables
When QuarkXPress performs automatic kerning, the program uses kerning information that is built into the font. This information is stored in the font’s kerning table. A kerning table contains a number of character pairs — Ta, for example — and an associated kerning value for each pair
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.15
Typography
S Tips
Using tracking for copyfitting
Tracking is commonly used for copyfitting — for example, negative tracking is often used to pull up an orphan.
However, too much tracking can interfere with design and readability.
When you are using tracking for copyfitting, consider these guidelines:
• Track whole paragraphs rather than one line or one word.
• Establish guidelines for tracking, for example from +3 to –3.
• Make sure vertically adjacent paragraphs have similar tracking applied.
These are general rules; appropriate tracking values depend on the design, font, column width, etc. in the table. When QuarkXPress displays characters on-screen and prints them, it uses the font’s kerning table information.
Editing a font’s kerning table reduces the need for extensive manual kerning. To edit a font’s kerning table, use the Kern/Track Editor XTensions software included with QuarkXPress. For information about kerning controls available through the Kern/Track Editor XTensions software, see the
“Utilities Menu” section in Chapter 3, “Menus and Dialog Boxes.”
Tracking text
Tracking lets you adjust the space between highlighted characters and words for copyfitting and special typographic effects. Tracking values are expressed as 1 ⁄
200 of an em space. The em space used for tracking increments is determined by the Standard Em Space setting in the Character tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document). Check Standard Em Space for an em space that is equivalent to the point size of the text (for example, 24-point text has a 24point em space). Uncheck Standard Em Space to use the QuarkXPress defined em space, which is the width of two zeros in a given font. A standard em space is generally smaller than a QuarkXPress em space.
M g h Mgh
This example shows 36-point type tracked +20 ( 20 ⁄
200 em) left, and –20 (– 20 ⁄
200 em) right.
A positive tracking value increases the space to the right of each character; a negative value decreases it. When no text is highlighted, Track is replaced by Kern in the Style menu. Highlight the text you want to track, then use any of the following options to apply tracking:
12.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Kerning and Tracking
Style menu
Choose Style
& Track and enter a value in the Track Amount field.
Click OK.
Measurements palette and Keyboard commands
Select the tracking field, enter a new value, and press
ENTER
. Or, click the tracking icons
N to increase or decrease tracking in
1 ⁄
20
-em increments.
Press the
ALT key and click the icons to track in 1 ⁄
200
-em increments.
Click the tracking icons
N on the Measurements palette to adjust the tracking of highlighted text.
Keyboard commands
Keyboard commands let you increase and decrease tracking values in
1 ⁄
20
-em and 1 ⁄
200
-em increments.
Change in tracking
Increase 1 ⁄
20
-em
Decrease 1 ⁄
20
-em
Increase 1 ⁄
200
-em
Decrease 1 ⁄
200
-em
Command
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+}
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+{
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+}
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+{
Editing tracking tables
If you are applying tracking to most of your text, you can save time by editing the font’s tracking tables. To edit a font’s tracking table, use the
Kern/Track Editor included with QuarkXPress. For information about tracking controls available through the Kern/Track Editor, see the “Utilities Menu” in Chapter 3, “Menus and Dialog Boxes.”
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.17
Typography
S Tips
Style sheets
You can specify paragraph formats when creating style sheets. This lets you quickly apply a number of formats at one time. When you modify the paragraph attributes of a style sheet, all the paragraphs to which that style sheet has been applied are automatically updated to reflect the modifications.
Copying paragraph formats
You can copy paragraph formats from one paragraph to other paragraphs in the same box or text chain. To copy paragraph formats, select the paragraph or range of paragraphs that you want to change, then press the
ALT and
SHIFT keys while clicking anywhere in the paragraph whose formats you want to copy.
Rules as paragraph attributes
Using rules in text is covered in
“Specifying Anchored Rules” in Chapter 13, “Graphics in Typography.”
Applying Paragraph Attributes
QuarkXPress gives you precise control over the spacing of text by specifying paragraph attributes like the alignment, indents, leading, and tabs.
Paragraph attributes are applied to the selected paragraph (the paragraph containing the Text Insertion bar i ) or to a range of highlighted paragraphs via the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
& Formats). Some paragraph attributes are also available on the Measurements palette. To apply attributes to selected paragraphs:
1 Choose Style
& Formats (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
F
).
2 Change any of the settings in the Formats and Tabs tabs. For information about specific controls in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box, see the “Style Menu for Text” in Chapter 3, “Menus and Dialog
Boxes” and the remainder of this chapter.
• You can enter values in fields using any QuarkXPress supported measurement system. When you enter a value without specifying a measurement system, QuarkXPress uses the default measurement system selected from the Horizontal Measure or Vertical Measure drop-down list in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document). Leading is always displayed in points.
• A blank field in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box or the Meas-
urements palette indicates that more than one value is specified for the selected paragraphs.
3 If you want to see the effect of the changes, click Apply.
4 Click OK.
12.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Alignment and Indents
Specifying Alignment and Indents
QuarkXPress lets you specify how paragraphs are spaced horizontally in a column or text box using alignment and indent controls. Alignment and indents are both measured from the Text Inset specified in the Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu). The Text Inset value affects all sides of a text box; it does not affect the inner columns of a text box.
Alignments
QuarkXPress includes five paragraph alignments: Left, Centered, Right,
Justified, and Forced.
• Left: Aligns selected paragraphs with the left indent, or flush left.
• Centered: Aligns selected paragraphs between left and right indents.
• Right: Aligns selected paragraphs with the right indent, or flush right.
• Justified: Aligns selected paragraphs with both the left and right indents. Space is added or removed between characters and/or words to extend from the left indent to the right indent, except for the last line.
• Forced: Aligns all lines between left and right indents, like Justified, but includes the last line.
Specifying alignment
You can specify the alignment of selected paragraphs using any of the following options:
S Tips
Justifying a single word on a line
To specify that a single word alone on a line in a justified paragraph extends from the left indent to the right indent, check Single Word Justify
(Edit
& H&Js & Edit) for the H&J that is applied to that paragraph.
Justifying the last line of text
The last line of a justified paragraph is justified when text falls within the paragraph’s Flush Zone (Edit
&
H&Js
& Edit). To justify all lines in a paragraph, no matter how short the last line may be, choose Forced.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.19
Typography
S Tips
Creating a hanging indent
To create a hanging indent, specify a positive Left Indent and a negative
First Line indent or drag the indent icons on the column ruler. Use the
Apply button in the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
& Formats) to experiment with the hanging indent.
Using the Indent Here character
In addition to setting up hanging indents as a paragraph attribute, you can enter a special character that forces the indenting of all lines of text from that point to the next paragraph return. Press
CTRL
+\ to enter a special Indent Here character.
Style menu
Choose Style
& Alignment and choose an alignment from the submenu. Or, choose Style
& Formats (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
F
). Choose an option from the Alignment drop-down list. Click OK.
Measurements palette and keyboard commands
Click an alignment icon on the Measurements palette or press the appropriate keyboard command.
Alignment
Left
Centered
Right
Justified
Forced
Icon
{
}
[
$
]
Command
CTRL + SHIFT + L
CTRL + SHIFT + C
CTRL + SHIFT + R
CTRL + SHIFT + J
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + J
Specifying indents
You can indent paragraphs from the left and right edges of a box or column, and specify a unique indent for the first line of a paragraph. To specify indents for selected paragraphs:
1 Choose Style
& Formats (
CTRL + SHIFT + F ).
A ruler displays above the column containing the first selected paragraph. The ruler contains triangular icons for specifying paragraph indents. Drag the icons to change the indents: left
K, first line k, and right
J . When a paragraph in a rotated or skewed text box is selected, the ruler only displays within the dialog box.
Choosing Style
& Formats will display a ruler above the column containing the first selected paragraph.
12.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Alignment and Indents
Enter values in the Left Indent, First Line, and Right Indent fields in the Formats tab of the
Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
& Formats) to specify indents.
2 To specify how far a paragraph is indented from the left edge of a box or column, enter a value in the Left Indent field.
3 To specify how far the first line of a paragraph is indented from the
Left Indent value, enter a value in the First Line field.
First Line indent is relative to the Left Indent applied to a paragraph. For example, if you specify a Left Indent of .5", and a First
Line indent of .5", the first line will begin 1" from the left edge of the text box.
4 To specify how far a paragraph is indented from the right edge of a box or column, enter a value in the Right Indent field. Click OK.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.21
Typography
S Tips
Leading method preference
The Paragraph tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document) contains a drop-down list that lets you set leading in Typesetting mode or Word
Processing mode. In Typesetting mode, leading is measured from baseline to baseline. In Word Processing mode, leading is measured from the ascent of a line to the ascent of the next line. Typesetting mode is the default (and is the preferred method of measuring leading). Word Process-
ing mode is included to provide compatibility with the leading methods of some word processing programs.
Specifying Leading and Paragraph Spacing
QuarkXPress gives you precise control over the space between lines in paragraphs and the space between paragraphs. Leading is a measure of line spacing — the distance between text baselines in paragraphs. When you specify a leading value, it is applied to all lines in selected paragraphs.
Space before/after controls let you specify the amount of space before and after selected paragraphs. Leading and space before/space after can both be specified in style sheets.
Methods for specifying leading
QuarkXPress lets you specify leading by three methods: absolute leading, incremental auto leading, and percentage-based auto leading. Default auto leading may be either incremental or percentage-based.
Absolute leading
Absolute leading sets the distance between baselines of text to a specific value, regardless of the size of characters on the lines. For example, if you specify an absolute leading value of 16 points for a paragraph, all baselines will be spaced 16 points apart. When specifying absolute leading, use a value that is the total vertical distance you want between text baselines.
Incremental auto leading
Incremental auto leading combines a base amount of auto leading with an absolute value specified in the Leading field (Style menu). Incremental leading values must be preceded by a plus (+) or minus (–) sign.
12.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Leading and Paragraph Spacing
Default auto leading
Entering the word “auto” or a “0” in the Leading field (Style menu) tells
QuarkXPress to use the value in the Auto Leading field of the Docu-
ment Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document &
Paragraph tab) to decide whether percentage-based or incremental auto leading occurs. The default — percentage-based — takes the base amount of auto leading and adds to it a fixed percentage of the largest font size on the upper line to determine the total amount of leading between an auto-leaded line and the line above it. The default value for percentagebased auto leading is 20%.
R If fonts or font sizes are mixed and matched, an auto-leaded paragraph may have a different amount of space between each line.
Auto leading starts with a base amount of leading, which
QuarkXPress determines by looking at the user-specified font size, then calculating the ascent and descent values built into the fonts used in each line.
S Tips
Specifying leading values
The default measurement unit for leading is points, however you can specify leading values using any of the measurement systems
QuarkXPress supports. The value entered is always converted to points for display.
Specifying leading
You can specify the leading of selected paragraphs using any of the following options:
Style menu
Choose Style
& Leading (
CTRL + SHIFT + E ). Enter an absolute leading value, an incremental leading value (preceded by a plus or minus sign), or the word “auto” in the Leading field. Click OK.
Measurements palette
Select the leading field, enter an absolute leading value, an incremental leading value (preceded by a plus or minus sign), or the word “auto” in the leading field. Or, click the leading icons n to increase or decrease leading in 1 point increments.
Specify leading for selected paragraphs in the leading field of the Measurements palette.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.23
Typography
S
Set solid
Tips
The typesetting term set solid refers to lines of text that have no additional space between lines. For example, 10-point type with 10-point leading is set solid. When you apply a leading value of +0, lines of text are set solid no matter what fonts or font sizes they contain.
Keyboard commands
Press the appropriate keyboard command.
Leading change
Increase 1-point
Decrease 1-point
Increase .1-point
Decrease .1-point
Command
CTRL + SHIFT +’
CTRL + SHIFT +;
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +’
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +;
R When you use the leading icons or keyboard commands to adjust auto-leaded paragraphs, QuarkXPress first converts the auto leading value to the closest absolute value (based on the largest font size in the paragraph). QuarkXPress then adds or subtracts the amount you specify via the leading icons or keyboard commands. For example, a paragraph of 10-point text with 20% auto leading applied is converted to 12 points of absolute leading. Then, pressing CTRL + SHIFT +; reduces the absolute leading to 11 points.
Specifying space before and after paragraphs
QuarkXPress lets you specify an absolute amount of space to place before and after a paragraph. The alternative, adding space by entering paragraph returns, can result in inconsistent line spacing.
To specify the amount of space between selected paragraphs, choose
Style
& Formats (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
F
). Enter values in the Space Before and/or
Space After fields. The sum of the values in the Space Before and Space
After fields determines the total space between paragraphs. Click OK.
R The Space Before feature does not place space before the first paragraph in a column or text box. To control the space at the top of a column or text box, use the controls in the First Baseline area of the Text tab in the Modify dialog box (Item menu).
12.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Setting Tabs
Setting Tabs
Tabs let you position text consistently. Use tabs when you want to create columnar tables, or to move text more than a single word space.
QuarkXPress has six kinds of tab stops: Left 1, Center 3, Right 2,
Decimal 5, Comma p, and Align On s. Tabs are paragraph attributes, and can be specified in style sheets. If you do not set custom tabs, QuarkXPress sets default left-aligned tabs every half-inch.
Setting tab stops
You can precisely control how text aligns on a tab stop. Most tabs used in text have left alignment, but you may use centered or right alignment in tables. When creating tables or columns, aligning text on characters is useful for keeping text and numbers aligned properly. You can align tabs on a decimal point, comma, or any character. To set tabs for selected paragraph(s):
1 Choose Style
& Tabs (
CTRL + SHIFT + T ).
A ruler displays above the column containing the first selected paragraph. The ruler is useful for previewing and modifying tabs in the selected paragraphs.
Because of document or screen size restrictions, both ends of the tab ruler may not be visible. To view either end of the ruler, drag a tab stop indicator to the left or the right end; the ruler and page will scroll to display the hidden portion. When a paragraph in a rotated or skewed text box is selected, the ruler only displays within the Tabs tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box.
S Tips
Viewing tabs in text
To view tab characters on-screen, choose View
& Show Invisibles.
Tabs are displayed as 8 arrows.
Creating right-indent tabs
Press
SHIFT
+
TAB to create a rightindent tab, which lets you align characters flush with the right indent. A right-indent tab overrides all other tabs for the paragraph. This tab is useful, for example, when you want to place an end of story icon.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.25
Typography
S Tips
Specifying incremental tabs
You can create a series of tabs that are a specific distance apart from each other by using math operators in the Position field. Place the first tab, click Set, then add the distance to it in the Position field. For example, if you have a tab at p9, you can create another tab 9 picas away by selecting the tab at p9 and clicking
Set. Then enter “+p9” after the “p9” in the Position field . Click
Set again. You can add (+), subtract
(-), multiply (*), and divide (/) values in any QuarkXPress fields.
Specify tabs (left) using the icons and fields in the Tabs tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
& Formats). A ruler displays above the column containing the first selected paragraph (right).
2 Click a tab icon to specify the tab alignment, then drag it into position on the tab ruler.
• Left 1 aligns text flush left on the tab stop.
• Center 3 aligns text centrally on that tab stop.
• Right 2 aligns text flush right on the tab stop.
• Decimal 5 aligns text on a decimal point (period).
• Comma p aligns text on a first comma.
• Align On s aligns text on any character you specify. When you select this tab, the Align On field is displayed. Highlight the existing entry, and enter the character to align on.
You can also click the tab icon, enter a value in the Position field, and click Set. When you click Set, it deselects the current tab selection in the ruler.
12.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Setting Tabs
3 To insert fill characters (characters that alternate to fill the space between text and tab stops, as in a table of contents), enter up to two characters or spaces in the Fill Character field. Click OK.
R If you choose Decimal or Comma alignment, the tab will align on one of those characters, or on the first non-numeric character following a numeral. This lets you correctly align columns containing numbers in parentheses.
Modifying and deleting tabs
As your text and design change, you may need to modify and delete tabs. To modify tabs in selected paragraphs:
1 Choose Style
& Tabs (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
T
).
2 Click a tab icon ( 1 , 2 , 3 , 5 , p , s ) on the ruler to select it. Information about the tab is displayed in the fields.
• To modify a tab’s alignment, click another tab icon in the dialog box. If you click Align On, enter a character in the Align On field.
• To modify a tab’s position, drag it on the ruler or enter a new value in the Position field.
• To modify a tab’s fill character, highlight the Fill Character field and enter up to two new characters.
• To delete a tab, drag it off the ruler.
• To delete all tabs, click Clear All, or press the ALT key while clicking on the tab ruler.
3 Click OK.
R When you delete tabs, existing tabs in the document revert to the default spacing of .5" apart.
S Tips
Specifying tabs in style sheets
If you repeatedly use the same set of specifications to align tabular material in a document, you may want to create a style sheet with the appropriate character attributes, paragraph attributes, tab settings, and rules.
This will save you the work of reconstructing similarly formatted material.
Editing tabs in the Normal paragraph style sheet
The Normal paragraph style sheet is automatically applied when you start typing in a new text box. By default, tab spaces are .5" apart. You can edit the Normal style sheet for a specific document, or you can edit it when no documents are open so the changes apply to all new documents.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.27
Typography
S Tips
Specifying Keep with Next ¶ and
Keep Lines Together in style sheets
Generally, you will specify Keep
with Next ¶ for your headline and subhead style sheets. If you have two-line headlines and subheads, you may want to specify Keep Lines
Together, with All Lines in ¶ checked. Then, you will probably specify Keep Lines Together (usually with Start and End parameters) for your body text style sheets.
Controlling Widow and Orphan Lines
QuarkXPress lets you control two kinds of typographically undesirable lines known as widows and orphans. Traditionally, a widow is defined as the last line of a paragraph that falls at the top of a column. An orphan is the first line of a paragraph that falls at the bottom of a column.
Using the Keep Lines Together feature, you can choose not to break paragraphs so that if all the lines in a paragraph do not fit in a column or on a page, the whole paragraph will flow to the top of the next column or page.
Or you can specify the number of lines that must be left at the bottom of a column or box, and at the top of the following column or box, when a paragraph is broken. Using the Keep with Next ¶ feature, you can keep a paragraph together with the paragraph that follows it. This lets you keep a subhead together with the paragraph that follows it, and keeps other lines of text that logically go together from being separated.
Keeping paragraphs together
The Keep with Next ¶ feature forces a one-line paragraph to flow with the paragraph that follows it. If the paragraph is longer than one line, the last line will flow with the next paragraph (unless you also specify
Keep Lines Together for the paragraph). This prevents a subhead from remaining at the bottom of a column when its associated paragraph flows to the top of the next column. To specify Keep with Next ¶:
12.28
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Controlling Widow and Orphan Lines
1 Select the paragraph that you want to stay with the next paragraph.
2 Choose Style
& Formats (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
F
).
3 Check Keep with Next ¶. Click OK.
R You can select multiple paragraphs and specify Keep with Next ¶, if they are all one line paragraphs, or used with Keep Lines
Together. However, if you try to keep more paragraphs together than will fit in a column, you will end up with text overflow.
Keeping lines together
The Keep Lines Together feature specifies whether lines in paragraphs flow together or are separated when they reach the bottoms of columns.
This can prevent the first line of a paragraph from remaining at the bottom of a column or the last line from flowing to the top of a column. To specify Keep Lines Together for selected paragraphs:
1 Choose Style
& Formats (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
F
).
2 Check Keep Lines Together, and click one of the following options:
• Click All Lines in ¶ to keep all the lines of a paragraph in the same column or box, rather than breaking at the bottom. The paragraph is treated as an indivisible unit.
• Click Start and enter a value in the Start field to specify the number of lines to keep together at the bottom of a column or box when a paragraph must be broken. Enter a value in the End field to specify the number of lines to keep together at the top of a column or box when a paragraph must be broken.
The default value of 2 for both Start and End prevents single lines from occurring at either the bottom or top of a column, thus avoiding widows and orphans.
3 Click OK.
S Tips
Obstructing boxes
If you apply either Keep Lines
Together or Keep with Next ¶ to paragraphs and the column that contains the paragraphs is obstructed by an item that divides the column or text box into two parts, QuarkXPress flows the lines of text around the obstruction so that Keep Lines
Together and/or Keep with Next ¶ specifications are maintained.
Text overflow
A single paragraph that is too large to fit in a single column or box will result in text overflow, and the Text
Overflow icon t displays at the bottom of the text box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.29
Typography
S Tips
Editing default H&Js
If you create or edit H&Js with no documents open, the changes affect all new documents. If you create or edit H&Js with a document open, the changes affect the active document.
If you make the same changes to the
Standard H&J often, you may want to edit it with no documents open.
Adjusting word and character spacing
QuarkXPress lets you adjust word and character spacing in a number of ways. H&J specifications, local kerning and tracking, kerning tables, and customized tracking tables can combine to affect overall word and character spacing.
Controlling Hyphenation and Justification
QuarkXPress lets you group hyphenation rules and justification settings as a single specification that you can apply to paragraphs. You can create a number of H&J specifications for a single document. Because H&J is a paragraph attribute, you can apply one set of hyphenation rules and justification settings to some paragraphs, and apply different settings to other paragraphs with different needs. You can edit an H&J specification after it has been applied to paragraphs. When you edit an H&J specification, paragraphs to which it is applied are reflowed according to the modified hyphenation rules and justification settings.
QuarkXPress also lets you control hyphenation by creating lists of hyphenation exceptions. Using the Hyphenation Exceptions feature, you can specify that words are not hyphenated or that they hyphenate between certain syllables.
Creating H&Js
QuarkXPress provides a default H&J called Standard. Standard is the default H&J specified for the Normal paragraph style sheet and for all newly created paragraph style sheets. To create additional H&Js:
12.30
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Controlling Hyphenation and Justification
1 Choose Edit
& H&Js (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+F11).
Create new H&J specifications from the H&Js dialog box (Edit menu).
2 Click New.
Specify H&J variables from the Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box.
3 Enter a descriptive name for the H&J in the Name field. For example, you might name the H&J “body copy.”
4 Check Auto Hyphenation to have QuarkXPress automatically hyphenate paragraphs to the specifications set in this area.
• Smallest Word: Enter a value from 3 to 20 to specify the minimum number of characters a word must contain to be hyphenated.
S Tips
Adding discretionary hyphens
In addition to hyphenating text automatically, you can control line breaks and text flow by inserting manual, or discretionary hyphens (
CTRL
+ –). Discretionary hyphens are inserted only when words are broken at the ends of lines.
Discretionary hyphens in a row
As true with words in general, the
Hyphens in a Row and Hyphen-
ation Zone values specified for a paragraph’s H&J also affect the way
QuarkXPress hyphenates words in which you have entered discretionary hyphens. If hyphenating a word at a discretionary hyphenation point would violate one of these rules, the word will not hyphenate.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.31
Typography
S Tips
Preventing a word from hyphenating
You can prevent a word from hyphenating by entering a discretionary hyphen (
CTRL
+–) immediately before it or by entering the word in your Hyphenation Exceptions
(Utilities menu).
• Minimum Before: Enter a value from 1 to 6 to specify the smallest number of characters that must precede an automatic hyphen.
• Minimum After: Enter a value from 2 to 8 to specify the smallest number of characters that must follow an automatic hyphen.
• Break Capitalized Words: Check this to enable hyphenation for words that start with an uppercase character (for example, proper nouns and the first words of sentences).
5 Enter a value in the Hyphens in a Row field to specify the maximum number of consecutive lines that can end in manually or automatically hyphenated words. If you do not want to limit the number of consecutive lines that end with a hyphen, choose Unlimited from the drop-down list or enter a “0” in the field.
6 Enter a value in the Hyphenation Zone field to specify the area within which hyphenation (automatic or manual) can occur. The Hyphen-
ation Zone is measured from the right indent to the end of a line of text. Hyphenation Zone values apply only to nonjustified paragraphs.
• When you specify a Hyphenation Zone greater than 0",
QuarkXPress hyphenates a word only when: (1) the previous word ends before the Hyphenation Zone and (2) an acceptable hyphenation point falls within the Hyphenation Zone. Hyphenation
Zone values apply only to nonjustified text.
• A Hyphenation Zone value of 0" means that there is no Hyphen-
ation Zone. In this case, QuarkXPress either hyphenates a word according to the other hyphenation criteria or wraps it to the next line if it will not fit completely on the line.
7 Enter values in the Justification Method area to specify how words and characters are spaced. The values in the Minimum and Maxi-
mum fields apply to paragraphs with Justified or Forced alignment
(Style
& Alignment). The values in the Optimum fields apply to all paragraphs, regardless of their alignment.
12.32
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Controlling Hyphenation and Justification
Specify the justification method for H&Js in the Justification Method area.
• Minimum Space: Enter a value in the Minimum Space field to specify the minimum amount of space between words in justified paragraphs.
• Optimum Space: Enter a value in the Optimum Space field to specify the optimum amount of space between words in justified and nonjustified paragraphs.
• Maximum Space: Enter a value in the Maximum Space field to specify the maximum amount of space between words in justified paragraphs.
• Minimum Char: Enter a value in the Minimum Character field to specify the minimum amount of space between characters in justified paragraphs.
• Optimum Char: Enter a value in the Optimum Character field to specify the optimum amount of space between characters in justified and nonjustified paragraphs.
• Maximum Char: Enter a value in the Maximum Character field to specify the maximum amount of space between characters in justified paragraphs.
8 Enter a value in the Flush Zone field to specify the area within which the last word in the last line of a justified paragraph must fall in order
S Tips
Understanding value fields
The values in the Minimum, Opti-
mum, and Maximum Space fields in the Justification Method area are expressed as a percentage of the normal space width in a font. The width of spaces in justified text will vary according to these values.
The values in the Minimum, Opti-
mum, and Maximum Character fields are expressed as a percentage of the width of an en space that can be added or removed between characters. The intercharacter spacing of characters other than spaces within justified text will be adjusted to these values.
The definition of an em space varies in
QuarkXPress depending on whether you check Standard Em Space in the
Character tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.33
Typography
S Tips
Justifying last lines
Use Forced alignment (Style
&
Alignment) to justify the last line of a paragraph even if it does not fall within the Flush Zone specified for the paragraph’s H&J. The last line must have a paragraph return after it for this to work. Forced alignment also overrides the Single Word
Justify setting. to be justified. If you enter 1", the last line of a paragraph to which the H&J specification is applied must extend to within 1" of the right indent to be justified.
9 Check Single Word Justify to specify that a single word on a line in a justified paragraph extends from the left indent to the right indent. If
Single Word Justify is unchecked, a single word on a line will be leftaligned.
10 Click OK; then click Save in the H&Js dialog box.
R When you find a word that does not hyphenate the way you prefer, you may want to add it to your list of hyphenation exceptions (Utili- ties
& Hyphenation Exceptions) discussed later in this chapter.
Applying H&Js
Each paragraph in QuarkXPress has an H&J associated with it, because each paragraph style sheet specifies an H&J. Usually you will specify an
H&J that is appropriate to the information in the paragraph — for example, the H&J applied to body text may hyphenate text automatically while the H&J applied to headlines may prevent hyphenation.
To change the H&J applied to selected paragraphs, choose Style
& For-
mats (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
F
). Choose an option from the H&J drop-down list and click OK.
12.34
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Controlling Hyphenation and Justification
Editing, duplicating, and deleting H&Js
The H&Js dialog box (Edit menu) lets you edit, duplicate, and delete a document’s H&Js. Select an H&J in the list and click one of these buttons:
• Edit opens the H&J so you can modify it.
• Duplicate creates a copy of the H&J that you can rename and modify.
• Delete removes the H&J from the list and lets you choose a replacement H&J for all instances of the deleted H&J.
After you modify the H&Js used in a document, the text will reflow accordingly.
Appending H&Js
Using the Append feature, you can import H&J settings from other documents rather than recreating them.
1 Choose Edit
& H&Js (
CTRL + SHIFT +F11).
2 Click Append.
3 Locate and select the document to append H&Js from; click Open.
4 The Available column lists all the H&Js in the source document.
Select the H&Js you want to import into the active document and double-click them, or click the arrow icon ➨ to move them to the
Include column. Or, click Include All.
To select one H&J, click it. To select continuous H&Js, press the SHIFT key while you click them. To select noncontinuous H&Js, press the
CTRL key while you click them.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.35
Typography
S Tips
Appending multiple attributes
If you want to import style sheets, colors, dashes and stripes styles, and lists along with H&Js, choose
File
& Append. The Append dialog box lets you selectively import items such as style sheets and colors from another document.
H&J attributes
The Description list in the Append
H&Js dialog box lists all the attributes applied to the highlighted H&J, so you can determine which H&J to append.
Select H&Js in the Available column to append to the active document.
5 Click OK; then click Save to close the H&Js dialog box.
R If an H&J from the source document has the same name as an H&J in the target document, but is defined differently, the Conflict dialog box displays. See the next section for information about resolving H&J name conflicts.
Resolving H&J conflicts
The Append Conflict dialog box provides options for handling imported H&Js that have the same name, but different specifications, as existing H&Js. The Existing and New lists display descriptions of the
H&Js to help you make decisions on how to handle the conflict.
12.36
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Controlling Hyphenation and Justification
Use the buttons in the Append Conflict dialog box to resolve name conflicts when appending H&Js.
• Rename: Click Rename to display a dialog box that lets you rename the H&J. Enter a new name for the H&J and click OK.
• Auto-Rename: Click Auto-Rename to have QuarkXPress place an asterisk in front of the appended H&J’s name.
• Use New: Click Use New to have the appended H&J overwrite the existing H&J.
• Use Existing: Click Use Existing to cancel the append of the H&J with the same name; the existing H&J remains unchanged in the document.
If you want all H&Js with conflicting names to be handled the same way, check Repeat For All Conflicts. For example, if you want to rename all conflicting H&Js, check Repeat for All Conflicts, then click Rename.
This check box is for the current document only.
S Tips
Displaying syllable breaks
To display suggested syllable breaks for a word, place the Text Insertion bar i within or to the right of the word and choose Utilities
&
Suggested Hyphenation. The
Suggested Hyphenation dialog box displays hyphenation for the word based on the H&J specified for the paragraph, your list of hyphenation exceptions, the QuarkXPress hyphenation dictionary, and the
QuarkXPress hyphenation algorithm.
Specifying Hyphenation Exceptions
If you prefer certain words hyphenate in certain ways, you can specify that hyphenation in a list of “hyphenation exceptions.” You can even specify that certain words do not hyphenate at all. To create a list of hyphenation exceptions for the active document:
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.37
Typography
S Tips
Hyphenating compound words
To specify that a compound word be hyphenated only at the hyphen, you can add both words to the list of hyphenation exceptions without hyphens. For example, if you want to prevent “context-sensitive” from breaking in the middle of the word
“context” rather than after the hyphen, add both “context” and
“sensitive” to your hyphenation exceptions with no hyphens.
Another method to prevent the hyphenation of a compound word is to add a discretionary hyphen
(
CTRL
+ –) immediately before the words. The compound word will then only break at the hyphen.
1 Choose Utilities
& Hyphenation Exceptions.
Create a list of hyphenation exceptions by entering words and hyphens in the Hyphenation
Exceptions dialog box (Utilities menu).
2 Enter a word in the field with hyphens to represent the preferred hyphenation. You cannot enter spaces or other punctuation.
For example, enter “mul-ti-me-dia” to allow hyphenation between any of those syllables, enter “multi-media” to allow hyphenation between “multi” and “media,” and enter “multimedia” to prevent automatic hyphenation.
3 Click Add.
4 Enter any variations of the word, with hyphens, that you want to hyphenate the same way. For example, enter “pro-cess” and
“pro-cesses” to specify that the singular and plural forms hyphenate the same way.
5 When you are finished adding words and variations of words, click Save.
R For information about how hyphenation exceptions are stored in the XPress Preferences file, see “Saving XPress Preferences” in Chapter 4, “Customizing QuarkXPress.”
12.38
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Style Sheets
Working with Style Sheets
A style sheet is a group of paragraph and/or character attributes that can be applied to selected paragraphs and characters in one step. Use style sheets to change unformatted text into headlines, subheads, captions, body copy, etc. Using style sheets to apply a number of character and paragraph attributes at one time reduces typesetting and layout time and helps maintain typographic consistency.
Creating paragraph style sheets
A paragraph style sheet controls all paragraph attributes and character attributes of the selected paragraph. Paragraph style sheets get their character attributes from their associated character style sheet. To create a new paragraph style sheet:
1 Choose Edit
& Style Sheets (
SHIFT +F11). The Style Sheets dialog box displays the style sheets currently defined for the document (or the default list of style sheets if no documents are open).
S Tips
Creating style sheets
When you create a new style sheet with no documents open, that style sheet becomes part of the default style sheet list and is included in all subsequently created documents.
When you create a style sheet with a document open, that style sheet is included only in the active document’s style sheet list.
Create a new paragraph style sheet from the Style Sheets dialog box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.39
Typography
S Tips
Customizing the Show drop-down list
The Show drop-down list lets you display the type of style sheets shown in the list. You can choose to show all style sheets, paragraph style sheets, character style sheets, style sheets in use, and style sheets not used.
2 Click the New button and choose Paragraph.
• Name: Enter a name in this field, or QuarkXPress will use a default
“New Style Sheet” name.
• Keyboard Equivalent: To define a keyboard command for the style sheet, enter one in the Keyboard Equivalent field. You can use the
CTRL or
CTRL
+
ALT keys, along with a keypad key.
If you define a keyboard equivalent for a style sheet with a key sequence that also defines a QuarkXPress command, the style sheet command will override the QuarkXPress command when the Content tool
E is selected and a text box is active.
• Based on: To base the attributes of a new style sheet on an existing one, click the Based on drop-down list and choose a style sheet from the list.
R If you use the Based on drop-down list in the Edit Paragraph Style
Sheet dialog box to base a style sheet on an existing one, changes you make to the original style sheet are automatically applied to those based on it.
• Next Style: To select a transition from one style sheet to another after typing a carriage return, choose a style sheet from the Next Style drop-down list. The default keeps the same style sheet applied.
Applying a style sheet with a Next Style defined does not apply the Next Style to subsequent paragraphs that are already typed.
The Next Style applies only to text typed after pressing
ENTER
.
• Style: Choose a Character style sheet to associate with the Para-
graph style sheet. See “Creating character style sheets” later in this chapter.
12.40
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Style Sheets
3 Choose any of the next three tabs: Formats, Tabs, or Rules to specify those attributes or properties for your style sheet.
Specify a style sheet’s paragraph attributes from the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box
• Formats: Click the Formats tab to specify the style sheet’s paragraph formats. See “Applying Paragraph Attributes” in this chapter for specific information about the controls in this dialog box.
• Tabs: Click Tabs to specify the style sheet’s tab stops. See “Setting
Tabs” in this chapter for specific information about the controls in this dialog box.
• Rules: Click Rules to specify lines that flow with text. See “Specifying Anchored Rules” in Chapter 13, “Graphics in Typography.”
4 Click OK to return to the Style Sheets dialog box; then click Save to save the style sheet for the document. After you save a style sheet, it is listed in the Paragraph Style Sheet submenu (Style menu) and also in the Style Sheets palette.
S Tips
Basing a style sheet on text
To create a new paragraph style sheet based on formatted text, first highlight or place the Text Insertion bar i within a paragraph that contains the format attributes that you want in your style sheet. Choose
Edit
& Style Sheets to display the
Style Sheets dialog box. Select
New
& Paragraph and type a name in the Name field. Click Save.
Then apply the new style sheet to the paragraph.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.41
Typography
S Tips
Opening the Style Sheets dialog box
You can open the Style Sheets dialog box by pressing
CTRL
+
SHIFT while you click a style sheet name in the
Style Sheets palette.
If you right click (or
CTRL
+click) a style sheet name, a drop-down list displays. If you choose edit, duplicate, or new, it opens the Edit Paragraph
Style Sheet dialog box for the highlighted style sheet. If you choose delete, a warning will display if that style sheet is applied in the document. Choose a replacement style sheet from the dialog box’s dropdown list.
Creating character style sheets
Each paragraph style sheet contains a character style sheet, which defines the default character attributes (font, type style, etc.) for the paragraph style sheet. Character style sheets can also be created independent of paragraph style sheets to apply local formatting to text. For example, on this page the numbers are formatted to use the font
Univers 55, bold, and purple, while the rest of the text is another style.
The three step process of applying all the attributes to the numbers is condensed to one step with a character style sheet. To create a new character style sheet:
1 Choose Edit
& Style Sheets (
SHIFT
+F11). The Style Sheets list displays the style sheets currently defined for the document (or the default list of style sheets if no documents are open).
2 Click the New button and choose Character. The Edit Character
Style Sheet dialog box displays the character attributes at the position of the Text Insertion bar i , or the attributes of the first character of highlighted text. If no text is selected, it displays the attributes of the default style sheet.
• Name: Enter a name in this field, or QuarkXPress will use the default “New Style Sheet” name.
• Keyboard Equivalent: To define a keyboard command for the style sheet, enter one in the Keyboard Equivalent field. You can use the
CTRL or
CTRL
+
ALT keys, along with a keypad key.
• Based on: To base the attributes of a new style sheet on an existing one, click the Based on drop-down list and choose a style sheet from the list.
• Character Attributes: Choose character attributes from the lower section of the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box. See “Applying Character Attributes” earlier in this chapter.
12.42
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Style Sheets
Create character style sheets in the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box (Edit
&
Style Sheets).
3 Click OK to return to the Style Sheets dialog box; then click Save to save the style sheet for the document. After you save a style sheet, it is listed in the Character Style Sheet submenu (Style menu) and also in the Style Sheets palette.
Associating character style sheets with paragraph style sheets
Associate a character style sheet to a paragraph style sheet to specify the default character attributes for the paragraph. To associate a character style sheet with a paragraph style sheet:
1 Choose Edit
& Style Sheets (
SHIFT
+F11) and make a choice in the
Show drop-down list.
2 Select a paragraph style sheet from the Style Sheets list and click Edit.
3 Select a character style sheet from the Style drop-down list to associate with the paragraph style sheet.
S Tips
Copying text with style sheets
When you copy and paste text from one QuarkXPress document to another, any paragraph or character style sheets associated with the text are added to the document into which you paste it. If the style sheet names match existing names in the
“to” document, the text will maintain the “from” document’s attributes, and a plus sign (+) may display next to the style sheet name in the Style
Sheets palette.
Selecting multiple paragraphs
If you select multiple paragraphs with multiple character and paragraph style sheets applied, the Style
Sheets palette will gray the paragraph and character icons beside style sheet names applied to the text.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.43
Typography
S Tips
Appending keyboard commands
If you append a style sheet whose keyboard equivalent is already used by a style sheet in the active document, the appended style sheet will not have a keyboard equivalent. You can assign a new one via the Edit
Style Sheet dialog box.
The plus (+) sign
When local paragraph or character attributes exist in selected text, a plus sign appears next to the style sheet name in the Style Sheets palette. To remove local attributes, select No Style and reselect the style sheet, or press
ALT while clicking the style sheet name.
4 Click OK, and then click Save in the Style Sheets dialog box. All text will be updated and may reflow for paragraph style sheets with the newly associated character style sheet.
Applying paragraph style sheets
You can apply paragraph style sheets to any selected paragraphs. A selected paragraph is a paragraph that contains the Text Insertion bar i or contains highlighted text. You can apply a paragraph style sheet three ways:
• Style Sheet submenu: Choose Style
& Paragraph Style Sheet. Select a style sheet from the submenu. The paragraph style sheet will be applied to the paragraph.
• Style Sheets palette: Choose View
& Show Style Sheets (F11). Click the paragraph style sheet name in the Style Sheets palette.
• Keyboard command: Enter the keyboard command displayed next to the style sheet name in the Style Sheets palette. Keyboard equivalents are assigned in the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box.
Apply paragraph (upper) and character (lower) style sheets with the Style Sheets palette.
Applying character style sheets
You can apply a character style sheet to any highlighted text or at the text insertion point i. You can apply a character style sheet three ways:
• Style Sheet submenu: Choose Style
& Character Style Sheet. Select a character style sheet from the submenu. The character style sheet will be applied to the text.
12.44
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Style Sheets
• Style Sheets palette: Choose View
& Show Style Sheets (F11). Click the character style sheet name in the Style Sheets palette.
• Keyboard command: Enter the keyboard command displayed next to the style sheet name in the Style Sheets palette. Keyboard equivalents are assigned in the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box.
Editing, duplicating, and deleting style sheets
The Style Sheets dialog box (Edit menu) lets you edit, duplicate, and delete a document’s paragraph and character style sheets. Select a paragraph or character style sheet in the list and click one of these buttons:
• Edit opens the style sheet so you can modify it.
• Duplicate creates a copy of the style sheet that you can rename and modify.
• Delete removes the style sheet from the list and lets you choose a replacement style sheet for all instances of the deleted style sheet, if it is used in the current document.
After you modify the style sheets used in a document, the text will update accordingly.
Appending style sheets
Using the Append feature, you can import paragraph and character style sheets from other documents rather than recreating them.
1 Choose Edit
& Style Sheets (
SHIFT
+F11).
2 Click Append.
3 Locate and select the document to append style sheets from; click Open.
4 The Available column of the Append Style Sheets dialog box lists all the character and paragraph style sheets from the source document.
Select the style sheets you want to import into the active document
S Tips
Applying No Style
When you apply a style sheet to a paragraph that has No Style applied to it, local paragraph and character attributes are replaced by those specified in the style sheet you apply.
If you want to remove local formatting as you apply a new style sheet, press
ALT as you click the style sheet name in the Style Sheets palette.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.45
Typography
S Tips
Appending paragraph style sheets
You can also access the Append dialog box from the File menu
(File
& Append).
Deleting style sheets
To delete unused style sheets in your document, you can choose
Edit
& Style Sheets and choose
All Unused Style Sheets from the
Show drop-down list. Then you can select the style sheets in the list and click Delete.
and double-click them or click the arrow icon ➨ to move them to the
Include column. Or, click Include All. The Description lists display all attributes associated with highlighted style sheets.
To select one style sheet, click it. To select continuous style sheets, press the
SHIFT key while you click them. To select noncontinuous style sheets, press the
CTRL key while you click them.
Select paragraph and character style sheets in the Available column to append to the active document. Press the CTRL key to select noncontinuous style sheets.
5 Click OK. A warning alerts you that appended style sheets and lists will include all embedded style sheets, H&Js, colors, and dashes and stripes, and ask you if it is ok to append. Click OK, then click Save to close the Style Sheets dialog box.
R If a style sheet from the source document has the same name as a style sheet in the target document, but is defined differently, the
Append Conflict dialog box displays. See the next section for information about resolving style sheet name conflicts.
Resolving style sheet conflicts
The Append Conflict dialog box provides options for handling imported style sheets that have the same name, but different specifications, as existing style sheets. The Existing and New lists display
12.46
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Style Sheets descriptions of the style sheets to help you make decisions on how to handle the conflict.
Use the buttons in the Append Conflict dialog box to resolve name conflicts when appending style sheets.
• Rename: Click Rename to display a dialog box that lets you rename the style sheet. Enter a new name for the style sheet and click OK.
• Auto-Rename: Click Auto-Rename to have QuarkXPress place an asterisk in front of the appended style sheet’s name.
• Use New: Click Use New to have the appended style sheet overwrite the existing style sheet.
• Use Existing: Click Use Existing to cancel the append of the style sheet with the same name; the existing style sheet remains unchanged in the document.
If you want all style sheets with conflicting names to be handled the same way, check Repeat For All Conflicts. For example, if you want to rename all conflicting style sheets, check Repeat for All Conflicts, then click Rename. This check box is for the current document only.
S Tips
Using XPress Tag codes
You can define style sheets in ASCII text using XPress Tag codes. When you import an ASCII text file with a style sheet defined by XPress Tag codes, QuarkXPress imports the style sheets, including the attributes and formats specified by XPress Tag codes, to the document. See “XPress
Tags” in Chapter 24, “Appendices” for more information.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.47
Typography
S Tips
Specifying baseline grid
To specify the default baseline grid for all documents, specify the amount when no documents are open. Specify this in the Para-
graph tab of the Document Pref-
erences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document).
Positioning Text in Text Boxes
A text baseline is the line on which most characters sit. In QuarkXPress, you can lock text baselines to an invisible, underlying horizontal grid
(shown with View
& Show Baseline Grid). Locking paragraphs to the baseline grid lets you align baselines from column to column and from box to box, across a page and across spreads. You can also align text vertically within text boxes, specify the space between vertically justified paragraphs, and choose the distance that the characters are inset from the inside edge of a text box.
Specifying the Baseline Grid
To define a document’s underlying baseline grid:
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Document; then click the Paragraph tab ( CTRL + ALT + Y ).
2 Enter a value between 0" and 13.889" in the Start field of the Base-
line Grid area to specify how far down from the top of the page you want to place the first line of the grid.
3 Enter a value in the Increment field to specify the vertical distance between the grid lines.
4 Click OK.
Locking Paragraphs to the Baseline Grid
To lock selected paragraphs to the grid you defined in the Paragraph tab of the Document Preferences dialog box:
12.48
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Positioning Text in Text Boxes
1 Choose Style
& Formats (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
F
).
2 Check Lock to Baseline Grid.
• Lines in paragraphs that are locked to the baseline grid are spaced in multiples of the grid’s Increment value in the Para-
graph tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document).
• To lock paragraphs to the grid without disrupting the line spacing in your document, you should specify a grid Increment value equal to (or a multiple of) the leading of the paragraphs you plan to lock to the grid. For example, if your body copy is set on 12 points of leading, enter an Increment value of 12 pt.
3 Click OK.
R If a paragraph’s leading is greater than the baseline grid Increment value specified in the Paragraph tab of the Document Preferences dialog box, each line of text will lock to the next available grid increment. For example, on a 12-point grid, lines in paragraphs with 13 points of leading will lock to every other grid line, resulting in 24 points of space between baselines.
Working with the First Baseline
You can specify where the first baseline of text is positioned, in relation to the top inside edge of the text box, by using controls in the Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item
& Modify).
The First Baseline area lets you specify the minimum distance between the Text Inset at the top edge of a text box and the first text baseline. The
Minimum drop-down list provides three options for specifying this distance. You can specify that the first line be positioned based on the tallest character’s cap height, on the tallest character’s cap height plus the vertical space needed for an accent mark, or on the tallest character’s ascent.
S Tips
Adjusting Increment values
You can modify the baseline grid
Start and Increment values in the
Paragraph tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document) at any time, to move the lines of text in locked paragraphs up or down.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.49
Typography
S Tips
Baselines in style sheets
You can include Lock to Baseline
Grid as a paragraph style sheet format.
Applying Justified Vertical Alignment
When you apply the Justified Verti-
cal Alignment using the Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item
&
Modify) to a text box that contains paragraphs that are locked to the baseline grid, only the first and last lines in the box are aligned with the grid; the remaining lines are spaced evenly between them.
When positioning the first line of text in a box, QuarkXPress uses whichever is larger — the Offset distance (as measured from the top inside edge of a text box) or the Minimum drop-down list setting you choose (as measured from the box’s Text Inset).
Specifying the First Baseline for text boxes
To specify the first baseline position for an active text box:
1 Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Text tab.
Specify the First Baseline from the Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item
& Modify).
2 To specify the distance between the first text baseline in the box and the top inside edge of the box, enter a value in the Offset field.
3 To specify the minimum distance between the first text baseline in an active text box and the Text Inset at the top edge of a text box, choose an option from the Minimum drop-down list.
• Cap Height is equal to the height of a zero (0) in the font of the largest character on the first line of text.
12.50
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Positioning Text in Text Boxes
• Cap + Accent is equal to the height of a zero (0) in the font of the largest character on the first line of text plus the extra vertical space needed for an accent mark over an uppercase character in that font.
• Ascent is equal to the height of the ascenders (as specified by the font designer) in the font of the largest character on the first line of text.
4 To preview your changes before making them permanent, press the
Apply button; then click OK.
R When you choose Centered for Vertical Alignment, lines of text are centered between the First Baseline position and the bottom of the text box. When you choose Bottom, the top baseline cannot be closer to the top of the box than the First Baseline position you specify. When you choose Justified, the first line of text is positioned at the First Baseline, the last line is positioned at the bottom of the box, and the remaining lines are justified between them.
Aligning text vertically
QuarkXPress gives you four options for positioning lines of text vertically within text boxes: Top, Centered, Bottom, and Justified. To align text vertically in an active text box with one of these four options:
1 Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Text tab.
S Tips
Specifying baseline values for multicolumned boxes
In multicolumn text boxes, the first line of text in each column is positioned according to the First Base-
line values specified for the text box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.51
Typography
S Tips
Lock to Baseline Grid
If Lock to Baseline Grid in the
Formats tab of the Paragraph
Attributes dialog box, (Style
&
Formats) is applied to the first paragraph in a text box to which you apply a First Baseline value,
QuarkXPress positions the first text baseline on the closest grid increment following the first baseline position you specify.
Obstructing items
If an item is obstructing the placement of the first text baseline specified by the Offset value you enter,
QuarkXPress places the first baseline below the obstructing item using the
Minimum First Baseline setting.
Specify vertical alignment for text in the Text tab of the Modify dialog box.
2 To specify the alignment you want, choose one of the four alignment options from the Type drop-down list in the Vertical Alignment area: Top, Centered, Bottom, or Justified.
• Top: In text boxes specified as top-aligned, lines of text are positioned in the box with the top of the first line positioned as specified in the First Baseline area. The box is filled from top to bottom as text is entered.
“Adeo sanctum est vetus omne poema.”
“Adeo sanctum est vetus omne poema.”
Choose Top (left), the preset Vertical Alignment, so that text fills a text box from the top down as it is entered. Choose Bottom (right) to fill a text box from the bottom up as text is entered.
• Centered: In text boxes specified as center-aligned, lines of text are centered between the First Baseline ascent and the and bottom of the text box. The box is filled from the center as text is entered.
12.52
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Positioning Text in Text Boxes
• Bottom: In text boxes specified as bottom-aligned, lines of text are positioned with the last line flush with the bottom of the box. The box is filled from bottom to top as text is entered.
• Justified: In text boxes specified as justified, lines of text are positioned in the box with the first line positioned as specified in the
First Baseline area, the last line flush with the text inset at the bottom of the box, and the remaining lines justified between. When vertically justifying text, you can specify the maximum vertical distance that QuarkXPress will place between paragraphs.
“Adeo sanctum est vetus
“Adeo sanctum est vetus omne poema.” omne poema.”
Choose Centered (left) to fill a box from the center so that lines are centered vertically.
Choose Justified to fill the box evenly between the top line, as specified by the First
Baseline position, and the bottom line, which is flush against the text inset at the bottom of the box.
3 Click OK.
R The Centered, Bottom, and Justified alignment options are only intended for rectangular text areas, and can be disrupted by obstructing items.
Specifying Inter ¶ Max value
The Inter ¶ Max field lets you specify the amount of space QuarkXPress can insert between vertically justified paragraphs. This field is available only when Justified is selected in the Type drop-down list. To specify this for selected paragraphs:
1 Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL + M ); then click the Text tab.
2 Select Justified from the Type drop-down list.
S Tips
Aligning box to box
You specify vertical alignment on a box-by-box (not story) basis. A story can flow through many linked text boxes; text is positioned according to the vertical alignment specified for individual boxes.
Using multicolumned boxes
When you specify a vertical alignment for a multicolumn text box, lines of text in all columns are spaced according to the specified vertical alignment. Each column is aligned separately, so lines will not be taken from a tight aligning column to help justify a loose column (one with a lot of space between lines or paragraphs).
Using multiple boxes
If you multiple-select various text boxes, you can specify a vertical alignment for all the boxes at once.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.53
Typography
S Tips
Using Bottom with Lock to Baseline
Grid
When the Bottom vertical alignment is applied to a box, and Lock to
Baseline Grid is applied to paragraphs within it, lines of text are positioned so that the last line of text in the box is locked to the grid increment closest to the bottom of the box.
Using Justified with Lock to
Baseline Grid
Paragraphs in text boxes to which the Justified vertical alignment is applied are separated by at least the amount of space specified in the
Space Before and Space After fields in the Formats tab of the
Paragraph Attributes dialog box
(Style
& Formats).
When text in a box to which the
Justified vertical alignment has been applied is locked to the baseline grid, only the top and bottom lines of text in the box are locked to the grid. All other lines are spaced evenly between the top and bottom lines.
3 To specify the maximum amount of space QuarkXPress can insert between vertically justified paragraphs, enter a value in the Inter ¶
Max field.
• If vertically justified paragraphs are spaced as far apart as the Inter
¶ Max field allows and text still does not extend from the top of the box to the bottom, QuarkXPress will override the leading values and insert an equal amount of additional space between lines.
• QuarkXPress can insert additional space between paragraphs up to the Inter ¶ Max value when vertically justifying text. If the Inter
¶ Max value is not sufficient to vertically justify the lines in a column of text, QuarkXPress distributes the remaining space evenly between the lines of text, including the space between the last line of one paragraph and the first line of the paragraph below it.
• If you enter 0 (zero) in the Inter ¶ Max field, QuarkXPress distributes space evenly between lines and paragraphs when vertically justifying lines of text.
4 Click OK.
R The Inter ¶ Max value is a measurement of the amount of space that can be inserted between paragraphs to justify the box. If this space is not large enough to justify, then (and only then) should you add space between all lines (including between paragraphs).
12.54
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Positioning Text in Text Boxes
Specifying text inset
Text inset lets you specify the distance that characters are inset from the inside edge of a text box. To specify the text inset for an active text box:
1 Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Text tab.
S Tips
Using Centered with Lock to
Baseline Grid
When the Centered vertical alignment is applied to a box, and Lock
to Baseline Grid is applied to paragraphs within it, lines of text are positioned so the lines are locked to the grid increments, which is the first grid position above the specified baseline. The grid location may actually be closer to center.
Specify the Text Inset from the Text tab of the Modify dialog box.
2 Enter a number in the Text Inset field.
3 Click OK.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 12.55
Graphics in
13
Typography
Converting Text to Boxes
Running Text Around Items
Creating Text Paths
Creating Initial Caps
Specifying Anchored Rules
Anchoring Boxes and Lines in Text
13.3
13.5
13.16
13.21
13.24
13.27
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Graphics in
13
Typography
Often times, text and graphics intertwine: Body text wraps around and through graphics, a headline curves on an invisible path, cover text contains pictures. In cases like these, the distinction between graphics and typography blurs.
This chapter covers some of the most basic graphic text effects like drop caps, to complex effects like text runaround. It also focuses on graphic enhancers like text paths and text-shaped picture boxes.
Converting Text to Boxes
Converting Text to Boxes
You can convert a character or group of characters into a Bézier picture box using the Text to Box command (Style menu). Converting text to a Bézier picture box lets you apply color blends and import pictures into a textshaped Bézier picture box. Once the Bézier box is created, it can be manipulated like any other Bézier item.
Converting text to boxes
To convert text to a Bézier picture box, highlight an individual character or a range of text with the Content tool
E and choose Style & Text to
Box. The highlighted text is duplicated, then converted to a single Bézier picture box.
S Tips
Anchoring converted boxes
By default, the Text to Box command creates an unanchored Bézier picture box. To create an anchored Bézier picture box, press
ALT before choosing
Style
& Text to Box.
Font size
Text to Box conversion looks best with larger display type, 36 pt and bigger, but it works with smaller text too.
Font attributes
Text to Box conversion results in a
Bézier outline of the highlighted text.
However, not all font attributes are included in the outline. For example, if you have shadowed or underlined text, the outline will not include those attributes. The only attributes an outline will include are bold and italics.
Use the Text to Box command (Style menu) when a single character or range of text is highlighted to create a text-shaped Bézier picture box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.3
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Converting box contents
If you want to fill your Bézier picture box with text, or simply with color, choose Item
& Content; then choose either Text or None. To convert it back into a picture box again, choose Picture from the Content submenu. Any contents will be lost in the conversion.
Converting a range of text into individual Bézier boxes
To create individual Bézier boxes out of each letter from a converted range of highlighted text, choose Item
&
Split
& Outside Paths. To create individual Bézier boxes from each shape within a single, complex text box, choose Item
& Split & All
Paths. See “Merging and Splitting
Boxes” in Chapter 7, “Box Basics.”
R The Text to Box command can convert Type 1 fonts installed through Adobe Type Manager (ATM) and TrueType fonts into a
Bézier picture box.
Create an unanchored Bézier picture box in the shape of the text using the Text to Box command
(Style menu). The box can be filled with color, blends, pictures, or text. You can also manipulate and reshape the picture box like any Bézier item.
Import a picture into a text-shaped Bézier picture box.
R See Chapter 7, “Box Basics,” for information on moving or reshaping Bézier boxes, as well as coloring, framing, or resizing boxes.
13.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Running Text Around Items
Running Text Around Items
The QuarkXPress text runaround feature lets you control the way text runs behind, around, or within items and pictures. You can specify text to run around the actual item, or you can create custom runaround paths and then manually modify them.
Create custom runaround paths, like the one above, using QuarkXPress runaround options. To run text around all sides of an item, first select the text box and check Run Text Around All Sides in the Text tab (Item
& Modify).
Running text around all sides of an item
Text runaround defaults to running around three sides of an item. To force text to run around all sides of an item:
1 Select a text box with either the Content tool
E or the Item tool e.
2 Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL + M ); then click the Text tab.
3 Check Run Text Around All Sides to run the text around all sides of an obstructing item. Click OK.
S Tips
Text box attribute
Whether text runs around three sides or all sides of an item is determined by the text box, and not by the items that obstruct the text. This is the only runaround control in QuarkXPress that acts on the text box itself. All other QuarkXPress runaround controls act on the item(s) placed in front of the text box.
Text below an item or picture
When a line of text falls immediately below an obstruction in a column or box, you can specify that the baseline of a line of text is placed according to its applied leading value by checking
Maintain Leading (Edit
& Prefer- ences
& Document & Paragraph tab). When Maintain Leading is unchecked, the ascent of the line will abut the bottom of the item or any applied Outset.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.5
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Runaround availability
The Runaround tab (Item menu) is not available for groups, multipleselected items, or anchored items.
Uncheck Run Text Around All Sides (Item
& Modify & Text tab) and text only runs around three sides of an item (left). When checked, text runs around all sides of an item (right).
Running text around lines and text paths
To specify text runaround for lines and text paths in front of a text box, first select the line or text path; then choose Item
& Runaround (
CTRL + T ).
Choose an option from the Type drop-down list:
• Choose None to run text behind an active line or text path.
• Choose Item to run text around an active line or text path. If you have an active text path, the text will only run around the path, not the text on the path. Modifying any aspect of the line or text path will automatically update the runaround area.
• Choose Manual to run text around an active line or text path. Choosing Manual makes the Runaround path available for editing. You can move or rotate the line or text path, but if you modify other aspects of the line or text path, the runaround will not update (like it does when
Item is chosen). You must manually update the runaround path. See
“Editing runaround paths” later in this chapter.
Choose Item
& Runaround; then choose Item from the Type drop-down list to run text around an active text path. The text runs around the path, not the text on the path (left). To run text around the text on a path, select Manual from the Type drop-down list, and then edit the path (right).
13.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Running Text Around Items
R You can specify a runaround Outset when either Item or Manual is chosen from the Type drop-down list. Positive values result in runaround that is further from the original setting, negative values decrease the amount of item displayed.
Running text around text boxes
To specify text runaround for text boxes in front of another text box, first select the front text box; then choose Item
& Runaround (
CTRL
+
T
).
Choose an option from the Type drop-down list:
• Choose None to run text behind an active text box.
• Choose Item to run text around an active text box. If the text box is rectangular, enter values in the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields to outset or inset the runaround area. If the text box is not rectangular, a single Outset field is provided. Modifying any aspect of the text box will automatically update the runaround area.
S Tips
Running text around contentless boxes
If you have specified a content of
None for a box (Item
& Content), and want to specify a runaround, treat the box as you would a text box.
Default runaround tool preferences
To specify default runaround specifications for an item creation tool, choose Edit
& Preferences &
Document
& Tool tab. Select a specific tool, click Modify, and set its defaults for Runaround.
Choose None from the Type submenu (Item
& Runaround) to run text behind a text box (left), or Item to run text around a text box (right).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.7
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Runaround path
A runaround path forces text to abut and run around the “included” areas of a path. A runaround path does not determine what areas of a picture are visible.
Runaround paths and clipping paths
Runaround paths tell QuarkXPress where to wrap text, and clipping paths tell QuarkXPress which parts of your picture are visible. You are not limited to using the same settings for runaround and clipping paths. You can even use different clipping paths or alpha channels for your clipping and runaround settings.
See “Creating and Editing Clipping
Paths” in Chapter 14, “Pictures.”
Running text around picture boxes
To specify text runaround for picture boxes in front of a text box, first select the picture box; then choose Item
& Runaround (
CTRL
+
T
). Choose an option from the Type drop-down list:
• Choose None to run text behind an active picture box.
• Choose Item to run text around the picture box. If the picture box is rectangular, enter values in the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields to outset or inset the runaround area. If the picture box is not rectangular, a single Outset field is provided. Modifying any aspect of the picture box will automatically update the runaround area.
Choose Item
& Runaround; then choose Item from the Type drop-down list to run text around the picture box.
• Choose Picture Bounds to run text around the rectangular “canvas area” of the imported picture file. This includes any white background areas saved with your original picture file. Enter values in the Top, Left,
Bottom, and Right fields to determine the outset or inset of the text from the picture’s boundaries. Negative values result in an inset, positive values in an outset.
13.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Running Text Around Items
View the Preview area (Item
& Runaround) to see how text runs around the picture bounds
(the larger outline, left). The picture’s frame is showing in the picture at right, but the larger white space surrounding the picture is the “canvas-area” of the picture bounds.
• Choose Embedded Path to run text around a path that has been embedded in an image. Choose an embedded path from the Path dropdown list if the picture file contains more than one embedded path.
View an embedded path in the Preview area by choosing Embedded Path from the Type dropdown list (left). Embedded paths often outline the picture’s subject, which causes text to run flush around the subject (right).
S Tips
Magenta runaround path and blue item outline
The magenta path in the Preview area (Item
& Runaround) represents the runaround path, and the blue outline represents the item. To change these default colors, choose Edit
&
Preferences
& Application; then click the Display tab. Double-click either the Grid color or the Margin color to change the runaround path or item outline colors, respectively.
Embedded paths and alpha channels
Image editing applications are capable of embedding paths and alpha channels in an image. If a picture storing this information is imported into QuarkXPress, you can access the path and channel information using the Runaround tab in the Modify dialog box (Item menu). QuarkXPress can scan the paths and channels and create a QuarkXPress text runaround path based on the information.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.9
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Alpha channel masks
Alpha channels are saved in image editing applications. They are selections (not paths) that are created as
8-bit masks. An alpha channel masks or hides unwanted portions of an image, and the mask is used to define the text runaround area.
The best images for Non-White
Areas runaround paths
Non-White Areas works best when the unwanted parts of the image are much lighter than the image itself (or vice versa). If you are using a grayscale or color image that has a similar tonal value throughout the picture, QuarkXPress will have a difficult time reading the subject’s outline, and will not be able to create a very accurate runaround path.
Information area
The Information area in the
Runaround tab contains statistics on the number of Alpha Channels and Embedded Paths included with the original picture file.
• Choose Alpha Channel to run text around an alpha channel that has been embedded in an image. Choose an alpha channel from the Alpha drop-down list if the picture file contains more than one embedded alpha channel.
• Choose Non-White Areas to create a runaround path based on the picture’s subject. Depending on the value in the Threshold field, the runaround path will outline a dark figure within a larger white or nearwhite background (or vice versa).
Run text around a dark image that contains a light background by choosing Type
& Non-White
Areas (Item
& Runaround).
• Choose Same As Clipping to set the text runaround path to the clipping path selected in the Clipping tab (Item menu).
Fine tuning the runaround path
When Embedded Path, Alpha Channel, Non-White Areas, or Same As
Clipping are chosen in the Type drop-down list (Item
& Runaround), various fields become available that let you manipulate the runaround path. Enter values in the fields to modify the path.
13.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Running Text Around Items
1 Enter values in the Outset field to change the size of the runaround path. Positive values result in a runaround path that is further from the original setting, negative values decrease the amount of image included in the runaround path.
Enter values in the Outset field to outset or inset the runaround path (Item
& Runaround).
For example, a 0 pt outset results in text running flush around the subject (left), while a 10 pt outset results in a larger runaround path.
2 Enter values in the Noise field to identify which paths should be deleted and which paths should be included when creating the runaround path (see the accompanying tip). The Noise field specifies the smallest allowable closed path. Any closed path smaller than the noise value will be deleted. Noise values are useful for cleaning up runaround paths and making them easier to output.
3 Enter values in the Smoothness field to specify runaround path accuracy. A lower value creates a more complex path with a greater number of points. A higher value creates a less accurate path. This is similar to the flatness setting in many image editing applications.
S Tips
Noise values and the concept of multiple paths
A runaround path is capable of containing many paths. For example, if you have a picture of two donuts and a scattering of crumbs (and your
Runaround tab settings are set to render this scenario), a QuarkXPress runaround path could show two magenta paths around the two donuts, two magenta paths around the donut holes, and a plethora of tiny magenta paths around the crumbs. All of these paths are considered to be one runaround path. To delete the tiny crumb paths, enter a value in the Noise field that corresponds to their diameters (like 5 pt), and any path in the graphic that is less than 5 pt will be removed.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.11
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
How Threshold excludes pixels
The Threshold value determines how to define white. All pixels defined as “white” are excluded. For example, if the Threshold value is
20%, and a pixel’s gray value is below or at 20%, the pixel will be considered “white” and excluded from the runaround path.
Applying modifications
To update any changes in the Pre-
view area, click Apply, highlight a new field, or press the
TAB key. Pressing the
TAB key also moves you through the fields.
View the runaround path in the Preview area (Item
& Runaround) to see what the Smooth-
ness tolerance looks like at different values. At 2 pt (left), many points are used to describe the runaround path; at 8 pt (center), fewer points are used, but the shape is still described relatively accurately; at 15 pt (right), the shape loses its smoothness altogether. However, the text runs almost exactly the same around the “smooth” path as it does the “rough” path. Text runaround can be completed much faster using the “rough” path because it is less complex.
4 Enter values in the Threshold field to specify how QuarkXPress determines dark pixels from light pixels. Threshold uses the picture to generate a runaround path. When Non-White Areas is chosen, any pixel shaded below the Threshold value is excluded from the runaround area, and any pixel above it is included. The reverse is true for alpha channels.
Enter values in the Threshold field (Item
& Runaround) to determine where the runaround path will affect text.
13.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Running Text Around Items
R Threshold is only available for Non-White Areas and Alpha Chan-
nel. (You can alter the Threshold when an alpha channel is selected because alpha channels can be grayscale. They have gray pixels and non-white areas that can be interpreted by a threshold tolerance.)
Creating special effects
Various options in the Runaround tab (Item menu) let you specify whether text runs inside, outside, or through a picture, whether text runs around a picture box (even when an image is jutting out from its box), and whether text runaround is cropped to the box. To create special effects:
1 Check Invert to make the outer regions of the runaround path part of the interior and the inner regions part of the exterior. Uncheck
Invert to return the path to its previous state.
S Tips
The Rescan button
Click Rescan (Item
& Runaround) to rebuild the runaround path from scratch based on the Runaround dialog box settings. Clicking Rescan undoes Crop to Box.
Creating a “see-through” effect
To create a “see-through” effect, you can send an item to the back via the Send to
Back command (Item menu), and then set the text box background color to None.
Checking Invert (Item
& Runaround) allows text to run into an area that it used to run around.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.13
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Choosing outside edges or all edges
The Outside Edges Only check box determines whether QuarkXPress allows holes within a path. For example, if checked, QuarkXPress will create one path for a picture of a donut (one for the outside edges of the donut). Text runs around the entire donut. Uncheck Outside
Edges Only and the donut hole path becomes visible too. Text then runs around the donut and in the hole, as long as runaround for all the sides is specified.
2 Check Outside Edges Only to make QuarkXPress select only the outer edges of the runaround path. Uncheck Outside Edges Only to include paths which define holes.
Check Outside Edges Only (Item
& Runaround) when you want to use only the outer edges of the runaround path (left). Create unusual text flow by unchecking Outside Edges Only (right).
3 Check Restrict to Box to restrain the text runaround to the picture box. Uncheck Restrict to Box to make the text run around portions of the magenta runaround path that fall outside the box.
4 Click Crop to Box to saw off portions of a runaround path that fall outside the current box borders.
Crop the runaround path to the box by clicking Crop to Box (Item
& Runaround) (right).
5 Click Apply to preview your changes; then click OK.
13.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Running Text Around Items
Editing runaround paths
If a runaround path requires further adjustment, you can check
Runaround (Item
& Edit) to access and manipulate the runaround path. For visual distinction and ease in editing, the runaround path appears as a magenta outline.
Select the picture box and choose Item
& Edit. Check Runaround to access and manipulate the runaround path’s points, curve handles, and line segments. Edit the path as you would any Bézier object.
Choose Item
& Edit and check Runaround to access the runaround path.
R Runaround path editing is available when Picture Bounds,
Embedded Paths, Alpha Channels, and Non-White Areas are chosen in the Type drop-down list (Item
& Runaround).
S Tips
Editing runaround paths
For more information on editing
Bézier shapes, as well as Bézier terminology, see “Reshaping Boxes” in
Chapter 7, “Box Basics.”
Saving time when editing
You can disable screen redraw and save time when editing a runaround path by pressing the
SPACE bar when editing. Release the
SPACE bar to redraw the screen and reflow text.
Editing the low-resolution preview
A QuarkXPress runaround path generated using the Runaround tab (Item menu) is based on the high-resolution picture file. However, when manually editing the runaround path, you have to work with the low-resolution preview which may cause inaccuracy.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.15
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Constraining text paths to 0°, 45°, or
90° angles
You can constrain a text path created with the Line Text-Path tool Ò to 0°,
45°, or 90° angles by pressing the
SHIFT key while you draw or resize the text path.
Creating Text Paths
You can create text paths by using one of the four text-path tools. After you have created a text path, you can manipulate the way text rides the path, the attributes of the text (font, color, size, etc.), and the shape and style attributes of the path.
Creating text paths
Select a text-path creation tool from the Tool palette and move the
Crosshair pointer c to any position on the page; then click and drag, or click and create points, to draw the text path. Create text paths using the following tools:
• The Line Text-Path tool
Ò creates straight text paths at any angle.
Create straight text paths at any angle using the Line Text-Path tool
Ò.
• The Orthogonal Text-Path tool
creates straight horizontal or vertical text paths.
Create straight text paths at right angles using the Orthogonal Text-Path tool
.
13.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Text Paths
• The Bézier Text-Path tool
 creates text paths with curved and straight line segments. Click to establish straight line segments; click and drag to establish curved line segments. To end the text path, double-click while creating the last point, or select a tool from the Tool palette.
Use the Bézier Text-Path tool
 to manually plot points while creating the path.
• The Freehand Text-Path tool
˜ creates freehand text paths with curved line segments. Click and drag in a continuous motion to draw a freehand path. Release the mouse when you are finished drawing the path.
S Tips
Presetting text-path tool preferences
You can preset the preferences for text-path creation tools by either double-clicking a tool in the Tool palette, or using the controls in the Tool tab
(Edit
& Preferences & Docu-
ment). You can preset Style, Arrow-
heads, Width, Color, Shade, and
Runaround attributes of the text paths you create.
Create freehand text paths by clicking and dragging in a continuous motion.
R Text paths, as items, are treated exactly the same as lines. You can create, resize, reshape, move, and apply line styles (preset or custom) to text paths just as you would to lines. See Chapter 8, “Line Basics.”
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.17
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Flipping text paths
You can flip a text path horizontally by choosing Style
& Flip Text, by checking Flip Text in the Text Path tab (Item
& Modify), or by clicking in the Measurements palette.
The Flip Text command does not produce a true flip, but instead, places the text on the opposite side of the path, upside down. This is especially useful for circular text paths.
Controlling text orientation and position
To control the way text rides the path, select the text path with either the Item tool e or the Content tool E and:
1 Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Text Path tab.
Choose Item
& Modify; then click the Text Path tab to control the way text is oriented on its path.
2 Click a button in the Text Orientation area to choose how the text should ride the path:
• The upper-left button is the default. Characters are rotated, but not skewed, to sit at the angle determined by the path.
Rotate text on its path by choosing the upper-left button.
• The upper-right button produces a 3-D effect. Characters are rotated and skewed, and sometimes flipped, to produce the effect.
Create a ribbon-like effect by choosing the upper-right button.
13.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Text Paths
• The lower-right button produces a stair-step appearance. Characters are neither rotated nor skewed.
Create a stair-step effect by choosing the lower-right button.
• The lower-left button produces a warped appearance. Characters are skewed but not rotated.
Create this effect by choosing the lower-left button.
3 Choose an option from the Align Text drop-down list to determine which part of a font is used to position characters on the path. (The following examples of font orientation are positioned on Top of the path as determined by the Align with Line drop-down list. See the next page for more information about Align with Line.)
• Ascent uses the font’s ascenders as the place where the text intersects the path.
S Tips
Selecting a text path with the Content tool
E versus the Item tool e
When you select a text path with the
Content tool
E, the Measure-
ments palette displays text information; when you select a text path with the Item tool e, the Measure-
ments palette displays line information.
Anatomy of a font
Using the Align Text drop-down list, you can specify to align different parts of a font on a text path.
Choose Ascent from the Align Text drop-down list (Item
& Modify & Text Path tab) to place a font’s ascenders on the path.
• Center uses the center of the font’s x-height as the place where the text intersects the path.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.19
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Applying styles to text
You can apply styles to text on paths the same way you apply styles to regular text. Choose from different fonts, sizes, colors, shades, etc. See
“Applying Character Attributes” in
Chapter 12, “Typography.”
Choose Center from the Align Text drop-down list (Item
& Modify & Text Path tab) to place a font’s center on the path.
• Baseline uses the font’s baseline as the place where the text intersects the path.
Choose Baseline from the Align Text drop-down list (Item
& Modify & Text Path) to place a font’s baseline on the path.
• Descent uses the font’s descenders as the place where the text intersects the path.
Choose Descent from the Align Text drop-down list (Item
& Modify & Text Path) to place a font’s descenders on the path.
4 Choose an option from the Align with Line drop-down list to determine path orientation. Choose from Top, Center, or Bottom.
Choose Top to position the font on top of the path (left), Center to position the font in the middle of the path (center), and Bottom to position the font on the bottom of the path (right).
R Depending on the line width of the path, Top, Center, and Bot-
tom path orientation may make quite a visual difference.
5 Click Apply to preview your changes; then click OK.
13.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Initial Caps
Creating Initial Caps
T he first letter in this sentence is an initial cap — the first letter of a paragraph that is enlarged and embellished to draw readers into a paragraph. You can specify automatic drop caps, create your own initial cap effects, and use imported graphics as initial caps.
S Tips
Hanging drop caps
To hang dropped characters to the left of a paragraph, enter the Indent
Here character by pressing
CTRL
+\ after the last drop cap.
Specifying automatic drop caps
D rop caps are initial caps that hang two or more lines below the first line of a paragraph (like this one). The QuarkXPress automatic drop caps feature enlarges the drop cap characters and runs the paragraph around the drop caps automatically. The typeface and styles match the rest of the paragraph. To specify drop caps for a selected paragraph:
1 Choose Style
& Formats (
CTRL + SHIFT + F ).
Enter an Indent Here character (
CTRL
+\) after a drop cap to hang a dropped character to the left of a paragraph.
Use the Drop Caps area in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box to specify automatic drop caps (Style
& Formats).
2 Check Drop Caps.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.21
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Formatting drop caps
To embellish automatic drop caps, highlight the characters in the paragraph and apply local styles as usual.
You can reposition automatic drop caps vertically using baseline shift and horizontally using kerning.
Raised initial caps may affect leading
To prevent uneven line spacing between paragraphs with raised initial caps, use absolute leading rather than relative leading. See “Specifying Leading and Paragraph Spacing” in Chapter 12, “Typography.”
3 To specify how many characters drop, enter a value from 1 to 8 in the
Character Count field.
4 To specify the number of lines the characters are dropped, enter a value from 2 to 16 in the Line Count field.
5 Click Apply to preview your changes; then click OK.
R Notes about drop caps
Drop caps are measured by percent rather than by points. When you highlight a drop cap, the default size is 100%.
The baseline of an automatic drop cap is aligned with the baseline of the line specified in the Line Count field. If a drop cap character has a descender (a stroke that extends below the baseline), the character may obstruct lines of text below it.
Creating raised initial caps
R aised initial caps rise above the first line of a paragraph (like this one).
They are created by locally formatting characters at the beginning of a paragraph using the full range of QuarkXPress styles including fonts, type styles, and colors. To create raised initial caps:
1 Highlight the characters you want to raise.
2 To resize the characters, choose Style
& Size; choose a font size from the submenu, or choose Other and enter a font size in the field; then click OK.
3 To format the characters, use the Style menu commands such as
Font, Type Style, and Color.
13.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Initial Caps
4 To edit the space between the raised initial cap and the following character, place the Text Insertion bar i between the characters and choose Style
& Kern. Enter an amount, and click OK.
Creating initial caps using anchored boxes
U sing anchored text boxes lets you modify the attributes of the anchored box as well as the initial cap characters. The initial cap in this paragraph is an anchored text box with a linear background blend.
Anchored picture boxes let you import graphics as initial caps. For stepby-step anchoring instructions, see “Anchoring Boxes and Lines in Text” later in this chapter.
S Tips
Anchoring Text to Box boxes
You can create a raised initial cap using a character that has been converted into an anchored Bézier picture box. Just highlight the character and press
ALT before choosing Style
& Text to Box.
Formatting anchored boxes
You can embellish anchored boxes that contain initial caps using frames, blends, and shaded backgrounds. You can also resize anchored boxes to make them fit smoothly with the other characters.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.23
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Creating reverse type with rules
You can use a rule above or rule below to create reverse type that flows with text. Color the text a light color or white, then create a rule above or below with a negative absolute offset. Click Apply to check the placement of the rule.
Specifying Anchored Rules
Rules are frequently used above or below text to set off paragraphs, to indicate related information, or just to add a graphic flair to page design. The rule placed below this section’s title is a 1-point line specified to run the length of the text. QuarkXPress lets you specify rules as a paragraph attribute, which means you can place a rule above and/or below selected paragraphs. With a range of paragraphs selected, the rules you specify are placed between each paragraph in the range. When you apply rules above and/or below text, they become part of the paragraph, so text reflow makes the rules move with the text and keep their position.
Specifying rules above and/or below paragraphs
The Rules tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
& Rules) lets you specify the position, size, and style of paragraph rules. To specify paragraph rules for selected paragraphs:
1 Choose Style
& Rules (
CTRL + SHIFT + N ).
2 Check Rule Above to specify a rule above the first line of selected paragraphs. Check Rule Below to specify a rule below the last line of selected paragraphs.
13.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Anchored Rules
Check Rule Above or Rule Below in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
& Rules) to specify horizontal rules that flow above or below selected paragraphs.
3 Choose an option from the Length drop-down list to specify the initial length of the rule.
• Indents specifies a rule that extends from the paragraph’s Left Indent to its Right Indent, as specified in the Formats tab (Style menu).
• Text specifies a rule that is the same length as the first line of text in the paragraph (rule above) or the last line of text in the paragraph (rule below).
4 Enter values in the From Left and From Right fields to indent the rule further. From Left values move a rule’s left endpoint. A positive number will move the endpoint right; a negative number will move it left. From Right values move a rule’s right endpoint. A positive number will move the endpoint left; a negative number will move it right.
S Tips
Style sheets
Specify paragraph rules as a style sheet attribute to ensure consistent formatting among paragraphs.
Printing hairline rules
The printed width of a hairline rule is
.25 point wide on an imagesetter.
Laser printers print a wider hairline.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.25
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Space Before and/or Space After
If you apply a rule to paragraphs which have a Space Before and/or
Space After value applied (Style
&
Formats), paragraphs are spaced by at least the value entered in the Off-
set field of the Paragraph Attrib-
utes dialog box (Style
& Rules). If the value in the Offset field is less than the combined values in the
Space Before and Space After fields, the space between paragraphs is increased to equal the combined space values.
Rules between columns
When a rule with a percentage Offset value is between two paragraphs separated by the end of a column, the rule is not placed. You can prevent two paragraphs from separating at the end of a column by checking Keep Lines
Together in the Formats tab of the
Paragraph Attributes dialog box
(Style
& Formats).
5 Enter an absolute value or a percentage in the Offset field to specify the amount of space between a rule and the paragraph to which it is attached.
• For a Rule Above, an absolute Offset value places space between the bottom of the rule and the baseline of the first line of the paragraph. A percentage Offset value is measured up from the top of the ascenders in the paragraph’s first line of text, to the bottom of the rule.
• For a Rule Below, an absolute Offset value places space between the top of the rule and the baseline of the last line of the paragraph. A percentage Offset value is measured down from the bottom of the descenders in the paragraph’s last line of text, to the top of the rule.
6 Choose an option from the Style drop-down list to specify a line style for the rule.
7 Choose an option from the Width drop-down list, or enter a value in the field to specify a width.
8 Choose an option from the Color drop-down list to specify a color.
9 Choose an option from the Shade drop-down list, or enter a value in the field to specify a shade.
10 Click Apply to preview your changes; then click OK.
Removing rules
To remove rules from selected paragraphs, choose Style
& Rules.
Uncheck either Rule Above and/or Rule Below, and click OK.
13.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Anchoring Boxes and Lines in Text
Anchoring Boxes and Lines in Text
QuarkXPress lets you paste boxes and lines of any shape in text, which makes them act like characters and flow with text. This is especially helpful when text reflows, because anchored items reflow like other characters in the text. If items are not anchored and text reflows, they become displaced, and can end up overlapping text.
Anchor boxes in text so they act like characters and flow with text.
Anchoring boxes and lines in text
When you anchor an item, it behaves like a character flowing in text. To anchor an item:
1 Select the Item tool e, then select the item you want to anchor.
2 Choose Edit
& Cut (
CTRL + X ) or Copy ( CTRL + C ) to temporarily place the item on the Clipboard.
3 Select the Content tool
E and place the Text Insertion bar i where you want to anchor the item.
4 Choose Edit
& Paste (
CTRL + V ) to anchor the item at the text insertion point.
5 Adjust the leading of the paragraph containing the anchored item as necessary to accommodate the anchored item (Style
& Leading).
S Tips
Anchored items and auto leading
In paragraphs with auto leading, lines of text are spaced according to the largest character on each line. An anchored item that is larger than the characters in a line may cause inconsistent line spacing in the paragraph.
Anchored box content
You can import a picture into a picture box, import or create text in a text box, or change the content of the box by choosing an option from the Content submenu (Item menu).
Modify the anchored box and its content as necessary.
Anchoring Text to Box boxes
Using the Style
& Text to Box command, you can create a complex, text-shaped Bézier picture box from highlighted text. To anchor the box into a paragraph, press
ALT before choosing Style
& Text to Box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.27
Graphics in Typography
S Tips
Entering an Indent Here character
To “hang” an anchored item to the left of indented text, enter an Indent
Here character by pressing
CTRL
+\ after the anchored item. Lines of text are indented from the position of the
Indent Here character.
Adjust the leading in paragraphs with anchored boxes so the boxes do not overlap the text.
R You cannot anchor a box or line within another anchored text box, nor can you anchor text paths.
Creating a drop or raised cap effect
To control how anchored items are positioned in surrounding text, select an anchored item with either the Content tool
E or the Item tool e and:
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify & Box tab. In the Align with Text area, click Ascent for a drop cap or Baseline for a raised cap. Enter a value in the Offset field to raise or lower the anchored item, then click OK.
Specify whether anchored boxes align with either the ascent (left) or the baseline (right) of a text line.
• Measurements palette: Click
6 to align the anchored item with the ascent of the text line. Click
5 to align the item with the baseline.
13.28
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Anchoring Boxes and Lines in Text
Click the
6 or 5 icons to quickly align anchored items with either the ascent or baseline of a text line.
Resizing and reshaping anchored boxes and lines
Anchored items can be resized and reshaped like any other item. See
Chapter 7, “Box Basics” and Chapter 8, “Line Basics,” for specific information on resizing and reshaping items.
Resize anchored boxes using the Resizing pointer f. Anchored boxes display three resizing handles, instead of eight, but are resized using the same principles.
Cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting anchored boxes and lines
To cut or copy an anchored item, highlight the item as you would any text character and choose Edit
& Cut (
CTRL + X ) or Edit
& Copy (
CTRL + C ). To paste the anchored item elsewhere, place the Text Insertion bar i in a different location and choose Edit
& Paste (
CTRL + V ). To delete an anchored item, highlight it, or insert the Text Insertion bar i after it, and press
BACKSPACE .
R If you paste an item when the Item tool e is selected, the item will not be anchored to text; it will just be pasted normally on the page.
Unanchoring anchored boxes and lines
To unanchor an item, select it with the Item tool e and choose Item &
Duplicate to create an unanchored copy of the item. Then delete the anchored item from the text by highlighting it with the Content tool
E and pressing
BACKSPACE
.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 13.29
Pictures
14
Understanding Picture File Formats 14.3
Importing Pictures 14.9
Exporting Pictures
Listing and Updating Pictures
14.13
Manipulating Pictures
Creating and Editing Clipping Paths
14.16
Applying Contrast to Pictures 14.23
Applying Custom Halftone Screens to Pictures 14.27
14.29
14.38
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Pictures
14
Art is often an integral part of a document’s design. Pictures — photographs, illustrations, charts, etc. — add life to pages and convey information that words alone cannot.
You can import pictures created with paint, draw, illustration, and scanning programs into a
QuarkXPress picture box. Once a picture has been imported, you can modify it by altering its position, enlarging or reducing its size, changing its color, or skewing it to give it a slanted look. You can even remove its background using QuarkXPress clipping paths.
Understanding Picture File Formats
Understanding Picture File Formats
Pictures are created in many ways: They are scanned, created with digital cameras, captured from video, read from CDs — even created from scratch in certain applications. Once created, they can be stored on a disk in literally dozens of different formats.
QuarkXPress lets you import pictures in a variety of file formats. But because there are so many different ways to create and store graphic data,
QuarkXPress can only manipulate files stored in certain formats. Understanding which picture file formats are modifiable in QuarkXPress will help make your picture manipulation a smooth experience.
Understanding bitmap and object-oriented pictures
There are two fundamental types of graphic files: bitmap and object-oriented. Bitmap graphics are made of pixels. Object-oriented graphics use
X and Y coordinates to describe lines, curves, type, shading, and rotation angle. Both types of graphic files can be saved in a variety of formats.
S Tips
Acquiring scanned pictures
There are several ways to obtain scanned pictures: pay a service bureau to scan pictures for you, use
Kodak PhotoCD images, or scan them yourself.
Bitmap and object-oriented graphics
Bitmap graphics are a grid of grayscale or color pixels that make up an image, whereas object-oriented graphic files contain a mathematical description of how to draw an image.
Often, you can visually tell the difference between bitmap graphics (left), and object-oriented graphics (right) because bitmap graphics can look blocky or pixelated while object-oriented graphics always look smooth.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.3
Pictures
S Tips
Problems with bitmap images
Problems can occur when enlarging a bitmap picture because its apparent resolution decreases, making it look blocky or pixelated.
Resizing bitmap images for print
Bitmap images print best if they are kept at their original size (100%) or if they are reduced. When a bitmap picture is saved at a low dpi, it can look blocky even at 100%.
Dimension as it relates to resolution
Dimension is interdependent with resolution. In other words, if you change a picture’s dimensions, you change its resolution too. For example, consider a 72 dpi picture that’s
1" x 1". If you scale that picture to
200% in QuarkXPress, its effective resolution drops to 36 dpi, because the pixels are enlarged.
Bitmap images
Bitmap graphics are made up of individual pixels, tiny little dots that line up to form a grid that is blended by the eye into a single image. All scanned images are bitmap pictures.
Bitmap pictures can be stored in a number of different color modes, with different bit depths. Color mode describes the way colors are represented in a file; bit depth is the number of bits used to represent each pixel. The simplest color mode is “1-bit” (also known as “line art” or “black-andwhite”). In this mode, one bit is used to describe each pixel. If a bit is on, the pixel is black; if the bit is off, the pixel is white.
In more complex color modes, several bits are used to describe each pixel. For example, in grayscale mode, eight bits are used to describe each pixel (bit depth = 8). This means that each pixel can be represented as a number between 0 and 255 (in binary 00000000–11111111). When a grayscale graphic is displayed, the range of numbers between 0 and
255 is translated into a range of grays from 100% black to 0 black
(white). Thus, each pixel in such an image can be one of 256 different shades of gray.
Dimension describes the physical size of a picture (for example, 3" ´ 5").
The dimensions of a picture file are determined by the program that creates it, and are stored in the picture file.
Resolution is the number of pixels (dots) per inch in a picture.
This 8-bit picture, enlarged to 200%, has a dimension of 0.75" x 1.129" and a resolution of 36 dpi.
14.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Understanding Picture File Formats
Pixel depth describes how much information each pixel contains. The simplest bitmap images are 1-bit black-and-white images, like ink sketches. These 1-bit images are flat, without depth. More complex images like photographs have depth because they contain multiple-bit pixels that can describe many levels of gray or color. Pixel depth helps determine a picture’s tone, color, and detail.
1-bit images are flat (left), while multiple-bit images show contours using many levels of gray (right).
Object-oriented images
Object-oriented images contain information that describes how to draw the position and attributes of geometric objects. The functionality of these images is that you can shrink them, enlarge them, stretch them, and torque them without worrying about how they will look — because object-oriented images look smooth, no matter what size they are printed at.
Object-oriented images look smooth no matter what size they are printed at. This object-oriented image has been scaled from 100% (left) to 150% (right) without any difference in appearance.
R Some object-oriented images also contain bitmap graphics.
S Tips
Pixel depth
An 8-bit grayscale image can contain information up to 256 levels of gray, which allows accurate tone reproduction and quality detail given a high-quality output device. A 24-bit
RGB image is composed of three
8-bit grayscale channels (one each for red, green, and blue). Each pixel in a 24-bit RGB image can be one of over 16 million colors.
Vector file format
Object-oriented graphics are also referred to as vector file format because they use vector (distance and direction) information to describe a shape.
Raster file format
Bitmap, grayscale, and color files
(which this chapter refers to using the generic term “bitmap”) are also referred to as raster file format.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.5
Pictures
S Tips
Text saved in graphic format
Text saved in graphic format, such as a logo saved as an Encapsulated
PostScript (EPS) file, must be imported as a picture. You cannot use QuarkXPress to edit or modify such text.
Lossy compression
Lossy compression is a method in which there is some loss of data and possibly some degradation of quality.
Lossy compression often produces smaller file sizes and faster rendering than lossless compression.
Understanding file types
File type refers to how picture information is formatted. Is it formatted as an EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) object-oriented file? A TIFF (Tagged
Image File Format) bitmap file? Dozens of graphic formats exist, and each offers variations on how bitmap and/or object-oriented images are saved and can be manipulated. The following is a list of common file formats, including their main features:
• DCS 2.0 (Desktop Color Separations). An EPS graphic saved as a single file that can include up to six plates (cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and two spot colors), and a master image. Prints faster than a standard EPS. Master image is used for composite printing. Can contain bitmap and object-oriented information. Supports bitmap, grayscale, RGB, spot, and CMYK color models. DCS 1.0 — also known as “five-file format” — contains five separate files: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black plate files, as well as a master file.
• EPS (Encapsulated PostScript). Can contain bitmap and object-oriented information. Supports bitmap, grayscale, RGB, CMYK, spot, and indexed color models. Allows creation of embedded paths. Allows inclusion of low resolution previews for screen display and non-PostScript printing.
Allows inclusion of OPI comments. If saved in ASCII format, can be opened and “read” in a text editor.
• GIF (Graphics Interchange Format). Originally developed by CompuServe to transfer graphic files between computer systems. Now a popular graphics format for the Internet World Wide Web. Supports bitmap information up to 256 colors only.
• JPEG (developed by Joint Photographic Experts Group). Lossy compression format; allows extreme compression. Popular format for graphic files transmitted over the Internet due to extreme compression and ability to support 24-bit color. Contains bitmap information only. Can require
QuickTime system extension for decoding images. Supports grayscale,
RGB, and CMYK color models.
14.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Understanding Picture File Formats
• PhotoCD. Proprietary Kodak Format, designed for storage on CD–ROMs.
Can contain bitmap information only. Supports grayscale, RGB, and
Lab color models.
• PICT. A Mac OS format based on the original QuickDraw drawing routines. Contains bitmap and object-oriented information. Bit depth limited to 1-bit per pixel, but each pixel can be one of eight colors (using
QuickDraw commands).
• TIFF (Tagged Image File Format). Allows lossless compression if source application supports it. Can also allow JPEG compression. Contains bitmap information only. Supports bitmap, grayscale, RGB, CMYK, and indexed color models. Allows inclusion of embedded paths and alpha channels. Allows inclusion of OPI comments.
• WMF (Windows Metafile). A Windows file format that can contain both bitmap and object-oriented information.
S Tips
Picture files without previews
Some EPS files don’t have a preview, in which case a grayed out area will fill the picture box, instead of an image. The note, “PostScript Picture,” and the file’s name will appear in the center of the gray box. The picture will still print to a PostScript output device.
If you want to, you can go back to the original application, and save the picture with a preview.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.7
Pictures
Modifiable picture file formats
Most picture manipulation occurs in the Style menu, when a picture is selected. The availability of the commands in the Style menu for pictures varies depending on the file format of the selected picture.
Picture type Color Shade Negative Contrast Halftone
EPS/DCS
GIF
JPEG (*.JPG)
Grayscale no
* yes
Color
Mac PICT (*.PCT)
*
1-bit bitmap yes
Grayscale bitmap yes
Color bitmap
Object-oriented
OS/2 bitmap (*.BMP)
1-bit
Grayscale
Color
PhotoCD
Scitex CT
* no yes yes
* no
Grayscale
Color
*
*
TIFF (*.TIF)
1-bit
Grayscale yes yes
Color
*
Windows bitmap (*.BMP)/PCX
1-bit
Grayscale yes yes
Color
WMF
* no
*
* no
* yes
* yes yes
* no yes yes
* no yes yes
* yes yes
* no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes no yes yes no no yes yes yes no yes yes no no no yes no yes yes no no yes yes no no yes yes no no no no yes yes no
*Adjustable through the Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box
(Style
& Contrast).
14.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Importing Pictures
Importing Pictures
In QuarkXPress, you can import a picture into an active picture box by using the Get Picture feature (File menu), or by pasting a picture from the
Clipboard. You can also use the Insert Object feature (Edit menu) to embed and link pictures.
Importing pictures
Begin by drawing a picture box with one of the picture box creation tools.
An empty picture box displays an “X” in its center when Guides (View menu) are showing. To import a picture into an active picture box:
1 Choose File
& Get Picture (
CTRL + E ).
Choose File
& Get Picture to select a picture for import.
2 Use the controls in the dialog box to locate and select the picture you want to import.
3 Check Preview to display the picture before it is imported.
S Tips
Low-resolution preview images
QuarkXPress does not include highresolution information with the pictures you import into a document. You see and manipulate a low-resolution picture preview. The program maintains a tie to picture files and retrieves the high-resolution information it needs when printing. If you have manipulated the low-resolution preview picture, the high-resolution picture will print with your modifications.
However, the high-resolution file remains untouched.
Import indicator
When you are importing a picture, the page number in the lower-left corner of the active document window changes to a percentage that reflects the portion of the file that has been imported.
File filters
To import JPEG and PhotoCD pictures, make sure you have the appropriate
XTensions ™ software installed.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.9
Pictures
S Tips
A picture’s position upon import
When you import a picture, the image is imported at full size, with the origin
(upper left corner) in the upper left corner of the picture box’s bounding box. You may need to resize or reposition a picture after you import it to make it fit properly within its box. If a picture box appears empty after you import a picture, you can press
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
F to proportionally fit the picture to the box. See “Resizing
Pictures” later in this chapter.
Copying pictures with drag-and-drop
Instead of using the Get Picture command to fill a box, try dragging the icon of a picture file from the Windows desktop or the Windows Explorer onto a picture box in
QuarkXPress. You can also drag pictures from other applications which support this drag-and-drop feature.
Only picture file formats supported by
QuarkXPress or other OLE-aware applications on your system can be copied.
4 To import the selected picture, click Open (or double-click the picture’s name in the list).
R You can import a picture into a box that already contains a picture; the existing picture will be replaced by the one you import.
Converting color and grayscale images upon import
To import a TIFF grayscale picture as line art, press
CTRL while clicking
Open in the Get Picture dialog box. To import a TIFF line art picture as a grayscale image, press
ALT while clicking Open in the Get Picture dialog box. To import a TIFF color picture as a grayscale image, press
CTRL while clicking Open in the Get Picture dialog box.
Import a grayscale picture as line art (left) or a color picture as grayscale (right) by pressing CTRL before clicking Open in the Get Picture dialog box (File menu).
R When QuarkXPress converts a color image to grayscale, it uses each pixel’s RGB or CMYK values to determine the pixel’s luminance, then converts that luminance value to a gray value. When
QuarkXPress converts a grayscale image to 1-bit (line art), a 50 percent threshold is used; shades of gray below the threshold are converted to white, and shades of gray above the threshold are converted to black.
14.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Importing Pictures
Pasting pictures
Windows has a storage area called the Clipboard that lets you temporarily store cut and copied information, including pictures. You can paste pictures into your QuarkXPress document by selecting a picture box with the Content tool
E and choosing Edit & Paste (
CTRL
+
V
). If you want more control over how the object is pasted into your document, use the
Paste Special command in the Edit menu. The Paste Special command lets you choose how the object will be pasted into your document through the use of the Microsoft Windows Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) function. OLE enables a server application to provide an object to a client application. Using a server application, such as an illustration program, you can copy a picture to the Clipboard as an object.
You are then able to paste, paste and embed, or paste and link the object into the client application, QuarkXPress. If you later want to edit the embedded or linked object, all you have to do is double-click it with the
Content tool
E and the object’s server application launches to let you edit the object. For more information on how to embed and link objects, see the “Edit Menu” section in Chapter 3, “Menus and Dialog Boxes.”
S Tips
TIFF image resolution
QuarkXPress automatically displays a low-resolution 72 dpi preview of each imported TIFF or Scitex CT file.
This is done to keep file size down and screen redraw rate up. Usually, the screen redraw rate is fast enough to facilitate productivity. But sometimes, if an image is too large, reducing the resolution of its screen preview can help. Simply press the
SHIFT key before you click Open in the Get Picture dialog box to create a 36 dpi preview of the imported file.
This does not affect the original high-resolution picture.
Choose Edit
& Show Clipboard to view the Clipboard and its contents.
R To save time on screen redraw, you can “greek” pictures in your document by checking Greek Pictures (Edit
& Preferences &
Document
& General tab). All of your picture boxes will display as grayed out (except when selected), which will save time as you move throughout your document.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.11
Document Basics
S Tips
Linking a New Object
When you use the Create New button, the object you are about to create cannot be linked and will therefore be automatically embedded. This is because a linked object must have a source file, and since no source file exists yet, linking is not possible. Therefore, if you create a new object and want to link it, first create and save the object using the
Create New button, then re-insert the object in the picture box using the Create from File button.
Insert Object
The Insert Object command lets you create a new object using a server application or retrieve an existing file. In the Insert Object dialog box, the options differ according to which button, Create New or Create from
File, is selected.
Use the Insert Object dialog box (Edit menu) when the Create New button is selected to create an object using a server application (left), or insert an existing file when Create from File is selected (right).
• When Create New is selected, the Object Type list displays all the available server application object types. Select one and view the Result field for summary information about how the object will be inserted. Click the Display As Icon check box to view the object as an icon on-screen and use the Change Icon button to change the default icon. Click OK to launch the server application and create an object to place in the picture box. When you do this, QuarkXPress instantly applies the changes you make in the server application to the picture box. When you are done, select Exit and Return to <QuarkXPress Document Name> from the
File menu in the server application. If you plan to link the object later, make sure you save the file in the server application before you exit.
• When Create from File is selected, the File field displays allowing you to enter the specific location of a file to insert. If you do not know the exact location and file name of the object you want to insert, click the
Browse button to search for the file. Check the Link check box to link the object, otherwise it will be automatically embedded. The Result field displays summary information about how the file will be inserted. Click the Display As Icon check box to view the object as an icon on-screen and use the Change Icon button to change the default icon.
14.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Exporting Pictures
Exporting Pictures
QuarkXPress lets you save individual document pages — including all the text and graphics — as EPS files. These EPS files can be imported into other
QuarkXPress documents or other applications.
Saving a page as an EPS file
1 Choose File
& Save Page as EPS (
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + S ). The fields in the lower half of the dialog box specify how to save the page.
Use the Save Page as EPS dialog box (File menu) to save a QuarkXPress page as an EPS file.
You can then import your QuarkXPress page as a picture into a QuarkXPress document or other applications.
2 Enter a page number in the Page field to specify the page you want to save as an EPS file.
3 Enter a percentage value in the Scale field to specify the dimensions of your EPS image.
S Tips
Uses for EPS pages
You can use pages saved as EPS files when you need to scale a
QuarkXPress page up or down for an ad or other publication.
Specifying page numbers
When you enter a page number in the Page field, you must enter the complete page number, including any prefix, or an absolute page number.
An absolute page number reflects a page’s actual position relative to the first page of a document, regardless of the way in which the document is sectioned. To specify an absolute page number in the
Page field, precede the number you enter with a plus (+) sign. For example, to display the first page in a document, enter “+1.”
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.13
Pictures
S Tips
Binary, ASCII, and Clean 8-bit formats
Binary image data is half the size of
ASCII image data, but binary image data sometimes has problems printing over a parallel port. Clean 8-bit format is a combination of the ASCII and binary formats, and is much safer for printing through a parallel port.
Saving your data as Clean 8-bit creates a file that is smaller than a file containing ASCII image data, but is safer than a file containing binary image data.
Trapping information
The only trapping information that
QuarkXPress honors in regard to EPS files is the information specified in the overprint settings. This includes pages saved as EPS files.
4 Enter a value in the Bleed field to “expand” the EPS file’s boundaries.
For example, you may have a picture box that is .25" larger than a page on all sides of the page. Normally, when Save Page as EPS is selected, the picture box will be clipped to the exact size of the page.
However, if .25" is entered as the Bleed value before saving, the entire picture box will be captured in the resulting EPS.
5 Check Spread to generate an EPS of the entire spread on which the specified page is located.
6 Choose a format from the Format drop-down list. You can choose from four options: Color, B&W, DCS, and DCS 2.0.
Use the Format drop-down list (File
& Save Page as EPS) to choose a format for your
EPS image.
7 Choose TIFF from the Preview drop-down list to create a screen preview of the EPS file, or choose None to exclude the preview.
8 If your page contains bitmap (raster) image data, choose an option from the Data drop-down list to control how the data is included in the EPS. Choose from Binary, ASCII, or Clean 8-bit.
14.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Exporting Pictures
9 The OPI method lets you separate the high-resolution versions of color and grayscale bitmap images after the page is saved as an EPS file (if you have an OPI server and a compatible imagesetter). Click the OPI drop-down list if the page contains bitmap image data in
TIFF or EPS file format. Choose between Include Images, Omit TIFF, and Omit TIFF & EPS.
• Select Include Images to include all imported TIFF and EPS images in the saved EPS file.
• Select Omit TIFF to replace all TIFF images with OPI comments that can be read by an OPI server.
• Select Omit TIFF & EPS to replace all TIFF and EPS images with
OPI comments that can be read by an OPI server.
Choose an option from the OPI drop-down list (File
& Save Page as EPS) to specify whether or not to include certain images in your QuarkXPress EPS page.
10 Once you have specified all of the information for your EPS file, name the file, and click Save. QuarkXPress automatically selects the appropriate extension for EPS Files (*.eps) in the Save as type field.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.15
Pictures
Manipulating Pictures
Once you have imported a picture into a picture box, there are many ways to manipulate it. You can move, resize, scale, skew, color, and flip your picture.
Moving pictures
Move pictures inside their picture boxes using:
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL + M ); then click the Picture tab. Enter values in the Offset Across field to move the picture left or right, and the Offset Down field to move the picture up or down.
Click OK.
Use the Offset Across and Offset Down fields (Item
& Modify & Picture tab) to specify a picture’s position within a picture box, relative to the box’s origin.
• Tool palette: With the Content tool
E selected, click the picture and move it around inside the picture box.
14.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Manipulating Pictures
• Measurements palette: Enter values in the X+ field to move the picture left or right, and the Y+ field to move the picture up or down.
You can also click the
N and n arrows in the Measurements palette to move the picture in 1-point increments. Press the
ALT key while using the
N and n arrows to move the picture in .1-point increments.
Enter values in the X+ and Y+ fields or click the
N and n arrows in the Measurements palette to move a picture inside its picture box.
• Keyboard commands:
Automatic moving features
Center pictures
Nudge pictures in 1-point increments
Nudge pictures in .1-point increments
Command
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
M arrow keys
ALT
+arrow keys
R If the Item tool e is selected either when using the N and n arrows in the Measurements palette or the arrow keys on the keyboard, the picture box will move instead of the picture within the box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.17
Pictures
S Tips
Resizing a picture and its box simultaneously
Press
CTRL while manually resizing a picture box to resize the picture and the box simultaneously. Press
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT to resize the picture and the picture box proportionally.
Resizing pictures
You can scale pictures to make them larger or smaller using:
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Picture tab. Enter values in the Scale Across and Scale Down fields to resize the picture. Click OK.
Use the Scale Across and Scale Down fields (Item
& Modify & Picture tab) to enlarge or reduce the size of a picture.
• Measurements palette: Enter values in the X% and Y% fields to resize the picture, and press
ENTER
.
Enter values in the X% and Y% fields in the Measurements palette to scale a picture.
14.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Manipulating Pictures
• Keyboard commands:
Auto picture resize
Fit to picture box
Fit to picture box proportionately
Decrease size by 5%
Increase size by 5%
Command
CTRL + SHIFT + F
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + F
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +<
CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +>
R If you have rotated or skewed a picture before using the keyboard commands, the pictures may not seem to automatically resize correctly.
Cropping pictures
If you only want a portion of your image to appear, you can crop it by adjusting the size of the picture box. See “Resizing Boxes” in Chapter 7,
“Box Basics.”
S Tips
High-resolution pictures
If you’ve scanned a high-resolution image at a particular size and resolution, and you want to keep it looking its best at output, import it at 100%, and keep it at 100% (plus or minus
5%). Otherwise, your output may not look like what you wanted. This can also be a timesaver at output.
Cropping pictures
For increased speed at output, use
QuarkXPress to experiment with cropping pictures, and then crop the picture in an image editing application.
Crop pictures by resizing the picture box to show only the desired portion of a picture.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.19
Pictures
S Tips
Using the Rotation tool
R
Select the Rotation tool
R from the
Tool palette to manually rotate both the picture box and the image.
Rotating picture boxes without rotating the contents
When you rotate a picture box in
QuarkXPress, the image rotates too.
To straighten the picture, rotate the picture back by the same degree amount. For example, if you rotate a picture box by 30°, enter a value of
-30° in either the Measurements palette or the Picture Angle field in the Picture tab (Item
& Modify).
Rotating and skewing pictures
You can manipulate pictures by adjusting their rotation and skew. Rotating a picture sets it at a different angle, while skewing a picture applies a slanted look to it. You can rotate or skew a picture using:
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify (
CTRL
+
M
); then click the Picture tab. To rotate a picture, enter a value in the Picture Angle field. To skew a picture, enter a value in the Picture Skew field. Click OK.
Use the Picture Angle and Picture Skew fields (Item
& Modify & Picture tab) to specify a picture’s rotation and skew within a picture box.
• Measurements palette: Enter values in the r or S fields to rotate or skew a picture, and press ENTER .
Use the r and S fields in the Measurements palette to rotate or skew a picture.
14.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Manipulating Pictures
Coloring and shading pictures
You can apply color and shade values to the shadows and middle tones of black-and-white, grayscale, and color pictures. You can color and shade pictures using:
S Tips
Choosing colors
You can choose and apply colors contained in a document’s color list, which includes the program’s preset default colors, as well as colors you import, or colors you create using the Edit Color dialog box (Edit
& Colors).
Apply color to the shadows and middle tones of a picture by choosing an option from the Colors submenu (Style menu), the Colors drop-down list (Item
& Modify & Picture tab), or from the picture icon p color list in the Colors palette.
• Style menu: Choose Style
& Color and choose a color from the submenu. Choose Style
& Shade and choose a percentage from the submenu, or choose Other and enter a value in the Shade field. Click OK.
• Item menu: Choose Item
& Modify; then click the Picture tab.
Choose a color from the Colors drop-down list. Choose a shade from the Shade drop-down list, and click OK.
• Colors palette: Choose View
& Show Colors (F12). Click the picture icon p, then click one of the colors listed. Click the arrow < next to the current shade value to display a list of percentage values; choose a percentage from the list. You can also highlight the current shade value in the field, enter a new value, and press ENTER .
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.21
Pictures
S Tips
Drag and drop colors
When the picture icon p is selected in the Colors palette, you can drag and drop colors from the palette by clicking one of the color swatches in the color list and dragging the color swatch over a picture box. As soon as the color swatch is positioned over a box, the picture will fill with the new color. Drop the swatch to apply the color.
Flipping pictures
For increased speed at output, use
QuarkXPress to experiment with flipping pictures, and then flip the picture in an image editing application.
Click the picture icon p in the Colors palette to choose a color and shade for a selected picture.
Flipping pictures
You can flip the contents of a picture box from left to right, and from top to bottom using:
• Style menu: Choose Style
& Flip Horizontal to flip the contents of a picture box from left to right. Choose Style
& Flip Vertical to flip the contents of a picture box from top to bottom.
You can flip a picture (left) from left to right by choosing Style
& Flip Horizontal (center), and from top to bottom by choosing Style
& Flip Vertical (right).
• Measurements palette: Click the horizontal flip icon
( to flip a picture from left to right. Click the vertical flip icon
) to flip the picture from top to bottom.
Flip pictures by clicking the flip icons in the Measurements palette.
14.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Contrast to Pictures
Applying Contrast to Pictures
Contrast manipulation lets you change the way a picture displays on screen and in print. In particular, contrast describes tone reproduction — the relationship between the highlights, middle tones, and shadows of a picture. You can create your own contrast using the Picture Contrast
Specifications dialog box.
Alter a normal picture (left), by choosing Style
& Contrast. Click the High Contrast tool
& in the
Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box to make the picture look like line art (right).
S Tips
Troubleshooting color contrast
If you can’t adjust a color picture’s contrast, check your Application Prefer-
ences (Edit
& Preferences &
Application
& Display tab). Color
TIFFs should be set to 8-bit when a picture is imported, otherwise the contrast controls will be inaccessible for that picture. To solve this problem, simply set Color TIFFs to 8-bit and reimport the picture.
Original picture file
Contrast modifications affect only the way QuarkXPress displays and prints an imported picture; the original picture file is unaffected by contrast modifications made in QuarkXPress.
Manipulate pictures by clicking the Posterized Contrast tool * (left), or the Negative check box
(right), in the Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box (Style
& Contrast).
R Contrast controls are not available for 1-bit images.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.23
Pictures
S Tips
Importing high-resolution 1-bit TIFFs
If you’re importing a high-resolution
1-bit (line art) TIFF, and the preview looks like a big black blob, you can reimport the picture as a grayscale image by pressing
ALT while you’re importing the picture. The preview will look much better and you can adjust the contrast and/or apply a custom halftone screen. However, output may look different, so make sure you test it.
TIFF line art pictures
Contrast controls are not available for 1-bit TIFF pictures; however, you can shade 1-bit TIFF pictures by selecting a shade value from the
Shade submenu (Style menu) or by entering a value in the Shade field
(Item
& Modify & Picture tab).
Applying contrast to pictures
In QuarkXPress, a picture’s contrast is displayed as a line on a graph in the Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box (Style
& Contrast). This line is referred to as a curve. The graph represents a picture’s contrast by plotting input (original contrast) vs. output (displayed contrast). The curve represents the picture’s modified tone curve. Any change to this curve affects the image’s tone. To modify a picture’s contrast:
1 Choose Style
& Contrast (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
O
).
The Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box (Style
& Contrast) displays a 45° line from 0 to 1 when a grayscale picture is set at its normal contrast.
2 If you have a color picture selected, choose the HSB, RGB, CMY, or
CMYK color model from the Model drop-down list to determine which color components you want to manipulate.
Choose HSB, RGB, CMY, or CMYK from the Model drop-down list when a color picture is selected. Once a model is chosen, you can manipulate its components (Style
& Contrast).
14.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Contrast to Pictures
3 The color components for the selected model will become available in the Color area. For example, if you choose the CMYK model, Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow, and Black check boxes display in the Color area. To modify one or more color components, check them in the Color area.
Ghost an RGB image by choosing Style
& Contrast. Switch the Model to RGB and adjust the curves; then click Apply and make additional changes until you have achieved the effect you want.
4 Use any of the nine contrast modification tools to modify the selected curve or curves in various ways. If the picture is grayscale, one curve is available for manipulation. If the picture is in color, you can manipulate from one to four selected curves at a time.
H The Hand tool lets you move entire curves on the contrast graph.
When you move a curve against one of the graph’s edges and release the mouse, it flattens out. Constrain a curve’s movements to horizontal or vertical by pressing
SHIFT while dragging the curve.
d
The Pencil tool lets you redraw or make freehand adjustments to curves. Constrain modifications to 0°, 45°, or 90° by pressing
SHIFT while using the Pencil tool.
L
The Line tool lets you make linear adjustments to curves. Constrain modifications to 0°, 45°, or 90° by pressing
SHIFT while using the Line tool.
$ The Posterizer tool places handles at the 10% increment marks on the horizontal axis. Increase or decrease the input-to-output relationship in tonal range increments of 10% by dragging the handles up or down.
S Tips
Manipulating multiple curves
When a color picture is selected, you can choose to manipulate from one to four curves at a time. For example, if
CMYK is chosen from the Model drop-down list, you can manipulate any combination of the Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow, and Black curves, simply by checking the channels you want to manipulate.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.25
Pictures
S Tips
Color separation of pictures saved in
RGB mode
Process color separation of color pictures saved in RGB mode is possible using the CMS XTensions software included with QuarkXPress.
% The Spike tool places handles at the 10% increments marked on the horizontal axis. Drag the handles up and down to create spikes.
^ The Normal Contrast tool resets curves to the unmodified contrast position (a 45° line).
& The High Contrast tool applies a high contrast shape to curves, making the picture look like line art.
* The Posterized Contrast tool applies a posterized shape to curves.
Use the Hand tool
H to adjust the selected contrast curve to where you want it (Style &
Contrast).
( The Inversion tool flips selected curves horizontally. Clicking the
Inversion tool produces a negative of curves currently selected on the graph. The Inversion tool does not necessarily create a true negative of the overall current picture contrast. It simply inverts any changes you have made to curves.
5 Check Negative to create a negative of the picture’s current contrast.
If you have made changes to contrast curves using the Picture Con-
trast Specifications dialog box, these changes are made before Nega-
tive is applied. Checking Negative has the same effect as choosing
Negative from the Style menu.
6 Click Apply to preview your changes.
R You can undo the most recent change to contrast curves by pressing
CTRL
+
Z
.
14.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Custom Halftone Screens to Pictures
Applying Custom Halftone Screens to Pictures
The Style menu offers the Picture Halftone Specifications dialog box for grayscale pictures, which can be used to create some interesting artistic effects. A halftone is a reproduction of a continuous tone photograph traditionally created by photographing the picture through a crossline or contact screen that contains a grid pattern. Gradations of tone are simulated using dots or other shapes of varying sizes. The dialog box controls let you specify a screen’s frequency in lines per inch, angle, and pattern.
Display the Picture Halftone Specifications dialog box (Style
& Halftone) to create a custom halftone screen. The above grayscale picture has a Frequency of 25 lpi, an Angle of 90°, and a
Function (pattern) set to Ellipse.
Applying custom halftone screen to pictures
To create a custom halftone screen, select an eligible grayscale picture and:
1 Choose Style
& Halftone (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
H
).
2 Choose an option from the Frequency drop-down list or enter a value in the field to specify how many lines of the selected screen pattern are printed per inch.
S Tips
Function, screen angle, and screen frequency
To reproduce an image, a halftone screen pattern is repeated at a constant angle and frequency. The screen angle defines the direction at which rows of the screen pattern are placed.
The screen frequency determines how many rows of the selected screen pattern are printed per inch.
Line frequency
Specifying line frequency depends on a number of factors, including the resolution of the printer and the type of paper you plan to use. In general, the higher the resolution of your output device and the glossier the paper stock you use, the finer your halftone screen (more lines per inch) can be.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.27
Pictures
S Tips
Halftones
Converting a grayscale image into a halftone simulates shades of gray by distributing black pixels in a specific pattern to represent shades of gray.
3 Choose an option from the Angle drop-down list or enter a value in the field to specify the angle at which lines of the screen pattern are placed.
Specify screen Frequency, Angle, and Function using the Picture Halftone Specifica-
tions dialog box (Style
& Halftone).
4 Choose an option from the Function drop-down list to specify the screen pattern. Click OK.
R Notes about halftoning
You will not see halftoning displayed on your monitor. To see the effects of your custom halftone screen, print the picture.
Default halftone screen frequency, angle, and function are determined by the values entered in the Output tab of the Print dialog box (File
&
Print). Any halftone modifications made to individual pictures will override the default settings in this tab.
14.28
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Editing Clipping Paths
Creating and Editing Clipping Paths
Clipping paths tell QuarkXPress which parts of a picture should be displayed, and which parts should be treated as transparent. This is especially useful when you are attempting to isolate the picture’s subject from its surrounding background in the original picture file. QuarkXPress can create clipping paths from scratch, or it can use embedded path and alpha channel information to create clipping paths.
A clipping path determines a portion of an image that will be visible, and a portion that will be ignored. The image at left shows the picture with all of its image data. The image at right shows how a clipping path can be used to crop irrelevant image data.
S Tips
Clipping path
A clipping path is any closed Bézier shape that defines a region (or regions) that should be treated as visible, and a region (or regions) that should be treated as invisible.
Clipping paths and runaround paths
Clipping paths tell QuarkXPress which parts of a picture should be considered visible, and runaround paths tell QuarkXPress where to wrap text. You are not limited to using the same settings for your runaround and clipping paths. You can even use different clipping paths or alpha channels for your clipping and runaround settings. See “Running Text Around Items” in Chapter 13, “Graphics in Typography.”
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.29
Pictures
S Tips
Green clipping path and blue picture box outline
The green path in the Preview area
(Item
& Clipping) corresponds to the clipping path, and the blue outline corresponds to the picture box.
To change these default colors, choose Edit
& Preferences &
Application; then click the Display tab. Double-click either the Ruler color or the Margin color to change the clipping path or picture box outline colors, respectively.
Information area
The Information area in the Clip-
ping tab contains statistics on the number of Alpha Channels and
Embedded Paths included in the original picture file, as well as the number of Points that make up the
QuarkXPress clipping path.
Creating clipping paths
Choose Item
& Clipping (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
T
); then choose an option from the
Type drop-down list:
• Choose Item to crop an image to the picture box. Item does not create a clipping path, it simply crops the picture to its picture box.
• Choose Picture Bounds to clip a picture around the rectangular “canvas area” of the imported picture file. This includes any white background areas saved with the original picture file. Enter values in the
Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields to determine the outset or inset of the clipping path from the picture’s boundaries. Positive values outset the clipping path, negative values inset the clipping path.
Choose Picture Bounds from the Type drop-down list (Item
& Clipping) to use the picture’s
“canvas area” for a clipping path.
14.30
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Editing Clipping Paths
• Choose Embedded Path to clip a picture around a path already embedded in the picture file. Choose a path from the Path drop-down list if the picture file contains more than one embedded path.
Choose Embedded Path from the Type drop-down list (Item
& Clipping), then choose a particular path from the Path drop-down list. QuarkXPress will read the embedded path information and generate a clipping path.
• Choose Alpha Channel to clip a picture around an alpha channel already embedded in a picture file. Choose an alpha channel from the
Alpha drop-down list if the picture file contains more than one embedded alpha channel.
R Alpha channels are saved in image editing applications. They are selections (not paths) that are created as 8-bit masks. (A mask is a black-and-white or grayscale image used to indicate which parts of another graphic are visible and which parts are transparent.)
QuarkXPress can use embedded alpha channel information to define a clipping path.
S Tips
Embedded paths and alpha channels
Image editing applications are capable of embedding paths and alpha channels in an image. If a picture storing this information is imported into QuarkXPress, you can access the path and channel information using the Clipping tab in the Modify dialog box (Item menu). QuarkXPress can scan the paths and channels and create QuarkXPress clipping paths based on the information.
File formats that include embedded path and alpha channel information
TIFFs can have embedded paths and alpha channels. QuarkXPress can read the embedded paths of TIFF and EPS files saved in Adobe Photoshop.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.31
Pictures
S Tips
The best images for Non-White
Areas clipping paths
Non-White Areas works best when the unwanted parts of the image are much lighter than the subject itself
(or vice versa). If you are using a grayscale or color image that has a similar tonal value throughout the picture, QuarkXPress will have a difficult time reading the subject’s outline, and won’t be able to create a very accurate clipping path.
Clipping paths and high-resolution picture files
Clipping paths created by
QuarkXPress are not built into the picture file like the ones you create in image-editing applications. Rather, they are based on the high-resolution picture file, but are stored with your
QuarkXPress document.
• Choose Non-White Areas to create a QuarkXPress clipping path based on the picture’s subject. Depending on the image and the value in the
Threshold field, the clipping path will outline a non-white figure within a larger white or near-white image (or vice versa).
Choose Non-White Areas from the Type drop-down list (Item
& Clipping), to create a clipping path that outlines the picture’s subject and ignores the background.
Fine tuning the clipping path
When Embedded Path, Alpha Channel, or Non-White Areas is chosen in the Type drop-down list, various fields become available that let you manipulate the clipping path. Enter values in the fields to modify the path.
1 Enter values in the Outset field to change the size of the clipping path. Positive values move the clipping path further from the original setting, negative values decrease the amount of image included in the clipping path.
14.32
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Editing Clipping Paths
Enter values in the Outset field (Item
& Clipping) to describe the distance that the clipping path is outset or inset from the clipped image. At 0 pt (left), the clipping path is not inset or outset. At 10 pt (right), the clipping path is outset by 10 pixels.
2 Enter values in the Noise field to identify and delete paths around stray pixels when creating the clipping path. For example, if you set the Noise value to 5 pt, any paths in the graphic that are less than 5 pt will be removed. This is useful for removing unwanted pixels
(specifically by deleting small paths around the pixels) in the background of an image.
The image at left shows a main subject, plus some small extraneous path areas. Those small path areas can be ignored by entering a higher value in the Noise field (Item
& Clipping) (right).
3 Enter values in the Smoothness field to specify clipping path accuracy.
A lower value creates a more complex, smooth path with a greater number of points — because it moves the path closer to the subject. A higher value creates a less accurate path. This is similar to the flatness setting in many image editing applications.
S Tips
Noise values and the concept of multiple paths
A clipping path is capable of containing many paths. For example, if you have a picture of two donuts and a scattering of crumbs (and your Clip-
ping tab settings are set to render this scenario), a QuarkXPress clipping path could show two green paths around the two donuts, two green paths around the donut holes, and a plethora of tiny green paths around the crumbs. All of these paths are considered to be one clipping path. To delete the tiny crumb paths, enter a value in the Noise field that corresponds to their diameters (like 5 pt), and any path in the graphic that is less than 5 pt in diameter will be removed.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.33
Pictures
S Tips
Low smoothness values
When you enter a low value, like 0, in the Smoothness field, a very accurate but computationally complex path will be generated. Because of its complexity and the number of points involved, it may use a lot of memory and cause problems during output.
How Threshold excludes pixels
The Threshold value determines how to define white. All pixels defined as “white” are excluded. For example, if the Threshold value is
20%, and a pixel’s gray value is below or at 20%, the pixel will be considered “white” and excluded from the clipping path.
Coloring a picture box background
When you color a picture box, the clipping path is positioned in front of the colored box. You can create interesting effects by checking Invert in the Clipping tab — the clipped image will be filled with the background color.
Use the Smoothness value (Item
& Clipping) to determine how smooth or rough an outline is. At 0 pt (left), many points describe the outline; at 2 pt (center), fewer points are used, but the shape is still described relatively accurately; at 20 pt (right), the path loses its cohesiveness altogether.
R The Points field in the Information area keeps track of how many points make up the QuarkXPress clipping path.
4 Enter values in the Threshold field to specify how QuarkXPress determines dark pixels from light pixels. When Non-White Areas is chosen, any pixel shaded below the Threshold value is excluded from the clipping area, and any pixel above it is included. The reverse is true for alpha channels.
Enter values in the Threshold field (Item
& Clipping) to define where to place the clipping path. At 0 (left), nothing is defined as white, so everything is included in the clipping path. At
10% (center), everything lighter than 10% gray is defined as white and is ignored (the rest is included in the clipping path). At 75% (right), everything lighter than 75% gray is defined as white, which means that only the very dark areas are included in the clipping path.
R Threshold is only available for Non-White Areas and Alpha
Channel. (You can alter the Threshold when an alpha channel is selected because alpha channels can be grayscale. They have gray pixels that can be interpreted by a threshold tolerance.)
14.34
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Editing Clipping Paths
Creating special effects
Various options in the Clipping tab let you specify whether a picture is clipped using its outside edges only, or all of its edges. You can also invert a clipping path so that the background area shows and the subject is cut out. To create special effects:
1 Check Invert to make the visible regions transparent and the transparent regions visible.
Use Invert to display previously transparent areas and exclude previously visible areas.
2 Check Outside Edges Only to select only the outer edges of the clipping path. Uncheck Outside Edges Only to include paths which define holes.
S Tips
Outside edges of the clipping path
The Outside Edges Only check box determines whether or not
QuarkXPress allows holes within a path. For example, if checked,
QuarkXPress will create one path for a picture of a donut (one for the outside path edges of the donut).
Uncheck Outside Edges Only and the donut hole path becomes visible too.
Applying modifications
To update any changes in the Pre-
view area in the Clipping tab (Item menu), click Apply, highlight a new field, or press the
TAB key. Pressing the
TAB key will also move you through the fields.
Check Outside Edges Only (Item
& Clipping) and QuarkXPress only generates the outer path edges, like the outline of the butterfly (left). Uncheck Outside Edges Only and all of the inner path information, like the butterfly’s wing pattern (right), is generated.
3 Check Restrict to Picture Box to crop the picture to the edges of the picture box. Uncheck Restrict to Picture Box to allow the image to extend beyond the picture box boundaries.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.35
Pictures
S Tips
Clicking Rescan
Click Rescan to rebuild the clipping path from scratch based on the Clip-
ping dialog box settings. Clicking
Rescan undoes Crop to Box.
Check Restrict to Picture Box (Item
& Clipping) to use the picture box as the outer cropping boundary (left). Uncheck Restrict to Picture Box to use the clipping path as the cropping boundaries (right).
4 Click Crop to Box to remove portions of the clipping path that fall outside the current box borders.
Position an unwanted portion of an image outside the picture box (left), then click Crop to Box to delete it (right). When you move the image, the cropped part is gone. Regenerate the path by clicking Rescan.
5 Click Apply to preview your changes; then click OK.
14.36
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Editing Clipping Paths
Editing clipping paths
If the clipping path requires further adjustment, you can access and manipulate it manually. The clipping path appears as a green outline.
Select the picture and choose Item
& Edit. Then check Clipping Path to access and manipulate the clipping path’s points, curve handles, and line segments. Edit the path the same way you would any Bézier object.
Choose Item
& Edit and check Clipping Path to access the clipping path’s Bézier outline.
S Tips
Editing clipping paths
For more information on editing
Bézier boxes, and specific Bézier terminology, see “Reshaping Boxes” in
Chapter 7, “Box Basics.”
When clipping path editing is unavailable
When Item is chosen in the Type drop-down list (Item
& Clipping), you cannot edit a clipping path using Béziers.
Editing the low-resolution preview
A QuarkXPress clipping path generated using the Clipping tab (Item menu) is based on the high-resolution picture file. Manually editing the clipping path requires the user to work with the low-resolution preview as the only guide, so accuracy is not as foolproof.
Setting Smoothness to 0 points in the Clipping tab (Item menu) may not give you the path you require (left). You can manually manipulate the points, curve handles, and line segments to achieve your desired effect (right) by selecting the picture and choosing Item
& Edit; then check
Clipping Path.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.37
Pictures
S Tips
Re-establishing ties between
QuarkXPress and picture files
If you move or change the name of a picture file after it has been imported using the Get Picture command in the File menu, you will break the tie between the QuarkXPress document and the picture file. You can use the
Usage dialog box to reestablish the connection.
Broken ties at print time
If QuarkXPress cannot find your pictures when you are ready to print, you will be asked to update their status.
Listing and Updating Pictures
The Usage feature (Utilities menu) lets you keep track of all of your imported pictures. The Usage dialog box lists the pictures in a document, shows their status, and then lets you update pictures whose files have been modified, moved, or renamed.
Verifying status and updating pictures
QuarkXPress does not include high-resolution information with the pictures you import using the Get Picture command in the File menu.
Instead, the program maintains ties to picture files and retrieves the high-resolution information it needs when printing. To check on the status and update pictures in your document:
1 Choose Utilities
& Usage; then click the Pictures tab. A list displays the imported pictures in the document, as well as their status.
Use the Usage dialog box (Utilities menu) to keep track of the pictures in an active document, and to find or update any missing picture files.
• Print indicates whether or not the picture will print. If a picture is checked in the Print column, it will print.
14.38
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Listing and Updating Pictures
• Name includes the file name, and indicates a brief path to the picture file. Picture boxes with embedded and linked objects are named embedded object and linked object with no path displayed.
• Page indicates the page the picture appears on in the active document. If the characters “PB“ appear next to a page number, the picture is located on the pasteboard near the indicated page.
• Type indicates the type of file format.
• Status indicates the state of the picture. OK indicates that
QuarkXPress knows the location of the picture file and that it has not been modified. Missing indicates that QuarkXPress cannot find the picture file or that its file name is different. Modified indicates that the picture file’s Last Modified date and time (as listed in the
Finder) is different from when you imported it.
2 Check More Information to display the full path to the picture file, as well as the file’s size.
3 To locate a missing picture file, highlight it and click Update; the
Find dialog box lets you preview picture files, so you can locate and choose the appropriate picture file. If QuarkXPress finds other Miss-
ing files in the same folder, a warning lets you update all of them simultaneously. Click Open to re-establish the tie.
R An embedded object will never have to be updated since it contains all of its file information when brought into QuarkXPress.
However, a linked object relies on its source file for information and may need to be updated if the source file is moved. To update a linked object, use the Links command in the Edit menu. The
Usage dialog box should only be used to manipulate pictures which were brought into QuarkXPress with the Get Picture command or dragged from the Windows desktop or Windows
Explorer. For more information on updating links, see the “Edit
Menu” section of Chapter 3, “Menus and Dialog Boxes.”
S Tips
Auto Picture Import
You can use Auto Picture Import to check high resolution pictures when you open a document. The program checks for changes in a high resolution data file’s name, modification date, and location. The Auto Pic-
ture Import drop-down list (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document &
General tab) has three options: Off,
On, and On (verify). Off disables auto picture import. On automatically reimports modified pictures when you open the document. On
(verify) lets you control which pictures are updated.
Using Update
When you use Update in the Usage dialog box (Utilities
& Usage) the picture’s offset, rotation, and other modifications are remembered. If you reimport using the Get Picture dialog box, any modifications are lost.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 14.39
Pictures
S Tips
Preventing individual picture boxes and pictures from printing
To prevent a picture box from printing, select the box; choose Item
&
Modify
& Box tab; then check
Suppress Printout. To prevent only the picture in the box from printing, check Suppress Picture Printout in the Picture tab.
Click Update (Utilities
& Usage) to access the Find dialog box. You can locate a missing picture and reestablish the tie to the picture file.
4 To update a modified picture file, click Update; every instance of the modified picture used in the document will be updated.
5 Click Show Me to locate and view a picture in your document.
6 Check Print if you want to print a picture, uncheck Print if you want to suppress printing.
7 Click Done to close the dialog box.
R If you modify a picture file (using another program) after you import it, you should update the image using the Usage dialog box. If you choose not to update a modified picture, QuarkXPress prints the picture using the modified file, even though it displays the original preview in the document.
14.40
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Color
15
Specifying Spot Versus Process Colors 15.3
Specifying Matching System Colors 15.4
Creating and Editing Colors 15.6
Applying Color, Shade, and Blends 15.19
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Color
15
Color is the design element that brings your documents to life. QuarkXPress lets you create custom colors, choose colors from any one of a number of standardized color matching systems, and edit colors using the Edit Color dialog box ( Edit
&
Colors) . You can apply color and shade to text, items, and box attributes using the Colors palette
( View
& Show Colors)
. You can also apply colors to text using style sheets and the Color submenu
( Style
& Color)
.
Whether you prefer to use menu commands or palettes, QuarkXPress lets you easily give your documents the eye-catching vitality that only color can provide.
Specifying Spot Versus Process Colors
Specifying Spot Versus Process Colors
Although some print devices can output QuarkXPress documents in full color, the practical use of such output in most publishing environments is limited to color proofing. Usually, color you specify in a QuarkXPress document is output in the form of color separation plates and reproduced on-press using color inks.
QuarkXPress separation plates
You can specify two types of color in a QuarkXPress document: spot color and process color. When you print a document page that contains spot colors, QuarkXPress outputs all characters, pictures, and items of a given spot color on the same spot color separation plate. When a document contains items to which you have applied a process color, QuarkXPress separates the color into the appropriate number of process color components, and prints a process color separation plate of each color component for every page in your document. If, for example, your document pages contain items to which a single spot color has been applied as well as items to which you have applied four color-process colors, QuarkXPress will print five separation plates for each page that contains the colors: the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black process separation plates, plus another plate that contains page elements to which the spot color is applied.
Press plates
To reproduce color on-press, commercial printers create a press plate from each of the QuarkXPress spot color and process color separation plates.
Color ink is used to transfer the image from the press plate to the paper.
For example, cyan ink is used to print the page image contained on the cyan press plate; magenta ink is used to print the page image contained on the magenta plate, and so on. A five-color job requires five press plates, each overprinting a different ink color to create the final full-color page.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.3
Color
Specifying Matching System Colors
Selecting colors from a color matching system can be helpful when communicating with a commercial printer about the colors in your document.
QuarkXPress lets you select colors from the following color models:
PANTONE
® Hexachrome ™ , the
PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM
, the
TRUMATCH color system, the
FOCOLTONE color system,
DIC
, and
TOYO
. The Edit Color dialog box ( Edit
& Colors & New) lets you display and select colors from any of these color matching systems.
TRUMATCH and FOCOLTONE
The TRUMATCH and FOCOLTONE color systems were designed to achieve predictable four-color results when they are output using the standard set of
SWOP (Specifications for Web-Offset Publications) process inks. Because the colors are predefined, you can be assured that the final printed color will closely match the color as printed in the corresponding color swatchbook (subject to variations in paper color, ink purity, and other variables). Swatchbooks for these matching systems are available in coated and uncoated paper editions.
PANTONE
The
PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM was designed to specify spot colors. The
PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM prints each color on its own plate when you print separations. Because inks in
PANTONE colors are standardized, cataloged, and premixed, you are assured of accurate color for your final output. If you wish to specify
PANTONE colors for process-color separation, the
PANTONE PROSIM color model allows you to simulate many
PANTONE spot colors using four-color process separations (CMYK) and view the
PANTONE process
15.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Matching System Colors simulation on your color monitor. Use the
PANTONE
Color Formula Guide for accurate
PANTONE
-identified solid color standards for coated and uncoated paper stock.
The
PANTONE
Process Color System is designed to reproduce colors using four standard
PANTONE process inks. This matching system allows you to choose from over 3,000 color combinations, which are arranged chromatically. Use the
PANTONE
Process Color System Guide for accurate
PANTONE
identified color standards for coated paper stock.
The
PANTONE
Hexachrome Color System is designed to reproduce colors using six unique
PANTONE process inks. This matching system allows you to choose from over 2,000 ultra high fidelity colors, which are arranged chromatically. Use the
PANTONE
Hexachrome Color Selectors for accurate
PANTONE
Hexachrome paper stock.
-identified color standards for coated and uncoated
DIC and TOYO
DIC and TOYO are spot color matching systems used in Japan.
Specifying a matching system color
After choosing a color matching system, you can specify a color choice as either a spot color or a process color in the Edit Color dialog box
(Edit
& Colors & New).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.5
Color
Creating and Editing Colors
For creating and editing colors in your documents, QuarkXPress lets you choose the color model that is right for you: HSB (hue-saturation-brightness), RGB (red-green-blue), CMYK (cyan-magenta-yellow-black), and
PANTONE
Hexachrome (cyan-magenta-yellow-black-orange-green). You can also choose from one of the following standard color matching systems: the
PANTONE
M
ATCHING
S
YSTEM
, the
TRUMATCH color system, the
FOCOLTONE color system,
DIC
, and
TOYO
.
The Colors palette
When you open a new document, its Colors palette (View
& Show
Colors) contains all of the colors in the program’s Default Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors). Like other open palettes, the Colors palette is always displayed in front of all open documents. To change default colors, use the
Default Colors dialog box when no documents are open. To create or delete colors, edit existing colors, and append colors to a selected document, use the Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors) with that document open. See “Applying Color, Shade, and Blends” later in this chapter.
15.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Editing Colors
The Colors palette (View
& Show Colors) lets you apply color to any item.
When you create or edit a color, you can specify it as either a spot color or a process color. QuarkXPress prints items to which you apply a spot color as an individual spot color separation plate; items to which you apply a process color are printed on each of the process color separation plates. See “Printing Color Separations” in Chapter 21, “Output.”
Working with colors
Whether you are working with colors for the application default colors list, or for a document’s colors list, you do so using the Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors).
The Colors dialog box contains two lists: the top displays a list of colors according to the choice you make in the Show drop-down list, and the bottom displays the composition of the highlighted color. When no documents are open, the list displays all default colors. When a document is active, the list only displays colors for the active document.
R Colors created when no documents are open are default colors that are included with all subsequently created documents; colors created when a document is open are specific to that document only.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.7
Color
S Tips
Adding application default colors
When you use standard colors in almost every document you create, you can ensure that those colors are always available using one of the following methods: (1) When no documents are open, create and add them to your application default color list using the Edit
&
Colors command and clicking New;
(2) Import all colors from the color list of another document using the
Append button in the Default
Colors dialog box (Edit
&
Colors);
(3) Use the Append command
(File
&
Append
&
Colors tab); doing so lets you see a description of every color in the selected document, and choose which of the listed colors you want to import.
To edit colors:
1 To work with colors with a document open, choose Edit
& Colors to display the Colors dialog box.
The Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors) lets you create, edit, duplicate, delete, append, and specify trapping for colors in an open document.
To work with default colors when no documents are open, choose
Edit
& Colors to display the Default Colors dialog box.
The Default Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors) lets you create, edit, duplicate, delete, and append default colors. This dialog box appears when you do not have a document open.
15.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Editing Colors
The Default Colors dialog box includes the following default colors.
• Red, Green, and Blue: You can edit these colors or delete them from the default color list.
• Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and White: You cannot edit or delete these colors.
• Registration: You can edit Registration, but you cannot delete it.
R You should apply Registration color to lines when creating your own registration or crop marks. Text, pictures, or items to which registration color has been applied will print on all separation plates.
2 To determine which colors are displayed in the Colors dialog box, make a selection from the Show drop-down list.
• Choose All Colors to display all the colors available to the document. When no document is open, only colors that are defaults for all documents are displayed.
• Choose Spot Colors to display only spot colors, which appear on their own, separate separation plate.
• Choose Process Colors to display only process colors, including
High Fidelity (HiFi) color.
• Choose Multi-Ink Colors to display only those colors that you have built from other process and spot colors using the Multi-
Ink Color option in the Model drop-down list of the Edit Color dialog box.
• Choose Colors In Use to display only those colors that are applied somewhere in the active document.
• Choose Colors Not Used to display only those colors that are unused in the active document.
S Tips
Converting custom colors
When creating custom colors always convert them to the color model that your commercial printer will use to produce your document. For example, if your document will be a four color process print job, and you used the
RGB color model to create several colors, use the QuarkXPress color editing feature to change them. In this case you would uncheck Spot
Color, and change the color model to
CMYK. You could also match the
RGB colors as closely as possible to colors from any of the standardized process color matching systems, and then add the new process colors to your colors list.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.9
Color
S Tips
Creating or changing default colors
To create or change default colors, open the Default Colors dialog box by choosing Edit
&
Colors with no documents open.
3 To create and name a new color, click New to display the Edit Color dialog box (Edit
& Colors & New). You can create up to 1,000 default and/or document-specific colors.
The Edit Color dialog box (Edit
& Colors & New) contains controls that let you add, create, and edit colors.
4 To modify a color highlighted in the Colors list, click Edit to display the Edit Color dialog box. You can also double-click a color name to display the Edit Color dialog box. You can change the Name, Model, and Spot Color specification for any color, and select the Halftone
Screen. You can also use the color wheel to adjust the values for HSB,
RGB, LAB, and CMYK colors.
5 To create a copy of a color highlighted in the Colors list, click Dupli-
cate. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Color dialog box so that you can rename and edit the copied color.
6 To remove the highlighted color(s) from the active document, click
Delete. While you cannot delete some of the default colors, you can delete Red, Green, and Blue from the Colors list. If you try to delete a color that was used in the active document, a warning lets you choose a replacement color.
15.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Editing Colors
7 To import colors from another QuarkXPress document, click Append to display the Append Colors dialog box. Use this dialog box to choose a
QuarkXPress document from which to append colors, then click Open.
The Append Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors & Append) lets you choose a QuarkXPress document from which to append colors.
8 To edit trapping specifications for a color highlighted in the Colors list, click Edit Trap to display the Trap Specifications dialog box. See
Chapter 16, “Trapping.”
9 Click OK to close the Edit Colors dialog box.
10 Click Save to save changes made to any colors in the Edit Color dialog box. When you click Save, QuarkXPress updates colors in the selected document to match the new color specifications and closes the Colors dialog box.
Creating a new color
QuarkXPress lets you choose from several color models and from a number of color matching systems when you create new colors for a selected document. If you have colors you use frequently, you can create new colors for the default color list in your QuarkXPress application when no documents are open. To create a new color for an active document:
1 With a document open, choose Edit
& Colors to display the Colors dialog box; then click New.
S Tips
Too many color models?
QuarkXPress lets you choose from many different standardized color matching systems to create your colors. If there are some matching systems you never use, remove those unneeded files from the Color folder within your QuarkXPress folder. Keep the unused matching systems in another folder.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.11
Color
2 To name your new color, enter a name in the Name field.
3 To specify the color model for your new color, choose an option from the Model drop-down list.
The Model drop-down list lets you choose from several color models and from a number of color matching systems to create and edit colors.
If you choose HSB, RGB, LAB, or CMYK you can use the color wheel to pick a color, or you can enter values in the numeric color component fields to specify a color.
• To create a custom color using percentages of red, green, and blue, choose RGB from the Model drop-down list. Create the color by entering percentage values in the Red, Green, and Blue fields, by using the sliders, or by clicking and dragging to select a color from the color wheel. Release the mouse button when the color you want is displayed in the New/Original area.
• To create a color using Hue, Saturation, and Brightness, choose
HSB from the Model drop-down list. Enter a degree value in the
H field, and percentage values in the S and B fields, use the sliders, or click and drag to select a color from the color wheel.
15.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Editing Colors
Release the mouse button when the color you want is displayed in the New/Original area.
• To create a color using LAB, choose LAB from the Model dropdown list. The LAB color model, also referred to as “LAB color space,” is a standard three-dimensional model for representing colors. Colors are specified by a luminance coordinate (L) and two chrominance coordinates (A for green-red), and (B for blueyellow). In the LAB color space, equal distances represent color differences of roughly equal visual magnitudes. Enter a percentage value in the L field, and numerical values ranging from –120 to 120 in the A and B fields, use the sliders, or click and drag to select a color from the color wheel. Release the mouse button when the color you want is displayed in the New/Original area.
• To create a color based on screen percentages of existing process and/or spot colors, choose Multi-Ink from the Model dropdown list. Click a color to display it in the New/Original area.
• To create a four-color process color, choose CMYK from the Model drop-down list. Create the color by entering percentage values in the C, M, Y, and K fields, use the sliders, or click and drag to select a color from the color wheel. Release the mouse button when the color you want is displayed in the New/Original area.
R Before using the Multi-Ink color model, consult with your commercial printer to ensure that the colors you plan to create can be reproduced on-press.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.13
Color
S Tips
HSB, RGB, LAB, and CMYK
HSB is a color model used by artists, because it resembles the manner in which they mix colors. Hue describes color pigment; Saturation measures the amount of color pigment; and Brightness measures the amount of black in a color.
RGB, an additive color system, is most often used with slide recorders or color video monitors. Red, green, and blue light is mixed to represent colors on a video screen.
LAB, or CIELAB, is a color space designed to be independent of differing interpretations imposed by monitor or printer manufacturers. The
LAB model used in QuarkXPress uses the “D50 illuminant” to be consistent with most usage.
CMYK is a subtractive color model used by professional printers to reproduce colors by combining cyan,
magenta, yellow, and black inks on a press.
The Edit Color dialog box (Edit
& Colors & New) contains controls that let you create and edit process separation colors.
If you choose a color matching system model, the appropriate color matching system selector is displayed in the Edit Color dialog box.
The Edit Color dialog box (Edit
& Colors & New) also lets you select colors from many standardized color matching systems.
15.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Editing Colors
• To select a color from a color matching system and add it to your color list, choose one of the standardized color matching systems from the Model drop-down list. Select a color either by entering its number in the Number field, or by scrolling to the color and clicking the color swatch in the color selector window. The color name is entered in the Name field for you automatically.
4 To adjust the brightness (the amount of black) of a color when using the HSB, RGB, LAB, or CMYK color models, use the vertical slider to the right of the color wheel. Dragging the slider up increases brightness; dragging it down decreases brightness.
5 To specify the color you create as a spot color, regardless of the model you use to create it, check the Spot Color check box. Uncheck this box to specify it as a process color.
6 To specify the halftoning that will be used when you print a separation plate that contains a screen for a spot color, choose an option from the Halftone drop-down list. Choose Process Black to specify a screen angle of 45°. Choose Process Yellow to specify a screen angle of 90°. Choose Process Magenta to specify a screen angle of 75°.
Choose Process Cyan to specify a screen angle of 105°. By specifying one of the halftone options, all of the halftoning components for each plate (frequency, angle, and function) are adopted.
R The halftone values you specify in the Halftone drop-down list may be overridden by values built into an imagesetter or PostScript printer description file. You can also override them manually in the
Output tab of the Print dialog box (Edit
& Print) by choosing Cus-
tom from the Halftone drop-down list then using the Frequency,
Angle, and Function drop-down lists to specify custom halftoning.
7 For color comparisons, view the New/Original area. The New/Origi-
nal area displays colors as you create and edit them. The New field displays a new color or an edited version of the chosen color. The
S Tips
The New/Original area
The New/Original area displays colors picked from the color wheel, colors specified by the numeric fields and scroll bars, and colors chosen from a standardized color matching system color selector. The upper half of this field displays a new color or, when you are editing, the edited versions of an existing color. The lower half is for comparison; it displays the original color when you are editing an existing color. For example, when you are trying to match an HSB or RGB color to swatches from a standardized color matching system, compare the existing color in the lower half of the New/Original area to the new selection in the upper half to get the closest match possible.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.15
Color
S Tips
Global color changes
When you are globally changing all items and text from one color to another, remember to save your work before you do so. That way, if you accidentally change everything to the wrong color, you can simply choose
File
&
Revert to Saved to undo the error without losing any of your other work.
Original field is used for comparison; it displays the original color when you are editing an existing color.
8 To add the color you create to the colors list, click OK in the Edit
Color dialog box; the Colors dialog box is again displayed. Click
Save in the Colors dialog box to add the color to the list.
Editing, duplicating, and deleting colors
Colors you have created can be edited easily in QuarkXPress. You can use the Edit Color dialog box to edit, duplicate, or delete a color, or to globally change all items of one color to another color. To edit, duplicate, or delete a color from an active document, or to append colors from another QuarkXPress document:
1 Choose Edit
& Colors; the Colors dialog box is displayed. You can edit the program’s default colors by choosing Colors when no document is open.
2 To edit a color contained in a color list, highlight the color you want to edit from the Colors list, then click Edit; the Edit Color dialog box is displayed.
The Original area displays the chosen color. Refer to the New area for comparison as you make modifications to the chosen color using the color wheel, the numeric color definition fields, or a color matching system selector.
• To change the color model, choose another color model from the
Model drop-down list. For example, highlight a
PANTONE color and click Edit; then, change the model to
TOYO
. Scroll through the
TOYO colors to find one that most closely resembles the
PANTONE color. Compare the colors as they display in the Original and New areas of the dialog box. Select the closest match; then click OK.
• To print process separation plates for a color, regardless of the color model upon which it is based, uncheck Spot Color.
15.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Editing Colors
3 To duplicate a color, highlight the color you want to copy from the
Colors list, then click Duplicate; the Edit Color dialog box is displayed and a copy of the original color is shown in both the New and
Original areas. QuarkXPress automatically enters “Copy of (name of the duplicated color)” in the Name field.
4 To delete a color from a color list, highlight the color you want to remove, then click Delete. When you delete a color, its name is removed from the list. If you delete a color that is applied to characters, pictures, or items, you will be prompted to replace the color (see next page).
5 To append the colors contained in another QuarkXPress document, click Append; the Append Colors dialog box is displayed. Use the controls in the dialog box to locate and select the document whose colors you want to append and click Open.
When you click Append in the Colors dialog box, a warning is displayed if both the source document and the target document have a color with the same name but different specifications.
If you want to leave the existing color in the target document unchanged, click Use Existing Color. QuarkXPress ignores the color in the source document and does not append it to the target document.
If you want to append the color with the same name, click Rename
New Color. QuarkXPress appends the color and places an asterisk after it. You can then edit the name of the appended color in the Edit Col-
ors dialog box. The color in the target document remains unchanged.
6 To save the changes you make to a color list, click Save.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.17
Color
To globally change all items of one color to another color, either edit the color you want to change to the desired color, replace the color, or:
1 Choose Edit
& Colors to display the Colors dialog box.
2 Click New to display the Edit Color dialog box; then, create the color you want to use and click OK.
3 Highlight the name of a color that you want to delete; then click
Delete. A warning displays asking if you want to delete the color and replace it with another color wherever it was used in the document.
This warning lets you globally change all items and text of one color to another color.
4 Choose the new color for the items and text from the Replace with drop-down list.
5 Click OK to apply the new color to the items and text and close the warning. When you return to the document, all of the items and text to which the deleted color was applied will display in the color you chose in the Replace with drop-down list.
15.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Color, Shade, and Blends
Applying Color, Shade, and Blends
You can apply color and shade to boxes, frames, pictures, text, and lines in a variety of ways to suit your working style in QuarkXPress. To apply colors and shades to boxes, frames, and pictures, you can use the Box and
Frame tabs of the Modify dialog box (Item
& Modify) or the Colors palette (View
& Show Colors). If you want to create many boxes with the same color and shade, you can set Tool Preferences so the color and shade are added automatically to every box you draw with the tool (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document & Tools tab).
S Tips
General tips
You can apply color to the dark areas of black-and-white bitmap and grayscale pictures by choosing Color
(Style
&
Colors) when a picture box containing a picture in one of these formats is active.
Using the Modify dialog box to apply colors
To apply colors using the Modify dialog box:
1 Select a box; then choose the Box tab (Item
& Modify).
2 Choose a color from the Color drop-down list in the Box area.
3 To specify a shade for the chosen color, choose a value from the
Shade drop-down list or enter a value from 0 to 100% in .1% increments in the Shade field.
4 To specify a frame and frame color for an active box, choose the
Frame tab (Item
& Modify).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.19
Color
S Tips
Choosing None
You can make a box transparent by choosing a background color of
None from the Color drop-down list in the Box tab (Item
&
Modify), or by selecting None in the Colors palette. When a box is transparent, you can see items beneath it. Applying a color of None to a box background has no effect on the way in which text runs around it.
Choosing White
You should only use None when something behind the box must show through. If nothing behind a box must show through, use a background color of White.
Gap color
Gap color is an additional color you can apply between stripes or dashes when using certain line styles.
The Frame tab (Item
& Modify) lets you specify attributes for box frames.
• To specify a line width for the frame, choose a value from the
Width drop-down list, or enter a value between 0 and 504 points in .001 pt increments in the Width field.
• To specify a frame style, choose a style from the Style drop-down list. If you chose a style that allows a Gap color (as shown above), additional fields will become available in the Gap area.
• To specify a frame color, choose a color from the Color drop-down list in the Frame area.
• To specify a shade for the frame color, choose a value from the
Shade drop-down list or enter a value from 0 to 100% in .1% increments in the Shade field.
• To specify a gap color, choose a color from the Color drop-down list in the Gap area.
• To specify a shade for the gap color, choose a value from the
Shade drop-down list or enter a value from 0 to 100% in .1% increments in the Shade field.
15.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Color, Shade, and Blends
5 To specify a second color for an active box and a blend of the two colors, choose the Box tab (Item
& Modify) then:
The fields in the Box and Blend areas of the Box tab let you specify background colors, shades, and blends.
• To specify a blend style, choose a style from the Style drop-down list in the Blend area. When you do so, additional fields for specifying a blend become available.
• To specify an angle for the blend, select a value from the Angle drop-down list, or enter a custom value from 0° to 360° in the
Angle field.
• To specify a second color for the blend, choose a color from the
Color drop-down list.
• To specify a shade for the second color, choose a value from the
Shade drop-down list or enter a value from 0 to 100% in .1% increments in the Shade field.
6 Click OK to view the frame and blend for the active box.
S Tips
Blends and background fills
You can also specify blends and background screen tints using the
Colors palette (View
&
Show
Colors). Click the box icon; then, choose a solid fill or blend from the drop-down list. Add colors by clicking a color name, or by dragging and dropping a color swatch on a selected item.
You can use whichever method for specifying background colors and blends you find most convenient.
The Apply button
Click the Apply button in the Mod-
ify dialog box to apply attributes to a selected item and to preview them without closing the Modify dialog box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.21
Color
S Tips
Accurate blends
The Accurate Blends check box in the General tab (Edit
&
Preferences
&
Document) lets you control the display of two-color blends.
To display blends with minimal banding and with the most accurate colors possible, but somewhat slowly, check Accurate Blends. For faster display of blends, uncheck Accurate
Blends. The preset default is checked.
Applying blends to groups of boxes
You can apply background blends to groups that consist of boxes only.
Trapping multiple items and blends
Items, text, and pictures placed in front of a blend will trap to the
Indeterminate color if their relationship happens to cause conflicting trap values. See Chapter 16, “Trapping.”
Using the Colors palette to apply colors
The Colors palette lets you specify a background color, frame color, and a blend of two colors as the background for a box. To use the Colors palette to add color, shade, and blends to boxes:
1 Select a box; then choose View
& Show Colors (F12) to display the
Colors palette if the palette is not already displayed.
The Colors palette lets you add background and frame colors, and blends to boxes.
2 Click the background icon Y at the top of the palette; then click the color you want to apply.
You can specify a shade for the highlighted color either by choosing a value from the Shade drop-down list at the top right corner of the palette, or by entering a value from 0 to 100% in .1% increments in the Shade field of the Colors palette.
To apply a color to box frames using the Colors palette:
1 Activate a box with a frame; then choose View
& Show Colors (F12) to display the Colors palette if the palette is not already displayed.
2 Click the frame icon J at the top of the palette; then click the color you want to apply.
You can specify a shade for the selected color either by choosing a value from the Shade drop-down list at the top right corner of the
15.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Color, Shade, and Blends palette, or by entering a value from 0 to 100% in .1% increments in the Shade field of the Colors palette.
Using the Colors palette to create blends
A blend in QuarkXPress is a transition from one color to another, and the Linear blend is the default pattern. The Cool Blends XTensions software provides many more blend patterns and lets you specify the two blend colors, their shades, the pattern in which they blend, and the angle at which they blend relative to the box. A blend can contain any two colors available in a document. To create a blend of two colors in an active box using the Colors palette:
1 Activate a box; then choose View
& Show Colors (F12) to display the Colors palette if the palette is not already displayed.
2 To apply color to the background of the active box, click the background icon Y in the Colors palette. When this icon is highlighted, the fill-type drop-down list is displayed in the palette. This menu lets you specify whether you want to apply a Solid color, or a Linear
Blend of two colors to the background of the active box.
3 To create a blend, choose a blend option from the fill-type dropdown list. Choosing these options activates the controls that let you specify the two colors for the blend and the angle at which they blend relative to the box.
4 To specify the first color in the blend, click the #1 button, choose a color from the list, specify the shade you want in the field in the upper right of the palette (by choosing a value from the drop-down list or entering a value from 0 to 100% in increments as fine as .1%).
5 To specify the second color in the blend, click the #2 button, choose a color from the list, and specify a shade if you wish.
S Tips
Working with colors and blends
Any background color and shade specified for a box in the Box tab
(Item
&
Modify) will be reported as the #1 color in a blend in the Colors palette. Similarly, the #1 color specified for a box background using the
Colors palette will be reported as the background color in the box specifications dialog boxes.
You can create a gradation of a single color by using white as one of the two colors or by specifying a 0 shade of any color as the second color.
Shortcut to the Colors dialog box
To open the Colors dialog box
(Edit
&
Colors) from the Colors palette, press the
CTRL key while you click a color name.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.23
Color
6 To specify the angle at which the two colors blend, enter a value in the angle field from –360° to 360° in increments as fine as .001°.
Specifying color in Tool Preferences
QuarkXPress lets you apply color and shade to picture and text boxes automatically as you draw them. To automatically add color and shade as you draw a box:
1 Double-click any of the box tools in the Tools palette to display the
Tool tab in the Preferences dialog box. The Tool tab, and the box tool you double-clicked will be selected for you automatically in the
Tools list. You can also edit the tool preferences by choosing Edit
&
Preferences
& Document & Tool tab.
The Tool tab lets you specify default preferences for any tool.
2 Click Modify to display the Box tab.
3 Choose a box color from the Color drop-down list.
4 Choose a shade percentage from the drop-down list, or enter a custom shade percentage in the Shade field.
5 Click OK to close the Box tab and return to the Tool tab.
15.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Color, Shade, and Blends
6 Click OK to close the Tool Preferences dialog box and return to the document. Every box you draw with the modified tool will automatically apply your Color and Shade specifications to the box.
Applying color and shade to text
You can apply color and shade to text four ways: (1) you can apply color and shade using the Style
& Color and Style & Shade commands; (2) you can use the Colors palette (View
& Show Colors); (3) you can use the Character Styles Sheet command (Style
& Character
Style Sheet) to apply color and shade to highlighted text using character style sheets you have created; or (4) you can use the Character
Attributes dialog box (Style
& Character). To use menu commands to add color and shade to text:
1 Highlight some text in an active document; then choose Style
& Color and choose the color you want to apply from the Color submenu.
2 Choose Style
& Shade and choose the shade percentage you want to apply to the colored text from the Shade submenu; or select Other to display the Character Attributes dialog box, and enter a custom shade percentage in the Shade field.
To use the Colors palette to add color and shade to text:
1 Highlight some text in an active document; then choose View
&
Show Colors (F12) to display the Colors palette.
2 Click
T at the top of the palette; then click the color you want to apply. You can specify a shade for the selected color either by choosing a value from the Shade drop-down list or by entering a value from
0 to 100% in .1% increments in the Shade field of the Colors palette.
S Tips
Applying color to groups
You can apply a color and shade to grouped or multiple-selected text boxes, picture boxes, and lines in one step: activate the items then double-click them to open the Box tab (Item
&
Modify).
Creating reverse type
You can create reverse type by applying a light color or shade value to characters and specifying a relatively dark background color and shade for the text box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.25
Color
To use character style sheets to add color and shade to text:
1 To create a character style sheet, choose Edit
& Style Sheets to display the Style Sheets dialog box.
The New button drop-down list lets you create new Character style sheets.
2 Click New and choose Character from the New button drop-down list to display the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box.
3 Enter a name for the new style sheet in the Name field.
4 Choose a text color from the Color drop-down list.
5 Choose a shade percentage from the Shade drop-down list, or enter a custom shade percentage from 0 to 100% in the Shade field.
15.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Color, Shades, and Blends
The Shade drop-down list lets you specify shades you can apply to text using character style sheets.
6 Click OK to return to the Style Sheets dialog box.
7 Click Save to save your style sheet and return to the document.
8 Highlight some text in an active document; then apply the style sheet by choosing it from the Character Style Sheet submenu
(Style
& Character Style Sheet & <Style Sheet Name>).
To use the Character Attributes dialog box to add color and shade:
1 Select some text in an active document; then choose Style
& Shade &
Other to display the Character Attributes dialog box.
The Character Attributes (Style
& Shade & Other) dialog box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.27
Color
2 Choose a color from the Color drop-down list.
3 Choose a shade percentage from the Shade drop-down list, or enter a custom screen tint percentage, from 0 to 100% in the Shade field; then click OK.
Applying color and shade to lines
Three methods are available to apply color and shade to lines: (1) you can use the Line tab (Item
& Modify); (2) you can use the Colors palette (View
& Show Colors); or (3) you can apply color and shade using the Style
& Color and Style & Shade commands. To use the Line tab to add color and shade to a line:
1 Select a line; then click the Line tab (Item
& Modify).
The Line tab (Item
& Modify) lets you specify attributes for a line.
• To specify a line style, choose a style from the Style drop-down list. If you chose a style that allows a Gap color (as shown above), additional fields will become available in the Gap area.
• To specify a line width, choose a value from the Line Width drop-down list, or enter a value between 0 and 504 points in
.001 pt increments in the Line Width field.
15.28
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Applying Color, Shades, and Blends
• To specify a line color, choose a color from the Color drop-down list in the Line area.
• To specify a shade for the line color, choose a value from the
Shade drop-down list or enter a value from 0 to 100% in .1% increments in the Shade field.
• To specify a gap color, choose a color from the Color drop-down list in the Gap area. A Gap color is an additional color you can apply to certain line or frame styles.
• To specify a shade for the gap color, choose a value from the
Shade drop-down list in the Gap area or enter a value from 0 to
100% in .1% increments in the Shade field.
To use the Colors palette to add color and shade to a line:
1 Select a line, click
L at the top of the palette, and then click the color you want to apply.
2 You can specify a shade for the selected color either by choosing a value from the Shade drop-down list or by entering a value from 0 to
100% in .1% increments in the Shade field of the Colors palette.
To use menu bar commands to add color and shade to a line:
1 Select a line; then choose Style
& Color and choose the color you want to apply from the Color submenu.
2 Choose Style
& Shade and choose the shade percentage you want to apply from the Shade submenu. You can choose Other to display the
Shade dialog box; then enter a custom shade percentage in the
Shade field.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 15.29
Trapping
16
Understanding Trapping 16.3
Trapping Guidelines 16.5
Specifying Default Trapping 16.6
Specifying Color-Specific Trapping 16.12
Specifying Item-Specific Trapping 16.17
Trapping EPS Pictures to Background Colors 16.22
Creating and Using a Rich Black 16.24
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Trapping
16
When a multicolored job is printed, it is not uncommon for inks to print out of register causing small color shifts or gaps to appear between adjacent areas of color. When spot colors print out of register, small gaps appear allowing paper to show through in areas where adjacent colors should fit together. On a process color job, you will see a color shift (an area of discoloration), or a visible gap.
These color shifts or gaps, commonly referred to as
“leaks” or “peeks,” are caused by misregistration
(either on press or in stripping), a lack of proper trapping, or the movement of paper on press.
Trapping compensates for the misregistration of color by expanding lighter areas of color to slightly overlap darker ones. QuarkXPress lets you create traps automatically by specifying default program and document-specific trapping preferences. You can further customize your traps by specifying trapping values for individual colors and items.
Understanding Trapping
Understanding Trapping
The trapping values you specify should be determined by the press, paper, sheet size, and line screen (lpi) that will be used to produce your job. Each of these variables can affect how well colors “fit” together on a printed piece. For example, some presses require smaller traps with very small color overlap to achieve an acceptable color fit, while others require larger traps with larger color overlaps. Before you output your final layout to film, you should consult with your service bureau and printer to determine proper trapping values. For best results, use the trapping method and values your service bureau and printer recommend.
Specifying trapping in QuarkXPress
Trapping is specified in QuarkXPress in terms of the way an object color traps against a background color. Object color is the color applied to any item (like text or a box) that is in front of another color. Background color is the color applied to any item (like text or a box) that is behind an object color. When an object color and a background color meet on a printed page, the direction of the trap is determined by the relative
luminance (lightness or brightness) of the colors.
An object color can be trapped to a background color in four ways:
• Spread. When a lighter object color is spread, items to which the color is applied are slightly enlarged so that they trap (overlap) a darker background color.
• Choke. When a darker object color is choked, the erase (knockout) area on a lighter background color is slightly reduced (choked).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 16.3
Trapping
• Overprint. An object color can be specified to print over a background color. The overlapping area of the object and background colors is not erased.
• Knockout. An object color can be specified to print and knockout any background color, so it (the background color) will not print. The overlapping area is erased by the size of the item the object color has been applied to.
Determining trapping values in QuarkXPress
There are three stages at which trapping values can be determined in
QuarkXPress: default, color-specific, and item-specific.
• Default trapping. The default method QuarkXPress uses to automatically trap colors of varying hues and shades, based on the relative luminance of object and background colors. Use the Trapping tab (Edit
& Prefer- ences
& Document & Trapping tab) to enter default trapping preferences for QuarkXPress and for individual QuarkXPress documents
(document-specific trapping).
• Color-specific trapping. Trapping specified for any object color relative to any background color. By specifying Overprint, Knockout, Auto
Amount (+) for spreads, Auto Amount (–) for chokes, or Custom trap values in the the Trap Specifications dialog box (Edit
& Colors & Edit
Trap), you can control the trapping relationships for every color in your
Colors palette (F12). Color-specific trapping is used to override the default algorithm value on a color-by-color basis.
• Item-specific trapping. Trapping specified for any item using the Trap
Information palette (View
& Show Trap Information) (
CTRL
+F12).
R Document-specific preferences override default preferences, colorspecific preferences override all default preferences, and item-specific preferences override all trapping preferences.
16.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Trapping Guidelines
Trapping Guidelines
The principles of trapping are simple: You want lighter colors to slightly overlap adjacent darker colors to prevent gaps where they should fit together smoothly. An object color should spread into a darker background color, and be choked by a lighter background color. When specifying traps in QuarkXPress, consult your service bureau and printer to ensure that your trapping specifications are appropriate for your print job.
Suggestions for predictable trapping
Here are a few suggestions to help you obtain predictable results before your job goes to press:
• Use black or other dark colors for very small or very narrow items like small font sizes and narrow rules, and specify them to overprint anything behind them. By overprinting, you avoid situations where small, light colored items create knockout areas in dark backgrounds. These small knockouts are difficult to trap and fill with color. By overprinting you can eliminate difficult traps and simplify your print job.
• If you are unsure about trapping specifications, arrange with your service bureau to specify or perform trapping for you.
• Carefully review all prepress proofs supplied by your printer that are made from your separation film.
• Consult with your service bureau and printer to determine if there are any potential trapping problems.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 16.5
Trapping
S Tips
Specifying default trapping preferences
Choose Edit
& Preferences &
Document
& Trapping tab without a document open to specify default trapping preferences. These preferences will apply to every document you create.
Choose Edit
& Preferences &
Document
& Trapping tab with a document open (or after creating a new one) to specify document-specific trapping preferences. These preferences will override all default trapping preferences, and will apply to the current document only.
Specifying Default Trapping
QuarkXPress lets you specify the default trapping method, as well as the specific default trapping values.
Default trapping methods
You can choose from three default trapping methods: Absolute, Propor-
tional, and Knockout All.
• Absolute trapping uses the values in the Auto Amount and Indetermi-
nate fields in the Trapping tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document) to make traps.
• Proportional trapping compares the luminance of the object color and background color to determine how different they are, and applies trapping accordingly. Proportional trapping uses the value in the Auto
Amount field of the Trapping tab multiplied by the difference between the luminance of the object color and background color to calculate a trapping value.
• Knockout All turns trapping off, printing objects with a 0 trap amount.
Knockout All is particularly useful when printing your layout as a color composite or when printing proofs of your layout to a laser printer.
You can enter default trapping preferences for QuarkXPress and for individual QuarkXPress documents (document-specific trapping). To specify default trapping preferences (preferences that will apply to every document you create) make sure that no documents are open and:
16.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Default Trapping
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Document; then click the Trapping tab.
Specify preferences in the Trapping tab (Edit
& Preferences & Document), to assign default or document-specific trapping settings.
2 Choose Absolute, Proportional, or Knockout All from the Trapping
Method drop-down list.
• Choose Absolute to trap using the values in the Auto Amount and
Indeterminate fields according to the object and background colors involved.
If the object color is darker, the object is choked by the background by the Auto Amount value.
If the object color is lighter, the object is spread into the background by the Auto Amount value.
• Choose Proportional to trap using the value in the Auto Amount field multiplied by the difference between the luminance (lightness or brightness) of the object color and background color.
Proportional trapping compares the luminance of the object
S Tips
Specifying default trapping preferences
Notice that the title bar on the
Default Document Preferences dialog box differs from the example on this page when you specify trapping preferences with a document open.
Trapping to an indeterminate background
If a background color is indeterminate (that is, if it contains multiple colors with conflicting trapping relationships or is an imported picture), QuarkXPress traps the object color according to the value in the
Indeterminate field of the Trap-
ping tab (Edit
& Preferences &
Document).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 16.7
Trapping
S Tips
Proportional trapping
The formula used for Proportional trapping is: Auto Amount ´ (object luminance – background luminance).
If the object color is darker, the object color is choked by the resulting amount of the formula. If the object color is lighter, the object color is spread by the resulting amount of the formula.
Choosing Knockout All
Choose Knockout All in the Trap-
ping Method drop-down list when you do not want QuarkXPress to perform trapping on your layout.
color and background color to determine how different they are, and applies trapping accordingly.
• Choose Knockout All to turn trapping off, printing objects with a
0 trap amount.
3 Choose On or Off from the Process Trapping drop-down list.
• When Process Trapping is On, QuarkXPress traps each process separation plate individually when a page contains overlapping process colors. When you print color separations, QuarkXPress compares the darkness of each process component of an object color to the darkness of the corresponding process component of the background color, then traps accordingly. For example, the shade of cyan in an object color is compared to the shade of cyan in the background color; similar comparisons are made for the other plates that will be output.
• When abutting process colors have an Absolute trapping relationship, and Process Trapping is On, QuarkXPress divides the calculated trapping value in half, and applies the resulting value to the darker component of the color on each plate. Dividing the value among plates creates a smoother trap while providing the same area of overlap.
• When abutting process colors have a Proportional trapping relationship, and Process Trapping is On, QuarkXPress multiplies half of the Auto Amount value specified in the Trapping tab by the difference in darkness between the component of the color on each plate.
16.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Default Trapping
4 Enter a trapping value in the Auto Amount field or select Overprint from the drop-down list.
• Enter a value in the Auto Amount field to control the amount of trapping that QuarkXPress applies to object and background colors that have an Auto Amount specified in the Trap Specifications dialog box (Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap), and items with an Auto
Amount (+) or (–) specified in the Trap Information palette
(View
& Show Trap Information) (
CTRL
+F12).
S Tips
Process trapping
For more precise color separations and trapping, make sure Process
Trapping is On in the Trapping tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document).
Specifying an Auto Amount in the Trapping tab (Edit
& Preferences & Document).
• Choose Overprint to cause object and background colors with an
Auto Amount specified in the Trap Specifications dialog box
(Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap), and items with an Auto Amount (+) or (–) specified in the Trap Information palette (View
& Show
Trap Information) to overprint.
5 Enter a trapping value in the Indeterminate field or select Overprint from the drop-down list.
• Enter a value in the Indeterminate field to control the amount of trapping that QuarkXPress applies to object colors that are in front
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.9
Trapping
S Tips
The hierarchy of trapping preferences
Document-specific trapping preferences override QuarkXPress default trapping preferences.
Color-specific trapping preferences
(Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap) override all document-specific and default trapping preferences.
Item-specific trapping preferences
(View
& Show Trap Information) override all trapping preferences.
of indeterminate backgrounds (multiple colors with conflicting trapping relationships).
• Choose Overprint to cause an object color to overprint an indeterminate background.
See “Item-specific Trapping” in this chapter.
6 Enter a value in the Knockout Limit field.
• This value (expressed as a percentage of darkness of the object color) lets you control the point at which an object color will knock out a background color.
7 Enter a value in the Overprint Limit field.
Enter a value in the Overprint Limit field (Edit
& Preferences & Document & Trapping tab) to specify the shade percentage limit below which a color specified to overprint will start using the default algorithm.
• The value you enter here affects a black object color that is set to
Default, and any object color set to Overprint in the Trap Specifi-
cations dialog box (Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap). For example, if you enter 95% in this field, a 90% shaded object color set to Over-
16.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Default Trapping
print a background color will not overprint but will instead trap according to the Auto Amount value specified.
8 Check Ignore White to specify that an object color in front of multiple background colors (including white) does not take white into account when trapping.
• When Ignore White is unchecked, all items overprint a white background. If an object color is in front of both a white background and a background color against which the object color is specified to spread, the object color will trap using the Indetermi-
nate trap value.
• If an object color is in front of both a white background and two or more background colors to which the object color is specified to choke, the object color will choke (trap) using the the smallest choke value.
9 Click OK to save your default trapping preferences.
R To specify document-specific trapping preferences, make sure that a document is open (or create a new one) and choose Edit
&
Preferences
& Document; then click the Trapping tab. The preferences you specify will apply to the current document only.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.11
Trapping
S Tips
Specifying color-specific trapping
Choose Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap without a document open to specify color-specific trapping for colors in the program’s Default Colors list. These preferences will override all default trapping preferences and will apply to every document you create.
Choose Edit
& Colors & Edit
Trap with a document open (or after creating a new one) to specify color-specific trapping for colors in a document’s Colors list. These preferences will override all default trapping preferences, and will apply to the current document only.
Specifying Color-Specific Trapping
By using the Trap Specifications dialog box (Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap) you can specify trapping values for any object color relative to any background color. By specifying Overprint, Knockout, Auto Amount (+) for spreads, Auto Amount (–) for chokes, or Custom trap values you can control the trapping relationships for every color in your Colors palette.
Color-specific trapping values you specify will directly affect color relationships and will override all default trapping preferences.
Entering color-specific trapping values
You can enter color-specific trapping values for QuarkXPress and for individual documents. To specify color-specific trapping for colors in the program’s Default Colors list, make sure no documents are open and:
1 Choose Edit
& Colors (
SHIFT +F12).
Use the Default Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors) to choose an object color.
16.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Color-Specific Trapping
2 Choose the object color in the Default Colors list that you want to specify color-specific trapping for; then click Edit Trap.
Use the Trap Specifications dialog box (Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap) to specify how a selected object color traps against any background color.
3 Choose a color from the Background Color list in the Trap Specifi-
cations dialog box. The Background Color column displays all available background colors. These are all of the colors in your Default
Colors list (including Indeterminate) except for the object color you selected (excluding “white” and “registration”).
4 Choose a trapping type from the Trap drop-down list.
S Tips
Default trapping values in the trap specifications dialog box
The values displayed in the various columns of the Trap Specifications dialog box reflect the default relationship between the selected object color and all background colors.
These default values are determined by the preferences specified in the
Trapping tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.13
Trapping
S Tips
Process trapping information
For text up to 24 points and small items (dimensions up to 10 points),
QuarkXPress attempts to preserve the items’ shape during process trapping by not performing automatic spreads or chokes when the items’ shape would be compromised.
Choose a trapping type from the Trap drop-down list (Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap) to change the trapping preferences for any background color relative to the selected object color.
The Trap column displays the current default trapping values for the object color named in the dialog box title relative to every background color.
• The Default option works much like the Auto Amount (+/–) settings, but when Default is chosen, a QuarkXPress algorithm determines which colors choke, which colors spread, and which colors overprint or knock out. The amount of a choke or spread is based on the Auto Amount value in the Trapping tab of the Document Pref-
erences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document & Trapping tab). However, when Default is chosen, black always overprints.
• Choose Overprint if you want the named object color to overprint the background color in all instances where the shade of the object color is above the percentage entered in the Overprint Limit field of the Trapping tab.
• Choose Knockout if you want the named object color to knockout the background color.
• Choose Auto Amount (+) to assign the default spread value (the value specified in the Auto Amount field of the Trapping tab) to the named object color.
16.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Color-Specific Trapping
• Choose Auto Amount (–) to assign the default choke value (the negative of the value specified in the Auto Amount field of the
Trapping tab) to the named object color.
• Choose Custom to specify a custom choke or spread value for the named object color. When you choose Custom, enter a value in the displayed dialog box.
5 Select a trap relationship from the Dependent/Independent Traps drop-down list.
The Dependent/Independent column displays the current trapping relationship between the named object color and the background colors and their reverse relationship. The standard setting is Depen-
dent Traps which applies a symmetrical setting.
• Choose Dependent Traps if you want QuarkXPress to calculate a reverse trap value automatically based on current column changes.
• Choose Independent Traps to specify a custom reverse trap value.
6 Select a trapping type from the Reverse drop-down list.
The Reverse column displays the reverse of the current trapping values for every background color relative to the named object color.
The value displayed for a given background color is the trap that will be applied when that color is an object color and the named object color is a background color. These values are determined by the reverse algorithm applied to the trap values under the Trap column, if dependent is selected.
The Reverse value is calculated automatically when you choose
Dependent Traps. If you change the Reverse value when Dependent
Traps is chosen, the corresponding opposite trap is calculated automatically. Choose trapping types and enter values as necessary to customize reverse trapping relationships.
S Tips
Specifying color-specific trapping to create custom traps
In general, it is not necessary to specify color-specific trapping.
QuarkXPress produces precise, highquality trapping in most cases. When you create custom traps by specifying color-specific trapping you should always be aware of how your changes will affect the program and your layout as it moves through the print production process.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.15
Trapping
S Tips
Item-specific trapping
QuarkXPress will apply the trapping values you specify to QuarkXPress items only, not to imported pictures.
You must specify trapping for imported pictures in the application you used to create them.
The Trap Information palette
Use the Trap Information palette
(View
& Show Trap Information) to specify trapping for text, pictures, frames, lines, and box backgrounds.
You can also use the palette to apply default and color-specific trapping values or to enter custom values from –36 points to +36 points.
7 Click OK, then click Save in the Default Colors dialog box to save your color-specific trapping preferences.
R To specify color-specific trapping for colors in a document’s Colors list, make sure that a document is open (or create a new one) and choose Edit
& Colors. The values you specify will apply to the current document only.
16.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Item-Specific Trapping
Specifying Item-Specific Trapping
Generally, QuarkXPress correctly traps items automatically, but there may be situations where an item in your layout requires a trap different from that produced by values specified in either the Trapping tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document) or the Trap
Specifications dialog box (Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap). In these situations, use the Trap Information palette (View
& Show Trap Information) to specify trapping values to control how QuarkXPress traps a selected item.
Values you specify in the Trap Information palette override all other trapping preferences, except Knockout All.
S Tips
Trapping text
Text is always trapped to the background color of the text box that contains it. If text contained in a box with a background color of None is positioned over another box containing one background color, the text will trap to that background color.
Trapping boxes
You can specify trapping for any QuarkXPress box, its contents, its frames, and its background. The fields that are available in the Trap
Information palette will differ depending on the type of box you are trapping and its contents. The following example features a text box containing text and a background color with no frame:
1 Select a text box containing text and a background color, then choose View
& Show Trap Information (
CTRL +F12).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.17
Trapping
S Tips
Trapping QuarkXPress items to a multicolored background
If an item, or text in a text box, with a background color of None, is positioned over a multicolored background, one of the following conditions can occur: (1) if all the background colors have positive trapping values, the item or text will spread by the lowest of the values;
(2) if all the background colors have negative trapping values, the item or text will choke by the value closest to 0 (the lowest of all possible negative values); (3) if the background colors have conflicting positive and negative trapping values, the item will trap according to the value in the Indeterminate field of the Trap-
ping tab (Edit
& Preferences &
Document).
Specify values in the Trap Information palette (View
& Show Trap Information) to control how QuarkXPress traps an active item. Notice the drop-down lists are the same as those in the
Trap Specifications dialog box (Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap).
2 Choose a trapping type from the drop-down list for each field displayed.
• Choose Default for the Background and Text fields to use the trapping values specified in the Trap Specifications dialog box
(Edit
& Colors & Edit Trap) for the item’s current object color against the item’s current background color. If you select either of the Auto Amount trapping types, the resulting trapping value is determined by the values specified in the Trapping tab (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document).
• Choose Overprint to overprint an active item. Choosing Overprint overrides the Overprint Limit value entered in the Trapping tab, enabling you to overprint regardless of the shade of the object and background colors involved.
• Choose Knockout if you want an active item to knockout its background.
• Choose either Auto Amount (+) or Auto Amount (–) to apply the value entered in the Auto Amount field of the Trapping tab.
If you choose Auto Amount (+), the value displayed to the right of the drop-down list is positive (a spread). If you choose Auto
Amount (–), the value displayed to the right of the drop-down list is negative (a choke).
16.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Item-Specific Trapping
Choosing Auto Amount (+) from the Text field drop-down list in the Trap Information palette (View
& Show Trap Information).
• Choose Custom to specify a custom choke or spread value for the active item. You can enter a value in the field to the right of the drop-down list.
R Choosing Overprint in the Trap Information dialog box causes an item to overprint regardless of the object and background colors involved. This functionality differs from Overprint in the Trap
Specifications dialog box where the shade of the object color and the value entered in the Overprint Limit field of the Trapping tab combine to determine whether or not an item overprints.
Trapping frames and lines
The Frame tab and the Line tab of the Modify dialog box (Item
&
Modify) enable you to create custom frames and lines using a wide range of styles, patterns, and colors. A frame that you create for a box always traps to the background color specified for the box, to the color used to color the frame, and to any background color behind the box. A line that you create always traps to the color used to color it, and to any background colors underneath the line. Quark XPress even allows knockout and overprint to be used on imported pictures, helping you to create the trapping effect you need.
S Tips
Trapping QuarkXPress items to background pictures
Lines, boxes, and text can be set to knock out, overprint, or trap to background pictures using the Trap Infor-
mation palette (View
& Show
Trap Information).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 6.19
Trapping
To specify trapping for a frame:
1 Select or create a box. Apply a frame with a multiline, dashed, or bitmap style that contains Frame and Gap colors. Apply a background color to the box and then choose View
& Show Trap Information
(
CTRL
+F12). Only the fields and drop-down lists applicable to the selected frame style are accessible in the Trap Information palette.
Use the Trap Information palette (View
& Show Trap Information) to specify trapping for the Frame Inside, Frame Middle, Frame Outside, Gap Inside, and Gap Outside.
2 Choose a trapping type from the drop-down list to specify trapping values for the Frame Inside, Frame Middle, Frame Outside, Gap
Inside, and Gap Outside fields.
• Frame Inside: Trapping applied between the innermost color of a frame and any color from the box content, the background color, or the items beneath the box if the background color is set to None.
Accessible for multiline, dashed, and bitmap frame styles.
• Frame Middle: Trapping applied to colors within a frame. Accessible for only multiline and dashed frame styles.
• Frame Outside: Trapping applied between the outermost color of a frame and colors underneath it. Accessible for multiline, dashed, and bitmap frame styles.
• Gap Inside: Trapping applied between the gap color of a frame and any color from the box content, the background color, or the items beneath the box if the background color is set to None. Accessible for only dashed frame styles with a gap color other than None.
16.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Trapping EPS Pictures to Background Colors
• Gap Outside — Trapping applied between the gap color of a frame and the colors underneath it. Accessible for only dashed frame styles with a gap color other than None.
The trapping types contained in the drop-down lists are the same as those described in “Trapping boxes” earlier in this section. Bitmap frames can use knockout or overprint trapping.
To specify trapping for a line:
1 Select or create a line. Apply a multiline or dashed style that contains
Line and Gap colors, and then choose View
& Show Trap Informa-
tion ( CTRL +F12).
Use the Trap Information palette (View
& Show Trap Information) to specify trapping for the Line, Line Middle, and Gap of a line created with a multiline style.
2 Choose a trapping type from the drop-down list to specify trapping values for the Line, Line Middle, and Gap fields.
• The Line field: Trapping applied to the Line color specified for a line in relation to an adjacent background color.
• The Line Middle field: Trapping applied to colors within a line.
• The Gap field: Trapping applied to the Gap color specified for a line in relation to an adjacent background color. The Gap field is available for multiline styles without two arrowheads or tailfeathers, for multiline styles when the line ends on a gap, and for all dashed line styles with a gap color other than None.
The trapping types contained in the drop-down lists are the same as those described in “Trapping boxes” earlier in this section.
S Tips
Stroke traps in EPS pictures
To trap an EPS picture, QuarkXPress uses the overprint settings saved with the picture. When you create a stroke, whether it is to be used for a spread or a choke, set the stroke to overprint. When you create the EPS picture, do not set fills to overprint.
If you set a fill to overprint, the fill element will not knock out the background color.
Scaling imported EPS pictures
When you scale an EPS picture in
QuarkXPress, the stroke is also scaled.
Scaling a picture with a .288 point stroke from 100% to 50%, for example, results in a trap that is 0.144
points wide. Doubling the size of that
EPS picture results in a trap that is
.576 points wide. Either of these amounts is likely to be unacceptable.
Instead of scaling an EPS picture in
QuarkXPress, scale the picture in the application you used to create it.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 16.21
Trapping
Trapping EPS Pictures to Background Colors
You can trap Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) pictures created in other applications to a background color created in QuarkXPress. Elements of EPS pictures can knockout or overprint QuarkXPress background colors, depending on how you specify the elements in your illustration application. Overprinted stroke elements are used to create traps in EPS pictures. The color of the stroke should be the same color as the object being stroked. When a stroke element in an EPS picture is specified to overprint, half the width of the stroke can be used to trap the picture to a QuarkXPress background color.
Trapping EPS pictures with strokes
To trap an EPS picture with strokes to a background color created in
QuarkXPress, first create an EPS picture with strokes around its edges. Set the strokes to overprint. Make sure to create strokes that are twice the width of the trapping value you are using in QuarkXPress. For example, if you are using a .144 point default trap in QuarkXPress, specify strokes that are .288 points wide; then:
1 Create a picture box and fill it with a background color.
2 Import an EPS picture saved with strokes around its edges using the
Get Picture dialog box (File
& Get Picture).
16.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
3 Choose File
& Print (
CTRL
+
P
).
Creating and Using a Rich Black
Use the Print dialog box (File
& Print) to print color separations.
4 Check the Separations box.
5 Click Print to print test separations on your laser printer. Notice that half the width of the strokes you created will overprint the
QuarkXPress background color to create a trap.
6 Choose File
&
Save to save your document.
R The commands you use to create overprinted strokes for traps will vary between illustration applications. See the documentation for the application you use for instructions on how to create strokes and overprints.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 16.23
Trapping
S Tips
Rich black composition
QuarkXPress applies a rich black trap only when the percentage of process black in a rich black is greater than or equal to the percentage entered in the Overprint Limit field of the
Trapping tab (Edit
& Prefer- ences
& Document).
Applying a rich black trap
QuarkXPress applies a rich black trap when a 100% shade is applied to rich black color. You apply shade using the
Shade drop-down list in the Colors palette, the Shade menu (Style
&
Shade), or the Box or Picture tabs of the Modify dialog box (Item
&
Modify). See Chapter 15, “Color.”
Creating and Using a Rich Black
Printers and graphic designers often use rich black to create a deeper, darker black to achieve an even, very dark coloration for large areas of ink coverage. A standard rich black is composed of 100% process black laid over a screened percentage of a process color build. Because it is composed of more than one process ink, misregistration of rich black on press is likely.
Trapping rich blacks in QuarkXPress
For this reason, QuarkXPress handles trapping differently for rich black.
If an object color spreads into a rich black background, all process colors except process black will spread according to the value specified in the
Auto Amount field of the Trapping tab (Edit
& Preferences & Docu-
ment). If the rich black object color is being choked by a background color, then all process colors except for process black will choke. This special trapping process is used to keep the background process colors from showing through in the event of misregistration.
Experimenting with rich blacks
To create a sample rich black:
1 Choose Edit
& Colors (
SHIFT
+F12); then click New.
2 Type Sample Rich Black in the Name field.
3 Choose CMYK from the Model drop-down list.
4 Uncheck the Spot Color check box.
16.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Using a Rich Black
5 Enter 30% in the Cyan (C) field and 100% in the Black (K) field.
Creating a Sample Rich Black in the Edit Color dialog box (Edit
& Colors & New).
Rich Black Tone
Cool
Neutral
Warm
Composition
C: 30%, K: 100%
C: 30%, M: 20%, Y: 20%, K: 100%
M: 30%, K: 100%
6 Click OK; then click Save.
R You can create several types of rich black. Be aware that the more process colors you use to build a rich black, the higher the likelihood of misregistration on press.
S Tips
Changing the Auto Amount value
The brief exercise on this page is designed to let you easily see the results of a rich black trap when printing to a laser printer. After completing this exercise, be sure to reset the value in the Auto Amount field of the Trapping tab (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document) to the default trapping value of .144 point.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 16.25
Trapping
To see an exaggerated demonstration of rich black trapping, and print proof separations on a laser printer:
1 Create a text box and enter some text in 48 point type. Select the text and color it 100% Cyan by choosing Style
& Color & Cyan.
2 Choose Item
& Modify and choose Sample Rich Black from the
Colors drop-down list to fill the box with 100% Sample Rich Black.
3 To easily see the results of a rich black trap when printing to a laser printer, enter 5 pt in the Auto Amount field of the Trapping tab
(Edit
& Preferences & Document).
4 Choose File
& Print (
CTRL
+
P
).
Use the Print dialog box (File
& Print) to print test separations.
5 Check the Separations box.
6 Click Print to print test separations on your laser printer.
R Your result should be a knockout on the rich black plate, plus one cyan plate that clearly shows an exaggerated spread of the cyan text.
16.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Libraries
17
Creating New Libraries 17.3
Opening Libraries 17.4
Working with Libraries 17.5
Working with Labels 17.8
Saving Libraries 17.10
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Libraries
17
Libraries are QuarkXPress files that provide easy access to frequently-used items. You can store any item or group of items in a library, including text boxes, text paths, picture boxes, lines, and groups.
Libraries are displayed as palettes that contain thumbnail displays of items.
You build a library by copying selected items from a document or another library into an open library.
You retrieve library items by dragging them out and placing them on document pages.
Creating New Libraries
Creating New Libraries
You can create a new library any time, as long as you have fewer than 25 files open. To create a new library:
1 Choose File
& New & Library (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
N
).
S Tips
Library palettes remain open
When you create a new library, it stays open until you close it. When you launch QuarkXPress, any library palettes that were previously open are reopened automatically and placed in their previous positions.
Specify a name and location for a new library in the New Library dialog box (File
& New).
2 Use the controls in the New Library dialog box to specify a location for the new library file.
3 Enter a name for the library in the File name field. The Save as
type field will automatically display the appropriate extension
“Libraries (*.qxl).”
4 Click Create. The new l ibrary is displayed as a palette in front of all open documents.
New library palettes are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 17.3
Libraries
S Tips
Libraries are palettes
You manipulate a library palette like all other palettes: Click and drag the title bar to move it and click the close icon to close it.
Library compatibility
QuarkXPress libraries can also be opened by QuarkXPress Passport, but not vice versa.
Opening Libraries
QuarkXPress lets you open any combination of 25 documents, templates, or libraries at one time. Libraries stay open until you close them — they’re even reopened automatically when you quit and relaunch QuarkXPress. To open a library:
1 Choose File
& Open (
CTRL
+
O
).
Use the Open dialog box (File menu) to locate and open QuarkXPress libraries.
2 Use the controls in the Open dialog box to locate the library you want to open. QuarkXPress libraries are automatically saved with the
“*.qxl” extension to distinguish library files from other file types.
3 Select the library from the list.
4 Click Open.
Library palettes remember their position on-screen and open in their previous position. Click and drag the title bar to move the palette.
17.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Libraries
Working with Libraries
Libraries are convenient for storing frequently-used page items such as logos, publication mastheads, legal text, and photographs. You can store up to
2,000 entries in an individual library. A library entry can be a text box, text path, picture box, line, multiple-selected items, or a group. To move entries in and out of libraries, you simply drag them or cut/copy and paste them.
Adding library entries
When you add entries to a library, copies of the items are placed in the library and displayed as thumbnails. The original items are not removed from the document. To add entries to an open library:
1 Select the Item tool e.
2 Select the item(s) or group to place in the library. To select multiple items, press the SHIFT key while clicking them. However, if you select multiple items, they will be saved in the library as one entry and not as individually items.
3 Drag the item(s) or group over the library and release the mouse button when the Library pointer l appears. The library entry is placed between the arrow icons
> J.
S Tips
Placing contents in libraries
To store text or pictures (contents) in a library, drag its bounding box into a library. You cannot drag highlighted text or a selected picture into a library without its box.
Libraries vs. templates
Before you store all your frequently used page elements in a library, consider whether the items would be more useful as part of a template. For example, you may want to store a nameplate for a newsletter in a template rather than dragging it in from a library for each issue. If you feature different columnists in each issue of your newsletter, you may want to store the columnists’ photographs in a library rather than in a template.
Drag selected items from a document into a library; release the mouse button when the Library pointer l appears.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 17.5
Libraries
S Tips
Good candidates for libraries
Libraries are good for storing items that may be needed at any time in a layout. For example, corporate logos, legal information, commonly used pictures and verbiage, chart formats, and clip art are all good candidates for library entries. Items with hardto-remember formatting can also be saved in a library.
Retrieving library entries
To put a library entry into a document, select any tool and click the library entry. Drag the entry into the document. A copy of the library entry is placed in the document.
Drag entries from libraries into documents with any tool selected.
The effect on document defaults and preferences
When you drag a library entry into a document, the following defaults and preferences are affected:
• Any style sheets, colors, dashes & stripes, lists, or H&Js used in the library entry are automatically added to the document.
However, if any of the library entry’s specifications have the same name as a specification in the document, the document specification is used.
(For example, if a color has the same name but is defined differently, the item will change color from the library to the document.) Likewise, if a new library entry has a specification with the same name as an existing library entry, the existing library entry’s specification is used.
(In this situation, if a color has the same name but is defined differently, the item will change when it is dragged into the library.)
• If the XPress Preferences used in the library are different from those used in the document, text reflow may occur.
17.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Libraries
• When you place an item that includes a high resolution picture into a library, QuarkXPress saves the full path of the picture file with the library entry. If the picture file is on an available disk, QuarkXPress can find it.
Manipulating library entries
You can rearrange the order of entries within a library, move entries from one library to another, replace library entries, and delete library entries.
• To rearrange an entry within a library, click it and drag it to a new position. The arrow icons
> J indicate the entry’s new position.
Drag entries up or down to rearrange them; the arrow icons
> J indicate the placement of entries.
• To move an entry from one library into another, click it and drag it to the other open library. Delete the entry from the first library.
• To replace an entry in a library, select the replacement items in a document; then choose Edit
& Copy (
CTRL
+
C
) from the application menu.
Click the entry in the library to select it and choose Paste (
CTRL
+
V
) from the Edit menu on the library palette. A warning asks you to confirm the deletion.
• To remove an entry from a library, click it and choose Edit
& Delete. A warning asks you to confirm the deletion.
S Tips
Moving pictures
If you move high resolution pictures from the original location, you will have to relocate the file by using the
Get Picture command or update the path by using the Usage command
(Utilities menu).
Using Edit menu commands in the
Library palette
In addition to manipulating library entries with the mouse, you can use
Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete in the library’s Edit menu. For example, you can cut an item from a document, then click in a library palette and paste it.
Navigating within a library
Use the library palette’s scroll bar to scroll vertically through library entries.
To resize the library palette, place the arrow cursor x on the border of the palette until the resizing icon 78 displays, and then click and drag.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 17.7
Libraries
S Tips
Categorizing library items
Although you can put up to 2,000 items in a single library, it’s not necessarily a good idea to do so. Even if you use labels, it may be difficult to locate the items you need. You may want to create separate libraries for separate publications or topics.
Working with Labels
QuarkXPress lets you manage your library entries by applying labels to them. You can apply the same label to multiple entries and you can selectively display library entries according to their labels. For example, if you have a library full of different corporate logos, you can label each entry with the appropriate company name.
Labeling library entries
Once you label one library entry, you can reuse that label for other entries. Or, you can give each of your library entries a unique name. To label library entries:
1 Double-click a library entry to display the Library Entry dialog box.
Double-click a library entry to display the Library Entry dialog box. Enter a new label or choose one from the drop-down list.
2 Type a descriptive name in the Label field or choose one from the
Label list. To rename a library entry, type in a new label or choose a different label from the list.
3 Click OK; the label now appears in the Label menu.
R When you copy an entry from one library to another, its label is copied as well.
17.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Labels
Displaying library entries by label
To display entries by label, click the Labels menu in the upper left corner of a library palette. Choose labels to display associated entries.
• The drop-down list displays All, Unlabeled, as well as any labels you created and applied to entries.
• You can choose more than one label to display multiple categories of entries; each selected label is shown checked in the drop-down list.
• To view all library entries, regardless of label, choose All.
• To view entries to which no label has been applied, choose Unlabeled.
You can choose Unlabeled in addition to other labels.
• To hide entries to which a label is applied, choose the label again.
S Tips
Displaying All labels
If you have All checked in the dropdown list of a library palette, and then you uncheck All, all the other labels are automatically checked.
Choose labels from the drop-down list in the upper left corner of a library palette to indicate which library entries to display.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 17.9
Libraries
S Tips
Quitting QuarkXPress
When you quit QuarkXPress, any open libraries are automatically closed and saved.
Saving Libraries
When you click the close box on a library palette, QuarkXPress automatically saves changes made to the library. If you prefer, you can use the Auto Library
Save feature to save changes automatically. To enable Auto Library Save:
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Application (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
Y
); then click the Save tab.
Check Auto Library Save in the Save tab of the Application Preferences dialog box
(Edit
&
Preferences
&
Application) to automatically save changes to libraries.
2 Check Auto Library Save.
3 Click OK.
R The one disadvantage to using Auto Library Save is that it can make working with libraries slightly slower. If you’re adding 100 items to a library, QuarkXPress pauses to save each item. To protect libraries from a system failure when you’re not using Auto Library
Save, be sure to close your libraries periodically to save them.
17.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Books
Creating New Books
18
18.3
Opening and Saving Books 18.4
Working with Chapters 18.6
Controlling Page Numbers 18.11
Synchronizing Chapters 18.13
Printing Chapters 18.16
Creating Tables of Contents and Indexes 18.18
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Books
18
Books are QuarkXPress files that help you manage multiple-document publications. Books are displayed as palettes that contain links to individual documents, called chapters. Once chapters are added to a book, you can open, close, and track chapters through a book palette.
QuarkXPress lets you synchronize styles used in the chapters of a book, print chapters from a book palette, and automatically update page numbers across chapters.
Creating New Books
Creating New Books
In QuarkXPress, a book is a collection of documents. You can create a new book to organize chapters or sections at any time. To create a new book:
1 Choose File
& New & Book.
Specify a name and location for a new book in the New Book dialog box.
2 Use the controls in the dialog box to specify a location for the new book file.
3 Enter a name for the book in the File name field. QuarkXPress automatically selects the appropriate extension for Books (*.qxb) in the
Save as type field.
4 Click Create. The new book is displayed as a palette in front of all open documents.
S Tips
Storing and sharing files
If you store book files in a shared location, multiple users can open books and edit chapters. Before creating a new book, you may want to establish this location and set up sharing for the appropriate users. You can even store the necessary templates, libraries, graphics, and fonts in the same location as the book. If you need more control over who has access to certain chapters, you can place chapters in different folders with restricted sharing. Consult the
Windows documentation to learn more about sharing files and folders.
Add Ò , reorder flfi , delete , print
¢
, and synchronize styles › in chapters with icons on the book palette.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 18.3
Books
S Tips
Books are palettes
You manipulate a book palette like all other palettes: Click and drag the title bar to move the palette and click the close box to close it.
Book palettes remain open
When you create a new book, it stays open until you close it. When you relaunch QuarkXPress, an open book palette is reopened automatically and placed in its previous position.
Opening and Saving Books
QuarkXPress lets you open up to 25 books at one time. Books can be opened by more than one user at the same time so members of a workgroup can access different chapters. Books stay open until you close them — they are even reopened automatically when you quit and relaunch QuarkXPress. Changes made to books are saved when you close the book palette or quit QuarkXPress.
Opening books
Opening a book displays the book’s palette, which lets you open and edit individual chapters. To open a book:
1 If you are opening a book that is stored on a shared file server, connect to the appropriate server.
2 Choose File
& Open (
CTRL + O ).
Choose File
& Open to locate and open QuarkXPress books.
18.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Opening and Saving Books
3 Use the controls in the dialog box to locate the book Ò you want to open. Use the Files of type drop-down list to expedite finding files when a folder contains many different file types.
4 Choose the book from the list. Click Open.
Book palettes remember their position on-screen and open in their previous position.
Saving books
Changes to books (such as adding or reordering chapters) are saved automatically when you close books, or when you quit QuarkXPress. When you open and edit chapters from books, the chapter documents need to be saved the same way as any stand-alone QuarkXPress documents, by using Save or Save as commands (File menu).
R You cannot use the Undo command (Edit menu) or the Revert to
Saved command (File menu) to reverse changes made to books.
S Tips
All open books updated
As members of a workgroup make changes to a book – for example, opening or reordering chapters in a book – all open copies of the book update to reflect the changes.
Pre-formatting with templates
When creating the initial QuarkXPress documents that will become chapters, customize the appropriate templates for the book. For example, you may have different templates for the table of contents, the introduction, the main chapters, and the index. Create correctly formatted documents from these templates before you add them to a book.
Preparing to add chapters
Before you start adding chapters, check that the documents have descriptive names and decide on the order the chapters will appear in the book. Although you can rename the documents and reorder the chapters at any time, it will save you time to organize your chapters beforehand.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 18.5
Books
S Tips
Initial page numbering
The order in which you add chapters determines the default page numbering for a book. You can change the page numbering at any time. See
“Controlling Page Numbers” later in this chapter.
Working with Chapters
Books are made up of links to individual QuarkXPress documents called chapters. To create chapters, you add documents to open books. Chapters are usually opened through a book palette rather than the Open command
(File menu). You can rearrange the chapters within a book and you can remove chapters from a book. If the chapters in a book are stored on another server, connect to the server before you start working with the chapters.
Adding chapters to books
You can add up to 1,000 chapters to a book. To add chapters to an open book:
1 Click the add icon Ò on the book palette.
Clicking the add icon Ò on a book palette displays the Add New Chapter dialog box, which lets you assign chapters to a book.
2 Use the controls in the dialog box to locate the first document to add to the book. When you add the first chapter to a book, it becomes the master chapter by default. The master chapter defines
18.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Chapters the style sheets, colors, H&Js, lists, and dashes and stripes that will be used throughout the book. For more information on specifying or changing a master chapter, see “Synchronizing Chapters” later in this chapter.
3 Choose the document from the list and click Add. If the document was created in an old version of QuarkXPress, a warning asks you about updating the document; click OK. The document is updated and resaved as a QuarkXPress book chapter.
4 Repeat steps 1–3 to add additional chapters to the book.
As you add chapters, they are listed in the book palette. If a chapter is highlighted in the book palette when you click add Ò, the next chapter is added immediately before that chapter. If no chapter is highlighted, the next chapter is added to the end of the list.
S Tips
Adding chapters to multiple books
A chapter can belong to only one book. If you also want to use a chapter in another book, use Save
as (File menu) to create a copy of the document. Add the copy of the document to the other book.
Display the name, page range, and status of each chapter with the book palette.
Chapter status
Once you have chapters in a book, you and other users can begin to open, close, and track chapters using the book palette. The Status column on the book palette shows the current state of each chapter:
• Available indicates that you can open the chapter.
• Open indicates that you already have the chapter open on your machine.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 18.7
Books
• [User name] indicates that another user has the chapter open. The user name reflects the name assigned to the user’s computer through the
Windows sharing controls.
• Modified indicates that the chapter has been opened and edited independently of the book. To update the status to Available, reopen the chapter through the book palette, and then close the chapter.
• Missing indicates that the chapter’s file has been moved since it was added to the book. Double-click the chapter name to display a dialog box; then locate the file.
Opening chapters in books
Although multiple users can open the same book, only one user at a time can open a chapter. To open a chapter, the Status column must show that the chapter is Available. Double-click the name of an available chapter to open it.
Double-clicking a chapter name opens a chapter (as long as the Status column shows that the chapter is Available).
18.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Chapters
Opening chapters independently of books
If you need to work on a computer that is not part of the network where the book resides (for example, to edit a chapter at home), you can work on a copy of a chapter independently of a book. Copy the chapter from its location on the network to a hard drive or disk. Open the chapter as you would any other document (File
& Open) and edit it. When you are finished with the chapter, copy it back to its original location on the network; it will show up in the Book palette as Modified.
R To ensure that other users do not edit the original chapter while you are editing a copy, you can place the original chapter file in another folder so its status is Missing.
Closing chapters in books
You close chapters of a book as you would close any other document:
Choose File
& Close, or click the chapter’s close box. When you close a chapter, the Pages and Status columns are updated in all open copies of the book.
Reordering chapters in books
You can reorder chapters in a book at any time, regardless of their status.
When you reorder chapters, automatic page numbers are updated. Click the chapter name to highlight it; then click the arrow icons flfi on the
Book palette. The highlighted chapter will move up or down one row.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 18.9
Books
S Tips
Using page numbers
For chapter pages to accurately reflect the page numbering of the book, page numbers should be placed with the automatic page number character (
CTRL
+3). If you manually enter a page number on each page, QuarkXPress has no way of distinguishing those page numbers from any other characters on the page. See “Numbering Pages and Sectioning Documents” in
Chapter 10, “Document Layout.”
Click a chapter name to highlight it and click the arrow icons flfi on the book palette to move it up or down.
Removing chapters from books
You can remove a chapter from a book at any time. Click the chapter name to highlight it; then click the delete icon . The chapter name is removed from the Book palette and the links to the chapter are broken.
The chapter becomes a standard QuarkXPress document.
18.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Controlling Page Numbers
Controlling Page Numbers
If your chapters have sections (Page
& Section) when you add them to a book, the sections and page numbers are maintained. For example, each chapter in a book might be a new section. If your chapters do not have sections, QuarkXPress assigns continuous page numbers to the chapters in a book. For example, if the first chapter in a book is 10 pages long, the second chapter starts on page 11. You can add and remove sections to change the page numbering of a book. If a document page has an automatic page number character (
CTRL
+3) on it, that page will display the appropriate page number. See “Numbering Pages and Sectioning Documents” in Chapter 10, “Document Layout.”
S Tips
Managing books
Any user who opens a book can add, reorder, and delete chapters. They can also add sections to chapters to override the continuous page numbering or synchronize chapters. You may want to assign these tasks to one user (like the editor) and ask other users to simply open and close chapters through the palette.
Working with sectioned chapters
If a chapter contains a section start, the section page numbering remains in effect throughout the book until QuarkXPress encounters a new section start. For example, if the first chapter in a book is a section with a page number prefix of “A.”, all the pages in following chapters will have the
“A.” prefix until QuarkXPress encounters a new section. In this example, the second chapter might be a new section with a “B.” prefix.
You can add, change, and delete sections in book chapters at any time
(Page
& Section). If you remove all the sections from all the chapters in a book, the book will revert to continuous page numbering.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 18.11
Books
S Tips
Deleting unused styles
Before you synchronize chapters in a book, you may want to delete any style sheets, colors, dashes & stripes, lists, and H&Js that you do not intend to use in the book. To identify styles that are unused, choose the “not used” option from the Show drop-down list in each of the edit dialog boxes. For example, choose Edit
& Colors, then choose
Colors Not Used from the Show drop-down list. Delete any unnecessary colors.
The Pages column in the Book palette indicates sections with an asterisk. The introduction is a section that uses roman numerals for its page numbering. The second chapter in the list starts a section that continues into the third chapter. The fourth and fifth chapters each start a new section.
Working with nonsectioned chapters
If chapters do not have sections, QuarkXPress creates a “book chapter start” for the first page of each chapter. A book chapter start tells a chapter to start its page numbering after the last page of the previous chapter. To override a book chapter start and create a section, open the chapter and choose Page
& Section. Check Section Start; this unchecks Book Chap-
ter Start. When you add pages to a chapter, reorder chapters, or remove chapters, subsequent pages and chapters will be numbered according to this Section Start.
When nonsectioned chapters are added to a book, each chapter will have a book chapter start.
Pages are numbered sequentially throughout the book and updated if chapters are reordered.
18.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Synchronizing Chapters
Synchronizing Chapters
To ensure that all the style sheets, colors, H&Js, lists, and dashes and stripes used in book chapters are the same, you can synchronize these styles to match a master chapter. By default, the first chapter in the book is the master chapter, but you can change the master chapter at any time.
When you synchronize chapters, all the styles in each chapter are compared to the master chapter and modified as necessary. After you synchronize chapters, each chapter in the book will have consistently-defined style sheets, colors, H&Js, lists, and dashes and stripes.
Specifying the master chapter
By default, the first chapter you add to a book is the master chapter. The master chapter is indicated by an M to the left of the chapter name. To change the master chapter, click to highlight the new master chapter.
Then click the blank area to the left of the chapter name; the master chapter icon M moves to the new chapter.
S Tips
Making global changes to books
You can use the synchronize feature to make global changes to any of the styles in a book. For example, if you decide to change a spot color used throughout a book, change the color’s definition in the master chapter; then click the Synchronize button › .
A Guide to QuarkXPress 18.13
Books
S Tips
Specifying page numbers to print
In fields that require you to enter page numbers (for example, the Print dialog box), you must enter the complete page number, including any prefix, or an absolute page number.
An absolute page number is a page’s actual position relative to the first page of a document, regardless of the way in which the document is sectioned. To specify an absolute page number in a dialog box, precede the number you enter with a plus (+) sign. For example, to display the first page in a document, enter “+1.”
The master chapter, which serves as a basis for all the styles used in a book, is indicated by an M to the left of the chapter name. To change the master chapter, click in the blank area to the left of another highlighted chapter name.
Synchronizing styles
Before you synchronize the styles in a book, first make sure the style sheets, colors, H&Js, lists, and dashes and stripes in the current master chapter are defined correctly. Then, make sure all the chapters in the book are Available. If a chapter is unavailable, its styles will not be synchronized. Click the synchronize icon › on the book palette. A warning asks you to confirm the operation; click OK.
Each chapter in the book is opened, compared to the master chapter, modified as necessary, and saved. When you synchronize chapters, they are modified as follows:
• Styles with the same name are compared; chapter styles are edited as necessary to match styles in the master chapter.
• Styles in the master chapter that are missing from other chapters are added to those chapters.
• Styles in other chapters that are not defined in the master chapter remain untouched.
18.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Synchronizing Chapters
R If you make changes that affect the styles in a book, you need to synchronize the chapters again.
Click the synchronize icon › on the book palette to ensure that all style sheets, colors, dashes and stripes, lists, and H&Js match the current master chapter (shown with an M).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 18.15
Books
S Tips
Creating print styles for books
If you print all your chapters with the same specifications, you may want to create a print style (Edit
Styles). You can export print styles and send them to other users who are working on the book.
Printing Chapters
Book palettes provide a quick method for printing multiple chapters with the same settings. You can print a whole book or selected chapters from the Book dialog box. To print chapters in an open book:
1 Make sure the chapters you want to print are Available, or Open.
You cannot print chapters that are Modified, Missing, or currently in use by other users.
2 To print the entire book, make sure no chapters are highlighted. To choose one chapter, click it. To select continuous chapters, press the
SHIFT key while you click them. To select noncontinuous chapters, press the
CTRL key while you click them.
Select noncontinuous chapters for printing by CTRL clicking them.
3 Click the print icon
¢ on the Book palette to display the Print dialog box.
4 To print all the pages in all the selected chapters, choose All from the Pages drop-down list. To print a range of pages from the selected chapters, choose Selected from the Pages drop-down list and enter the page numbers in the field.
18.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Printing Chapters
5 Specify other print settings as usual, or choose an option from the
Print Style drop-down list. All the pages or chapters will print with these settings.
6 Click OK. QuarkXPress will open all the chapters, print them, and then close each chapter. If a chapter is missing or modified, or in use by someone else, then the book will not print.
R All chapters must be available for your book to print. If QuarkXPress encounters a chapter that is unavailable, you will be warned that the chapter cannot be found. Click OK; then locate the chapter or specify a page range for printing that includes only chapters that are Available.
S Tips
Specifying page numbers
In fields that require you to enter page numbers, you must enter the complete page number, including any prefix, or an absolute page number.
An absolute page number reflects a page’s actual position relative to the first page of a document, regardless of the way in which the document is sectioned. To specify an absolute page number in a dialog box, precede the number you enter with a plus (+) sign. For example, to display the first page in a document, enter “+1.”
A Guide to QuarkXPress 18.17
Books
Creating Tables of Contents and Indexes
QuarkXPress lets you generate a table of contents and an index for an entire book. These functions are accomplished through the lists and indexing features rather than through the book palette. However, all the chapters in a book must be Available to generate a complete list or index.
Lists
In QuarkXPress, a list is a compilation of text that is styled with specific paragraph style sheets. For example, you can take all the text in your
“Chapter Name” style sheet and all the text in your “Section Head” style sheet and compile a table of contents with two levels. Lists are not limited to tables of contents — for example, you can create a list of illustrations from the style sheets used on captions. Generating lists involves the
Lists dialog box (Edit menu) and the Lists palette (View menu). See
Chapter 19, “Lists.”
Indexes
The indexing features are available when the Index XTensions software is loaded. Creating an index involves using the Index palette (View menu) to tag text as an index entry. You specify punctuation for the index in the Index Preferences dialog box (Edit menu). When a book is complete, you generate the index using the Build Index dialog box
(Utilities menu). See Chapter 20, “Indexes.”
18.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Lists
19
Preparing Style Sheets for Lists 19.3
Specifying Lists 19.4
Displaying Lists 19.7
Updating Lists 19.9
Working with Lists in Books 19.11
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Lists
19
The lists feature adds a new dimension to style sheets by letting you generate lists of specific paragraph style occurrences. You can use the lists feature to create a table of contents, and lists of figures or pictures according to the paragraph style sheets available in the document. You can create any number of lists in a document and use them to generate as many lists as you like.
You can also use the lists feature within a book composed of separate chapters. For example, you can create a list specification that includes the paragraph style sheets for chapter names, section names, and the page numbers they occur on. After doing so, you can automatically generate a table of contents using the Lists palette for every document in your book . The table of contents list will include all instances of the chapter name and section name style sheets, as well as the pages on which the paragraph style sheets are applied.
Preparing Style Sheets for Lists
Preparing Style Sheets for Lists
Before you create a list, you need to create style sheets for your document.
Begin by creating paragraph styles for several heading levels and for commonly occurring styles such as “Body Text” or “Bullet Text.” Then create another style to format the table of contents after it has been generated by a list. See “Working with Style Sheets” in Chapter 12, “Typography.”
Including style sheets in a list
The first step in creating a list is to decide what paragraph style sheets you want to include in the list. If you want to create a table of contents, include headline and chapter title styles in your list, since a table of contents generally lists chapter titles or general subjects and their respective page numbers. You probably won’t want to include the style for basic text or other commonly occurring styles, because they would make your table of contents, or any other list QuarkXPress generates, very impractical.
S Tips
Contributors list
If your book or document is a monthly publication, you can create an index of contributors by tagging the style sheets for bylines and illustration credits. Unless you want to indicate the pages of articles and graphics by the writers and artists, choose Text Only from the Num-
bering drop-down list.
Specifying levels for a list
You will also need to decide how the different levels in the paragraph style sheets will be defined before generating a list. You may want chapter headings to be at the first level and subjects within a chapter to be at the second level. For example, if you are writing a manual about QuarkXPress, and a chapter in the manual is titled “File Menu,” you may want the chapter heading “File Menu” to be the first level on your list. The “New,”
“Open,” “Close,” and “Save” items (subheadings in the “File Menu” chapter) could be at the second level. By making decisions such as these beforehand, the process of generating a list will be much easier.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 19.3
Lists
S Tips
Available style sheets
The Available Styles list in the Edit
List dialog box (Edit
& Lists &
New) contains all the paragraph style sheets in the current document.
Specifying Lists
Once you have created the style sheets for your document and have decided which ones will be included in your list, you are ready to start creating your list.
1 Choose Edit
& Lists.
Create a new list from the Lists dialog box (Edit
& Lists).
2 Click New.
3 Enter a name in the Name field.
Enter a list name and choose the styles to include in the list with the Edit List dialog box
(Edit
& Lists & New).
19.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Lists
4 Choose style sheets from the Available Styles list and click the Add arrow to add them to the Styles in List list. Continue adding styles until you have added all of the styles you want in your list. You can also double-click any style name to add it to the Styles in List list.
5 Choose a level from one to eight in the Level drop-down list to set each style sheet’s position in the list hierarchy. Every level after the first is indented in the Lists palette (View
& Show Lists).
6 Choose an option from the Numbering drop-down list to specify a page numbering style for each style in your list. The numbering style you choose determines where page numbers will appear in relation to the list item.
Specify list attributes, such as numbering and hierarchy, in the Edit List dialog box (Edit
&
Lists
& New).
• Choose Text only for an item to appear without a page number.
• Choose Text...Page # for an item to appear followed by a page number.
• Choose Page #...Text for an item to appear preceded by a page number.
S Tips
Removing a style from the Styles in
List list
Select a style and click the Remove arrow to remove it from the Styles
in List list.
Selecting multiple styles in the Edit
List dialog box
To select multiple styles at once in either the Available Styles or
Styles in List lists, click a style then press the
SHIFT key while you click the last style you want to select. Press the
CTRL key while you click to select multiple non-contiguous styles.
Important list parameters
You can have a maximum of 32 style sheets in a list. The text for a list entry is limited to 256 characters.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 19.5
Lists
7 Choose a style sheet from the Format As drop-down list to specify how each paragraph style will be formatted when you generate a list.
The Format As option lets you define how a particular style sheet is formatted in a list. You can use the Format As drop-down list to assign a different style to any style sheet. For example, a headline style sheet might use 24 point bold type in your document, but you probably do not want it to display at that size in your table of contents. In this case, define another style with smaller type to represent the original style when you generate a list.
8 Check the Alphabetical check box if you want your list to be generated in alphabetical rather than document order.
9 Click OK to return to the Lists dialog box; then click Save.
The Lists dialog box (Edit
& Lists) displays a newly created list.
19.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Displaying Lists
Displaying Lists
Once you define your paragraph style sheets and create a list based on them, you can generate a list by using the Lists palette (View
& Show Lists). The list QuarkXPress generates is displayed in the palette, and you can flow the list to any active text box. If you have multiple lists associated with a document, you can choose which list to display from a drop-down list.
S Tips
The Find field
Type a word in the Find field of the
Lists palette (View
& Show
Lists), to quickly find the row beginning with that word.
Generating a list in the Lists palette
1 Choose View
& Show Lists to display the Lists palette.
2 Choose Current Document from the Show List For drop-down list.
3 Choose the desired list from the List Name drop-down list. The text of the list is displayed in the palette. Choosing another list displays the contents of that list in the palette.
Generating a list in the Lists palette (View
& Show Lists).
4 Click Update to update the list display if necessary.
R Double-click any row in the Lists palette to automatically scroll the document to display that paragraph.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 19.7
Lists
S Tips
The Build button
The Build button in the Lists palette is not available unless a text box is active.
Page numbers in generated lists
After building a list in a text box page numbers can become inaccurate in two ways: (1) a list is flowed into a box with text that is linked across pages causing paragraphs going in the list to move to a new page, or (2) paragraph location is changed in the source document after a list has been flowed into a box.
Flowing a list into a text box
1 Choose View
& Show Lists to display the Lists palette.
2 Create or activate a text box.
3 Click Build to copy the list to the text box. The Format As style sheets for the list are applied automatically.
Clicking the Build button in the Lists palette (View
& Show Lists) after creating a new text box.
Use the Build button to automatically generate a list from text contained in the Lists palette. When you click the Build button, text is automatically flowed into any active text box.
Flowing a list into a new text box using the Lists palette (Edit
& Lists).
R If you edit text in a document from which a list was generated, changes are not automatically reflected in the built list. You have to rebuild the list to reflect text changes.
19.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Updating Lists
Updating Lists
The Lists palette (View
& Show Lists) is not automatically updated as you work on your document. When you make changes to text, you need to update the list to be sure it is current. Clicking the Update button in the Lists palette scans the document for list items, and rebuilds a list in the Lists palette.
Updating a list in a document
1 To display a list for an open document, choose Current Document in the Show List For drop-down list in the Lists palette (View
&
Show Lists).
2 Click Update to update and display the list in the Lists palette.
Updating a list in the Lists palette.
R If you delete a paragraph style sheet used in a list and replace it with
No Style, paragraphs with No Style applied are not included when you generate a list. If you delete a paragraph style sheet and replace it with another style sheet, the text affected is only included in the list if its replacement style sheet is included in the list.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 19.9
Lists
Replacing a list
When you build a list, QuarkXPress searches the document to determine if a list with the same name as the one you are building already exists in the document. If one is not found, a copy of the new list is built and placed in the selected text box. If a list with the same name is found in the document a warning displays.
Click Insert to build another list at the insertion point, or click Replace to delete the old list and build a new list. Clicking Replace is very useful when you have changed the document and need to build a new list to reflect the changes.
19.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Working with Lists in Books
Working with Lists in Books
You can maintain lists throughout a book composed of several chapters.
Once you define the “master chapter” that includes the lists you want to use throughout the book, you can synchronize the chapters and update the lists in the Lists palette (View
& Show Lists). Once your list is compiled and merged, you can copy the text to an active text box. See Chapter 18, “Books.”
Specifying and updating lists for a book
To specify a list for a book, begin by creating a list for a document. Then designate the document as the master chapter for the book. To display the most accurate list for a book, all chapters must be “Available” in its
Book palette. If QuarkXPress encounters a chapter that is unavailable, you are notified that chapters are open or missing, and are asked to locate the chapter.
When you click Update to update a list for the open book, QuarkXPress opens and scans all chapters in the book for text belonging in the list and displays it in the Lists palette. To update a list for a book:
1 Choose View
& Show Lists to display the Lists palette.
2 To display the list for this book, choose the open book from the
Show List For drop-down list.
3 Click Update to rescan all chapters in the book and build a new list.
When the process is complete, the list for the book will be displayed in the Lists palette.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 19.11
Indexes
20
Installing the Index XTensions Software 20.3
Using the Index Palette 20.4
Specifying the Index Marker Color 20.9
Creating Index Entries 20.10
Creating Cross-References 20.14
Editing and Deleting Index Entries 20.17
Building Indexes 20.19
Editing Final Indexes 20.22
Nested Index Quick Reference 20.24
Run-in Index Quick Reference 20.25
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Indexes
20
In QuarkXPress, indexing is accomplished by tagging words in documents as First Level, Second
Level, Third Level, or Fourth Level index entries.
You can create cross-references and choose whether index entries cover a word, a number of paragraphs, a text selection, or all the text until the next occurrence of a specific style sheet. When it is time to build the index, you specify a format (nested or run-in), punctuation, a master page, and style sheets for the various levels. QuarkXPress then creates and styles the index for you.
The indexing process cannot be fully automated.
There is no way around it — a person has to decide what goes into a meaningful, useful index. What software can do is automate the process of typing, formatting, and updating page numbers in an index.
Installing the Index XTensions Software
Installing the Index XTensions Software
Indexing features are added to QuarkXPress through the Index XTensions software. To create or edit index entries and build an index, the Index
XTensions software must be loaded. You can open documents containing index markers with or without the Index XTensions software loaded. To load the Index XTensions software:
1 Make sure the Index XTensions software is in the XTension folder or the XTension (Disabled) folder within your QuarkXPress folder.
2 Choose Utilities
& XTensions Manager.
S Tips
Using the Index XTensions Software
Since indexing is usually performed by a professional indexer or an editor, you may want to save RAM and enable the Index XTensions software only during the indexing process. If index markers exist in a document, it is best to use the Index XTensions software while editing the document.
Enable the Index XTensions software by highlighting it and choosing Yes from the Enable drop-down list in the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu). A check mark displays in the Enable column to indicate that the XTension will be loaded.
3 Choose a set from the Set drop-down list that includes the Index
XTensions software. Or, highlight it in the XTensions Manager list and choose Yes from the Enable drop-down list.
4 Click OK to close the XTensions Manager dialog box.
5 Close all open documents and exit QuarkXPress. Launch QuarkXPress to load and run the Index XTensions software.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.3
Indexes
Index palette
Entry area, Text field, and Sort As field
Using the Index Palette
The Index palette (View
& Show Index) lets you add words to four different levels of an index, determine the scope of index references, create crossreferences, and edit or delete index entries. When the Index palette is open, index markers are displayed around index entries in a document. Index markers appear as colored brackets. This section describes the various components of the Index palette.
Entry (area)
An index entry is an individual item listed in an index. The Entry area lets you enter text for an index entry, determine how to sort an entry alphabetically, and determine a level for an index entry.
Text (field)
The Text field lets you specify index entries by typing in the field, highlighting text in the document, or selecting an existing entry in the entries list. Pressing
CTRL
+
ALT
+
I opens the palette and highlights the Text field.
You can enter up to 255 characters in the Text field. When you highlight text in a document, the first 255 characters are automatically entered in the Text field. For example, if you double-click the word “QuarkXPress” in a document, it is automatically entered in the Text field.
Sort As (field)
The Sort As field lets you override the alphabetical sorting of an entry in the Text field. (Entering a variant spelling in the Sort As field does not affect the spelling of the index entry, only the way it is sorted in the index.) For example, if the entry in the Text field is “20th Century,” you may want it sorted as “Twentieth Century.” To do this, you type “Twen-
20.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Using the Index Palette tieth Century” in the Sort As field. You can enter up to 255 characters in the Sort As field.
Level (drop-down list)
The Level drop-down list lets you specify the hierarchy of entries in an index. You can have two levels in a run-in index and up to four levels in a nested index. When you choose First Level, the index entry is entered alphabetically in the Entry list. When you choose Second
Level, Third Level, or Fourth Level, you must specify which entry the added entry will fall under. To specify the location, click in the left column beside the entry.
Reference (area)
The Reference area lets you specify the character style for an index entry’s references (usually page numbers), specify the scope an index entry covers, and create cross-references.
Style (drop-down list)
The Style drop-down list lets you apply a character style sheet to the page numbers listed for a specific index entry. The style sheet also applies to the text you enter for a cross-reference. You can use different styles to indicate index entries that provide more information or certain types of information. For example, you might apply a bold style to a page number that provides a definition of a topic.
Level drop-down list
Reference area and Style drop-down list
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.5
Scope drop-down list
Indexes
Scope (drop-down list)
The Scope drop-down list lets you specify the range of text an index entry covers and create cross-references. The options work as follows:
• Selection Start: Lists the number of the page that contains the index marker’s open bracket.
• Selection Text: Lists the page numbers from the index marker’s open bracket to its close bracket.
• To Style: Lists the page numbers from the index marker’s open bracket to the occurrence of a specified paragraph style sheet after the close bracket. An adjacent drop-down list displays to let you choose from the document’s list of paragraph style sheets, or you can choose Next. Next covers all text until a new paragraph style sheet occurs, following the close bracket.
• Specified # of ¶s: Lists the page numbers from the index marker’s open bracket through a succeeding number of paragraphs beyond the close bracket. A field displays to let you enter the number of paragraphs to include.
• To End Of: Lists the page numbers from the index marker’s open bracket to either the end of the current story or the end of the document. You can choose Story or Document from a drop-down list.
• Suppress Page #: Does not list the page number for an index entry. For example, some of your first level index entries may not have page numbers because they’re broken down into second level entries with page numbers.
• X-Ref: Refers the reader to a cross-referenced entry in the index rather than, or in addition to, a page number. You can choose See, See also, or See herein from a drop-down list, then enter text in the field or click an entry in the list to automatically fill in the field.
20.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Using the Index Palette
Add (button)
The Add button (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+
I
) lets you add an index entry or reference to the Entries list according to the current settings in the Entry and Reference areas and the location of the arrow r in the Entries list.
Find Next (button)
The Find Next button lets you jump from the position of the Text Insertion bar i to the next occurrence of an indexed word (the next index marker) in a story. If a range of text is selected, then the Find Next button will find the next indexed word following the highlighted text.
Pressing ALT will change the Find Next button to Find First.
Delete (button)
The Delete button lets you delete an index entry from the Entries list.
When you delete an entry, all its references, all the entries nested under it, and all its cross-references are deleted. A warning asks you to confirm this action.
Add and Find Next buttons
Edit (button)
The Edit button lets you edit index entries or index references. When you select an entry from the list, the Entry area lets you change Text,
Sort As, and Level information. When you select a page number or cross-reference for an entry, the Reference area lets you change the Style and Scope information.
R You can also double-click an entry to edit it. When you are finished editing, double-click another entry or click the Edit button again.
Delete button and Edit button
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.7
Entries list
Indexes
Entries
The Entries list displays first level entries with second level, third level, and fourth level entries indented underneath. The entries and icons in the list let you do the following:
• Arrow r: Click next to an entry to specify a location for a second level, third level, or fourth level index entry.
• Plus sign : Click to display page numbers and cross-references for an index entry.
• Entries: Click index entries to select them for editing or deleting.
• Page Numbers: Click to select the page numbers for editing or deleting.
Double-click to enter a temporary edit mode and display the reference’s starting location in a document. When you are in edit mode, a single click jumps you to the reference’s starting location in a document.
• Cross-References: Click to select a cross-reference for editing or deleting.
Double-click to enter a temporary edit mode and display the reference’s starting location in a document. When you are in edit mode, a single click jumps you to the reference’s starting location in a document.
• The Occurrences column shows the number of times each index entry is indexed in a document.
20.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying the Index Marker Color
Specifying the Index Marker Color
When you add a word to an index, QuarkXPress tags it with brackets or a box called Index Markers: or . Index markers are displayed in a document when the Index palette is open (View
&
Show Index). You can customize the color of index markers using the
Index Preferences dialog box.
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Index.
S Tips
Index marker types
When you index a range of text, it is marked with brackets .
When you place the Text Insertion bar i in text and enter an index entry, the location is marked with a box .
Click the Index Marker Color button in the Index Preferences dialog box to specify a color for Index Markers (Edit
& Preferences & Index).
2 Click the Index Marker Color button to display a color picker.
3 Use the sliders, arrows, and fields to specify a color for the Index
Markers.
4 Click OK to close the color picker; then click OK to close the Index
Preferences dialog box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.9
Indexes
S Tips
Nested vs. run-in index
Before you start adding words to the index, you need to decide whether you are creating a nested index or a run-in index. A nested index has up to four levels of information with entries separated by paragraph returns and different style sheets. A run-in index has two levels of information with second level entries immediately following first level entries in the same paragraph. See
“Nested Index Quick Reference” and
“Run-in Index Quick Reference” later in this chapter.
Creating Index Entries
QuarkXPress lets you create four levels of index entries in a nested index and two levels of index entries in a run-in index. Use the Index palette
(View
& Show Index) to add entries to an index.
Creating a First Level index entry
A First Level index entry is a primary topic sorted alphabetically in an index.
1 Place the Text Insertion bar i or highlight a range of text to establish the beginning of the text you want to index.
2 Enter text for the First Level entry in the Text field of the Index palette.
You can either highlight text in the document or type in the field.
The first step in creating an index entry is to place the Text Insertion bar i in the text and enter a topic in the Text field of the Index palette.
20.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Index Entries
3 To override the alphabetical indexing of the entry, enter text in the
Sort As field. For example, if the entry is “20th Century,” you might want it sorted as “Twentieth Century.” This does not affect the spelling of the index entry.
4 Choose First Level from the Level drop-down list.
5 To override the default character formatting applied to a page number or cross-reference, choose another character style sheet from the
Style drop-down list. The default formatting is the character style of entry text.
6 Choose an option from the Scope drop-down list to specify the range of text the index entry covers. See “Using the Index Palette” earlier in this chapter.
S Tips
Indexing the same word multiple times
If you highlight a word and add it to an index, then try to add the highlighted word to the index again under a different level, you get an error message. To index a word more than once, place the Text Insertion bar i in the word, then type the entry in the Text field.
The second index entry displays a box plus brackets for the index marker.
Choose an option from the Scope drop-down list to specify the range of text an index entry covers.
7 Click Add on the Index palette; the First Level index entry is listed alphabetically in the Entries list. The indexed text is marked with brackets or a box in the document.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.11
Indexes
S Tips
Suppressing page numbers
Use Suppress Page # for the
Scope when an index entry will be used as a heading for more levels of information.
Click Add to add the First Level index entry to the Entries list and mark it in the document.
Creating a Second, Third, or Fourth Level index entry
In a nested index, Second Level, Third Level, and Fourth Level entries are positioned under First Level entries in the new paragraph.
In a run-in index, Second Level entries follow First Level entries in the same paragraph.
1 Place the Text Insertion bar i to establish the beginning of the range of text you want to index.
2 Use the Text, Sort As, Style, and Scope controls as you would to create a First Level index entry.
3 Specify a location for the entry within a higher level entry by clicking next to an entry in the left column of the Entries list.
R Second, Third, and Fourth Level entries are indented if the paragraph style sheet used in the build index has a left indent value.
20.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Index Entries
Click next to an entry to specify a location for a Second Level, Third Level, or Fourth Level index entry.
4 Choose Second Level, Third Level, or Fourth Level from the Level drop-down list.
The arrow r location determines which Level options are available.
The Second Level option is available when the arrow r is next to a
First or Second Level entry, the Third Level option is available when the arrow r is next to a First, Second, or Third Level entry, and the
Fourth Level option is available when the arrow r is next to a First,
Second, Third, or Fourth Level entry.
5 Click Add on the Index palette. The new index entry is alphabetized and indented under the appropriate entry.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.13
Indexes
S Tips
Style sheets for cross-references
When you build an index, crossreferences immediately follow page number references. They are formatted with the same style sheets as the entries they follow.
If you specify a Style for a crossreference, the text you enter in the
X-Ref field will have that style sheet applied; the style sheet will not be applied to the “See,” “See also,” or
“See herein” part of the crossreference sentence.
Punctuation for cross-references
The punctuation preceding crossreferences is specified in the
Before X-Ref field of the Index
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Index).
If you want punctuation following a cross-reference, enter it after the cross-reference text you enter in the
Index palette.
Creating Cross-References
In addition to listing page numbers for index entries, you can also refer readers to other topics. For example, in a chapter on Typography, you might list “See also Fonts.” To do this, you create cross-references. You can create a cross-reference to an existing entry in the index, or you can add a new entry specifically for the cross-reference. Use the Index palette
(View
& Show Index) to create cross-references.
Creating a cross-reference for an existing index entry
1 Place the Text Insertion bar i anywhere in text. (The placement does not matter since page numbers will not be listed for this entry.)
2 Select an entry in the Entries list. The entry is automatically placed in the Text field.
3 Choose X-Ref from the Scope drop-down list. Choose the type of cross-reference you want from the drop-down list: See, See also, or
See herein.
20.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating Cross-References
To create a cross-reference, choose X-Ref from the Scope drop-down list, then choose See,
See also, or See herein.
4 Specify the index entry being cross-referenced by entering text in the field or clicking an existing entry in the list.
R To see the cross-reference text in the Entries list along with the page number references, click the plus sign next to the entry.
Creating a cross-reference for a new index entry
1 Place the Text Insertion bar i anywhere in text. (The placement does not matter since page numbers will not be listed for this entry.)
2 Enter text for the entry in the Text field of the Index palette.
3 Use the Sort As and Level controls as you would to create any other index entry.
4 Choose X-Ref from the Scope drop-down list. Choose the type of cross-reference you want from the drop-down list: See, See also, or
See herein.
S Tips
Shortcut to edit mode
To edit an index entry, you can double-click it rather than clicking the
Edit button . Selecting another entry in the list ends this temporary edit mode.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.15
Indexes
5 Specify the index entry being cross-referenced by entering text in the field or selecting an existing entry in the list.
6 Click Add on the Index palette. Click the plus sign next to the entry to see the cross-reference text.
Cross-references are listed under index entries. When a cross-reference is selected, the type
(See, See also, See herein) is shown next to the Scope drop-down list.
20.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Editing and Deleting Index Entries
Editing and Deleting Index Entries
When you delete text that includes index markers from a document, the references are also removed from the index. But when you edit text within index markers, the index entry does not change. You can edit and delete entries using the Index palette (View
& Show Index).
Editing an index entry
You can select an index entry and edit its Text or Sort As information.
Or, you can select a cross-reference or page number reference and edit its
Style or Scope information.
1 Select an entry or reference in the Entries list. (To see the references, click the plus sign next to an entry.)
To edit a selected index entry or reference, select it and click the Edit button .
2 Click the Edit button on the Index palette, or double-click the entry. While you are in edit mode the Edit button looks like this .
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.17
Indexes
3 Make any changes to the selected entry or reference. You can also select and edit other entries and references.
4 Click the Edit button again to end the edit mode.
Deleting an index entry
To delete an index entry and remove its index markers from the text:
1 Select an entry or reference in the Entries list. (To see the references, click the plus sign next to an entry.)
2 Click the Delete button on the Index palette. A warning asks you to confirm the deletion.
20.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Building Indexes
Building Indexes
When you build an index, QuarkXPress compiles the list, formats it according to your specifications, and flows it into pages based on the master page you choose. Index preferences are document specific when set with a file open.
Specifying the punctuation used in an index
The Index Preferences dialog box lets you specify the punctuation that is automatically inserted when you build an index.
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Index.
S Tips
Quick reference for index formats
See the “Nested Index Quick Reference” and the “Run-in Index Quick
Reference” sections later in this chapter to see the Separation
Characters specified in the Index
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Index) in use and the style sheets specified in the
Build Index dialog box in use.
Specify the punctuation used when you build an index in the Separation Characters area in the Index Preferences dialog box (Edit menu).
2 Enter index punctuation, including any surrounding spaces, in the
Separation Characters fields.
• Following Entry specifies the punctuation immediately following each entry in an index (usually a colon). For example, the index line “QuarkXPress: xii, 16–17, 19” uses a colon and a space after the index entry “QuarkXPress.”
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.19
Indexes
When a cross-reference immediately follows an index entry, the Before
X-ref characters are used rather than the Following Entry characters.
• Between Page #s specifies the words or punctuation used to separate a list of page numbers (usually a comma or semicolon). For example, the index line “QuarkXPress: xii, 16–17, 19” uses a comma and a space between page numbers.
• Between Page Range specifies the words or punctuation used to indicate a range of pages (usually an en dash or the word “ to ” with a space on either side). For example, the index line “QuarkXPress: xii, 16–17, 19” uses an en dash between a range of pages.
• Before X-ref specifies the words or punctuation used before a crossreference (usually a period, semicolon, or space). For example, the index line “QuarkXPress: xii, 16–17, 19. See also Page Layout” uses a period and a space before the cross-reference.
• Between Entries specifies the words or punctuation used between entry levels in a run-in index (usually a semicolon or period). A run-in index lists the entries and subentries of an index entry in a paragraph rather than with nested tabs. For example, this index entry for QuarkXPress “QuarkXPress: xii, 16–17, 19; Printing from:
62–64; Typesetting in: 32, 34” uses a semicolon between entries.
In a nested index, the Between Entries characters are used as the ending punctuation for each paragraph.
3 Click OK.
R The completed index consists of formatted text, not of dynamic links to indexed text. If you continue to edit text or the Entries list, you need to rebuild the index.
Building an index
Use the Build Index dialog box to create an index from the contents of the Index palette.
20.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Building Indexes
1 Choose Utilities
& Build Index.
Specify the format for the index in the Build Index dialog box (Utilities menu).
2 Click Nested or Run-in for the Format.
3 Check Entire Book to index all the documents in the active book. If the document is not included in a book, the option is gray. If it is unchecked, it only indexes the active document.
4 Check Replace Existing Index to overwrite the existing index.
5 To add headings to each alphabetic section in the index, check Add
Letter Headings and choose a style sheet from the drop-down list.
6 Choose a Master Page for the index (only master pages with automatic text boxes are listed). QuarkXPress automatically adds the necessary pages to the end of the document to contain the index. If you specify a facing-page master page, a right-facing page is added first.
7 Choose style sheets for each level of the index from the Level Styles drop-down lists. If you clicked Run-in for the Format, only the First
Level drop-down list is available (because all the levels are flowed into the same paragraph).
8 Click OK to close the Build Index dialog box and create the index.
S Tips
Style sheets and master pages
Before building the index, you should create a master page with an automatic text box for your index. Then, create paragraph style sheets for the section heads and all the levels used in your index. Normally, the levels are distinguished by varying indents.
Index format
If your index is organized with more than two levels of information, you should create a Nested index. If you decide to create a Run-in index, all levels of information for any entry will be listed in the same paragraph with no hierarchy.
Comparing two indexes
If you need to compare two versions of an index, for example to confirm local formatting, uncheck Replace
Existing Index in the Build Index dialog box (Utilities menu).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.21
Indexes
Editing Final Indexes
After you build an index, you need to look it over closely. Check to be sure the index is thorough, the cross-references are appropriate, and the levels are logical. See if you like the punctuation and formatting. It is unlikely that you will be absolutely happy with the first index you build. You can solve some issues by editing and rebuilding the index, while other issues will require local formatting of the index text.
Nonprinting text in an index
If the text marked in brackets will not show on the printed output because it is on the pasteboard, obscured by another item, or overflowing its box, then the characters “PB ” (with a space after the B) display next to the entry in the index instead of a page number.
To search for the characters “PB “, enter them (including the space) in the Find what field of the Find/Change dialog box (Edit menu), and then see if you can solve the problem in the document or simply remove the characters from the built index.
Editing then rebuilding the index
To solve issues with the punctuation, the index entries, or the organization of the index, go back to the Index palette, the Index Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Index), or the Build Index dialog box
(Utilities menu). Make the necessary changes then rebuild the index.
20.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Editing Final Indexes
Updating the index
If you edit an indexed document after you build the index, you should build the index again. Because QuarkXPress will not update the index text automatically, you should build your final index only when you are fairly certain the document is final.
Applying local formatting to the index
When you have an index you are happy with — and are almost certain the publication will not change — you can often still improve your index with local formatting. For example, if you only have one entry each under the headings W, X, Y, and Z, you might combine them into a heading W–Z. Or, you might want to use the Find/Change dialog box
(Edit menu) to apply type styles to certain words. But remember that the changes will not be reflected in future versions of the index if you decide to delete or change entries at this stage.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.23
Indexes
S Tips
Quick Reference guides
The Quick Reference guides on these two pages show where elements of a built index are specified in the
Index XTensions software. For example, if you know you want a colon following each index entry, but you're not sure how to specify it, consult these examples.
Nested Index Quick Reference
Examples of how to specify the punctuation or style of a nested index.
F
Fonts: 1–7. See also Typography
Multiple Master: 4, 5
PostScript Type 1: 4
Service bureaus: 7
Size: 15
Keyboard commands: 15
Preset range: 15
Styles: 16
All Caps: 17, 18
Bold: 17
Color: 20
Customizing: 18
Horizontal Scale: 19–21
Offset: 19
Vertical Scale: 19, 21
Italic: 17
Keyboard commands: 17
Outline: 17
Plain: 17
Add Letter Headings
Build Index
Before X-Ref
Index Preferences
Following Entry
Index Preferences
Between Page #s
Index Preferences
Between Page Range
Index Preferences
Character style sheet
Reference area, Index palette
20.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Run-in Index Quick Reference
Run-in Index Quick Reference
Examples of how to specify the punctuation or style of a run-in index:
I
Images: 73; Bitmapped: 73, 74; Synthetic images: 77; Halftones: 73, 80. See also
Grayscale; Angle: 82; Cells: 81; Dots:
80; Gray levels: 83; Screen frequency:
81; PICT: 75; PNTG (Paint-type): 74;
TIFF: 75, 79
Add Letter Headings
Build Index
Following Entry
Index Preferences
Between Entries
Index Preferences
A Guide to QuarkXPress 20.25
Output
21
New Printing Features in QuarkXPress 21.3
Specifying Printing: The Print Dialog Box Tabs 21.4
Specifying Print Dialog Box Settings 21.17
Creating and Using Print Styles 21.19
Printing Color Separations 21.21
Specifying Setup for Imagesetters 21.22
Updating Picture Paths 21.24
Printing Odd-Sized Documents 21.25
Preparing Documents for Service Bureaus 21.29
Understanding DPI vs. LPI 21.30
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Output
21
You can print a QuarkXPress document to a wide range of output devices. Whether you want to print proof copies for review on a laser printer, or you need final film output on a high resolution imagesetter, this chapter covers everything from the most basic information about printing your QuarkXPress documents, to the more complex issues involved with printing color separations.
New Printing Features in QuarkXPress
New Printing Features in QuarkXPress
In previous versions of QuarkXPress, the Print and Printer Setup dialog boxes were two separate, but closely related entities. Those two dialog boxes have now been merged into the various tabs of the Print dialog box
(File
& Print) to allow easier access to all printing controls. The
Printer
Setup dialog box has been incorporated into the Setup tab . In addition,
QuarkXPress offers a PPD Manager and a print preview.
PPDs
QuarkXPress now uses industry-standard PostScript Printer Description
(PPD) files to optimize printing to a wide-range of print devices, and no longer supports PDFs (Printer Description Files). Use the Printer Descrip-
tion drop-down list (File
& Print & Setup tab) to choose a PPD and to activate the print options associated with a specific print device.
PPD Manager
The PPD Manager dialog box (Utilities
& PPD Manager) lists all the
PPDs available in your system and lets you select which PPDs appear in the Printer Description drop-down list (File
& Print & Setup tab).
Preview tab
The Preview tab (File
& Print) shows how a page of your document fits the selected output media (paper, film, etc.), and some useful statistics, but does not provide a document preview containing all the items in your document.
S Tips
Turning trapping off
In previous version of QuarkXPress, trapping calculations were performed only if the QuarkXPress PDF (Printer
Description File) called for it.
QuarkXPress now includes trapping information whenever you print a document to a color PostScript device — even when printing proofs on a laser printer. To prevent lengthy processing time when printing a document that does not require trapping, choose Knockout All from the
Trapping Method drop-down list in the Trapping tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
&
Document).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.3
Output
Specifying Printing: The Print Dialog Box Tabs
In many electronic publishing environments, you can print using a wide variety of output devices, from laser printers and dye sublimation printers, to imagesetters and film plotters. With so many different types of printers, there are also many different printer drivers, PostScript Printer Description
(PPD) files, and printer setup options.
Before you can specify how you want your document to print, you must first select a printer driver and an output device. If you are new to
Microsoft Windows, we recommend that you consult the documentation resources provided with your computer for complete information about selecting print drivers and printers.
Specifying the Document tab
The area in the middle of the Print dialog box consists of five tabs:
Document, Setup, Output, Options, and Preview. Each tab contains a unique set of print-related options. The Document tab (File
& Print) is the first of five tabs in the Print dialog box.
1 Choose File
& Print & Document tab (
CTRL + P ).
• To print color separations, check Separations. A plate will be printed for each spot color or process ink used on the printed pages of your document.
• To print document pages in a spread (pages that you arrange in a horizontal row in the Document Layout palette [View
& Show
Document Layout]) contiguously when printing, check Spreads.
21.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Printing: The Print Dialog Box Tabs
• To print more than one collated copy of a document, check
Collate. This setting sends a document to the printer as though you were executing more than one Print command, so it will take longer to print than uncollated multiple copies.
The Document tab (File
& Print).
• To print pages in your document that are blank, check Include
Blank Pages.
• To print many pages of a document on one sheet of paper as thumbnails, check Thumbnails.
• To print a multipage document in reverse order, check Back to
Front. The last page in the document will print first.
• To specify the page sequence, choose All, Odd, or Even from the
Page Sequence drop-down list. All is the default, and choosing it prints all of the related pages. When you choose Odd, only oddnumbered pages are printed. When you choose Even, only evennumbered pages are printed.
• To specify that crop marks and registration marks print on every page, choose Centered or Off Center from the Registration dropdown list.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.5
Output
S Tips
Imagesetter paper width
Enter the correct value when specifying paper width for an imagesetter.
Values entered into the Paper Off-
set and Paper Width fields should not be greater than the media width defined for the imagesetter.
Imagesetter paper height
This setting is useful when outputting to a drum-based imagesetter.
Values entered into the Paper
Height field should not be greater than the maximum media height the imagesetter can support.
When outputting to a continuousfeed or non-drum imagesetter, use the Automatic setting in the Paper
Height field.
• To print a large document in tiles (sections), choose a tiling option from the Tiling drop-down list. When you specify tiling,
QuarkXPress prints each document page in two or more overlapping tiles. The Tiling drop-down list of the Document tab lets you choose Manual tiling or Automatic tiling. When you choose Man-
ual, you control the way in which a page is tiled by positioning the ruler origin. When you select Automatic, QuarkXPress determines how many tiles are needed to print each document page, based on the document size, the printer’s media (paper) size, whether or not
Absolute Overlap is checked, and the value you enter in the Over-
lap field (the default overlap is 3"). QuarkXPress prints tickmarks and location information on each tile to aid you in reassembling them. Do not check Absolute Overlap if you want your document centered on the final assembled tiles.
• To specify a bleed amount for a document, enter a value in the
Bleed field. The bleed value is the distance that an item could extend beyond the edge of a page.
Specifying the Setup tab
1 Choose File
& Print & Setup tab (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
P
).
The Setup tab (File
& Print) displays the PPD and several default settings for the selected
PostScript printer, and lets you control some aspects of printing.
21.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Printing: The Print Dialog Box Tabs
• To specify the appropriate PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file for the PostScript printer you want to use, choose a PPD from the
Printer Description drop-down list.
When you do this, the Paper Size, Paper Width, and Paper
Height fields will automatically be filled with default information supplied by the PPD. If you choose a PPD for an imagesetter, the
Paper Offset and Page Gap fields will also be available. If you do not have the right PPD, choose a similar built-in, generic PPD.
R PPDs are created by printer manufacturers and are usually supplied with PostScript printers. Contact the appropriate printer manufacturer for more information.
• To choose the media size used by your printer, select a media size from the Paper Size drop-down list.
• To specify the width and height of custom media supported by your printer, choose Custom from the Paper Size drop-down list and enter values in the Paper Width and Paper Height fields.
• To make your document print smaller or larger, enter a percentage value in the Reduce or Enlarge field. The default is 100%.
• To position your document on the selected output media, choose an entry from the Page Positioning drop-down list. The default
Page Positioning is Left Edge, which positions the top left of the document page on the top left of the selected media. Right Edge positions the top right of the document page on the top right of the selected media. Center centers the page horizontally and vertically in the imageable area of the selected output media. Center
Horizontal centers the page left-to-right in the imageable area.
Center Vertical centers the page top-to-bottom in the imageable area.
S Tips
Managing PPDs
You can customize the list of PPDs available in the Printer Description drop-down list using the PPD
Manager dialog box (Utilities menu). See “Managing Print Styles and PPDs” in Chapter 4, “Customizing QuarkXPress.”
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.7
Output
S Tips
How much shall I let it bleed?
When you want items to bleed off the edge of a printed and trimmed page, it takes a little planning to ensure a clean bleed. There can be many variations in the amount of bleed needed for perfect binding or saddle-stitch binding, as well as variations in cleanness of cuts from various types of paper cutters. Consult with your commercial printer to determine the appropriate bleed amount for your document.
The Separations check box
To turn color separations on/off, use the Separations check box in the
Document tab (File
&
Print).
• Check the Fit in Print Area check box to reduce or enlarge the size of a page in your document to fit the imageable area of the currently selected media.
• Click an Orientation button to specify whether to print in portrait
(vertical) or landscape (horizontal) mode. Portrait orientation is the default; however, if your document page is wider than the paper size selected, landscape orientation is selected automatically.
Specifying the Output tab (color separations off)
After the printer is selected, and the general Page Setup specifications are complete, it is time to finish telling the printer how to output the document in the Print dialog box (
CTRL
+
P
).
The Output tab in the Print dialog box lets you specify color, resolution, and halftone screen and angle settings. To specify Output tab settings for printing with color separations off:
1 Choose File
& Print & Output tab.
The Output tab (File
& Print) setup for black and white printing.
• From the Print Colors drop-down list, choose Black & White,
Grayscale, or Composite Color. Black & White prints black and
21.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Printing: The Print Dialog Box Tabs white (no shades of gray) to a black and white printer. Grayscale prints colors as shades of gray to a black and white printer. Com-
posite Color prints colors to a color printer. The options available in the Print Colors drop-down list are determined by the
PPD selected in the Printer Description drop-down list (File
&
& Setup tab).
• Choose Conventional or Printer from the Halftoning dropdown list. Conventional uses QuarkXPress calculated halftone screen values. Printer uses halftone screen values effective on the selected printer; in this case, QuarkXPress does not send halftoning information.
• The default resolution for the printer is entered automatically in the
Resolution field. To specify a resolution other than the default, enter a dots per inch (dpi) value in the Resolution field, or make a selection from the Resolution drop-down list.
• The default line frequency for the printer is entered automatically in the Frequency field. To specify a line frequency other than the default, enter a lines per inch (lpi) value in the Frequency field, or make a selection from the Frequency drop-down list.
• The list at the bottom of the Output tab lists Process Black as the only color used to print your document. If a color PPD is selected, the appropriate color plates display in the list.
Specifying the Output tab (color separations on)
The Output tab in the Print dialog box lets you specify color, resolution, and halftone screen and angle settings. To specify Output tab settings for printing with color separations on:
1 Choose File
& Print & Document tab; then check Separations.
2 Click the Output tab.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.9
Output
S Tips
Decoding the Plates list
A check mark next to a color name in the Plates list tells you which plates will print when you have checked
Separations in the Document tab
(File
&
Print). A plate will not print for an unchecked color name. The other columns indicate the screen value, line frequency, and spot function assigned to a plate. A dash in a column indicates that the column entry is not editable.
The Output tab (File
& Print) setup for color separations.
• From the Plates drop-down list, choose Process & Spot or Convert
to Process. Process & Spot prints all process and spot color plates.
Convert to Process converts all colors in your document to process colors (at print time only) and prints process plates.
• Choose Conventional (the only option available when Separa-
tions is checked in the Document tab) from the Halftoning dropdown list. Conventional uses QuarkXPress calculated halftone screen values.
• The default resolution for the printer is entered automatically in the Resolution field. To specify a resolution other than the default, enter a dots per inch (dpi) value in the Resolution field, or make a selection from the Resolution drop-down list.
• The default line frequency for the printer is entered automatically in the Frequency field. To specify a line frequency other than the default, enter a lines per inch (lpi) value in the Frequency field, or make a selection from the Frequency drop-down list.
21.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Printing: The Print Dialog Box Tabs
• The list at the bottom of the Output tab lists the color Plates used in the document, as well as the default Halftone, Frequency,
Angle, and Function settings. You can change these specifications, for example, when default screen values for certain plates will result in moirés (undesirable patterns that can result when two or more halftone screens are improperly superimposed when printing), or when you want alternate dot shapes in printed screens.
• Generally, the default settings in the Plates list give you correct printing results. However, there may be special instances where the default settings result in moirés, so you will need to use custom specifications. For example, the default screen values for spot colors can be set to the value of Process Cyan, Process Magenta, Process
Yellow, or Process Black using the Halftoning drop-down list in the Edit Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors & New). If you have a blend consisting of two spot colors, you may get moirés if both colors are assigned the same screen values.
3 Set up custom separation specifications:
• A check mark in the Print column indicates a plate will be printed:
The default setting is checked. Uncheck any check mark in the
Print column to cancel printing for an individual color separation plate, or select No in the Print drop-down list.
• The Plate column lists all spot colors and process inks used in the document when Separations is checked (File
& Print & Document tab).
• The Halftone drop-down list lets you assign a different process color screen angle, frequency, and function to a spot color, or specify Custom halftoning. The default screen values for spot colors are specified in the Halftone drop-down list in the Edit Colors dialog box (Edit
& Colors & New). Frequency, Angle, and Function for process colors can be edited in the appropriate corresponding columns in the list.
S Tips
Choosing halftone dots
The Function drop-down list in the
Output tab (File
&
Print) lists five dot types: Dot, Line, Ellipse,
Square, and Tri-Dot. The default setting is Dot, but there may be instances in which you need to use another dot type. If you will be setting up the document to print to file
(see Prepress File bullet item in
“Specifying the Options tab” later in this chapter), it is important to know if any special dot settings are needed. Let your professional printer be your guide. Depending on their output hardware, or presses, they may have a preference for dot types.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.11
Output
S Tips
Spot color blends without moirés
To avoid moirés with two-color spot color blends, assign different screen values to the blend colors.
You can choose Default, C, M, Y, or K to use a preset screen angle, frequency and function; or Custom, to specify a screen angle, frequency and function to a spot color plate. Choosing C, M, Y, or K produces the current angle, frequency, and dot function for the corresponding process color, and it is not editable. When Custom is chosen, the Frequency, Angle, and Function drop-down lists are available for entering custom specifications.
Color Default screen angle
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Black
Spot Colors
105.000°
75.000°
90.000°
45.000°
45.000° (if Process Black is selected)
• The Frequency column lists the line screen frequency value. This is the lines per inch (lpi) that will be applied to each of the color plates.
When there is a number in the Frequency column (for example, for process colors, or when you have chosen Custom in the Halftone column), the Frequency drop-down list becomes available.
Choose Other from the Frequency drop-down list to display the
Other dialog box. Enter a lines per inch (lpi) value in the Frequency field; then click OK.
The Other dialog box lets you enter a custom line screen frequency value expressed in lines per inch (lpi).
• The Angle column lists the screen angle for each color plate. Choose
Other from the Angle drop-down list to display the Other dialog box. You can enter a screen angle value in the Angle field.
21.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Printing: The Print Dialog Box Tabs
• The Function column drop-down list displays the available dot shape types: Default, Dot, Line, Ellipse, Square, and Tri-Dot. Choose an alternate dot shape type, or keep the default setting.
Specifying the Options tab
The Print dialog box Options tab lets you specify settings useful for reporting PostScript errors, making PostScript dumps, printing negatives, and printing pictures. Settings in the bottom half of the dialog box let you control the way pictures are printed.
1 Choose File
& Print & Options tab.
The Options tab (File
& Print) lets you specify settings for printing pictures.
• To receive printed PostScript error reporting from QuarkXPress, check Quark PostScript Error Handler. The Quark PostScript
Error Handler utility provides, in addition to PostScript error handling, information about where on a page the PostScript error occurs. If a PostScript error occurs during the printing of a
QuarkXPress item (text box, picture box, line, or item created with
XTensions software), the utility will print the page containing the
QuarkXPress items handled successfully up to the point of the error. The utility will then print an error report containing: (1) The bounding box of the item in which the error occurred. This box is
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.13
Output
S Tips
Troubleshooting PostScript errors
The Quark PostScript Error
Handler lets you know why and where a PostScript error occurred.
To enable the error handler, check
Quark PostScript Error Handler in the Options tab (File
&
Print).
You can also enable the Quark
PostScript Error Handler in your print styles (Edit
&
Print Styles).
Right-reading, emulsion down
For right-reading emulsion-down negative film output, choose File
&
&
Options tab. Choose
Horizontal or Vertical from the
Page Flip drop-down list; then, check Negative Print. This produces output where type reads correctly (from left to right) when the emulsion of the film is facing down.
identified by a black border and a 50% black background. (2) A message at the top left of the page specifying the type of item causing the error. Lay the error report on top of the printed page to isolate the offending item. The bounding box on the error report indicates the location of the object causing the error.
Quark PostScript Error Handler is designed for, and will only affect, PostScript printing. Quark PostScript Error Handler will append its report to any other PostScript error reporting utilities you may be using.
• To print to a PostScript file instead of to a printer, check Prepress
File. Prepress File produces a multipage output that does not include printer driver PostScript code or embedded fonts. Such prepress files are suitable for use with proprietary prepress systems for operations like color correction, separations, or impositions.
• Make a selection from the Page Flip drop-down list. The Page Flip drop-down list lets you choose from four options: None; Horizon-
tal — to reverse the printing of page images from left to right; Ver-
tical — to print page images upside down; and Horizontal &
Vertical — to print page images from left to right, upside down.
• To print negative page images, check Negative Print. When Neg-
ative Print is checked, flipping a page horizontally or vertically will produce right-reading, emulsion down film output, a common standard for commercial printers in the United States.
2 Set up specifications for printing pictures in the Pictures area of the
Options tab:
The Pictures area of the Options tab lets you specify how pictures will be printed.
21.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Printing: The Print Dialog Box Tabs
• To specify how pictures are printed, choose Normal, Low Reso-
lution, or Rough in the Output drop-down list. Normal is the default, and provides high resolution output of placed pictures using the data from the pictures’ source files. Low Resolution prints placed pictures at screen preview resolution. Rough suppresses printout of placed pictures.
• From the Data drop-down list, choose ASCII, Binary, or Clean 8-
bit. Though documents print more quickly in Binary format,
ASCII is more portable because it is a standard format readable by a wider range of printers and print spoolers. Clean 8-bit combines
ASCII and Binary in a very versatile and portable file format.
• To control whether TIFF and EPS pictures are output or OPI (Open
Prepress Interface) comments are substituted during output, choose an option from the OPI drop-down list.
Use the default setting, Include Images, when you are not using an OPI server. Include Images does not embed OPI comments for
EPS pictures, and if a high resolution file cannot be found for printing, the screen preview is substituted.
Choose Omit TIFF when you are outputting to an OPI prepress system that replaces TIFF pictures only. (Most OPI systems use this method.) Omit TIFF replaces TIFF pictures with OPI comments in the file. EPS pictures are included; OPI comments for the EPS pictures are not included.
Choose Omit TIFF & EPS when you are outputting to an OPI prepress system that replaces both TIFF and EPS pictures. Omit TIFF &
EPS replaces both TIFF and EPS pictures with OPI comments in the file. (Consult documentation provided by the OPI system manufacturer for more information.)
• Check Overprint EPS Black to force all black elements in imported
EPS pictures to overprint (regardless of their overprint settings).
S Tips
Printing pictures faster
If you need to print a document to proof the text only, choose Low
Resolution or Rough from the Out-
put drop-down list in the Options tab (File
& Print). When you do this, you get the added advantage of faster processing and printing times.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.15
Output
• If you want QuarkXPress to print TIFFs at the full printer resolution, check Full Resolution TIFF Output. When you print a TIFF with Full
Resolution TIFF Output selected, QuarkXPress will send the TIFF information to the printer based on the resolution (dpi) of the printing device. If Full Resolution TIFF Output is not selected, a non-line art TIFF will be downsampled based on the frequency (lpi) setting for the session (line art TIFFs are sent at full printer resolution).
Viewing the Preview tab
The Print dialog box Preview tab lets you view the effect of the settings you made for a print job before you output it. The page icon on the right shows you the document page in relationship to its placement on the paper as it comes from the printer. Statistical information about the document page also displays.
1 Choose File
& Print & Preview tab to see how your document is positioned on the selected print media before it is printed.
The Preview tab (File
& Print) lets you view placement of the page on the selected print media before you output it.
21.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Print Dialog Box Settings
Specifying Print Dialog Box Settings
The Print dialog box (File
& Print) is divided into two specific areas: The fields, drop-down lists, and buttons at the top and bottom of the dialog box that are the static components of the Print dialog box. And the area in the middle of the Print dialog box consisting of five tabs: Document,
Setup, Output, Options, and Preview. Each tab contains a unique set of print-related options.
Specifying settings in the Print dialog box
1 Choose File
& Print (
CTRL + P ).
The Print dialog box lets you control many of the characteristics of your output.
• To select where your document will print, choose a printer from the Printer drop-down list. This list displays all the printers installed on your computer either physically through the parallel or serial ports, or across a network. The Properties button opens a dialog box with controls specific to the selected print driver.
For more information about the options in this dialog box or
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.17
Output
S Tips
Editing Range Separators
Commas and hyphens are the default separators for indicating discontinuous and continuous ranges in the
Pages field of the Print dialog box
(File
&
Print). If you specified commas or hyphens as part of page numbers for your document in the
Section dialog box (Page menu), you will need to change the default separators. For example, if your page numbers are “A-1, A-2,” then you will not be able to specify a range in the Pages field using a hyphen. To edit the separators, click the Range
Separators button and enter new characters in the Edit Range Sepa-
rator dialog box.
how to install printers, consult the documentation provided with Microsoft Windows.
• To use a predefined print setup, choose a print style from the Print
Style drop-down list. A print style is a printing “style sheet” that you create and save using the Print Styles dialog box (Edit
Styles). Refer to “Creating and Using Print Styles” later in this chapter for more information about creating, saving, and using print styles.
• To specify the number of copies you want to print, enter a value in the Copies field.
• To specify the document pages you want to print, enter values and separators in the Pages field (the default is All). The Pages field lets you specify ranges of pages, discontinuous pages, and a combination of ranges and discontinuous pages for printing.
Use commas and hyphens to define a continuous or non-continuous range of pages. For example, if you have a 20 page document and you want to print pages 3 through 9, 12 through 15, and page
19, then enter 3-9, 12-15, 19 in the Pages field.
• Click the Capture Settings button to save the current print settings and close the Print dialog box without printing the document.
21.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Creating and Using Print Styles
Creating and Using Print Styles
Creating a Print Style (Edit
& Print Styles) lets you save a printing setup from the Document, Setup, Output, and Options tabs. Print styles can be imported and exported, and can be used as often as you wish with current versions of QuarkXPress. To create a Print Style:
1 Choose Edit
& Print Styles; then click New.
S Tips
Print styles
Print styles enhance productivity and ensure consistent output by automatically specifying output settings in the
Print dialog box (File
&
Print).
The Print Styles dialog box (Edit
& Print Styles).
2 Enter a name for your style in the Name field.
The Edit Print Style dialog box (Edit
& Print Styles & New).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.19
Output
3 Specify settings in the Document, Setup, Output and Options tabs.
If you need help specifying settings in these tabs, see the appropriate sections earlier in this chapter for complete tab descriptions and specification instructions.
4 Click OK when you are finished specifying settings; then click Save in the Print Styles dialog box to save your new print style.
Using Print Styles
To select a Print Style to print your document:
1 Choose File
& Print to open the Print dialog box.
2 Choose an option from the Print Style drop-down list; “Document” is the default. To add print styles to the drop-down list, use the Print
Styles dialog box (Edit
& Print Styles).
Choosing a print style from the Print Style drop-down list automates print job preparation.
The Default print style is applied to every new document. The first time you print a document, the Document print style is the selected print style. The Document print style in the Print Style drop-down list associates the current print settings with the document and not any particular print style.You can customize the Default print style to suit your specific printing needs for all new documents using the
Print Styles dialog box.
21.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Printing Color Separations
Printing Color Separations
Pages within your document that contain color can be output as color separations, so plates can be made for use on a printing press. To print color separations:
1 Choose File
& Print (
CTRL
+
P
).
The Document tab (Edit
& Print) lets you specify printing for color separations.
2 Check Separations in the Document tab.
3 Click the Output tab. The list at the bottom of the tab lists the process inks and spot colors used in the document. You can choose to print all the plates or to check or uncheck plates in the Print column to print only the plates you choose. See “Specifying the Output tab
(color separations on)” earlier in this chapter.
4 Click Print.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.21
Output
Specifying Setup for Imagesetters
Imagesetters are PostScript output devices that require special setup. While most laser printers use sheet paper, most imagesetters use either RC paper or film from a roll. The Setup tab ( File
& Print) displays specific controls for an imagesetter, made available by information contained in a Post-
Script Printer Description (PPD) file. To specify setup for an imagesetter:
1 Choose File
& Print; then click the Setup tab (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
P
).
Choose an imagesetter PPD from the Printer Descriptions dropdown list. The Paper Size field changes automatically to Custom.
When you choose a PPD for an imagesetter, a full range of setup specifications are available.
2 Enter a value in the Paper Width field that matches the maximum width the imagesetter can support.
Automatic is entered in the Paper Height field by default because the length necessary for the page is determined by the height or width (depending on whether the document is in portrait or landscape mode) of the page.
21.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying Setup for Imagesetters
The Paper Height setting is useful when outputting to a drum-based imagesetter. Values entered into the Paper Height field should not be greater than the maximum media height the imagesetter can support.
When outputting to a continuous-feed or non-drum imagesetter, use the Automatic setting in the Paper Height field.
3 Choose an entry from the Page Positioning drop-down list to position your document on the selected output media. The default Page
Positioning is Left Edge, which positions the top left of the document page on the top left of the selected media. Right Edge positions the top right of the document page on the top right of the selected media. Center centers the page horizontally and vertically in the imageable area of the selected output media. Center Horizontal centers the page left-to-right in the imageable area. Center Vertical centers the page top-to-bottom in the imageable area.
4 Enter a value in the Paper Offset field to specify the distance the left edge of the page will be offset (or inset) from the left edge of the roll media. For example, if you want a document page that is 6.0" wide to print centered on a 12.0" wide roll of RC paper, specify 3.0" in the
Paper Offset field.
5 Enter a value in the Page Gap field to specify the amount of white space between pages of the document as they print on the roll.
6 Check the Fit in Print Area box to reduce or enlarge the size of a page in your document to fit the output media used by the printer.
7 Click an Orientation button to specify whether to print in portrait
(vertical) or landscape (horizontal) mode. Portrait orientation is the default: However, if your document page is wider than the paper size selected, landscape orientation is automatically selected.
8 Click Print.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.23
Output
Updating Picture Paths
QuarkXPress uses two types of information for imported pictures; low resolution and high resolution. Low resolution information is used to display picture previews. When you print, high resolution information contained in the original picture files is accessed using paths to the pictures. A path to a picture is established when you import an EPS or TIFF picture into a
QuarkXPress document. QuarkXPress keeps information about each picture’s path as well as when the picture was created.
If a picture is moved or changed after it is imported, QuarkXPress warns you when you execute the Print command or the Collect for Output command
(File menu). See “Listing and Updating Pictures” in Chapter 14, “Pictures.”
21.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Printing Odd-Sized Documents
Printing Odd-Sized Documents
Printing odd-sized pages can require special printing specifications.
When document pages are smaller than the print media or paper, you might want to center the page. When a document’s page size exceeds the largest sheet size your printer can feed, you might need to divide your output into tiles that can be assembled by pasting up paper mechanicals, or by stripping film.
Using Tiling to print an oversized document
When document pages are larger than the paper or media in your printer, you will need to use Tiling to output the entire page, which can be assembled as hard copy later. To tile a document:
1 Choose File
& Print (
CTRL + P ).
The Document tab (File
& Print) lets you specify Tiling for printing oversized documents.
S Tips
OPI systems
Open Prepress Interface (OPI) systems substitute high resolution images and pre-separate full color scanned images. If you are using such an output system, you can for example, import a low resolution
RGB TIFF into a document, and specify that QuarkXPress automatically enter OPI comments so that the low resolution pictures are swapped for high resolution pictures when printing. OPI systems have different swapping capabilities. Consult OPI documentation for setup information, or ask your OPI service.
Picture paths
If you keep your pictures in the same folder as your QuarkXPress document, you will not have to maintain picture paths. QuarkXPress can always “find” pictures that are in the same folder as the document, whether or not the picture was in that folder at the time it was imported.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.25
Output
2 Choose a selection from the Tiling drop-down list. To print a large document in tiles (sections), choose a tiling option from the Tiling drop-down list. When you specify automatic tiling, QuarkXPress prints each document page in two or more overlapping tiles. The
Tiling drop-down list of the Document tab (File
& Print) lets you choose Manual tiling or Automatic tiling. When you choose Man-
ual, you control the way in which a page is tiled by positioning the ruler origin. When you choose Automatic, QuarkXPress determines how many tiles are needed to print each document page, based on the document size, the printer’s media (paper) size, whether or not
Absolute Overlap is checked, and the value you enter in the Overlap field (the default overlap is 3"). QuarkXPress prints tickmarks and location information on each tile to aid you in reassembling them. Do not check Absolute Overlap if you want your document centered on the final assembled tiles.
3 Click Print.
21.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Printing Odd-Sized Documents
Using reduction features to print an oversized document
When simply reducing the size of the page to fit the paper size you have available is acceptable:
1 Choose File
& Print; then click the Setup tab (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
P
).
Fit in Print Area sizes the page to fit the available print area.
2 Check Fit in Print Area.
3 Click Print to print your document.
Printing small documents
When producing small pages, like a two-sided handbill or business card, a commercial printer may prefer to set your job up in a way that multiple jobs can be run at the same time. Since larger sheets of paper feed through a press more efficiently, small page jobs are usually printed together for more accuracy on press. For example, the front and back of a 4.5" ´ 7.5" handbill would be printed two-up on 8.5" ´ 11" paper; then, the paper is turned, or turned and flipped (tumbled), and printed on the other side.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.27
Output
Odd-sized documents like this handbill need special Print dialog box specifications to force them to print centered top-to-bottom or left-to-right on a larger sheet of output paper.
In the bindery, the handbill is trimmed to its finished size. In order to trim the piece efficiently, the printer needs to receive the handbill 2-up, and centered top-to-bottom and left-to-right on 8.5" ´ 11" paper. You can do this, even when the page coordinates are oriented to the upper left.
To print this document so that output is centered:
1 Choose File
& Print; then click the Setup tab (
CTRL + ALT + P ).
2 Choose Center from the Page Positioning drop-down list to center the page horizontally (left-to-right) and vertically (top-to-bottom) on the output paper.
• Left Edge is the default; the top left edge of document pages are aligned with the upper left edge of the output page.
• Right Edge aligns the upper right edges of document pages with the upper right edges of the output pages.
• Center Horizontal centers the document pages left-to-right in the print area.
• Center Vertical centers the document pages top-to-bottom in the print area.
3 Click Print to print your document.
21.28
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Preparing Documents for Service Bureaus
Preparing Documents for Service Bureaus
QuarkXPress makes it easy to prepare a document for output at a service bureau. The Collect for Output command (File menu) copies the document and all imported picture files into one folder — and it produces a report describing the fonts, XTensions, picture placements, trapping, etc., used in the document. To use Collect for Output:
1 First save the document; then choose File
& Collect for Output.
The Collect for Output dialog box (File menu) lets you create a folder containing your document, pictures, and output report.
2 Enter a name for the report in the File name field. QuarkXPress automatically selects the appropriate extension “XPress Tags (*.xtg)” in the Save as type field.
3 Use the controls in the dialog box to create a new folder and specify a location.
4 Click Collect. If the Missing/Modified pictures dialog box is displayed, and you want to include your picture files, update Modified pictures and locate Missing pictures. When you are finished, click OK.
5 Open the Collect for Output file in your QuarkXPress folder. Import the report file into the template; be sure to check Include Style Sheets in the
Get Text dialog box (File menu). Save the output request file; then, give a copy to the service bureau with the document and picture files.
S Tips
Checking the output report
You may want to inspect a Collect
for Output report before you actually collect the files. That way, if you find any errors (for example, the separation plates are incorrect), you can fix the original document. To do this, check Report Only in the Collect
for Output dialog box (File menu).
Working with a service bureau
If a service bureau is producing final output film, ask if you should: (1) Set up your laser printer to print using an imagesetter PPD; (2) If the job includes color separations, print proofs of the separations; (3) Provide a proof copy of your document along with the electronic version and any associated picture files; (4) Provide a
Collect for Output Report file. Providing these items to service bureau output technicians can help you avoid costly errors and reruns.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.29
Output
Understanding DPI vs. LPI
In electronic publishing, there are two types of dots — machine dots and halftone dots. Machine dots are the tiny dots made by a laser printer or imagesetter; they are the basis for all printed material generated digitally. If you are a QuarkXPress user generating layouts without getting heavily involved in prepress, you may be laboring under a common misconception. The misconception: lpi (lines per inch) and dpi (dots per inch) settings affect the same dots, but in different ways. The reality: lpi and dpi settings affect different dots, but in the same way. Let’s elaborate.
As soon as the first computer printers came into being, the term “dots” became standard. In the publishing industry, however, the word had already been in existence for decades — long before anyone had seen a computer. Now that the computer and publishing industries have merged with applications like QuarkXPress, some confusion has resulted.
In electronic publishing, “dot” has two totally distinct meanings. Service bureaus and anyone involved in the printing side of computer-aided publishing are already aware of this distinction. Many users, however, remain in the dark.
Machine dots and halftone dots
There are two types of dots: machine dots and halftone dots. Machine dots are the tiny dots made by a laser printer or imagesetter that combine to form everything you see in the output. Halftone dots are composed of machine dots (see Figure 1 on page 21.33). Halftone dots are present only when process-color or grayscale printing is involved, or when a color is screened (in QuarkXPress, any shade specified as less than 100% is screened).
21.30
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Understanding DPI vs. LPI
As most QuarkXPress users are aware, halftoning is the traditional way a picture — such as a photograph or painting — is reproduced in mass quantities by a commercial printer, whether the source is a computer or not. The halftone process is used for color pictures and black-and-white pictures that include levels of gray. To reproduce differences in tones, the image is transformed into variable-sized dots by projecting light through a negative and a transparent “line screen.” QuarkXPress and any Raster
Image Processor (RIP) will do this automatically. For a black-and-white picture, a 20% black area would ultimately be composed of dots that are half the size of the dots in a 40% black area. This technique tricks your eyes into seeing gray.
Illusion of color
For a process color picture, halftone dots are cyan, magenta, yellow, or black, and they vary in size. Placed side by side, sometimes overlapping, these four colors create the illusion of more complex colors and shades.
In QuarkXPress, the size and number of these halftone dots are determined by your lpi setting (halftone screen frequency). The higher your lpi setting, the smaller and more plentiful these dots are.
The small dots within the large dots shown in Figure 1 on page 21.33 are called “machine dots,” or “recorder elements.” The higher the resolution of your printer or imagesetter, the smaller and more plentiful machine dots are.
When you look through a magnifying loupe at imagesetter output of a process color, you are looking at halftone dots. Some devices let you specify the shape of a halftone dot as round, linear, elliptical, or square.
Traditional halftoning uses square or round halftone dots, but true consistency in the shape of halftone dots is rare. To accommodate the varying dot sizes that produce each shade percentage, the shape of the dot is often compromised.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.31
Output
Adjusting the dpi or lpi value
Unlike halftone dots, machine dots are invisible at high resolutions — even through a loupe. A machine dot’s shape (square) cannot be controlled as a halftone dot’s shape can, and a machine dot’s size is a lot more consistent. You may not need to worry about machine dots for every job — as long as you know when to worry. Whenever you change the “dpi” resolution for the output of an image (for example, if you switch from a 1200-dpi imagesetter to a 2400-dpi device), you are not changing the size and quantity of the halftone dots — only that of the smaller machine dots. Conversely, when you designate an lpi setting, you are not affecting the size and quantity of machine dots at all — only that of the halftone dots.
Even though lpi deals with halftone dots and dpi deals with machine dots, in both cases a higher value yields dots that are smaller and more plentiful. But despite their distinct applications, you cannot liberally change lpi and dpi settings without maintaining their proper relationship.
If you increase your screen frequency (lpi) without increasing your imagesetter resolution (dpi), there may not be enough “dots per cell” to allow for the output of an adequate number of shades. In a perfect world, there should be about 256 levels of gray, or 256 possible ways of creating a halftone dot from machine dots. Having more than 256 levels of gray may be pointless, because this is approximately the highest number of levels the eye can differentiate; it is also the maximum number that PostScript can generate.
In QuarkXPress, you can set the lpi using the Frequency field in the
Output tab (File
& Print). To specify dpi, you will usually need to switch a dial on the imagesetter. But if you want to output line art and raster images at a lower dpi resolution, you can use the Resolution field in the Output tab (File
& Print) with Full Resolution TIFF Output unchecked in the Options tab (File
& Print). When Full Resolution
21.32
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Understanding DPI vs. LPI
TIFF Output is unchecked, the Resolution field applies only to line art.
When Full Resolution TIFF Output is checked, the Resolution field applies to all raster images.
Figure 1 The image of the eye, above, is composed of halftone dots. The halftone dots are composed of machine dots, which are shown in two different resolutions (dpi) in box A and box B.
Proper relationships
The following formulas are designed to yield 256 levels of gray, and they will aid you in determining the proper relationship between your dpi and lpi values.
• When you know the imagesetter resolution but are not sure who the lithographer is, insert the dpi resolution of your electronic output device into the following formula to get the maximum lpi screen. (This maximum does not consider limitations of the offset press you choose, which may lower the number.) dpi output / 15.97 = maximium lpi screen.
For internal use by licensed users only
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.33
Output
• When you know the maximum number of lines per inch the printing press will produce, and you want to avoid additional charges for printing film with a resolution beyond that level, use this modified version of the formula: lpi screen ´ 15.97 = minimum dpi output
• When you have already committed to specific dpi and lpi resolutions but would like to know how close you are to 256 levels of gray, use the following formula (if you have fewer than 256 levels, you may notice some banding in your blends):
(dpi/lpi) 2 + 1 = number of levels of gray
Scan dots
Now to throw a wrench into the works: There is also a little thing called a “scan dot,” and its frequency is specified in dots per inch, just like a machine dot. Whenever you digitize an image using a scanner, you have to specify a dpi resolution. This “dpi” resolution does not relate to the formulas above. However, once again, you have to understand the proper relationship. This is a simple matter: If the lpi screen at which the scanned image will run at press time is greater than 133 lpi, your scan resolution should be 1.5 times the lpi screen. If the lpi screen at which the scanned image will run at press time is less than or equal to 133 lpi, your scan resolution should be 2.0 times the lpi screen. Scanning at higher resolutions is a waste, because the halftone dots won’t be small enough to capture the extra detail, unless you are using “stochastic screening” — the latest in printing technology.
21.34
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Understanding DPI vs. LPI
Stochastic screening
The best stochastic screening methods are being marketed as “screenless” printing, because they ignore the halftone-dot concept altogether. By scattering “microdots” — sometimes no bigger than the size of one machine dot — and carefully dictating the amount of space between them, a RIP can achieve 256 or more gray levels without ever varying the dot size. Good color stochastic screening rivals continuous-tone output even when magnified through a loupe.
What’s more, stochastic screening eliminates moiré and rosette patterns, allows scans to retain much greater detail, and permits a wider variety of colors. Color plates can be bumped-in without regard to screen angle, and misregistration causes no color shift. Except for the RIP software, the technology can be used with existing equipment (including presses). But because it is newer, it may be out of financial reach for some businesses.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 21.35
22
Technical Notes
An Introduction to Troubleshooting 22.3
The Document Environment 22.4
The Application Environment 22.6
The Operating System Environment 22.8
The PostScript Environment 22.10
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
22
Technical Notes
The combination of fonts, graphics, printers, printer drivers, operating systems, and software can create some mysterious situations in any publishing environment. For example, as you work in QuarkXPress, you may be faced with a situation in which you can’t print a certain page. Solving the problem depends on your ability to isolate the cause — whether it’s a corrupt graphic, font, etc.
These technical notes, developed in collaboration with Quark’s technical support department, explain the basic concepts of troubleshooting in a publishing environment and provide some possible solutions.
An Introduction to Troubleshooting
An Introduction to Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting is a logical, step-by-step process used to determine the cause of a problem. The process has four basic steps: defining the problem, reproducing the problem, changing the variables, and testing to determine the cause.
Defining the problem
Defining the problem is a simple matter of saying to yourself, “This,
specifically, is what I’m having trouble with.” Simple enough, right?
From there, you can go to the next step.
Reproducing the problem
To investigate the problem, you’ll need to discover the series of steps that cause it to occur repeatedly. Repetition is the key — if the same series of steps does not yield the same results every time, you can’t go on to the next part of the troubleshooting process.
S Tips
Troubleshooting variables
This chapter introduces important variables involved in troubleshooting basic computer problems. It is by no means a complete description of all of the variables involved, and may not address the specific problem you’re having. If you need additional assistance, Quark offers online information via the World Wide Web at www.quark.com, on America Online at Keyword Quark, and on
CompuServe at Go Quark. Quark also offers fee-based technical support at
(303) 894-8822.
Changing the variables
Troubleshooting works primarily by a process of elimination. By changing a single variable and performing the test again, you’ll learn what effect, if any, the variable has on the test.
Testing to determine the cause
A good test narrows the search by discriminating among a variety of potential causes. With the Windows operating systems, most software problems originate from one of three basic environments: the document environment, the application environment, and the operating system environment. Problems can also be generated during output.
Specific PostScript problems are discussed at the end of this chapter.
Understanding all of these environments helps you design tests that eliminate a number of potential causes.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 22.3
Technical Notes
The Document Environment
To determine if your problem is document-based, test the problem in multiple documents. If the problem only occurs in a single document, then the cause is document-based.
Determining whether your problem is document-based
Imagine that while working with a QuarkXPress library item, you notice that every time you drag a purple-colored box from the library onto a document page, the box becomes orange.
The next step is to determine: Does the problem happen in all documents or just this one? So you create a new document and drag the box onto the page, but it does not change color. With one simple test you’ve determined that this is a document-based problem.
Troubleshooting document-based problems
Once you’ve narrowed a problem down to a specific document, you must still determine what is causing it. The two most common types of document-specific problems are misunderstood features and corruption.
Misunderstood features
QuarkXPress is a complex program with many features, and it takes a while to learn how they all work. Because of its complexity, some features may seem to exhibit strange behavior. Most likely a combination of circumstances are producing the behavior. For example, if you drag a library item defined as purple into a document that contains a different definition of purple, the color of the item will change to match the document’s version of purple (which may make the item orange, like in the above example). This is how the feature is designed to work, but the color change may be confusing if you don’t know that.
22.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
The Document Environment
Corruption
Document corruption, or file damage, can cause all sorts of strange document-specific behavior, and may eventually cause a document to be unopenable (as evidenced by a “Bad File Format” warning). Corruption can be caused by a number of things:
• System interruption while saving a document often causes Bad File Format errors. File corruption most often occurs when documents are saved improperly.
• Power surges can cause a file to be saved improperly.
• Running under low memory conditions can cause system interruption. If the interruption occurs during a save, document corruption can occur.
• Network problems can result if the network goes down or “times out” while you’re saving a document to a remote volume. The document may become corrupted.
How do you avoid file corruption? As always, prevention is the best cure.
Keep regular backups and run a clean system.
R If a document begins to exhibit strange behavior, you may want to try a thumbnail drag to repair it. See “Copying Items and Pages
Between Documents” in Chapter 10, “Document Layout.”
S Tips
Reimporting graphic previews
If QuarkXPress experiences a system failure while trying to open a document, it may be a result of attempting to render a damaged picture, font, or item. If this is the case, the failure will occur immediately after the document window displays, as objects are drawing on the page.
Reimporting the graphic previews often fixes this problem. Press the
CTRL key while you click Open in the
Open dialog box and all the graphics will be reimported. The origin, plus any scaling and rotation of the graphics, is preserved, but the previews are recreated.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 22.5
Technical Notes
The Application Environment
If the problem is straightforward, test it in another application to help determine the cause. If you get the same results, the problem is likely occurring in the operating system. If the problem occurs only in one application, the problem is application-based. Application-based problems usually stem from problems with XTensions, the XPress Preferences file, or fonts.
R If a problem involves a feature unique to QuarkXPress, you may not be able to devise a similar test in another application. In such cases it may be simpler to test other variables first.
Determining whether your problem is application-based
Suppose you add the font Futura to your system, but when you launch
QuarkXPress, it does not show up in any of the font lists. The problem is easy to duplicate in other applications: Simply launch another application and check for Futura. If Futura is missing, the problem lies in the operating system environment. If only QuarkXPress fails to load Futura, you’ve determined that this is an application-based problem .
Troubleshooting XTensions
Since XTensions software modifies the way QuarkXPress operates, each one should be examined as a variable. To disable QuarkXPress XTensions, open the XTensions Manager (Utilities menu) and select All XTensions
Disabled from the Set drop-down list. Then quit and relaunch
QuarkXPress. If the problem ceases, the XTensions software is likely the source.
If you have a large number of XTensions software, locating the one causing the problem can be difficult. You could load the XTensions software one at a time and retest the problem, but this would require quitting
22.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
The Application Environment and relaunching QuarkXPress for every test. A faster method to find out exactly which one is causing the problem is called a binary search (see sidebar). Once you’ve located the XTensions software causing the problem, place it and QuarkXPress together in an empty folder and rerun the test. If the problem recurs, that XTensions software is definitely causing the problem. Remove it from your XTensions folder.
Troubleshooting XPress Preferences
QuarkXPress stores user modifiable settings in the XPress Preferences file
(XPress.prf). To test the XPress Preferences file for problems, exit QuarkXPress, drag the XPress.prf file out of the QuarkXPress folder, and relaunch the application. QuarkXPress will create a new preferences file. If your problem no longer occurs, put QuarkXPress and the old preferences file together in an empty folder. Rerun the test. If the problem recurs, the preferences are the culprit. Throw away the corrupt XPress.prf file and revert to your backup copy.
R When you throw your XPress Preferences file away, you will lose all of your customized features: default style sheets, default print styles, any settings made with the Kern/Track Editor, etc. For a full discussion on information kept in an XPress Preferences file, see “Setting Preferences” in Chapter 4, “Customizing QuarkXPress.”
S Tips
Using the binary search method
A binary search is conducted by testing half the variables at a time. First you test half, and then half of that half, and so on, until you’ve narrowed down the search to a single variable.
For example, say you have 100 eggs.
99 are filled with 1 oz of sand, and
1 is filled with .5 oz of gold. How do you locate the gold egg? To use the binary method, simply split the pile of eggs in half and weigh each half.
The half filled with sand will equal exactly 50 oz. The half with the gold egg will be 49.5 oz. Continue halving the pile of eggs that numerically indicates the gold egg. In no time at all, you’ll have your gold egg.
Troubleshooting fonts
QuarkXPress reads many font attributes (like leading values and kerning tables) that other applications do not read. But if a font has damaged or garbled data in one of these areas, QuarkXPress may not launch. To determine if a damaged font is causing the problem remove all the Type 1 fonts from ATM, or all your True Type fonts except system fonts and Arial from the Fonts Control Panel. You must have at least one font left installed for QuarkXPress to launch correctly. If QuarkXPress launches with these fonts disabled, the failure was the result of a damaged font.
To pinpoint the damaged font, you can either conduct a binary search (see sidebar), or you can try printing with the PostScript Error Handler enabled. See “Troubleshooting PostScript fonts” later in this chapter.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 22.7
Technical Notes
The Operating System Environment
If the same problem occurs in several applications, or the variables in the application environment have no effect on the problem, test to see if the operating system is causing the problem. First, shut down any applications or system utilities (such as virus detection programs) running in the background to see if they are the culprit. If the problem persists, try to reproduce the problem by starting Windows 95 in Safe Mode (or Windows NT
4.0 in VGA Mode).
Troubleshooting in Windows Safe Mode
Before starting Windows in Safe Mode, first close all the programs that are running to see if they are causing the difficulties. All opened applications and system utilities have an icon in the task bar. Right-clicking an icon displays a menu which allows you to quickly close the program.
If you are still experiencing problems, restart the computer. During startup, press the F8 key to display a menu with various options for starting Windows 95. From this menu, choose Safe Mode. This will start your computer without network drivers and will run your monitor in VGA
Mode, to eliminate video driver conflicts.
Hard Drive Considerations
If the problems persist even in Windows Safe Mode, then you might need to consider your hard drive. One factor may be low hard drive space. Check to make sure you have adequate hard drive space free on your system. If need be, you can delete any unnecessary or temporary files (*.tmp) and store large, rarely used files somewhere besides your hard drive, perhaps on a file server or auxiliary drive. High fragmenta-
22.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
The Operating System Environment tion levels may also cause problems on your system. Your hard drive becomes fragmented as new files are saved and old files are deleted.
When a file is saved, your system begins saving the data in the first available section it finds on the hard drive. If that section is not large enough to save all the data, then the system continues to the next available section and saves the remainder of the data. The system will continue this process until the entire file is saved. Therefore, one file might be saved in many different sections on your hard drive. Over time, this separation can cause hard drive difficulties. Running a defragmenting utility reorganizes each file’s data so that it is stored together and not scattered in different sections of the hard drive.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 22.9
Technical Notes
S Tips
PostScript
PostScript is a page description language used to communicate information from a computer to a printer or monitor. It describes fonts, items, and pictures, as well as the layout of pages.
The PostScript Environment
You’ve just finished the project. You’ve put in the long hours and are finally ready to print it. Just one problem: When you send the job to your laser printer, a PostScript error prints out instead. Don’t worry —
QuarkXPress can easily locate the problem element.
What is a PostScript error?
A PostScript error is a message from the output device that indicates the document cannot be printed in its current state. A PostScript error has two parts: the error and the offending command. (For example “stackunderflow; offending command: exch.”) In general, knowing the specific error and offending command isn’t necessary to troubleshoot the problem, with one exception: The PostScript error “VMerror” indicates that the document is too memory intensive for the printer to handle. If you are getting a “VMerror,” see “Troubleshooting ‘VMerrors’” later in this chapter.
Determining the cause of a PostScript error
A PostScript error is generally caused by a specific document element such as a picture, font, or item. The QuarkXPress PostScript error handler can automatically show you the element generating the error.
22.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
The PostScript Environment
To enable the PostScript error handler, choose File
& Print; then click the
Options tab. Check Quark PostScript Error Handler. This check box lets your document print normally. If it encounters a problem, the document will stop printing immediately before the error-generating element, but one
more page will print. This page will display a bounding box encompassing the grayed-out problem element. The top of the page will identify whether the error came from a picture box, a text box, a line, etc.
R If you have a complex item that contains more than one element
(such as a Bézier picture box that consists of a box, a frame, a background color, a picture, and a clipping path), you’ll need to experiment a bit to pinpoint the exact difficulty.
S Tips
Suppressing all graphics
If you want to suppress all of the graphics in your document, choose
File
& Print; then click the Options tab. Choose Rough from the Output drop-down list and click Print.
Troubleshooting pictures
To find out if a selected picture is causing the PostScript error, you can suppress that picture’s printout. If the page prints successfully, the picture you suppressed is most likely damaged and causing the PostScript error. Suppress picture printout using:
• Item menu: Select a picture and choose Item
& Modify; then click the
Picture tab. Check Suppress Picture Printout and click OK.
• Utilities menu: Choose Utilities
& Usage; then click the Pictures tab.
To suppress picture printout, click the check mark in the Print column next to the picture’s name to remove it. Then click OK.
Repairing a damaged picture file
The best option for repairing a damaged picture file is usually to open the picture in its original application and resave it. Consult the documentation for the application that created the picture for information on resaving pictures.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 22.11
Technical Notes
Common PostScript errors
Some PostScript errors indicate a specific problem with a picture. Knowing the specific error can direct you to the appropriate solution. Common errors that appear on-screen and their corresponding solutions are listed below.
• “limitcheck; offending command: clip” This error is usually caused by an
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) picture file with an embedded clipping path. Open the EPS in the program that created it and simplify or increase the flatness of the path. If you have created a QuarkXPress clipping path using the controls in the Clipping tab (Item menu), you will also want to increase the Smoothness of the clipping path and/or manually reduce its number of points.
• “limitcheck; offending command: stroke or fill” This error is usually caused by a complex EPS. Open the EPS in its source application and simplify it. Several programs allow you to increase the flatness value of the EPS or split long paths.
• “limitcheck; offending command: image or colorimage” This error is generally caused by a Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) picture file. Decrease the lpi (lines per inch) using the Frequency drop-down list (File
&
& Output tab) or decrease the TIFF’s dpi (dots per inch) in either its source application or using the Resolution drop-down list. Also make sure you uncheck Full Resolution TIFF Output (File
& Print &
Options tab).
Troubleshooting PostScript fonts
A PostScript error can be the result of a damaged or improperly made font. If you’re printing a document that contains damaged fonts and the
Quark PostScript Error Handler is checked in the Print dialog box, the text will cease printing immediately before the problem font. Once you determine the problem font, you may need to reinstall it.
22.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
The PostScript Environment
Troubleshooting page items
Often, PostScript item errors occur because of Bézier items; specifically,
Bézier items with too many points.
If your PostScript error occurred on a Bézier item (or a clipping path), check to see if it’s a complex Bézier item — one with a large number of points. Complex paths can cause the PostScript error “limitcheck; offending command: clip.” to occur. If you’re receiving this error, you can manually reduce the number of points that make up the item (or if it’s a clipping path, you can try to reduce the path’s complexity by increasing its Smoothness in the Clipping tab). If that doesn’t work, delete the item and redraw it using fewer points.
If the document does not contain any Bézier items (or simplifying them doesn’t get rid of the error), use a thumbnail drag to drag the error-causing page to a new document and print the page again. (See “Copying Items and Pages Between Documents” in Chapter 10, “Document Layout.”)
Dragging a page to a new document causes all the items to be recreated, which may make it print without error.
If you suspect that the problem is a faulty frame or box, you can choose
Item
& Modify; then click the Box tab. Check Suppress Printout and click OK. If the page prints, the box you suppressed is most likely damaged and causing the PostScript error.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 22.13
Technical Notes
Troubleshooting “VMerrors”
Every PostScript output device has a built-in computer that translates
PostScript to the actual printed page. The processor in a printer relies on its own internal Random Access Memory (RAM) to complete the translation. Different PostScript printers have different amounts of installed
RAM. If the printer does not have enough RAM to image the page, a
“VMerror” occurs. Generally, the only solution to a “VMerror” is to simplify the page, reduce the size of media (paper or film), or send the document to an output device with more memory.
22.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
23
QuarkXPress
Passport Edition
QuarkXPress Passport Terms
Managing Language Files
Specifying the Program Language
Assigning Languages to Paragraphs
Checking Spelling
Hyphenation Methods
Saving Documents with Multiple Languages
23.7
23.9
23.11
23.3
23.4
23.5
23.6
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
23
QuarkXPress
Passport Edition
If you purchased QuarkXPress Passport ™ , the international version of QuarkXPress, use this chapter to learn about the special multilingual features
QuarkXPress Passport offers.
Creating documents for international publishing and marketing often involves the use of different languages in the same document, language-specific spell checking, and the ability to hyphenate different languages correctly. QuarkXPress Passport provides multilingual support for hyphenating, spell checking, and the program language used in menus and dialog boxes.
QuarkXPress Passport Terms
QuarkXPress Passport Terms
In QuarkXPress Passport, specific terms are used to describe various functions, controls, commands, and concepts. The following terms will help you become more familiar with the power and ease of use of
QuarkXPress Passport.
Installed Language
Installed Language refers to any language available in QuarkXPress
Passport. You make a language available by placing the associated language dictionary/language file (like Diccionario/Español) in the
QuarkXPress Passport folder before launching the application.
Paragraph Language
Paragraph Language refers to a language setting applied to specific paragraphs using the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box
(Style
& Formats) or using a paragraph attribute defined in a style sheet.
Program Language
Program Language refers to the language used in QuarkXPress Passport menus and dialog boxes. You can change the program language at any time using the Program Language dialog box (Edit
& Program Language).
System Language
System Language refers to the language of the Microsoft Windows software.
QuarkXPress Passport will run under the system of any supported language.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 23.3
QuarkXPress Passport Edition
S Tips
Unused languages
You might want to create a folder in your QuarkXPress Passport folder called “Unused Languages” for temporary storage of language files. This allows easy access for installing and removing languages.
Setting the default language
You can preset the default paragraph language for a specific document or for all new documents by changing the language of the Normal paragraph style. If a document is open when Normal is changed, the change will be document specific. If no documents are open, it will be a global change for all new documents.
Managing Language Files
With QuarkXPress Passport, you can choose which languages you want to use in your documents. Any language installed can be used to hyphenate and spell check documents.
Installing a language
You can install a language in your QuarkXPress Passport folder in one of two ways:
• When first installing QuarkXPress Passport, select the languages that you want installed. Only selected languages are installed.
• Insert the QuarkXPress Passport CD–ROM and copy the dictionary/language files for the selected languages into your
QuarkXPress Passport folder.
Removing a language
If you no longer want to use a language, remove that language from your QuarkXPress Passport folder. Drag the dictionary/language files and associated help files out of the QuarkXPress Passport folder or into a subfolder within your QuarkXPress Passport folder.
23.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Specifying the Program Language
Specifying the Program Language
When using QuarkXPress Passport, you can specify which language is displayed in menus, dialog boxes, and palettes. This lets you work in the language you are most familiar with. You can choose the Program Language from any of the installed languages. To specify the program language, c hoose
Edit
& Program Language and choose a language from the list. Your menus, dialog boxes, and palettes will change to the chosen language.
S Tips
Changing program languages
The program language has no effect on the hyphenation or spell checking of individual paragraphs. Changing the program language does not change the language of the paragraph you are editing, or interrupt your work flow. It only changes the language of the menus and dialog boxes. The program language selected when you exit QuarkXPress
Passport is used automatically the next time you launch the application.
Choosing program languages
If none of the language files are in the QuarkXPress Passport folder, the
Program Language menu option will not display, and English will be the language used.
Change the language of the interface from the Program Language submenu (Edit menu).
Words and menus will display in the chosen language (French in this example).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 23.5
QuarkXPress Passport Edition
S Tips
Keyboard commands
QuarkXPress Passport keyboard commands remain in effect no matter which program language is displayed. For example,
CTRL
+
O will always open a document. The language of the keyboard commands is based on the keyboard setting in the
Windows Keyboard control panel when QuarkXPress Passport is launched.
Assigning Languages to Paragraphs
The paragraph language attribute determines which hyphenation rules are used and which dictionary is used for spell checking. When automatic hyphenation is enabled for a range of paragraphs that have different paragraph languages assigned to them, each paragraph is hyphenated using the appropriate hyphenation rules and hyphenation exceptions for that language. When you check the spelling of a story or document that contains paragraphs with different languages, each paragraph is checked using the assigned paragraph language dictionary. To specify the paragraph language for selected paragraphs:
1 Choose Style
& Formats (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
F
).
Specify a language for selected paragraphs from the Language drop-down list in the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style
&Formats).
2 Choose a language for hyphenating and spell checking selected paragraphs from the Language drop-down list. Click OK.
23.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Checking Spelling
Checking Spelling
Checking for spelling errors in documents with multiple languages is not an easy task. However, with the multiple language dictionaries of QuarkXPress
Passport, translators can confirm their spelling with greater accuracy.
Spell checking multilingual documents
For correct spell checking in multilingual documents, you have to assign a paragraph language to the text. See “Assigning Languages to Paragraphs” earlier in this chapter. When QuarkXPress Passport runs a spell check, it checks which paragraph language is applied, and then accesses the corresponding dictionary. To spell check an active multilingual selection:
1 Choose Utilities
& Check Spelling; then choose Word (
CTRL + W ), Story
( CTRL + ALT + W ), or Document ( CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + W ) from the submenu.
2 The Word Count dialog box displays. Click OK. If any words are incorrect, the Check Story or Check Document dialog box displays.
S Tips
Translating text in QuarkXPress Passport
If you are translating a QuarkXPress document, QuarkXPress Passport lets you enter the translated version into the source document while maintaining the formatting, layout, and graphics present in the source document.
QuarkXPress Passport provides correct hyphenation and spell checking of text in all installed languages.
Use the Check Spelling command (Utilities menu) to spell check multilingual documents.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 23.7
QuarkXPress Passport Edition
S Tips
Spell checking and style sheets
When you are creating a multilingual document, create a paragraph style sheet with the appropriate paragraph language for each language in the document. Apply each paragraph style sheet to the appropriate paragraphs. The text will hyphenate in the language specified in the paragraph style sheet, and the spell checker will use the correct language dictionary automatically.
3 Select and correct words as they display using the controls in the dialog box. See “Checking Spelling” in Chapter 11, “Text Basics.” When you are finished, click Done.
Creating auxiliary dictionaries
An auxiliary dictionary is a custom spelling dictionary that contains words specific to your work. Auxiliary dictionaries are not languagespecific; they can contain words in as many languages as you want.
You can create auxiliary dictionaries for specific documents, or create a default auxiliary dictionary that will be used with each new document
(Utilities
& Auxiliary Dictionary). See “Using Auxiliary Dictionaries” in Chapter 11, “Text Basics.”
23.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Hyphenation Methods
Hyphenation Methods
QuarkXPress Passport will hyphenate your documents according to the method you choose in the Hyphenation Method preferences (Edit
&
Preferences
& Paragraph tab). Methods will vary depending on the language, and the preferences chosen for that language. When you set the paragraph language for a paragraph, it will hyphenate according to the settings in this dialog box.
Setting document preferences for hyphenation
Hyphenation standards vary from language to language. QuarkXPress
Passport is programmed to use the rules for the applied language to hyphenate correctly. To choose a Hyphenation Method for a language:
1 Choose Edit
& Preferences & Document; then click the Paragraph tab ( CTRL + ALT + Y ).
S Tips
Hyphenation for languages
Some languages, particularly those in the supplements, have hyphenation
XTensions. When hyphenation
XTensions software is installed, its name will appear in the Hyphenation
Method menu for the appropriate language. Languages with alternate
XTensions include Finnish, Norwegian,
Portuguese, and Swedish.
Installing hyphenation XTensions
Use the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to install any available hyphenation XTensions for the languages you are using with
QuarkXPress Passport.
Specify hyphenation methods for the languages used in a document in the Paragraph tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit Menu).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 23.9
QuarkXPress Passport Edition
S Tips
Using suggested hyphenation
The Suggested Hyphenation dialog box (Utilities menu) displays the recommended hyphenation for a word based on the hyphenation method specified for the paragraph and the hyphenation exceptions for the paragraph’s language.
2 In the Hyphenation area, click to select a language in the Language column. Choose a hyphenation method for that language from the
Method drop-down list.
The methods available depend on the language selected. Other options may become available if language-specific hyphenation
XTensions are running.
3 Click OK. For more information on setting preferences, see “Controlling Hyphenation and Justification” in Chapter 12, “Typography.”
Specifying hyphenation exceptions
With QuarkXPress Passport, you can create language-specific lists of hyphenation exceptions. The Hyphenation Exceptions dialog box
(Utilities menu) has a Language drop-down list that lets you specify which language a hyphenation exception applies to. When a paragraph is automatically hyphenated, QuarkXPress Passport checks the list of hyphenation exceptions for the appropriate paragraph language. See “Controlling Hyphenation and Justification” in Chapter 12, “Typography.”
Use the Language drop-down list in the QuarkXPress Passport Hyphenation Exceptions dialog box (Utilities menu) to specify the language for a hyphenation exception.
23.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Saving Documents with Multiple Languages
Saving Documents with Multiple Languages
QuarkXPress Passport lets you save documents in either single language or multiple language format. The beauty of QuarkXPress Passport is that you can save and open any QuarkXPress document in any supported language, given the operating system constraints. You can open either single language or multiple language documents. However, you cannot open a multiple language QuarkXPress Passport document in a single language version of QuarkXPress. To save a document with QuarkXPress Passport:
1 Choose File
& Save as (
CTRL
+
ALT
+
S
).
S Tips
Saving as a single language
If you save a QuarkXPress Passport document in Single Language format, Version 3.3, the document can be opened with any single language version of QuarkXPress. For example, if you save a French document in Sin-
gle Language format, Version 3.3, you can open the document with the
French QuarkXPress 3.3 or later.
Save a new document or save a copy of the active document with a new name using the Save
as dialog box (File menu).
2 Use the Save as dialog box controls to specify a location for the new document file.
3 Enter a name for the document in the File name field. QuarkXPress
Passport automatically selects the appropriate extension for Documents
(*.qxd) in the Save as type field.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 23.11
QuarkXPress Passport Edition
S Tips
Saving in a multiple language format
Documents saved in a multiple language format can only be opened with QuarkXPress Passport.
Saving in single language format
If you change the language applied to paragraphs to save a multiple language document as a single language document, the text will hyphenate according to different rules and may reflow.
4 Choose a QuarkXPress file format version from the Version dropdown list. QuarkXPress 4.x can open documents saved in either the version 3.3x or 4.x formats. Earlier versions of QuarkXPress are unable to open documents saved in version 4.x formats. Items based on features exclusive to version 4.0 and later will be stripped from documents saved in 3.3x format
5 Choose Multiple Languages from the Format drop-down list to save a document in a multiple language format. A multiple language format means more than one paragraph language can be applied in the document.
Choose Single Language from the Format drop-down list to save a document in a single language format, which can be opened by single language versions of QuarkXPress or by QuarkXPress Passport.
6 If you choose Single Language and more than one language is applied to document paragraphs or specified in paragraph style sheets, a warning is displayed listing the two most frequently applied languages.
To change the applied languages and convert the document to a single language format, click Change Languages. A warning is displayed asking which paragraph language to apply to all paragraphs and style sheets. Choose a language from the Language drop-down list and click Save to save the document in the single language format. The language chosen from the Language drop-down list will be applied to all document paragraphs and paragraph style sheets.
23.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Saving Documents with Multiple Languages
Choose a single language from the Language drop-down list to change the language format for all languages in a document saved as a single language file.
7 Click Save or press the ENTER key to save the document.
R With QuarkXPress, you can open a QuarkXPress Passport document saved in a single language format. However, if the document is not opened with the same language the document was saved in, it will not hyphenate properly. For instance, if you save a QuarkXPress
Passport document in a single language French format, and open it with German QuarkXPress, the document will not have any automatic hyphenation applied, and the text could reflow.
S Tips
Using libraries
QuarkXPress Passport can use libraries created with single language versions of QuarkXPress.
However, libraries created with
QuarkXPress Passport cannot be used with single language versions.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 23.13
Appendices
24
Error Messages 24.3
XPress Tags 24.27
Crossplatform Issues 24.40
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Appendices
24
Error Messages
Error Messages
A warning alerts you of a potential problem and sometimes offers a solution. While you are working, you will encounter both Windows and
QuarkXPress warnings. This appendix provides a list of common warnings organized numerically. If the text of the warning is not self-explanatory, we offer an explanation and solution. If you decide to contact Quark Technical
Support about a warning, please record the number to expedite assistance.
QuarkXPress Error Messages
The following error messages are generated by QuarkXPress. Many are self-explanatory, but others may require explanation.
1 This version of QuarkXPress is no longer valid. Contact Quark for assistance.
2 QuarkXPress has been damaged. Please contact Quark for assistance.
3 QuarkXPress has been altered. Your system may have infected the program with a virus.
Why did I get this warning? The program detected that it has been changed. A virus can generate this dialog box.
What should I do? Run a virus detection program on your system, then reinstall QuarkXPress.
4 This version of QuarkXPress cannot be run with this system language.
5 Hardware key not found. Please install the correct hardware key and run QuarkXPress again.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.3
Appendices
6 A copy of QuarkXPress with serial #___ is already running on a machine named “___”.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to open QuarkXPress while another copy of the program was running on the network.
What should I do? QuarkXPress owners without a site license agreement can use only one copy of the program at a time. Contact Quark for information about obtaining a site license if you want to run multiple copies of the program simultaneously.
7 Too many copies of QuarkXPress with serial #___ are already running.
8 You are not authorized to use this program.
10 QuarkXPress requires Windows 95 or greater.
11 The ____ driver must be version ____ or greater.
Why did I get this warning? You tried using an old version of a printing driver.
What should I do? Install a version of the printing driver that is at least as recent as the version indicated in the warning.
12 Cannot access the file “XPress Preferences”.
Why did I get this warning? (1) You tried running QuarkXPress on a machine without enough memory. (2) The disk containing the
XPress Preferences file is full, damaged, or locked.
What should I do? (1) Install additional memory. (2) Check the disk containing the XPress Preferences file.
24.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages
13 Fatal error accessing QuarkXPress temporary file (#___).
What should I do? Click OK to close QuarkXPress without saving changes to the active document. Delete the XPress Temp file.
15 Insufficient disk space to perform this operation. Try saving your document first.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to perform an operation that requires more hard disk space than is available.
What should I do? Save the document and try to perform the operation again. If you still generate the warning, you need to create space on your hard disk to perform the operation.
16 Insufficient disk space to save your changes.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to save a document that requires more space than is available on the disk to which you are trying to save.
What should I do? Try saving the document elsewhere or create space on your disk.
17 This document cannot be opened by this version of QuarkXPress.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to open a document that is not compatible with the version of QuarkXPress running. The document was probably last saved from a newer version of QuarkXPress, or the document was last saved as a multilingual document in
QuarkXPress Passport Edition.
What should I do? Try to open the document with the version of
QuarkXPress in which the document was last saved.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.5
Appendices
18 _____ uses fonts not installed in your system.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to open a document that uses fonts that are not installed.
What should I do? You can use the Usage dialog box (Utilities
&
Usage
& Fonts tab) to replace the missing fonts with fonts that are installed, or you can install the missing fonts and reopen the document.
19 ____ uses fonts not installed in your system. Possibly the following:
20 This document was built with other versions of some fonts or using
QuarkXPress 3.1 for Macintosh (or earlier) text runaround. It will be reflowed using this system’s fonts and text runaround.
Why did I get this warning? (1) You opened a document that was last saved with a different version of some fonts than those in the current system. (2) The document contains a damaged font (this is often the case if the message appears when you change views).
What should I do? (1) Depending on the differences between the system’s fonts and those in use when the document was last saved, reflow may occur when you are working on the document. Save the document to use the fonts in the current system. Or to ensure that reflow doesn’t occur, exit the program without saving changes, install the fonts that were in use when the document was last saved, then reopen the document. (2) Reinstall the damaged font; if this does not solve the problem contact the font vendor.
21 This is an old document. It must be reflowed to ensure compatibility with this version of QuarkXPress.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to open a document that was created in an older version of QuarkXPress.
What should I do? You can open and save the document using the current version of QuarkXPress. If you do, you will not be able to
24.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages open it in earlier versions. Save the document with a different name to preserve the original version.
22 Hyphenation exceptions, kerning tables, or tracking information in
“XPress Preferences” have changed. Document may be reflowed.
Why did I get this warning? (1) You are opening a document that was created in an older version of QuarkXPress (these prior versions of the software did not save the XPress Preferences with the document). The document has different specifications than the current XPress Preferences file. (2) You are opening a library with different specifications than the current XPress Preferences file. Since libraries cannot trigger the Nonmatching Preferences warning, you get this warning.
What should I do? (1 and 2) You can save the document or library with the current version of the XPress Preferences file. If you want to use the original version, you can exit the program, place the original version of the XPress Preferences file in the QuarkXPress program folder, remove the current version, and then reopen the document or library.
23 A document cannot be longer than 2,000 pages.
24 You cannot delete all pages in a document.
25 Improper number or measurement.
Why did I get this warning? (1) You tried to enter a value that is significantly out of range for the current measurement system (for example, you entered 500 while inches were specified). (2) You tried to enter invalid characters in a field (for example, you entered a measurement system abbreviation incorrectly).
What should I do? (1 and 2) You can press
CTRL
+
Z to revert the value, enter a different value, or enter a different measurement system.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.7
Appendices
26 Number must be between ___ and ___.
27 Value must be between ___ and ___.
28 Value must be at least ___.
29 You cannot move a page to a document with a smaller page size.
30 You cannot move a page with an applied facing page master to a single-sided document.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to copy a page based on a facing-page master into a nonfacing page document. The facing-page master that would be brought along with the copied page cannot exist in a single-sided document.
What should I do? You can make the target document (the one into which you are trying to move the page) a facing-page document by checking Facing Pages in the Document Setup dialog box (File
&
Document Setup). You can also delete the facing-page master page upon which the page you want to copy is based.
31 This would exceed the maximum spread width of 48 inches.
32 This page size would cause items on page ___ to be positioned off the pasteboard.
33 This page size would cause items on master page ___ to be positioned off the pasteboard.
34 The item is too big to fit in this document.
35 The document is too small to hold the items on the Clipboard.
36 The active box is too small to hold the items on the Clipboard.
24.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages
37 The items currently on the Clipboard cannot be anchored in text.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to anchor a group or text path to text.
What should I do? Make sure you are trying to anchor a single text box, picture box, or line.
38 The item cannot be positioned off the pasteboard.
39 The item must remain totally within its constraining box.
40 The automatic text box on a master page cannot contain text.
41 Margin guides cannot overlap.
42 These columns are too narrow.
Why did I get this warning? (1) The combination of page size and margins in the New Document dialog box (File
& New &
Document) would result in columns that are less than one point wide. (2) The margins and column guides specified in the Master
Guides dialog box (Page
& Master Guides) would result in columns that are less than one point wide. (3) The combination of text box width, number of columns, and gutter width specified in the Mea-
surements palette or the Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item
&
Modify) would result in columns that are less than one point wide.
What should I do? Make sure the columns are specified to be at least one point wide.
43 This box is too narrow.
Why did I get this warning? The combination of the box width, the number of columns, and the text inset create a text box with a text area less than one point.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.9
Appendices
What should I do? Use the controls in the Box and Text tabs of the
Modify dialog box (Item
& Modify) to adjust the text area so it is at least one point wide.
44 This box must completely contain its constrained items.
Why did I get this warning? If you constrain a group (Item
&
Constrain), the largest box becomes the container box. The container box must completely contain the items within it. If you get this warning, you tried to make the containing box smaller than its items or you tried to make an item larger than the containing box.
What should I do? Do not attempt to make the containing box smaller than its items or an item larger than the containing box. Or, uncheck Constrain (Item
& Constrain) for the group.
45 A text box in this group or selection has links that cannot be duplicated.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to copy a group or selection that includes some (but not all) of the boxes in a text chain.
What should I do? Add all the boxes in the text chain to the group or selection, or unlink the boxes.
46 An anchored box cannot contain an anchored box.
47 You cannot link to an anchored text box.
48 You cannot link a text box containing text to another text box or chain containing text.
Why did I get this warning? A text box can be part of only one text chain.
What should I do? You can Cut (Edit menu) the text from the second box, link the boxes, then Paste (Edit menu) the text back in.
24.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages
49 You cannot link text boxes across master pages or onto the pasteboard.
Why did I get this warning? (1) You have links that connect a text box on a left-facing master page with a text box on a right-facing master page. Text must flow from a right-facing page to a left-facing page. (2) You have links that connect a text box on a master page with a text box that is completely on the pasteboard.
What should I do? (1) Break the links between the text boxes or move all linked boxes onto one page. (2) Break the links between the text boxes or move the linked boxes onto a master page.
50 You cannot group items across master pages or onto the pasteboard.
Why did I get this warning? (1) You tried to create a group that contains items on both pages of a facing-page master page. (2) You tried to create a group that contains items both on a master page and completely on the pasteboard.
What should I do? (1 and 2) Ungroup the items or move all grouped items onto one master page.
51 A page prefix cannot contain more than four characters.
52 The specified page range cannot be moved there.
Why did I get this warning? (1) You tried to move a page next to itself. (2) You tried to move a range of pages within or next to one of the pages in the range. For example, you tried to move pages 3–5 after page 4.
What should I do? (1) Make sure you do not attempt to place a page next to itself. (2) Make sure you do not attempt to move a range of pages within or next to a page in the range.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.11
Appendices
53 You cannot make that many duplicates using these offsets.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to duplicate items using the
Step and Repeat dialog box (Item
& Step and Repeat) using values that would place copied items outside their constraining box or off the current page’s pasteboard.
What should I do? Reduce the number in the Repeat Count field, change the offset values so that all copies remain within the current page’s pasteboard, or move the original.
54 You cannot make the duplicate using current offsets.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to duplicate an item using offset values that would place the copy outside the original’s constraining box or off the current page’s pasteboard.
What should I do? Choose Step and Repeat (Item menu). Specify a
Repeat Count of 1 and specify offsets that will place the duplicate copy within the constraining box or the pasteboard. The Offset values become the default values for the Duplicate command (Item menu).
55 Cannot find the auxiliary dictionary.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to spell check a document that is associated with a missing auxiliary dictionary. The dictionary has either been moved or deleted.
What should I do? Use the Auxiliary Dictionary command (Utilities menu) to locate and reopen the auxiliary dictionary or click Close to disassociate the dictionary from the document.
56 The auxiliary dictionary is damaged.
Why did I get this warning? The auxiliary dictionary that is open for a document on which you tried to run a spelling check has been corrupted.
24.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages
What should I do? Import the auxiliary dictionary into a document as a text file, then delete the corrupted auxiliary dictionary. Create a new
(and therefore empty) auxiliary dictionary. Use either the Story or
Document commands from the Check Spelling submenu (Utilities menu) to check the spelling of the text file and to add the words to the new dictionary.
57 The auxiliary dictionary is too large to edit.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to edit an auxiliary dictionary
(Utilities
& Edit Auxiliary) that is too large to edit via the Edit
Auxiliary dialog box.
What should I do? You cannot edit an auxiliary dictionary that is too large. However, you can still add words to the dictionary via the Keep button in the Check Word, Check Story, or Check
Document/Masters dialog boxes (Utilities
& Check Spelling).
58 The auxiliary dictionary is full.
Why did I get this warning? You added all the words possible using the Edit Auxiliary dialog box (Utilities
& Edit Auxiliary).
What should I do? You can add more words by clicking the Keep button in the Check Word, Check Story, or Check Document/
Masters dialog boxes (Utilities
& Check Spelling).
59 You cannot enter the wild card character in the “Change To” field.
60 The minimum view scale cannot exceed the maximum.
61 This font does not exist.
Why did I get this warning? You entered the name of a font that is not available on your system. This is often the result of a typographic error in entering the font name.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.13
Appendices
What should I do? Enter a valid font name or install the font, then reopen the document.
62 This page does not exist.
Why did I get this warning? You specified a page number in a field for a page that does not exist.
What should I do? Make sure you have specified a valid page number, including any prefix, or use the absolute page sequence number.
(Precede the absolute page number with a plus + sign.)
63 Invalid page range.
Why did I get this warning? You entered an invalid page range in the Delete Pages dialog box (Page
& Delete) or the Move Pages dialog box (Page
& Move).
What should I do? Make sure you entered a valid page range. The pages must exist and you must enter the number of the first page in the left field and the number of the last page in the right field.
64 Cannot open the printer.
Why did I get this warning? (1) There is not enough memory available to open the printer. (2) Too many files are open. (3) There is no printer installed.
What should I do? (1) Close applications and windows that you are not using. (2) Use the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to close unused XTensions, then relaunch QuarkXPress. (3) Select a default printer from the Printers Control Panel.
65 The frame is too large for this box, or the box is too small.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to place a frame on the inside of a box that is too large for the box.
24.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages
What should I do? Make the box bigger; specify a smaller frame width; or place the frame on the outside of the box by choosing
Outside from the Framing drop-down list in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences &
Document).
66 The frame thickness would put this item off the pasteboard.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to place a frame on a box that would place part of the frame outside the document’s pasteboard.
What should I do? Specify a smaller frame width; place the frame on the inside of the box by choosing Inside from the Framing drop-down list in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document); or reposition the box in relation to the edge of the pasteboard to allow space for the new frame.
67 The frame thickness would put this item outside its constraining box.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to place a frame on a constrained box that would place part of the constrained box outside its constraining box.
What should I do? Specify a smaller frame width; place the frame on the inside of the box by choosing Inside from the Framing dropdown list in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box (Edit
& Preferences & Document); reposition the constrained box within the constraining box to allow space for the frame; or enlarge the constraining box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.15
Appendices
69 Cannot read a TIFF file with this format (#___,___).
Why did I get this warning? You tried to import a TIFF file in a format that QuarkXPress cannot read.
What should I do? Try opening the TIFF file in another application and save it in a format that QuarkXPress can read. You can also rescan the original image and save it in a format that QuarkXPress can read, then import the picture.
70 Bad file format.
Why did I get this warning? (1) You used the Get Picture command
(File menu) to import a picture file that QuarkXPress can’t read. (2)
You used the Open command (File menu) to open a document that is corrupted. (3) You tried to use one of the Check Spelling (Utilities menu) commands and the XPress Dictionary file is corrupt.
What should I do? (1) Use a file format that QuarkXPress can import. (2) You cannot open a corrupt document. (3) Replace the corrupt XPress Dictionary file from the QuarkXPress CD–ROM.
71 This color name is already in use. Please use a different name.
72 The maximum number of colors has been reached. Not all colors could be appended.
73 This style sheet name is already in use. Please use a different name.
74 The maximum number of style sheets has been reached. Not all style sheets could be appended.
75 This keyboard equivalent is already used by another style sheet.
Please use a different equivalent.
76 This H&J name is already in use. Please use a different name.
77 The maximum number of H&Js has been reached. Not all H&Js could be appended.
24.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages
78 Line must be at least ___ long.
81 This shape contains too many points.
82 This shape contains too few points.
83 Signature contains an invalid page name.
Why did I get this warning? You are using XTensions software that lets you print signatures; the XTensions software triggered the warning.
What should I do? Consult the documentation resources provided with the XTensions software.
84 You cannot run QuarkXPress on a read-only disk or in a read-only folder.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to open QuarkXPress from a volume that is locked or to which your access privileges are restricted.
What should I do? Unlock the disk, update your privileges, or move
QuarkXPress to another disk.
85 Thumbnails view is not available for master pages.
86 This version of QuarkXPress cannot be used with this keyboard.
Why did I get this warning? The keyboard on your computer was designed for a language other than the language supported by this version of QuarkXPress.
What should I do? Turn off your computer and install a different keyboard; check to make sure all settings in the Keyboard Control
Panel are correct; or run a different version of QuarkXPress with this keyboard.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.17
Appendices
87 This version of “XPress Preferences” is incompatible with this version of QuarkXPress.
Why did I get this warning? The XPress Preferences file in your
QuarkXPress folder was created with a more recent version of
QuarkXPress.
What should I do? Remove the XPress Preferences file from your
QuarkXPress folder. You can either place your original XPress Preferences file in the QuarkXPress folder, or allow QuarkXPress to create a new file the next time you launch the application.
88 This document was created with a QuarkXTension that is no longer available. It may be reflowed.
Why did I get this warning? Text flow in this document may be dependent on XTensions software that was loaded when the document was created. That XTensions software is not currently loaded.
What should I do? Use the XTensions Manager dialog box
(Utilities
& XTensions Manager) to enable the XTensions software, or determine why it is not loading.
89 This library was created on a different platform. It cannot be read by
QuarkXPress on this platform.
Why did I get this warning? Library files created in QuarkXPress for
Mac OS cannot be opened in QuarkXPress for Windows.
90 This document was created by a more recent version of QuarkXPress.
Text will be reflowed according to the older version.
Why did I get this warning? Text flow in this document was established by a newer version of QuarkXPress. The newer text flow method is not available in this version.
What should I do? Upgrading your version of QuarkXPress will provide you with newer text flow methods.
24.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages
91 This document contains paragraphs or style sheets that require ___ hyphenation.
Why did I get this warning? The document contains paragraphs or style sheets that were hyphenated according to a Language File not present in your QuarkXPress folder.
What should I do? Be sure the Language File for the particular language is present in your QuarkXPress folder. If you move the dictionary to the QuarkXPress folder, you need to exit and relaunch QuarkXPress.
92 Version ___ of “___” hyphenation is not available. A different version will be used.
Why did I get this warning? The Language File used to hyphenate paragraphs within this document is a different version than the
Language File in your QuarkXPress folder.
What should I do? Remove the appropriate Language File from your
QuarkXPress folder and replace it with the desired version. If you have a newer Language File, you may want to reflow the document.
93 Document requires the QuarkXTension for “___” hyphenation.
Standard hyphenation will be used.
Why did I get this warning? Hyphenation in this document is dependent on a QuarkXTension that was present when the document was created.
What should I do? Use the XTensions Manager dialog box
(Utilities
& XTensions Manager) to enable the XTensions software, or determine why it is not loading.
94 “___” not found.
Why did I get this warning? You tried to spell check the document, and the specified auxiliary dictionary could not be found.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.19
Appendices
What should I do? Choose Utilities
& Auxiliary Dictionary to locate the specified Auxiliary Dictionary. If you do not want to use an auxiliary dictionary, click the Close button.
95 The maximum number of documents and libraries are already open.
102 This document cannot be opened because the “___” QuarkXTension is not present.
Why did I get this warning? The document was created or modified using this XTensions software. You cannot open the document without this XTensions software.
What should I do? Use the XTensions Manager dialog box
(Utilities
& XTensions Manager) to enable the XTensions software, or determine why it is not loading.
103 This document does not contain any ___.
Why did I get this warning? You attempted to append items that do not exist in the selected document — for example, you tried to append dashes and stripes or lists from a 3.32 document.
What should I do? Use the Append dialog box (File menu) to view the contents of selected documents and selectively append items.
105 RTF file specifies unknown font name ___. ___ will be used instead.
106 The RTF reader encountered an error.
107 An error occurred during PICT file conversion.
108 The path name “___” specified in the Windows Registry is invalid.
Using default path name “___”.
109 Printer does not support graphics.
110 Unable to read picture ___.
24.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages
111 The QuarkXTension “___” is incompatible with this version of
Windows.
112 Error reading OLE object.
113 No Default Printer. Please use Control Panel to install and select a default printer.
114 Error updating OLE object ___.
115 Some linked files were unavailable and could not be updated.
116 Unable to access network.
119 The user registration information has been damaged and cannot be read.
Why did I get this warning? You have tried to access the user registration information, and it is missing or damaged.
What should I do? Reinstall QuarkXPress, entering the proper user registration information when prompted.
120 Unable to initialize this disk.
121 This disk is not blank.
Why did I get this warning? The User Registration Disk already contains information. QuarkXPress will only write User Registration
Information to a blank disk.
What should I do? Make sure that the disk is completely empty by placing all items in the Recycle Bin and choosing File
&
Empty Recycle Bin.
122 This is not a valid name for a file or folder.
123 Cannot create folder. The folder may already exist or the disk may be read-only.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.21
Appendices
124 The XTension ___ has been damaged and will be disabled.
Why did I get this warning? This XTensions software is damaged and will not load. It will be placed in the XTension (Disabled) folder of your QuarkXPress folder.
What should I do? Reinstall the XTensions software.
125 Too many copies of ___ with serial number ___ are already running.
Why did I get this warning? You have exceeded the number of copies of QuarkXPress with this serial number allowed by your user license.
What should I do? Contact Quark to purchase additional copies of QuarkXPress.
127 This page size would cause grouped or linked text items on master page ___ to be positioned off the page.
128 This document contains a Preferences setting that enables Ligatures, which are not available in the Windows environment. The document may reflow. This setting will be set to “Off” to prevent reflow if this document is taken back to the Macintosh.
131 The file you drag-and-dropped is not a recognized picture type.
132 You must have a picture or text box active in the document before drag-and-dropping a file.
133 You must have a box active in an open document to drag-and-drop a file.
134 The backup hardware key has expired.
136 This document was created without the QuarkXTensions software for “___” hyphenation, but it is now present.
Why did I get this warning? A currently loaded XTensions software is providing new hyphenation methods for this document.
24.22
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages
What should I do? If you do not want the new hyphenation applied to this document, disable the XTensions software (Utilities
&
XTensions Manager) while working on this document.
137 Document requires the QuarkXTensions software for “___” hyphenation.
Why did I get this warning? Hyphenation for this document was established with the specified XTensions software loaded. This
XTensions software is required to maintain the same hyphenation.
What should I do? Use the XTensions Manager dialog box
(Utilities
& XTensions Manager) to enable the XTensions software, or determine why it is not loading.
138 The disk file for the book “___” could not be accessed. The file may be in use by somebody else.
139 The maximum ___ books are already open.
140 This book cannot be opened. It may be read-only, in a read-only folder, or on a read-only disk.
141 This book cannot be opened because the data in the file is damaged.
142 The disk file for the Book “___” cannot be found.
143 Chapter “___” already exists in this Book. All chapter names must be unique.
144 The chapter “___” cannot be opened.
145 No more chapters can be added to this Book.
146 This document has a Section Prefix that conflicts with a Page
Range Separator.
Why did I get this warning? When printing a range of pages, range separators and section starts must be different characters.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.23
Appendices
What should I do? Change your print range separators by clicking the Range Separators button in the File
& Print dialog box.
147 Declared range separators are the same character.
Why did I get this warning? Range Separators for Continuous and Noncontinuous pages must be different characters.
What should I do? Enter a unique character in either field.
148 This page range is invalid.
149 Invalid character “___”.
150 Please specify a name.
151 This ___ name is already in use. Please use a different name.
152 The maximum number of ___ has been reached. Not all ___ could be appended.
153 You cannot use this box merge command with items that have
100% overlap.
Why did I get this warning? The selected Merge command requires less than 100% overlap of the selected objects.
What should I do? Choose a different Merge command, or reposition the items so that there is less than 100% overlap.
154 You can only convert one line of text to a box at a time.
Why did I get this warning? You have selected more than one line of text to convert to a box.
What should I do? Perform separate Text to Box operations for each line of text, or place all of the desired text on one line before choosing Style
& Text to Box.
24.24
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages
155 All the text to be converted to a box must be in the same text box.
Why did I get this warning? You have selected text that is linked between two or more text boxes.
What should I do? The selected text must be contained in one box before choosing Style
& Text to Box. Resize the text boxes so that the selected text is contained in one box, or select the text in each box individually before choosing Style
& Text to Box.
156 Cannot turn the selected text into a box because of the font(s) used.
Why did I get this warning? Only TrueType or Type 1 PostScript fonts can be converted to boxes.
157 Cannot turn the selected text into a box because ATM is not running, or the font(s) used.
Why did I get this warning? The Text to Box feature (when using
Type 1 PostScript fonts) requires Adobe Type Manager (ATM). Only
TrueType or Type 1 PostScript fonts can be converted to boxes.
What should I do? Make sure ATM is installed properly and enabled.
158 Cannot turn the selected text into a box.
Why did I get this warning? The selected text includes a hiddentext code (possibly deposited by XTensions software) that cannot be converted to an outline.
What should I do? Recreate the text in a new box.
159 Cannot turn the selected text into a box because the text has no outlines.
Why did I get this warning? You selected text that contains no outlines. A row of spaces or tabs, for example, will prompt this message.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.25
Appendices
What should I do? Select characters that contain outlines before choosing Style
& Text to Box.
160 This document does not have anything to append.
161 These print styles cannot be imported because they were exported by a more recent version of QuarkXPress.
Why did I get this warning? The selected document was created or edited by a newer version of QuarkXPress. Some print style features may not be supported in your current version.
What should I do? Upgrading QuarkXPress will provide current print style features.
162 Endpoints are not close enough to join these lines.
163 This document may not display or print correctly because the “___”
QuarkXTension is not present.
164 Printing cannot take place unless all printed chapters are available.
24.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Error Messages
XPress Tags
The industry-standard ASCII file exchange format makes it possible to share text among different computer systems and programs. QuarkXPress can import and save text in the ASCII file format, which lets you exchange text with many different programs. The ASCII format does not support character or paragraph attributes. However, the XPress Tags filter included with QuarkXPress lets you import and export character and paragraph attribute information with ASCII text. When entering text in another program, you can include XPress Tags codes that specify attributes and formats. When you import an ASCII file with embedded XPress Tags codes into QuarkXPress, the program translates the codes and converts them to actual character and paragraphs attributes.
Generating tagged text in another application
To include XPress Tags information in a text file you generate in another application, precede the text with the codes you want. The complete list of XPress Tags codes follows in this section. Save the text you generate in the ASCII file format with the appropriate XPress Tags extension (*.xtg).
If you fail to use this extension, QuarkXPress will not translate the
XPress Tags codes properly.
Generating tagged text in QuarkXPress
To include character and paragraph attribute information as embedded
XPress Tags codes automatically when you save QuarkXPress text as a text file, choose XPress Tags from the Format drop-down list in the
Save Text dialog box (File
& Save Text). The XPress Tags filter must be loaded for XPress Tags to be available in the Format drop-down list.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.27
Appendices
Importing tagged text
To import an ASCII text file that contains embedded XPress Tags codes into a QuarkXPress document, choose Get Text (File menu). To convert
XPress Tags codes into actual character attributes and paragraph formats, check Include Style Sheets in the Get Text dialog box. If the XPress Tags filter is not running, the Include Style Sheets check box is unavailable.
XPress Tags filter number
All files formatted for the XPress Tags filter must have a version tag as the first thing in the file (for example, <V1.5>). The version for
QuarkXPress 3.1 is 1.5; the version for QuarkXPress 3.2–3.3 is 1.7.
Entering XPress Tags
When entering XPress Tags codes, follow these rules:
• An XPress Tags code must begin with a less than character (<) and end with a greater than character (>). For example, the XPress Tags code for bold text is <B>
• To combine codes, begin with the less than character, then enter the codes you want to specify and complete the code with a greater than character. For example, the code for bold italic text is <BI>
• If you do not check Include Style Sheets in the Get Text dialog box before importing tagged text, QuarkXPress does not convert XPress
Tags codes to actual character attributes and paragraph formats.
Instead, the program imports the codes as text characters. The imported text takes on the attributes at the text insertion point when you import the text.
24.28
A Guide to QuarkXPress
XPress Tags
• XPress Tags codes for character attributes must be placed immediately preceding the characters to which you want to apply the attributes.
When you apply a character attribute using an XPress Tags code, the attribute remains in effect until you disable it or until you apply a different style sheet. You can cancel an attribute by respecifying its code following the last character to which you want it applied (or for type styles, you can enter the code for plain text, <P>).
• XPress Tags codes for paragraph attributes must be placed at the beginning of a paragraph. Formats specified by XPress Tags codes remain applied until you specify other values at the beginning of a subsequent paragraph or until you apply a different style sheet.
• To specify tab alignment, (Left, Center, Right, or Decimal), enter 0 for
Left, 1 for Center, 2 for Right, and 3 for Decimal. For example, the codes to specify a right tab stop 72 points from the left indent with a dot leader would look like this: <*t(72,2,Ò.Ó)>
The other two alignment options are Comma (which aligns text on a comma) and Align On (which aligns text on any single printing character). To specify Comma alignment, enter a comma in quotation marks “,”. To specify Align On alignment, enter any single printing character in quotation marks. For example, “/” would specify alignment on the / character.
• For XPress Tags code commands that let you specify more than one value (for example, paragraph attributes), you can enter a $ in place of an actual value. When QuarkXPress encounters a $ code, the program substitutes the value specified in the currently applied style sheet. (If no style sheet is currently applied, the value of the Normal style sheet is used.) For example, you may want a paragraph to contain all the formats specified in the applied style sheet, but you want to apply 18 points of leading instead of the value specified in the style sheet. The code for this would be: <*p($,$,$,18,$,$,$>
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.29
Appendices
• To apply the Normal style sheet (whose attributes are defined in the
QuarkXPress document) to paragraphs, begin the paragraph with the code: @$:
• To specify that a specific style sheet be applied to paragraphs, begin the paragraph with the code: @StyleName:
• To specify that No Style be applied to paragraphs, begin the first paragraph you want to disassociate from any style sheet with the code: @:
• When you are defining a style sheet for a document, you have the option of basing that style sheet on another, existing style sheet. The code for this is: @stylesheetname=[sÒbased on nameÓ]deÞnition of style sheet
• You can define a style sheet’s character and paragraph attributes using
XPress Tags codes. To define a style sheet using XPress Tags codes, begin the paragraph with the code: @StyleName=paragraph attribute and character attribute codes
For example, @01 GUTS 2.0 Body Text=[S"","01 GUTS 2.0 Body
Text"]<*L*h"Standard H&Js"*kn0*kt(2,2)*ra0*rb0*d0*p
(0,0,0,12,0,10,g,"U.S. English")*t(6,0,"1 ",15,0,"1 "):
Ps100t0h100z9.5k0b0c"Black"f"StoneSerif">
• When you apply a style sheet to a paragraph using XPress Tags, the style sheet remains applied to subsequent paragraphs until another style sheet is applied or until No Style is applied using the code: @:
• If you import text tagged with style sheet names that the document already contains, QuarkXPress automatically applies the character and paragraph attributes specified in their style sheets.
• The following characters cannot be used in style sheet names:
Ò, :, =, @
24.30
A Guide to QuarkXPress
XPress Tags
• Names you specify as XPress Tags codes must be preceded and terminated by an inch mark " character. For example, if you want to specify the font Palatino, use the code: <f"Palatino">
• When specifying a font using XPress Tags codes, you can enter a partial font name within the code (for example, you can enter helv to specify the font Helvetica). When QuarkXPress applies a font to imported text per the XPress Tags code you specify, the application will apply the first font in the Font submenu whose name matches the characters you specified in the XPress Tags code.
• Colors and H&Js must be defined within the QuarkXPress document before you import tagged text that specifies them.
• If you specify a color name using an XPress Tags code and QuarkXPress cannot locate it in the document’s color list, it is replaced with the color Black.
• If you specify an H&J as an XPress Tags and QuarkXPress cannot locate it in the document’s list of H&Js, the Standard H&J specification is substituted.
• The maximum length for the names of style sheets, colors, and H&Js is
63 characters.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.31
Appendices
• To enter an XPress Tags code sequence on multiple lines, enter a colon (:), followed by
ENTER
. You cannot split an individual code with a colon and
ENTER
; you must split code sequences between individual codes.
• You can apply attributes to characters within a paragraph to which you have applied a style sheet. These attributes remain applied until you cancel them or until you apply a different style sheet.
Character and paragraph attributes
When you specify type styles using XPress Tags codes, <P> always sets the type style to Plain. When you specify any other type style (for example, <B> for Bold), that style is applied if it isn’t already specified and removed if it has been specified. For example, the first time you specify
<B>, the Bold type style is applied to the text that follows. If you enter
<B> again, the Bold type style is not applied to the text that follows. If you enter <$>, the type style is set to the one specified in the current style sheet. If a style sheet is not currently applied, the Normal style sheet is used.
24.32
A Guide to QuarkXPress
XPress Tags
Character attributes
Plain
Bold
Italic
Outline
Shadow
Underline
Word Underline
Strike Thru
All Caps
Small Caps
Superscript
Subscript
Superior
Type style of current style sheet
Change font*
Change font size*
Change color*
Change shade*
Horizontal scale*
Kern the next two characters*
Track*
Set baseline shift*
Vertical scale*
Code
<P>
<B>
<I>
<O>
<S>
<U>
<W>
</>
<K>
<H>
<+>
<-> (hyphen)
<V>
<$>
<f"font name">
<z###.##> in points
<c"color name"> or
<cC, cM, cY, cK, and cW>
<s###> in percentage of shade
<h###> in percentage of scale
<k###.##> in 1 /
200 em space
<t###.##> in 1 /
200 em space
<b###.##> in points
<y###> in percentage of scale
*When any of these commands are followed by a $ (for example, <f$>), the attributes are set to the values specified in the current character style sheet. If a character style sheet is not currently applied, the Normal style sheet is used. (A # character in this list indicates a numeric value.)
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.33
Appendices
Paragraph attributes
Left-align paragraph
Center-align paragraph
Right-align paragraph
Justify paragraph
Force Justify paragraph
Set tab stops*
Set paragraph attributes*
H&J
Code
<*L>
<*C>
<*R>
<*J>
<*F>
<*t(##.#,#,"1 or 2 characters") >
Values in parentheses represent Position
(in points), Alignment, and Fill Characters.
For no fill characters, enter a 1 followed by two spaces. For 1 fill character, enter a 1 followed by the repeat character (enter the character twice). For two fill characters, enter a 2 followed by the alternating characters. Alignment options are 0 for Left, 1 for Center, 2 for Right, 3 for Decimal, a comma (,) for Comma, and any printing character for Align On. All the tabs for a paragraph are included, separated by commas, within the parenthesis. For example,
<*t(24,0,"2*",48,1,"1++",72,2,
"1 ",96,4,"1 ",120,5,"2É",
144,"\","1 ")>
<*p(##.#,##.#,##.#,##.#,##.#,
##.#,G or g)>
Values in parentheses represent Left
Indent, First Line Indent, Right Indent,
Leading, Space Before, Space After, Lock to
Baseline Grid. G = lock to baseline grid; g = do not lock to baseline grid. For example, <*p(18,0,18,12,9,9,g)>
<*h"speciÞcation name">
24.34
A Guide to QuarkXPress
XPress Tags
Paragraph attributes (cont’d) Code
Paragraph Rule Above**
Paragraph Rule Below**
Drop Cap**
<*ra(##,#,"color name",#,##,##,## or
##%)>
Values in parentheses represent Width,
Style, "color name," Shade, From Left,
From Right, Offset. Enter rule widths and indents in points. Line style is the number of the line style counting from top to bottom in the Style drop-down list in the
Rules tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box. Shade is a percentage. You can enter “T” in front of the left indent value to base rule length on the first line of text.
You can specify rule offset in points or as a percentage (#%). For example,
<*ra(4,1,"black",100,18,18,50%)>
<*rb(##,#,"color name",#,##,##,## or
##%)>
Values in parentheses represent Width,
Style, "color name," Shade, From Left,
From Right, Offset. Enter rule widths and indents in points. Line style is the number of the line style counting from top to bottom in the Style drop-down list in the
Rules tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box. Shade is a percentage. You can enter
“T” in front of the left indent value to base rule length on the length of the last line of text. You can specify rule offset in points or as a percentage (#%). For example,
<*rb(8,1,"blue",50,36,36,20%)>
<*d(character count,line count)>
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.35
Appendices
Paragraph attributes (cont’d) Code
Keep with Next ¶**
Keep Together**
<*kn1> or <*kn0>
1 = keep with next; 0 = don’t keep
<*kt(A)> or <*kt(#,#)>
A = All; #,# = Start line number, End line number
*If a $ replaces any or all format codes (for example, <*t$>), the current paragraph style sheet values are used. All numeric values in these two commands are measured in points.
**Any or all of the format codes can be replaced by a $ to use the current style sheet’s definition, or by a 0 to specify no rule (for example, <*ra$> and <*ra0>).
Paragraph style sheets
You can override a character or paragraph attribute applied via a style sheet at any time. If you do so, you can then use a $ to revert to the style sheet assigned value. If no user-defined style sheet is applied, the value contained in the Normal style sheet is used.
24.36
A Guide to QuarkXPress
XPress Tags
Style sheet definitions
Apply the Normal style sheet
Apply No Style
Define a style sheet
Base a style sheet on another
Apply a defined style sheet
Style definition
Code
@$:paragraph text
@:paragraph text
@Stylesheetname=deÞnition
(Hard Return)
For example,
@Bodytext=<*J*p(7.2,0,7.2,11
,0,3.6,g)*t(148,2,"")*d
(1,2)z9f"Stone
Sans"c"black"s100h100P>
@Stylesheetname=[s"based-on name"] deÞnition
@Stylesheetname:paragraph text
@Stylename [s] <deÞnition>
@Stylename [s" "," Next stylename"] <deÞnition>
@Stylename [s"Based on stylename"] <deÞnition>
@Stylename [s"based on stylename","next stylename"]
<deÞnition>
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.37
Appendices
Special characters
New Line (Soft Return)
Discretionary Return
Hyphen*
Indent Here
Right Indent Tab
Standard Space*
En Space*
Punctuation Space*
Flex Space*
Discretionary Hyphen
Previous Text Box Number Character
Current Text Box Number Character
Next Page Text Box Number Character
New Column
New Box
Decimal ASCII code for a character**
Code
<\n>
<\d>
<\->
<\i>
<\t>
<\s>
<\f>
<\p>
<\q>
<\h>
<\2>
<\3>
<\4>
<\c>
<\b>
<\#decimal value>
For example, <\#183> for a bullet mark.
*Placing a ! before any of these commands in this group makes the space or hyphen nonbreaking (for example, <\!h>).
**The # symbol is part of the code. Placing a ! before the command makes the character nonbreaking. (Please refer to your Windows documentation for a complete list of these ASCII codes.)
24.38
A Guide to QuarkXPress
XPress Tags
Special characters
One of the following three extended character set indicators is automatically placed at the top of an XPress Tags file you create using the Save
Text command (File menu).
Character set
Windows ANSI
Mac OS
ISO Latin 1
Indicator
<e1>
<e¯>
<e2>
To use as text certain characters that XPress Tags would otherwise consider as part of specific codes, use these special characters.
Command characters as text characters
@
<
\
Code
<\@>
<\<>
<\\>
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.39
Appendices
Crossplatform Issues
QuarkXPress for Windows and QuarkXPress for Mac OS can read each other’s files, so you can easily transfer documents between the two platforms. There are a few issues you need to be aware of if you will be transferring files between platforms.
Files
• The XPress Preferences file cannot be transferred between QuarkXPress for Windows and QuarkXPress for Mac OS. Books cannot be opened over a network on both platforms at the same time.
• When you open a QuarkXPress for Mac OS document in QuarkXPress for
Windows, it becomes a new unsaved document. Choosing File
& Save displays the Save as dialog box. If you want to overwrite the existing document, give the new document the same name as the existing one.
• The Format drop-down list in the Save as dialog box (File menu) lets you save documents in 3.3 format so they can be opened in
QuarkXPress 3.3, 3.31, or 3.32. If you are planning to open files in
QuarkXPress for Windows version 3.3 or 3.31 (running on Windows
3.11), limit the file name to eight characters and make sure the appropriate file name extension for documents (*.qxd) or templates
(*.qxt) is used.
24.40
A Guide to QuarkXPress
XPress Tags
Characters and fonts
• Character sets may differ between platforms, therefore you should avoid using characters that exist on one platform but not the other. Consult your Windows documentation for a list of supported characters.
• Be sure to use fonts that are available on both platforms. Also, check to make sure you have the same version of the font on both platforms. If not, consult your font vendor to update any old fonts.
• Some fonts may differ in metrics (character spacing and sizes) between their Windows 95/NT and Mac OS versions. These differences may cause reflow (usually reflow occurs in text runarounds). If you are concerned with maintaining line, column, and page breaks, we suggest that you obtain a printed copy of the original document for comparison with the translated version. You may then use the typographic features of
QuarkXPress to correct line, page, and column breaks.
Graphics
• Some PICT files generated on Mac OS may not display or print correctly on Windows 95/NT. If the PICT is a preview for a TIFF or EPS picture, reimport the picture once you have opened the file on Windows 95/NT.
• Some WMF pictures may display or print differently on Mac OS than they did on Windows 95/NT. You may want to save pictures in a different format before transferring the document.
• OLE links established on Windows 95/NT will not be maintained when a document using them is opened on Mac OS. Conversely, subscribe links established on Mac OS will not be maintained when a document using them is opened on Windows 95/NT.
• Paths between picture files and QuarkXPress documents established using Get Picture (File menu) will be maintained. When you transfer
QuarkXPress documents from Mac OS to Windows 95/NT, the picture files will be listed as missing on Windows 95/NT. To output the docu-
A Guide to QuarkXPress 24.41
Appendices ment from Windows 95/NT, you need to update the picture paths. If you output from only one platform, you may not want to update the paths each time you transfer documents between platforms.
• If you are saving a page as an EPS file for output from QuarkXPress for
Windows 95/NT, choose ASCII or Clean 8-bit rather than Binary from the Data drop-down list in the Save Page as EPS dialog box (File menu).
• The TIFF and EPS picture file formats usually give the best crossplatform results.
24.42
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Glossary
25
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
Absolute leading
Spaces lines of text by a rigid amount, usually measured in points. (See also
Auto Leading, Incremental Leading, and Leading.)
Absolute page number
A page’s actual position relative to the first page of a document, regardless of the way the document is numbered or sectioned. The user can indicate absolute page numbers in the Go to Page and Print dialog boxes by preceding the numeral with a plus (+) character.
Active
QuarkXPress items can be either active or inactive.
Active boxes, text paths, and lines have black outlines plus handles for resizing or reshaping. An active group is displayed with a dotted-line border; the items in the group are displayed with black outlines.
Different menus and choices are available depending on the active item.
(See also Multiple-selected items.)
Active paragraph
(See Select.)
Agates
A new measurement system in the
Horizontal and Vertical Measure drop-down lists in the General tab of the Document Preferences dialog box
(Edit
& Preferences & Document).
Commonly used for measuring vertical column length in classified ads.
Alignment
QuarkXPress has five paragraph alignments (Style
& Alignment): Left,
Centered, Right, Justified, and
Forced. (See also Space/Align,
Justification, Vertical alignment, and Forced.)
Align On tab
A tab alignment option in the Tabs dialog box (Style
& Tabs) that lets you align on any printed character.
All Caps
A type style that makes all selected characters uppercase.
Anchor
QuarkXPress lets you paste a picture box or text box within text so that the box acts like a character and flows with the text.
You can also anchor a rule to the top and/or bottom of a paragraph via the
Rules command (Style menu).
Append
To copy a set of specifications (for example, style sheets, colors, or H&J specifications) from a document and add it to the set found in the active document.
Application window
A window that contains an open application. The name of the application appears at the top of the window. A
QuarkXPress application window can contain up to 25 open documents, templates, or libraries. (See also
Document window and window.)
Ascender
The portion of a lowercase letter that rises above its main body, as in the upright stem on the letters b, d, f, h, k, and t.
Ascent
The value specified by the font designer to indicate the amount of space needed to accommodate a font above its baseline. Used by QuarkXPress for auto and incremental leading, scaling drop caps, aligning anchored boxes, and for positioning the first line of text in a text box.
ASCII
An acronym for American Standard
Code for Information Interchange.
ASCII is an industry-standard, textonly file format.
QuarkXPress can import and save text in the ASCII format.
Aspect ratio
Refers to the ratio of width to height.
Attribute
(See Character attribute.)
Auto leading
Spacing between lines of text that occurs automatically according to the fonts, font styles, font sizes, and anchored items used. The value you enter in the Auto Leading field in the
Paragraph tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document) is added to all paragraphs in a document for which
“auto” leading has been specified.
Auto Page Insertion
The Auto Page Insertion drop-down menu in the General tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box
(Edit
& Preferences & Document) determines whether new pages are inserted and where they are placed when an automatic text chain overflows.
Automatic hyphenation
A QuarkXPress feature that divides words at syllable junctures by placing a
25.2
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Glossary hyphen at the end of a line of text and carrying the rest of the word to the next line.
Automatic hyphenation can be used to alleviate large gaps between words in paragraphs with justified alignment or to create smoother margins with ragged alignments.
Automatic page number characters
QuarkXPress has three automatic page number characters: The Previous Box
Page Number character
CTRL
+2, when entered in a text box, displays the number of the page containing the previous box in a text chain; the
Current Box Page Number character
CTRL
+3 displays the current page number; and the Next Box Page Number character
CTRL
+4 displays the number of the page containing the next box in the text chain. (See also Continued
from line and Continued on line.)
Automatic text box
The user-specified text box on a master page and its corresponding document pages into which text flows when a new page is automatically inserted
.
Automatic text chain
The text chain that is defined by the
automatic text box on a master page.
When text overflow occurs in the last box in an automatic text chain, a new page is automatically inserted to receive the overflow if Auto Page Insertion is turned on in the General tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box
(Edit
& Preferences & Document).
A document can contain only one automatic text chain, but many manual text chains.
Auxiliary Dictionary
A user-defined dictionary used to check spelling in QuarkXPress documents containing specialized vocabulary.
Background
The space within the box border which sits behind the content of the box.
Background color
The color applied to the background of a box.
Baseline grid
A grid that underlies QuarkXPress documents and is usually invisible.
When all paragraphs on a page are locked to the baseline grid, lines of text align from column to column and from box to box.
You define the baseline grid via the
Paragraph tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document). You display the baseline grid by choosing
Show Baseline Grid (View
& Show
Baseline Grid).
Baselines
The imaginary lines upon which type or anchored items appear to sit in a text box.
Baseline Shift
A character attribute command (Style menu) that lets you raise or lower text or an anchored box relative to its normal baseline position.
Beveled-corner box
A box that has inclined (beveled) corners.
Bézier box tools
Tools that draw text boxes or picture boxes with curved and straight line segments.
Bézier curve
Named after Pierre Bézier, this mathematically defined line or shape uses two handles (called points in QuarkXPress) and two curve handles for each of its segments. Points represent the points at which a Bézier line segment begins and ends. The position of a Bézier line segment’s curve handles in relation to its points dictates its curvature. (See also
Curve handles, Corner point, Smooth
point, and Symmetrical point.)
Bézier polygon box
A polygonal box that includes Bézier curves. (See Bézier curve.)
Bitmap graphic
A graphic image (picture) formed by a pattern of pixels. Also called a
raster graphic.
Bleed
A page element that extends to the trimmed edge of the finished page.
Blend
In QuarkXPress, a box background with a gradual transition between two colors.
You can specify background blends using the Colors palette (View
&
Show Colors).
Body copy
Refers to the main portion of the text in a publication. Body copy usually falls within a range from 8 to 14 points.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 25.3
Bold
The heavier style of a typeface, used for heads, subheads, or for emphasis in body copy.
Book
A QuarkXPress file format that opens as a palette and allows you to group multiple QuarkXPress documents like
“chapters” in a large-scale publication. Global specifications such as style sheets, colors, and H&Js are determined by a master chapter in the book.
Border
(See Frame.)
Bounding box
A rectangular box that fully encloses an item so that it can be moved or resized.
Box
In QuarkXPress, the term “box” refers to a container. Boxes can be any shape and fall into two categories in QuarkXPress: picture boxes and text boxes.
Box skew
Specifying a skew angle slants the image, text, or item at that angle.
Callout
Explanatory text associated with a picture or illustration.
Cap
An abbreviation for capital, or uppercase letter. It is used in the terms cap height, drop caps, initial caps, hanging
caps, and raised caps.
Cap height
In QuarkXPress, the measured height of a 0 (zero) for a given font at a specific size. It is used to approximate the distance from the baseline to the top of an uppercase letter.
Case
Refers to alphabetic characters. A letter can be uppercase (that is, a capital letter) or lowercase.
QuarkXPress Type Style options (Style menu) let you specify All Caps (uppercase letters) and Small Caps (reduced uppercase letters).
Center-aligned
1) Lines of text in a center-aligned paragraph are centered between the paragraph’s indents; both the left and right edges of the text are ragged.
2) Lines of text in a text box with
Centered chosen as the Vertical
Alignment are centered from top to bottom.
CGM
An acronym for Computer Graphics
Metafile, a popular vector-based graphics file format supported by many applications. QuarkXPress can import graphics saved in CGM format.
(See also Metafile.)
Change to
The text and style used to replace text found in a search using Find/Change
(Edit menu).
Character
A character is a letter, numeral, space, punctuation mark, or symbol.
Character attribute
A specification applied to a character.
QuarkXPress character attributes are:
Font, Size, Type Style, Color, Shade,
Horizontal and Vertical Scale, Kern,
Track, and Baseline Shift.
Character space
The amount of space between characters, based on values determined by the font designer.
You can modify the spacing values by the Kern and Track commands and the justification controls.
Check box
A square-shaped control in a dialog box which you click to enable or disable a function.
Choke
A QuarkXPress color-trapping option in which the “knocked-out” area of the background color is slightly reduced, causing foreground items to slightly overlap it. (See also Knockout,
Spread, and Trapping.)
Choose
You choose a menu entry by clicking its menu title, pressing the mouse button while dragging the Arrow pointer x over the entry, and then releasing the mouse button.
Cicero
A unit of measurement in the Didot system, commonly used in Europe.
A cicero is slightly larger than a pica and is equal to approximately 4.55
millimeters.
Clipboard
The place in the computer’s memory where the last item you cut or copied is temporarily stored.
Clipping path
A Bézier outline that tells an application such as QuarkXPress which areas of a picture should be considered transparent. If you use a photo-editing application to create a clipping path,
25.4
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Glossary the clipping path is embedded into the picture file. If you create a clipping path in QuarkXPress, the clipping path is stored only in the QuarkXPress file.
CMYK
An acronym for Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow, and Black; the standard ink colors used in four-color printing.
Color model
Method of defining or modifying color. Color models available in
QuarkXPress are HSB, RGB, CMYK,
FOCOLTONE, PANTONE (and PAN-
TONE Process, PANTONE Hexachrome
Coated, PANTONE Hexachrome
Uncoated, PANTONE ProSim, and
PANTONE Uncoated), TRUMATCH,
TOYO, and DIC.
In the PANTONE color model, for example, you specify document colors using on-screen swatches or PANTONE numbers that correspond to printed colors in a PANTONE swatchbook. (See also FOCOLTONE colors, PANTONE colors, TRUMATCH colors, TOYO
colors, and DIC colors.)
Color separations
Used in the color printing process.
QuarkXPress lets you print separations of spot colors and process colors.
CMYK process separations consist of four separation plates for each page: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
QuarkXPress also prints one plate for each spot color used on a page. (See also Spot color and Process color.)
Colors palette
A movable palette that lets you apply colors to text, pictures, frames, lines, and box backgrounds, and to create background blends.
Column
A vertical division of a text box in
QuarkXPress.
Combine
A command in the Merge submenu
(Item
& Merge) that retains all the selected item shapes but cuts out any areas that overlap. Where two lines cross, no corner points are added. One box results from several items selected.
Comp
A “comprehensive” or detailed dummy showing how the finished piece will look.
Condensed type
Characters with proportionately less width and/or height than normal.
You can create condensed type in
QuarkXPress via the Horizontal/
Vertical Scale command (Style menu).
Constrain
Choosing Constrain prevents grouped items from being resized or reshaped beyond the borders of the back box in the group.
The Constrain command can be applied only to a group whose back box’s border completely encompasses the other items in the group.
Content change
You can make two kinds of modifications to QuarkXPress elements: item changes and content changes.
Modifications to lines, boxes, and text paths are examples of item changes.
Modifications to text and pictures
(that is, the elements contained by
QuarkXPress items) are examples of content changes.
Continued from line
A line that shows the page number of the previous linked text box. (See
Automatic page number characters.)
Continued on line
A line that shows the page number of the next linked text box. (See
Automatic page number characters.)
Contrast
Describes the relationship between a picture’s highlights (light areas), middle
tones, and shadows (dark areas).
Controls
A generic term that refers to the buttons, check boxes, fields, menus, lists, etc., in dialog boxes and palettes.
Copyfitting
1) Determining how much text will fit a given space.
2) Forcing text to fit a space by editing copy or adjusting the kerning, leading, tracking, or character attributes.
Corner point
A point that connects two straight lines, a straight line and a curved line, or two noncontinuous curved lines. In the case of curved lines, the corner point’s curve handles can be manipulated independently of one another, usually to form a sharp transition between the two segments. (See also
Point, Curve handles, Smooth point, and Symmetrical point.)
Crop
To trim the edges of a picture or page to make it fit or remove unwanted portions.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 25.5
Crop marks
Short vertical and horizontal lines printed outside the page’s final trim size. They indicate where to cut.
Crop marks are also called cutmarks or trim marks.
Crosshair pointer
When you select a tool to create a line or a box, the Arrow pointer x changes to the Crosshair pointer c when it is over the page or pasteboard.
Current Box Page Number character
When you enter the Current Box
Page Number character
CTRL
+3 on a document page, the current page’s number is displayed.
Pages based on a master page that contains the Current Box Page Number character display the appropriate page number. (See also Next Box Page
Number character and Previous Box
Page Number character.)
Curve handles
Handles that extend from either side of a point and control a curve’s shape.
(See also Point, Corner point, Smooth
point, and Symmetrical point.)
Cut
When the Item tool e is selected, choosing Cut (Edit menu) removes the active items to the Clipboard.
When the Content tool
E is selected, choosing Cut removes an active item’s contents to the Clipboard.
Dashes
(See Em dash and En dash.)
Dashes & Stripes
User-created design styles that can be applied to lines, text paths, or box frames. Dashes are broken line styles, and stripes are line styles made of stacked bars with white or colored space between the bars.
Deactivate
You deactivate active items by clicking outside them. (See also Activate.)
Decimal tab
A tab alignment option in the Tabs dialog box (Style
& Tabs) that lets you align decimal numbers, like dollar amounts, by their decimal points.
Default
A predetermined setting. For example, preferences are defaults that can be changed by the user. (See Preset
defaults, Program defaults, and User-
specified defaults.)
Default colors
Colors that are included with all newly created QuarkXPress documents.
Delete
Found within both the Edit and Item menus. When used from the Edit menu with the Item tool e selected, choosing Delete removes the active box, line, or text path. The same occurs when Delete is used from the
Item menu. However, when the
Content tool
E is selected, choosing
Delete from the Edit menu removes only the picture or highlighted text within the box.
Descender
The portion of lowercase letters that falls below the baseline. The letters g, j,
p, q, and y have descenders.
Descent
The value specified by the font designer to indicate the amount of space needed to accommodate a font below its baseline. Used by QuarkXPress for auto leading and scaling drop caps.
Deselect
(See Deactivate.)
Dialog box
A box displayed on-screen in response to a command that needs additional specifications.
DIC colors
A spot-color ink matching system from
Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc.
Didot
A European measurement system.
Ciceros are a unit of measurement in the Didot system.
Difference
A command in the Merge submenu
(Item
& Merge) that removes all the selected item shapes except for the shape at the very back of the stack. If this shape is overlapped, the overlapped area is cut out. One box results from several items selected.
Discretionary Hyphen character
A manually inserted character
(
CTRL
+
HYPHEN
) that indicates where a word can be broken to fit text on the line.
A discretionary hyphen is visible and prints only if QuarkXPress hyphenates the word at that point.
Discretionary New Line character
Like a Discretionary Hyphen character, a Discretionary New Line character is a manually inserted character
(
CTRL
+
ENTER
) that indicates where a word can be broken to fit text on the line; but no hyphen is inserted.
25.6
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Glossary
A Discretionary New Line character is not visible on-screen and is used only if QuarkXPress breaks the word there.
Dither
Dithering is the simulation of additional colors or shades by varying the values of adjacent pixels.
Document Layout palette
A movable palette that lets you create new master pages or delete master pages; display, insert, delete, and move document pages; create multipage spreads; and apply a new master page format to document pages.
Document window
The on-screen window, within the application window, that contains the open QuarkXPress document. The border of this window displays the document name, title bar, minimize, maximize and close boxes, scroll bars, view percent field, go-to-page icons, etc.
Dongle
A hardware device usually inserted on the parallel port which is required in order for specific software to be used.
Dot leader
A period used as a tab fill character, often used in numerical tables and tables of contents.
Dots per inch
A general method of measuring resolution when referring to printers and monitors (dpi). However, it should never be used to describe the resolution of halftone dots (lpi).
Double-click
Two mouse-clicks in rapid succession without moving the mouse. Doubleclicking generally opens a file or a dialog box.
Downloadable font
A font that is not resident in the printer’s memory. A downloadable font must be sent to the printer to print a document containing the font. Also called a soft font.
Dpi
The resolution of a device or image in dots per inch.
Drag
To move the mouse while pressing the mouse button. Dragging is used for actions like creating items, moving items, and highlighting text.
Drop cap
A large decorative initial capital letter that extends below the top line of a paragraph it begins.
Drop-down list
A type of menu used in dialog boxes.
When you click a drop-down list <, multiple entries are displayed. You can then choose an entry by dragging the arrow pointer x over the entry and clicking the mouse button.
Drop-shadow box
A box to which color and/or shade has been applied, then offset and placed behind a text or picture box to create a shadow effect.
Drop-shadow characters
Characters to which color and/or shade have been applied, then offset behind identical characters to create a shadow effect.
Dropped-out type
(See Reversed type.)
Ellipsis
Three points (…) used to indicate an omission of words. Typing ASCII value
ALT
+0133 on the keypad enters an ellipsis as a single character.
Elliptical box
An oval or circular box.
Em dash
A dash the width of two zeros (00)
(
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+=).
Em space
In traditional typesetting, an em space is a square with the dimensions of the given point size. A 12-point em is a square that measures 12
´ 12 points. To create an em space in QuarkXPress, you enter two en spaces.
By default, QuarkXPress defines an em space as the width of two zeros (00) in a given font. If you check Standard
Em Space in the Character tab of the
Document Preferences dialog box
(Edit
& Preferences & Document), then QuarkXPress defines an em space by the point size of the text (for example, 24-point text has a 24
´24-point em space).
Emulsion
The light-sensitive coating on film or paper.
En dash
A dash that is wider than a hyphen and half the width of an em dash
(
CTRL
+=).
A Guide to QuarkXPress 25.7
En space
A space that is is half the width of an em space (
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+6). (See Em
space.)
End-of-line character
(See New line character.)
EPS
An acronym for Encapsulated
PostScript, a graphics format used for mathematically-defined illustrations.
Exclusive Or
A command in the Merge submenu
(Item
& Merge) that keeps all the selected item shapes but cuts out any areas that overlap. Where two lines cross, corner points are added. One box results from several items selected.
Export
To use the Save Text command (File menu) to save QuarkXPress text for other applications or formats.
Facing pages
Alternating left and right pages as in books and magazines. Each spread consists of two facing pages.
Facing-page documents measure inside and outside margins, rather than left and right margins.
Field
An area in a dialog box or palette, into which you can enter a value.
Figure space
A figure space is the width of a zero in a given font.
Fill character
A user-specified character that can be automatically inserted from the point where a tab is entered, to the next tab stop.
Any one or two printable characters can be used as a fill character. (See also
Dot leader.)
Filter
(See Import/export filter.)
Find what text
The text or style which QuarkXPress searches for when Find/Change (Edit menu) is used.
Finished page area
The portion of an electronic page that represents the final size after printing and trimming. Crop marks on the unfinished page indicate where the finished page area begins, but the crop marks themselves are not part of this area. (See Crop marks.)
First Line indent
The user-specified distance between where the First Line of a paragraph begins as opposed to the remaining lines of that paragraph. Specified in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box
(Style
& Formats).
Flex Space Width
A user-modifiable percentage of a standard en space, specified in the
Character tab of the Document
Preferences dialog box (Edit
&
Preferences
& Document).
To enter a breaking flexible-space character in text, press
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+5; to enter a nonbreaking flexible space character, press
CTRL
+
ALT
+
SHIFT
+5.
Flip
To change so that the result is a mirror image of the original. In QuarkXPress, you can flip the contents of a text box or picture box either horizontally
(Style
& Flip Horizontal) or vertically
(Style
& Flip Vertical).
Flush left
(See Left-aligned.)
Flush right
(See Right-aligned.)
FOCOLTONE colors
FOCOLTONE is a process color matching system for specifying predictable process colors. All of the colors in the
FOCOLTONE color system can be created by printing the specified cyan, magenta, yellow, and black percentages under standard printing conditions.
Fold marks
Dashed lines within the margins of the page that indicate where the finished document should be folded.
Font
A set of letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and symbols that share a unified design. The design is called a typeface. A group of related typefaces is called a type family.
Footer
Text that prints on the bottom of each page of a section or document. A footer can include a page number, document or chapter title, etc.
Forced (Justification)
Justification in which the last line of the paragraph is forced to stretch all the way to the right margin no matter how great the distance.
Format
(See Paragraph format.)
25.8
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Glossary
Four-color process
The printing process that uses the four basic printing colors — cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
FPO
Abbreviation of “For Position Only.”
Used to label placeholder graphics and dummy text in lieu of the final.
Frame
A decorative border placed around a text box or a picture box. In
QuarkXPress, frames are applied via the Frame command (Item menu).
You can choose from predefined styles or you can create custom frames. (See
Dashes & Stripes).
Freehand
A method of drawing boxes, lines, and text paths by simply dragging the mouse along the envisioned path.
QuarkXPress automatically decides where the Bézier points and curve handles are positioned.
Graphic
(See Picture.)
Grayscale
Shades of gray ranging from black to white. In printing, grayscale uses only a black halftone plate.
Greeking
In QuarkXPress, greeking refers to text or pictures that are displayed onscreen as gray patterns to speed screen update.
Grid
(See Baseline grid.)
Group
In QuarkXPress, a collection of items that can be moved as a single item
(Item
& Group).
Guides
(See Page guides.)
Gutter
The blank space between adjacent columns or facing pages.
H&J
The H&J command (Edit menu) lets you specify hyphenation and justification to control the way words are hyphenated in both justified and nonjustified paragraphs, and how space is added or subtracted between characters and words in paragraphs.
Hairline
A very thin rule or line. A hairline’s width depends on the output device’s resolution. QuarkXPress prints the line at .125 point to a 300 dpi PostScript printer.
Halftone
A reproduction of a continuous-tone photograph by simulating gradations of tone using dots (or other shapes) of varying sizes.
Halftone screen
Traditionally, continuous-tone artwork
(such as a photograph) is reproduced by photographing the original through a crossline or contact screen.
The resulting halftone image is composed of many dots, ellipses, squares, or lines of various sizes that can be reproduced on a printing press.
Handles
Small shapes, usually square, displayed on the edges of boxes, text paths, and lines. Used to resize or reshape these items.
Hanging cap
A large initial capital letter that extends to the left of the paragraph’s left margin.
Hanging indent
A paragraph in which the first line extends further to the left than the other lines. Created by specifying a
Left Indent and a negative First Line indent value in the Formats tab of the
Paragraph Attributes dialog box
(Style
& Formats) or by using an
Indent Here character.
Header
Text that prints on the top of each page of a section or document. A header can include a page number, the date, the title, etc.
High-resolution printer
(See Imagesetter.)
Highlight
To activate or select. For example, in
QuarkXPress, highlighted text is displayed against a gray or color background. You highlight text by clicking and dragging the mouse, by using multiple mouse clicks, or by choosing
Select All (Edit menu) when a text box or path is active.
Horizontal/Vertical Scale
A Style menu command that lets you condense and expand character width or height by a percentage value.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 25.9
HPGL (Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language)
A graphics format used to store high resolution pictures. QuarkXPress can import graphics files in HPGL format.
The extension for HPGL files is often
.PLT.
HSB
An acronym for Hue, Saturation, and
Brightness. A color model used mostly by artists or slide producers. Hue describes the color pigment; Saturation is a measure of how much of the color pigment is present; and Brightness is a measure of the amount of black present in a color.
Hyphenation
The division of a word at the end of a line of text.
Hyphenation Exceptions
The user-specified Hyphenation
Exceptions (Utilities menu) that override the QuarkXPress hyphenation rules.
Hyphenation Zone
The user-specified distance from the
Right Indent where QuarkXPress begins hyphenating words.
To be hyphenated, a word must have a syllable juncture within the hyphenation zone.
Imagesetter
An output device with a resolution above 1,200 dots per inch used to prepare high-quality output on film or paper.
Import
To bring a picture or text file into an active QuarkXPress box using the Get
Picture or Get Text commands, respectively (File menu).
Import/export filter
A special translation file that lets
QuarkXPress share text with other programs.
Imposition
Positioning pages in a press form so they will be in the correct numerical sequence after folding.
Incremental leading
The base amount of auto leading plus
(or minus) a user-specified value. (See also Auto Leading and Leading.)
Indent
The distance from a paragraph’s edge to the left and/or right sides of the text column or box it occupies (measured from the text inset).
Indent Here character
A manually inserted character
(
CTRL
+\) that causes all subsequent lines in the paragraph to be leftindented at that location.
Indeterminate color
A QuarkXPress term for a background that has multiple colors (such as a color picture). When a background contains multiple colors, QuarkXPress will trap an object color in front based on the trap value specified for the
Indeterminate color.
Index palette
A movable palette that lets you tag words in a document as index entries.
Initial caps
The first letters of paragraphs that are embellished as drop caps, hanging caps, or raised caps.
Insertion point
(See Text Insertion point.)
Interactive text resizing
Resizing of text that occurs by use of the mouse rather than typing numbers in a field. You can interactively resize text in QuarkXPress by pressing
CTRL while dragging a resize handle on a text box. (Pressing
CTRL
+
SHIFT while dragging resizes the text proportionately.)
Intercharacter space
(See Character space.)
Intersection
A command in the Merge submenu
(Item
& Merge) that retains any areas that overlap the shape in back, but cuts out the rest. One box results from several items selected.
Invisible characters
Characters that can be displayed onscreen but do not print. The Tab,
Enter, and Space characters are examples.
Italic
A type style that uses slanted characters for emphasis.
Item
There are four kinds of items in
QuarkXPress: lines, text boxes, text paths, and picture boxes.
Items can be combined into groups; a group can be manipulated as a single item.
Item change
You can make two kinds of modifications to QuarkXPress items: item changes and content changes. Resizing, repositioning, and rotation of items are examples of item changes.
25.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Glossary
Jump lines
Page number references that guide a reader through a multi-page story. (See also Continued on line and Continued
from line.)
Justification
(1) To horizontally distribute a line of text by expanding or condensing the space between characters and words.
The text fills the width of a column so that it has uniform (flush) left and right edges. (See also Alignment and Forced.)
(2) To vertically distribute lines of text within a text box, adding space between paragraphs and/or lines. The lines of text are spaced to fill the column from top to bottom. (See also Center-aligned and Vertical alignment.)
Kerning
The adjustment of space between adjacent characters. QuarkXPress supports automatic kerning (based on a font’s built-in kerning table), and manual kerning (which lets you adjust the space at the text insertion point).
Kerning pair
Any two characters kerned by a certain amount when they appear adjacent to each other in text. Kerning pairs for a given font can be created or edited using the Kerning Table Edit command
(Utilities menu).
Kerning table
Kerning information built into most fonts and applied to text during automatic kerning.
QuarkXPress also lets you customize a font’s kerning table values using the
Kerning Table Edit command
(Utilities menu). This will not alter the font file itself. Kerning table edits are stored with the document (or globally within the XPress Preferences file if no document is open when the edits are made).
Kerning value
The space between two characters, calculated in em units.
Keyboard command
A key or combination of keys that you press to perform a particular function without using the mouse.
Kilobyte
Equal to 1,024 bytes. Kilobyte is often abbreviated as “K.”
Knockout
The opposite of overprinting, with no choke and no spread. An object in the foreground cuts its shape out — straight through — from the printing plates that make up the background.
Trapping values are non-applicable to a knockout. (See also Trapping.)
Laser printer
An electrostatic printer for moderateresolution output.
Leader
A line of dots, dashes, or other characters used to fill spaces between tabs.
Leading
The space between lines of text, usually measured from baseline to baseline.
In traditional typesetting, thin strips of lead were used to hold type in place and adjust the space between lines.
(See also Absolute leading, Auto
Leading, Incremental leading, and
Percentage-based auto leading.)
Leaks
Gaps where misregistration between adjoining colors leave paper or discoloration showing on the printed job.
Left-aligned
A left-aligned paragraph has a straight left edge and a ragged (uneven) right edge, like the text on this page. Also called ragged right.
Left Indent
The distance from the left edge of a column or text box (plus the text inset) to the text in the paragraph(s).
Left-justified
(See Left-aligned.)
Letter space
(See Character space.)
Library
A QuarkXPress file that can be opened as a movable palette that contains a collection of QuarkXPress items.
You can move items from document pages into an open library, from an open library onto document pages, and between open libraries.
Line
In QuarkXPress, a line is an item drawn with any of four Line tools and used mostly for decorative purposes.
(See also Rule.)
Line art
Pictures or illustrations that can be printed without halftones.
Line segment
(See Segment.)
A Guide to QuarkXPress 25.11
Link
The way QuarkXPress joins text boxes so that text automatically flows from one box to another.
List
In QuarkXPress, a list is a group of one or more paragraph style sheets chosen by the user in the Edit List dialog box
(Edit
& Lists & New) for the purpose of copying and assembling all the text of those styles into one location. For instance, a book publisher could specify a “chapter name” style sheet and a
“section name” style sheet as a new list, then use that list (via the Lists palette) to automatically build a table of contents.
Lists palette
A movable palette (View
& Show
Lists) that lets you use lists (groups of paragraph style sheets) to automatically build style-sheet-based tables for document and book production.
Lock
The Lock/Unlock command (Item menu) lets you fix an item to a page so that it cannot be moved or resized with the Item tool e.
Lpi
Lines per inch. Refers to the resolution of a halftone screen in printing.
(Should be distinguished from “dpi,” which refers to the resolution of a device or picture.)
Luminosity
A term used to define the relative lightness or brightness of a color.
Margin
The space surrounding the written or printed area on a page.
Margin guides
Nonprinting guidelines that indicate the specified margin and define the edges of an automatic text box.
Mask
In traditional graphic arts production environments, mask describes any material used to block off portions of a printed page, protecting that area from changes or from printing inks.
Master items
Items on document pages that are automatically placed by the associated master page. Master items can be moved and modified like other page items.
Master page
A nonprinting page used to automatically format document pages.
A master page can contain master items like headers, footers, page numbers, and other elements that are repeated on multiple pages.
Maximize button
The middle button in the upper right corner of the Application and
Document windows that you can click to enlarge the window to the maximum possible size.
Measurement system
QuarkXPress lets you choose among various measurement systems for displaying rulers and dialog box values:
Inches, Inches Decimal, Picas, Points,
Millimeters, Centimeters, Ciceros, and Agates.
Measurements palette
A movable palette that lets you modify item and content information.
The fields and controls in the
Measurements palette vary depending on the active item or tool selected.
Mechanical
A mechanical, or paste-up, is the original document from which printing plates are made.
A mechanical includes all the design elements (text, pictures, lines, etc.) in position and ready to be photographed for reproduction.
Menu
A list of commands displayed when you press the mouse button while the pointer is over a menu title in the menu bar.
Menu bar
The horizontal strip displayed at the top of the Application Window that contains menu titles.
Menu title
The word in the menu bar that designates one menu. Clicking a menu title displays its associated menu entries.
Merge
A submenu in the Item menu available when multiple items are selected.
The Merge commands (Intersection,
Union, Difference, Reverse
Difference, Exclusive Or, and
Combine) result in one box synthesized in various ways from the two or more items originally selected.
Metafile
A general term for graphics formats that describe a picture in mathematical terms such as lines and arcs, rather than as dots (as Bitmap graphics do).
Windows Metafiles (WMF) and
25.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Glossary
Computer Graphics Metafiles (CGM) are common metafile formats that
QuarkXPress can import.
Minimize button
The left button in the upper right corner of the application and document windows used to shrink their size. When clicked in the Document
window, only the title bar remains visible and is placed at the bottom of the application window. When clicked in the Application window, the entire application is reduced to a button in the taskbar.
Moiré pattern
An undesirable grid-like pattern that can result when two or more screens are superimposed at improper conflicting angles when printing.
Multiple-selected items
With the Item tool e or Content tool
E selected, you can activate more than one item at a time by pressing the
SHIFT key while clicking on the items or by dragging out an enclosing box called a marquee.
New line character
A manually inserted character
(
SHIFT
+
ENTER
) that forces a new line of text without ending a paragraph.
Next Box Page Number character
Used for a Continued on line. When entered in a text box in a multipage linked text chain, the
CTRL
+4 character displays the page number of the next linked text box. (See also Current Box
Page Number character, and Previous
Box Page Number character.)
No Style
When applied, No Style (Style
&
Character Style Sheet or Style
&
Paragraph Style Sheet) detaches any associated style sheet without altering any of the text’s character or paragraph attributes. After applying No
Style, any local character formatting will be overridden if a new style sheet is applied.
Nonbreaking space
A special character placed between two words that prevents the words from being separated by a line break. You can enter a nonbreaking space in
QuarkXPress by pressing
CTRL
+
SPACE
.
None
1) An option in the Runaround tab of the Modify dialog box (Item
&
Modify) that causes text behind the active item to flow normally (no runaround).
2) A QuarkXPress Color choice that produces a transparent effect, as in a gap or background.
Nonprinting characters
(See Invisible characters.)
Normal style sheet
Automatically applied to paragraphs and characters in newly created text boxes and text paths; its attributes determine the default text formatting.
Nudge
Moving active items in 1-point increments by pressing any arrow key 7, 8,
9 , 0 with the Item tool e selected.
With the Content tool
E selected, you can use the arrow keys to nudge the contents within an active picture box, or to move multiple-selected items. To move active items in .1-point increments, press the
ALT key and an arrow key simultaneously.
Numbering format
A section’s numeric, Roman, or alphabetic page numbering system (for example, 1, 2, 3; i, ii, iii; or a, b, c).
(See Section.)
Object color
The color of an item in front of a background color.
You can spread an object color against its background color or you can choke the background color against the object color so that, when printed, white areas do not occur between the colors. (See also Choke, Knockout,
Spread, and Trapping.)
OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)
A method developed by Microsoft that enables Windows applications to share and manipulate data. For example, you can double-click a picture box to launch the application that created the picture. Changes you make to the picture in the original application will also be made to the picture in QuarkXPress.
Offset lithography
A printing process using printing plates and ink to reproduce multiple copies of a publication.
Open/Save dialog box
A navigational dialog box for opening, saving, or accessing files.
Origin
(See Ruler origin.)
A Guide to QuarkXPress 25.13
Orphan
A single line of a paragraph left at the bottom of a column.
Outline
A type style with a white body and black borders.
Outside margin
(See Facing pages.)
Overflow
An overflow occurs when a single unlinked text box or the last box in a text chain is not large enough to contain all the text entered into it.
When this occurs, the overflow symbol t is displayed in the lower right corner of the box.
Page guides
Nonprinting lines used to position items on a page. Margin guides and ruler guides are examples. New page guides can be created by dragging out from a ruler while Show Guides is checked in the View menu.
Page Number characters
(See Current Box Page Number character, Next Box Page Number
character, and Previous Box Page
Number character.)
Page size
A document’s Width and Height as specified in the New Document dialog box (File
& New & Document) or in the Document Setup dialog box
(File
& Document Setup).
Palette
A movable control window always displayed in front of open documents.
Panel
A portion of a printed page, usually defined by folds.
PANTONE colors
Premixed ink colors that are often specified by graphic designers for spot color in multicolor print jobs.
QuarkXPress lets you specify PAN-
TONE colors that correspond to printed swatchbooks, and you can specify most PANTONE colors as either a spot
color or a process color.
Paragraph attribute
A specification applied to a paragraph.
QuarkXPress paragraph formats are:
Left Indent, First Line indent, Right
Indent, Leading, Space Before, Space
After, Lock to Baseline Grid, Drop
Caps, Keep with Next ¶, Keep Lines
Together, Alignment, H&J, Rules, and Tabs.
Pasteboard
The nonprinting area that surrounds a
QuarkXPress page or multipage spread.
Paste-up
(See Mechanical.)
PCL (Printer Control Language)
A language developed by Hewlett-
Packard for its LaserJet printers. Many laser printers produced by other printer manufacturers can emulate Hewlett-
Packard’s PCL. Two major versions of
PCL, called Level 4 and Level 5, are commonly found in laser printing.
QuarkXPress provides only limited support for PCL devices.
Percentage-based auto leading
Automatically spaces lines of text by the sum of the base amount of auto leading plus a user-specified percentage of that amount. (See also Auto
Leading and Leading.)
Pica
A common unit of typographic measurement. There are 6 picas in an inch;
12 points in a pica. (See also Point.)
Picture
In QuarkXPress, any graphic image that can be pasted or imported into a picture box.
Picture box
Created with any of the Picture Box creation tools; these boxes hold imported or pasted pictures.
Point
1) A common unit of typographic measurement. A point is approximately
1
⁄ 72 of an inch. (See also Pica.)
2) In QuarkXPress Bézier terminology, points connect line segments and define where line segments start and end. Bézier points attached to curved segments have curve handles to reshape the curves. QuarkXPress offers three types of points: Corner, Smooth, and Symmetrical. (See also Curve han- dles, Corner point, Smooth point, and Symmetrical point.)
Polygon picture box
A closed shape with three or more straight-edged sides.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems, Inc., that describes fonts, graphics, and page layout.
PPD
Abbreviation for PostScript Printer
Description file. A PPD informs desk-
25.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Glossary top publishing applications such as
QuarkXPress about the capabilities of a particular output device.
Ppi
The resolution of an image in pixels per inch.
Preferences
The Preferences (Edit menu) commands display dialog boxes that let you modify default values and enable or disable various QuarkXPress features.
Preset defaults
The preprogrammed specification settings in QuarkXPress. They remain in use until changed by the user. (See also Program defaults and User-
specified defaults.)
Previous Box Page number character
Used for a Continued from line. When entered in a text box in a multipage linked text chain, the
CTRL
+2 character displays the page number of the previous linked text box. (See also Current
Box Page Number character and
Next Box Page Number character.)
Printer driver
A system file that translates information between a computer and a printer.
Printer font
A font that is resident in the printer or downloaded to the printer during printing.
Windows Type 1 fonts have two components: a PFM file which holds the font’s metrics, and a PFB file which contains the binary printing, or outline information.
Process color
Color specified in percentages of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
When superimposed during the fourcolor printing process, their separate plates recreate a full-color look. (See
Spot Color.)
Process color separation
Breaking down color pages into the four process separation colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) before four-color printing.
Program defaults
The specification settings QuarkXPress uses. You can change most defaults; once you do, the revised settings become the new defaults. (See also
Preset defaults and User-specified
defaults.)
Proof
An intermediate stage in the document production process when pages are checked for errors and corrected.
Pull quote
A sentence or phrase, taken from the body of a story and used to attract the reader’s attention, break up gray areas, or add length to a story.
Punctuation space
A punctuation space is the width of a period in a given font.
Quark
A subatomic particle proposed as the fundamental building block of all matter. (Origin of the word is unknown; possibly from James
Joyce’s Finnegans Wake.)
Ragged right
A left-aligned paragraph with a ragged
(uneven) right edge.
Raised cap
A large decorative initial capital letter that sits on the baseline of the first line of a paragraph and rises above the other characters.
Raster graphic
(See Bitmap graphic.)
RAM
An acronym for Random Access
Memory, the portion of the computer’s memory that temporarily stores information while the computer is on.
Reflow
The repositioning of characters or line breaks. Text editing, modifications to tracking and kerning tables, or to the
QuarkXPress hyphenation exception list can cause reflow.
Registration color
A default color that you can apply to crop marks or other items to make them print on all color separation plates.
Registration mark (
:)
Reference symbols on camera-ready art, used to align overlaying plates.
QuarkXPress can automatically print registration marks.
Resident font
A font stored in a printer’s memory.
Resolution
Refers to the degree of detail. Resolution for devices and for images is usually measured in dots per inch (dpi).
Reverse Difference
A command in the Merge submenu
(Item
& Merge) that retains all the shapes except for the shape at the very back of the stack, which it cuts out. If the shape in back is overlapped, the
A Guide to QuarkXPress 25.15
overlapping portion is cut out from the shapes in front. One box results from several items selected.
Reverse type
White or light type set against a dark background.
Reversed type is sometimes referred to as dropped-out type.
RGB
An acronym for Red, Green, and
Blue. RGB is a color model based on the additive color theory, used for computer monitors and color video output systems.
Rich black
A black that incorporates other colors, such as cyan and magenta, to gain visual impact by printing darker.
Right-aligned
A right-aligned paragraph has a straight right edge and a ragged (uneven) left edge. Also called ragged left.
Right Indent
The distance from the right edge of a column or text box (plus the text inset) to the text in the paragraph(s).
Right Indent Tab character
A tab character created by pressing
SHIFT
+
TAB that places a tab stop flush with the right indent.
Right justified
(See Right-aligned.)
Right-reading, emulsion-side-down
Film printed so that the type reads correctly (left to right) when the film’s emulsion side is facing down.
Rough
Choosing Rough from the Output drop-down list in the Print dialog box
(File
& Print) prevents pictures from printing, saving time when producing drafts. Print quality and formatting are not affected by Rough.
Rough also refers to preliminary versions of a publication that are used for proofing.
RTF (Rich Text Format)
A file exchange format that preserves information about the font, font size, and type style as well as style sheet information for those applications that support style sheets.
Rule
An anchored horizontal line placed above or below a paragraph via the
Rules command (Style menu).
Ruler guides
Nonprinting lines used to align boxes and other items on a page.
Ruler origin
The movable zero point of the horizontal and vertical rulers.
Rulers
The horizontal and vertical rulers displayed along the edges of the document when Show Rulers is chosen
(View menu).
Runaround
The QuarkXPress Runaround command (Item menu) lets you control the way text flows around items and pictures placed in front of the text.
Also called text wrap.
Scalable font
A mathematically described font that prints without jagged edges at all sizes.
Type 1 and TrueType are common scalable font technologies. (See also
Bitmapped font and Printer font.)
Scaling
The enlargement or reduction of characters and pictures.
Scroll bars
Shaded bands at the right and bottom of a document that let you move your view horizontally and vertically. A scroll bar includes a scroll box and scroll arrows at both ends.
Some dialog boxes and palettes also contain scroll bars to access list items.
Section
A group of sequentially numbered pages. A document can contain many sections with varying page-numbering formats. (See also Numbering format.)
Sectioning
Dividing a document into groups of pages for organizational and numbering purposes.
Segment
A straight or curved line section between two points.
Select
To make active. For example, you select a paragraph by placing the Text
Insertion bar i within it or by highlighting any of its text.
Service bureau
A company that provides output or prepress work (imagesetting, color separation, color correction, and printing, for example) to electronic publishers.
25.16
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Glossary
Set solid
Lines of text are described as set solid when the font size equals leading value, as in 10-point type with 10 points of leading.
Shadow
A type style with a built in shadow effect.
Shape
The structure of a box, line, or text path. The Shape submenu in the
Item menu lets you choose between several types of shapes for a selected item. The polygon box shape and the polygon line shape can be chosen when the user wishes to create a shape of their own invention using
Bézier technology.
Shuffling
When QuarkXPress automatically repositions, renumbers, and reformats pages to maintain the proper left/right facing-page layout as you insert, delete, or move pages.
Sidebar
A selected subtopic or story that is often set apart using a shaded or framed box.
Skew
Slant. (See Box skew.)
Small Caps
A type style with reduced-size capital letters substituted for lowercase letters.
Smooth point
A Bézier point that connects two curved lines to form a continuous curve. The curve handles revolve together so that they always rest on a straight line through the point, but they can be distanced independently. (See also
Point, Curve handles, Corner point, and Symmetrical point.)
Smoothing
The adjustment of a bitmap image by rounding the jagged pixel edges.
Soft font
(See Downloadable font.)
Source document
The document from which you copy items or pages when copying between QuarkXPress documents.
The document to which you copy items or pages is the target document.
(See also Target document.)
Space/Align
The Item menu command to evenly distribute multiple-selected items.
Space Before/Space After
These fields in the Formats tab of the
Paragraph Attributes dialog box
(Style
& Formats) control the spacing above and below paragraphs.
Split
A submenu in the Item menu available when a single box of complex shape is selected. The box must include contours that overlap or lines that cross. The Split commands
(Outside Paths, and All Paths) result in various boxes extracted from the original box selected.
Spot color
A spot color is one that is not built using process color printing plates
(cyan, magenta, yellow, and black).
Instead, the color is printed using an ink made exclusively for that color.
When printing separations in
QuarkXPress, each spot color on a page is printed onto its own separation plate.
Spread
1) In QuarkXPress, two or more adjoining pages.
2) A QuarkXPress color trapping option where a color object is slightly enlarged when printed to overlap the edge of the “knocked-out” area of the background. (See also Choke,
Knockout, and Trapping.)
Stacking order
The position of an item (such as a box, text path, or line) relative to other items in front of or behind it.
Standard H&J specification
The default H&J specification applied to all new paragraphs.
Story
In QuarkXPress, a single set of linked text boxes.
Strike Thru
A type style with a horizontal line through the characters, usually to indicate a desired or anticipated deletion.
Style sheets
QuarkXPress has paragraph style sheets and character style sheets. A paragraph style sheet is a saved set of paragraph formats with an embedded character style sheet. A character style sheet is a saved set of character attributes.
Style Sheets palette
A movable palette displayed in front of all open documents.
The top half of the Style Sheets palette (View menu) lets you apply paragraph style sheets to selected para-
A Guide to QuarkXPress 25.17
graphs; the lower half lets you apply character style sheets to highlighted text. A plus sign (+) next to a style sheet name indicates local formatting exists at the location of the Text
Insertion bar i or in highlighted text.
A grayed style sheet icon indicates multiple style sheets are applied to the highlighted text.
Submenu
A subordinate menu that is displayed when you highlight a menu command that is followed by the
> icon.
Subscript
A type style with a reduced size that is lowered below its baseline.
Superior
A type style with a reduced size, whose top is aligned with the cap height of the adjacent text.
Superscript
A type style with a reduced size that is raised above its baseline.
Symmetrical point
A Bézier point that connects two curved lines to form a continuous curve. The curve handles move together so that they always rest on a straight line through the point and are always equidistant from the point. The result is similar to a Smooth point, but the curve handles cannot be distanced from the point independently. (See also Point, Curve handles, Corner
point, and Smooth point.)
System Menu
A Windows menu accessed by clicking the icon in the upper left corner of a window. It contains commands that allow you to move, resize, and close the window.
Tab
1) A character entered with the Tab key, which places subsequent text on the line according to the next tab stop.
2) A panel in a tabbed dialog box.
Tab stop
Positioned by the user, a tab stop determines where subsequent text on a line will appear when you enter a Tab character with the Tab key. Tabs are most often used to align columns of numbers or tables of words.
Tabbed dialog box
A dialog box that consists of two or more “panels.” Each tab contains a separate control set which can be displayed by clicking its name at the top.
Target document
The document to which you copy items or pages when copying between
QuarkXPress documents. (See also
Source document.)
Template
A preformatted write-protected document used as a basis for creating new documents that will share common elements.
Text box
Created with one of the Text Box creation tools; these boxes hold entered or imported text.
Text chain
A set of linked text boxes and/or text paths through which text can flow.
Sometimes called a story.
Text file
Contains only textual information without any character formatting or page layout attributes applied.
Text Insertion bar
The blinking bar i displayed in an active text box to indicate the Text
Insertion point.
Text Insertion point
The point in a text box where newly entered or imported text is placed, indicated by the blinking Text
Insertion bar i.
Text Inset
The user-specified distance between the edge of a text box and the text within.
Text path
A straight or curved line that contains text; created with one of the Text-
Path tools.
Text reflow
(See Reflow.)
Text to box
A command in the Style menu that is available whenever text is selected. It creates a polygonal Bézier box based on the curves of the selected characters.
Text wrap
(See Runaround.)
Thumbnail
A reduced view that lets you move pages within and between documents.
Tick mark
A mark that uses two line segments that meet at a right angle to indicate the way adjoining tiles align after printing an oversized page.
25.18
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Glossary
TIFF
Acronym for Tagged Image File
Format. TIFF pictures can be blackand-white line art, grayscale, or color.
Tiling
Outputting an oversized document page in sections. The tiles are then assembled manually.
Tool palette
A movable palette with the tools to create items and perform operations.
TOYO colors
Premixed ink colors that can be specified for spot color in multicolor print jobs.
QuarkXPress lets you specify TOYO colors, popular in Japan, that correspond to a printed swatchbook.
Tracking
The adjustment of white space between selected characters and words.
By specifying positive or negative tracking values, you can adjust overall character spacing for selected text.
Tracking Edit
The Tracking Edit dialog box
(Utilities menu) lets you control the tracking values for a particular font.
Trap Information palette
A movable palette that lets you specify trapping on an object-by-object basis.
Trapping
A slight overlapping that prevents gaps from appearing along the edges of an object because of misalignment or movement on-press.
Trapping values are specified on a color-by-color or object-by-object basis. (See also Choke and Spread.)
Trim
Cutting press sheets to the finished page size.
True negative
A negative created from a picture’s original, unmodified contrast.
TRUMATCH colors
A color matching system for specifying predictable four-color (CMYK) reproduction of more than 2,000 process colors.
Two-fold
A publication or brochure design with six panels, three on each side, defined by two folds.
Type family
A group of related typefaces. For example, the Futura type family includes
Futura, Futura Book, Futura Condensed, and Futura Extra Bold.
Type Style
This character attribute command lets you apply any of 13 type styles to highlighted text: Plain, Bold, Italic,
Underline, Word Underline, Strike
Thru, Outline, Shadow, All Caps,
Small Caps, Superscript, Subscript, and Superior.
Typeface
A set of fonts that share a unified design. For example, the Futura typeface includes Futura, Futura Bold,
Futura Italic, and Futura Bold Italic.
Typesetter’s quotation marks
The curly quotation marks (“,”,‘, and ’) preferred by traditional typesetters.
Underline
A type style with a line underneath characters, including spaces.
Ungroup
(See Group.)
Union
A command in the Merge submenu
(Item
& Merge) that combines all the selected item shapes into one shape, retaining all overlapped areas and nonoverlapped areas. One box results from several items selected.
User-specified defaults
Program defaults that have been specified by the user. (See also Preset
defaults and Program defaults.)
Vertical alignment
Controls the vertical placement of text in a box: Top, Centered,
Bottom, and Justified.
Vertical centering
The positioning of text equidistant from the top and bottom of a text box.
Vertical justification
(See Vertical alignment.)
White space
Page areas without text or pictures, often for graphic design effect.
Widow
The last line of a paragraph left alone at the top of a column.
Window
In QuarkXPress, a rectangular area on the screen that displays an open document or application. (See also
Application window and Document
window.)
A window generally includes a title bar with the name of the application or document, buttons for maximizing and minimizing the window, scroll bars, and a control menu box.
A Guide to QuarkXPress 25.19
WMF
Acronym for Windows Metafile. A graphics format containing raster or vector data that QuarkXPress can import.
Word space
The amount of space between words.
(See also H&J, Kerning, and Tracking.)
Word Underline
A type style with a line underneath all characters except spaces.
WYSIWYG
An acronym for “What You See Is
What You Get.” It refers to a screen display that accurately reflects the look of the final, printed page.
x-height
The height of a lowercase x for a given font, as measured from the baseline.
The x-height is also the height of most lowercase letters in a font (not including ascenders and descenders).
XPress Preferences
A file located in the QuarkXPress folder (XPress.PRF), which contains program default settings for style sheets, colors, H&J specifications, hyphenation exceptions, dashes and stripes, print styles, and Preferences
(Application and Document).
XPress Tags
An option for saving text files with complete QuarkXPress character-formatting information. This format is used only by QuarkXPress.
XTensions software
Add-on software that extends the capabilities of QuarkXPress. XTensions can add tools and menu commands to
QuarkXPress for specialized needs.
Some XTensions are marketed to the general public, and others are developed exclusively for private use.
25.20
A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
26
For internal use by licensee only. The information in this electronic file may not be disseminated in any form to any unlicensed person or entity without prior written consent of Quark Technology Partnership or its licensee, Quark, Inc.
A
Abbreviations for values in fields, xxxi,
3.58
Absolute leading, 3.127, 12.22, 25.2
Absolute page number, 25.2
Specifying, 3.206, 3.208, 14.13,
18.14, 18.17, 24.14
Absolute trapping method, 3.74
Accents for All Caps check box
(Document Preferences dialog box
Character tab), 3.70
Accurate Blends check box
(Document Preferences dialog box
General tab), 3.63, 7.30, 15.22
Active items, 25.2
Actual Size command (View menu),
5.7
Add Letter Headings check box
(Build Index dialog box), 20.21
Add New Chapter dialog box, 18.6
Add Point pointer
V, 1.9
Adobe Type Manager (ATM), 13.4
Agates, 25.2
Align On tab, 25.2
Align Text drop-down list (Modify dialog box Text Path tab), 3.165,
13.19–13.20
Align with Line drop-down list
(Modify dialog box Text Path tab),
3.165, 13.19–13.20
Align with Text area
Modify dialog box Box tab, 3.156
Modify dialog box Line tab, 3.163
Aligning
Anchored boxes with text, 13.28
Items, 9.17–9.19
Shapes (Bézier boxes), 7.45–7.46
Alignment, 25.2
Paragraph, specifying, 3.130–3.131,
12.19–12.20
Vertical, specifying, 3.168–3.169,
12.51–12.53
Alignment buttons (for setting tabs),
3.134–3.135
Alignment drop-down list (Paragraph
Attributes dialog box Formats tab),
3.130–3.131
Alignment submenu (Style menu),
3.126–3.127
All Caps type style, 3.121, 12.7, 25.2
Accents for, 3.70–3.71
All Paths command, 3.190, 7.37
Alpha channel(s), 3.177, 13.10, 14.31
Embedded
Accessing information about,
13.9–13.10, 14.31
File formats that include, 14.31
Alpha Channel option
Clipping path type, 3.176, 3.177,
14.31
Runaround type, 13.10
Anchor, 25.2
Anchored boxes, 13.27–13.29
Aligning with text, 13.28
Content, 13.27
Copying, 13.29
Creating initial caps using, 13.23
Cutting, 13.29
Deleting, 13.29
Formatting, 13.23
Hanging to left of indented text,
13.28
Leading and, 13.27–13.28
Measurements palette for, 2.6, 2.7
Anchored boxes, continued
Pasting, 13.29
Positioning in surrounding text,
13.28
Resizing and reshaping, 13.29
Unanchoring, 13.29
See also Anchoring
Anchored rules
Between columns, 13.26
Removing, 13.26
Reverse type, creating with, 13.24
Space before and after paragraphs, effect with, 13.26
Specifying, 13.24–13.26
As style sheet attribute, 13.25
See also Anchoring
Anchoring
Boxes and lines in text, 9.5,
13.27–13.29
Converted boxes, 13.3
Text to Box boxes, 13.23, 13.27
See also Anchored boxes and
Anchored rules
Append, 25.2
Append Conflict dialog box, 3.14,
12.36–12.37
Append to dialog box, 3.13, 12.36
Appending
Colors, 3.88–3.89, 15.6, 15.11, 15.17
Dashes and stripes, 3.112
H&Js, 3.100, 12.35–12.36
Lists, 3.107
Multiple attributes, 12.36
Style sheets, 3.82, 12.45–12.46
Application preferences, 3.49–3.57
26. 2 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Application Preferences dialog box,
3.49–3.57, 4.5–4.6
Changes saved in XPress Preferences file, 4.10–4.12
Application window, 25.2
Apply button, xxxii, 15.21
Areas in dialog boxes, xxx
Arrow keys
Navigating through lists using, xxx
Arrow pointer a, 1.7, 1.12, 1.28
Arrowhead pointer
;, 1.12, 9.20
Arrowheads for lines, specifying, 3.150,
3.161, 8.22
Ascender, 13.19, 25.2
Ascent, 3.65, 25.2
Ascent option for first baseline position, 3.168, 12.50–12.51
ASCII text, 11.6, 11.7, 24.27, 25.2
Formatting imported, 11.7
Aspect ratio, 25.2
Attributes, see Character attributes
Auto Amount field (Document
Preferences dialog box Trapping tab), 3.75
Auto Amount trapping value,
16.6–16.11
Changing, 16.25
Auto backup document
Recovering, 3.56, 6.11
Auto Backup feature, 6.10–6.11
Destination folder, 3.55–3.56, 6.10
Using with Auto Save, 6.9
Auto Constrain check box
(Document Preferences dialog box
General tab), 3.64, 9.6, 9.13
Auto Hyphenation area (Edit
Hyphenation & Justification dialog box), 3.101–3.102
Auto Kern Above check box
(Document Preferences dialog box
Character tab), 3.69–3.70, 12.14,
12.15
Auto leading, 3.64–3.65, 3.127–3.128,
12.22–12.23, 25.2
Anchored items and, 13.27
See also Leading
Auto Leading field (Document
Preferences dialog box Paragraph tab), 3.64–3.65
Auto Library Save check box
(Application Preferences dialog box Save tab), 3.56, 17.10
Auto Page Insertion feature,
3.58–3.59, 25.2
Deleting pages and, 3.209, 10.18
Imported text and, 11.6–11.7
Text overflow and, 3.58–3.59,
10.23–10.24
Auto Picture Import drop-down list
(Document Preferences dialog box
General tab), 3.60–3.61, 14.39
Auto Save feature, 3.55, 6.8–6.9
Using with Auto Backup, 6.9
Auto saved document
Recovering, 6.9
Automatic drop caps, 13.21–13.22
Automatic hyphenation, 3.67, 25.2
See also Hyphenation
Automatic page number characters,
3.206, 3.209, 3.213, 25.3
Placing page numbers in books using, 18.10
Automatic page numbering, 10.15
Automatic text box(es), xxiv, 3.6, 10.4,
25.3
Columns for, 5.11
Automatic text box(es), continued
Creating
On master pages, 10.22–10.23
For new document, 10.21–10.22
Size, 5.11, 6.4
Automatic text chain, xxiv, 10.4, 25.3
Auxiliary dictionary, 3.225–3.231,
11.22–11.23, 25.3
Adding words to, 11.23
While checking spelling, 11.23
Associated with document, 11.23
Change saved, 4.11
Default
Choosing, 4.4
Creating, 4.4, 11.22
Error messages, 24.12–24.13,
24.19–24.20
Missing, 3.230, 11.23
For multilingual documents
(QuarkXPress Passport), 23.8
Available Styles list (Edit List dialog box), 19.4–19.5
B
Back to Front check box (Print dialog box Document tab), 3.23, 21.5
Background(s), 25.3
Behavior, 7.31
Background color(s), 15.23, 16.3,
16.12–16.15, 25.3
Trapping EPS pictures to,
16.21–16.23
Trapping to indeterminate, 3.76, 16.7
Background Color column (Trap
Specifications dialog box), 3.95
Background pictures
Trapping QuarkXPress items to, 16.19
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 3
BACKSPACE key
Using to delete points in a Bézier item, 3.186
Bad file format error(s), 22.5, 24.16
Based on drop-down list (Edit
Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box),
3.83, 12.40
Baseline(s), 13.20, 25.3
Baseline grid, 25.3
Displaying, 3.66, 3.219
First baseline position, 3.66,
12.49–12.51
Increment value, 3.66, 12.49
Locking paragraphs to, 3.67, 12.49
Specifying, 12.48
Baseline shift, 25.3
Applying to text, 3.124, 12.10
Baseline Shift command (Style menu), 3.124
Beveled-corner box, 25.3
Bézier box(es), 3.197–3.199
Converting
To Bézier line, 7.40
Contents, 13.4
Line to, 8.10
Non-Bézier box to, 7.17
Text to, 13.3–13.4
Creating, 7.5–7.7
Moving, 7.18–7.19
Reshaping, 1.8–1.9, 7.12–7.17
While drawing, 7.14
Bézier curve(s), 25.3
Editing, 1.24, 1.26
Bézier item(s), 1.24
Deleting points, 1.8, 3.186, 9.7
Measurements palette for editing,
2.10–2.11
Bézier item(s), continued
PostScript errors and, 22.13
Reshaping, 1.8–1.9, 1.24, 1.26
Selecting all points in, 1.8, 3.39
Bézier line(s), 3.197–3.199
Accessing, 8.12
Converting straight line to, 8.10
Creating, 8.3–8.6
Moving, 8.19–8.20
Origin, 8.20
Reshaping, 8.11–8.15
Adding and deleting points, 8.15
Keyboard commands and modifier keys for, 8.14–8.15
While drawing, 8.13
Resizing, 3.162, 8.8–8.9
Bézier polygon box, 25.3
Bézier tools, 1.24–1.25
Box tools
´, ∂, 7.4, 7.5, 7.40–7.42,
25.3
Line tool
∞, 8.4–8.5, 8.7
Text-Path tool
Â, 13.17
Binary image data, 14.14
Binary search (troubleshooting technique), 22.7
Bit depth, 14.4
Bitmap graphic(s), 14.3–14.5, 25.3
Applying color to, 15.19
Resizing, 14.4
Blank facing-page icon
!, 10.5
Blank pages, printing, 3.23, 21.5
Blank single-page icon
0, 10.5
Bleed(s), 25.3
Using pasteboard for, 5.9
Bleed field
Document tab (Print dialog box),
3.24, 21.6
Save Page as EPS dialog box,
3.15–3.16, 14.14
Specifying appropriate value, 21.8
Blend(s), 25.3
Applying to
Groups of boxes, 15.22
Multiple-selected boxes, 3.160
Controlling monitor display of, 3.63
Creating with Colors palette,
15.23–15.24
See also Blending colors
Blending colors, 3.159–3.160,
7.29–7.31, 15.21, 15.23–15.24
See also Blend(s)
Body copy, 25.3
Bold type style, 3.121, 12.7, 25.4
Book(s), 18.1–18.18, 25.4 (see also
Chapters)
Creating new, 18.3
Error messages, 24.23
Lists for, 19.11
Maximum number of open, 18.4
Opening, 18.4–18.5
Saving changes, 18.5
Sharing files, 18.3
Book Chapter Start check box
(Section dialog box), 3.213, 18.12
Book palette(s), 18.4, 19.11
Chapters listed in, 18.7
Border, see Frame(s)
Bottom vertical alignment, 3.169,
12.51–12.53
Effects with Lock to Baseline Grid,
12.54
26. 4 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Bounding box, 7.8, 7.13, 25.4
Duplicating irregularly shaped items,
9.16
Spacing and aligning irregularly shaped items, 9.17
Box(es), xxiv, 7.1–7.47, 25.4
Applying color to, 3.158–3.159,
7.29–7.31
Converting, 7.10, 7.38–7.39
Creating, 1.16–1.19, 7.3–7.7
Circular, 1.16, 1.18, 7.4
Square, 1.16, 1.18, 7.4
Filling, 7.38
Framing, 3.59, 3.172, 7.20–7.28
Merging, 7.32–7.36
Moving, 7.18–7.19
Reshaping, 7.10–7.17
Keyboard commands and modifier keys for, 7.17
Resizing, 7.8–7.9
Rotating, 3.157, 1.12, 7.18, 14.20
Selecting, 7.38
Skewing, 3.157, 7.18, 25.4
Splitting, 3.190, 7.32, 7.36–7.37
Suppressing printout, 3.158, 14.40,
22.13
Too narrow, 24.9
Transparent, 15.20
Trapping, 16.16–16.18
Types, 7.3
Box tab (Modify dialog box),
3.155–3.160
Break Capitalized Words check box
(Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box), 3.101, 12.32
Brightness (of a color), 15.12
Adjusting, 15.15
Bring Forward command (Item menu), 3.192, 9.10–9.11
Bring to Front command (Item menu), 3.192, 9.10–9.11
Broken Chain icon
U, 3.59, 3.207,
10.22
Build button (Lists palette), 19.8
Build Index dialog box, 20.21
Button, xxxii
C
Callout, 25.4
Cap, 25.4
Cap height, 13.19, 25.4
Cap Height option for first baseline position, 3.168, 12.50–12.51
Cap + Accent option for first baseline position, 3.168, 12.50–12.51
Capitalization of replacement words
(check spelling), 3.228
Capture Settings button (Print dialog box), 3.22, 4.16, 21.18
Cascading documents, 5.3
Case, 25.4
Center-aligned, 25.4
Centered alignment (for paragraphs),
3.126, 3.130–3.131, 12.19–12.20
Centered vertical alignment, 3.169,
12.51–12.53
Effects with Lock to Baseline Grid,
12.55
CGM (Computer Graphics Metafile),
25.4
Change All button (Find/Change palette), 3.48, 11.10–11.11, 11.15
Change button (Find/Change palette), 3.48, 11.11, 11.15
Change Icon dialog box, 3.38–3.39
Change Source dialog box, 3.40
Change, then Find button
(Find/Change palette), 3.48, 11.11,
11.15
Change to, 25.4
Change To area (Find/Change palette), 3.47
Chapters, 18.6–18.10 (see also Book[s])
Adding to books, 18.5, 18.6–18.7
Closing, 18.9
Formatting with templates before adding to book, 18.5
Master, 18.6–18.7
Missing, 2.27, 18.8, 18.9, 18.17,
19.11
Opening, 18.8–18.9
Page numbers, controlling,
18.11–18.12
Printing, 18.16–18.17
Removing, 18.10
Reordering, 18.9
Sectioned vs. nonsectioned,
18.11–18.12
Status, 18.7–18.8
Synchronizing, 18.13–18.15
Character(s), 25.4
Crossplatform issues, 24.41
Deleting, 11.5
Character attribute(s), 25.4
Applying, 12.5–12.12
Baseline shift, 3.124, 12.10, 12.12
Color, 3.122, 12.7–12.8, 12.11
Font, 12.5, 12.11
Horizontal/vertical scaling, 3.123,
12.9, 12.11
Kerning, 3.123, 12.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 5
Character attributes, continued
Applying
Multiple, via Character Attributes dialog box, 3.124–3.125,
12.11–12.12
Shade, 3.122, 12.7–12.8, 12.11
Size, 12.6, 12.11
Tracking, 3.123–3.124, 12.11
Type styles, 3.121–3.122, 12.6–12.7,
12.12
Finding and changing, 11.12–11.15
Character Attributes dialog box,
3.124–3.125, 12.12
Applying color and shade to text using, 15.27–15.28
Character command (Style menu),
3.119, 3.124
Character space, 25.4
Character style sheet(s), 3.84–3.85,
3.125–3.126, 12.42–12.45
Applying, 12.44–12.45
Applying color and shade to text using, 15.26–15.27
Associating with paragraph style sheets, 12.43–12.44
Finding and changing, 3.46–3.47,
11.14
See also Paragraph style sheets and
Style sheets
Character Style Sheet submenu (Style menu), 3.125–3.126
Character tab (Document Preferences dialog box), 3.67–3.71
Charts used in this book, xxi
Check box, xxxii, 25.4
Check mark in a menu, xxix
Checking spelling, 3.226–3.231,
11.19–11.23
Document, 3.229, 11.19–11.21
Checking spelling, continued
Keyboard commands for, 11.21
Checking spelling, continued
Master pages, 3.229, 11.19
In multilingual documents
(QuarkXPress Passport), 23.7–23.8
Story, 3.227–3.228, 10.21,
11.19–11.21
Word, 3.226–3.227, 11.19–11.21
Choke (trapping option), 3.94, 16.3,
25.4
Choose, 25.4
Cicero, 25.4
Ciceros/cm field (Document
Preferences dialog box General tab), 3.62
CIELAB color space, 3.90, 15.13
Clean 8-bit format, 3.30, 14.14, 21.15
Client application, 3.35, 14.11
Clipboard, 9.5, 11.4, 14.11, 25.4
Deleted items not copied to, 9.7
Showing and hiding, 3.43
Clipping path(s), 3.174–3.181,
25.4–25.5
Color, changing, 3.175, 14.30
Complexity (too many points), 3.180
Creating and editing, 14.29–14.37
Editing manually, 14.37
Editing unavailable, 14.37
Embedded, 3.175, 14.31
File formats that include, 14.31
High-resolution picture files and,
14.32
Runaround paths and, 13.8, 14.29
Special effects, creating with,
14.35–14.36
Tolerance, 3.179–3.180
Types of, 3.176–3.178
Clipping tab (Modify dialog box),
3.174–3.181
Close Box pointer
V, 1.25, 1.26,
7.6–7.7
Close command (File menu), 3.8
Close icon (ICON), 5.3
Closed path, 7.40
CMYK, 25.5
CMYK color model, 3.90, 15.6,
15.12–15.13
Collated copies of a document
Printing multiple, 3.22–3.23, 21.5
Collect for Output command (File menu), xxvii, 3.17–3.18, 21.29
Color(s), 15.1–15.29
Adding to color list, 8.25, 15.6
Appending, 15.6, 15.11, 15.17
Applying to
Boxes, 7.29–7.31, 15.19–15.25
Frames, 3.173, 7.20–7.21, 15.20,
15.22
Grouped or multiple-selected items,
15.25
Lines, 3.163–3.164, 3.151,
8.24–8.25, 15.28–15.29
Pictures, 3.143, 3.171–3.172,
14.21–14.22
Rules, 3.139
Text, 12.7–12.8, 15.25–15.28
Converting custom, 15.9
Creating, 4.3, 15.11–15.16
Default, 4.3, 15.7, 15.11
Document-specific, 15.7
Deleting, 4.3, 15.10, 15.17
Dragging and dropping, 7.31, 14.22,
15.21
Duplicating, 15.17
Editing, 4.3, 15.8–15.11, 15.16
26. 6 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Color(s), continued
Default, 15.8–15.9
Document-specific, 15.8
Trapping specifications for, 15.11
Globally changing, 15.16, 15.18
Specifying
Spot vs. process, 15.3, 15.7
As style sheet attribute, 15.26
See also Blend(s) and Blending colors
Color matching systems available in
QuarkXPress, 15.4–15.5, 15.6
Color mode(s), 14.4
Color model(s), 3.90–3.91, 15.6, 25.5
Changing, 15.16
Removing unused files, 15.11
Color separations, 14.26, 25.5
Printing, 21.4, 21.21
Turning on and off, 21.8
Color submenu
Style menu for lines, 3.151
Style menu for pictures, 3.143
Style menu for text, 3.122
Color TIFFs drop-down list
(Application Preferences dialog box Display tab), 3.50
Color wheel options, 3.92
Colors dialog box, 3.85–3.89, 15.6–15.9
Opening from Colors palette, 15.23
Colors palette, 2.19–2.20, 15.6–15.7,
25.5
Applying color and shade to
Boxes, 15.22
Frames, 7.21, 15.22–15.23
Lines, 15.29
Text, 15.25
Blends, specifying, 15.21,
15.23–15.24
Colors palette, continued
Displaying, 3.223, 7.31
Dragging and dropping colors, 7.31,
14.22, 15.21
Color-specific trapping
Specifying, 16.4, 16.12–16.16
Column(s), 25.5
Number on page, 3.166, 3.211, 6.4
Too narrow, 24.9
Working with, 10.28–10.29
Column guides, 3.5, 3.211
Changing, 5.11, 10.11
Specifying, 5.11
Columnar tables
Using tabs to create, 12.25
Combine (merge option), 3.189, 7.36,
25.5
Comp, 25.5
Compression, lossy, 14.6
Concept blocks, xx
DPI vs. LPI, 21.30–21.35
Nonmatching preferences, 4.18–4.21
Picture file formats, 14.3–14.8
Symmetry and smoothness, 7.40–7.47
Trapping, 16.3–16.4
Condensed type, 25.5
Conflicts, resolving
H&Js, 12.36–12.37
Style sheets, 12.47
Constrain command (Item menu),
3.187–3.188, 9.13, 24.10, 25.5
Constraining grouped items, 3.64, 9.13
Content change, 25.5
Content submenu (Item menu), 3.199
Content tool
E, xxiii, 1.5, 1.7–1.11
Selecting items with, 9.3
“Continued” references, 10.26–10.27
“Continued from” line, 25.5
“Continued on” line, 25.5
Multiple, 10.27
Contrast, 25.5
Contrast command (Style menu),
3.143
Contrast curve(s), 3.144, 14.24–14.26
Manipulating multiple, 14.25
Undoing most recent change to,
14.26
Contrast tools, 3.145–3.146,
14.25–14.26
Contributors list, creating, 19.3
Controls, 25.5
Convert Quotes check box (Get Text dialog box), 3.10, 11.7
Converting
Boxes, 7.10, 7.38–7.39
Color and grayscale images upon import, 14.10
Cool Blends XTensions software, 7.30,
15.23
Copies field (Print dialog box), 3.21,
21.18
Copy command (Edit menu), 3.34
Copyfitting, 25.5
Copying
Items, 9.5–9.6
Between documents, 10.32, 10.34
Pages
Between documents, 10.32–10.34
Corner (of a Bézier box), 7.41
Corner point(s), 3.202, 7.12, 8.11, 25.5
Changing to smooth point, 1.9
Creating, 1.24–1.25
Corner radius, 1.17, 1.19, 3.158, 7.11
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 7
Corruption (file damage), 22.5
Create from File button (Insert
Object dialog box), 3.43, 14.12
Create New button (Insert Object dialog box), 3.42, 14.12
Crop, 25.5
Crop marks, 25.6
Printing, 21.5
Crop to Box button
Clipping tab, 3.176, 14.36
Runaround tab, 13.14
Crosshair pointer c, 1.16, 1.18, 1.20,
1.22, 1.24, 1.26, 25.6
Crossplatform issues, 24.40–24.42
Cross-references (in index)
Creating, 20.14–20.16
Punctuation for, 20.14
Style sheets for, 20.14
Current Box Page Number character,
25.6
See also Next Box Page Number character and Previous Box Page
Number character
Current page, 3.212
Curve handle(s), 1.8–1.9, 1.24, 7.6,
7.12, 7.13, 8.5, 8.11, 25.6
Angle difference of 180°, 7.44
Constraining to 45° angles, 7.7, 8.6
Line segments and, 7.15, 8.14
Shift-dragging, 7.42
Curve Handle pointers
Ï, Ó, 1.8–1.9,
7.14, 8.12
Curved Segment command,
3.203–3.204
Cut command (Edit menu), 3.34, 25.6
Cutting items, 9.5–9.6
CV (after PANTONE No. field), 3.93
D
Dash (broken line style)
Editing, 3.113
Dash (punctuation mark), see Em dash
and En dash
Dashes & stripes, 25.6
Dashes & Stripes dialog box, xxv,
3.110–3.116, 7.22, 8.21
Data drop-down list
Print dialog box Options tab, 3.30,
21.15
Save Page as EPS dialog box, 3.16
DCS 1.0 (“five-file format”), 14.6
DCS 2.0, 14.6
Deactivate, 25.6
Decimal tab, 25.6
Default(s), 25.6
Dragging library entry into a document, effects on, 17.6
Setting, 4.3–4.4
See also Preset defaults, Program defaults, and User-specified defaults
Default colors, 3.85, 15.8–15.9, 25.6
Default Colors dialog box, 15.6,
15.8–15.9
Default Prefs button (Document
Preferences dialog box Tool tab),
3.72
Default Tool Palette button
(Document Preferences dialog box
Tool tab), 3.72–3.73
Default Trap information window
(Trap Information palette),
2.23–2.25
Default trapping
Methods, 16.6
Specifying, 16.4, 16.6–16.11
Defragmenting a hard drive, 22.8–22.9
Delayed Item Dragging area
(Application Preferences dialog box), 3.53
Delete button (ICON)
Document Layout palette, 10.6
Index palette, 20.7, 20.18
Delete Changes option, 10.6, 10.10
Delete command, 25.6
Edit menu, 3.39
Item menu, 3.186
Delete Pages dialog box, 10.18
Deleting
Colors, 15.10, 15.17
Items, 9.7
Pages, 3.208–3.209, 10.18
Blank, 10.18
Master pages, 10.6
Dependent/Independent drop-down list (Trap Specifications dialog box), 3.97, 16.15
Descender, 13.19–13.20, 25.6
Descent, 3.65, 13.20, 25.6
Deselecting items, 9.3
Desktop Color Separations, 14.6
Destination folder, 3.55, 6.10
Dialog box(es), xxxii–xxxv, 25.6
Resetting values in, 9.8
DIC colors, 3.90, 15.5, 15.6, 25.6
Didot, 25.6
Difference (merge option), 3.189,
7.34, 7.45, 25.6
Dimensions of a picture, 14.4
26. 8 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Discretionary Hyphen character, 3.233,
12.31, 25.6
Discretionary New Line character, 25.6
Disk space, insufficient, 24.5
Display DPI Value field (Application
Preferences dialog box Display tab), 3.51, 5.7
Display submenu (Page menu), 3.216
Display tab (Application Preferences dialog box), 3.50
Distribute Evenly buttons
(Space/Align Items dialog box),
3.194, 3.196, 9.18
Dither, 25.7
Document(s)
Cannot be opened by this version of
QuarkXPress, 24.5
Cascading, 5.3
Created in earlier version of
QuarkXPress, 24.6–24.7
Created in newer version of
QuarkXPress, 24.18
Creating new, 6.3–6.4
Displaying on-screen, 5.3
Navigating, 5.4–5.6
Keyboard shortcuts for, 5.5
Opening, 6.5
From previous versions of
QuarkXPress, 6.5, 6.7
Preparing for service bureau, 21.29
Previewing, 3.221
Printing, 21.1–21.35
Collated copies, multiple, 21.5
Odd-sized, 21.25–21.28
Resizing, 10.30–10.31
Saving, 6.6–6.7
Automatically, 6.8–6.9
Revisions, 3.55, 6.10–6.11
As templates, 6.6, 6.12–6.13
Document(s), continued
Searching, 11.13
Sectioning, 10.15–10.16
Switching between, 5.3
Tiling
On-screen, 5.3
When printing, 3.23, 21.25–21.26
Document basics, 6.1–6.13
Document check box (Find/Change palette), 3.45
Document layout, 10.1–10.34
Document Layout palette, xxvi,
2.14–2.16, 10.4–10.10, 10.12–10.14,
25.7
Areas
Document page, 2.16
Master pages, 2.15–2.16
Page insert, duplicate, and delete,
2.14–2.15
Displaying, 3.222
Master page icon not visible, 10.7
Navigating documents using, 5.5
Rearranging master pages, 10.8
Document preferences, 3.49
Document Preferences dialog box,
3.57–3.78, 4.6–4.7
Changes saved, 4.11
Document Setup dialog box,
3.19–3.20, 10.30–10.31
Document tab (Print dialog box)
Specifying settings, 3.22–3.24,
21.4–21.6
Document views, see View percentage
Document window(s), 25.7
Dongle, 25.7
Dot leader, 25.7
Dots
Halftone, 21.30–21.34
Machine, 21.30–21.34
Scan, 21.34
Dots per inch (dpi), 25.7
Adjusting value, 21.33–21.34
Double-click, 25.7
Downloadable font, 25.7
Drag, 25.7
Drag and Drop Text check box
(Application Preferences dialog box Interactive tab), 3.53–3.54
Dragging
Items, 1.7–1.8
Linked text boxes, 10.33
Thumbnails, 5.7, 10.33–10.34
Dragging and dropping
Colors, 7.31, 14.22
Pictures, 7.38, 14.10, 14.39
Text, 3.53–3.54, 11.4
Driver version, 24.4
Drop cap(s), 25.7
Automatic, specifying, 13.21–13.22
Formatting, 13.22
Drop Caps area (Paragraph Attributes dialog box Formats tab), 3.131
Drop-down list, xxxii, 25.7
Dropped-out type, see Reverse type
Drop-shadow box, 25.7
Drop-shadow characters, 25.7
Duplicate button (ICON), 10.5
Duplicate command (Item menu),
3.184, 9.14
Duplicating and repeating items, 7.44,
9.14–9.16
Constrained items, 9.14
Error messages, 24.12
Stacking order, 9.14
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 9
E
Edit button (ICON) (Index palette),
20.7, 20.15, 20.17–20.18
Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box,
3.85
Edit Color dialog box, 3.89–3.94,
15.4–15.5, 15.10–15.18
Edit Dash dialog box, 3.111–3.112
Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box, 3.101–3.105
Edit Kerning Table dialog box,
3.246–3.247
Edit List dialog box, 3.107–3.108
Edit menu, 3.33–3.118
Edit mode (indexing)
Shortcut, 20.15
Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box, 3.82–3.84, 12.41
Edit Print Style dialog box, 3.118
Edit Range Separators dialog box,
3.22, 21.18
Edit Stripe dialog box, 3.115–3.116
Edit submenu (Item menu),
3.199–3.200
Edit Tracking dialog box, 3.244
Editing text, 11.3–11.5
Ellipsis, 25.7
After menu entry, xxx
Elliptical box, 25.7
Em dash, 25.7
Em space, 25.7
Width of, 3.70, 3.104, 12.13, 12.16
Embedded object, 3.236
Embedded Path option
Clipping path type, 3.176–3.177,
3.178, 14.31
Runaround type, 13.9
Emulsion, 25.7
En dash, 25.7
En space, 3.104, 25.8
End of Document option (Auto Page
Insertion drop-down list), 10.24
End of Section option (Auto Page
Insertion drop-down list), 10.23
End of story icon, placing, 12.25
End of Story option (Auto Page
Insertion drop-down list), 10.23
End-of-line character, see New Line character
Endpoints
Straight lines, 1.13, 1.20, 2.8–2.10,
3.161–3.162
Straight text paths, 1.22
Entries list (Index palette), 20.8
EPS (Encapsulated PostScript), 14.6,
25.8
Embedded paths, 14.31
EPS pictures, 3.142
Crossplatform transfer, 24.41–24.42
Importing, 3.11
Previews, 14.7
Saving pages as, 3.15, 14.13–14.15,
24.42
Scaling imported, 16.21
Trapping to background colors, 16.22
Error messages (warnings) generated by
QuarkXPress (listed numerically),
24.3–24.26
Exclusive Or (merge option), 3.189,
7.35, 25.8
Exit command (File menu), 3.32
Exit Preview command (View menu),
3.221
Export, 25.8
F
Facing pages, 25.8
Changing to nonfacing, 3.20, 10.10
Facing pages check box
Checked but unavailable, 3.20, 10.31
Document Setup dialog box,
3.19–3.20, 10.10
New Document dialog box, 6.4,
10.4–10.5
Fatal error, 24.5
Field(s), xxxi, 25.8
Performing math in, xxxi, 7.47,
12.26
Figure space, 25.8
File(s)
Transferring between Windows and
Mac OS, 24.40–24.42
File formats
Picture, 3.236, 14.3–14.8
Table of, 3.142, 14.8
Text, 11.6
File menu, 3.3–3.32
File name(s), eight-character, 24.40
File name extension, 24.40
Files of type field (Open dialog box),
6.5
Fill character(s), 3.135, 12.27, 25.8
Filter, see Import/Export filters(s)
Find First button (Find/Change palette), 3.48, 11.9
Find Next button (Find/Change palette), 3.48, 11.10
Find What area (Find/Change palette), 3.46
Find What text, 11.10–11.11, 25.8
Find What/Change To text fields
(Find/Change palette), 3.44
26. 10 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Find/Change palette, 3.43–3.48,
11.9–11.15
Changing found items, 11.10, 11.15
Finding and changing
Character attributes, 11.12–11.15
On document pages, 3.45
Invisible characters, 3.44, 11.11
On master pages, 3.45, 11.11
In story, 3.45
Style sheets, 11.14
Text, 11.9–11.11
Finished page area, 25.8
First baseline position, 3.168,
12.49–12.51
Effects with Lock to Baseline Grid,
12.52
Minimum options, 12.50–12.51,
12.52
For multicolumned text boxes, 12.51
Offset value, 3.168, 12.50, 12.52
First Level index entry
Creating, 20.10–20.12
First Line indent, 3.127, 12.21, 25.8
Field, 3.129
Specifying visually, 3.130
First Point
Straight lines, 1.20, 2.8–2.10,
3.161–3.162, 8.18
Straight text paths, 1.22–1.23
Fit in Print Area check box (Print dialog box Setup tab), 3.25, 21.23,
21.27
Fit in Window command (View menu), 3.218, 5.7
Five-file format, 14.6
Flex Space Width, 25.8
Setting preferences for, 3.70
Flip, 25.8
Flipping
Pages, for printing, 3.30
Pictures, 3.171, 3.149, 14.22
Shapes, 7.44–7.45
Text, 3.140, 3.166, 3.167
Text paths, 13.18
Flush left, see Left alignment (for paragraphs)
Flush right, see Right alignment (for paragraphs)
Flush Zone, 3.104–3.105, 12.19, 12.34
FOCOLTONE colors, 15.4, 15.6, 25.8
Fold marks, 25.8
Font(s), 3.120, 25.8
Anatomy diagram, 13.19
Choosing, 12.5
Crossplatform issues, 24.41
Document built with other versions of, 24.6
Downloadable, 25.7
In pictures, 11.17
Missing, 11.18
Not installed, 24.6
Printing, 11.16
Replacing, 3.234–3.235, 11.16–11.18
Size
Displayed in points, 3.58
Troubleshooting, 22.7, 22.12
Unavailable, 24.13
Unknown, 11.18
Usage, 3.234–3.235, 11.16–11.18
Font field in Measurements palette, accessing, 12.5
Font metrics
Possible differences between
Windows 95/NT and Mac OS versions, 24.41
Font drop-down lists (Find/Change palette), 11.14
Font submenu (Style menu), 3.120
Font substitution, 11.18
Foot and inch marks
Entering straight quotes for, 3.52,
11.8
Footer, 25.8
Force Down pointer
+, 10.12–10.14,
10.20, 10.33
Force Left pointer
-, 10.12–10.14,
10.20, 10.33
Force Right pointer
_, 10.12–10.14,
10.20, 10.33
Forced alignment (justification)(for paragraphs), 3.126, 3.130–3.131,
12.19–12.20, 12.32–12.33, 25.8
Formats command (Style menu),
3.119, 3.128
Formats tab (Paragraph Attributes dialog box), 3.129
Formatting
Master pages, 10.9
Four-color process, 25.9
FPO (For Position Only), 25.9
Fragmentation of data, 22.8–22.9
Frame(s), 3.172–3.174, 7.20–7.28,
15.19–15.20, 25.9
Applying color and shade to, 7.21,
15.19–15.20, 15.22–15.23
Creating custom styles, 7.22–7.28
Editing, 7.22
Error messages, 24.14–24.15
Inside or outside, 3.59, 3.172
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 11
Frame(s), continued
Printing, 7.20
Suppressing printout, 22.13
Trapping, 2.22, 16.19–16.20
Width
Displayed in points, 3.58
Specifying, 3.173, 15.20
Frame tab (Modify dialog box),
3.172–3.174
Framing drop-down list (Document
Preferences dialog box General tab), 3.59
Freehand, 25.9
Freehand tools, 1.26–1.27
Box tools
ƒ, Ô, 7.4, 7.7, 7.40
Line tool
†, 8.4, 8.6, 8.7
Text-Path tool
˜, 13.17
From Left, From Right fields
(Paragraph Attributes dialog box
Rules tab), 3.137–3.138
Full Resolution TIFF Output check box (Print dialog box Options tab),
3.31, 21.16
G
Gap color and shade
Applying to
Frames, 3.174, 7.21, 15.20
Lines, 3.164, 8.24–8.25
General tab
Document Preferences dialog box,
3.57–3.64
Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box, 3.82–3.84
Get Picture command (File menu),
3.11–3.12, 14.39
Paths maintained across platforms,
24.41–24.42
Get Text command (File menu),
3.10–3.11, 11.6–11.7
GIF (Graphics Interchange Format),
3.11, 3.142, 14.6, 14.8
Go to Page dialog box, 3.214, 5.4
Go-to-page pop-up menu, 5.6, 10.8
Graphic(s), 25.9
Crossplatform issues, 24.41–24.42
See also Picture(s)
Graphic previews, reimporting, 22.5
Gray TIFFs drop-down list
(Application Preferences dialog box Display tab), 3.50
Grayscale, 25.9
Applying color to, 15.19
Converting to halftone, 14.28
Importing as line art, 14.10
Greek Below field (Document
Preferences dialog box General tab), 3.63, 5.14
Greek Pictures check box (Document
Preferences dialog box General tab), 3.63, 5.14, 14.11
Greeking, 14.11, 25.9
Specifying, 5.14
Grid, see Baseline grid
Group(s), 25.9
Measurements palette for, 2.10
Modifying, 9.13
Modifying items within, 9.13
Moving items within, 3.187, 9.12
Moving with stacking order commands, 9.11
Tab options available for (Modify dialog box), 3.154
Group command (Item menu),
3.186–3.187
Grouping items, 3.186–3.187,
9.12–9.13
Error message, 24.11
Guide(s)
Aligning items with, 3.219
Colors, 3.50
Displaying, 3.219
In front of or behind items, 3.60,
3.219, 5.10
Only at or above current view percentage, 5.12
Preferences, 5.10
Using, 5.10–5.13
See also Page guides
Guide Colors area (Application
Preferences dialog box Display tab), 3.50
Guides drop-down list (Document
Preferences dialog box General tab), 3.60, 5.10
Gutter, 25.9
Width, 3.166, 3.211, 6.4, 10.4, 10.28,
10.29
H
H&J drop-down list (Paragraph Attri-
butes dialog box Formats tab),
3.131
H&Js (hyphenation and justification specifications)
Appending, 3.100, 12.35–12.36
Applying, 12.34
Creating, 12.30–12.34
Editing, duplicating, and deleting,
12.35
Resolving conflicts, 12.36–12.37
Standard, 3.98, 12.30
26. 12 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
H&Js command (Edit menu),
3.98–3.99, 25.9
H&Js dialog box, 3.98–3.100
Hairline(s), 25.9
Printing, 3.151, 8.23, 13.25
Halftone, 25.9
Halftone command (Style menu),
3.147
Halftone dots, 21.30–21.34
Halftone frequency, 14.27
Halftone drop-down list
Edit Color dialog box, 3.93–3.94,
15.15
Print dialog box Output tab,
3.27–3.28, 21.9–21.11
Halftone screen(s), 25.9
Applying to pictures, 14.27–14.28
Specifications
Angle, 3.148, 14.27
Frequency, 14.27, 21.32
Pattern (function), 3.148, 14.27,
21.11
Halftoning drop-down list (Print dialog box Output tab), 3.25, 21.9
Handles, 25.9
Hanging cap, 25.9
Hanging indent, 25.9
Creating, 12.20
Hard drive, troubleshooting possible problems, 22.8–22.9
Header, 25.9
Hexachrome Coated and Hexachrome
Uncoated, 3.91
Hidden items, activating, 9.10
Hide commands, see Show/Hide commands
Highlight, 25.9
High-resolution printer, see Imagesetter
Horizontal Measure, Vertical
Measure drop-down lists
(Document Preferences dialog box
General tab), 3.57–3.58, 5.11
Horizontal Offset field (Step and
Repeat dialog box), 3.185–3.186,
9.14–9.16
Horizontal/Vertical Scale command
(Style menu), 3.123, 25.9
Horizontal/vertical scaling, applying to text, 12.9
HPGL (Hewlett-Packard Graphics
Language), 25.10
HSB, 25.10
HSB color model, 3.90, 15.12
Hue, 15.12
Hyphen(s)
Discretionary, 3.232–3.233, 12.31
Hyphenation, 3.67, 25.10
Algorithm, 3.67, 12.37
Automatic, 25.2–25.3
Compound words, 12.38
Criteria, 3.232
In multilingual documents
(QuarkXPress Passport),
23.9–23.10
Preventing, 12.32
Hyphenation and justification, controlling, 12.30–12.38
See also H&Js
Hyphenation exceptions, 3.232–3.234,
12.30, 12.34, 25.10
Changes saved, 4.11
List, creating
For active document, 12.37–12.38
Default, 4.8–4.9
Language-specific (in QuarkXPress
Passport) 23.10
Hyphenation Method drop-down list
QuarkXPress, 3.67
QuarkXPress Passport, 23.9–23.10
Hyphenation XTensions for languages used with QuarkXPress Passport,
23.9
Error messages, 24.19, 24.22–24.23
Hyphenation Zone, 3.102, 12.31,
12.32, 25.10
Hyphens in a Row drop-down list and field (Edit Hyphenation &
Justification dialog box), 3.102,
12.31, 12.32
I
I-beam pointer
I, 1.10–1.11, 11.3
Icon, displaying as, 3.38–3.39,
3.42–3.43, 14.12
Ignore Attributes check box
(Find/Change palette), 3.45, 11.10,
11.12–11.15
Ignore Case check box (Find/Change palette), 3.45, 11.10
Ignore White check box (Document
Preferences dialog box Trapping tab), 3.78, 16.10–16.11
Imagesetter, 25.10
Paper height, 21.6, 21.23
Paper width, 21.6, 21.22
Specifying setup, 21.22–21.23
Import, 25.10
Import indicator (for pictures), 14.9
Import/export filter(s), 3.11, 4.14,
11.6–11.8, 14.9, 25.10
Importing
Pictures, 3.11–3.12, 4.14, 14.9–14.12
Text, 3.10–3.11, 4.14
Imposition, 25.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 13
Include Images option (OPI dropdown list), 3.17, 3.31, 14.15, 21.15
Include Style Sheets check box (Get
Text dialog box), 3.10–3.11, 11.7,
24.28
Incremental leading, 3.65, 12.22, 25.10
See also Auto leading and Leading
Indent(s), 25.10
Specifying, 12.20–12.21
Visually, 3.130, 3.133
Indent Here character, 12.20, 13.21,
25.10
Independent Traps option, 16.15
Indeterminate color, 2.23, 25.10
Trapping to, 3.76, 15.22, 16.7
Indeterminate field (General
Preferences dialog box Trapping tab), 3.76
Index(es)
Building, 18.18, 20.19–20.21, 20.23
Comparing two versions, 20.21
Cross-references
Creating, 20.14–20.16
Punctuation for, 20.14
Style sheets for, 20.14
Types of, 20.14–20.16
Editing final, 20.22–20.23
Entries, 20.4
Creating, 20.10–20.13
Deleting, 20.7, 20.17–20.18
Editing, 20.7, 20.17–20.18
Overriding alphabetical indexing,
20.11
Local formatting, applying, 20.23
Marker color, specifying, 20.9
Nested vs. run-in, 20.10, 20.21
Preferences, 20.9, 20.19–20.20
Punctuation for, 20.19–20.20
Index(es), continued
Rebuilding, 20.20, 20.22–20.23
Style sheets and master pages for,
20.21
Index markers, 20.9
Index palette, 20.4–20.18, 25.10
Index Preferences dialog box, 20.9,
20.19–20.20
Index XTensions software, installing and using, 20.3
Indexing
Same word multiple times, 20.11
Information area
Clipping tab, 14.30
Runaround tab, 13.10
Initial caps, 25.10
Creating, 13.21–13.23
Drop caps, automatic, 13.21–13.22
Raised, 13.22–13.23
Using anchored boxes, 13.23
Kerning, 13.23
Insert Object command (Edit menu),
3.42, 3.236, 14.12
Insert Object dialog box, 3.42–3.43,
14.12
Insert Pages dialog box, 10.17, 10.24
Inserted pages
Format for, 10.24
Inserting
Pages, 3.206, 10.9, 10.17
For text overflow, 10.23–10.24
Insertion point, see Text Insertion point
Installed Language (QuarkXPress
Passport), 23.3
Adding, 23.4
Removing, 23.4
Instances field (Check Story dialog box), 3.228
Intact Chain icon u, 3.59, 3.207,
10.21
Inter ¶ Max value (Modify dialog box
Text tab), 12.53–12.54
Interactive tab (Application
Preferences dialog box), 3.52–3.54
Interactive text resizing, 25.10
Intercharacter space, see Character space
Interface, QuarkXPress, xxx–xxxv
Intersection (merge option), 3.189,
7.33, 25.10
Invert check box
Clipping tab, 3.180, 14.34, 14.35
Runaround tab, 13.13
Invisible characters, 25.10
Displaying, 3.220
Finding and changing, 3.44, 11.11
Table, 3.44, 3.220, 11.11
Italic type style, 3.121, 12.7, 25.10
Item(s), 1.7, 9.1–9.21, 25.10
Active and inactive, 25.2
Centering active in document window, 3.218
Copying, 9.5–9.6
Between documents, 10.32, 10.34
Cutting, 9.5–9.6
Deleting, 9.7
Dragging, 1.7
Duplicating and repeating, 9.14–9.16
Grouping, 9.12–9.13
Hidden, activating, 9.10
Locking and unlocking, 3.188, 9.9
Merged, contents of, 7.33
Moving, 9.4
Pasting, 9.5–9.6
26. 14 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Item(s), continued
Reshaping, 9.4
Anchored, 13.29
Resizing, 1.7, 9.4
Anchored, 13.29
Rotating, 3.157, 9.20–9.21
Selecting, 9.3
Skewing, 3.157, 9.20–9.21
Spacing and aligning, 9.17–9.19
Stacking order, controlling, 9.10–9.11
Undoing and redoing last action performed on, 9.8
Item change, 25.10
Item Coordinates drop-down list
(Document Preferences dialog box
General tab), 3.60, 5.12
Item menu, 3.153–3.204
Item option
Clipping path option, 14.30, 14.37
Runaround type, 3.182, 13.8
Item tool e, xxv, 1.5, 1.7–1.10
Selecting items with, 9.3
Item-specific trapping
Specifying, 16.4, 16.16–16.20
J
Join Endpoints (merge option),
3.189–3.190
JPEG (.JPG) picture file format, 3.11,
3.142, 14.6, 14.8
Jump lines, 10.26, 25.11
Justification, 25.11
Justification Method area (Edit
Hyphenation & Justification dialog box), 3.103, 12.32–12.33
Justified alignment (for paragraphs),
3.126, 3.130–3.131, 12.19–12.20,
12.32–12.33
Justified vertical alignment,
3.168–3.169, 12.51–12.53, 12.54
Effects with Lock to Baseline Grid,
12.50, 12.54
K
Keep Changes option, 10.6, 10.10
Keep Document Settings button
(Nonmatching Preferences dialog box), 4.11–4.12, 4.18–4.21
Keep Lines Together feature, 3.132,
12.28–12.29, 13.26
Keep with Next ¶ feature, 3.132,
12.28–12.29
Kern command (Style menu), 3.123
Kerning, 3.123, 12.13–12.16, 25.11
Accuracy, checking for, 12.13
Automatic, 3.245, 12.15
Icons
N, 12.14
With initial caps, 13.23
Keyboard commands for, 12.14
Specifying, 12.13–12.16
Kerning pair, 25.11
Kerning table(s), 25.11
Changes saved, 4.11
Editing, 3.245–3.247, 4.8,
12.15–12.16
Importing and exporting, 3.247
Kerning value(s), 3.245–3.247, 25.11
Keyboard
Incompatible with this version of
QuarkXPress, 24.17
Keyboard command(s), xxx, 25.11
Alignment, 12.20
Baseline shift, 12.10
Document navigation, 5.5
Font size, 12.6
Horizontal/vertical scaling, 12.9
Item, resizing, and scaling contents,
1.8
Kerning, 12.14
Leading, 12.24
Line width, 8.24
Nudging
Boxes, 7.19
Lines, 8.16–8.17, 8.20
Pictures
Positioning in boxes, 14.17
Resizing, 14.18–14.19
QuarkXPress Passport, 23.6
Reshaping Bézier lines, 8.14–8.15
Spelling, checking, 11.21
Text, editing, 11.5
Tool palette and tools, 1.3–1.6
Tracking, 12.17
Type styles, 12.7
Keyboard equivalents for style sheets,
3.82, 3.84, 12.40
Kilobyte, 25.11
Knockout (trapping option), 16.4,
16.5, 25.11
Knockout All trapping option, 3.74,
16.7–16.8
Choosing when trapping is not required, 21.3
Knockout Limit field (Document
Preferences dialog box Trapping tab), 3.76, 16.10
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 15
L
LAB color model, 3.90, 15.12–15.13
Landscape orientation, 3.19, 3.25,
10.4, 21.8, 21.23
Language files (QuarkXPress Passport),
23.4
Not present in QuarkXPress folder,
24.19
Language drop-down list
(QuarkXPress Passport), 23.6
Laser printer, 25.11
Last Point
Straight lines, 1.20, 2.8–2.10,
3.161–3.162, 8.18
Straight text paths, 1.22
Layout tools, 5.1–5.14
Leader, 25.11
Leading, 3.127–3.128, 25.11
Absolute, 3.127, 12.22, 25.2
With raised initial caps, 13.22
Anchored items and, 13.27–13.28
Auto, 3.64–3.65, 3.128, 12.22–12.23,
25.2
Incremental, 3.65, 3.127–3.128,
12.22
Percentage-based, 3.65,
3.127–3.128, 25.14
Keyboard commands for, 12.24
Modes, 3.65–3.66, 3.127, 12.22
Specifying, 12.22–12.24
With raised initial caps, 13.22
Values displayed in points, 12.23
Leading command (Style menu),
3.127–3.128
Leading drop-down list (Paragraph
Attributes dialog box Formats tab),
3.130
Leading Mode drop-down list
(Document Preferences dialog box
Paragraph tab), 3.65–3.66
Leaks, 16.2, 25.11
Left alignment (for paragraphs), 3.126,
3.130, 12.19–12.20, 25.11
Left Indent, 3.127, 12.21, 25.11
Field, 3.129
Specifying visually, 3.130
Left page icon
1, 10.12–10.13, 10.20
Letter space, see Character space
Level drop-down list (Index palette),
20.5
Level Styles drop-down list (Build
Index dialog box), 20.21
Library (libraries), 17.1–17.10, 25.11
Candidates for, 17.6
Closing periodically to save, 17.10
Compatibility of QuarkXPress and
QuarkXPress Passport, 17.4, 23.13
Creating new, 17.3
Entries
Adding, 17.5
Displaying by label, 17.9
Labeling, 17.8
Maximum number, 17.5, 17.8
Moving from one to another, 17.7
Rearranging within, 17.7
Replacing, 17.7
Removing, 17.7
Retrieving, 17.6
Files created in QuarkXPress for Mac
OS not openable in QuarkXPress for Windows, 24.18
Navigating within, 17.7
Opening, 17.4
Saving, 17.10
Library (libraries), continued
Templates vs., 17.5
See also Library palettes
Library palettes, 17.3, 17.4
Moving, 17.4
Resizing, 17.7
See also Library (libraries)
Library pointer l, 17.5
Limitcheck errors, 22.12–22.13
Line(s), 8.1–8.25, 25.11
Anchoring in text, 13.27–13.29
Applying styles, 3.160, 3.150,
8.21–8.25
Color and shade, 15.28–15.29
Constraining
To original angle, 8.7
To 0°, 45°, or 90° angles, 8.4, 8.7
Converting
To Bézier box, 8.10
Straight to Bézier, 8.10
Creating, 8.3–8.6
Custom, 8.21
Straight, 1.20–1.21
Editing, 8.21
Measurements palette for, 2.8–2.10,
2.13
Merging with other items, 8.15
Moving, 8.16–8.20
To other documents, 8.16
Keyboard commands for, 8.17, 8.20
Preferences, specifying, 8.22
Reshaping, 8.10–8.15
Anchored, 13.29
Resizing, 8.7–8.9
Anchored, 13.29
Rotating, 1.13
26. 16 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Line(s), continued
Suppressing printout, 3.163
Trapping, 2.23, 16.18–16.20
Unanchoring anchored, 13.29
Width
Displayed in points, 3.58, 8.24
Keyboard commands for, 8.24
Specifying, 3.161, 8.23–8.24
Line art, 14.4, 25.11
Line frequency, 14.27
Line modes for straight lines, 1.20,
3.161–3.162, 8.17–8.18
Line segment(s), 7.12, 8.11
Connecting, 8.12
Curve handles and, 7.15, 8.14
Line Segment pointer
ˆ, 1.9,
7.13–7.14, 7.16–7.17, 8.12
Line style options, 3.150, 8.21
Line tab (Modify dialog box),
3.160–3.164
Applying color and shade to lines using, 15.28–15.29
Line Text-Path tool
Ò, 1.6, 1.22, 13.16
Line tool
L, 1.5, 1.20–1.21, 8.4
Resizing straight lines created with,
8.7–8.8
Link, 25.12
Link to Current Text Chain check box (Insert Pages dialog box),
3.207, 10.17, 10.24
Linking, error messages, 24.10–24.11
Linking arrow(s), 1.29, 10.25
Linking pointer
/, 1.28
Linking tool u, xxiv, 1.6, 1.28, 10.22
Keeping selected, 1.28, 10.25
Links command (Edit menu), 3.39,
14.39
Links dialog box, 3.40–3.41
Lists (in dialog boxes)
Using arrow keys to navigate, xxxii
Lists (feature), 3.105, 18.18,
19.1–19.11, 25.12
Appending, 3.107
Editing, 3.107–3.109
Flowing into a text box, 19.8
Generating in Lists palette, 19.7
Page numbers, updating, 19.8
Preparing style sheets for, 19.3
Rebuilding, 19.8, 19.10
Replacing, 19.10
Specifying, 19.4–19.6
Updating, 2.27, 19.9–19.10
For books, 2.27, 19.11
Viewing, 2.26
Lists dialog box, 3.105–3.107
Lists palette, 2.26–2.27, 25.12
Displaying, 3.223
Live Refresh button (Delayed Item
Dragging area), 3.53
Live Scroll check box (Application
Preferences dialog box Interactive tab), 1.30, 3.52, 5.6
Lock command (Item menu), 3.188,
9.9, 25.12
Lock to Baseline Grid, 3.132–3.133,
12.49
Effects with First Baseline value,
12.52
Effects with vertical alignment
Bottom, 12.54
Centered, 12.55
Justified, 12.50, 12.54
Locking and unlocking items, 3.188,
9.9
Lookup button (Check Story dialog box), 3.228
Lossy compression, 14.6
lpi (lines per inch), 14.27, 21.32–21.34,
25.12
Adjusting value, 21.30–21.35
Luminosity, 25.12
M
Mac OS computers, transferring files from Windows 95/NT computers,
24.40–24.42
Mac PICT (.PCT) picture file format,
3.11, 3.142, 14.7, 14.8
Possible problems with display or printing on Windows 95/NT,
24.41
Machine dots, 21.30–21.35
Maintain Leading check box
(Document Preferences dialog box
Paragraph tab), 3.66, 13.5
Manual text chains, 10.21, 10.25
Margin(s), 25.12
Inside and outside, 10.11
Left and right, 10.11
Margin guides, 3.211, 6.3, 6.4, 10.4,
10.11, 25.12
Changing, 5.11, 10.11
Specifying, 3.5, 5.11
Marquee pointer o, 1.9
Marquee-selecting multiple items, 9.3
Mask, 25.12
Masking, alpha channels and, 3.177,
13.10
Master chapter for a book, specifying,
18.13–18.14, 19.11
Master chapter icon M, 18.13–18.15
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 17
Master Guides dialog box,
3.210–3.211, 5.11, 10.11
Master items, 3.61, 10.9, 25.12
Adding to master page, 10.9, 10.17
Effects of changing, 3.61, 10.17
Locking, 10.9
Master page(s), xxvi, 3.216, 10.3, 25.12
Applying, 10.10
Arranging, 10.8
Checking spelling on, 3.229, 11.19
Copying existing, 10.5
Creating, 10.3–10.8
Default, 6.4, 10.3
Deleting, 10.6
Displaying, 3.216, 5.4, 10.7–10.8
Finding and changing text on,
3.44–3.45, 11.11
Formatting, 10.9
Master items and, 10.17
Naming, 10.6
Master Page Items drop-down list
(Document Preferences dialog box
General tab), 3.61
Masters check box (Find/Change palette), 3.44–3.45
Maximize button (ICON), 25.12
Maximize icon (ICON), 5.3
Measurement system(s), xxxiii, 25.12
For rulers, 3.57, 5.11
Measurements palette, xxv, 2.4–2.13,
25.12
Changes applied, 2.4
Default X and Y coordinates, 3.58
Displaying, 3.221, 7.9, 8.8
Exiting without applying changes,
2.4
Measurements palette, continued
Tabbing to fields, 2.4
Variations
For editing Bézier items, 2.10–2.11
For groups and multiple-selected items, 2.10
For item creation, 2.12–2.13
For lines, 2.8–2.10
For picture boxes, 2.6–2.7
For ruler guide placement, 2.13
For ruler origin relocation, 2.13
For text boxes, 2.5–2.6
Mechanical, 25.12
Menu(s), 25.12
Context sensitivity, xxxi
QuarkXPress, 3.1–3.247
Menu bar, 25.12
Menu title, 25.12
Merge submenu (Item menu),
3.188–3.190, 7.32, 25.12
Merged items, contents of, 7.33
Merging
Boxes, 7.32–7.36
Error message, 24.24
Grouped items, 7.34
Lines with other items, 8.15
Undoing, 7.33
Metafile, 25.12
Midpoint
Straight lines, 1.20, 2.8–2.10,
3.161–3.162, 8.18
Straight text paths, 1.22
Minimize button (ICON), 25.13
Minimize icon (ICON), 5.3
Minimum After field (Edit
Hyphenation & Justification dialog box), 3.101, 12.32
Minimum Before field (Edit
Hyphenation & Justification dialog box), 3.101, 12.32
Missing fonts warning, 6.5
Missing/Modified Pictures dialog box,
3.60
Miter drop-down list (Edit Dash dialog box), 7.25
Model drop-down list (Edit Color dialog box), 3.90
Modifier keys
For reshaping Bézier boxes, 7.17
Modify button (Document
Preferences dialog box Tool tab),
1.17, 1.19, 1.21, 1.23, 1.25, 1.26,
3.71
Modify dialog box
For an active group, 9.13
Displaying, 3.71, 7.9, 8.8
Tab options, 3.154–3.155
Moiré pattern, 3.27, 25.13
Preventing, 21.11, 21.12, 21.35
Mover pointer e, 1.7
Moving
Items, 9.4
Boxes, 7.18–7.19
Within a group, 9.12
Lines, 8.16–8.20
Pages, 3.209–3.210, 10.19–10.20
Multicolored backgrounds
Trapping QuarkXPress items to,
16.18
Multi-Ink color model, 3.90, 15.13
Multi-Ink options, 3.92
26. 18 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Multilingual documents (QuarkXPress
Passport)
Auxiliary dictionaries for, 23.8
Checking spelling in, 23.7–23.8
Paragraph style sheets in, 23.8
Saving, 23.11–23.13
Multipage spreads
Creating, 10.12–10.14
Multiple-language format, saving documents in, 23.11–23.12
Multiple-selected items, 25.13
Applying color to, 3.159
Measurements palette for, 2.10
Rotating, 9.20
Tab options available for (Modify dialog box), 3.154
Multiple-selecting
Items, 1.9
For merging, 7.32
Linked boxes, 10.21
List items, xxxii
Styles, 19.5
Pictures for printing, 3.236
PPDs, 3.242
Tools (to edit preferences), 3.71, 4.7
XTensions, 3.240, 4.14
N
Negative check box (Picture Contrast
Specifications dialog box), 3.146,
14.26
Negative command (Style menu),
3.143, 3.146, 14.26
Negative Print check box (Print dialog box Options tab), 3.30,
21.13–21.14
Nested index, 20.10, 20.21
Quick Reference, 20.24
New Book dialog box, 3.7, 18.3
New Document dialog box, 3.4–3.6,
4.3, 6.3–6.4, 10.3–10.4
Values entered used as defaults for new document, 6.4
New Features, xxii
New Library dialog box, 3.6, 17.3
New Line character l, 25.13
New/Original color display area (Edit
Color dialog box), 3.93, 15.13,
15.15–15.16
Next Box character b, 10.29
Next Box Page Number character,
10.27, 25.13
See also Current Box Page Number character and Previous Box Page
Number character
Next Column character 3, 10.29
Next Style drop-down list (Edit
Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box),
3.83, 12.40
No Style, 3.80, 3.125, 3.140, 12.45,
25.13
Noise field
Clipping tab, 3.179, 14.33
Runaround tab, 13.11
Nonbreaking space, 25.13
None, 25.13
Background color, 15.20
Box content, 7.39
Runaround type, 3.182, 13.8
Nonfacing pages
Changing to facing, 10.10
Nonmatching Preferences dialog box,
4.11–4.12, 4.18–4.21, 6.5
Nonprinting characters, see Invisible characters
Non-White Areas option
Clipping path type, 3.177–3.178,
14.32, 14.34
Best images for, 14.32
Runaround type, 13.10, 13.12
Normal character style sheet, 3.79
Applying, 3.126
Editing, 4.3
Normal paragraph style sheet, 3.79
Applying, 3.140
Editing, 4.3
Normal style sheet, 25.13
Notes and tips, xxi
Nudge, 25.13
Nudging
Boxes, keyboard commands for, 7.19
Lines, keyboard commands for, 8.17,
8.20
Pictures, keyboard commands for,
14.17
Numbering format, 25.13
Numbering pages, 10.15–10.16
O
Object (Microsoft Windows OLE function), 3.35–3.43, 14.11
Displaying as icon check box, 3.42,
14.12
Object color, 16.3, 25.13
Specifying color-specific trapping for,
16.12–16.15
Object submenu (Edit menu), 3.41
Object-oriented graphics (vector graphics), 14.3, 14.5
Offset Across and Offset Down fields
(Modify dialog box Picture tab),
3.170, 14.16
Offset field (Paragraph Attributes dialog box Rules tab), 3.138, 13.26
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 19
Offset lithography, 25.13
OLE (Object Linking and Embedding),
3.35–3.43, 7.38, 14.11, 25.13
Links not maintained across platforms, 24.41
Omit TIFF & EPS command (OPI drop-down list), 3.17, 3.31, 14.15,
21.15
Omit TIFF command (OPI drop-down list), 3.17, 3.31, 14.15, 21.15
Online addresses for Quark, Inc., 22.3
Open dialog box, 3.7, 6.5
Open paths, 7.40
Opening
Documents, 6.5
From previous versions of
QuarkXPress, 3.70, 6.5, 6.7
QuarkXPress Passport document saved in single-language format,
23.13
Templates, 6.13
Open/Save dialog box(es), xxxv, 25.13
OPI (Open Prepress Interface), 14.15,
21.24
OPI drop-down list
Print dialog box Options tab, 3.31,
21.14–21.15
Save Page as EPS dialog box, 3.17,
14.15
Options tab (Print dialog box)
Specifying settings, 3.29–3.31,
21.13–21.16
Orientation
Page, 3.19, 3.25, 6.3, 10.4, 21.8,
21.23
Origin(s), 7.19
Bézier lines, 8.20
See also Ruler origin
Origin Across and Origin Down fields
Modify dialog box Box tab,
3.155–3.156
Modify dialog box Line tab, 3.162
Orphan(s), 25.14
Controlling, 12.28–12.29
Orthogonal Line tool o, 1.6,
1.20–1.21, 8.4
Resizing straight lines created with,
8.7–8.8
Orthogonal Text-Path tool
, 1.22,
13.16
OS/2 bitmap (.BMP) picture file format, 3.11, 3.142, 14.8
Outline type style, 3.121, 12.7, 25.14
Output, 21.1–21.35
Output Request Template, 3.18–3.19
Output resolution for pictures, 3.30,
21.15
Output tab (Print dialog box) settings
Overridden by modifications to individual pictures, 14.28
Specifying, 21.8–21.13
Color separations off, 3.25–3.26,
21.8–21.9
Color separations on, 3.26–3.28,
21.9–21.13
Outset field
Clipping tab, 3.179, 14.32–14.33
Runaround tab, 13.11
Outside Edges Only check box
Clipping tab, 3.180–3.181, 14.35
Runaround tab, 13.14
Outside Paths command, 3.190,
7.36–7.37
Overflow, 12.29, 25.14
Overflow symbol t, 4.20, 9.7, 11.7,
12.29
Overlapping items, spacing and aligning, 9.18
Overprint (trapping option), 16.4,
16.18
Overprint EPS Black check box (Print dialog box Options tab), 3.31,
21.15
Overprint Limit field (Document
Preferences dialog box Trapping tab), 3.76–3.77, 3.95, 16.10, 16.18,
16.23
Overprinting, 16.5, 16.17–16.18
Oversized documents, printing,
21.25–21.27
P
Padlock pointer y, 3.188, 9.9
Page(s)
Blank, printing, 21.5
Changing facing to nonfacing, 10.10,
10.31
Changing nonfacing to facing, 10.10,
10.31
Copying between documents, 10.32
Current, 3.212
Deleting, 3.208–3.209, 10.18
Blank, 10.18
Displaying specific, 5.4
Flipping, for printing, 3.30
Inserting, 3.206, 10.17, 10.23–10.24
Moving, 3.209–3.210, 10.19–10.20,
24.8
Numbering, 3.213, 10.15–10.16
Orientation, 3.4, 3.19, 3.25, 6.3,
10.4, 21.8, 21.23
Printing, 3.21, 21.18
Saving as EPS files, 3.15, 14.13–14.15
26. 20 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Page(s), continued
Size, 25.14
Changing, 10.31
Specifying, 3.4, 10.4
Shuffling, 10.14
Specifying as beginning of section,
10.15–10.16
Page area (New Document dialog box), 3.4
Page Flip drop-down list (Print dialog box Options tab), 3.30, 21.14
Page Gap field (Print dialog box Setup tab), 3.24, 21.23
Page Grabber Hand tool
H, 1.6, 1.30,
5.4
Page guides, 3.210, 25.14
Changing positions, 3.210
Displaying in front of or behind items, 3.59
Page icons for document navigation,
5.6
Page items, troubleshooting, 22.13
Page menu, 3.205–3.216
Using commands to navigate documents, 5.4
Page number(s)
Absolute, 25.2
Specifying, 3.206, 3.208, 10.19,
14.13
Automatically updated, 3.206, 3.208,
3.209, 10.18, 10.19
Entering in fields, 3.206, 10.19,
14.13, 18.14, 18.17
Format for, 10.16
Invalid, 24.14
Suppressing for index entries, 20.12
Page Number field (document window), 5.5
Page Positioning drop-down list
(Print dialog box Setup tab),
3.24–3.25, 21.7, 21.23, 21.28
Page range
Invalid, 24.14
Not movable, 24.11
Page Range Separator
Conflict with Section Prefix,
24.23–24.24
Same character for continuous and noncontinuous pages (error message), 24.24
Page Sequence drop-down list (Print dialog box), 3.23, 21.5
Page size, 25.14
Page view, see View percentage
Pages field (Print dialog box), 3.21
Palette(s), 2.1–2.27, 25.14 (see also
names of specific palettes)
Displaying and arranging, 2.3
Reopened automatically, 4.3
Panel, 25.14
PANTONE ® colors, 3.90, 15.4–15.6,
15.6, 25.14
PANTONE Hexachrome color model,
15.5–15.6
Paper Offset field (Print dialog box
Setup tab), 21.23
Paper Size drop-down list (Print dialog box Setup tab), 3.24
Paragraph attribute(s), 25.14
Applying, 12.18
Copying from one paragraph to another, 12.18
Space before and after, 12.24
Paragraph Attributes dialog box,
12.18, 12.21, 13.21
Paragraph Language (QuarkXPress
Passport), 23.3
Default, setting, 23.4
Specifying for selected paragraphs,
23.6
Paragraph style sheet(s)
Applying, 3.140
Creating, 12.39–12.41
Finding and changing, 11.14
In multilingual documents
(QuarkXPress Passport), 23.8
See also Character style sheets and
Style sheets
Paragraph Style Sheet submenu (Style menu), 3.140
Paragraph tab (Document
Preferences dialog box), 3.64–3.67
Paste button (Paste Special dialog box), 3.37
Paste command (Edit menu), 3.35,
11.4, 14.11
Paste Link button (Paste Special dialog box), 3.37
Paste Special command (Edit menu),
3.35–3.36, 14.11
Paste Special dialog box, 3.36–3.38
Pasteboard, xxi, 25.14
Duplicated items not placed outside,
9.15–9.16
Indexed text on, 20.22
Items on after page is resized, 10.31
Pictures on, 3.236, 14.39
Using, 5.8–5.9
For bleeds, 5.9
Pasteboard Width field (Application
Preferences dialog box Interactive tab), 3.54, 5.9
Paste-up, see Mechanical
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 21
Pasting
Contents (text and pictures), 3.35
Items, 9.6
See also OLE (Object Linking and
Embedding)
Path, xxii
Path information stored with imported pictures, accessing, 13.9–13.10
“PB ” characters, 20.22
Searching for, 20.22
PCL (Printer Control Language), 25.14
PCX picture files, 14.8
Importing, 3.11
PDFs (Printer Description Files)
No longer supported, 21.3
Peeks, 16.2
Percentage-based auto leading, 3.65,
3.127–3.128, 25.14
See also Leading
PhotoCD (picture file format), 3.11,
3.142, 14.7, 14.8
Pica, 25.14
See also Point (measurement unit)
Picture(s), xxiv–xxv, 14.1–14.40, 25.14
Centering in picture box, 14.17
Contrast, applying to, 14.23–14.26
Cropping, 14.19
Crossplatform issues, 24.41–24.42
Displaying as icon, 3.38–3.39
Dragging and dropping, 7.38, 14.10,
14.39
File formats, 3.236, 14.3–14.8
Table of, 3.142, 14.8
Flipping, 3.149, 14.22
Fonts in, 3.15
Greeking, 5.14, 14.11
Picture(s), continued
Halftone screens, applying to,
14.27–14.28
Importing, 1.18, 3.11–3.12, 4.14,
7.38, 14.9–14.12
Missing, locating, 3.238, 14.38–14.40
After crossplatform transfer,
24.41–24.42
Modified, updating, 3.237–3.238,
14.40
Moving, see Positioning in box
Nudging, 14.17
On pasteboard, 3.236, 14.39
Pasting, 14.11
Paths, 3.236
For pictures in libraries, 17.6–17.7
Updating, 21.24, 24.41–24.42
Positioning in box, 3.170, 14.10,
14.16–14.17
Keyboard commands for, 14.17
Printing, setting specifications,
21.14–21.16
Resizing, 14.18–14.19
Keyboard commands for, 14.19
Rotating, 3.170–3.171, 14.20
Scaling, 3.170, 14.18–14.19
Skewing, 3.170–3.171, 14.20
Statuses, 3.237, 14.39
Suppressing printout
All pictures in document, 22.11
Picture and frame, 3.235–3.236
Picture box, 14.40, 22.13
Picture only, 3.171, 3.235–3.236,
14.40
Troubleshooting, 22.11–22.12
Updating modified, 3.237–3.238
Picture Angle field (Modify dialog box Picture tab), 3.170–3.171,
14.20
Picture Bounds
Clipping path type, 3.176–3.177,
14.30
Runaround type, 13.8
Picture box(es), 1.18–1.19, 7.3, 25.14
Measurements palette for, 2.6–2.7,
2.12
Outline color, changing, 13.9
Running text around, 13.8–13.15
Picture box tools, xxvi, 1.5, 1.6
Standard-shape, 1.18–1.19, 7.4
Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box, 3.144–3.147, 14.23–14.26
Picture file formats, 3.235, 14.3–14.8
Table of, 3.142, 14.8
Picture Halftone dialog box,
3.147–3.148, 14.27–14.28
Picture Mover pointer
H, 1.11
Picture previews, 14.7, 14.9
Picture Skew field (Modify dialog box
Picture tab), 3.170–3.171, 14.20
Picture tab (Modify dialog box),
3.169–3.172
Pixel, 14.4
Pixel depth, 14.5
Plain type style, 3.121, 11.14, 12.7
Effects of selecting, 3.48
Plates, separation vs. press, 15.3
Plates list (Print dialog box Output tab), 21.10, 21.11
Point (Bézier), 1.8–1.10, 7.6, 7.12, 8.5,
8.11, 25.14
Adding and deleting, 7.17, 8.15
Constraining to 45° angles, 7.7
26. 22 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Point (measurement unit), 3.58, 25.14
See also Pica
Point Deletion pointer v, 1.8
Point pointer
˝, 1.8, 7.13–7.14,
7.16–7.17, 8.12
Points field (Clipping tab
Information area), 14.34
Point/Segment Type submenu (Item menu), 3.200–3.204
Points/Inch field (Document
Preferences dialog box General tab), 3.61–3.62
Polygon picture box, 7.5, 25.14
Pop-out tools, 1.4, 1.6, 7.3
Adding to and removing from Tool palette, 1.3, 1.6
Portrait orientation, 3.19, 3.25, 10.4,
21.8, 21.23
PostScript, 22.10, 25.14
PostScript errors, 22.10–22.14
Reporting, 3.29, 21.13–21.14,
22.10–22.11
PostScript file, printing to, 3.30, 21.14
PostScript Printer Description file, see
PPD file(s)
PostScript Type 1 fonts
Converting to Bézier boxes, 3.126
Power and system failures
Protecting work from, 6.8–6.9
PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file(s), 3.24, 3.241–3.242, 21.3, 25.14
Choosing, 21.7
Default, 4.17
Launch time, effect on, 4.17
Managing, 4.16–4.17
Multiple-selecting, 3.242
Removing unused, 4.17
PPD Manager dialog box,
3.241–3.242, 4.17, 21.3
Changes saved, 4.10
ppi, 25.15
Preferences, 4.5–4.7, 25.15
Application, xxix
Changes saved in XPress Preferences file, 4.10–4.11
Modifying, 4.5–4.6
Document, xxix
Changes saved, 4.10–4.11
Dragging library entry into a document, effects on, 17.6
Modifying, 4.6–4.7
For guides, 5.10
Hyphenation, 3.67, 23.9
Index, 20.9, 20.19–20.20
Tool, 1.3, 3.71–3.73, 8.22, 13.7, 13.17
(see also names of specific tools)
Modifying, 4.7
Specifying color and shade, 15.19,
15.24–15.25
Trapping, 16.2, 16.4, 16.6–16.21
Document-specific, 16.11
Hierarchy, 16.4, 16.10
Typographic, 12.3–12.4
Preferences submenu (Edit menu),
3.49
Preset defaults, 25.15
See also Program defaults and Userspecified defaults
Press plates, 15.3
Preview area (Clipping tab)
Applying changes, 14.35
Preview command (View menu),
3.221
Preview images for pictures, 14.7, 14.9
Preview tab (Print dialog box), 3.32,
21.3, 21.16
Preview to QuarkXPress, xxiv
Previous Box Page Number character,
10.27, 25.15
See also Current Box Page Number character and Next Box Page
Number character
Print dialog box, 3.20–3.32, 18.16,
21.3–21.18
Print icon
¢ (Book palette), 18.16
Print settings, saving, 3.22, 4.16
Print Style drop-down list (Print dialog box), 3.21, 21.18, 21.20
Print styles, xxix
Creating and editing, 4.16, 3.118
Creating and using, 21.19–21.20
For books, 18.16
Importing, error message, 24.26
Print Styles dialog box, 3.116–3.118,
4.16
Printer
Cannot open (error message), 24.14
Printer, commercial
Consulting regarding
Bleeds, 21.8
Halftone dot types, 21.11
Hexachrome colors, 3.91–3.93
Ink-coverage problems, 3.90, 3.93
Multi-ink color model, 15.13
Trapping values, 16.4, 16.6
Printer Description Files, see PDFs
Printer Description drop-down list
(Print dialog box Setup tab), 3.24,
3.241, 21.7
Printer driver, 25.15
Printer drop-down list (Print dialog box), 3.20–3.21, 21.17
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 23
Printer font, 25.15
Printer Setup dialog box
Incorporated into Setup tab (Print dialog box), 21.3
Printing, 21.1–21.35
Back to front, 3.23, 21.5
Blank pages in a document, 3.23,
21.5
Chapters, 18.16–18.17
Collated copies of a document,
3.22–3.23, 21.5
Color separations, 21.4, 21.21
Crop marks, 3.23, 21.5
Hairlines, 3.151, 8.23
Number of copies, specifying, 3.21,
21.18
Odd-sized documents, 21.25–21.28
Pages, 3.21, 21.18
Pictures, 21.14–21.16
Registration marks, 3.23, 21.5
Selected pages, 3.21, 18.16, 21.18
Spreads, 3.22, 21.4
Thumbnails, 3.23, 21.5
Process color(s), 3.26, 3.27, 15.3, 15.7,
25.15
Process color separation, 3.26, 14.26,
15.3, 25.15
Process Trapping drop-down list
(Document Preferences dialog box
Trapping tab), 3.74–3.75, 16.8,
16.9
Program defaults, 25.15
Program Language (QuarkXPress
Passport), 23.3
Changing, 23.5
Menu option unavailable, 23.5
Specifying, 23.5
Project planning, xv
Proof, 25.15
Properties area (Default Trap information window), 2.24–2.25
Properties button (Print dialog box),
3.20–3.21, 21.17–21.18
Proportional trapping, 3.74, 16.7, 16.8
Publish and Subscribe (Mac OS feature)
Subscribe links not maintained across platforms, 24.41
Pull quote, 25.15
Punctuation space, 25.15
Q
Quark, 25.15
Quark, Inc.
Online addresses, 22.3
QuarkXPress
Compatibility with third-party products, 11.8
Customizing, 4.1–4.21
Opening QuarkXPress Passport document saved in single-language format, 23.13
Too many copies with this serial number already running, 24.22
QuarkXPress interface, xxviii–xxxiii
QuarkXPress Passport, 23.1–23.13
Keyboard commands, 23.6
Libraries, compatibility, 23.13
Saving documents, 23.11–23.13
Translated text, entering in source document, 23.7
QuarkXTensions, 4.15
Unavailable (error message), 24.18
Quotation marks
Straight (for foot and inch marks),
3.52–3.53, 11.8
Typesetter’s (smart or curly), 3.52,
25.19
Quotes area (Application Preferences dialog box Interactive tab),
3.52–3.53
.QXD file name extension for
QuarkXPress documents, 24.40
.QXT file name extension for
QuarkXPress templates, 24.40
R
Radial symmetry, creating, 7.47
Radio (option) button, xxxii
Ragged right, 25.15
Raised cap, 25.15
Raised initial caps, creating,
13.22–13.23
RAM (Random Access Memory), 25.15
Range Separators button (Print dialog box), 3.22, 21.18
Raster file format, 14.5
Raster graphic, see Bitmap graphic(s)
Read-only disk or folder (error message), 24.17
Recovering
Auto backup document, 3.55, 6.11
Auto saved document, 6.9
Redo command (Edit menu), 3.34
Reference area (Index palette), 20.5
Reflow, 6.5, 25.15
Preventing, 4.12
Registration color, 3.86, 15.9, 25.15
Registration mark (
:), 25.15
Printing, 3.23, 21.5
26. 24 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Reimporting graphic previews, 22.5
Repeat Count field (Step and Repeat dialog box), 3.185, 9.15–9.16
Repeats Every drop-down list (Edit
Dash dialog box), 7.24
Replace Existing Index check box
(Build Index dialog box), 20.21
Replace Font dialog box, 11.17
Report file (generated by Collect for
Output feature), 3.18–3.19, 21.29
Rescan button
Clipping tab, 3.175, 14.36
Runaround tab, 13.13
Reshaping items, 9.4
Boxes, 7.10–7.17
Anchored, 13.29
Lines, 8.10–8.15
Anchored, 13.29
Resident font, 25.15
Resizing items, 1.8, 9.4
Boxes, 7.8–7.9
Anchored, 13.29
Keyboard commands for, 1.8
Lines, 8.7–8.9
Anchored, 13.29
Resizing handles, 1.8–1.9, 7.8, 8.7, 8.9
Resizing pointer
#, 1.8, 7.8, 8.7, 8.9
Resizing text, visually, 12.6
Resolution, 14.4, 25.15
Affected by change in picture dimensions, 14.4
Restore icon (ICON), 5.3
Restrict to Picture Box check box
Clipping tab, 3.181, 14.35
Runaround tab, 13.14
Retract Curve Handle pointer v, 1.9
Reverse Difference (merge option),
3.189, 7.35, 25.15–25.16
Reverse drop-down list (Trap
Specifications dialog box), 3.97,
16.15
Reverse type, 12.8, 15.25, 25.16
Revert to Saved command (File menu), 3.9, 3.55, 6.6, 6.8, 6.9
Revisions of documents
Saving, 3.55, 6.10–6.11
RGB, 25.16
RGB color model, 3.90, 3.92, 15.6,
15.12
RGB image, ghosting, 14.25
Rich black, 25.16
Creating a sample, 16.24
Misregistration, likelihood of, 16.24
Trap
Applying, 16.23
Demonstration, 16.26
Right alignment (for paragraphs),
3.126, 3.130–3.131, 12.19–12.20,
25.16
Right indent, 3.127, 12.21, 25.16
Field, 3.129
Specifying visually, 3.130
Right Indent Tab character, 12.25,
25.16
Right page icon
2, 10.12, 10.13, 10.20
Right-reading, emulsion-side-down,
3.30, 21.14, 25.16
Rotation point, 1.12–1.13
Rotation pointer 9, 1.12, 9.20
Rotation tool
R, 1.5, 1.12–1.13, 9.20
Rotating
Contents
Pictures, 3.170–3.171, 14.20
Text, 3.167
Items, 3.157, 9.20–9.21
Boxes, 1.12, 7.18, 14.20
Limitations on, 9.21
Straight lines, 1.13, 9.21
Visually or numerically, 1.12
Rough (preliminary version), 25.16
Rough (printing option), 22.11, 25.16
RTF (Rich Text Format), 3.11, 25.16
Rule(s), 25.16
See also Anchored rules
Rule Above check box (Paragraph
Attributes dialog box Rules tab),
3.136–3.137, 13.24–13.26
Rule Below check box (Paragraph
Attributes dialog box Rules tab),
3.136–3.137, 13.24–13.26
Ruler(s), 3.220, 25.16
Measurement system for, 3.57–3.58,
5.11
Using, 5.10–5.13
Ruler guides, 25.16
Displaying in front of or behind items, 3.60
Positioning, 5.12–5.13
Removing, 5.13
Ruler origin, 25.16
Specifying, 5.11–5.12
Rules command (Style menu), 3.136
Rules tab (Paragraph Attributes dialog box), 3.136
Run Text Around All Sides check box
(Modify dialog box Text tab),
3.169, 13.5–13.6
Runaround, 3.181
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 25
Runaround command (Item menu),
25.16
Availability, 3.181, 13.6
Runaround path(s), 3.181–3.182,
13.8–13.15
Clipping paths and, 13.8, 14.29
Color of, changing, 13.9
Editing, 13.15
Fine-tuning, 13.10–13.13
Previewing, 13.12
Runaround tab (Modify dialog box)
Line or text path selected,
3.183–3.184
Picture box selected, 3.181–3.183
Text box or contentless box selected,
3.183
Run-in index, 20.10, 20.21
Quick Reference, 20.25
Running text around items, 13.5–13.15
Around
All sides of an item, 13.5–13.6
Contentless boxes, 13.7
Lines and text paths, 13.6–13.7
Picture boxes, 13.8–13.15
Text boxes, 13.7
Three sides of an item, 13.5, 13.6
S
Safe Mode, troubleshooting in, 22.8
Same as Clipping runaround type,
13.10
Saturation, 15.12
Save as command (File menu), 3.9,
6.6
Save as dialog box(es), xxxiii
Save command (File menu), 3.8
Save Document Position check box
(Application Preferences dialog box Save tab), 3.56
Save Page as EPS dialog box,
3.15–3.17
Save tab (Application Preferences dialog box), 3.54–3.56
Save Text command (File menu), 3.12
Saving documents, 6.6–6.7
Automatically, 6.8–6.9
With multiple languages,
23.11–23.13
Revisions, 3.55, 6.10–6.11
As templates, 6.6, 6.12–6.13
Scalable font, 25.16
Scaling, 25.16
Box contents while resizing, 7.8
Imported EPS pictures, 16.21
Pictures, 3.170, 14.18–14.19
Text, 12.9
Effect on font design, 12.9
Scan dot, 21.34
Scanned pictures, obtaining, 14.3
Scitex CT (picture file format), 3.11,
3.142, 14.8
Scope drop-down list (Index palette),
20.6, 20.11
Screen font(s), 11.16
Scroll arrows, 5.6
Scroll bars, 1.30, 25.16
Scroll boxes, 5.6
Scrolling area (Application
Preferences dialog box Interactive tab), 3.52
Section(s), 3.212, 25.16
Chapters and, 18.11–18.12
Section dialog box, 3.212–3.214
Section Prefix
Conflict with Page Range Separator,
24.23–24.24
Section Start check box (Section dialog box), 3.212
Sectioning documents, 10.15–10.16,
25.16
See-through effect, creating, 13.13
Segment, 25.16
Select, 25.16
Select All command (Edit menu),
3.39, 9.3
Select Similar Shapes button
(Document Preferences dialog box
Tool tab), 3.72
Select Similar Types button
(Document Preferences dialog box
Tool tab), 3.72
Selecting items, 9.3
Send Backward command (Item menu), 3.191, 9.10–9.11
Send to Back command (Item menu),
3.191–3.192, 9.10–9.11
Separation Characters area (Index
Preferences dialog box),
20.19–20.20
Separation plates, 15.3
Printing, 15.16
Separations check box (Print dialog box Document tab), 21.8
Serial number, too many copies with same, 24.22
Server application(s), 3.35, 3.36, 14.11
Service bureau(s), 25.16
Consulting regarding
Ink-coverage problems, 3.90, 3.93
Trapping values, 16.3
Documents, preparing for, 21.29
Set solid, 12.24, 25.17
Setup tab (Print dialog box), 3.24–3.25
Specifying settings, 21.6–21.8
For imagesetters, 21.22–21.23
26. 26 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Shade
Applying to
Boxes, 3.159, 15.19, 15.22,
15.24–15.25
Frames, 3.173, 7.21, 15.20,
15.22–15.23
Grouped or multiple-selected items,
15.25
Lines, 3.152, 3.164, 8.24–8.25
Pictures, 3.143, 3.172, 14.21–14.22,
14.24
Rules, 3.139
Text, 12.8, 15.25–15.28
Specifying as style sheet attribute,
15.26
Shade submenu
Style menu for lines, 3.152
Style menu for pictures, 3.143, 14.21
Style menu for text, 3.122
Shadow type style, 3.121, 12.7, 25.17
Shape(s), 25.17
Aligning and merging, 7.45–7.46
Creating symmetrical and smooth using Bézier Box tools, 7.40–7.47
Duplicating, 7.44
Flipping, 7.44–7.45
Shape submenu (Item menu),
3.197–3.199, 7.10, 7.17
Reshaping lines using, 8.10
Show Contents button (Delayed Item
Dragging area), 3.53
Show drop-down list (Style Sheets dialog box), customizing, 12.40
Show Tool Tips check box
(Application Preferences dialog box), 3.54
Show XTensions Manager at Startup area (Application Preferences dialog box XTensions tab), 3.56
Show/Hide commands, 3.219–3.224
Baseline Grid, 3.219
Clipboard, 3.43
Colors, 3.223
Document Layout, 3.222
Guides, 3.219, 5.10
Invisibles, 3.220
Lists, 3.224
Measurements, 3.221
Rulers, 3.220, 5.10
Style Sheets, 3.222
Tools, 3.221
Trap Information, 3.223
Shuffling pages, 10.14, 25.17
Sidebar, 25.17
Signature with invalid page name
(error message), 24.17
Single Word Justify check box (Edit
Hyphenation & Justification dialog box), 3.105, 12.19, 12.34
Single-language format, saving documents in, 23.11–23.13
Size submenu (Style menu), 3.120
Skew, 25.17
Skewing
Contents
Pictures, 3.170–3.171, 14.20
Text, 3.167
Items, 3.157, 9.20–9.21
Boxes, 7.18
Small Caps type style, 3.121, 12.7,
25.17
Setting preferences for, 3.69
Smallest Word field (Edit
Hyphenation & Justification dialog box), 3.101, 12.31
Smart Quotes check box (Application
Preferences dialog box Interactive tab), 3.52
Smooth point(s), 3.202, 7.12, 8.11,
25.17
Changing to corner point, 1.9
Creating, 1.24, 1.25
Smooth shapes
Drawing with Bézier Box tools,
7.40–7.47
Smoothing, 25.17
Smoothness field
Clipping tab, 3.179–3.180,
14.33–14.34, 14.37
Runaround tab, 13.11
Snap Distance field (Document
Preferences dialog box General tab), 3.62, 3.220, 5.10
Snap to Guides command (View menu), 3.219–3.220, 5.10
Soft font, see Downloadable font
Sort As field (Index palette), 20.4–20.5
Source document, 10.32, 25.17
See also Target document
Source field (Paste Special dialog box), 3.37
Source of Trap Values area (Default
Trap information window), 2.24
Space before and after paragraphs
Not applied, 3.130
Rule, effect with, 13.26
Specifying, 12.24
Space Before/Space After fields
(Paragraph Attributes dialog box
Formats tab), 3.130, 25.17
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 27
Space/Align command (Item menu),
3.192–3.197, 7.45, 9.17–9.19, 25.17
Speed Scroll check box (Application
Preferences dialog box Interactive tab), 1.30, 3.52, 5.14
Spelling, checking, 3.226–3.231,
11.19–11.23
Keyboard commands for, 11.21
In multilingual documents
(QuarkXPress Passport), 23.7–23.8
Story, 10.21
Split submenu (Item menu), 3.190,
25.17
Splitting boxes, 3.190, 7.32, 7.36–7.37
Undoing, 7.36
Spot color(s), 15.3, 15.7, 25.17
Spot Color check box (Edit Color dialog box), 3.93–3.94, 15.15, 15.16
Spread (multipage), 25.17
Creating, 10.12–10.14
In Thumbnails view, 10.14
Maximum width, 10.14
Printing, 21.4
Spread (trapping option), 3.95, 16.3,
25.17
Stacking order, 3.191–3.192, 25.17
Controlling, 9.10–9.11
Of duplicated and repeated items,
9.14
Standard Em Space check box
(Document Preferences dialog box
Character tab), 3.70, 3.104, 12.13,
12.16, 12.33
Standard H&J specification, 3.98, 25.17
Editing, 4.3
Standard-shape picture box tools p, x, å, ∫, ç, 1.18–1.19, 7.4
Standard-shape text box tools
T, Å, ı, Ç, Î, 1.16–1.17, 7.4
Static object, 3.236
Step and Repeat dialog box, 3.184,
3.185–3.186, 9.14–9.16
Stochastic screening, 21.35
Story, 1.28, 10.21, 25.17
Straight line(s)
Converting to Bézier line, 8.10
Moving, 8.16–8.18
See also Bézier line(s) and Line(s)
Straight line tools, 1.20–1.21
Specifying preferences, 8.22
Straight quotes
For foot and inch marks, 3.53, 11.8
Straight Segment command, 3.203
Straight text-path tools
, Ò,
1.22–1.23
Strike Thru type style, 3.121, 12.7,
25.17
Stripes
Editing, 3.115–3.116
Strokes
Trapping EPS pictures with,
16.21–16.22
Style(s)
Synchronizing, 18.14–18.15
Unused, identifying and deleting,
18.12
Style menu, xxiv, 3.119–3.152 (see also
names of specific commands)
For lines, 3.150–3.152
For pictures, 3.141–3.149
For text, 3.119–3.140
Style sheets, 12.39–12.47, 25.17
Appending, 12.45–12.46
Style sheets, continued
Applying
Character style sheets, 12.44–12.45
No Style, 12.45
Paragraph style sheets, 12.44
Associating character style sheets with paragraph style sheets,
12.43–12.44
Copying text with, 12.43
Creating, 12.39–12.43
Based on existing style sheet, 12.40
Based on formatted text, 12.41
Character, 12.42–12.43
For lists, 19.3
Paragraph, 12.39–12.41
Deleting, 12.45, 12.46
Effects on list, 19.9
Duplicating, 12.45
Editing, 12.45
Finding and changing, 11.14
Keyboard equivalents for, 12.40,
12.44
Resolving conflicts, 12.46–12.47
See also Character style sheet(s) and
Paragraph style sheet(s)
Style Sheets dialog box, 3.79–3.85,
12.39–12.40
Opening, 3.78, 12.42
Style Sheets palette, 2.17–2.18,
25.17–25.18
Displaying, 12.44
Multiple paragraphs selected, 12.43
Plus sign next to style sheet name,
12.44
Styles in List list (Edit List dialog box)
Removing a style from, 19.5
Submenu, 25.18
26. 28 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Subscript type style, 3.122, 12.7, 25.18
Setting preferences for, 3.68
Suggested Hyphenation dialog box
(Utilities menu), 3.232–3.233,
12.37, 23.10
Superior type style, 3.122, 12.7, 25.18
Setting preferences for, 3.69
Superscript type style, 3.121–3.122,
12.7, 25.18
Setting preferences for, 3.68
Suppressing page numbers for index entries, 20.12
Suppressing printout, 3.158
All pictures in document, 22.11
Lines, 3.163
Picture, 3.235–3.236
Picture box, 14.40, 22.13
Picture only, 3.171, 3.235–3.236,
14.40
Text paths, 3.163
Suspect Word field (Check Story dialog box), 3.227–3.228
Swatchbook options, 3.93
SWOP (Specifications for Web-Offset
Publications) process inks, 15.4
Symbol font character, keyboard command for entering, 12.5
Symmetrical point(s), 3.202, 7.12,
8.11, 25.18
Symmetrical shapes
Creating with Bézier Box tools,
7.40–7.47
Symmetry, radial, 7.46–7.47
Synchronize icon ›, 18.14–18.15
Synchronizing chapters and styles,
18.13–18.15
System failure, 22.5
System Language (QuarkXPress
Passport), 23.3
System menu, 25.18
System PPD Folder, 3.242
T
Tab ruler, 3.133–3.134
Tab stop(s), 3.133–3.136, 25.18
See also Tabs (paragraph)
Tabbed dialog box, 25.18
Tabbing to fields in a dialog box, xxxi,
6.3
Table of contents
Generating with Lists palette, 18.18,
19.2, 19.3
Tabs (in dialog boxes), xxx, 25.18
Tabs (paragraph), 3.133–3.136,
12.25–12.27, 25.18
Modifying and deleting, 12.27
Specifying
Incremental, 12.26
Numerically, 3.135
In style sheets, 12.27
Tabs command (Style menu), 3.133
Tabs tab (Paragraph Attributes dialog box), 3.134
Target document, 10.32, 25.18
Technical notes, 22.1–22.14
Technical support, accessing, 22.3
Template(s), 25.18
Creating document based on, 6.12
Libraries vs., 17.5
Modifying, 6.13
Opening, 6.13
Saving documents as, 6.12–6.13, 10.3
Text
Aligning
Horizontally across columns, 3.219,
12.48–12.49
On paths, 3.165, 13.18–13.20
Vertically, 12.51–12.53
Applying color and shade, 12.7–12.8,
15.25–15.28
Baseline, 12.48–12.51
Converting to Bézier boxes,
13.3–13.4
Error messages, 24.24, 24.25
Copying, 11.4
Cutting, 11.4
Deleting, 11.5
Editing, 11.3–11.5
Keyboard commands for, 11.5
Entering, 7.38, 11.3
Exporting, 4.14, 11.7–11.8
Finding and changing, 11.9–11.11
Flipping, 3.140, 3.166, 3.167
Greeking, 5.14
Highlighting, 11.3, 11.4, 11.5
Importing, 3.10–3.11, 4.14, 11.5,
11.6–11.7
Inset, 12.55
Keyboard commands for editing,
11.5
Orientation options, 3.165,
13.18–13.19
Overflow, 10.25, 12.29
Pasting, 11.4
Positioning
On paths, 3.165, 13.18–13.20
In text boxes, 12.48–12.55
Reflow, 6.5
Preventing, 4.12
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 29
Text, continued
Resizing visually, 12.6
Rotating, 3.167
Running around items, 13.5–13.15
Saved in graphic format, 14.6
Skewing, 3.167
Trapping, 3.75, 16.17
Text Angle field (Modify dialog box
Text tab), 3.167
Text box(es), 7.3, 25.18
Converting to text path, 7.39
Dividing into columns, 10.29
Measurements palette for, 2.5–2.6,
2.12
Positioning text in, 12.48–12.55
Removing from text chain, 3.186,
9.7, 10.25
Tool preferences, 1.17
Text Box tool
T, 1.5
See also Standard-shape text box tools
Text chain(s), 1.28, 25.18
Automatic, 10.21
Copying a text box in, 9.6
Manual, 10.21, 10.25
Removing a text box from, 1.29, 9.6,
9.7, 10.25
Text file(s), 25.18
Importing, 3.10–3.11, 4.14
Text flow, updating, 3.71, 6.5
Text Insertion bar i, 1.10–1.11, 11.3,
25.18
Text Insertion point, 11.3, 11.5, 25.18
Text inset, 3.129, 3.167, 12.55, 25.18
Text orientation options, 3.165,
13.18–13.19
Text path(s), 7.40, 25.18
Creating, 13.16–13.20
Straight, 1.22–1.23
Constraining to 0°, 45°, or 90° angles, 13.16
Converting to text boxes, 7.39
Flipping, 13.18
Manipulated same as lines, 13.17
Selecting with Content tool vs. Item tool, 13.19
Straight, 1.22–1.23
Suppressing printout, 3.163
Tool preferences, presetting, 13.17
Text Path tab (Modify dialog box),
3.164–3.166
Text Skew field (Modify dialog box
Text tab), 3.167
Text tab (Modify dialog box),
3.166–3.169
Text to Box command (Style menu),
3.126, 13.3–13.4, 25.18
Anchoring converted boxes, 13.3
Text wrap, see Runaround
Text-Path tools, 1.22–1.27, 13.16–13.17
Preferences for, 13.17
Straight
, Ò, 1.22–1.23
Threshold field
Clipping tab, 3.180, 14.32, 14.34
Runaround tab, 13.12–13.13
Thumbnail(s), 25.18
Printing, 3.23, 21.5
Thumbnails command (View menu),
3.218
Thumbnails view, 5.7
Creating spreads in, 10.14
Editing pages in, 10.20, 10.34
Thumbnails view, continued
Keyboard shortcut, 10.20
Moving document pages in, 5.7,
10.19–10.20, 10.33–10.34
Tick mark, 25.18
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)(.TIF),
3.11, 3.142, 14.7, 14.8, 25.19
Crossplatform transfer, 24.42
Embedded paths and alpha channels,
14.31
Image resolution, 14.11
Importing high-resolution 1-bit,
14.24
Line art pictures, 14.24
Not readable, 24.16
Tiling, 25.19
Documents
On-screen, 5.3
When printing, 3.23, 21.6,
21.25–21.26
Shapes, 7.43–7.44
Tips, xxi
Tool(s), 1.1–1.30
Keeping selected, 1.17, 1.19, 1.21,
1.23, 1.25, 1.27, 1.28, 1.29, 7.4,
8.4 (see also names of specific tools)
Keyboard commands, 1.4
Names, displaying, 3.54
Pop-out, 1.4
Reverting to previous, 1.17, 1.19,
1.21, 1.23, 1.25, 1.27, 1.28, 1.29
Selecting, 1.3
Tool palette, 1.3–1.6, 25.19
Customizing, 1.4
Default, 1.5–1.6
Displaying, 1.3
Hiding, 1.3
Keyboard commands, 1.4
26. 30 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
Tool preferences, 1.3, 3.71–3.73
Color and shade, 15.19, 15.24–15.25
Picture box, 1.19
Runaround, 13.7
Text box, 1.17
Text path, 13.17
See also names of specific tools
Tool tab (Document Preferences dialog box), 1.14, 1.17, 1.19, 1.20,
1.23, 1.24–1.25, 1.26, 3.71–3.73
Top vertical alignment, 3.169,
12.51–12.52
TOYO colors, 3.90, 3.91, 3.93, 15.5,
15.6, 25.19
Track command (Style menu),
3.123–3.124
Tracking, 3.123–3.124, 12.13,
12.16–12.17, 25.19
For copyfitting, 12.16
Keyboard commands for, 12.17
Tracking Edit dialog box, 3.243, 25.19
Tracking tables
Changes saved, 4.11
Editing, 3.243–3.244, 4.8–4.9, 12.17
Tracking Values dialog box, 3.243
Transferring files between platforms,
24.40–24.42
Transparent boxes, 15.20
Trap Information palette, 2.21–2.25,
25.19
Default Trap information window,
2.23–2.25
Displaying, 3.223
Using, 16.16–16.21
See also Trapping
Trap drop-down list (Trap
Specifications dialog box),
3.95–3.96
Trap Specifications dialog box,
3.94–3.97, 16.12–16.16
Trapping, 16.1–16.26, 25.19
Boxes, 2.21–2.22
Consulting service bureau and printer to determine values, 16.3, 16.5
EPS files, 14.14
EPS pictures to background colors,
16.22–16.23
Frames, 2.22
Guidelines, 16.5
Lines, 2.23
Not required, 21.3
Preferences, 3.73–3.78, 16.2, 16.4,
16.6–16.21
Document-specific, 16.11
Hierarchy, 3.94, 16.4, 16.10
Rich black, 16.24–16.26
Small items, 3.75
Specifying
Color-specific, 16.4, 16.12–16.16
Default, 16.4, 16.6–16.11
Item-specific, 16.4, 16.17–16.21
Text, 3.75, 16.17
Turning off, 21.3
Understanding, 16.3–16.4
Trapping Method drop-down list
(Document Preferences dialog box
Trapping tab), 3.74
Trapping tab (Document Preferences dialog box), 3.73–3.78, 16.4,
16.6–16.11
Trim, 25.19
Troubleshooting, 22.3–22.14
Application-based problems,
22.6–22.7
Document-based problems,
22.4–22.5
Operating system problems,
22.8–22.9
PostScript errors, 22.10–22.14
True negative, 25.19
TrueType fonts
Converting to Bézier boxes, 3.126, 13.4
TRUMATCH colors, 15.4, 15.6, 25.19
Two-fold, 25.19
Tutorial, xxii
Type family, 25.19
Type style(s), 3.121–3.122, 25.19
Choosing, 12.6–12.7
Customizing, 12.7
Mutually exclusive, 3.49, 3.122,
3.125, 11.14
Removing, 12.7
Type Style buttons (Find/Change palette), 11.14–11.15
Type Style submenu (Style menu),
3.121–3.122
Typeface(s), 3.243, 25.19
Typesetter’s (smart or curly) quotation marks, 3.52–3.53, 25.19
Typesetting mode (leading method preference), 3.66, 12.22
Typographic preferences
Confirming, 12.3–12.4
Baseline grid, 12.4
Leading, 12.4
Type styles, 12.4
Typography, 12.1–12.55
U
Unconstrain command (Item menu),
3.187–3.188
Unconstraining grouped items, 3.64,
3.187–3.188, 9.13
Underline type style, 3.121, 12.7,
25.19
Underneath Color (Default Trap information window), 2.23
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 31
Understanding
Dpi vs. lpi, 21.30–21.35
Nonmatching preferences, 4.18–4.21
Picture file formats, 14.3–14.8
Symmetry and smoothness,
7.40–7.47
Trapping, 16.3–16.4
Undoing and redoing actions, 9.8
Undo/Redo commands (Edit menu),
3.34
Ungroup command (Item menu),
3.187
Union (merge option), 3.189, 7.32,
7.34, 7.45, 7.46, 25.19
Unlinking pointer
?, 1.29
Unlinking tool
U, xxiv, 1.6,
1.28–1.29, 10.25
Unlocking items, 3.188, 9.9
Updating
Linked objects, 3.40, 14.39
Modified pictures, 3.237–3.238, 14.40
Picture paths, 21.24
Usage
Fonts, 3.234–3.235
Pictures, 3.234–3.238, 14.38–14.40
Use XPress Preferences button
(Nonmatching Preferences dialog box, 4.11–4.12, 4.18–4.21
Previewing effects of clicking before saving changes, 4.11, 4.18, 4.20
User-Edited Path clipping path type,
3.178
User-specified defaults, 25.19
User Registration Disk, 24.21
User registration information, 24.21
Utilities menu, 3.225–3.247
V
Vector graphics (object-oriented graphics), 14.3, 14.5
Vertical alignment, 3.168–3.169, 25.19
Specifying, 12.51–12.53
Vertical centering, 25.19
Vertical Measure drop-down list
(Document Preferences dialog box
General tab), 3.57–3.58
Vertical Offset field (Step and Repeat dialog box), 3.185–3.186, 9.14–9.16
VGA Mode, troubleshooting in, 22.8
View menu, 3.217–3.224
Predefined page view options, 5.7
View Percent field (document window), 3.218, 5.7
View percentage, 1.14, 3.218, 5.7
Changing with item active, 3.218
View Scale area (Document
Preferences dialog box Tool tab),
3.73
Virus, 24.3
“VMerror,” 22.10
Troubleshooting, 22.14
Volume, locked, 24.17
W
Warning(s), xxxiii
See also Error message(s)
What’s New in QuarkXPress 4.0, xxii
White space, 25.19
Whole Word check box (Find/Change palette), 3.45, 11.10
Widow(s), 25.19
Controlling, 12.28–12.29
Width of lines, 8.23–8.24
Keyboard commands for changing,
8.24
Measured in points, 3.58, 8.24
Wild card character, 11.11
Window, 25.19
Windows bitmap (.BMP) picture file format, 3.11, 3.142, 14.8
Windows Metafile (WMF), 3.11, 3.142,
14.7, 14.8
Possible problems with display or printing pictures on Mac OS,
24.41
Windows 95/NT computers, transferring files from Mac OS computers,
24.40–24.42
Window menu, 5.3
WMF (Windows Metafile), 3.11, 3.142,
14.7, 14.8, 25.20
Word(s), unknown, 11.21
Word Count dialog box, 3.227, 3.229,
11.20
Word Processing mode (leading method preference), 3.66, 3.127,
12.22
Word space, 25.20
Word Underline type style, 3.121,
12.7, 25.20
WYSIWYG, 25.20
X
X and Y coordinates in Measurements palette, default, 3.58
x-height, 13.19, 25.20
XPress.dct, 11.19, 11.21, 11.22
XPress Preferences, 1.4, 4.19, 10.34,
25.20
Backing up, 4.9
26. 32 A Guide to QuarkXPress
Index
XPress Preferences, continued
Changes saved in file, 4.10–4.11
Differences between document and library, effects of, 17.6
Document or library with different specifications than the current file, 24.7
Inaccessible, 24.4
Incompatible with this version of
QuarkXPress, 24.18
Troubleshooting, 22.7
XPress Tags, 11.6, 11.7, 12.47,
24.27–24.39, 25.20
Codes
Character attributes, 24.32, 24.33
Paragraph attributes, 24.32,
24.34–24.36
Paragraph style sheets, 24.36–24.37
Special characters, 24.38–24.39
Entering, 24.28–24.32
Importing text saved with, 24.28
Saving text with, 24.27
XPress Tags filter, 24.27
Version, 24.28
XTensions sets, 3.239
Creating, 4.14
XTensions software, 25.20
Damaged, 24.22
Disabling unused, 4.13
Managing at launch, 4.13
Multiple-selecting, 3.240, 4.14
Quark-developed, 4.15
Running by default, 4.13
Third-party, 4.15
Troubleshooting, 22.6–22.7
Unavailable (error messages), 24.18,
24.20
XTensions Manager dialog box, 3.56,
3.238–3.240, 4.13–4.14, 11.6, 20.3
Changes saved in XPress Preferences file, 4.10
Setting preference to display at startup, 3.56
XTensions tab (Application
Preferences dialog box), 3.56
Z
Zapf Dingbats character, keyboard command for entering, 12.5
Zoom In pointer
M, 1.14
Zoom Out pointer m, 1.14
Zoom tool
Z, 1.5, 1.14–1.15, 5.7
Maximum zoom percentage, 3.51,
5.7
Preferences, 3.72, 3.73
Shortcut, 5.7
A Guide to QuarkXPress 26. 33
Q
Télécharger
Lien public mis à jour
Le lien public vers votre chat a été mis à jour. Vous pouvez afficher et gérer vos liens de chat après inscription ici.
Lien public du document
Publicité